Little Rock Police Department General Orders

Little Rock Police Department
General Orders
LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
GENERAL ORDER
G.O. 100 DEPARTMENTAL PHILOSOPHY
DATE: DISTRIBUTION: REPLACES: NUMBER:

02/07/2017 DEPARTMENTAL G. O. 100 (08/27/2009) G. O. 100
I. Departmental Mission Statement
A. The Little Rock Police Department is committed to protecting life and property through
Teamwork with the community while embracing mutual Respect and Understanding. Our mission
is to provide professional Service that is unbiased, consistent and Transparent. (T.R.U.S.T.)
B. In order to fulfill this mission, every member of the Department must continually direct his efforts
toward:
1. Realizing that the employees of our Department are the most important part of the
organization, and constantly striving to help them in their performance and development,
in the spirit of departmental cooperation.
2. Recognizing that the spirit of the Little Rock Police Department is one of helping people
and providing assistance at every opportunity.
3. Enlightening citizen attitudes toward public safety, and striving to gain community
support in the suppression of criminal activity.
4. Developing leadership throughout the Department in order to effectively utilize allocated

resources for maximum productivity.
5. Aggressively responding to criminal activity throughout the City of Little Rock in a

manner consistent with safeguarding the rights of all citizens.
6. Consistently demanding the highest degree of integrity and professionalism from all
employees.
C. All personnel, prior to assuming sworn status, will take and subsequently abide by an Oath of
Office to enforce the laws of the City and State, and to uphold the Constitution of the United States
and the Constitution of the State of Arkansas.
II. Value Statement
Trust from the community we serve is essential for long term success. Every interaction with the public is
an opportunity to build a relationship with the community. Public safety must be a collaboration between
law enforcement and the citizens we serve. The value statement for the Department utilizing the acronym
CONNECT is as follows:
GENERAL ORDERS 100-1 LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT

G.O. 100 DEPARTMENTAL PHILOSOPHY GENERAL ORDERS
C – Committed to our community

The Little Rock Police Department is committed to our community by providing professional law
enforcement services balanced with engaging in non-law enforcement activities to enhance the quality of life
and safety for all citizens.
O – Objectivity
The Little Rock Police Department is committed to providing law enforcement services in a fair, consistent,
and unbiased manner.
N – Nurture our personnel

The Little Rock Police Department recognizes the importance of our employees and offer a multitude of
opportunities for career satisfaction and enhancement. This is accomplished through a variety of
specialized assignments, educational and promotional opportunities, and established best practices in law
enforcement training.
N – Networking
The Little Rock Police Department works tirelessly to build bridges to establish relationships with
community partners in order to provide a safe environment and enhance the quality of life.
E – Ethical treatment for all people

The Little Rock Police Department advocates awareness and acceptance of all people without bias.
C – Committed to excellence
The Little Rock Police Department is dedicated to providing outstanding service through continuous
improvement while utilizing industry best practices.
T – Trustworthy
The Little Rock Police Department seeks to ensure officers perform their duties with professionalism while
maintaining a police culture that is ethical and responsive to the community we serve.
III. The Oath of Office will be administered according to the Arkansas Constitution Article 19 section 20
A. Arkansas Statute § 21-2-205.
1. I do solemnly swear (or affirm) that I will support the Constitution of

the United States and the State of Arkansas, and that I will faithfully discharge the duties of the
office of Police Officer in and for the City of Little Rock, on which I am about to enter.
B. Signed Oaths of Office will be maintained in files located in the Office of the Chief of Police.
IV. Code of Ethics
A. Employees of the Little Rock Police Department will conduct themselves in a manner, which is consistent
with the policies and philosophies of the Little Rock Police Department. During the performance of their
duties, they will strive to project a professional image and abide by a Code of Ethics to govern their
conduct. Ethics training will be conducted biennially for all personnel by the Training Division.
1. The employee will obey all lawful orders and truthfully answer questions pertaining to all
Departmental investigations, as required by the Little Rock Police Department Rules and
Regulations.

a) Employees are required to be honest and truthful in all matters related to their
scope of employment and the operations of the Department. Untruthfulness is
defined as intentionally making a false, misleading, or untrue statement. This
requirement applies to all oral statements and written statements. Written
statements include, but are not limited to, reports of any type, and any form of
electronic communications.
b) Untruthfulness is a severe violation which is strictly prohibited and may result

in discipline up to and including termination.
B. Code of Ethics for sworn personnel is as follows;
1. As a law enforcement officer, my fundamental duty is to serve mankind, to safeguard

lives and property, to protect the innocent against deception, the weak against oppression
or intimidation, and the peaceful against violence or disorder, and to respect the
Constitutional rights of all men to liberty, equality and justice.
2. I will keep my private life unsullied, as an example to all, maintain courageous calm in
the face of danger, scorn or ridicule, develop self-restraint, and be constantly mindful of
the welfare of others. I will be honest in thought and deed in both my personal and
official life, and I will be exemplary in obeying the laws of the land and the regulations of
my department. Whatever I see or hear of a confidential nature or that which is confided
to me in my official capacity will be kept ever secret unless revelation is necessary in the
performance of my duty.
3. I will never act officiously or permit personal feelings, prejudices, animosities or

friendships to influence my decisions. With no compromise for crime and with relentless
prosecution of criminals, I will enforce the law courteously and appropriately, without
fear of favor, malice or ill will, never employing unnecessary force or violence and never
accepting gratuities.
4. I recognize the badge of my office as a symbol of public faith, and I accept it, as a public
trust to be held so long as I am true to the ethics of the police service. I will constantly
strive to achieve these objectives and ideals, dedicating myself before God to my chosen
profession of law enforcement.
C. Code of Ethics for civilian personnel is as follows;
1. Conduct themselves in their public and private activities in a manner which deserves the
respect and confidence of fellow employees and the public.
2. Realize that wrongdoing betrays the public’s confidence in public services.
3. Even the appearance of wrongdoing should be avoided.
4. Avoid conflicts of interest by refraining from participating in decisions or transactions in

which you or a family member have a financial or other material interest; make full public
disclosure of an association when involvement cannot be avoided.

G.O. 100 DEPARTMENTAL PHILOSOPHY GENERAL ORDERS
5. Not accept or solicit gifts or favors nor use the prestige of public employment for private
gain. Understand that personal gain or profit obtained by disclosing confidential
information or by use of government equipment or supplies is dishonest.
6. Understand that public service is a responsibility as well as an occupation. We should,

therefore, maintain a constructive, creative and practical attitude toward urban problems
and citizen relations.
7. Make it our duty to improve operations and productivity and use time wisely so that full
value is received for each tax dollar spent.
8. Be courteous, pleasant and tactful in our contacts with the public and fellow employees.
Courtesy builds good will that money cannot purchase.
9. Be loyal to the organization whose wages support us; speak well of and support its
policies.
D. Signed Codes of Ethics will be maintained in files located in the Office of the Chief of Police.
Revisions will be underlined and italicized.

GENERAL ORDER
G.O. 101 GOALS AND OBJECTIVES

I. Definitions
A. Goal - A relatively broad statement of the end or result that one intends ultimately to achieve. A
goal usually requires a relatively long time span to achieve and, whenever possible should be
stated in a way that permits measurement.
B. Objective - An objective is an end or result that one intends to attain in order to achieve partial
fulfillment of a goal. An objective is a subgoal or an element of a goal and, therefore, requires a
shorter time to accomplish, than does a goal. Objectives should be specific, measurable and
attainable. The objective should tie in with the attainment of its defined goal.
C. Organizational Component - A subdivision of the Department, such as a bureau, division, section,

unit, or position that is established and staffed on a full-time basis to provide a specific function.
II. Formulation of Goals and Objectives
A. In January of each year, the Department and each organizational component shall formulate and
update written goals and objectives for the upcoming year.
B. By January 15 of each year, written goals and objectives shall be submitted, through the Chain of
Command, to the respective Assistant Chief of Police for review and revision.
C. Once approved, goals and objectives shall be posted in each organizational component for view by
personnel. A copy of each component’s goals and objectives shall be forwarded to the
Accreditation Management Unit.
D. Division Commanders may assign Unit Supervisors part of the work plan, as a basis for
formulating goals and objectives. Divisional work plans will be promulgated by the Office of the
Chief of Police annually.
III. Quarterly Review of Goals and Objectives
A. For the first three-quarters of the calendar year (ending in March, June, and September),
component supervisors will submit a written evaluation of progress toward the attainment of goals
and objectives. These quarterly reviews shall be submitted, through the Chain of Command to the
respective Assistant Chief of Police by the 10th of the following month.
B. The final quarterly review, due January 10, shall include an overview of progress made towards
the attainment of goals and objectives for the entire year.
C. As objectives are fully completed, the goal(s) should be reviewed and objectives updated as
needed. New objectives shall be submitted along with the quarterly review, and posted for
personnel.
D. A copy of each component’s quarterly review shall be forwarded to the Accreditation Management
and Staff Inspections Unit.
GENERAL ORDERS 101- 1 LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT

G.O. 101 GOALS AND OBJECTIVES GENERAL ORDERS
IV. Departmental Multi-Year Plan.
A. The Administrative Services Manager, at the direction of the Chief of Police, shall prepare the
Department’s multi-year plan.
B. The multi-year plan shall include:
1. Long-term goals and operational objectives;
2. Anticipated workload and population trends;
3. Anticipated personnel levels; and,
4. Anticipated capital improvements and equipment needs.
C. The plan shall be reviewed and updated, as directed by the Chief of Police.
Additions and revisions are italicized and underlined.
LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT 101- 2 GENERAL ORDERS

GENERAL ORDER
G.O. 102 DEPARTMENT JURISDICTION

04/15/2012 DEPARTMENTAL G. O. 102 (08/27/2009) G.O. 102
I. Department Jurisdiction
A. A detailed official map, including the boundaries of the jurisdiction, may be observed in the
following locations:
1. Communications Center;
2. Downtown Division;
3. Southwest Division;
4. Northwest Division;
B. Concurrent Jurisdiction
1. The department recognizes and acknowledges that the Little Rock Police Department
shares concurrent jurisdiction with other local, state and Federal agencies. Other
departments, having jurisdiction within the City of Little Rock, include the Pulaski
County Sheriff’s Department, the Arkansas State Police and various Federal and state
agencies that derive their jurisdiction by law.
2. The Little Rock Police Department has primary jurisdiction in all incidents and motor
vehicle accidents, within the defined boundaries of the City of Little Rock. The Little
Rock Police Department has concurrent jurisdiction with the Arkansas State Police in the
investigation of motor vehicle accidents, criminal incidents and traffic enforcement on
the Interstate Highway Systems within the City. The State Police has primary
jurisdiction, but will be assisted by this department, when requested. The Arkansas
Highway Police have the authority to enforce all laws pertaining to unlawful operation of
motor vehicles over the highways of this state, giving them concurrent jurisdiction on
certain streets/highways within the City of Little Rock.
3. U.A.M.S. Police and U.A.L.R. Police are restricted to the confines of their respective
university campuses for enforcement purposes.
4. The Little Rock Police Department has concurrent jurisdiction with the Arkansas State
Capitol Police. Officers of the State Capitol Police shall have the authority to act in their
official capacities and exercise their powers anywhere within the boundaries of the State
of Arkansas. The Little Rock Police Department has concurrent jurisdiction with the
Veteran’s Administration Police, within the boundaries of the John L. McClellan
Veteran’s Administration Hospital and adjoining property. The Department also has
concurrent jurisdiction with the Federal Protection Service on the property of the Federal
Building at 700 West Capitol. The Federal Court Building located at 600 West Capitol is
the only recognized Federal Reservation, within the boundaries of the City of Little Rock.

G.O. 102 DEPARTMENT JURISDICTION GENERAL ORDERS
The Department also has concurrent jurisdiction with the United States Marshall's
Service on the property of the Federal Court Building at 600 West Capitol for
enforcement of criminal offenses.
5. The Little Rock Police Department has no jurisdiction within the City of Cammack
Village, nor does its Police Department have authority within the City of Little Rock.
6. The general exercise of law enforcement service by these departments is one of implicit
approval and cooperation. Employees of this department will offer complete
cooperation, when situations arise, where these departments must exercise their authority
within the city limits of Little Rock.
7. Inter-agency cooperation and effective law enforcement is not a solitary effort, but
requires the cooperation and interaction of many departments. The Little Rock Police
Department supports the concept and will cooperate fully with other departments in the
discharge of enforcement duties.
8. In the event of an emergency or police investigation, other departments may request the
assistance of the Little Rock Police Department. Acting within the provisions of state
law (A.C.A.§16-81-106) and Federal law, officers of the Little Rock Police Department
are authorized to cross jurisdictional lines and assist other departments.
a) In the event of an immediate emergency, officers may exercise this authority

when they can articulate the need (then or at a later time).
b) When Department assistance is otherwise requested, it may be authorized by a

Shift Commander.
c) During the course of providing assistance, members of the Little Rock Police
Department will abide by the General Orders and Rules and Regulations of the
Little Rock Police Department.
II. Other Jurisdictional Agencies
A. There are occasions when law enforcement officers from jurisdictions outside Little Rock become
involved in police actions within the City of Little Rock. The following should be considered by
Little Rock Police Department personnel when faced with these circumstances;
1. A.C.A. 16-81-106 provides that a certified law enforcement officer who is outside his or
her jurisdiction may arrest without a warrant, a person who commits an offense within
the officer’s presence or view if the offense is a felony or misdemeanor.
a) A certified law enforcement officer making an arrest shall notify the law
enforcement agency having jurisdiction where the arrest was made as soon as
practicable following the arrest.
b) The law enforcement agency having jurisdiction shall then take custody of the
person committing the offense.
B. Officers of this Department should be aware that statewide arrest powers for law enforcement
officers will be in effect only when the officer is working outside his or her jurisdiction at the

request of or with the permission of the municipal or county law enforcement agency having
jurisdiction in the locale where the officer is assisting or working by request.
C. Law enforcement agencies exercising statewide arrest powers must have a written policy on file
regulating the actions of its employees relevant to law enforcement activities outside its
jurisdiction.
D. A list of agencies that have been granted permission by the Chief of Police will be maintained by
the Office of the Chief of Police and will be provided to the front desk at Headquarters.
E. Agencies that have not complied with A.C.A. 16-18-106 should be treated as civilians without
arrest authority.
F. Should an officer of this Department respond to an incident involving an officer(s) from another
jurisdiction, an on-duty supervisor will respond to the scene to evaluate the need or necessity of
Little Rock Police Department involvement. The supervisor will contact a supervisor with the
applicable agency and advise them of the incident and the actions of the Little Rock Police
Department. The supervisor will document this contact with the other agency supervisor and will
forward through the chain of command.
Additions and revisions are italicized and underlined

GENERAL ORDER
G.O. 103 DEFINITION OF TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS

09/01/2010 DEPARTMENTAL G. O.103 (08/14/2000) G. O. 103
CALEA STANDARDS
I. Purpose
A. The purpose of this Order is to ensure a consistent application of terms and abbreviations used in
all Departmental Orders.
B. The following definitions shall be applied in all Departmental Orders:
1. Bureau – An element of the Department which is under the command of a designated

Assistant Chief of Police.
2. City – The area within the corporate limits of Little Rock.
3. Civilian employee or civilian personnel - Any non-sworn employee.
4. Commander – A sworn officer of the rank of Lieutenant or higher.
5. Demotion – The reduction of an employee from a position in a higher classification, or

rank, to a position in a lower classification or rank.
6. Department Officer or Departmental Officer - Any sworn member of the Little Rock
Police Department.
7. Division – An element of the Department which is under the command of a Captain or

person of higher rank.
8. Dismissal – The involuntary separation of an employee from City employment.
9. District – A geographical area with established boundaries assigned to a police officer.
10. Employee – Sworn police officers and civilian personnel of the Department.
11. Gender terms – Any words used in the masculine, feminine or neuter, shall be construed
as also used in another gender, where applicable.
12. General Orders – Orders issued by the Chief of Police that apply to all employees.
13. Must – Indicate that a requirement has to be completed in order to validate a particular
procedure or to comply with a particular legal requirement.
14. Non-uniformed employee - A civilian employee.
15. Non-uniformed officer - A Departmental Officer in an assignment in which a Police

Uniform is not required to be worn.
16. Off-Duty – Anytime an employee is not on-duty as defined in this Order.

G.O. 103 DEFINITION OF TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS GENERAL ORDERS
17. Officer – Any sworn member of the Little Rock Police Department.
18. Officer's Report – A detailed account of an officer’s actions during or knowledge of a

particular situation or occurrence submitted on an appropriate L.R.P.D. Form.
19. On-Duty – Anytime an employee is actively engaged in the performance of regularly

assigned duties, a special assignment for the Police Department, or involved in any
incident that requires the employee to act in the capacity of a police officer.
20. Order – A written or verbal instruction by a superior officer.
21. Patrol Division – A geographical area consisting of a specified number of patrol

districts,under the command of a Captain.
22. Police Officer - A rank of a sworn employee, unless noted otherwise in the context.
23. Policy – A generic term applied to Orders, which govern all employees.
24. Procedure – A generic term applied to Divisional Operating Procedures; may also mean
the process by which a task is accomplished.
25. Procedure Guideline – An administrative order issued by the City Manager to establish an
administrative policy for the City. (May also be referred to as The City of Little Rock
Administrative Personnel Policy and Procedure Manual.)
26. Promotion – Advancement from a lower classification to a higher classification involving

an increase in responsibility.
27. Responsibility – Denotes a duty, obligation, and the accountability that is ascribed to an
individual, who is answerable to superiors for specified actions and/or conduct.
28. Section/Shift/Watch – An element of the Department, which is under the command of a

Lieutenant. See also Shift below.
29. Senior Officer – A sworn officer with longer service in an equal rank.
30. Shall, Will and May – Shall and Will are mandatory; May is permissive.
31. Shift – A designated tour of duty.
32. Shift/Watch Commander – A Lieutenant assigned to command a specific shift/watch

within a Patrol Division.
33. Should – Indicates a certain procedure or policy is preferred to obtain a desired result.
34. Squad/Unit – An element of the Department under the supervision of a Sergeant.
35. Command Staff – The Chief of Police, the Assistant Chiefs of Police, and Captains.
36. Superior Officer – An officer of a higher rank.
37. Supervisor – An officer or civilian employee, who has supervisory classification and
responsibility for the instruction and direction of a subordinate’s work.
LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT 103- 2 GENERAL ORDERS

LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT G.O. 103 DEFINITION OF TERMS AND
ABBREVIATIONS
38. Suspension – The temporary separation of an employee from his position for disciplinary
reasons. (A suspended employee is subject to disciplinary action for his conduct during
the period of suspension.)
40. Sworn Officer or sworn Employee – An employee who has the authority to make an
arrest pursuant to Federal or State Statute, or city Ordinances.
41. Uniformed employee - A sworn employee.
42. Uniformed officer - A Departmental Officer in an assignment in which a Police uniform

is required to be worn.
C. The following abbreviations shall be applied in all Departmental Orders:
1. A.C.A. – Arkansas Code Annotated
2. A.R. – Annual Review of Departmental Orders and Procedures
3. CALEA – Commission on Accreditation for Law Enforcement Agencies
4. C.S.C.R.R. – Civil Service Commission Rules and Regulations
5. D.I.F. – Death in Family. Payroll status for officer on Funeral leave
6. E.P.A.S. – Employee Performance Appraisal System
7. F.O.P. – Fraternal Order of Police, Lodge #17, Statement of Agreement
8. I.O.D. – Injured on-duty
9. P.L. – Personnel Leave, Payroll status
10. P.P.P.M. – The City of Little Rock Administrative Personnel Policy and Procedure
Manual
11. S.I.F. – Sickness in Family, Payroll status

G. O. 104 DEPARTMENTAL ORDERS LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT

GENERAL ORDER
G. O. 104 DEPARTMENTAL ORDERS

I. General
A. Departmental written directives are operational and administrative in the form of General Orders,
Rules and Regulations, Divisional Operating Procedures, Informational Directives, Standard
Orders, and Memorandums used to clarify the purpose, policies, and objectives of the Department.
These are based on facts of law, requirements of city, state and federal governments, court
decisions and experiences of other police organizations, as well as the Little Rock Police
Department.
B. The Chief of Police has the authority to issue, modify, approve and/or rescind the Department’s
written directives and may authorize memorandums that supersede directives until revisions are
made.
C. It is the responsibility of all personnel to familiarize themselves with departmental directives and
conduct themselves accordingly.
II. Types of Written Directives
A. Little Rock Police Department Personnel are governed by two types of procedural guidelines:
1. Municipal - Guidelines mandated by order of the City Manager, City Ordinance or

Arkansas State Statute, which affect some or all city employees include:
a) Civil Service Commission Rules and Regulations.
b) City of Little Rock Administrative Personnel Policy and Procedure Manual.
c) City of Little Rock Statement of Working Agreement.
d) City of Little Rock and Fraternal Order of Police Statement of Agreement.
2. Departmental - The Little Rock Police Department guidelines for written directives are
established as follows:
a) General Orders - Written orders, issued by the Chief of Police relating to a

specific topic and detailing the policy and procedures to be followed relevant to
that topic by the Department, as a whole. Issued General Orders are intended as
long-term guiding documents and are binding until formally rescinded or
amended.

GENERAL ORDERS G. O. 104 DEPARTMENTAL ORDERS
b) Departmental Rules and Regulations - Long-term personal, professional, and

operational rules, promulgated by the Chief of Police, and approved by the Board
of Directors of the City of Little Rock, which are binding until formally rescinded
or amended. Rules and Regulations are included as a separate section in the
General Orders, and are numbered and indexed separately from General Orders.
c) Informational Directive - Written orders, issued in memorandum form by the

Chief of Police or his staff, to affected employees explaining and/or clarifying any
General Order or Divisional Operating Procedure, or relating to some specific
circumstance, situation or subject, that may or may not affect the entire
department, and does not meet the criteria for a General Order or a Divisional
Operating Procedure.
(1) Unless directed otherwise, they will be read to affected personnel,

posted on the division’s bulletin board and may be discarded 10 days
from the date of issue, as applicable.
(2) Original Informational Directives shall be maintained in the Office of

the Chief of Police, in accordance with these General Orders.
d) Divisional Operating Procedures - Written orders, issued by the Division

Commander, which govern the operations of his division. Divisional Operating
Procedures are issued to all members of the specific division. Divisional
Operating Procedures are long-term guiding documents and are binding on
divisional members, until formally rescinded or amended.
e) Standard Orders - Written and/or verbal orders or instructions issued by a

supervisor to a subordinate.
f) Special Order - A written order issued by the Chief of Police to all personnel
announcing any appointments, promotions, retirements, leaves of absence,
transfers or other similar personnel actions concerning departmental employees.
Recipients may discard Special Orders after dissemination of all pertinent
information. The Office of the Chief of Police will maintain original Special
Orders for five years, after which they may be discarded. Training Bulletin - An
instructional or informational bulletin or video addressing training matters.
g) Memorandums - Memorandums provide information, guidance or orders

concerning a particular subject or event.
III. Guidelines
A. Employees are directed to adhere to the Rules and Regulations, the General
Orders, appropriate Divisional Operating Procedures and other directives
affecting their performance and to strive to use proper judgment and discretion
in situations not specifically covered in the orders.
1. Employees should base their actions on the needs of the citizens and the
best interests of the Department.
2. Employees shall not expose a person to physical jeopardy in any degree

greater than necessary to accomplish the police mission.

B. Deviation from Departmental Orders
1. If circumstances require a deviation from established orders or procedures, it shall be

done in the best interests of the Department, with due consideration being given to the
following:
a) The necessity to deviate from established orders and procedures should rarely
occur; and,
b) Logical, reasonable, and immediate justification must be provided by the

employee.
2. When time permits, employees should obtain supervisory approval for any deviation
from orders and procedures.
3. Employees will report deviations from orders and procedures to their supervisors as soon
as possible.
C. Contradictions with Departmental Written Directives
1. If contradictions occur between the General Orders and Divisional Operating Procedures,
the General Orders will take precedence.
2. Contradictions between Law and Departmental Orders and Procedures.
a) If contradictions occur between the orders and procedures of this Department and
any provision of state or Federal law or rulings of the various courts of
jurisdiction over the City of Little Rock, such laws or judicial rulings will take
precedence over the provisions of Departmental Orders or Procedures. Officers
should be cognizant of the Department’s authority to further restrict the
provisions of such court rulings and laws within the parameters of the
Constitution of the United States and the State of Arkansas.
IV. General Orders and Divisional Operating Procedures
A. Employees must acknowledge, through electronic signature, receipt and review of all issued
General Orders, Divisional Operating Procedures, and Rules and Regulations.
B. The Accreditation Unit is responsible for coordinating and overseeing the review, modification,
formulation, and distribution of all General Orders and Divisional Operating Procedures as
directed by the Chief of Police.
1. Suggestions for new policies or revisions to existing General Orders and Divisional
Operating Procedures may be initiated/drafted by any employee or organizational
component.
a) Any such suggestion/draft will be sent through the chain of command to the
Division Commander for approval.

b) Upon approval, the Division Commander shall forward the suggestion/draft to the
Professional Standards Section for implementation of Staff Review and
solicitation of input from affected personnel, other knowledgeable organizations,
or the City Attorney, as appropriate.
2. The Accreditation Unit will format the draft and initiate the Staff Review process through
the use of the electronic policy program, to the appropriate command staff and
appropriate personnel possessing expertise in the subject matter as necessary for review
and comments.
3. Once the Staff Review process has been completed, the draft and comments will be
forwarded to the Chief of Police or appropriate Bureau Commander for final revision and
approval.
a) The Chief of Police has final authority for any changes in the General Orders.
b) The affected Bureau Commander has final authority for any changes to their
Divisional Operating Procedure.
4. Upon final approval, the General Order or Divisional Operating Procedure will be posted
in the electronic policy program.
C. All General Orders and Divisional Operating Procedures will be identified by a unique control
number and will contain:
1. A subject title.
2. An annotation indicating whether it is an original or replaces a previous directive.
3. An effective date.
4. Annotations within the text referencing applicable City Ordinances and Arkansas State
Statutes.
D. General Orders and Divisional Operating Procedures will be distributed to:
1. All affected employees.
2. City of Little Rock Personnel Department.
3. City Attorney’s Office.
4. City Manager’s Office.
5. F.O.P. Lodge 17.
6. Other agencies as directed by the Office of the Chief of Police.
E. The Accreditation Unit will:

1. Prepare General Orders for issuance to new employees as directed.
2. Maintain a file of all cancelled and previous versions of revised General Orders and
Divisional Operating Procedures. All such documents will be retained indefinitely in the
Accreditation Unit.
F. Before publishing, new, revised and rescinded General Orders, Rules and Regulations and
Divisional Operating Procedures shall be reviewed by the Professional Standards Section to ensure
compliance with all standards mandated by the Commission on Accreditation for Law
Enforcement Agencies (CALEA).
G. Divisional Operating Procedures
1. All Divisions will maintain current Divisional Operating Procedures.
a) Division Commanders shall ensure that all members of their division are issued a
copy of their Divisional Operating Procedures within 5 days of assignment to
their division. The primary means of distribution will be through the use of the
electronic policy software program.
b) Immediate Supervisors shall review all Divisional Operating Procedures upon

issue to their personnel and shall ensure each member electronically signs an
Acknowledgement of Receipt.
2. All Divisional Operating Procedures will be reviewed periodically by each unit supervisor
for deletions, revisions and/or additions.
a) Any proposed changes shall be forwarded through the Chain of Command to the
Division Commander for approval.
b) Upon approval by the Division Commander, all new or revised Divisional

Operating Procedures will be forwarded to the Accreditation Unit for review to
prevent conflict with other existing orders.
V. Accessibility
A. A printed copy of all General Orders, Rules and Regulations, and Divisional Operating Procedures
shall be maintained in an area readily accessible to all employees. The Division Commander will
assign an individual to be responsible for maintaining and updating these manuals. These areas
include but are not limited to:
1. Office of the Chief of Police.
2. Communications Division.
3. Major Crimes Division - Duty Room.
4. Downtown Division - Shift Commander’s Office.
a) Downtown Service Center.

5. Northwest Division – Shift Commanders Office.
6. Southwest Division – Shift Commander’s Office.
7. Special Investigations Division.
8. Professional Standards Section.
9. Training Division.
10. Headquarters Division.
VI. Distribution and Maintenance of Directives
A. Distribution of Written Directives
1. All written directives shall clearly list the distribution for the item.
a) All employees will be notified by email of changes to departmental directives.

All employees are required to read the directives within the stated time frame.
b) It will be the responsibility of each supervisor to ensure that all employees under
their direction have read and understood each new or revised directive, and
electronically sign for all changes by utilizing the electronic policy software
program.
2. Employees will be given training (e.g., recruit training, roll call training, In-service
training) on all General Orders and Divisional Operating Procedures.
a) Training will be administered by:
(1) The Training Division upon publication of the General Orders.
(2) Supervisors shall conduct roll call training on all newly issued or
revised directives, ensuring that all personnel under their command are
aware of the policy change.
(3) A unit supervisor upon issuance of other directives.
3. The Training Division will ensure that all recruits are issued an updated printed copy of the
General Orders/Rules and Regulations and any other required written directives while
attending the Training Academy.
4. All new employees will be trained so they are familiar with all General Orders/Rules and
Regulations.
B. Maintenance of written directives

1. All employees shall regularly check their Policy Program Inbox for additions or changes
to departmental directives.
C. Orders Custodian - Master Copies - Discrepancies
1. If any discrepancy is found between Orders, the Master Copy will be considered the
correct version and final authority.
2. The Accreditation Unit will be the custodian of the General Orders, Rules and
Regulations, Divisional Operating Procedures, and will be responsible for maintaining the
Master Copies.
3. The Training Division Commander will be the custodian of all Training Bulletins and will
be responsible for maintaining the Master Copies.
4. The Office of the Chief of Police will be the custodian of all Special Orders and
Informational Directives and will be responsible for maintaining the Master Copies.

G. O. 105 FUNCTION AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF DEPARTMENTAL UNITS LRPD

GENERAL ORDER
G. O. 105 FUNCTION AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF DEPARTMENTAL UNITS

I. Office of the Chief of Police
A. The Chief of Police has the ultimate responsibility within the Police Department for the protection of life
and property, preservation of law and order, investigation and suppression of all crimes and the
enforcement of State Laws and City Ordinances.
B. In the absence of the Chief of Police, the designated Assistant Chief of Police will assume the duties of
the Police Chief.
C. The specific responsibilities and duties of the Departmental units described herein may be expanded or
modified at any time by the Chief of Police.
D. Whenever used within Departmental Orders, the phrase “Office of the Chief of Police” shall mean only
the Chief of Police and any or all Assistant Chiefs of Police.
E. Whenever used within Departmental Orders, the title “Assistant Chief of Police” is synonymous with
Bureau Chief or Bureau Commander.
F. Whenever used within Departmental Orders, the title “Captain” is synonymous with Division
Commander.
II. The Chief of Police
A. Assistant Chief of Police – Executive Bureau
1. The Assistant Chief of Police – Executive Bureau shall report to the Chief of Police.
2. The Assistant Chief of Police – Executive Bureau shall supervise the Training Division, the
Headquarters Division, the Records and Support Division, the Professional Standards Section
and the Administrative Services Section which collectively shall comprise the Executive
Bureau.
B. Assistant Chief of Police – Field Services Bureau
1. The Assistant Chief of Police – Field Services Bureau shall report to the Chief of Police.
2. The Assistant Chief of Police – Field Services Bureau shall supervise the Downtown Division,
the Southwest Division, the Northwest Division, and the Special Operations Division which
collectively shall comprise the Field Services Bureau.

GENERAL ORDERS G. O. 105 FUNCTION AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF DEPARTMENTAL UNITS
C. Assistant Chief of Police – Investigative Bureau
1. The Assistant Chief of Police – Investigative Bureau shall report to the Chief of Police.
2. The Assistant Chief of Police – Investigative Bureau shall supervise the Special Investigations
Division, the Major Crimes Division, and the Public Affairs Section which collectively shall
comprise the Investigative Bureau.
III. Assistant Chief of Police – Executive Bureau
A. Records and Support Division
1. The Records and Support Division is under the direction of a Division Commander who shall
report to the Assistant Chief of Police - Executive Bureau.
2. The Records and Support Division is comprised of the Records Section, the Technology and
Equipment Section, and the Accreditation Unit.
a) The Records Section is under the supervision of a civilian supervisor and shall be
responsible for the following:
(1) Maintenance, dissemination, and proper coding of all records in accordance

with local, state, and federal laws.
(2) Ensuring the timely submission and control of all records in a secure, orderly,
and systematic manner.
b) The Technology and Equipment Section is under the direction of a Lieutenant and
shall be responsible for the following:
(1) Supervising the civilian Automotive/Equipment Coordinators whose

activities include the maintenance and service of all Departmental vehicles.
(2) ACIC/NCIC validations and audits section, responsible for compliance with
all ACIC/NCIC regulations.
(3) Assisting command staff in the coordination of Crime Analysis activities and
reporting.
(4) The Crime Analyst Supervisor shall be responsible for the Crime Analysts
assigned to each of the Field Services Divisions.
(5) Conducting project research analysis and compiling monthly, quarterly and
yearly reports as directed by the Chief of Police.
(6) Ensuring Departmental compliance with appropriate criminal statistics

reporting protocol.

(7) Supervising the maintenance and upgrading of computerized police records

management systems, ensuring system security and compliance with
applicable laws, rules and regulations.
(8) Serving as a liaison with the Office of Information Technology and the
Communications Center.
c) The Accreditation Unit is under the direction of a Sergeant who shall report to the
Records and Support Division Commander.
(1) The Accreditation Unit is responsible for:
(a) The management and distribution of Departmental directives.
(b) Coordinate and assists in announced and unannounced inspections

of all Departmental components to ensure compliance with all
standards mandated by the Commission on Accreditation for Law
Enforcement Agencies, Inc. (CALEA)
(c) Ensure that all CALEA compliance files are up-to-date.
(d) Serve as a liaison to the Commission on Accreditation for Law

Enforcement Agencies, Inc. (CALEA) for all accreditation matters.
(e) Provide assistance to all Departmental units to ensure clarification

and continued compliance with CALEA standards.
(f) Maintaining and assisting Staff in the research, development and

preparation of new and/or revised Departmental Orders and forms.
(g) Assist in the identification and development of new programs,

policy and procedures or acquisition of equipment to improve
performance of the Department in compliance with applicable
standards.
(h) May serve as a management tool to the Chief of Police by

conducting comprehensive review and analysis of Departmental
operations, procedures, personnel and facilities.
B. Headquarters Division
1. The Headquarters Division is under the command of a Division Commander who reports to the
Assistant Chief of Police – Executive Bureau.
2. The Headquarters Division is comprised of the Operations Support Section, the

Communications Section, and the Emergency Management Section.
a) Operations Support Section shall be under the supervision of a Lieutenant and shall be
responsible for the Warrants Unit and the Property Room.

(1) The Warrants Unit is under the direction of a Sergeant and shall be
responsible for:
(a) The overall processing of arrest warrants, court orders, and

subpoenas for the Department.
(b) The entry of accurate arrest information into the municipal court
docket.
(c) Serving as a liaison for both the court and the jail.
(d) Supervising the civilian Work Release Coordinator whose duties

include the activities of the work release program participants.
(2) The management of property in the custody of the Department under the
direction of a Sergeant.
b) The Communications Section is under the direction of a Civilian Manager who shall
report to the Headquarters Division Commander.
(1) The Communications Section is responsible for:
(a) Providing the citizens of Little Rock with a Public Safety Answering
Point for 9-1-1 and 3-1-1 communications.
(b) Dispatching field support and informational services for all public
safety agencies in the City.
(c) Maintaining all City-owned radio communications equipment at a

high level of operability.
c) Emergency Management Section
(1) The Emergency Management Section is under the direction of a Lieutenant

and shall be responsible for:
(a) Emergency Management
(b) Supervision of the Extended Leave Squad
C. The Professional Standards Section
1. The Professional Standards Section is commanded by a Lieutenant who shall report to the
a) The Professional Standards Section is comprised of the Internal Affairs Unit.
(1) The Internal Affairs Unit shall:

(a) Investigate police involved shootings as directed by the General

Orders or the Chief of Police.
(b) Record, register and control the investigation of complaints against

employees.
(c) Maintain the confidentiality of Internal Affairs investigations and

records.
(d) Initiate and/or compile Early Intervention files which have been
activated either by the IA Pro system or a supervisor.
D. Administrative Services Section
1. The Administrative Services Section is under the direction of a Civilian Supervisor who shall
report to the Assistant Chief of Police – Executive Bureau.
2. Administrative Services shall be responsible for the following:
(1) Administration of the overall budgetary activities and fiscal affairs of the
Department.
(2) Maintaining the position classification system, processing payroll records and
personnel action forms.
(3) Supervising the Financial Services Assistant, Purchasing Clerk, and Payroll
Specialist.
E. Training Division
1. The Training Division is under the direction of a Division Commander, who shall report to the
2. The Training Division is responsible for:
a) Developing and maintaining a comprehensive program of professional, technical, and

physical training for sworn and civilian members of the Department by conducting
classes and promoting training opportunities outside the Department.
b) Maintaining documentation of all training received by sworn and civilian members of

the department.
c) The recruiting of new police officer applicants.
d) Assisting the City of Little Rock Human Resources Department with the police
applicant testing process.
e) Performing background investigations of police employee applicants.
f) Conducting a comprehensive basic training program for police recruits.

g) Ensuring Departmental compliance with the Rules and Regulations of the Commission
on Law Enforcement Standards and Training.
h) Maintaining a firearms training and qualifications program, weapons inspection,

issuance of ammunition and maintenance of all Departmental shooting range
equipment.
IV. Assistant Chief of Police – Field Services Bureau
A. Field Services Divisions
1. The Downtown, Northwest and Southwest Divisions collectively comprise the Field Services
Divisions each under the direction of a Division Commander, each of whom shall report to the
Assistant Chief of Police – Field Services Bureau.
2. The Field Services Divisions are responsible for:
a) The deployment of forces consistent with the needs of the City in order to maintain
public order, provide preventive patrol, respond to calls for service and conduct
investigations of crimes and incidents to include the arrest of offenders.
b) The coordination of police activities between the various geographic areas of the City
and the other Divisions of the Department.
3. Each Field Services Division is staffed with a Special Assignments Section which consists of:
a) A Detective Unit responsible for investigating property crimes in the Division’s

geographical area.
b) A Community Policing Unit primarily responsible for addressing the concerns of

citizens in the Division’s geographical area.
4. Each Field Services Division is assigned a Crime Analyst. The Crime Analyst:
a) Performs and provides assistance in the analysis of reported crimes.
b) Provides statistical crime patterns and maps to various Departmental units and public
organizations.
c) Provides statistical information to Department staff for review and evaluation of

operations.
5. The Downtown Division is assigned the River Market Section which is under the direction of a
Lieutenant, who shall report to the Downtown Division Commander and is responsible for:
a) Patrolling in and around the River Market area.
B. Special Operations Division

1. The Special Operations Division is under the direction of a Division Commander who shall
report to the Assistant Chief of Police – Field Services Bureau.
2. The Special Operations Division is comprised of the Traffic Services Section, the Special Units
Section, the Special Events Section, and the SWAT Unit.
a) The Traffic Services Section Lieutenant, shall report to the Special Operations
Division Commander, and shall be responsible for the following units:
(1) The START Unit is responsible for selective traffic enforcement specializing
in the apprehension of alcohol and drug impaired drivers and respond to
specific citizen complaints of traffic violations.
(2) The Canine Unit is responsible for assisting in the apprehension of violent
offenders; protect officers or others from death or serious physical injury;
track suspects; locate lost or missing persons; detect the presence of
concealed narcotics or hidden instruments of crime.
(3) The Motorcycle Unit is responsible for responding to traffic complaints,

providing traffic enforcement, escorts, and traffic control during special
events.
b) The Special Units Section Lieutenant, shall report to the Special Operations Division
Commander, and shall be responsible for the following units:
(1) The SRO Unit is responsible for the administration and day to day
management of officers assigned to schools within the Little Rock School
District.
(2) The Youth Programs Unit is responsible for the supervision of the GEMS and
Our Kids Programs.
(3) Aviation is responsible for the operations of the Department’s helicopters.
c) The Special Events Section Lieutenant, shall report to the Special Operations Division
Commander, and shall be responsible for the following units:
(1) Airport Unit responsible for all law enforcement activities at the Bill and
Hillary Clinton National Airport to include the Airport Canine Unit.
(2) Special Events Unit will coordinate all City-wide or other major operational
events, will be responsible for all Hit and Run investigations, and will be the
contact point for all off-duty employment.
d) The Special Weapons and Tactics (SWAT) Unit Lieutenant, shall report to the Special
Operations Division Commander and is responsible for:
(1) SWAT Unit and all SWAT related operations.

V. The Assistant Chief of Police – Investigative Bureau
A. Major Crimes Division
1. The Major Crimes Division is under the direction of a Division Commander who shall report to
the Assistant Chief of Police – Investigative Bureau.
2. The Major Crimes Division is responsible for:
a) The follow-up investigation of crimes against persons.
b) Conducting the follow-up investigation of other serious offenses as directed.
c) Communicating with other law enforcement agencies to exchange information

pertinent to criminal activity.
d) Providing crime scene search and photographic services to all Divisions.
e) Perform polygraph examinations as directed by the Chain of Command.
B. Special Investigations Division
1. The Special Investigations Division is under the direction of a Division Commander who shall
report to the Assistant Chief of Police – Investigative Bureau.
a) The Narcotics Lieutenant, shall report to the Special Investigations Division

Commander, and is responsible for the Narcotics and Interdiction Units.
(1) The Narcotics and Interdiction Units are responsible for follow-up
investigations of narcotics information reported by other units within the
Division, other Divisions, and the public.
(2) The detection, investigation and arrest of violators for narcotics-related

offenses.
b) The Intelligence Lieutenant, shall report to the Special Investigations Division

Commander, and is responsible for the Vice Unit and the Intelligence Unit.
(1) The Vice Unit is responsible for:
(a) Follow-up investigations of vice information (e.g. gambling,

prostitution, pornography, and alcoholic beverage law violations)
reported by other Divisions and the public.
(b) The investigation of license applications for liquor permits.
(c) The detection, investigation, and arrest of violators for vice related
crimes.

(2) The Intelligence Unit is responsible for:
(a) Investigating organized crime and any other cases as directed by the
Chief of Police or Assistant Chief of Police – Investigative Bureau.
(b) The coordination of protection for dignitaries during their stay in

Little Rock.
C. Public Affairs Section
1. The Public Affairs Section is commanded by a Lieutenant who shall report to the Assistant
Chief of Police – Investigative Bureau.
a) The Public Affairs Section is comprised of Crime Stoppers, the FOI Unit, the
Neighborhood Watch and Public Affairs Coordinator, Crime Prevention, and the
Chaplains Program.
b) The Public Affairs Section is responsible for the supervision and direction of the
below listed units:
(1) The Crime Stoppers Officer is responsible for:
(a) The Crime Stoppers Program and financial oversight of its

operation.
(b) Maintaining an ongoing media relations program.
(c) Providing assistance to all Departmental units on media related

issues.
(d) Providing public information pertaining to Departmental operations

to citizens, media, and neighborhood watch organizations.
(e) Attending community meetings, quarterly patrol division meetings,

neighborhood watch meetings, and other similar events as directed
by the Chief of Police and the Public Affairs Lieutenant.
(f) Assisting the Public Affairs Lieutenant in dealing with media

requests.
(2) FOI (Freedom of Information) Unit
(a) Cataloging all FOIA requests and assisting in directing these

requests to the proper division for completion and tracking their
return within the time parameters of the FOIA law.
(3) Neighborhood Watch and Public Affairs Coordinator
(a) Overseeing the Neighborhood Watch Program.

(b) Administrator of the various Little Rock Police Department’s social

media websites.
(c) Attending community meetings, quarterly patrol division meetings,

(4) Crime Prevention Officer
(a) Presenting a multitude of crime prevention programs designed to

reduce the criminal opportunity a perpetrator desires in selecting a
victim.
(b) Working with citizens and businesses that have special needs related
to crime issues and safety concerns to help them with these issues as
directed by the Chief of Police and the Public Affairs Lieutenant.
(c) Attending community meetings, quarterly patrol division meetings,

(5) Police Chaplaincy Program
(a) The Police Chaplaincy Program is designed to assist police

employees, their families, and members of the community.
(b) A Chaplain is available on a 24-hour, 7-day a week basis.
(c) A Chaplain should be called whenever an officer determines his

services are necessary or would be of benefit to members of the
community.
(d) All contacts with a Chaplain will be held in complete confidence.
(e) A list of phone numbers and pager numbers of the Department

Chaplains will be posted by each division.
VI. Organizational Charts
A. Attached are organizational charts depicting the Department’s organizational structure and Chain of
Command.
B. All employees shall familiarize themselves with these charts for effective communication within the
Department.

Chain of Command
CHIEF OF
POLICE
ASSISTANT
CHIEF
DIVISION
COMMANDER
LIEUTENANT
SERGEANT
POLICE
OFFICER
ORGANIZATIONAL CHART
Chief of Police
Administrative
Assistant
Executive
Secretary
Investigative Field Services

Bureau Executive Bureau Bureau
Major Crimes Records & Downtown

Division Support Division Division
Special Professional Northwest

Investigations Standards Division
Division Section
Public Affairs Headquarters Southwest

Section Division Division
Special
Training Division Operations
Division
Administrative
Services
MAJOR CRIMES DIVISION
Chief of Police
Assistant Chief
Investigative
Bureau
Major Crimes
Division
Commander
Executive
Secretary
Office Assistant 1
Transcriptionists Senior File Clerk
File Clerk
Crimes Against Financial and

Homicide/Violent Apprehension
Persons Forensic
Crimes Lieutenant Lieutenant
Lieutenant Lieutenant
Crime Scene Violent Crimes

Homicide Violent Crimes Juvenile Crimes Financial Crimes
Robbery Sergeant Search Unit Apprehension
Sergeant Sergeant Sergeant Sergeant
Sergeant Sergeant
Victim Services
Detectives Detectives Detectives Detectives Detectives Specialists Officers
Supervisor
Victim Services Latent Print

Specialists Examiners
SPECIAL INVESTIGATIONS DIVISION
Chief of Police
Assistant Chief
Investigative Bureau
Special Investigations
Division Commander
Administrative Assistant
Administrative Technicians
File Clerk
Narcotics Lieutenant Intelligence/Vice Lieutenant
Interdiction Sergeant Narcotics Sergeant Intelligence Sergeant Vice Sergeant
Detectives Detective Camera System Network Coordinator Detectives
METROCK Task Force DEA Task Force ICAC Task Force

Detectives
Detective Detective Detective
DEA Task Force

ATF Task Force Detective
Detective
FBI Task Force Detective
JTTF Task Force Detective
US Marshall Task Force Detective
IRS Task Force Detective

PUBLIC AFFAIRS SECTION
Chief of Police
Assistant Chief
Investigative
Bureau
Public Affairs
Lieutenant
Neighborhood
Crime Stoppers Crime Prevention
FOI Unit Sergeants Watch and Public Chaplains
Officer Officer
Affairs Coordinator
RECORDS & SUPPORT DIVISION
Chief of Police
Assistant Chief
Executive Bureau
Records and
Support
Commander
Technology and
Accreditation Records
Equipment
Sergeant Supervisor
Lieutenant
Information
Accreditation Technology/ Senior Vehicle Crime Analyst Assistant
Systems
Officers Equipment Officer Coordinator Supervisor Supervisor
Coordinator
Downtown Records
Crime Analyst
Vehicle Compliance Office Assistants
Northwest
Coordinator Specialist
Southwest
Crime Analyst
Vehicle Transcriptionists
Downtown
Coordinator
Northwest
Crime Analyst
Vehicle
Southwest
Coodinator
PROFESSIONAL STANDARDS SECTION
Chief of Police
Assistant Chief of
Police
Executive Bureau
Professional
Standards Section
Lieutenant
Administrative
Assistant
Transcriptionist
IA Pro/Early Internal Affairs

Intervention Officer Sergeants
HEADQUARTERS DIVISION
Chief of Police
Assistant Chief
Executive Bureau
Headquarters
Division
Commander
Executive
Secretary
Operations Emergency
Communications
Support Management
Section Manager
Lieutenant Section Lieutenant
Property Room Warrants Sergeant Executive Computer Systems Extended Leave

Sergeant Secretary Specialist Personnel
Communications
Property Room Warrants/Front
Center 311 Supervisor
Technicians Desk Officers
Administrator
Emergency
0630-1430 Watch 1430-2230 Watch 2230-0630 Watch
Warrant Clerks Communications Call Takers
Supervisors Supervisors Supervisors
Trainer Supervisor
Court Emergency
Liaison/Subpoenas Call Takers Call Takers Call Takers Communications
Officer Trainers
Facility
Maintenance Dispatchers Dispatchers Dispatchers
Coordinator
TRAINING DIVISION
Chief of Police
Assistant Chief
Executive Bureau
Training Division
Commander
Executive
Secretary
Training Division
Lieutenant
Recruit Training In-Service Recruit Processing

Sergeant Sergeant Sergeant
Officers Officers Officers
Quartermaster
Officer
Minimum
Standards Officer
ADMINISTRATIVE SERVICES SECTION
Chief of Police
Assistant Chief
Executive Bureau
Financial
Services
Manager
Financial
Services Purchasing Clerk Payroll Specialist
Assistant
DOWNTOWN DIVISION
Chief of Police
Assistant Chief
Field Services
Bureau
Downtown
Division
Commander
Executive
Secretary
Special
0700-1500 1500-2300 2300-0700 River Market
Relief Lieutenant Assignments
Lieutenant Lieutenant Lieutenant Lieutenant
Lieutenant
0700-1500 1500-2300 2300-0700 Executive Evening Shift

Day Shift Sergeant
Sergeants Sergeants Sergeants Secretary Sergeant
Detective Unit Community Officers

Officers Officers Officers Officers
Sergeant Policing Sergeant Mounted Officers
Detectives Officers
NORTHWEST DIVISION
Chief of Police
Assistant Chief
Field Services
Bureau
Northwest
Division
Commander
Executive
Secretary
Special
0700-1500 1500-2300 2300-0700
Lieutenant Lieutenant Lieutenant
Lieutenant
0700-1500 1500-2300 2300-0700 Executive

Sergeants Sergeants Sergeants Secretary
Detective Unit
Sergeant
Detectives
COP Officers
SOUTHWEST DIVISION
Chief of Police
Assistant Chief
Field Services
Bureau
Southwest
Division
Commander
Executive
Secretary
Special
0700-1500 1500-2300 2300-0700
Lieutenant
0700-1500 1500-2300 2300-0700 Executive

Sergeants Sergeants Sergeants Secretary
Detective Unit
Sergeant
Detectives
COP Officers
SPECIAL OPERATIONS DIVISION
Chief of Police
Assistant Chief
Field Services Bureau
Special Operations
Division Commander
Executive Secretary
Traffic Services Special Events Special Units

SWAT Lieutenant
Aviation (Part-time)
Motorcycle Unit Airport 0530-1330 Airport 1330-2130 Airport 2130-0630 Airport Relief/K9 Special Events Youth Programs
START Sergeant K9 Sergeant SRO Sergeants Pilots Sergeants
Sergeant Sergeant Sergeant Sergeant Sergeant Sergeant Sergeant
Observers
Mechanic
Hit & Run/Special G.E.M.S. Officer

Officers Officers Officers Officers Officers Officers K9 Officers Officers Officers
Events Officers O.K. Officers
Civil Traffic Warden Civil Traffic Warden

GENERAL ORDER
G.O. 106 LINES OF AUTHORITY

05/28/2012 DEPARTMENTAL G.O. 106 (04/15/2012) G.O. 106
I. Chain of Command
A. In normal day-to-day agency operations, the Department will utilize a Chain of Command for
communications, supervision, command and direction of the employees of the Department. Each
level of supervision will carry commensurate responsibility and authority. Every employee will
be held accountable for the use or failure to use that authority either delegated to or structured for
that position.
B. Unless otherwise designated by the Chief of Police, in the absence of the Chief of Police or in
exceptional situations, command precedence shall be by order of rank and seniority in grade.
Circumstances that dictate the use of personnel of different functions engaged in a single operation
in the commanding authority shall be by order of rank and seniority in grade.
C. The precedence of rank, in descending authority will be:
1. Chief of Police;
2. Assistant Chief of Police;
3. Captain;
4. Lieutenant;
5. Sergeant;
6. Police Officer;
7. Civilian Employee;
8. Reserves; and,
9. Volunteers.
D. Civilian employees who are assigned to supervisory positions will exercise the same authority and
responsibility over their work area as that of a sworn supervisor in the same capacity.
E. Police Training Interns are civilian employees and will be assigned to a police officer or sergeant
for supervision.
1. The Training Division Commander shall be responsible for the selection, training, and
Divisional assignment of all Training Interns.

GENERAL ORDERS G.O. 106 LINES OF AUTHORITY
2. Individual Division Commanders shall designate the specific duties and work
responsibilities of Training Interns assigned to their Divisions and determine supervisory
responsibility for their activities.
F. Volunteers are citizens who offer assistance to the police department. They will be assigned to a
civilian, police officer or Sergeant for supervision.
G. Reserves are sworn voluntary personnel and will be assigned to a Sergeant for supervision.
II. Unity of Command
A. Each organizational component is under the direct command of only one supervisor.
B. Each employee is accountable to only one supervisor at any given time.
III. Lines of Authority (Subordinate to Supervisor)
A. To achieve effective direction, coordination, and control, the number of personnel under the
immediate control of a supervisor will not be excessive. The exact number of subordinates will
depend upon the nature and complexity of the assigned duties and the nature and extent of
demands upon the service unit. Each supervisory officer will continually monitor the number of
personnel being supervised by those under his command to ensure that appropriate limits are not
exceeded.
B. Supervision will decrease proportionally up through the Chain of Command to the Chief of Police
as a pyramid structure.
C. Employees will obey the lawful orders of a supervisor including any order relayed from a
supervisor by an employee of the same or lesser rank.
D. When an employee receives an order that conflicts with federal, state, or local laws or a previously
issued order, the employee will inform the supervisor of the conflict. The supervisor will then
resolve the conflict in accordance with all laws and Departmental or Divisional guidelines.
IV. Authority and Responsibility of Supervisors
A. Supervisory personnel are accountable for the performance of employees under their immediate
control.
B. Supervisors will direct their efforts toward the intelligent and efficient performance of the
functions of the Police Department and will require their subordinates to do the same.
C. Police Supervisors will:
1. Actively monitor, direct, and supervise employees of lesser rank to ensure the proper and
efficient performance of their assigned duties.
2. Assume command of any situation coming to the supervisor’s attention that requires his
involvement.

G.O. 106 LINES OF AUTHORITY LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
3. Respond to emergencies as necessary. The first supervisor on the scene of an emergency

will take charge and issue any commands necessary to bring the situation under control or
containment as quickly as possible.
4. Ensure that subordinates make all required reports promptly, accurately and completely
on proper forms.
5. Ensure proper maintenance and care of Departmental property.
6. Promptly obey orders of superiors and ensure that subordinates do the same.
7. With the exception of supervisors of the rank of sergeant, appoint a supervisor of the next
lower rank to act in their place when they are absent from duty. A supervisor so
appointed will have the same authority as the appointing supervisor. (A Division
Commander may request another captain to act in his behalf when he is absent from
duty.)
8. When a supervisor appoints someone to act in his place he will designate an acting
supervisor through a memorandum to his supervisor, for distribution to supervisors and
affected employees and the Office of the Chief of Police, specifying:
a) The person acting in his place;
b) The duration
D. Responsibilities of Police Personnel
1. It shall be the duty of all commanders, supervisors, and officers to take corrective action
and submit a written report to an immediate supervisor whenever they learn through
personal observation or report, any violation of these General Orders, the Divisional
Operating Procedures, the L.R.P.D. Rules and Regulations, the Civil Service
Commissions Rules and Regulations, the ordinances of the City of Little Rock, and/or
laws of the State of Arkansas or the United States by any employee of the Department.
2. Should the violation involve an incident of a serious nature, the supervisor or

commanding officer detecting or notified of the violation shall relieve the offender from
duty and take custody of any credentials and firearms issued by the Department. Should
the observing officer be of lesser rank than the offender, he shall notify an on-duty
supervisor of equal or superior rank. The offender shall be instructed to keep himself
immediately available to the Office of the Chief of Police and shall not perform any
police duties while being relieved of duty.
3. A written report of the incident shall be submitted by the reporting supervisor or

commander through the Chain of Command to the Office of the Chief of Police.
4. When a violation does not involve gross misconduct but could cause discredit to the
Department or any member thereof, a report shall be made in writing setting out the
known facts of the case and an investigation initiated to determine the nature and degree
of the violation. The supervisor who first learns of a violation will be responsible to
initiate the investigation.

GENERAL ORDERS G.O. 106 LINES OF AUTHORITY
5. Minor violations which do not involve gross misconduct and which will not reflect
discredit upon the Department, but which indicate a need for some form of discipline
and/or training, may be handled by the offender’s commander or supervisor.
6. Pursuant to the authority granted by the legislative body of the City of Little Rock, the
Chief of Police shall have the right to suspend any employee who may be under his
jurisdiction and control for incompetence, neglect of duty, immorality, drunkenness, the
improper use of any substance that modifies behavior to the extent that it is noticeable or
affects job performance, or failure or refusal to obey orders given by proper authority or
the Orders, Rules and Regulations and directives promulgated by the Chief of Police.
7. Anytime an employee is relieved of duty for any reason, the employee’s official duty
hours and days off will be 0800 to 1600 with Saturday and Sunday days off. During the
time they are relieved of duty, they will answer all calls from the Department and will be
available at the Departments convenience for any meeting as directed between the hours
of 0800 to 1600 Monday through Friday.

GENERAL ORDER
G.O. 107 LIMITS OF AUTHORITY

07/25/2016 DEPARTMENTAL G. O. 107 (06/09/2010) G.O. 107
I. Limits of Authority
A. Officers of the Little Rock Police Department shall at all times enforce the laws, resolutions,
and ordinances of the City of Little Rock and the laws of the State of Arkansas relating to
crimes committed within the City and take appropriate enforcement action.
B. In cases where circumstances indicate a violation of Federal Law has been committed the
appropriate Federal agency will be notified. Officers of the Little Rock Police Department
have the authority to enforce Federal law where concurrent jurisdiction exists.
C. For the purposes of protecting life and property, officers shall always be considered on duty
while in the City of Little Rock and shall be prepared to act any time circumstances indicate
their services are required.
D. All officers shall perform their duties as required or directed by law, departmental rule,
policy, directive, or by order from a supervisory officer.
E. All personnel, while representing themselves to be acting in an official capacity, shall provide
official agency photo identification, upon request from any individual questioning their
identity. Exception: when the withholding of that information is necessary for the
performance of police duties or is authorized by proper authority.
F. Pursuant to ACA 5-73-104 and 5-73-120, a law enforcement officer may carry and use
weapons, which would otherwise be illegal.
G. All newly employed recruits will be required to satisfactorily complete the basic recruit
training program, prior to being sworn in as a police officer for the Little Rock Police
Department. Only upon completion of this program, will a probationary officer be allowed
to carry a weapon or be placed in a position to make an arrest.
II. Constitutional Requirements During Criminal Investigations
A. Little Rock Police Department personnel who are engaging in criminal investigations or law
enforcement actions shall make sure that all persons are afforded the rights and protection
guaranteed by the Constitution of the United States. Sworn personnel shall not perform their
duties in any manner that shall cause a suspect to be coerced to admit or involuntarily confess
to a crime.
B. Little Rock Police Department personnel shall not cause any unnecessary delay in
arraignment nor shall they fail to inform defendants of their rights against self-incrimination.
GENERAL ORDER 107-1 LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT

GENERAL ORDERS G.O. 107 LIMITS OF AUTHORITY
C. Little Rock Police Department personnel shall not deprive any person counsel or contribute
to any pretrial publicity that would tend to prejudice a fair trial.
D. Whenever a member of the Little Rock Police Department initiates a custodial interview of a
suspect, the individual shall immediately be read the “Miranda Warning” from the Little
Rock Police Department form which states:
1. You have the right to remain silent.
2. Anything you say can and will be used against you in court.
3. You have the right to talk to a lawyer and have him present with you while you are
being questioned.
4. If you can not afford to hire a lawyer, one will be appointed to represent you before
any questioning at no cost to you, if you wish.
5. You can decide at any time to exercise these rights and not answer any questions or
make any statements.
E. After the warning has been read and signed, the “Waiver of Rights” on the Little Rock Police
Department form should be read to the suspect. The “Waiver of Rights” states:
1. I have read the above statement of my rights and fully understand each and every
right. No promises or threats have been made to induce me into making this
statement. With full knowledge of my rights, I hereby waive those rights and agree
to answer questions concerning the offense which I am suspected of committing.
F. Should the suspect state he will not answer any questions, all questioning of the suspect will
cease immediately.
G. Should the suspect agree to answer questions but wishes to talk to an attorney or have an
attorney present:
1. All questioning of the suspect will cease immediately.
2. The suspect shall be allowed to contact his attorney, or if the suspect wishes an
attorney but he cannot afford an attorney, the Public Defender’s Office shall be
immediately notified by the officer handling the case. The Public Defender will be
allowed to establish whether or not the suspect fits the criteria for assistance from
the Public Defender’s Office. All questioning of the suspect will cease until the
attorney arrives and confers with the suspect.
H. Should the suspect agree to talk to the officer, whether the suspect is in custody, not in
custody, or has an attorney present, the questioning of the suspect shall be deemed an official
interview.

G.O. 107 LIMITS OF AUTHORITY LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
III. Authority to Request Cooperation
A. An officer may request any person to furnish information or otherwise cooperate in the
investigation or prevention of crime. Officers may request the person to respond to
questions, to appear at the nearest appropriate police facility, or comply with any other
reasonable request.
B. In making a request, no officer shall indicate that a person is legally obligated to furnish
information or to otherwise cooperate if no such legal obligation exists. Compliance with the
request for information or other cooperation shall not be regarded as involuntary or coerced
solely on the ground that such a request was made by a law enforcement officer.
C. Officers requesting any person to come to or remain at the nearest appropriate police facility,
Prosecuting Attorney’s Office or other similar place, shall take such steps as are reasonable to
make it clear that there is no legal obligation to comply with such a request.
IV. Stopping and Detaining of Persons
A. An officer lawfully present in any place may, in the performance of their duties, stop and
detain any person who they reasonably suspect is committing, has committed, or is about to
commit a felony or a misdemeanor involving danger of forcible injury to persons or of
appropriation of or damage to property, if such action is reasonably necessary either to obtain
or verify the identification of the person or to determine the lawfulness of his conduct. An
officer may require the person to remain in or near such place in the officer’s presence for a
period of not more than fifteen minutes or for such time as is reasonable under the
circumstances. At the end of such period the person detained shall be released without
further restraint, or arrested and charged with an offense.
B. Officers who have detained a person shall immediately advise that person of their official
identity and the reason for the detention.
C. Officers may use such nondeadly force as may be reasonably necessary under the
circumstances to stop and detain any person for the purpose authorized in this General Order.
D. If an officer has detained a person he reasonably suspects is armed and presently dangerous
to the officer or others, the officer or someone designated by him may search the outer
clothing of such person and the immediate surroundings for, and seize, any weapon or other
dangerous thing which may be used against the officer or others. In no event shall this search
be more extensive than is reasonably necessary to ensure the safety of the officer or others.
E. Whenever an officer has reasonable cause to believe that any person found at or near the
scene of a felony is a witness to the offense, he may stop that person. After having identified
himself, the officer must advise the person of the purpose of the stopping and may then
demand of him his name, address, and any information he may have regarding the offense.
Such detention shall in all cases be reasonable and shall not exceed 15 minutes unless the
person shall refuse to give such information, in which case the person, if detained further,
shall immediately be brought before any judicial officer or Prosecuting Attorney to be
examined with reference to his name, address, or the information he may have regarding the
offense.
F. Use Of Discretion By Officers

1. A decision not to arrest when there are grounds to arrest is, at times, considered
good law enforcement practice. Public empathy can be enhanced by the careful use
of discretion, and potential ill will can be avoided between police contacts and
officers of the department.
2. If an arrest is not made at the time of the offense, officers, if they find it necessary,
may obtain a warrant of arrest against the offender at a later date.
3. If an officer makes a decision not to arrest, his decision should be based on but not
limited to:
a) The arrest would cause greater danger to the public than not attempting to
arrest the offender.
b) The arrest would cause harm to an offender who poses no threat of danger
to the public; such as a juvenile offender whose wrong doing could best be
handled by a warning or informal discussion with parents.
c) The officer should always consider the seriousness of the offense and its
consequences.
d) Should any questions arise concerning a particular incident, the officer

involved should confer with a supervisor.
V. Recommendations for Driver’s License Retest
A. A law enforcement officer may encounter motorists whom, in his opinion, are incapable of
exercising reasonable care while operating a motor vehicle. The motorist may be
incompetent, have a physical disability or mental disease which affects that persons ability to
operate a motor vehicle. When that occurs the officer should:
1. Complete all reports related to the action or incident for which the motorist was
stopped.
2. Write on the front of the ticket “Officer recommends retest”.
VI. The Issuance of Written Warning for the Violations of Act 247 and 197
A. A law enforcement officer will issue warning citations on the Arkansas Uniform Traffic
Citation for violations of A.C.A. 27-51-1603 and 27-51-1604, which are secondary offenses.
1. It is a violation of 27-51-1603 if the operator of a motor vehicle who is under the

age of 18 uses a wireless telephone for talking, typing, texting messages, email, or
accessing the internet, and will be issued a warning for the first offense.
2. It is a violation of 27-51-1604 if the operator of a motor vehicle who is at least 18,

but under 21 years of age uses a wireless telephone for talking, typing, texting
messages, email, or accessing the internet unless the operator is utilizing a hands
free wireless phone, and will be issued a warning for the first offense.

3. The law enforcement officer will note the violation on the Arkansas Uniform Traffic
Citation and denote it is a warning if a first offense. The law enforcement officer
will not set a court date for the warning.
4. The warning citation will be processed in the same manner as regular citations. The
Little Rock Municipal Traffic Court will forward the warning citations to the State
Traffic Violation Records.
5. When it is determined that the operator has had a warning issued for violation of
either statute, the operator shall be issued an Arkansas Uniform Traffic Citation in
accordance with current departmental policy.
VII. Arrest Procedures
A. Authority to Arrest Without a Warrant
1. A law enforcement officer may arrest a person without a warrant if the officer has
reasonable cause to believe that such person has committed:
a) A felony;
b) A traffic offense involving;
(1) Death or physical injury to a person;
(2) Damage to property; and/or,
(3) Driving a vehicle while under the influence of an intoxicating

liquor or drug;
c) Any violation related to Domestic Abuse; and,
d) Any violation of law in the officer’s presence.
2. A private person may make an arrest where he has reasonable grounds for believing
that the person arrested has committed a felony.
3. An arrest shall not be deemed to have been made on insufficient cause hereunder
solely on the ground that the officer or private citizen is unable to determine the
particular offense which may have been committed.
4. A warrantless arrest by an officer not personally possessed of information sufficient

to constitute reasonable cause is valid where the arresting officer is instructed to
make the arrest by a police agency which collectively possesses knowledge
sufficient to constitute reasonable cause.
B. Any law enforcement officer may arrest a person pursuant to a warrant in any county in the
state.

C. An officer is not required to have a warrant in his possession at the time of an arrest, but upon
request he shall show the warrant to the accused as soon as possible. If the officer does not
have the warrant in his possession at the time of arrest, he shall inform the accused of the fact
that the warrant has been issued.
D. An unsuccessful attempt to serve a warrant shall be documented on a Warrant Tracking Form

(LRPD 5600-141) and forwarded to the Warrants Unit.
E. Procedures on Arrest
1. Upon making an arrest, an officer shall:
a) Identify himself as such unless his identity is otherwise apparent;
b) Inform the arrested person that he is under arrest; and,
c) As promptly as is reasonable under the circumstances, inform the arrested

person of the cause of arrest.
2. Any person arrested shall be brought promptly to the Pulaski County Regional Jail,
nearest appropriate police facility, or other similar place. The arresting officer may,
however, first take the person to some other place, if:
a) The person so requests; and/or,
b) Such action is reasonably necessary for the purpose of having the person
identified;
(1) By a person who is otherwise unlikely to be able to make the

identification; and/or,
(2) By a person near the place of the arrest or near the scene of a
recently committed offense.
F. No officer shall question an arrested person if the person has indicated in any manner that he
does not wish to be questioned, or that he wishes to consult counsel before submitting to any
questioning.
G. Authority to Issue Citations
1. An officer in the field acting without a warrant who has reasonable cause to believe
that a person has committed any misdemeanor may issue a citation in lieu of arrest
or continued custody.
2. When a person is arrested for any misdemeanor, the ranking officer on duty at the
place of detention to which the arrested person is taken may issue a citation in lieu
of continued custody.
3. Any suspect arrested for an offense related to Domestic Abuse will not be issued a
Citation to Appear.

4. Upon the recommendation of the Prosecuting Attorney, the ranking officer on duty
at the place of detention to which the arrested person is taken may issue a citation in
lieu of continued custody when the person has been arrested for a felony.
5. In determining whether to continue custody or issue a citation, the officer shall

inquire into and consider facts about the accused, including but not limited to:
a) Place and length of residence;
b) Family relationships;
c) References;
d) Present and past employment;
e) Criminal record; and,
f) Other relevant facts such as:
(1) Whether an accused fails to identify himself satisfactorily;
(2) Whether an accused refuses to sign a promise to appear pursuant

to citation;
(3) Whether detention is necessary to prevent imminent bodily harm

to the accused or to another;
(4) Whether the accused has ties to the jurisdiction reasonably

sufficient to assure his appearance and there is a substantial
likelihood that he will respond to a citation; and,
(5) Whether the accused previously has failed to appear in response to

a citation.
VIII. Arrest Procedures on any Educational Institution Properties
A. A supervisor shall be contacted in the event an officer is required to enter the property of an
educational institution under the following condition.
1. In the event that officers are called to respond to any educational institution where
criminal allegations are made against school personnel, they shall immediately
notify their supervisor.
2. Officers will notify their supervisor prior to the attempted service of a warrant on
any school personnel currently on the property of an educational institution.
3. Except under emergency conditions, school personnel will not be arrested and/or
forcibly removed from a classroom until a supervisor has arrived and evaluated the
circumstances. If possible, an arrest will not be made in the presence of children.

4. A supervisor will be notified and will respond to the scene of any Little Rock school
campus where felony criminal allegations are made against school personnel.
IX. Consent to Search
A. Authority To Search And Seize Pursuant To Consent
1. An officer may conduct searches and make seizures without a search warrant or
other color of authority if consent is given to the search or seizure.
2. Prior to a search by consent, officers of the Little Rock Police Department will
whenever possible have the person consenting to the search sign a Little Rock Police
Department Consent to Search Form.
3. A verbal consent may be given under certain circumstances when a written consent
to search form is not practical. Wherever possible two sworn officers should
witness consent, and a written report will immediately be prepared listing facts
surrounding the verbal consent and any and all witness of the consent. A supervisor
will immediately be notified of the circumstances involving the consent to search
and the documentation involved.
B. The consent justifying a search and seizure can only be given, in the case of:
1. Search of an individual’s person, by the individual in question or, if the person is

under fourteen years of age, by both the individual and his parent, guardian, or a
person in loco parentis;
2. Search of a vehicle, by the person registered as its owner or in apparent control of its
operation or contents at the time consent is given; and,
3. Search of premises, by a person who, by ownership or otherwise, is apparently

entitled to give or withhold consent.
C. A search based on consent shall not exceed, in duration or physical scope, the limits of the
consent given.
D. A consent given may be withdrawn or limited at any time prior to the completion of the
search, and if so withdrawn or limited, the search under authority of the consent shall cease,
or be restricted to the new limits, as the case may be. Things discovered and subject to
seizure prior to such withdrawal or limitation of consent shall remain subject to seizure
despite such change or termination of the consent.
X. Search and Seizure
A. An officer who is making a lawful arrest may, without a search warrant, conduct a search of
the person or property of the accused for the following purposes only:
1. To protect the officer, the accused, or others;
2. To prevent the escape of the accused;

3. To furnish appropriate custodial care if the accused is jailed; and/or,
4. To obtain evidence of the commission of the offense for which the accused has been
arrested or to seize contraband, the fruits of crime, or other things criminally
possessed or used in conjunction with the offense.
B. An officer making an arrest and the authorized officials at the police station or other place of
detention to which the accused is brought may conduct a search of the accused’s garments
and personal effects ready at hand, the surface of his body, and the area within his immediate
control.
C. Search of the Person: Search of Body Cavities and Strip Searches.
1. When time, conditions, and circumstances permit a search warrant will be obtained
before continuing any strip or search or body cavity search.
2. Search of an accused’s blood stream, body cavities, and subcutaneous tissues

conducted incidental to arrest may be made only:
a) If there is a strong probability that it will disclose things subject to seizure

and related to the offense for which the individual was arrested;
b) If it reasonably appears that the delay consequent upon procurement of a

search warrant would probably result in the disappearance or destruction of
the objects of the search; and,
c) If it reasonably appears that the search is otherwise reasonable under the

circumstances of the case, including the seriousness of the offense and the
nature of the invasion of the individual’s person.
d) When the search pursuant to this section is conducted by a physician or a

licensed nurse.
3. When a body cavity search is performed, the arresting officer must justify, in
writing, the circumstances for the search. A supervisor will be notified as soon as
possible and the circumstances involving the search will be documented.
4. When a strip search is deemed necessary, the officer conducting the strip search will
be of the same sex as the person being searched, and will be conducted out of public
view. Any time a person is strip searched, a supervisor will be notified as soon as
possible and the circumstances involving the strip search will be documented.
5. Any search pursuant to this section shall be conducted in a location where the
privacy of the individual is assured.
D. Search and Seizure Incidental to Arrest
1. If, at the time of arrest of a recent occupant of a vehicle, the arresting officer may
search the vehicle if the arrestee is within reaching distance of the passenger
compartment at the time of the search or if it is reasonable to believe that the vehicle
contains things which are connected with the offense for which the arrest was made.

Under these circumstances, the arresting officer may seize any things subject to
seizure that are discovered during the course of the search.
2. The search of a vehicle pursuant to this section shall only be made

contemporaneously with the arrest or as soon thereafter as is reasonably practicable.
E. Search of Premises: Permissible Circumstances, Time and Scope
1. The arresting officer may search such premises or part thereof for such things, and
seize any things subject to seizure, if at the time of arrest:
a) The accused is in or on premises, all or part of which he is apparently

entitled to occupy; and
b) In view of the circumstances, the officer has reason to believe that such
premises or part thereof contain things which are:
(1) Subject to seizure;
(2) Connected with the offense for which the arrest is made; and,
(3) Likely to be removed or destroyed before a search warrant can be

obtained and served.
2. Search of premises pursuant to this subsection shall only be made

contemporaneously with the arrest, and search of building interiors shall only be
made consequent upon an entry into the building made in order to affect an arrest
therein. In determining the necessity for and scope of the search to be undertaken,
the officer shall take into account, among other things, the nature of the offense for
which the arrest is made, the behavior of the individual arrested and others on the
premises, the size and other characteristics of things to be searched for, and whether
or not any such things are observed while making the arrest.
F. Custodial Taking of Property Pursuant to Arrest; Vehicles
1. Things not subject to seizure which are found in the course of a search of the person
of an accused may be taken from his possession if reasonably necessary for custodial
purposes. Documents or other records may be read or otherwise examined only to
the extent necessary for such purposes, including identity checking and ensuring the
physical well being of the person arrested.
2. A vehicle impounded in consequence of an arrest, or retained in official custody for

other good cause, may be searched at such times and to such extent as is reasonably
necessary for safekeeping of the vehicle and its contents.
G. Vehicular Searches
1. An officer who has reasonable cause to believe that a moving or readily movable
vehicle is or contains things subject to seizure may, without a search warrant, stop,
detain and search the vehicle and may seize things subject to seizure discovered in
the course of the search where the vehicle is:

a) On a public way or waters or other area open to the public;
b) In a private area unlawfully entered by the vehicle; or,
c) In a private area lawfully entered by the vehicle, provided that exigent

circumstances require immediate detention, search and seizure to prevent
destruction or removal of the things subject to seizure.
2. The officer may search the suspected occupants (except that this subsection shall not
apply to individuals traveling as passengers in a vehicle operating as a common
carrier) if the officer does not find the things subject to seizure by his search of the
vehicle, and if:
a) The things subject to seizure are of such a size and nature that they could
be concealed on the person; and,
b) The officer has reason to suspect that one or more of the occupants of the
vehicle may have the things subject to seizure so concealed;
H. Search and Seizure of Computers: Taking possession of the Computer
1. Computer equipment can be severely damaged or data lost due to improper

shutdown or start-up procedures.
2. All rules of criminal procedure regarding search and seizure shall be observed.
3. When seizing computer equipment, either operating or non-operating, disks (all

types), drives, peripheral equipment, and other devices capable of storing data in an
electronic format, the following procedures shall be followed:
a) Access to the computer system shall be denied to all persons. If a subject is at

the keyboard, remove him or her immediately.
b) If the computer is “off,” DO NOT TURN IT ON;
c) If the computer is “on,” DO NOT TOUCH IT;
d) Document in detail any information that is observed on screen;
e) If the designated on-call personnel are not on the scene, Communications will
be notified to dispatch personnel from a call-out list. The designated on-call
personnel are trained in computer seizures; and,
f) If the designated on-call personnel determines that the seized equipment will not
fit in the property room lockers, the property room supervisor will be called out
for storage in the main property room.
4. Documentation of the circumstances of the search and seizure and the storage of the
computer and its components are the responsibility of the officer(s) conducting the
search.

I. An officer may, without a search warrant, enter and search such premises and vehicles, and
the persons therein, to the extent reasonably necessary for the prevention of such death,
bodily harm, or destruction, if he has reasonable cause to believe that the premises or a
vehicle contain:
1. Individuals in imminent danger of death or serious bodily harm;
2. Things imminently likely to burn, explode, or otherwise cause death, serious bodily
harm, or substantial destruction of property; and/or,
3. Things subject to seizure which will cause or be used to cause death or serious
bodily harm if their seizure is delayed.
XI. Alternatives to Arrest
A. When attempting to resolve various types of problems, officers are encouraged to seek
alternatives to physical arrest when no hazard(s) to the community, victim, suspect or officer
will occur. The decision not to arrest will be guided by law, departmental policy and facts of
the situation.
B. Officers may choose to issue:
1. Warnings - When the offense is of a minor nature, a verbal warning or other

direction may be given. Officers should bear in mind that frequently a warning to
persons guilty of very minor offenses will be sufficient, and that an arrest in such
cases should not be made unless the violation is deliberate or repeated.
2. Referrals - Often minor offenses may be resolved by referral to social service

agencies such as the Department of Human Services, Salvation Army, or other
appropriate agencies. The Little Rock Police Department Victim Services Program
is a valuable information and referral service to assist officers. Whenever possible,
juveniles should be referred to social service agencies and diverted out of the
criminal justice system.

GENERAL ORDER
G. O. 108 ADMINISTRATIVE PROCEDURES

08/11/2017 DEPARTMENTAL G.O. 108 (06/13/2017) G. O. 108
I. Access Cards for the Police Building
A. The Operations Support Section Lieutenant shall be responsible for the issuance of security
access cards and the documentation pertaining to access cards.
1. Sonitrol cards issued to departmental personnel shall be returned to the Operations

Support Section Lieutenant upon separation from the Department.
2. As there are varying levels of access, the Operations Support Section Lieutenant
shall be notified of all departmental and divisional transfers or assignments to
ensure access is granted to the various buildings of the police facility.
3. Employees will be held accountable for the proper use of security equipment and
the safekeeping of their access card.
B. The Operations Support Section Lieutenant shall ensure that the Sonitrol Security System is
operational each day.
1. Public access doors to all police department buildings will be electronically locked
and unlocked at predetermined times.
C. Access to secure areas within police buildings
1. Access has been restricted to various portions of departmental buildings. Personnel

working in these areas and departmental supervisors will have access to these areas.
All others, who are admitted to the area, must log in and out on the provided log
sheets. There will be no unauthorized access to these areas. This includes the front
desk, communications, vehicle control office, property room, and police equipment
and weapons storage areas.
2. Only personnel with the rank of Sergeant and above will have access to the Police
Equipment Storage Areas by means of their Sonitrol Access card. Sworn personnel
below the rank of Sergeant are not authorized in these areas. The employee assigned
as the vehicle/equipment coordinator will be the only exception to this order. This
employee will have access to the equipment storage area of their division by means
of their Sonitrol Access Card.
3. All electronically controlled employee entrance doors will remain closed and locked
at all times. Access to these areas will be permitted by Sonitrol Access cards or
persons being escorted by personnel having proper Sonitrol access. All visitors to
these areas must log in and out on the log in sheet available for this purpose. All
electronically controlled doors are equipped with emergency pulls. These
emergency pulls will not be used to override the control device unless an actual
emergency exists. Electronically controlled doors shall not be propped open and
left unattended, unless an actual emergency exists. The exception to this will be
those entry doors programmed to open to the public during normal business hours.

GENERAL ORDERS G.O. 108 ADMINISTRATION PROCEDURES
4. Malfunctions involving electronically controlled doors shall be reported

immediately to the Operations Support Section Lieutenant as soon as the
malfunction is detected.
5. All supervisors are responsible for monitoring these doors for compliance with this
policy. Upon request, the Operations Support Section Lieutenant will provide
supervisors with a copy of the activity log of specific doors for investigative
purposes.
II. Civil Suits Against Employees
A. The City of Little Rock may defend an employee in a court action, brought against him for
an act or alleged act, which was performed as a result of his responsibilities and consistent
with his regularly assigned duties, as an employee of the City of Little Rock. This policy is
subject to the following considerations:
1. In certain cases, the City may or may not defend an employee and/or pay damages.
All cases will be investigated and evaluated on an individual basis by the City
Attorney and Police Department Staff. These types of lawsuits generally fall into
the below described categories:
a) Situations arising from conduct that occurs while the employee is off-duty
and working for a private employer (e.g. security guard, etc.);
b) Lawsuits between co-employees;
c) Civil rights violations;
d) Situations that occur off-duty and are not job related (e.g. motor vehicle
accidents in privately owned vehicles); or,
e) Cases where an investigation reveals that the employee committed an

intentional or wantonly malicious act.
B. Employees involved in a civil suit, as a plaintiff or defendant, resulting from their

employment with the City will adhere to the following guidelines:
1. The employee will complete a Litigation Service of Process form. This form will be
submitted by the employee along with a copy of the complaint and any other
associated documentation through his Chain of Command within forty-eight (48)
hours of being served with civil process.
2. The Division Commander will review the information for completeness and forward
all forms to the Office of the Chief of Police.
3. The Office of the Chief of Police shall forward the information to the City
Attorney’s Office.
III. Damage to Civilian Property
A. In the course of duty it is sometimes necessary for officers to take action that results in
damage to property of citizens. When this occurs, the officer will immediately notify a
supervisor, who will respond and investigate the circumstances.

G.O. 108 ADMINISTRATIVE PROCEDURES LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
B. To ensure that all incidents of damage are investigated and documented, the following
guidelines shall be followed:
1. An Incident Report shall be completed with a detailed account as to the type, nature
and extent of the damage;
2. The officer(s) involved will submit an Officer’s Report Form, detailing the
circumstances surrounding the damage, for review and approval by the investigating
supervisor;
3. The investigating supervisor will evaluate the damages, officer’s actions, estimate
the cost of damage, document his recommendations, and forward this information
through the Chain of Command; and,
4. The Division Commander will review the file and make his recommendation to the
Office of the Chief of Police for a final decision on liability.
C. Officers will not advise citizens that the City will assume responsibility for any injury,
damages or medical expenses.
IV. Sick Leave
A. Sick Leave is approved, paid, time-off from work that may be used for personal illness or
injury, and medical, dental, or optical examinations, as well as pregnancy or any related
disabilities. Sick Leave may also be used for any documented serious illness or disability
requiring hospitalization or emergency treatment of the employee’s immediate family, up to
prescribed limits. Immediate family is defined as mother, father, spouse (as defined by
Arkansas law), and children or children who live with the employee.
1. It shall be the responsibility of officers who cannot report for duty due to illness
(sick personal or sick in family) to notify an on-duty supervisor, within their
division, at least one (1) hour prior to their scheduled reporting time. It will be the
supervisor's responsibility who receives the sick leave call to relay the information
to the first relieving supervisor on whose shift the officer is assigned. That
supervisor will contact the officer to confirm the nature of the illness and approve
the type of leave for payroll purposes.
2. In cases of a non-job related injury or illness for which the employee is absent more
than three (3) consecutive work days, the employee shall be required to provide the
Department with a physician’s statement indicating length of disability and dates of
treatment.
3. Any employee absent from duty due to a non-job related injury or illness who has
been assigned to the Extended Leave Unit or meets the requirements for transfer to
the Extended Leave Unit should be provided an application for leave in accordance
with the Family Medical Leave Act. Employees are responsible for complying with
all requests for information in accordance with the Family and Medical Leave Act.
Failure to comply may result in disciplinary action up to and including termination.
4. Employees on extended sick leave shall be required to report on their status in

writing to their appropriate supervisor every thirty (30) days, including
documentation from a physician of their prognosis, the medical necessity for the
continued use of sick leave, and an estimated return to work date.

5. When it is determined an employee can return to work, it shall be the responsibility

of the employee to provide a release from a physician, releasing the employee to
return to work with or without restrictions (full duty status).
6. When an employee is released to return to work, full duty status, his/her supervisor
will monitor and evaluate the employee to ensure he/she is capable of performing
his/her normal duties.
7. The Chief of Police reserves the right to order the examination of any employee
absent from, or returning to, duty due to illness or injury to determine the status of
the employee’s physical condition. The Chief of Police also reserves the right to
specify the physician to complete the examination which will be at the City’s
expense.
B. Evidence of Sick Leave abuse, such as discernible patterns of absences or actions

inconsistent with illness or injury will justify reasonable investigation, which may result in
the employee being required to provide a physician’s statement indicating length of disability
and dates of treatment for each subsequent sick leave usage for up to ninety (90) days. It
may further result in disciplinary action, if warranted or denial of paid leave.
V. Worker’s Compensation
A. All police employees are covered for job related injuries by the City of Little Rock’s
Worker’s Compensation Insurance (A.C.A. § 11-9-101 et seq.). In the event a police officer
is injured when performing a law enforcement function, in compliance with Departmental
policy, while employed in a departmentally approved off-duty employment, a standard
worker’s compensation file will be prepared and forwarded through the officer’s chain of
command. A law enforcement function is defined as: an action taken in the maintenance of
law and order and the detection and prevention of crime by a sworn member of the Little
Rock Police Department. As soon as safely and practical, after the injury, the injured officer
or designee shall notify a supervisor and advise either overtime or compensatory time status
for the remaining hours of the off duty assignment. The injured officer will remain in an
Injured on Duty (IOD) status until they have received initial medical treatment for the injury
and have been treated and released by a physician or workers comp. benefits through the City
of Little Rock begin. The supervisor that has been notified will ensure the affected officer’s
chain of command is immediately notified of the incident. Police personnel of the rank of
Lieutenant and above are exempt from Overtime/Compensatory Time compensation, except
for limited, specific situations. These situations and guidelines are outlined in the City of
Little Rock Compensation Manual.
If an officer is injured while performing a non-law enforcement function while employed by
an off-duty employer, the claim must be filed with that employer’s workers comp. plan. If
the off-duty employer refuses to honor the claim, the officer must file through his/her
applicable insurance plan.
1. Employees who, during the performance of their official duties, sustain a non-
life/limb threatening injury on duty, shall notify a supervisor immediately. For
reporting purposes, any officer reporting an injury in a departmentally approved off
duty employment will be considered on duty at the time of injury.
a) Upon the initial notification of the injury the supervisor will immediately
contact “The Company Nurse” at 1-877-854-6877, a toll-free number.
b) The supervisor and the involved employee will describe the incident and
the nature of the injury to the Company Nurse staff who are specially
trained in handling Worker’s Compensation injuries.

c) The Company Nurse staff will provide a case reference number, triage the
injury in accordance with the City’s medical protocol, provide immediate
treatment information and if necessary, recommend emergency follow-up.
d) The Company Nurse staff receiving City of Little Rock calls are aware of
the clinics approved for initial treatment and will direct employees to those
facilities as needed.
e) “The Company Nurse”, upon notification, will complete a Worker’s

Compensation-First Report of Injury or Illness (Form #1).
f) If the employee has to go to the emergency room for treatment, he/she will
contact the Safety/Loss Specialist, the following business day, in order to
arrange for follow-up treatment at the designated clinic.
1) Concentra Medical Center, 10101 Mabelvale Plaza Drive Suite 3,

Little Rock, AR (501-568-7868).
g) The reporting supervisor will ensure that sufficient information is provided

for the completion of this form.
h) The supervisor will then initiate and complete a Worker’s Compensation

File and forward such file through the Chain of Command for review.
i) The employee shall be responsible for obtaining proper documentation

from an attending physician authorizing their return to work.
2. In case of a life or limb threatening injury which requires an immediate emergency

response, the supervisor shall immediately arrange for the appropriate care and
notify “The Company Nurse” at 1-877-854-6877 to report an on-duty injury before
the end of their tour of duty.
a) Life or limb threatening injuries should be treated at the Baptist Medical

Center Emergency Room; however, in the case of life or limb threatening
injuries, employees may be treated at the most appropriate trauma center.
b) “The Company Nurse”, upon notification, will complete a Worker’s

Compensation-First Report of Injury or Illness (Form #1).
c) The reporting supervisor will ensure that sufficient information is provided

for the completion of this form.
d) The supervisor will then initiate and complete a Worker’s Compensation

File and forward such file through the Chain of Command for review.
3. If after initial contact with “The Company Nurse” the involved employee’s medical
condition changes, the employee will immediately contact the Safety/Loss Control
Specialist at 501-371-4756, advise name, case reference number and medical
changes. The employee will then notify their supervisor.
4. The Company Nurse should only be contacted one time to report the initial incident.
Follow-up calls, questions, or concerns should be made to the Safety/Loss Control
Specialist. If the Safety/Loss Control Specialist is unable to be reached, Risk
Management Resources should be contacted at 501-614-1141.

a. If a supervisor is calling for the injured employee, valid demographic

information must be obtained on the employee prior to calling. Claims cannot
be setup with invalid or missing information.
b. If the supervisor who is making the call is not the employee’s actual supervisor,
he/she shall indicate during the call the correct supervisor. This information
will save time in determining the employee’s return to work and any additional
information needed during the claim.
B. The following procedures will be followed anytime an employee is treated for any on duty
injury that results in the employee receiving medical duty restrictions or it is necessary for
the employee to miss work for their recovery.
1. If the employee is given duty restrictions or must miss work (classified “IOD”) for
their recovery, he/she must be offered modified duty. The employee has the right to
accept or decline modified duty after an injury. If the employee declines modified
duty, he/she must use their available leave time to cover days lost.
2. Anytime an employee’s restrictions change throughout a claim, the employer must

offer modified duty and complete a new Modified Duty Form to comply with the
new restrictions.
3. A Modified Duty Form shall be completed by the employee’s supervisor each time
the restrictions of the injured employee changes.
4. The completed form shall be forwarded through chain of command to the Office of
the Chief of Police. The evaluating supervisor will make two copies of the form,
one for addition to the original file and one to forward by email to the Safety/Loss
Control Specialist to give notice of the employee’s return to work date.
5. The copy of the Modified Duty Form must be submitted to the Safety/Loss Control
Specialist within twenty-four (24) hours after the employee has received any type of
restrictions.
6. It is the employee’s responsibility to contact the Safety/Loss Control Specialist for a

follow-up appointment at a designated clinic. Employees who fail to do this and
decide to seek medical treatment from their own physician will not be classified as
“IOD” and will be charged “sick leave”. Additionally, if the injured employee
chooses to utilize their own physician, the City will not be responsible for any costs
incurred as a result of this treatment.
7. The employee shall be responsible for obtaining proper documentation from the
authorized attending physician, authorizing their return to work with or without
restrictions. The employee shall notify a supervisor of his/her current division prior
to reporting for his/her next regularly scheduled workday.
8. The employee’s supervisor shall ensure the employee submits proper

documentation authorizing his/her return to work and shall notify the shift
commander.
C. All medical treatment and/or injuries will be documented and forwarded through chain of
command to the Office of the Chief of Police for review.
1. The reporting supervisor shall ensure the following forms are completed:

a) L.R.P.D. Incident Report;
b) L.R.P.D. Employee’s on the Job Accident Report form, 5000-1; and,
c) Arkansas Worker’s Compensation Commission Employee’s Notice of

Injury Report (Form N).
d) Modified Duty Form (if needed)
2. The Arkansas Worker’s Compensation Commission Employee’s Notice of Injury

Report (Form N) must be completed by the injured worker. The employee must
sign and date the front of the document and initial on the lower right corner of the
back page.
a) Worker’s Compensation will only accept the original documentation of

this form. This form must be printed out front and back.
b) The supervisor will immediately submit a copy of the form to the

Safety/Loss Control Specialist for notification.
D. Procedures:
1. The Incident Report, and all Workers Compensation forms, will be assembled into a
file and forwarded, through the chain of command, to the Office of the Chief of
Police.
a) All documentation shall be placed in a file folder and secured.
b) Any photographs or audio/video tapes will be placed in a manila envelope

and attached to the inside front file cover.
c) The initial evaluating supervisor shall be responsible for ensuring that the
necessary documentation is obtained and properly placed in the file, before
routing it through the chain of command.
d) The order of included documentation shall be:
(1) Lieutenant’s evaluation of injury/accident;
(2) Sergeant’s evaluation of injury/accident;
(3) Incident and/or Accident Report(s) (copies);
(4) Involved Officer’s Report;
(5) Blue Team Injured on Duty Report; and,
(6) Copies of applicable Workers Compensation Forms, as outlined in

this Order. (All original Worker’s Compensation Forms will be
attached to the inside front cover of the file with a paper clip.)
2. All files documenting personnel injured on duty will be entered into the Blue Team
program as a Divisional - Injured on Duty report for documentation and tracking.

a) Prior to the end of the supervisor’s tour of duty, they will enter the basic
components of the Injured on Duty Report into the Blue Team program,
which will include the involved officer(s), involved citizen(s), location of
the incident, and the incident number.
3. The Division Commander will review the documents and forward all forms to the
Office of the Chief of Police no later than the next business day.
4. Any questions, concerning the processing of Worker’s Compensation claims,

should be directed to either the City Safety/Loss Control Specialist at 371-4756 or
the Office of Chief of Police.
5. Follow-up doctor’s visits related to on–the-job injuries should be scheduled

whenever possible during the employee’s normal working hours if that employee
has returned to work. If the employee has returned to work and a doctor’s visit is
scheduled on a normal working day but outside their normal shift hours,
compensatory time will be allowed.
a) Compensatory time for follow-up doctor’s visits will not be authorized if

the employee has not returned to work or on the employee’s normal days
off.
VI. Removal from Duty Assignment
A. Any employee whose actions or use of force results in serious physical injury or death shall
be removed from their line of duty assignment and placed on Administrative Leave until
after the officer(s) has attended mandatory EAP sessions, a thorough administrative review
has been completed or a decision by the Chief of Police, or designee, has been made to return
to work. During this time the officer(s) will make themselves available to assist with the
Professional Standards investigation.
VII. Employee Information and Status Changes
A. All employees shall keep their current address, (both mailing address and the physical
location of the residence, if different from the mailing address) and personal telephone
number (home or mobile) on file with the Office of the Chief of Police. Employees will
provide the Department with the contact information for two individuals, to include their
physical address and telephone number, they wish to be contacted in the case of an
emergency.
1. If a change occurs to an employee’s address, telephone number, name (ex:

marriage, divorce, name change, etc.), emergency contact information, or other
personal information, the employee shall submit the new information, in writing,
through the chain of command, to the Office of the Chief of Police, within seventy-
two hours of any change, for entry into the computer system.
B. Employees will not use the address of any Department facility on any identification issued by
any organization or agency other than the Little Rock Police Department. Employees will
not use the address of any Department facility to receive personal mail or publications, not
associated with their duties and responsibilities as an employee of the Little Rock Police
Department.
C. Employees will not disclose any employee’s personal telephone numbers or address, unless a
verified member of the Little Rock Police Department makes the request.

VIII. Telephone Procedures
A. Telephone Directory Assistance - Requests for directory assistance shall not be made, except
in emergency instances or where the number does not appear in the telephone directory.
B. Long Distance Telephone Calls
1. Long distance telephone calls will be made for official City business only. No
personal telephone calls will be charged to the City.
2. All authorized long distance telephone calls shall be dialed direct.
3. The Administration Services Manager will forward monthly telephone reports to

each Division for management review and approval.
C. Telephone Use by Employees
1. Employees shall introduce themselves by title, name, and agency when making
phone contact with citizens. This does not apply to circumstances that would
jeopardize an investigation.
2. Employees shall not use business telephones for personal calls, unless absolutely
necessary; such calls shall not exceed one minute.
3. In an emergency, supervisors shall make telephone time available for the employee
to handle the problem.
D. Cellular Telephone Use
1. Departmental cellular phones may be used to conduct official business when the use
of radio communication or hard line telephones is inappropriate, unavailable or
inadequate to meet communications needs.
2. Employees may not operate a city vehicle while using a cellular phone unless
emergency circumstances exist and other means of communications are not
available or suitable. When possible, employees shall pull off the highway in a safe
location when using cellular phones unless hands-free operational devices are
available.
3. Use of personal or city owned cellular phones either in voice or data transmission
while on duty shall be restricted to essential communications and should be limited
in length. Engagement in multiple or extended conversations unrelated to police
business or similar use that interferes with the performance of duty is prohibited.
4. Employees will not use cellular phones during contact with members of the public
unless directly related to a call for service.
5. Employees shall silence their cellular phones, personal or departmental while

attending meetings, training sessions or in public places where their use would
reasonably be deemed annoying or intrusive.

IX. Written Communications
A. All written communications, addressed to the Chief of Police, will be forwarded through the
chain of command to the Office of the Chief of Police. This Order applies to all
correspondence, including material generated by City or Departmental employees.
B. Supervisors will take appropriate actions and attach endorsements, comments, or explanatory
materials, regarding their actions or findings, to any such forwarded communications, as
deemed necessary, but in no event, will delivery to the Office of the Chief of Police be
stopped. (This pertains to business correspondence and does not include routine
A.C.I.C./N.C.I.C. terminal messages, facsimile machine transmissions, not designed to
represent business correspondence, or form letters previously approved by the Office of the
Chief of Police.)
X. Administrative Reporting
The Administrative Reporting System is established to provide a continuous and accurate flow of
information between management and operational units and to provide management officials
information on the activities of the Department. Each Division Commander will ensure that the
appropriate reports are compiled and submitted to the Office of the Chief of Police in a timely
manner. The components of the Administrative Reporting System include:
1. Daily Reports - Daily reports are a summary of noteworthy incidents, occurring during the
previous 24-hour period. The Field Services, Major Crimes and Special Investigations
Divisions shall compile daily summary reports. Daily Reports shall be routed through the
appropriate Bureau Chief, with copies distributed to each Division Commander and the
Research & Analysis Unit. Daily reports are maintained in each Division.
a) Sergeants shall ensure that incident summaries are completed.
b) Patrol officers may count on their daily log sheets the number of criminal arrest and
traffic offenses that required their participation. This log will give an itemized
recap of daily activities, as well as a statistical recap of each officer’s daily activity.
2. Monthly Reports - Monthly reports are a means of recapping the activity of the operational
components of the Department. Monthly recaps of relevant statistics will be compiled by
each division, routed to the Office of the Chief of Police, and maintained in the Office of the
Chief of Police.
a) The monthly reports include:
(1) Recap of activities of the month;
(2) Any significant changes in activity, calls for service or incidents of

criminal activity;
(3) Major accomplishments for the month;
(4) New developments for the month; and,
(5) NIBRS Report.
b) Divisional Monthly reports must be received by the Office of the Chief of Police no
later than the tenth day following the reporting period. Should the tenth day fall on
a Saturday or Sunday, the monthly reports are due the next business day.

c) Copies of Divisional Monthly Reports shall also be forwarded to the

Research & Analysis Unit for inclusion in the Departmental Monthly
Report, no later than the tenth of the month following the reporting period.
The Department Monthly Report will be routed to the Office of the Chief
of Police.
d) Divisional level monthly reports, when applicable, will be standardized in

the following manner:
(1) The monthly reports will reflect the actual number of people
arrested and cited for criminal and traffic offenses.
(2) The monthly reports will reflect the documented number of

charges placed on those arrested for criminal and traffic offenses.
3. Quarterly Reports - Quarterly management reports shall be compiled by each

Division, routed to the Office of the Chief of Police, and maintained in the Office of
the Chief of Police. Quarterly reports will be a means of assessing activity and
crime trends, providing management a method of gauging activities of each
division.
a) The quarterly reports will include:
(1) Recap of the past three month’s reports;
(2) Other pertinent data deemed necessary by the Chief of Police;

and,
(3) Progress made on the attainment of goals and objectives. A copy

of this report shall be forwarded to the Staff Support Section.
4. Semi-Annual Reports - Semi-Annual management reports shall be compiled by

each Division, routed to the Office of the Chief of Police, and maintained in the
Office of the Chief of Police. The semi-annual reports will be a means of assessing
activity/crime trends and providing management a method of gauging activities of
each Division.
a) Semi-annual reports will include:
(1) Recap of the first two quarterly reports;
(2) Progress made on attainment of the goals and objectives; and,
(3) Other pertinent data deemed necessary by the Chief of Police.
5. Annual Reports - The Annual Report is to be completed for each calendar year of
operation of the Little Rock Police Department. The Annual Report shall be
compiled by the Technology Support Section and made available to all employees
and citizens of Little Rock. The annual reports will be a means of assessing
activity/crime trends and providing management a method of gauging activities of
each Division.
a) The Annual Report shall include:
(1) A summary of the activities of each Division;

(2) Information on crime statistics and crime trends for the City of
Little Rock;
(3) A crime trend comparison for the current year and the previous
year;
(4) Fiscal activity recaps for the Little Rock Police Department; and,
(5) Any other pertinent statistics or activities for the operation of the
XI. Requesting Legal Opinions from the City Attorney
A. All requests for legal opinions shall be routed, through the chain of command, to the Office
of the Chief of Police.
B. The Chief, or his designee, shall review the request, determine the necessity for an opinion,
and forward the request to the City Attorney’s Office, if approved.
XII. Traffic and Criminal Citation Accountability
A. The Technology and Equipment Section Vehicle/Equipment Coordinator will be responsible

for:
1. Storing and maintaining all citation books in a secure location.
2. Ensuring the proper issuance of all citation books.
3. Maintaining an up-to-date written record of citation books issued to all personnel

inside and outside the agency.
4. Ensuring that the proper documentation (officer’s employee number and citation
book number) is entered into the computer database.
B. The employee, signing out a traffic or criminal citation book, will be responsible for the
proper processing of all citations contained in the book.
1. No more than two traffic citation books and two criminal citation books can be
signed out to an officer at any one time. (The Traffic Services Section is excluded
from this limitation).
2. When an officer is transferred to a division or assignment where there is not a

regular need for a particular citation book, and/or he is not using the citation book
on a regular basis, the book(s) containing the unused citations will be turned in to
the Vehicle/Equipment Coordinator. The unused books will be turned in within ten
days of the transfer or assignment change.
3. In the event a citation is lost or stolen, the officer responsible for the citations will
immediately complete an Officer’s Report (5600-2), detailing the circumstances of
the loss. Division Commanders will route the report, through the chain of command,
to the Office of the Chief of Police. For audit purposes, a copy of this report shall
be forwarded through the chain of command to the Operations Support Section
Lieutenant.

4. In the event of a stolen citation(s), an Incident Report and an Officer’s Report will
be immediately completed for investigative purposes. Division Commanders will
route a copy of the report, through the chain of command, to the effected Bureau
Chief of Police. For audit purposes, a copy of this report shall be forwarded
through the chain of command to the Operations Support Section Lieutenant.
C. Officers will set court dates for all traffic citations no sooner than thirty days from the date of
issuance, and no longer than sixty days from the date of issuance. This requirement will not
apply to specific court requirements for DWI cases.
D. The copies of all traffic citations, which require an offender’s signature, will be turned in to a
supervisor at the end of each officer’s tour of duty.
1. The supervisor will be responsible for maintaining all citations in a secure location
until they are turned in to the Desk Officer.
2. Before the end of each tour of duty, a supervisor will record all traffic citations,
issued during that tour of duty, on a traffic submission form (LRPD form 5600-95).
This form, along with all the citations, will be turned over to the Desk Officer at the
main police building.
a) Under extenuating circumstances, a supervisor may approve a citation

being turned in at a later date and time. This period shall not exceed 24
hours after an incident has occurred.
b) The officer copies of all citations will be maintained by the officer issuing
the citation, for a period of one year from the date of issuance to a violator.
3. The Desk Officer will place all traffic citations and Traffic Ticket Submission
Forms in the Traffic Ticket Box, where they will remain secure until retrieved by
the Court Clerk.
a) Traffic Citations, which are to be mailed in accordance with Divisional

Operating Procedures, will be recorded on the Traffic Ticket Submission
Form in the appropriate location. The court and violator copies of these
citations will be packaged separately and delivered to the Desk Officer to
be forwarded to the Court Liaison Officer for mailing.
4. The Court Clerk receiving the traffic citations will verify that all citations, listed on
the form, are attached and sign the Traffic Ticket Submission Form. This form will
then be forwarded to the Court Liaison Officer. Any discrepancies will be noted by
the Court Clerk and verified by the Desk Officer.
5. The Court Liaison Officer will notify the Operations Support Section Lieutenant,
through the chain of command, of any discrepancies noted on the Traffic Ticket
Submission Form. The Operations Support Section Lieutenant will notify the
affected officer’s Division Commander. The Division Commander will
immediately initiate an investigation into the circumstances involved, and report
back to the Operations Support Section Lieutenant, within five days of notification.

E. The Operations Support Section Lieutenant will conduct a monthly audit of all traffic
citations. Any citations, identified as missing during this audit, will be documented,
identifying the officer who signed for the citation. The officer’s Bureau Commander will be
notified by the Operations Support Section Lieutenant, identifying the officer and the citation
number missing. The officer’s Division Commander will be responsible for conducting an
investigation into the circumstances involving the missing citation. All documentation
involving the missing citation will be forwarded, through the chain of command, to the
Operations Support Section Lieutenant for disposition.
XIII. Requests to Administratively Void Citations - Traffic or Criminal
A. This policy establishes a uniform procedure for requesting a court void of a citation.
B. Justification - Requests to void citations may be made if the citation was:
1. Issued in error;
2. Issued to the wrong person;
3. Found to include a clerical error; or,
4. Lost, stolen, or determined missing.
C. Procedures for Requests
1. The word “VOID” will not be written on any citation.
2. Officers requesting a citation be voided must submit all copies, except the officer’s
copy, along with a detailed Officer’s Report. The report will include the reason for
the request and a photocopy of the reissued citation, if applicable.
3. The supervisor reviewing the documents will ensure that the request is in
compliance with this policy and forward it through the chain of command.
4. The request will be reviewed and evaluated at each level and forwarded to the
Office of the Chief of Police for review and submission to the appropriate court.
5. Officers who wish to void an eCite Citation will void the citation using the eCite
program unless the citation has been accepted by the courts. Once the citation has
been accepted by the courts, the officer must follow the established procedures.
XIV. Employee Overtime and Compensatory Time Processing
A. Overtime/Compensatory Time Slips - Officers working overtime, regardless of the

circumstances (court, special assignment, late call, 12-hour shift, etc.), must submit an
overtime slip each day overtime is worked, unless an overtime roster is utilized.
1. Officers who work past their regular shift shall submit an overtime/compensatory
time slip.
a) Procedure – Complete the Overtime/Compensatory Time Worked Form

(5600-86, revised 02/14/2015) by inserting the start date and start time
when the overtime/compensatory time actually began and the end date and
end time when the activity actually concluded. The Lawson Financial

System will calculate the appropriate amount of overtime/compensatory

time compensation.
b) The decision to receive overtime or compensatory time for hours worked

above 40 hours per workweek is made by the employee performing the
work unless the employee agrees, prior to the scheduled work, to accept
compensatory time or management determines that only overtime will be
allowed.
(1) Sick leave usage or any form of unpaid leave during the
workweek will reduce the overtime/compensatory time worked to
straight time, hour for hour.
(a) An employee working eight (8) hours of

overtime/compensatory time and using eight (8) hours of
Sick Leave (or Sick in Family Leave), leave without pay,
or Short Term Disability, will have their
overtime/compensatory time converted to straight time
for that workweek.
(b) A complete explanation of the work performed is

required to justify the overtime or compensatory time
request.
(c) Scheduled Work Hours – This section at the bottom of

the form refers to the hours the employee is scheduled to
work that workday.
2. Officers who are required to appear and/or testify before any court, board,
commission, or grand jury, when under subpoena, during their off-duty hours and in
furtherance of any Departmental interest, shall submit an overtime/compensatory
time slip for the time actually spent before such body.
a) Procedure – Insert the actual start date and start time (the appearance time
on the subpoena) and the end date and end time the activity actually
concluded (the time when released by the court, Prosecuting Attorney, or
other judicial official).
(1) The overtime/compensatory time form shall be presented to the

bailiff, an officer of the court, or other judicial official for
approval.
(2) A minimum of two (2) hours will be entered by the Lawson

Financial System.
b) Overtime compensation for any additional activity that qualifies for

overtime/compensatory time during that workday shall commence at the
conclusion of the minimum two (2) hours for the appearance for the
required court or hearing, established by the start time on the form.
c) Officers may not use Vacation or other forms of leave and then work a
police activity during their normal workday for overtime/compensatory
time. Only in rare occasions (pre-approved by a Division Commander or
above) will this procedure be allowed.

(1) For those occasions when an employee is on Vacation or other

form of leave and is called into a legal proceeding for the
Department, their overtime/compensatory time slip shall indicate
the name and title of the person who required their presence.
3. The provisions of this Section shall also apply to all job-related activities performed
by an officer for whom he is not otherwise compensated by an authorized off-duty
employer and for which the officer believes he is entitled to overtime or
compensatory time from the Department.
B. Overtime/Compensatory Time for Canine Officers – Officers who are assigned to the Canine
Unit will be compensated a minimum of three (3) hours weekly for maintenance and care of
their canines.
1. To ensure that officers are compensated for their three hours the following schedule
will be followed and noted on the daily worksheet:
a) First day of work period—7 hours regular duty/1 hour canine care;
b) Second day of work period—8 hours regular duty;
c) Third day of work period—7 hours regular duty/1 hour canine care;
d) Fourth day of work period—8 hours regular duty; and,
e) Fifth day of work period—7 hours regular duty/1 hour canine care.
2. Unless an emergency situation or supervisor’s order requires otherwise, the canine

officer will leave after seven hours of duty on the dates indicated as compensation
for canine care duties.
3. Should circumstances prevent the officer from leaving after seven hours on the
designated days, the officer shall submit an overtime/compensatory time form to his
respective shift supervisor in accordance with departmental procedures.
C. Overtime Rosters - In the event that a large number of officers are scheduled to work
overtime for the same event/day, a standard overtime roster shall be submitted for each day
worked, listing the officers working overtime. Daily work sheets shall not be used for this
purpose.
D. Police personnel of the rank of Lieutenant and above are exempt from
Overtime/Compensatory Time compensation, except for limited, specific situations.
1. These situations and guidelines are outlined in the City of Little Rock
Compensation Manual.
E. Overtime/Compensatory Time slips and Overtime Rosters should be submitted to the Police
Payroll Specialist on a daily basis, but not later than 1000 hours the following business day.
All Overtime/Compensatory Time slips and Overtime Rosters must be submitted no later
than 0900 hours on the Monday, following the close of each pay period, for payment to be
made with the closed payroll.

F. A Police Lieutenant (or equivalent civilian supervisor) or above shall approve all
Overtime/Compensatory/Off-Duty Time Forms (5600-86) and Overtime Rosters (5100-07
and 5500-12).
XIV. Military Leave Procedures
A. Military Leave Procedure Guidelines are codified in the Administrative Personnel Policy and
Procedure Manual.
B. The City of Little Rock and the Little Rock Police Department are proud supporters of the
National Guard and Reserves. Supervisors should make all appropriate efforts to
accommodate the Guardsman or Reservist by rescheduling their workweek to allow them to
be off one (1) weekend a month for drills without the employees using Vacation or other
form of leave.
C. Police personnel who have received military orders to attend annual drills or are mobilized
for periods longer than their two (2) week drill shall submit a copy of those orders to the
Operations Support Section Lieutenant as soon as they become available to the employee.
1. While under military orders or during the scheduled weekend drill, Police personnel
shall not participate in any overtime or off-duty activity.
2. While an employee is under military orders, including weekend drills, the employee
may not work in a Police position in lieu of using accrued Military Leave or
available City leave.
3. Police personnel who have received Military orders should contact the Human
Resources Benefits Section to ensure all benefits are in place and the employee
understands their benefit options.
XV. City Property and Departmentally-Authorized Equipment
A. Employees are responsible for the proper use, maintenance, care and inventory accounting of
all City property issued to them, provided for their use, or assigned to their area of
responsibility. Employees, utilizing personally owned and departmentally approved
equipment, will be responsible for the proper use, maintenance, and care of such equipment.
1. Employees who have been assigned a laptop computer, or other issued equipment
and/or accessories unique to their assignment shall relinquish such equipment to the
Division Commander upon transferring to another division.
2. Employees who have been assigned cell phones or pagers will relinquish these to
their Division Commander if transferred. The Division Commander will then notify
the appropriate office of these changes.
B. Employees will immediately submit for inspection or testing, or will otherwise immediately
surrender any and all City property, as directed by a supervisor. Employees utilizing
personally owned and departmentally approved equipment will immediately submit such
equipment for inspection or testing, as directed by a supervisor.
C. In the event that it should become necessary to recover City property from an employee, the
employee will be instructed to physically return the property to Departmental custody within
a timeframe set by the Office of the Chief of Police.

XVI. Civilian Selection Process
A. The hiring of all civilian employees will be in accordance with the City of Little Rock’s
Administrative Policy and Procedures Manual.
B. Based on the results of the assessment process the City of Little Rock’s Human Resources
Department will provide a list of applicants to the hiring authority. The hiring authority will
ensure that the below steps are followed:
1. Verification of qualifying credentials;
2. Review of any criminal record; and,
3. Verification of at least three personal references.
C. Applicants should be periodically informed of the status of their applications. Applicant

contacts should be documented, logged, and retained in the applicant’s background file.
D. Once a decision has been made, recommendations shall be sent through the chain of
command for authorization to hire.
E. All necessary documentation will be forwarded to the City of Little Rock’s Human
Resources Department.
F. The hiring authority will in writing, notify all applicants not selected for employment.
G. All background files shall be retained for a period of one year of the date position was filled.
XVII. Employee Benefits
A. The City of Little Rock provides certain employee “fringe benefits”, as the result of
management policies of the City, Arkansas State law, and/or contract agreements with
recognized employee bargaining units. Such “fringe benefits” may include, depending upon
the employee’s classification and labor affiliation, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Vacation leave (A.C.A. § 14-52-106);
2. Sick Leave (A.C.A. § 14-52-107);
3. Sickness in Family Leave;
4. Maternity Leave;
5. Funeral Leave;
6. Overtime Compensation (FLSA)
7. Holiday Pay (A.C.A. § 14-52-105);
8. Personal Leave (Discretionary Days);
9. Grievance Procedures;
10. Seniority (A.C.A. § 14-51-309);

11. The Educational Incentive Pay Program; and,
12. Longevity Pay.
B. Employee “fringe benefits” and/or employee rights are further specifically described in the
following current publications:
1. Statement of Agreement, the City of Little Rock and the Fraternal Order of Police,
Lodge #17 (Police Sergeant and Police Officer classifications);
2. City of Little Rock Statement of Working Agreement, Non-uniformed Employees

(A.F.S.C.M.E. eligible classifications);
3. City of Little Rock Civil Service Commission Rules and Regulations;
4. Police Lieutenants, and above, and certain classifications of civilian employees are
governed by the City’s Employee Performance Appraisal System (E.P.A.S.);
5. The City of Little Rock Administrative Personnel Policy and Procedure Manual.
C. Salary scales (compensation classification and ranges) are detailed in each Statement of
Agreement and in the City’s Compensation Classification Manual.
D. The Staff Support Section shall maintain a current copy of all applicable publications.
XVIII. Employee Assistance Program
A. The City of Little Rock provides a counseling and referral service, at no cost, to all
employees through the Employee Assistance Program (E.A.P.).
B. Dependents and spouses of employees may also contact the E.A.P. for assistance.
C. All contacts with the E.A.P. will be held in confidence, unless the employee signs a specific
waiver of release.
D. Any employee, in need of the service, may contact the Southwest E.A.P. directly to make an
appointment (663-1797).
XIX. Recording Employees
A. The audio and/or visual recording of an employee (without his knowledge) by another
employee is prohibited, except with the prior authorization from the Office of the Chief of
Police.
XX. Time Allotted For Meals
A. Sworn personnel who work a straight eight (8) or ten (10) hour shift (i.e. 0700-1500, 0800-
1800, etc.) shall be allotted a maximum of thirty (30) minutes, when time permits, for a meal
per duty shift. Officers may be recalled to duty at any time a supervisory officer deems it
necessary.
B. No more than two (2) police vehicles will be allowed at any one location at the same time.
C. Officers will check out at a specific location for meals.

XXI. Registration of Sex and Child Offenders and Notifications
A. The Juvenile Squad maintains the registration records of the Sex and Child Offenders. The
notifications, regarding sex offenders living in the community are pursuant to Act 989 of
1997, Arkansas Annotated 12-12-901 thru 12-12-920. Coordinated efforts of all divisions
will be required for ensuring accurate and efficient notification in maintaining compliance
with Arkansas Annotated 12-12-901 thru 12-12-920. This order provides information
regarding the process that will be followed by the Department in this matter.
1. The Major Crimes Division Commander will be responsible for the community
notification process and the Juvenile Squad will manage the process. All questions
regarding the process or the offenders, offenders seeking to register, or in response
to Departmental correspondence, should be referred to the Juvenile Squad Sergeant
at 404-3018.
2. Acting through the Arkansas Department of Corrections, the Sex Offender

Assessment Committee will complete an assessment and send a risk analysis of
each offender to the Juvenile Squad. The Sex Offender Assessment Committee will
then inform the Juvenile Squad how to perform notifications and what risk level to
apply to the sex offender. The Juvenile Squad will then initiate the appropriate
community notification process.
a) Notification for Level 1 Low Risk offenders will include law enforcement
agencies and the household where the offender resides.
b) Notification for Level 2 Moderate Risk offenders will include that for
Level 1 offenders, plus schools (public, private and colleges); day care
centers; Neighborhood Crime Watches; known community and youth
groups; Parent Teachers Organizations; Boy and Girl Scout offices; sports
leagues and facilities; summer camps; religious facilities; libraries; state
agencies licensing or hiring individuals dealing with women, children, or
shelters; malls and shopping centers, parks, convenience stores or other
places known to be frequented by children or the offender within a one-
mile radius of the offender’s residence.
c) Notification for Level 3 High Risk offenders will include that for both
Level 1 and Level 2 offenders, plus a door-to-door canvas of all
households, within a three-block radius of the offender’s residence.
Prospective employers known to the Department will also be notified
regardless of location.
d) Notification for Level 4 Sexual Violent Predator will include that for
Levels 1 through 3. A public meeting will be conducted for Level 4
Offenders.
3. Officers from all divisions and in all assignments may be utilized, as necessary, for
community notifications. Officers participating in notifications will be briefed by
Juvenile Squad personnel and will complete the necessary documentation and return
it to the unit for maintenance.
4. Information released to the public will be in the form of a Community Notification

Flier, which will be produced by the Juvenile Squad. No other information
pertaining to the crime committed by the registered sex offender will be released to
the public other than what is printed on the Community Notification Flier.

XXII. Inter-Departmental Information Exchange
A. It is the policy of the Little Rock Police Department to foster cooperation and coordination
among all components by facilitating communication with these procedures:
1. Regular attendance of detectives at patrol roll calls and COPP meetings;
2. Regular distribution of information pertaining to current investigations;
3. Regular attendance of SID detectives at COPP meetings;
4. Periodic staff meetings between Division Commanders and the Office of the Chief
of Police; and,
5. Meetings conducted by the Chief of Police with all levels of personnel, including
civilians.
B. Crime Analysis is a valuable source for Departmental information. Information regularly

disseminated by Crime Analysis includes, but is not limited to:
1. Hot Sheets;
2. Weekly Incident Information Maps;
3. Bi-monthly detailed analysis of hot spots by area;
4. Monthly reports summarizing burglaries, robberies, auto thefts, and drive by

shootings; and,
5. Quarterly incident summaries provided to Division Captains and the Chief of

Police.
C. Officers who wish to obtain information or services from a Crime Analyst shall submit a
written request, through their chain of command, to their Division Commander.
1. Such requests shall specify:
a) What information or service is requested;
b) The intended purpose for which the information or service is to be used;

and,
c) Any deadlines applicable to the request.
2. The submitting officer’s Division Commander shall review the request and either
reject it or forward it, with his/her written approval, to the Technology Support
Lieutenant.
3. The Technology and Equipment Section Lieutenant shall examine the request and
either reject it or forward it to a Crime Analyst for scheduling and assignment.
4. The Technology and Equipment Section Lieutenant may reject a request if:
a) The request does not contain sufficient information for processing; or,

b) The purpose of the information or services conflicts with other

Departmental goals or objectives; or,
c) The requested deadline for the information or services cannot be met; or,
d) The information or service requested either cannot be produced or can be

more efficiently produced by other Department or governmental units.
5. The Technology and Equipment Section Lieutenant, or his designee, may contact
any person in the requesting officer’s chain of command, if necessary, for
clarification or assistance in accomplishing the assigned task.
6. This procedure does not preclude or inhibit information or services provided to

supervisors for Community Oriented Policing purposes or other services, as
enumerated by General Orders.
D. Citizen Requests for Statistical Information
1. Officers, who receive requests from private citizens or businesses for statistical
information, or other data compilation, shall direct such inquiries to the Public
Affairs/Crime Prevention Section.
2. The Public Affairs/Crime Prevention Section is provided routine statistical

information, which may be released to accommodate such requests.
3. The Department is under no legal obligation to produce, compile, or create

additional reports or data simply to comply with a citizen’s request for information.
XXIII. Inventory Control
A. The Chief of Police is responsible for requisitioning equipment, as approved by the annual
budget. Equipment must be maintained in serviceable condition and documents must be
prepared to transfer equipment, certify authenticity of annual inventory and account for
missing equipment.
B. All Divisions will assist the Administrative Services Manager with the physical inventory
and make their equipment, files and personnel available for inventory finalization.
C. The Little Rock Police Department adopts the City of Little Rock Procedure Guideline,
Index 3040, which establishes procedures for inventory of equipment. This Department will
follow those procedures.
D. Each Division Commander, or his designate, will ensure that all equipment assigned to his
Division be maintained in a state of operational readiness. “Operational readiness” includes
care and cleaning, preventive maintenance, repair, workability and responsiveness.
Supervisors will inspect equipment at regular intervals, designated by the Division
Commander, to ensure operational readiness.
XXIV. Forms Control System
A. To provide for efficient record keeping and information flow, it is necessary to establish a
system for creating, editing, numbering, finalizing, modifying and dissemination of all
departmental forms.

B. Departmental forms shall be created by the unit needing or proposing the form. The Staff
Support Section shall coordinate the editing, numbering, and formatting of all departmentally
generated forms.
C. For the purpose of this Order, a form shall be defined as a printed document with blank
spaces for insertion of requested, required or desired information in the Little Rock Police
Department format.
D. The L.R.P.D. format will include an assigned form control number. This number shall be
located in the lower right corner of the page following the letters “L.R.P.D.”. Forms shall be
of four digits, a hyphen and digits to the right of the hyphen; digits to the right of the hyphen
will be sequentially numbered by form. The following 4-digit format to the left of the
hyphen will be used:
1. 5000’s - Forms which are utilized Department-wide and issued by the

Administration Division;
2. 5100’s - Forms issued by the Special Investigations Division;
3. 5200’s - Forms issued by the Training Division;
4. 5400’s - Forms issued by the Major Crimes Division;
5. 5500’s - Forms issued by a Field Services Division;
6. 5600’s - Forms issued by the Headquarters Division; and
7. 5700’s - Forms issued by the Communications Center.
E. Divisional forms shall be defined as forms unique to a particular division. Divisional forms
will require the approval of the proposing division’s commander.
F. Departmental forms shall be defined as forms utilized by more than one division.
Departmental forms shall require staff review and approval of the Chief of Police.
G. After a new or revised divisional form has final approval, the Professional Standards Section
shall:
1. Assign a form control number;
2. Develop a master of the form, using the L.R.P.D. format; and;
3. Forward to the requesting Division Commander for final review. The Division
Commander shall be responsible for sending the request to the print shop and for
maintaining an adequate supply of forms used exclusively by the division.
H. A proposed new or revised departmental form shall be formatted by the Professional

Standards Section, minus the form control number, and forwarded for staff review and
approval by the Chief of Police.
I. After a departmental form has final approval, the Professional Standards Section shall:
1. Assign a forms control number;
2. Develop a master of the form using the L.R.P.D. format;

3. Forward to the Technology and Equipment Section Lieutenant. The Technology

and Equipment Section shall be responsible for maintaining an adequate inventory
of designated departmental forms. These forms shall be available through the
Vehicle Control Coordinator’s office.
J. A master list of all departmentally generated forms shall be maintained by Professional

Standards Section.
K. Any forms, determined no longer in use or necessary, will be removed from the master list
and placed in a dead file, maintained by the Professional Standards Section.
L. The Technology and Equipment Section Lieutenant shall be notified when a departmental
form is determined to be dead. This form shall be removed from stock and forwarded for
destruction or recycling.
M. As a divisional form becomes obsolete, the Division Commander shall be responsible for
notifying the Professional Standards Section. This form shall be removed from stock and
forwarded for destruction or recycling.
XXV. Contractual Agreements for Police Service
A. The Little Rock Police Department may, at the discretion of the Chief of Police, offer police
services through a contractual agreement.
B. Any time the Little Rock Police Department enters into a contractual agreement to provide
police services the written agreement will include:
1. A statement of the specific services to be provided;
2. Specific language dealing with financial agreements between the parties;
3. Specification of the records to be maintained, concerning the performance of

services by the provider agency;
4. Language dealing with the duration, modification, and termination of the contract;
5. Specific language dealing with legal contingencies;
6. Stipulation that the provider agency maintains control over its personnel;
7. Specific arrangements for the use of equipment and facilities; and,
8. A procedure for review and revision of the agreement, if needed.
C. Officers providing services through a contractual agreement shall have all employment
rights, promotional opportunities, training opportunities and benefits protected.
D. The Administrative Services Manager shall ensure that all contractual agreements for police
services, entered into by the Little Rock Police Department, comply with these provisions.
XXVI. Arrest Notification
A. Any employee of this Department, who is either charged in any jurisdiction with a criminal
offense or incarcerated for any reason, will immediately notify a supervisor.

B. The supervisor being notified will make an appropriate inquiry into the circumstances
surrounding the matter and will forward a report, in writing, to the Office of the Chief of
Police, prior to the end of the current shift.
XXVII. Business Cards
A. City Printed Business Cards
1. City printed business cards shall be available only for authorized civilian personnel
and sworn employees. These cards may only be ordered from the City Print Shop
with the approval of the appropriate Division Commander.
2. All orders or proofs of cards shall be forwarded to the appropriate Division

Commander for approval and submission to the print shop for printing.
3. Information contained on business cards must be police related only, and will not
include any other information that is not police related or related to an employee’s
off-duty employment or business(s).
4. Upon request of the appropriate Division Commander, generic business cards may
be obtained from the print shop for use by employees of their division.
5. A Division Commander, or his designate, shall place orders for printing from the
City Print Shop. No officer shall place an order directly to the Print Shop, without
authorization from the Division Commander.
B. Business Cards Purchased from Private Vendors
1. Any sworn employee, or authorized civilian personnel, may purchase business cards
from a private vendor at the employee’s expense.
2. If cards are purchased, non-police information shall not be included on any card
with Little Rock Police Department information. An example or description of the
card must be supplied with written request to the appropriate Division Commander
for approval.
3. Business cards related to an employee’s outside employment, and printed at an

employee’s expense, will not reference their employment at the Little Rock Police
Department, without the express written permission of the Office of the Chief of
Police.
XXVIII.Ride Along Program
A. The Ride Along Program allows interested citizens to accompany officers during their duties
so participants may gain a realistic view of the Little Rock Police Department’s line
operations. To provide this opportunity in a safe and responsible manner, the following
procedures are established:
B. The following persons are eligible to participate in the Ride Along Program:
1. College or University law enforcement oriented students engaged in research or

fulfilling project program requirements;
2. Members of concerned adult or youth groups over fifteen (15) years of age;

3. Police officers from other jurisdictions;
4. Visiting dignitaries; and,
5. Any adult or juvenile approved by a Shift or Section Commander.
C. Restrictions for Ride Along Program
1. Family members, relatives, persons with whom the officer has a close personal or
intimate relationship, ex-spouses and any involved children from any former
marriage or relationship (adopted or not) are prohibited from participating in the
Ride Along program with the involved officer.
2. Persons named in this section who are interested in participating in the Ride Along
program will be required to ride with another officer on a different shift or on the
involved officer’s day off following approval.
3. These restrictions are hereby mandated as a means to protect family and personal
relationships. Division Commanders and/or Shift Commanders will be held
responsible for ensuring strict compliance to these restrictions and will deny any
request that contradicts it or is otherwise questionable.
4. Persons participating in youth job shadowing assignments which do not constitute a

“ride along” in a patrol or field investigation environment are not necessarily
restricted by the confines of these guidelines. Division Commanders will closely
monitor these activities to ensure the assignment is appropriate.
D. Procedure for Ride Along
1. Authorization
a) All requests to participate in the Ride Along program, excluding those

requests approved personally by a Shift or Section Commander shall be
referred to the affected Division Commander.
b) The Shift or Section Commander may disallow any person's participation

as a Ride Along if, in his opinion, such participation may jeopardize any
objective of the Department.
E. Waiver and Instructions
1. Prior to participation, a waiver of liability form and instructions to the Ride Along
participants must be completed.
2. If the applicant is under 18, the parent or guardian must sign the waiver.
F. Record Check
1. A criminal record and active warrant check shall be conducted on all Ride Along
applicants other than law enforcement officials.
G. Officers assigned a Ride Along participant shall:
1. Advise the participant that the officer is subject to respond to all types of situations
from routine to dangerous;

2. Advise the participant that he must obey any legal order given by the officer;
3. Assess each situation and take every possible step to minimize any risk to the Ride
Along participant;
4. Prohibit Ride Alongs from accompanying an officer into the scene of any
potentially dangerous situation (Robberies in progress, burglaries in progress,
disturbances, felony warrant arrests, hostage or barricaded suspects, mentally ill
persons, etc.); and,
a) No Ride Along participant shall be allowed to remain on the private

property of any citizen if the citizen objects to their presence.
5. Report any misconduct on the part of a Ride Along participant to a supervisor

immediately. The supervisor or assigned officer may terminate the individual's
privilege to participate in the Ride Along Program at any time.
XXIX. Storage of Department Issued Equipment in Vehicles
A. The following Departmental issued equipment: firearms, radios, computers, badges, and
identification/access cards will be subject to the following storage guidelines.
1. Personally Owned Vehicles - The storage of these items in the passenger

compartment of personally owned vehicles while the vehicle is unattended is
prohibited. The storage of these items in the trunk or other locked compartment of a
vehicle overnight or during any other extended period of time is prohibited.
2. Unmarked and Undercover Department Vehicles - The storage of these items in the
passenger compartment of unmarked and undercover department vehicles is
prohibited, except during emergency situations when the officer is required to
rapidly exit the vehicle in the performance of their duties. Even under emergency
situations, the vehicle and contents should be secured as soon as practical.
Equipment may be secured in the trunk for a short period of time if the remote trunk
access in the passenger compartment has been disabled; storage of these items in the
trunk overnight or during any other extended period of time is prohibited.
3. Marked Department Vehicles – Personally issued Departmental equipment shall not

be left in the passenger compartment of a marked vehicle while on-duty unless the
officer properly locks the vehicle or can maintain an unobstructed view of the
vehicle. Emergency situations could hamper the officer’s ability to secure the car
depending upon the incident; however, the vehicle and its contents should be
secured as soon as practical. For personnel assigned a take-home marked unit,
personally issued Departmental equipment (equipment not permanently mounted in
the vehicle) shall not be left in the passenger compartment. Equipment may be
secured in the trunk for a short period of time if the remote trunk access in the
passenger compartment has been disabled. Firearms, radios, badges, and
identification/access cards will not be left in the vehicle overnight or during any
other extended period of time.
B. Personnel who are found negligent may be required to reimburse the Department for the cost
of replacing the equipment, and will be subject to the appropriate disciplinary action.

XXX. Search of Equipment and Electronic Records
A. Certain equipment and electronic communication devices including, but not limited to squad
cars, computers and cellular telephones issued to employees by the Department for business
use are the property of the City of Little Rock and subject to search at any time it is deemed
necessary for maintenance of discipline, security purposes, or Internal Affairs investigations.
Employees are expressly notified that no right of privacy exists for searches of such City-
owned property. Additionally, there may be occasions, depending on the specific facts and
circumstances, when employee lockers and desks may be subject to search in order to
facilitate investigations. This also applies to cellular telephones that are owned by an
employee who conducts Department business on the cellular telephone. Employees should
also be aware that business related emails, texts, and telephone records stored on employee-
owned cellular telephones are subject to the provisions of the Arkansas Freedom of
Information Act.
XXXI. Retirement Protocol
A. Upon retirement and request by the officer, the Department may release an officer’s badge,
weapon and credentials under the following circumstances:
1. When an officer retires from the Department after serving a full term of employment
of 20 years for officers on the old pension plan and 28 years for officers on the
LOPFI retirement plan. This would also include officers on the LOPFI retirement
plan who have the combination of service years and age to qualify for an immediate
full-benefit retirement. Officers shall provide a copy of the LOPFI Retirement
Verification Letter to the Office of the Chief of Police; and submit LRPD retirement
form (5000-17) or,
2. When an officer is forced to retire prematurely as a result of an on-duty injury

resulting in medical disability which physically prevents them from being able to
function as a police officer. Officers shall provide a copy of the LOPFI Retirement
Verification Letter to the Office of the Chief of Police; and submit LRPD retirement
form (5000-17).
B. Upon retirement and request by the officer, the Department may release an officer’s
credentials and badge under the following circumstances:
1. When an officer retires upon receiving a non-duty related medical disability which
physically prevents them from being able to function as a police officer.
C. The Department will not release an officer’s badge, weapon or credentials under the
following circumstances:
1. When there are issues regarding an officer’s mental or physical capabilities to

possess a firearm.
D. Any request from an officer to purchase their weapon or badge that does not fall into one of
the above categories will be denied.
E. The Chief of Police, or his/her designee, will review each request and make the final
determination.


GENERAL ORDER
G. O. 109 MEDIA RELATIONS AND INFORMATION RELEASES

I. Purpose
A. This Order shall establish guidelines for relations with members of the media, the release of police
information and response to F.O.I. Act requests.
B. In all matters of interest to the public, the Little Rock Police Department will maintain open
communications emphasizing a balance between the citizen's right to know and the constitutional
rights of the accused.
C. The Department will work with the media to ensure that information is provided on a timely and
factual basis whenever possible by arranging for, and assisting at, news conferences.
D. Contacts between the news media and the police will be conducted in a courteous, professional
manner.
E. Whenever changes are made concerning public information policies and procedures, the Public
Affairs Section may seek input from the news media in order to establish a more effective working
relationship.
F. The Public Affairs Section, when requested, shall assist in crisis situations within the Department
as well as outside the Department.
II. Major Incidents
A. Public Affairs Officer Notification
1. The Public Affairs Officer (P.A.O.) will serve as the primary point of contact for staff
information and notification of critical incidents, as detailed in this Policy.
2. It is the responsibility of on-duty supervisors to notify the P.A.O. of the following listed
events. The P.A.O. will then notify the Chief of Police of these incidents.
a) All murders;
b) Attempted murders or shootings of more than one person in a single incident;
c) All police-related deadly force incidents;
d) All incidents in which any City employee, is injured or arrested;
e) All traffic accidents involving fatalities and City vehicle accidents which results
in death or serious injury to any person;

GENERAL ORDERS G. O. 109 MEDIA RELATIONS AND INFORMATION RELEASES
f) Any incident, which constitutes a civil disturbance or disaster, such as riots,

large-scale demonstrations, natural disasters, or any other type of civil disorder
or disaster, which threatens human life or property in the City; and,
g) Any incident where there may be a question as to the agency’s liability or those
which may result in heightened community interest.
3. The P.A.O. will notify the City Manager, or designee, of the facts by telephone
immediately, if before 2100, or at 0600 hours the following morning. The P.A.O. will
also ensure that a brief summary of the incident is provided to the Chief of Police by
0900 hours the same day. This summary shall indicate that City Manager notification was
made pursuant to this Order.
4. All other Chain of Command incident notification requirements, prescribed throughout

the General Orders, will remain unaffected by this Order.
5. In the event the P.A.O. is not available, the Assistant Public Affairs Officer will be the
point of contact.
B. Media Safety
1. If an incident may attract media attention, a supervisor will respond to the scene, evaluate
the situation, and determine the need for notification of the P.A.O. or their designee.
a) The P.A.O. or their designee should be notified whenever their services will
assist the on-scene officers in handling media requests.
b) When the Little Rock Police Department is not the primary investigating agency,
information concerning the investigation will be referred to the primary
investigating agency.
2. If media representatives are at the scene, a supervisor and/or the P.A.O. or their designee
shall determine the best assembly point for media members.
a) For safety, media members will be directed to an area adjacent to the command
post, if one has been established, or to the on-scene commander or P.A.O. or
their designee.
C. Police Scene Access
1. Access by media representatives to a police scene will be controlled by the supervisor in

charge of the incident.
a) Yellow crime scene tape should be used to define all restricted areas.
b) Media access to any specific area wherein evidence could be destroyed or

compromised will be temporarily denied.

G. O. 109 MEDIA RELATIONS AND INFORMATION RELEASES LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
c) Media access may be limited when the presence of the media would interfere
with a police operation.
2. Media representatives should not be excluded from the general vicinity of crime scenes,
accident scenes, major fires, natural disasters and other catastrophic events. For safety
purposes, the news media should coordinate their activities with the P.A.O. or their
designee. The P.A.O. will act as a liaison during these types of incidents. The P.A.O. will
be responsible for the information gathering, preparation, and dissemination of
information to the news media representatives.
3. Photographers will not be restricted from taking pictures at a crime or accident scene.
4. The media shall not be denied access to an area where the public is allowed.
a) There are no restrictions that apply to taking pictures from public property.
b) If any media representatives (including photographers) are on private property

and the owner or custodian of that property requests that they leave the premises,
officers shall ask the media to move to public property.
5. Photographs may be taken of a suspect in transit but the suspect will not be posed by an
employee.
6. Officers at the scene of an incident may answer general questions from the media
concerning the facts surrounding the incident. This information should be restricted to
that detailed in this General Order.
D. Reports to the Public Affairs Section.
1. A copy of Offense Reports concerning the following types of incidents will be forwarded
to the P.A.O. immediately after completion:
a) Homicide;
b) Bank robbery;
c) Fatal accidents;
d) School related incidents;
e) Major fires;
f) Disasters or catastrophes;
g) Officer injuries; and,
h) Any police incident which attracted media attention.

III. Release of Information
A. Departmental Operations
1. Statements of policy and information regarding organizational changes or disciplinary

actions shall originate from the Office of the Chief of Police.
2. Employees shall not make a public address or write for publication concerning the affairs
of the Department without the written authorization of the Chief of Police.
3. Employees, both sworn and civilian, will not communicate, disclose or release
information involving departmental matter(s) that may lead to public scrutiny without
authorization by the Office of the Chief of Police or their designee. At no time shall;
employees comment on any rumor(s) relating to any Departmental activities or matters.
Any violation(s) of this General Order may result in discipline, up to and including
termination
4. Disclosure of job related information to other members of the Department will be on

a need-to-know basis only. Work papers and documents within an office, on or in a desk,
or computer files and disks are not intended for general viewing and all employees are
prohibited from attempting to observe or read such papers. This Order is not intended to
restrict the flow of information within the Department, but is necessary to preserve the
confidentiality of information.
5. The disclosure of recorded information or any information concerning departmental

operations is prohibited unless there is a determined "need to know"; the information is
needed by another criminal justice agency; or it is required by law to be disclosed.
Personnel are expressly prohibited from the disclosure or discussion of departmental
information of a confidential nature, information that might jeopardize the success of a
tactical operation, investigative information, or information that might violate the
individual’s right to privacy. Unless specifically authorized, no information will be
released without a request in writing from the person/agency seeking the information
6. The following information may be released upon request:
a) The facts and circumstances of an arrest including time and place, any resistance,
pursuit and the use of weapons by either the suspect or the officer;
b) The suspect’s name, age, residence and occupation (except related to juveniles
as outlined in this Order);
c) The identity of the arresting and investigating officer if it does not compromise
the officer and/or a police operation;
d) The charges on the suspect and a brief description of the elements of the offense;
and,
e) Any victim and/or witness information listed on a police incident report, except
for sexual assault victims.
f) For arrest information concerning juveniles refer to this Order.

7. Employees shall not instruct a victim or complainant not to talk to the media unless
special circumstances exist that would affect the prosecution of the case. The Public
Affairs Section shall be notified to facilitate media liaison relating to the particular
incident and the special circumstances.
8. The following information shall not be released:
a) Contents or existence of any statement, admission or confession;
b) Personal opinions regarding the suspect, evidence or any matter pertaining to an

investigation;
c) Any statements concerning anticipated testimony or the truthfulness of

witnesses;
d) The results of laboratory tests except official Medical Examiner’s reports on

cause of death or blood/breath results; and,
e) The names of victims, both civilians and officers, injured or killed until the next
of kin has been notified.
9. The Chief of Police may authorize the release of any information deemed appropriate.
IV. Information from Police Files
A. Employees shall not release information from Departmental files except in the following cases:
1. Offense Reports, including Supplemental Reports as required;
2. Accident Reports;
3. Conviction information;
4. Pursuant to Freedom of Information request as governed by Arkansas State Statutes and

Departmental Policy; and,
5. No report will be copied for distribution outside the Department until a supervisor has
signed it, listed on a submission form and verified that the original report has been
received in the Records Section.
B. Arrest information related to juveniles shall not be disclosed to the public unless:
1. Authorized by a written order of the Juvenile Court; or,
2. The arrest or proceedings result in the juvenile being formally charged in Circuit Court
for a felony; or,
3. The juvenile is charged with a traffic offense.

C. Offense Reports involving juveniles may be released only when the name and all pertinent
identifying information has been deleted or authorized under the guidelines of this order.
V. Internal Investigation Information
A. Inquiries into personnel investigations shall be referred to the Office of the Chief of Police.
B. Employees shall not discuss these matters with non-Departmental personnel.
VI. News Releases
A. News releases concerning the Department will be coordinated with the Public Affairs Section. All
information released will be documented and forwarded to the office of the P.A.O. before the end
of the shift.
B. Routine newsworthy information should be released by the Public Affairs Section. In their
absence, a supervisor may release routine newsworthy information. This section shall not apply to
officers at the scene of an incident described in section II, B, of this Order.
VII. F.O.I. Requests
A. The Arkansas Freedom of Information Act (“FOIA”) requires that all public records not subject to
an exemption from the FOIA be made available immediately upon request unless the records are in
active use or in storage. If in use or in storage, the public records must be made available within
three working days of the time the request is received. The following guidelines will govern all
FOIA requests.
1. The Police Chief is the custodian of Little Rock Police Department records. Any
department personnel who receive a written request for documents under the FOIA, with
the exception of police reports, which will continue to be handled at the divisional level,
shall immediately forward the request directly to the Chief’s office using the quickest
method of delivery. If possible, the request should be transmitted by fax machine so as
not to delay the decision as to whether the records must be released. Upon receipt of the
request by the Chief’s office, it shall be immediately referred to the Public Affairs Section
for further handling.
2. If the FOIA request is made orally, the employee receiving the request shall ask that the
request be made in writing in order to expedite the department’s response. However, if
the person making the request refuses to do so, the employee shall complete an Officer’s
Report Form containing the date and time of the request, the identity of the person making
the request, a means of contacting the person and the information requested. This form
shall then be forwarded to the Chief’s Office in the same manner as written requests.

B. Upon receipt of the FOIA request, the Public Affairs Section shall determine the type of records
requested. If the request is for the personnel records of department employees, the person making
the request shall be informed that the department maintains some personnel records which may be
subject to disclosure but that the City of Little Rock Human Resources Department is the custodian
of the official personnel files of all City employees. The person should also be advised that before
personnel records maintained by the department can be disclosed, the employee whose records are
requested must be notified and the City Attorney’s Office consulted. The person should also be
informed that this process will be handled according to the provisions of the FOIA. If they have
immediate questions about that process, they may call the City Attorney’s Office.
C. If the request is for documents contained in an ongoing criminal investigative file or a file
compiled by the Internal Affairs Division, the Public Affairs Section shall follow the following
guidelines:
1. Files involving ongoing criminal investigations are not subject to disclosure; however,
when the investigation is closed by administrative action, or closed by arrest, the records
become subject to disclosure. Any F.O.I.A. request for a case file will be forwarded by
the Public Affairs Section to the investigating unit’s Division Commander who will
inquire as to the status of the file. The Division Commander will determine the following:
a) If the case is open, open case files are not releasable under F.O.I.A. Open cases
are cases where arrest(s) have not been made, arrests have been made but more
are anticipated, or the case has been transferred to other agency investigators for
further investigation. If the case is open, the Division Commander will forward a
memo to the Public Affairs Section stating the reason the file is not releasable at
this time. The memo will be attached to the original F.O.I.A. request and the
Public Affairs Section will notify the requestor of the outcome of the request in
writing, if necessary.
b) If the case is closed and releasable, the Division Commander will forward a copy
of the file to the Public Affairs Section. The Division Commander will make
sure all ACIC, NCIC, and other protected information is redacted from the
copied file before forwarding. The Public Affairs Section will also review the
file for information that is not releasable under the F.O.I.A. laws.
2. Internal Affairs investigative files contain employee evaluations or job performance

records which are not releasable under the F.O.I.A. law unless the investigation resulted
in the suspension, demotion or termination of an employee and then only certain
documents in that file are releasable. If a request is received for information from an
Internal Affairs file, the Public Affairs Section will forward the request to the Internal
Affairs Unit where the Internal Affairs Commander will review the file and determine if it
resulted in a suspension, demotion or termination. If the file resulted in a suspension,
demotion or termination, the Internal Affairs Commander will forward a copy of the
Notice of Intent and the suspension, demotion or termination letter to the Public Affairs
Section. If the investigation did not result in a suspension, demotion or termination, the
Internal Affairs Commander will forward a memo to the Public Affairs Section stating the
reason the file is not releasable. The memo will be attached to the original F.O.I.A.
request and the Public Affairs Section will notify the requestor of the outcome of the
request in writing, if necessary.
D. Official F.O.I.A. requests should not be confused with normal questions asked by news reporters
on a daily basis. Questions concerning crime, accidents and other normal police operations will
continue to be handled as established by policy.

E. If a F.O.I.A. request is made and there is some uncertainty about whether the information is subject
to release, the request will be forwarded as soon as possible to the Public Affairs Section. The
Public Affairs Section will inform the Chief of Police of the request and the request will be
forwarded to the City Attorney for determination if the documents requested are releasable under
F.O.I.A. If the City Attorney determines the information requested is releasable, the information
will be released according to this policy. If the City Attorney determines the information is not
releasable, the Public Affairs Section will attach the opinion of the City Attorney to the original
F.O.I.A. request and notify the requestor in writing, if necessary, of the City Attorney’s decision.

GENERAL ORDER
G. O. 110 COURT APPEARANCES

I. Court Appearances – General
A. Employees will attend at the time and place indicated when served in person or by telephone with
a subpoena.
B. Attire
1. Male employees shall wear the police uniform or a suit and tie when appearing in court in
a capacity related to official duties. A dress shirt and tie is acceptable for extremely
warm weather.
2. Female employees shall wear the police uniform or a dress, skirt and blouse or pants suit
when appearing in court in a capacity related to official duties.
3. Jeans, denims and casual clothing are not acceptable for court appearances.
4. No identifiable part of the uniform will be worn when appearing in court as litigants or
witnesses in personal matters which are not related to official duties (e.g. divorce, child
custody hearing, etc.).
5. Employees may carry their weapons when appearing in court. (Exceptions: The Federal
Courts require all police officers to surrender their weapon to the U.S. Marshall prior to
entering the courtroom. Officers will surrender their weapon to a court official if any
judge so orders.)
C. Procedure
1. Employees will appear punctually for court appearances.
2. Employees who have a pending felony case in any court shall contact the appropriate
Prosecuting Attorney to discuss the facts and circumstances surrounding the case.
3. Officers will not discuss the facts and circumstances of any case with any defense
attorney unless authorized by the Prosecuting Attorney handling the case.
4. Employees will be responsible for obtaining related evidence from the Property Room
and shall return the evidence when released by the court. Evidence held by the court will
require the employee to obtain a court receipt which will be returned to the Property
Room.

GENERAL ORDERS G. O. 110 COURT APPEARANCES
5. Employees will not linger in court after their release by the court. If the case is
rescheduled, the employee shall return to his assignment until his appearance is needed.
Any deviation from this Policy requires the approval of a supervisor.
D. Absence
1. Employees who are going to be on military leave, attending an out of city school or on
vacation for more than five consecutive working days shall submit a written notification
of their absence. The notice will be on an Officer’s Report which will be submitted
through the Chain of Command, at least four weeks prior to the requested dates. The
notice will be submitted to the Subpoena Service Officer for processing.
2. It is the responsibility of each employee confronted with an emergency, serious illness, or

death in the family, etc., to contact the Prosecuting Attorney and/or the Court Bailiff as
soon as reasonably possible but no later than two hours before the scheduled court time to
request the case be passed. The officer making the request is responsible for ascertaining
the new court date, if passed.
3. Employees who are on authorized leave as a result of an on the job injury shall honor all
subpoenas unless the injury physically incapacitates the employee to the extent that his
appearance is impossible.
II. Subpoenas
A. Employees will accept all subpoenas legally served and will be available at the designated time.
Suspended employees are required to testify when subpoenaed and will be compensated.
B. The Headquarters Division Commander is responsible for ensuring the proper handling of all
subpoenas for the Department.
C. The Subpoena Service Officer will be responsible for the actual receipt, distribution and return of
all subpoenas.
1. The Subpoena Service Officer will forward the subpoenas to the appropriate Division or
Shift, where a supervisor will serve the subpoenas to the designated employee(s). Upon
receipt of the subpoena(s), the employee will immediately sign and date the top copy of
the subpoena(s) then return the signed copy to the issuing supervisor. The supervisor will
return the signed copy to the Subpoena Service Officer.
2. The Subpoena Service Officer will make every effort to serve the officer even when a
subpoena is received that is three days or less from the court date. The service may be
made by calling the officer collect if necessary to make proper notification.
3. The Subpoena Service Officer shall return the subpoena unserved to the court issuing the
subpoena if all reasonable efforts to serve the subpoena have failed.
D. No employee of the Little Rock Police Department will accept a civil subpoena for service upon
another employee.
a) An individual attempting to serve a civil subpoena shall be directed to the

subpoenaed employee’s assigned location and advised of the employee’s duty
hours and days off.

G. O. 110 COURT APPEARANCES LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
E. The Subpoena Service Officer shall not accept any civil subpoena for service.
III. Testifying for the Defendant
A. Any employee who is subpoenaed or volunteers to testify for the defense in any criminal or civil
trial or hearing or any case against the City or Department, shall notify his Division Commander
in writing.
1. The notification will be on an Officer’s Report Form and will be completed immediately
upon the receipt of the subpoena or upon his intention to testify or prior to this
appearance as a witness.
2. This Section does not apply to the appeal of Departmental disciplinary actions.
B. Any employee who is subpoenaed to give a deposition or affidavit to anyone other than the City
Attorney or Prosecuting Attorney shall immediately notify his Division Commander in writing.
1. The notification will be on an Officer’s Report Form and will be completed immediately
upon the receipt of the subpoena.
2. The notification will immediately be forwarded to the Office of the Chief of Police.
3. This Section does not apply to the appeal of Departmental disciplinary actions.
IV. Court Overtime
A. Officers will be allowed overtime or compensatory time off as mandated by the existing Statement
of Agreement.
B. Restrictions
1. For the purpose of this Section, the term “court” shall be defined as appearances in
Municipal Court, Circuit Court (Civil or Chancery Court appearances which are a result
of employment with the City), Federal District Court, Juvenile Court, Probate Court,
Parole Revocation Hearings or before a Grand Jury when under subpoena. It does not
include personal appearances not related to police duties.
2. Depositions, sworn statements or court appearances which are related to personal

lawsuits against the City or other persons or entities will be conducted on the officer’s
own time.
C. Procedures - Municipal, Circuit, Federal, Juvenile, Chancery, Probate Courts and Parole
Revocation Hearings.
1. Officers shall complete a Little Rock Police Department Daily Overtime Form for their
appearance in Municipal, Circuit, Federal, Juvenile, Chancery, Probate Court and Parole
Revocation Hearings.
2. The “time in” will be the appearance time indicated on the subpoena.

GENERAL ORDERS G. O. 110 COURT APPEARANCES
3. Officers shall show the “time out” as soon as they are released by the court and/or the
Prosecuting Attorney.
4. The overtime form will be presented to the court bailiff for approval.
5. Should an Officer desire “Compensatory Time Worked” in lieu of overtime for their
court appearance, they should properly fill out their Overtime Form.
6. Officers will route court overtime forms to their supervisor for approval and submission
to the payroll clerk.

GENERAL ORDER
G.O. 111 INSPECTIONS
DATE: DISTRIBUTION: REPLACES:

NUMBER:
I. Purpose
A. The Little Rock Police Department shall maintain an inspection function to ensure compliance
and uniformity in the conduct of Departmental operations.
B. To establish guidelines for conducting line inspections. Inspections shall encompass areas
including agency administrative and operational activities, facilities, property, equipment and
personnel.
II. Authority and Principle
A. The inspection function serves as an information-gathering mechanism for the Chief of Police.
The Inspector, as the designee of the Chief of Police, shall have the same access to information
as would be afforded to the Chief of Police, when acting within the context of the inspection
function.
B. The following principles shall guide the conduct of all inspections. An inspection is a service
to the unit being inspected. The process will focus on operations, systems and procedures, not
individuals. The process will be accomplished with a positive approach. The process will be
conducted fairly, impartially, and objectively.
III. Definitions
A. Line Inspection - Inspection conducted by personnel in control of the persons, facilities,

procedures, or other elements being inspected.
B. Compliance Check - Inspection conducted specifically to ensure compliance with CALEA

standards.
C. Inspections Coordinator – The Chief of Police has designated the Professional Standards
Section Lieutenant to act as the Inspections Coordinator, managing the inspections function.
The Inspections Coordinator shall be organizationally located to ensure accessibility to the
Office of the Chief of Police and of sufficient rank to function effectively.

GENERAL ORDERS G.O. 111 INSPECTIONS
IV. Line Inspections Procedures
A. On-going - Informal line inspections shall be performed continuously during everyday

management by supervisory personnel in order to gauge the efficiency of personnel and correct
any deficiencies. Formal monthly inspections shall be performed by line supervisors using the
Monthly Line Inspection Report form. Original Inspection forms shall be retained by the
Watch/Section/Unit Lieutenant, for one year from the date of the inspection. Each Lieutenant
shall submit to their Division Commander a written report summarizing the inspection,
including deficiencies and what measures were taken to correct them.
B. Areas subject to inspection may include, but will not be limited to:
1. Facilities, property and equipment assigned to the component;
2. Vehicles and assigned equipment;
3. Personnel - Appearance, uniforms and equipment;
4. General Order and Divisional Operating Procedure Manuals;
5. Policy compliance.
C. Component supervisors shall be responsible for correcting deficiencies and providing

documentation thereof.
D. A copy of all inspections, monthly reports, and reports documenting deficiencies that have
been corrected will be forwarded to the Inspections Coordinator.
E. The Inspections Coordinator may conduct follow-up spot inspections to ensure deficiencies
have been corrected.

GENERAL ORDER
G. O. 112 COMPUTER INFORMATION SECURITY

09/21/2015 DEPARTMENTAL G.O. 112(06/13/2010) G. O. 112
I. General
A. All police computer systems, (including but not limited to the Records Management System
(RMS), Computer Aided Dispatch system, Mobile Data Computers, Workstations, Laptops,
Notebooks and the City-wide network, hardware and software, are for the official use of Police
Department employees and are intended to improve the efficiency and effectiveness of
departmental operations.
B. Operation of the above systems must be in accordance with established security measures as
described in Administrative Policy and Procedures, Section IX and as outlined below. Access
shall be limited by security settings as determined by the employee’s Division Commander and
training level. Records and information maintained by the Little Rock Police Department are
for the exclusive use of departmental employees only and shall not be disseminated to persons
who are not affiliated with a bona fide law enforcement agency or as directed by command
supervisors.
II. Security for Computer Systems
A. Each employee must complete the Network Users Agreement and will be required to complete
the appropriate application forms for a User-ID number in order to gain access to the systems
they will need to accomplish their assigned tasks. The completed forms shall be forwarded to
the Technology and Equipment Section.
B. Technology and Equipment Section personnel shall be the only departmental employees
authorized to issue User-ID numbers and shall determine, based upon the employee’s duties
and level of training, the level of access to the R.M.S., Arkansas Crime Information System and
National Crime Information System, Computer Aided Dispatch System, and Mobile Data
Computers (M.D.C.).
C. Each employee who seeks access to any police system shall do so with their own unique User-
ID number and password and shall access only those files and records as specified by their
security level and job description. When not in use, systems shall be locked using the
Windows software application or logged off to prevent unauthorized entry.
1. No employee shall attempt to modify any record or file which would be illegal or
which tends to impair the operation of this department in its administration of justice.
No employee shall attempt to make changes, delete any file or record contained in the
R.M.S., the Arkansas Crime Information System, the National Crime Information
System, or the Computer Aided Dispatch System without proper authorization.
2. All entries, inquiries, modifications and attempted deletions are recorded in electronic
logs which are maintained by the Office of Information Technology and reviewed on a
semi-annual basis by an employee designated by the Chief of Police.

GENERAL ORDERS G. O. 112 COMPUTER INFORMATION SECURITY
3. Any discovered attempt to modify or delete any file or record, or the removal or
disabling of any security software installed, which tends to impair the operation of this
department, will be documented and forwarded through the Chain of Command to the
Technology and Equipment Section.
D. No employee shall use another employee’s Network User-ID and password or local account
User-ID and password nor shall any employee attempt to secure the User-ID and password of
another employee. Only the employee or his/her supervisors, after verification of identity,
shall receive User-ID and password information. Unauthorized attempts to obtain such
information shall be reported to the offender’s Division Commander for investigation.
1. Passwords, access code assignments, file permissions and access violations shall be
audited on an annual basis.
E. Those employees who have State and National computer system security shall access those
files and records in accordance with specific training provided for the use of the State and
National computer systems.
1. Information retrieved from State and National computer files and the National Law
Enforcement Telecommunications System (N.L.E.T.S.) is intended for official police
use only and the dissemination of this information to non-criminal justice individuals
is strictly prohibited and could subject the offender to criminal and civil penalties
[A.C.A. § 12-12-212].
2. Each employee who has State and National computer access must be re-certified every
two years to maintain security authorization. Failure will result in immediate
suspension of access and the employee will be required to attend the basic Terminal
Operator course to obtain certification.
3. Any employee who disseminates Criminal History information from any State or
National computer system must log that dissemination into a Criminal History log that
shall be maintained within areas where State and National Criminal History
information may be gained.
a) Dissemination of Criminal History information as described above must be to

Criminal Justice officials, outside the LRPD organization, authorized to
receive Criminal History information.
b) The Criminal Justice official receiving the information must be identified by

organization, name, employee number or social security number, address and
phone number along with the date and time the information was
disseminated.
c) Completed Criminal History log sheets shall be maintained in the Criminal

History logbook until such time as the designated members of the A.C.I.C.
Terminal Agency Coordinator, (T.A.C.) collects them.
d) Criminal History logs must be available for inspection during normal

business hours.
4. All requests for new R.M.S. programs or applications, the modification of current
programs or applications or the addition of information to code tables effecting any

G. O. 112 COMPUTER INFORMATION SECURITY LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
R.M.S. application shall be forwarded through the employee’s chain of command to

the Technology and Equipment Lieutenant.
a) Only employees designated by the Chief of Police are authorized to contact

the Office of Information Technology Programmers and request changes or
modifications to any system.
b) Unauthorized attempts to change or modify any program or application shall

be documented by O.I.T. and forwarded to the Office of the Chief of Police.
5. The Records Compliance Specialist will ensure compliance with all requirements set
forth by A.C.I.C and N.C.I.C. Policies and Procedures, Departmental General Orders,
CALEA Standards, and will review all requests.
6. All requests for assistance, investigation of file activity or mistakes on the part of any
employee or specific user information, from the Office of Information Technology,
shall be routed through the Technology and Equipment Lieutenant.
F. Any supervisor who needs additional training for their employees or any employee who desires
additional training on the R.M.S., Arkansas Crime Information System, the National Crime
Information System, the Computer Aided Dispatch System, or the Mobile Data Computer,
should contact the Technology and Equipment Lieutenant to schedule the requested training.
III. Special Investigations Computer Systems
A. A Systems Administrator, designated by the Special Investigations Division Commander will

be assigned the responsibility for all computer security, access and the operation of computer
systems unique to the Special Investigation Division. Each employee will use a unique
password and system login as designated by the Systems Administrator.
B. The Systems Administrator shall be the only division employee authorized to issue user login
and passwords and shall determine, based upon the user’s duties, the level of access to
computer systems unique to the Special Investigations Division.
1. The Systems Administrator will maintain and audit on a quarterly basis the login files
for unauthorized access and the completeness of the password list.
C. The Systems Administrator shall be responsible for backing up computer systems located in the
Special Investigations Division on a weekly basis. Other backup routines may be performed as
needed. Backup tapes will be stored off premise in a lock box maintained by the Special
Investigations Division.
IV. Mobile Data Computers
A. General
1. Mobile Data Computers have been installed in police vehicles to assist officers in the
execution of efficient police functions and to reduce the amount of radio traffic
necessary to conduct police operations.

GENERAL ORDERS G. O. 112 COMPUTER INFORMATION SECURITY
2. Officers have been trained in the use and care of the Mobile Data Computer and are
expected to use this equipment in accordance with instructions provided. Mobile Data
Computers were designed and have been programmed to provide information from
local, State and National computer files on persons, vehicles and other property.
a) Officers shall use the Mobile Data Computer to check information on

persons, vehicles, and other property and shall not request Central
Communications conduct these types of transactions.
b) The only exceptions to this Order will be when an officer needs a printout of
the information for inclusion with other reports or does not have a Mobile
Data Computer or the Mobile Data Computer is not functioning properly.
c) If the unit is not functioning properly, officers are expected to request repairs
as soon as possible during the normal working hours of the Office of
Information Technology or the next business day the Office of Information
Technology is open.
d) Employees will not change any settings on the computer which disable or
interfere with its normal functions.
3. Officers shall log on with their designated User-ID and password. Officers shall not
use another employee’s User-ID and password to obtain access to the system. At the
end of shift, officers shall log off the Mobile Data Computer system.
V. Departmental Workstations and Laptops
A. The use of all departmental computer systems shall be for official police business only.
B. Employees shall ensure all computer equipment is kept clean and shall request necessary
repairs or replacement through the Special Assignments Lieutenant, or any person authorized
to submit a Help Desk ticket, who shall submit a Help Desk ticket to the Office of Information
Technology.
1. Employees who experience difficulties logging into the City-wide network may call
918-5288 and ask the Help Desk person to assist the employee gaining access to the
Network.
a) Requests for repairs, changes to software applications, folder permissions

and any other computer request will be directed to the Help Desk task
manager system.
C. Many departmental workstations and laptops have been designated to be used by specific
individuals. The unauthorized use of departmental workstations or laptops or the unauthorized
deletion of files or applications is not permitted without authorization from a supervisor.
D. The introduction of non-City approved computers into the City-wide network or the
introduction of unauthorized programs, applications or viruses into any City computer system
is strictly prohibited.

G. O. 112 COMPUTER INFORMATION SECURITY LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
E. All departmental workstation computers and laptops are subject to be inventoried by authorized
employees and all programs on any departmental workstation computer or laptop must be
authorized and have appropriate documentation to verify license authenticity.
F. Personnel of the Office of Information Technology must conduct an evaluation of outside

software and data disks before such software is added to any workstation, laptop or Mobile
Data Computer.
1. To request assistance for additions of software and modification of current operating

systems, contact the Information Systems Coordinator.

GENERAL ORDER
G. O. 113 RECORDS RETENTION AND ARCHIVES
DATE: DISTRIBUTION: REPLACES:

NUMBER:
I. Records Retention
A. This Section establishes the procedure for the retention of reports and records produced by this
Department and their destruction in accordance with State statutes and Departmental
procedures.
B. Accountability
1. Access to the Police Department Archives will be authorized by the Headquarters

Division Commander, Operations Support Lieutenant, and Administrative Services
Supervisor.
2. Authorized personnel shall log the date and time of entry and exit from the Archives
on an Archives Entry/Exit Log form.
3. The Headquarters Division Commander will be responsible for enforcing this policy.
4. No records will leave the Archives unless they have been properly documented as set
forth in this procedural guideline.
5. Unauthorized personnel will not be allowed access to the Archives room.
II. Policy
A. Any employee needing records from the Archives must request the records in writing, 24 hours
in advance. This request should be made through the Headquarters Division Commander.
B. When an instance arises in which a record is needed from the Archives room within a 24-hour
period and no authorized personnel are on duty, the officer’s immediate supervisor will
evaluate the necessity of obtaining the file. If the supervisor determines the file is necessary,
he will contact the appropriate Headquarters Division personnel.
III. Short Term Retention
A. All memorandums, correspondence and special projects financed with City funds shall be
maintained within each Division for a period of two (2) years following the date the documents
were produced.

GENERAL ORDERS G. O. 113 RECORDS RETENTION AND ARCHIVES
B. All communication that conveys information of temporary importance or unremarkable

communication concerning day-to-day office administration and activities may be destroyed
after the communication has served its intended purpose or is no longer of administrative value
to the department.
1. Unremarkable communication means:
a) Correspondence that includes information not attempting to influence

department policy.
b) An electronic mail (e-mail) message sent to a large number of people, at the

same time, via an e-mail distribution list software application (i.e. listserv
message).
c) Any electronic message that does not meet the criteria of a public record
according to Ark. Code Ann. § 25-19-103, unless it has become part of an
official record through a special circumstance.
d) A communication regarding a department event notice (a correspondence

record notifying department employees of an upcoming meeting would only
have value until the meeting has been attended or the employee receiving the
message has marked the date and time in his/her calendar).
e) Routine requests for publications records.
f) Incoming letters or memorandum of transmittal that add nothing of

substance to enclosures.
g) All attachments placed on a correspondence shall be evaluated separately for

its respective retention period.
C. All news or press releases issued by the department shall be maintained for a period of one (1)
year.
D. All documents relating to a retired police officer’s insurance policy shall be maintained for a
period of two (2) years after the death of the retired officer.
E. All equipment lease agreements or contracts shall be maintained for a period of one (1) year
after the expiration of the agreement or contract.
F. All building security computer logs shall be maintained for a period of one (1) year.
1. All building surveillance camera’s digital information shall be maintained for thirty
(30) days.
G. All hazardous material safety data shall be maintained by the department until the chemical’s
level has been completely depleted.

G. O. 113 RECORDS RETENTION AND ARCHIVES LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
H. All ticket and incident report submission forms shall be kept by the department for one (1) year
from the date of submission.
I. All Mobile Video Recordings (MVR) taken from a police officer’s vehicle shall be stored for
thirty (30) days or until litigation has been closed.
1. “MVR” shall mean, for purposes of the Record Retention Policy, all elements of the
mobile video/audio recording equipment.
J. All 9-1-1 computer print out reports and voice recorder tapes shall be kept for thirty (30) days.
K. All civilian applicant information shall be maintained with each Division for a period of one
(1) year following the date that the position was filled.
L. Other general records and reports which the Division may generate during the year shall be
reviewed by the Division Commander or his designee for retention or destruction.
M. A Division Commander may authorize a longer retention period if he deems it necessary.
IV. Long Term Retention
A. The following is a list of records, reports and files that will be retained in the Police
Department Archives (PDA) and the length of time each will be retained.
B. The PDA is located in the basement of the Municipal Court building.
1. Internal Affairs
a) All Internal Affairs files shall be maintained for a period of fifty-four (54)
months or until litigation is concluded, whichever period is longer.
(1) All Internal Affairs files involving the use of deadly force shall be
maintained indefinitely.
b) Off duty forms shall be maintained for a period of three (3) years, or until
litigation is concluded, whichever is longer.
c) Early warning files shall be maintained for a period of three (3) years, or
until litigation is concluded, whichever is longer.
2. Special Investigation and Major Crimes Division
a) All closed police case files involving a felony or Class A misdemeanor

offense, which involves a crime of violence or any sex offense shall be
maintained by the department indefinitely pursuant to Ark. Code Ann. § 14-
2-204(a)(1)(A) (2011).
(1) After ten (10) years, these files will be stored electronically in
numerical order and held in accordance with Ark. Code Ann. § 14-
2-203 (2011).

b) All physical evidence including photographs collected during the course of

an investigation for violent offenses and sexual offenses shall be retained
and destroyed in accordance with Ark. Code Ann. § 12-12-104 (2011).
c) All closed police case files that do not fit the criteria above shall be
maintained for a period seven (7) years or until conviction and/or appeals are
exhausted, whichever period is longer. Ark. Code Ann § 14-2-204 (2011).
(1) All photographs associated with case files above shall be stored in
numerical order by incident number and maintained in archives for
a period of seven years (7) or until conviction and/or appeals are
exhausted, whichever period is longer.
d) All investigative files which have been adjudicated and are subject to storage
as defined in the Major Crimes Division procedures, must have all Arkansas
Crime Information Center and National Crime Information Center records
and National Law Enforcement Telecommunications System, Inc. messages
removed from the case file.
(1) All case files, which have been adjudicated, are subject to the
Arkansas Freedom of Information Act. A.C.I.C. and N.C.I.C.
records and N.L.E.T.S. messages are not subject to disclosure and
must be destroyed in accordance with A.C.I.C./N.C.I.C. policies
and procedures.
e) DNA evidence for crimes classified as either non-violent or non-sexual.
(1) The department shall maintain all DNA evidence for seven years
(7) following any conviction for any felony for which the
defendant’s genetic profile was taken and submitted for comparison
to the State DNA Data Base for unsolved offenses, or until the
exhaustion of all of the defendant’s appeals or the completion of the
defendant’s sentence, including any probation or parole that was
imposed on defendant as part of their sentence, whichever period is
longer. Ark. Code Ann. § 12-12-104.
3. Training Division
a) Officers’ background and training files shall be maintained for a period of

three (3) years after separation from the department or until litigation is
concluded, whichever is longer.
b) Rejected police department applicants’ files shall be maintained by the

department for three (3) years after eligibility list certification date or until
litigation challenging the certification is concluded, whichever is longer.
4. Downtown, Northwest, and Southwest Divisions
a) All original files pertaining to resisting arrest and use of force shall be
maintained by the department for five (5) years or until litigation is

b) All files relating to dog bites shall be maintained by the department for three
(3) years or until litigation is concluded, whichever is longer.
c) All files relating to pursuits shall be maintained for three (3) years or until
5. Headquarters Division
a) All files maintained for the Chief of Police relating to the criminal docket
shall be maintained by the department indefinitely.
b) All traffic dockets maintained by the Chief of Police shall be maintained

indefinitely.
c) Physical copies of offense reports, incident reports, and traffic accident

reports shall be maintained for three (3) years.
(1) Offense, incident, and traffic accident reports shall be placed on

Optical Disk after the initial three (3) year period and these disks
shall be maintained for a period of ten (10) years.
(2) Electronically generated reports will be saved for a period of ten

(10) years.
d) All blood alcohol content (BAC) forms shall be maintained by the

department for five (5) years after the test was administered or until the
e) All traffic records shall be maintained by the department for three (3) years
or until litigation is concluded, whichever period is longer.
f) All original tow vehicle reports showing that a vehicle had been towed and
impounded shall be maintained for three (3) years or until litigation is
g) All expungement orders of municipal police cases shall be maintained by the

department indefinitely.
6. Headquarters Division, Property Room
a) All paperwork concerning released/destroyed/auctioned property that has

been listed as stored or found shall be maintained until they are scanned onto
digital medium. The released information should be scanned as soon as
possible after release or destruction.
b) All paperwork concerning released/destroyed property that has been listed as

stored or found shall be maintained for three (3) years. The digital medium
shall be kept indefinitely after store/found property has been released,
destroyed or auctioned.

c) All paperwork, concerning property that has been listed as evidence shall be
maintained for three (3) years. The released information should be scanned
as soon as possible after release or destruction onto digital medium. The
digital medium shall be kept indefinitely for property listed as evidence.
7. Administrative Services
a) All documents relating to federally funded projects shall be maintained by

the department for ten (10) years or until litigation is concluded, whichever
period is longer.
b) All financial records of the department shall be maintained for ten (10) years
or until litigation is concluded, whichever period is longer.
c) All payroll records, time sheets, employment records, and leave requests
shall be maintained by the department for three (3) years or until litigation is
d) Computer software licenses and all documents relating to the licenses shall
be maintained for ten (10) years after the license has been superseded by a
new license.
8. Electronic Mail Storage
a) The following is the retention period for electronic mail (e-mail) messages.
For short term retention, please refer to the Short Term Retention section of
this policy.
b) Intermediate Retention of electronic messages shall be for a period of three

(3) years; however, if the user’s computer system does not have the storage
or ability to save the e-mail for the required period than the e-mail shall be
printed and retained for the appropriate period under this policy.
c) E-mails that require intermediate retention are as follows:
(1) All e-mail messages of general correspondence, including, but not

limited to, internal correspondence that are more informative than
relating to an attempt to alter department policy.
(2) Routine correspondence, including, but not limited to, referral

letters, requests for routine information or publications issued by
the department, which are answered by standard form letters.
(3) All weekly and monthly reports, including, but not limited to,
documents relating to the status of on-going investigations.
(4) Any minutes of departmental staff meetings, along with supporting

records that document internal policy decisions.
(5) Any other e-mail messages that have been deemed to be of

intermediate value by a Division Commander.

d) E-mails that require a permanent retention period; however, if the user’s

computer system does not have the storage or ability to save the e-mail for
the required period than the e-mail shall be printed and retained for the
appropriate period under this policy.
(1) All e-mails that are of significant administrative, legal, and/or fiscal
value shall be marked as permanent and categorized under their
appropriate record series according to this policy.
(2) E-mails that are deemed permanent are as follows:
(a) Any executive correspondence from the Chief of Police or

Division Commander that deal with significant aspects of
the administration of their office. This correspondence
includes, but is not limited to, information concerning
departmental policies, programs, fiscal matters, and
personnel matters.
(b) Any e-mail detailing departmental policies and procedures,

including, but not limited to, published reports,
unpublished substantive reports, and departmental studies.
(c) Any e-mail that reflects when an official action has been
taken.
(d) Any e-mail which conveys statements of official policy or

rationale for official decisions.
(e) Any other e-mail messages that have been deemed to be of

substantial value by the Chief of Police or a Division
Commander.
e) Electronic mail meeting the requirements to be retained by this section will

be maintained by the author of the electronic mail along with any
corresponding response(s).
V. Storage Procedures
A. Records presented for storage in Archives will not be accepted unless stored in accordance
with the below listed procedures:
1. Records, reports, and files to be stored in the Police Department Archives for three (3)
or more years, following the year the documents were produced, will be placed
numerically in a storage box. The date of destruction must be printed on the exterior
of the box along with the division number.
2. A list of the contents will be made at the time of storage. One copy shall be placed
inside the lid of the box and the original list forwarded to the Operations Support
Lieutenant.
3. Each division will be assigned a specific location within the Archives area to store
their records.

4. Microfilmed records shall be maintained in the microfilm drawers located in the

Records Section.
5. Optical disks shall be stored in the Headquarters Division safe located in the Records
Section.
VI. Destruction Procedures
A. A formal letter shall be sent to the State Historian in January each year outlining the broad
nature of records, reports and files the Department intends to destroy.
B. In February of each year, all Division Commanders shall designate a supervisor and additional
personnel as necessary to review the records, reports and files in storage that are eligible for
destruction and assist in their removal from the Archives. The purging process will be
supervised by personnel authorized access to the Archives.
C. On the date of destruction, a city vehicle will be assigned to transport the material to a facility
with an incinerator. The records taken will be burned, under the supervision of the Operations
Support Lieutenant.
D. Computer records shall be updated to show the date of record destruction, these records will be
maintained indefinitely.

GENERAL ORDER
G. O. 114 ASSESSMENT CENTER ASSIGNMENTS

I. Purpose
A. This Order establishes the procedure for determining who will attend Assessment Centers as an
Assessor at other police departments.
II. General Guidelines
A. Placing a request does not assure an assignment but will assure consideration based upon an
officer’s placement on a standing list.
B. Requests will be ranked by the date the requesting officer’s supervisor dates his/her
recommendation.
1. Two or more requests with the supervisor’s recommendation having the same date
will be ranked by seniority as a sworn officer.
2. No request will be considered complete or accepted until the submitting supervisor

dates the recommendation.
C. Any officer desiring to withdraw his/her name from consideration for an assignment to an
Assessment Center shall submit an officer’s report form making such a request through the
chain of command.
D. Officers who have received a written reprimand, disciplinary suspension or demotion are
prohibited from submitting an assignment request or being considered for assignment for a
period of six (6) months from the date of the order of suspension or demotion.
1. Officers may also be prohibited from consideration for assignment by the Chief of
Police when extenuating circumstances exist.
E. Normally, one officer will be sent to each Assessment Center. An Assistant Chief of Police
may approve additional officers being sent.
F. Officers will be limited to two (2) assessment center assignments per calendar year.
G. The assignment of police personnel is ultimately a management right vested in the Chief of
Police. If the needs of the department require any deviation from this order, the Chief of Police
or designee may waive these requirements and make any necessary assignments.

GENERAL ORDERS G. O. 114 ASSESSMENT CENTER ASSIGNMENTS
III. Assignment Request
A. Applicability
1. This General Order will apply to all Captains, Lieutenants, and Sergeants in the police
department.
2. A supervisor must serve at least one year in his/her present rank before serving as an
assessor for that rank. This restriction does not apply if the Assessment Center is for
the rank one step lower than that held by the assessor.
B. Procedure
1. Supervisors who desire to serve as an assessor at an outside police department shall

submit the request on a memorandum.
2. This memorandum will be routed to the appropriate Division Commander and

forwarded to the Operations Support Lieutenant, which will maintain officer positions
on the request lists.
C. Filling Vacancies
1. When an Assessment Center becomes available, officers ranked at the top of the
request list will be contacted to accept or decline the assignment.
2. If an officer declines the position, the next person on the list will be contacted.
a) If all officers on the list decline, the position will be offered to officers who
have previously served as an assessor already during the calendar year.
3. If the requesting agency asks for a specific rank, race, or sex, a candidate on the list
will be automatically passed over if he/she does not fit in that category.
4. If the requesting agency makes no specific request, sergeants will be selected from the
sergeant’s list to attend a Sergeant’s Assessment Center, Lieutenants will be selected
for a Lieutenant’s Assessment Center, and Captains selected for a Captain’s
Assessment Center. If no candidate is available for a target rank, then one will be
selected from the next higher rank.
5. Upon being selected to serve as an assessor at another police department, the

supervisor must submit in writing information regarding the assignment within ten
(10) days to the Operations Support Lieutenant.
D. Assignment List Maintained
1. Assignment request lists for supervisors desiring to serve as an assessor shall be

maintained by the Operations Support Lieutenant.
2. Three lists shall be maintained which shall include Captain, Lieutenant, and Sergeant.

3. When a supervisor serves as an assessor at another police department, his name will
be moved to the bottom of the list.
4. All completed assignments will be entered into the officer’s personnel training file in
the Records Management System.

GENERAL ORDER
G. O. 115 COLLECTIVE BARGAINING

I. Collective Bargaining Teams
A. Representatives of the Department’s collective bargaining team will consist of the following:
1. Principle negotiator, Department of Human Resources, and/or designee;
2. Representative of the City Attorney’s office;
3. Chief of Police and/or Assistant Chief of Police; and,
4. Other City representatives, as the City Manager or his designee may deem appropriate.
B. The department is committed to good faith bargaining with the duly recognized bargaining unit(s)
recognized by members of the department. The Fraternal Order of Police Lodge #17 is the
currently recognized bargaining agent for officers of the Little Rock Police Department of the rank
of Officer and Sergeant.
II. Department’s Commitment
A. The Department is committed to abide by the ground rules for collective bargaining that arise out
of the collective bargaining process or labor arbitration; and,
B. The Department is further committed to abide, in both letter and spirit, by the negotiated labor
agreement that has been signed by management, labor representatives, and ratified by the
bargaining unit.
III. Post-Agreement Responsibilities
A. When a new contract is negotiated or amended, the following actions should take place to assure
compliance with the terms of the agreement:
1. Review and amend, if necessary, all written directives and procedures to coincide with
the terms of the agreement. This will be accomplished by the Professional Standards
Section of the department.
2. Information about the new agreement with modifications to existing agreements noted
should be disseminated to all administrative and supervisory members of the department
using procedures similar to those established for distribution of policies and procedures.

GENERAL ORDER
G. O. 116 POLYGRAPH EXAMINATIONS POLICY

I. Purpose
A. It is the purpose of this policy to provide investigative officers and others with general knowledge
of, guidance and procedures for the use of polygraph examinations.
II. Policy
A. The polygraph examination is a valuable investigative aid as used in conjunction with, but not as a
substitute for, a thorough investigation. The polygraph may be employed, consistent with this
policy, to verify, corroborate or refute statements; obtain additional investigative leads; narrow or
focus criminal investigations; serve to screen candidates for positions with this or other criminal
justice agencies; and assist in the conducting of internal police investigations, among other
authorized purposes.
III. Definition
A. Polygraph: The polygraph is an instrument that records certain physiological changes in a person
undergoing questioning in an effort to ascertain truth or deception. A polygraph simultaneously
records a minimum of respiratory activity, galvanic skin resistance or conductivity, and
cardiovascular activity.
IV. Procedures
A. Requesting Polygraph Examinations.
1. Following approval by their Division Commander, employees of this Department may

request a polygraph examination be conducted by the Department’s authorized polygraph
examiners.
2. Polygraph examinations may be authorized when consistent with state law and
Department General Orders. Situations in which authorization may be requested and
approved include, but may not be limited to:
a) Requests from the prosecuting attorney’s office as may be appropriate for

investigative purposes;
b) An element of a background investigation of a candidate for sworn or civilian

position as determined by the Office of the Chief of Police;

G. O. 116 POLYGRAPH EXAMINATIONS POLICY LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
c) Requests from other criminal justice agencies consistent with the specified
requirements of this Order;
d) As may be deemed necessary in the furtherance of a criminal investigation;
e) As part of an internal administrative or criminal investigation of an officer or

civilian employee of this Department or of another criminal justice agency
consistent with the specified requirements of this Order.
3. The polygraph should not be used to verify a victim's allegation without sufficient
grounds for suspecting that the victim has given false or misleading statements.
4. Requests for polygraph examinations from other law enforcement agencies pursuant to an
internal investigation must be in writing and be approved by the Office of the Chief of
Police.
5. Submission to a polygraph examination must be a voluntary action with the exception of

employees of this Department formally directed to take an examination as part of an
internal investigation. In all other cases, polygraph examinations shall not be
administered without the subject's written approval, waiver or other instrument as may be
required by law or this policy.
B. Preparing for Polygraph Administration.
1. The requesting officer is responsible for providing the examiner with all pertinent
information concerning the case and for reviewing, clarifying or elaborating on
information as the examiner may deem necessary. This includes, but may not be limited
to:
a) Information obtained in the investigation that supports and justifies the use of
the polygraph;
b) Copies of offense reports and investigative reports;
c) Evidence available and withheld from the subject;
d) Background information on the subject to be examined, to include criminal

record and possible motivation;
e) Any statements made by the subject, complainants and witnesses to include

alibis; and,
f) Newspaper articles or other general information concerning the case.
2. If the subject is hearing impaired or does not speak English, the requesting officer will
make arrangements for a sign language interpreter or translator as determined by the
polygraph examiner.
3. Officers shall not interrogate a subject just before he is to take a polygraph.

GENERAL ORDERS G. O. 116 POLYGRAPH EXAMINATIONS POLICY
4. Officers shall not attempt to explain procedures that will be used in the examination but
shall advise subjects that these will be explained fully by the examiner. Subjects may be
advised of the following:
a) The examination is voluntary, unless otherwise provided by this Order in cases

of Internal Affairs investigations;
b) The results of the examination are not admissible in a court of law unless all
parties agree in advance; and,
c) The results of the polygraph examination, taken alone, do not provide

substantiation for a criminal charge.
5. Should the subject be late for or cancel the appointment, the requesting officer shall
immediately notify the polygraph examiner.
6. If possible, the requesting officer shall report with the subject and any other authorized
persons, such as attorneys, parents or legal guardians, to the examination location of the
test. The polygraph examiner shall be solely responsible for authorizing any persons
inside the examination or observation rooms.
C. Conducting Polygraph Examinations.
1. Only fully trained polygraph examiners or intern polygraph examiners under the direction
of a certified polygraph examiner are authorized to administer polygraph examinations.
2. The polygraph examiner shall make such inquiries of the subject's health, medical history
and/or use of medications as may be reasonably necessary to determine his ability to take
the examination. Polygraph examinations shall not be conducted on any person whom the
examiner reasonably believes to be physically or emotionally unsuitable for testing. This
may include, but is not limited to, persons with heart conditions, women who are
pregnant and individuals taking certain types of medication that may interfere with test
results. When in doubt, the examiner may request the examinee to obtain a medical
certificate from an appropriate health care provider.
3. An examiner shall not conduct a polygraph examination upon a subject if it is felt for any
reason that an unbiased examination cannot be given.
4. Where appropriate, the examiner shall read Miranda rights to the subject and obtain a
waiver of rights. The examiner shall also explain the voluntary nature of the test and
obtain a signed release form prior to administering the examination.
5. An examination shall cease immediately if requested by the subject, except when an

employee has been ordered to undergo a polygraph examination as part of an Internal
Affairs Investigation.
6. Prior to the test, the examiner shall explain the polygraph procedure to the subject and
prepare him for the examination.
7. The examiner shall be responsible for preparing all questions used in the examination.

G. O. 116 POLYGRAPH EXAMINATIONS POLICY LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
8. Prior to the examination, each test question shall be reviewed with the person being
tested.
9. In criminal and Internal Affairs polygraphs, the examiner shall independently interpret
the chart tracings and render an opinion on the findings that include, but is not limited to,
one of the following conclusions:
a) No Deception Indicated;
b) Deception Indicated; or,
c) Inconclusive.
10. In pre-employment screening polygraphs, the Polygraph Examiner shall independently

interpret the chart tracings and render an opinion on the findings that include, but is not
limited to, one of the following conclusions:
a) No Significant Reactions/Responses;
b) Significant Reactions/Responses;
c) No Opinion or Inconclusive:
d) However, if the pre-employment screening polygraph is narrowed to a

single target issue of concern, the examiner shall interpret the
conclusions as he would a criminal or Internal Affairs polygraph.
11. The polygraph examiner shall determine if a second polygraph examination is necessary
and appropriate.
12. Juveniles being polygraphed will be given the same constitutional protection as adults.
Requesting officers will notify the parent or legal guardian prior to administering the
polygraph examination.
D. Pre-Employment Examinations.
1. The polygraph examiner shall review all relevant applicants screening reports, applicant
personal history summaries and any prior polygraph examination reports prepared by this
Department before conducting the examination.
2. Pre-employment polygraph examinations shall be scheduled by authorized members of

the Personnel Unit.
3. Polygraph examinations shall not be used as the sole determinant of suitability for
employment.
4. Candidates shall be provided with a list of questions that may be used in the examination.
E. Equipment and Record Keeping.
1. The polygraph examiner is responsible for the maintenance, safekeeping and the integrity
of the polygraph equipment.

GENERAL ORDERS G. O. 116 POLYGRAPH EXAMINATIONS POLICY
2. The polygraph examiner shall provide such summary activity or statistical reports as may
be directed by the Office of the Chief of Police.
3. Unless otherwise provided in this Order or by state law, the polygraph examiner shall
maintain copies of each polygraph report, together with polygraph charts and all
associated papers, for a period of three (3) years and indefinitely in capital offenses.
4. The results of all pre-employment examinations, including chart tracings, polygraph

reports and related examination results, shall be maintained in a secure storage location,
separately from criminal polygraph files. The duration of storage and the stipulations for
release of this information shall be governed by Departmental policy regarding the
maintenance of personnel records.
F. Examination Rooms.
1. Tests and interviews shall be conducted in a clean, neat environment free of audible and
visual distractions.
2. Certificates, diplomas and such shall be displayed so as not to be in the sight of subjects
during testing.
3. Examiners will be neat and well groomed, and will dress in a manner consistent with
standards of the professional business community.
a) Duty uniforms, badges and other emblems of authority shall not be worn. This
does not include departmental identification cards, where required.
b) Service weapons may be worn if required but should not be openly displayed.
G. Equipment.
1. Polygraph instruments used shall be of commercial manufacturers and shall have no

fewer than three functioning recording channels.
2. Calibration:
a) Calibration charts and/or maintenance logs shall be maintained at the

instruments location or with case files.
b) Calibration checks of instruments should be conducted at least twice per month

and whenever the instrument is moved to a different location.

GENERAL ORDER
G. O. 117 BIAS BASED PROFILING

I. Purpose
A. The purpose of this General Order is to promulgate the Department’s policy prohibiting the use
and/or practice of bias based profiling tactics against any individual or group based solely on
the individual or group’s race, color, creed, religion, sex, national origin, age, disability,
marital status, sexual orientation, gender identity, genetic information, political opinions or
affiliation or socio-economic status (real or perceived).
II. Policy
A. It is the policy of the Little Rock Police Department to patrol in a proactive manner, to
aggressively investigate suspicious persons and circumstances and to actively enforce the law.
The Little Rock Police Department neither condones nor tolerates the practice of bias based
profiling tactics in its enforcement efforts.
III. Definition
A. Bias based profiling- When a police officer stops, detains, takes investigative or enforcement
action against a citizen, or group of citizens, based solely on the individual or group’s race,
color, creed, religion, sex, national origin, age, disability, marital status, sexual orientation,
gender identity, genetic information, political opinions or affiliation or socio-economic status.
Bias based profiling is inclusive of racial profiling.
Bias based profiling- may also be the characterization of any of the aforementioned groups
with a preconceived tendency or propensity to engage in criminal activity.
B. Racial profiling A.C.A.§ 12-12-1402 is the practice of a law enforcement officer relying to any
degree on race, ethnicity, national origin or religion in selecting which individuals to subject to
routine investigatory activities or in deciding upon the scope and substance of law enforcement
activity following the initial routine investigatory activity.
Racial profiling does not include reliance on these criteria in combination with other
identifying factors when the law enforcement officer is seeking to apprehend a specific suspect
whose race, ethnicity or national origin is part of the description of the suspect and the
description is thought to be reliable and locally relevant.
C. Reasonable suspicion (ARCrP 2.1) is a suspicion based on facts or circumstances which of

themselves do not give rise to the probable cause requisite to justify a lawful arrest, but will
give rise to more than bare suspicion; that is, a suspicion that is reasonable as opposed to an
imaginary or purely conjectural suspicion.

GENERAL ORDERS G. O. 117 BIAS BASED PROFILING
IV. Procedure
A. Enforcement, Investigations and Citizen Contact
1. Sworn personnel are prohibited from using the race, color, creed, religion, sex,
national origin, age, disability, marital status, sexual orientation, gender identity,
genetic information, political opinions or affiliation or socio-economic status of a
person as the sole reasoning for stopping a vehicle, making an arrest, conducting a
field interview, investigative detention, seizing assets, seeking asset forfeiture, or
conducting a search.
2. All investigatory detentions, traffic stops, arrests, searches and seizures shall be based
upon the standards of reasonable suspicion or probable cause as required by the
Fourth Amendment of the U. S. Constitution, State Statutes, Arkansas Rules of
Criminal Procedure, and/or subsequent court rulings. Traffic stops shall be conducted
in accordance with General Order 107, Limits of Authority and General Order 316,
Mobile Video Recording Equipment.
3. Sworn personnel shall treat all citizens with courtesy and respect when making
contact. Officers are forbidden from using language or displaying symbols and
gestures that are commonly viewed as offensive to, or are indicative of bias towards
any group.
4. No employee shall retaliate against any individual reporting incidents of bias based
profiling.
5. Officers shall identify themselves by their full name and Department. All persons
stopped by an officer shall be provided with an explanation for why they were
stopped, unless disclosure of such information would undermine an investigation or
jeopardize the officer’s safety. Providing citizens with an explanation of why they
were stopped fosters better relations with the community and reduces the perception
of bias on the part of the police.
6. Nothing in this section shall limit an officer’s ability to interview witnesses or

discourage routine conversations with citizens not suspected of an offense.
B. Supervisory Responsibility
1. Supervisors shall:
a) Ensure that subordinates are familiar with this policy and adhere to its
provisions;
b) Receive all citizen complaints or allegations of profiling on the part of

individual officers, units, or the Division and forward such information for
further inquiry to the Professional Standards Section. (Suspicion or
allegations of bias based profiling by any employee of this Department or
citizen will be handled in conjunction with General Order 211, Internal
Investigations, Citizen Complaints, and Disciplinary Actions).

G. O. 117 BIAS BASED PROFILING LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
C. Training
1. The Training Division shall conduct annual training with sworn personnel on subjects
that include, but are not limited to, bias based profiling, cultural diversity, interaction
with citizens, policies, ethics, legal aspects, and related topics. Training may be
conducted through in-service training, special courses, or roll-call training.
2. The Training Division shall be responsible for coordinating special training for a
particular unit or officer when requested by a Division Commander or the Office of
the Chief of Police.
D. Professional Standards
1. The Professional Standards Section shall submit a monthly report to the Chief of
Police that summarizes complaints alleging bias based profiling on the part of
departmental personnel during the previous month.
2. The Professional Standards Section shall conduct an annual administrative review

each January on the agencies practices, including citizen complaints received during
the previous year.
Subsequent to a review by the Office of the Attorney General, this policy has been amended to conform
to specific terms set forth in Arkansas Act 1207 of 2003 establishing requirements to prohibit racial
profiling.

GENERAL ORDER
G.O. 118 SOCIAL MEDIA AND NETWORKING

03/07/2012 DEPARTMENTAL NEW G. O. 118
I. General
A. It is the policy of the Little Rock Police Department to recognize and support the rights of all
employees to engage in personal Internet-based activities including Social Networking and Media
while off duty to the extent that those private or personal activities do not infringe upon the
integrity or security of the Department’s operations, objectives, employees, or clients. The Little
Rock Police Department highly values and acknowledges the benefits of employee participation in
law enforcement social media or networking sites and hence, nothing in this general order is
intended to deter or prohibit employees from participating, accessing or posting on those sites to
accomplish a law enforcement objective.
II. Purpose
A. Social networking has, with the abundant availability of Internet access to end-users and the
increase of portable digital devices, become an intricate part of everyday communication. This
general order is intended to provide clear guidelines for all employees of the Little Rock Police
Department who desire to participate in those networks and to preserve and protect the
professional interest of the Department.
III. Use of Blogs, Web Postings, Chat Rooms, etc.
A. General Employee Responsibilities
1. As an employee of the Little Rock Police Department, the use and application of good
judgment, decency, and common sense is expected both on and off duty. This expectation
also applies while performing official duties of the Little Rock Police Department
and/or engaging in various computer or digital media activities both on and off duty.
2. Participation in World Wide Web/Internet services such as Web postings, social

networking sites like Facebook, Twitter, Youtube, or entering tweets or blogs,
participating in chat rooms, dating services, etc., should be carefully considered and
monitored by the employee making the posting for proper personal conduct.
3. The absence of, or lack of explicit reference to a specific site, does not limit the extent of
the application of this policy. Where no policy or guidelines exist, employees should use
their professional judgment and take the most prudent action possible, which includes,
but is not limited to, consultation with supervision or administration.
4. Employees are not to use, publish, or cause to be used, distributed, or authorize to be

used, published or distributed, any official Departmental information, restricted or
classified agency documents, photographs, speeches, reports, communications, videos,
or evidence obtained in connection with any employee’s official performance of duty or
while acting under color of law, for personal pleasure or use.
GENERAL ORDERS 118 - 1 LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT

G.O. 118 GENERAL ORDERS
5. All employees of the Department are to refrain from posting on social personal
networking sites or media, photographs of Department personnel wearing agency
distinguishable uniforms, any logos, shields, badges or weapons or writings that readily
identify one as a member of the Little Rock Police Department or the City of Little Rock.
6. Employees shall guard themselves accordingly and shall not participate in any conduct
that is likely to have an adverse affect on the reputation, the integrity or the operations
of the Little Rock Police Department. Violations of this order are subject to disciplinary
action up to and including termination.
B. Definitions
1. Blog - A blog (short for web-log) is a personal online journal that is frequently updated
and intended for general public consumption. Blogs are defined by their format: a
series of entries posted to a single page in reverse chronological order. Blogs generally
represent the personality of the author or reflect the purpose of the Website that hosts
the blog. Topics sometimes include brief philosophical musings, commentary on Internet
and other social issues, and links to other sites the author favors, especially those that
support.
2. Tweets – Brief text messaging of one-hundred forty (140) characters or less posted on a
social media site.
C. Online Etiquette
1. Personal blogs should have clear disclaimers that the views expressed by the author in
the blog are the author’s alone and do not represent the views of the Department. The
person should write clearly and in first person making the writing clear that the views
expressed are personal and do not represent the Little Rock Police Department.
2. Information published on blogs, forums, and social networking sites will be in

compliance with all City, State, and Federal disclosures and confidentiality policies and
laws with regard to information that the employee has access to as the result of their
employment with the Department.
3. Employees shall be respectful to the Department, supervisors, administrators, elected

officials, other department employees, and other law enforcement officials.
4. Social media activities shall not interfere with work commitments.
5. Employees shall not reference or cite any information relative to victims, witnesses,
court cases or sentencing, current or past criminal investigations, inmates, fellow
employees, witness testimony, confidential investigations, witness protection matters,
traffic investigations, or provide any information on citizens that was acquired in the
performance of duty without their express written consent. In all cases, employees will
not publish any sensitive Departmental information regarding any matter that may
impede Departmental operations or compromise officer safety.
6. Employees shall adhere to copyright laws, and reference or cite sources appropriately.
Plagiarism applies online as well.

IV. Departmental Equipment
A. Computers and Cell Phones - Employees are prohibited from using Department owned computers
or cell phones with Internet connection to post, write or respond to blogs, tweets or any other
written communication relative to social networking, social dating, or social media for personal
use. Allowable exceptions are:
1. Participation in an active criminal investigation and the postings are part of the
investigation;
2. With authorization from the chief’s office or division commander;
3. Participation in an administrative (internal) investigation; and,
4. Participation in Law Enforcement Websites.
V. Photography and Videography
A. Department personnel will not use personal mobile phones, cameras, or any other device to
capture photographs and or video of any police controlled scene or persons in police custody.
1. In the event of exigent circumstances where evidence of significant value could be lost,
destroyed, or is time sensitive due to environmental conditions if photographic evidence
is not obtained immediately, Department personnel may elect to use a personally owned
device to capture evidence in the performance of the investigation. The use of the device
will be reported to a supervisor and must be articulated in an Officer’s Report. The
mere convenience for the Department personnel or waiting for the response of a
Department owned device does not constitute exigent circumstances.
2. Any photographic evidence captured on personally owned devices will be transferred to

a department device as soon as possible and a supervisor will verify that the image(s)
have been removed from the personally owned device before the end of the employee’s
duty day.
VI. Administrative Oversight
A. No Expectation of Privacy
1. Employees are cautioned that all communications, websites, e-mail, and text messaging
over Department owned computers, MDCs, and phones are subject to review for
administrative purposes.
2. Employees shall not post any private or personal information of fellow employees or
supervisors without their written consent, including but not limited to, their names,
family members’ names, addresses, numerical identifiers or photographs.
B. Online Activity Restrictions
1. Employees are prohibited from viewing, responding to, or updating personal social
media networking sites while on duty, which includes the use of personally owned
devices. An exception will be granted for those employees utilizing personal devices
while on authorized breaks only.

G.O. 118 GENERAL ORDERS
2. The accessing of law enforcement social media or networks during duty hours to
accomplish a law enforcement objective is authorized.
3. Employees specifically authorized by the Chief of Police or his designee to monitor

social networking and media may observe or review target websites for policy violations
or viable information.
4. Text messaging or posting blogs or tweets while operating Department owned or leased
vehicles is strictly prohibited, whether on or off duty.

GENERAL ORDER
G. O. 200 DEPARTMENTAL AWARDS

03/28/2017 DEPARTMENTAL G.O. 200(04/15/2012) G. O. 200
I. General
A. This Order establishes Departmental procedures to provide recognition of sworn and civilian
employees for his/her heroic or meritorious acts performed while serving in an official police
capacity.
B. Publicity provided by the City of Little Rock will give public recognition to those who have
brought honor to themselves and the Police Department.
II. Departmental Awards
A. Medal of Valor – Criteria:
1. The Medal of Valor is awarded for conspicuous acts of valor performed during a police
related act, on or off-duty, which involved a risk of life and the knowledge of that risk.
2. The act must clearly delineate valor from lesser forms of courage by being of such a grave
nature that the non-performance of the act would not subject the individual to any
justifiable criticism and which is clearly above and beyond the call of duty.
3. Medal of Valor nominations shall be based on the following criteria:
a) A strong possibility existed at the time the employee acted that he could have
suffered serious injury or death, or the employee was seriously or fatally injured
in the performance of this act;
b) The act was not foolhardy; and,
c) The employee did not use poor judgment or violate procedures which created the
necessity for his actions.
4. The award may be presented posthumously.
B. Medal of Merit - The Medal of Merit is awarded for an act of exceptional courage and dedication
to duty while performing a police related act, on or off-duty, which involves a substantial risk to
the officer’s personal safety.

GENERAL ORDERS G. O. 200 DEPARTMENTAL AWARDS
C. Police Shield – Criteria:
1. The Police Shield is presented to any police officer that is wounded or seriously injured in
the line of duty.
2. The injury may occur on or off-duty while the officer is performing a police related task
and the officer exercises good judgment and procedures, which do not create unnecessary
risk to his safety nor create a situation which otherwise would not develop.
3. The Police Shield may be awarded in addition to the awarding of a higher award where
the facts show the recipient is entitled to such award.
4. The Department’s Award Review Committee shall not consider injuries sustained from
falls on ice, motor vehicle accidents or similar occurrences unless the evidence clearly
indicates the employee had exhausted all reasonable safety precautions and had no control
of the circumstances.
D. Commendation Bar – Criteria:
1. The Police Commendation Bar is awarded for acts of heroism beyond those acts normally
required by the bounds of duty, but do not necessarily expose the officer to the degree of
risk established for the Medal of Valor or Medal of Merit.
2. The Police Commendation Bar may also be awarded for outstanding contributions to law
enforcement through the success of difficult police projects, programs, or situations with
such contributions being made in a highly professional manner.
3. A Unit Commendation may be awarded to any distinct work group of employees when the
actions of the group meet the qualifications as outlined in Subsection 2 above. The
Commendation shall be presented to the Unit and shall remain with the Unit. Individual
employees will not receive a certificate or bar, but a copy of the nominating letter will be
placed in each employee’s personnel file. An employee may be cited separately for
exceptional work per any award.
E. Lifesaving Award – Criteria:
1. The Lifesaving Award is awarded for an act that results in the saving or preservation of a
life or lives which would otherwise have expired without the direct action undertaken by
the rescuer.
2. The rescuer need not have been subjected to personal risk through his involvement.
3. The rescuer is eligible to receive only one Lifesaving Award for each incident regardless
of the number of victims involved.

G. O. 200 DEPARTMENTAL AWARDS LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
F. Letter of Commendation - A Letter of Commendation is not a Department Award. Letters of

Commendation requests will not be submitted to the Awards Committee for approval. Letters of
Commendation will be issued by the Division Commander to any employee who has rendered a
service reflecting credit upon the employee and upon the Department. The Division Commander
will issue the Letter of Commendation to the officer and forward a copy to the Office of the Chief
of Police for inclusion in their personnel file.
G. Noel Don McGuire Memorial Award - This award is given to the Little Rock Police Recruit who
attains the highest overall average score during a calendar year from Basic Recruit Schools.
H. Civic Achievement Award – Criteria:
1. The Civic Achievement Award is awarded to members of the Department who bring
favorable recognition to the Department through their involvement in civic affairs.
2. The recipient of the award may be sworn or civilian, but must be acting in the capacity as
a member or representative of the Little Rock Police Department.
I. Officer of the Month Award – Criteria:
1. This award is given to a sworn member of the Department who has rendered a service
beyond the course of duty and/or because of diligence, tenacity, and perseverance; or,
2. Acts in a manner that brings credit to the Little Rock Police Department and supports the
goals of the organization; or,
3. An especially important arrest accomplishment through highly intelligent police

performance.
J. Officer of the Year Award- Criteria:
1. All officers who have received or who have been nominated for a Department award
during the same calendar year for which the Officer of the Year Award is being given are
automatically considered for this award.
2. Any officer may be nominated for this award for acts of heroism and dedication to duty,
lifesaving, or outstanding contributions to law enforcement through the success of
difficult police projects, programs, or situations.
K. Civilian Employee of the Month– Criteria:
1. This award is given to a civilian employee of the Department who has rendered a service
beyond the course of duty and/or because of diligence, tenacity, and perseverance; or,
2. Acts in a manner that brings credit to the Little Rock Police Department and supports the
goals of the organization.

L. Civilian of the Year Award- Criteria:
1. All civilian employees who have received or who have been nominated for a Department
award during the same calendar year for which the Civilian of the Year Award is being
given are automatically considered for this award.
2. Any civilian member of the Department may be nominated for this award for outstanding
contributions to law enforcement through the success of difficult police projects,
programs, or situations with such contributions being made in a highly professional
manner.
M. Community Service Award - The Community Service Award is awarded each year to a sworn or
civilian member of the Department who throughout the year demonstrated a commitment to invest
time in the community that is outside what is normally expected of him/her.
N. Chief Lawrence Johnson Leadership Award Criteria:
1. This award is given to a police supervisor who has demonstrated outstanding law
enforcement supervision throughout a calendar year. Nominations will be submitted to the
Public Affairs Officer by the 10th of January for the previous year.
2. The nomination will be in memo form and include detailed facts with supporting
documentation demonstrating how the nominee’s leadership exceeded the normal
parameters of their assignment for the year. This award is not for one specific event
unless that event was an unusual or special assignment beyond the normal job routines
that continued for the majority of the year nominated.
3. The Public Affairs Officer will present the nominations to the Assistant Chiefs for
recommendations. Each Assistant Chief will indicate on the nomination form the
candidate of their choice and detail why they believe this supervisor should receive this
award. The Public Affairs Officer will collect the nomination forms from the three
Assistant Chiefs once they have made their choice and submit them to the Chief of Police
by January 15th who will select the award winner.
4. The winner of the award will be presented a plaque in recognition for their leadership at a
ceremony held in January or February by the Chief of Police.
5. Police Youth Live in Camp Award Criteria - The award is given to officers that have
worked at the departmentally approved youth camp as a counselor for a minimum of
three (3) years. The officer must have been in attendance for all camp activities.
III. Award Nomination Procedures
A. Nominations may come from any Department employee.
B. When a member of the Department nominates an officer or civilian for consideration, the
following procedures shall be followed:

1. The nominating member will complete an Awards Nomination Form #5000-10 with a
detailed account of the act that deserves recognition within thirty (30) days of the date of
the incident or within thirty (30) days of the conclusion of the investigation. One form
shall be filled out for each person being nominated, but only one narrative is required.
2. The form shall include the circumstances and actions surrounding the act, all witnesses to
the act, and any other information that may be used for consideration.
3. A copy of all applicable Departmental reports and supporting documentation shall be

forwarded with the nomination through the Chain of Command for review. The Assistant
Chief of Police reviewing the award nomination will then forward the file to the Public
Affairs Officer after making his recommendation for review by the Awards Committee.
The Awards Committee will review the file and make their recommendation. The Public
Affairs Officer will then forward the file with recommendations from the Chain of
Command and the Awards Committee to the Chief of Police for approval.
4. After each Awards Review Committee meeting, the Public Affairs Office will notify the
nominee’s Commander of the committee’s action on each nomination. The nominee’s
Commander shall be responsible for notifying the nominee.
C. The Chief of Police shall appoint an eight-member Departmental Awards Review Committee on an
annual basis to evaluate all award nominations and recommend recipients to the Chief of Police for
final approval. The Public Affairs Officer shall serve as Chairman of the Committee and the
remainder of the Committee shall be composed of the following:
1. One officer from each Field Services Divisions;
2. One officer from the Headquarters Division;
3. One officer from the Major Crimes Division;
4. One officer from the Special Investigations Division;
5. One civilian employee of the Department.
IV. Form of Awards
A. Medal of Valor - The recipient of the Medal of Valor shall receive a medallion, ribbon bar and
certificate denoting the award.
B. Medal of Merit - The recipient of the Medal of Merit shall receive a medallion, ribbon bar and
certificate denoting the award.
C. Police Shield - The recipient of the Police Shield shall receive a ribbon bar and certificate denoting
the award.
D. Police Commendation Bar - The recipient of the Police Commendation Bar shall receive a ribbon
bar and certificate denoting the award.

E. Lifesaving Award - The recipient of the Lifesaving Award shall receive a ribbon bar and certificate
denoting the award.
F. Civic Achievement Award - The recipient of the Civic Achievement Award shall receive a ribbon
bar and certificate denoting the award.
G. Officer of the Month Award - The recipient of the Officer of the Month Award shall receive a
ribbon bar and certificate denoting the award. The recipient’s name will also be added to the
Officer of the Month plaque displayed at Police Headquarters.
H. Officer of the Year Award - The recipient of the Officer of the Year Award shall receive a ribbon
bar and plaque denoting the award.
I. Civilian Employee of the Month Award - The recipient of the Civilian Employee of the Month
Award shall receive a certificate denoting the award.
J. Civilian Employee of the Year - The recipient of the Civilian Employee of the Year Award shall
receive a plaque denoting the award.
K. Community Service Award - The recipient of the Community Service Award shall receive a plaque
denoting the award.
L. Noel Don McGuire Award - The recipient of the Noel Don McGuire Award shall receive a
medallion, a ribbon bar, and his name shall be added to the award plaque maintained by the
Department.
M. Chief Lawrence Johnson Leadership Award – The recipient of the Chief Lawrence Johnson
Leadership Award will receive a ribbon bar and a plaque denoting the award.
V. Presentation of Awards
A. Medal of Valor
1. The Chief of Police shall make a recommendation to the City Board of Directors through
the City Manager that the nominee be presented the Medal of Valor.
2. The approval by the Board normally shall be in the form of a Resolution, made by the
Mayor, during the public presentation of the award to the recipient.
3. The Chief of Police shall present the medallion, ribbon bar and certificate to the recipient.
B. Other Awards - Upon approval and during a public presentation, the Chief of Police shall present
the recipient with the medallion, ribbon bar, and certificate; ribbon bar and certificate; or
medallion, whichever is appropriate.
VI. Documentation of Awards
A. Maintenance of Information - All Departmental Awards and Letters of Commendation shall be

forwarded to the City of Little Rock Human Resources Office to be placed in the recipient’s
employment file.

VII. Citizen’s Achievement Award
A. The Citizen’s Achievement Award is established as a special Departmental award which may be
presented for exceptional service by a member of the public who has made an outstanding
contribution to the police profession and whose efforts are appreciated and recognized by the
Department.
B. This Award may be presented as a result of the award nomination procedures detailed in Section
III of this Order or by decision of the Office of the Chief of Police.
C. The recipient of the Citizen’s Achievement Award shall receive a certificate denoting the award in
a public ceremony.

GENERAL ORDER
G. O. 201 CAREER DEVELOPMENT PROGRAM

I. Purpose
A. The purpose of this Order is to establish a career development program and familiarize
Department personnel with its benefits.
B. It shall be the policy of the Little Rock Police Department to maintain and support a career
development program in which the principle elements will be career counseling and development
for all personnel.
II. Administration and Goals and Objectives
A. The Career Development Program will be administered under the direction of the Training
Division Commander, with the Training Division Lieutenant designated as the Career
Development Coordinator. The program will be reviewed on a continual basis in relation to the
organizational goals and objectives of the Department and revised as necessary.
B. The goal of the Career Development Program is to provide all personnel with the opportunity to
be proficient in their duties and enhance the employee’s potential for lateral and upward mobility.
C. The objectives of the program are:
1. To provide career counseling to all members who request it.
2. To provide in-service, advanced, and remedial training designed to enhance the employee’s
proficiency.
3. To encourage continuation of formal education through a degree granting program at an

accredited college or university.
4. To advertise grants/scholarships available for law enforcement personnel and assist officers in
completing their applications.
5. To notify personnel of educational classes sponsored by the Department or the University of

Arkansas Criminal Justice Institute.
D. The Career Development Program will be comprised of three career paths:
1. Proficiency: Designed to provide training and experience to establish proficiency in an

employee’s current duties.
2. Specialization: Directed toward a specific job function on which an individual wishes to focus
and further develop expertise.

GENERAL ORDER G. O. 201 CAREER DEVELOPMENT PROGRAM
3. Promotional: To acquire the skills, knowledge, and abilities required

enhancing opportunities for promotion.
III. Career Counseling
A. An employee’s first line supervisor will be responsible for conducting Career Development
counseling in conjunction with completion of each employee’s performance evaluation.
1. A Career Development Counseling Form will be completed on each employee even if assistance
is not requested. The form shall be forwarded to the Training Division Lieutenant for review
and coordination.
2. If during the course of the year, an employee desires career counseling, he/she may contact their
immediate supervisor who will provide them appropriate guidance or referral to a
knowledgeable source.
B. Supervisors will be provided training covering leadership, interpersonal and organizational

communications, human resource management, decision making and external and internal
influences and control. The training will be provided by the Training Division or through use of
an outside source.
IV. In-Service Training
A. In-service training will be provided to all officers. Types of training include:
1. Basic training;
2. Roll-call training;
3. Proficiency training;
4. Advanced officer training;
5. Specialized officer training;
6. Promotional training;
7. Remedial training; and,
8. Advanced management techniques.
B. Training may be provided, when available, through a variety of resources that include, but are not
limited to:
1. Arkansas Law Enforcement Training Academy;
2. Little Rock Police Academy;
3. FBI National Academy;
4. Accredited educational institutions;
5. Private industry;

G. O. 201 CAREER DEVELOPMENT PROGRAM LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
6. International Association of Chiefs of Police; and,
7. Other police agencies or professional police organizations.
C. Proficiency training is training designed to keep employees up to date on job duties and
responsibilities. Proficiency training will be used to enhance the officer’s skills and enhance the
potential of lateral and upward mobility within the Department. Employees may be required to
participate in remedial proficiency training as a part of Career Development.
D. Specialized training will be provided to personnel after their transfer to a specialized assignment to
enhance the employee’s job knowledge and potential for upward mobility within the Department.
E. Job related training should be provided to all newly promoted personnel either prior to promotion
or within the first year following promotion.
F. Supervisory and management training is vital to employees in supervisory or management

positions, or those employees working toward such career goals. Management training will
include, but not be limited to:
1. Management information systems;
2. Fiscal management;
3. Organizational behavior;
4. Decision making;
5. Basic supervision;
6. Communications skills; and,
7. Human resource management.
G. Advanced management training will be made available to the appropriate level of supervision or
management personnel to impart higher levels of training to participants who possess exceptional
leadership abilities. Advanced management training may include attending a national training
institution or the FBI National Academy if applicable to the employee’s position.
V. Records Management
A. The Training Division will be responsible for maintaining records of all proficiency, career
specialty, management, or supervisory training received by every member of the Department.
Information about training will include at a minimum:
1. Course title;
2. Type of training;
3. Source of training;
4. Date(s) and time(s) of training; and,
5. Course performance, certificate, skills, or honor achieved.

B. An employee’s in-service training record may be reviewed by the employee and their immediate
supervisor or counselor in order to assess the training progress of each employee in achieving
career objectives.
VI. Temporary Duty Assignments in Career Development
A. Temporary duty assignments are ideally a part of the Career Development process. Temporary
assignments are made by the Chief of Police in order to enhance career development or to
accomplish specific short-term projects. This section applies to sworn personnel.
B. Temporary assignments are an integral part of the career development for those in the
officer/detective classification when applicable and pertinent to the Department’s mission.
C. Officers/Detectives may be temporarily assigned to job rotation/special assignments to enhance

their career development, normally at ninety (90) day assignments. This time period may be
extended with the approval of the Chief of Police.
D. Officers are allowed only one temporary assignment every 36 months.
E. Officers accepted for temporary assignment shall be returned in good standing to their prior
assignment upon completion of the temporary assignment.
F. Areas of assignment may include:
1. Training Division;
2. Major Crimes Division;
3. Special Investigations Division;
4. Headquarters Division;
a) Desk Officer; and,
b) Airport.
5. Public Affairs/Crime Prevention Section; and,
6. Professional Standards Section.
G. Temporary assignments shall be utilized at the discretion of the Chief of Police as a means of
cross-training officers to enhance officer job performance and gain additional experience. The
following conditions must be met:
1. Available manpower must be sufficient enough to meet normal operational requirements.
2. Officers must have met with their respective Division Commanders and been recommended for
temporary assignment.
3. Division Commanders must assess the feasibility of the officer being assigned to the temporary
assignment as well as a need for the temporary assignment. Operational considerations should
be taken into account.

G. O. 201 CAREER DEVELOPMENT PROGRAM LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
H. Request and Selection Procedures
1. Officers must complete three years in the Field Services Division prior to being eligible for the
temporary assignment and job rotation program.
2. Officers desiring a temporary assignment must submit an Officer’s letter through his Chain of
Command to be forwarded to the Career Development Coordinator.
3. The Career Development Coordinator shall contact the Commander of the Division to which the
officer seeks temporary assignment in order to assess the feasibility of the assignment. The
Officer’s letter shall be forwarded to the requested Division’s Commander.
4. The Division Commander (or his designee) shall either notify the officer in writing of the lack
of availability of the temporary assignment at this time or schedule the officer for an interview.
5. The Division Commander (or his designee) shall conduct an interview with the officer to
familiarize him with the daily operations of the Division and to specify the responsibilities of
the temporary assignment.
6. The Division Commander shall forward a letter to the Career Development Coordinator
accepting or declining the officer for temporary assignment.
7. The Career Development Coordinator shall forward this letter to the Chief of Police for final
approval.
8. Upon final approval, the Career Development Coordinator shall forward a copy of the letter to
the officer’s current Division Commander for notification of the officer.
9. All scheduling of the officer to a temporary assignment shall be resolved between the current
Division Commander and the Commander responsible for the temporary assignment.
10. The officer shall be notified, in writing, of the start date, duration and tour of duty for the
temporary assignment by his current Division Commander. A copy shall be forwarded to the
Career Development Coordinator for retention in the officer’s file.
11. The Career Development Coordinator shall be responsible for notifying both Division
Commanders and the officer of the last scheduled day of the temporary assignment to ensure a
smooth return of the officer to his permanent assignment.
I. Evaluations
1. All officers shall have their performance evaluated by the supervisor responsible for the
temporary assignment.
2. A copy of the evaluation shall be forwarded to the Career Development Coordinator within two
(2) weeks of the completion of the assignment.
VII. Educational Leave
A. Leave for educational purposes will be classified under administrative leave and all applicable
Civil Service and Departmental Rules and Regulations will apply. Leave may be authorized for
attending outside workshops, seminars, state training academies, or formal educational programs.
The Department may support the employee who pursues the educational opportunity by providing
a flexible work schedule where possible.

B. Application for leave or shift adjustments shall be made through the Chain of Command up to the
Bureau Commander who, upon approval, will submit the application to the Chief of Police for
final approval.
C. The application shall include a justification of the subjects to be studied and their relationship to
the employee’s career development and job relationships, as well as the need for a shift exception.
VIII. Educational Incentives for Sworn Personnel
A. The Department encourages employees to pursue higher education and realizes that the
Department is strengthened through continuing education.
B. Employees hired before December 31, 1990, are paid according to their selection of one of two
plans listed below. Employees hired after this date are eligible to be compensated based on the
college plan only.
1. College Plan
# College Hours Years Employed Monthly Pay
Less than 15 Less than 2 years $0
15 to 30 2 years $20.00
31 to 63 3 years $50.00
Assoc. Degree or
64 to 123 3 years $75.00
Bachelors Degree or 124 4 $100.00
Graduate 10 $125.00
2. Certificate Plan
Certificate Level College Hours Additional Hours Pay Per Month
Basic 0 0 0
General 0 1 year + 3 hrs. 20
Excluding English
Intermediate 6 hrs English 6 hrs. related studies 50
Advanced 15 0 75
Senior 45 0 100

GENERAL ORDER
G. O. 202 TRANSFER AND ASSIGNMENT REQUESTS

I. Purpose
A. This Order establishes procedures for the transfer of personnel from one Division to another
with the exception of internal movement between Field Services Bureau.
B. This Order establishes procedures for the transfer of personnel physically incapable of
reporting to work for an indefinite period of time.
C. This Order establishes guidelines for assigning personnel to “restricted duty”.
D. This Order establishes procedures for the assignment or movement of personnel within the
Field Services Bureau and sets guidelines for requesting assignment to a particular shift, squad
and/or days off.
II. Transfer - General
A. The transfer of police personnel is ultimately a management right vested in the Chief of Police.
The Chief of Police or his/her designee reserves the right to deviate from the provisions of this
policy if it is in his/her determination in the best interest of the Department.
B. For the purpose of this order, transfer is defined as the movement of personnel from one
Division within the Department to another with the exception of internal movement between
Field Services Divisions. For the purpose of transfer, the three (3) geographical Field Services
Divisions will be inclusive in the term “Field Services Bureau".
C. Transfers will be determined based on effective utilization of manpower, special needs of the
Department and the interest of the employee.
D. Specialized assignments are those assignments often characterized by an increased level of

responsibility and specialized training, but within a given position classification.

GENERAL ORDERS G. O. 202 TRANSFER AND ASSIGNMENT REQUESTS
III. Criteria for Transfer
A. Officers who have received a disciplinary suspension or demotion are prohibited from
submitting transfer requests or being considered for transfer for a period of six (6) months from
the date of the order of suspension or demotion.
B. Officers who have received a written reprimand may be prohibited from submitting transfer
requests or being considered for transfer for a period of six (6) months from the date of such
reprimand. In these instances, the Division Commander shall:
1. Review the officer’s request;
2. Review the recommendation of his/her Chain of Command; and,
3. If the request is denied, notify the officer in writing of his/her decision.
C. Officers’ sick leave usage, past performance, disciplinary history (with special emphasis on
sustained untruthfulness allegations), seniority, prior work experience, education and training
will be factors in transfer considerations.
1. Any employee who has an untruthfulness violation sustained against them,

will not be considered for a transfer to a specialized unit where their
testimony in court is vital to a felony investigation. When filling a vacancy,
the Division Commander with the opening will ensure that all the employee’s
disciplinary history has been reviewed for untruthfulness before making their
selection.
D. Unless an overriding Departmental need exists, all personnel shall be required to serve in the
Field Services Bureau for three (3) years from the date of graduation from the Training
Academy.
IV. Transfer Requests
A. Applicability
1. This Section will apply only to the transfer of sworn personnel of the rank of Sergeant
and below.
B. Procedures
1. Whenever vacancies occur in any specific specialized assignment, the Division

Commander may at his/her discretion fill that specific assignment from within his/her
Division. Vacancies occurring within the Field Services Bureau will be filled in
accordance with Section VII of this Order.

G. O. 202 TRANSFER AND ASSIGNMENT REQUESTS LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
2. If the position is filled from within the Division, the final resulting vacancy will be
advertised. The Division shall post an announcement, via departmental mail, bulletin
boards, and in roll calls for a period of 10 working days (Monday through Friday)
prior to the selection process to enable all interested personnel to submit a request for
transfer. The announcement shall describe the selection criteria for the position to be
filled.
3. Sworn personnel who are interested in applying for a listed vacancy will submit a
Skills Knowledge Abilities (SKA) form through their Chain of Command. Placing a
request does not guarantee a transfer but will ensure consideration.
4. The supervisors in the chain will evaluate the applicant’s performance, disciplinary
record, and sick leave usage and make a recommendation for transfer or denial based
on his/her evaluation.
5. The respective Division Commander, or their designee, shall conduct oral interviews
in order to select a qualified candidate for the position. These interviews shall be
conducted in such a manner that only essential material is included in the interviews.
6. The Chain of Command will forward evaluations of all interviews and

recommendations to the Chief of Police.
7. The final decision on all transfers will be made by the Chief of Police.
V. Restricted Duty Assignment
A. Employees who are temporarily unable to perform their full duties, but who expect to be able to
return to full duty status in a reasonable period of time, may be eligible for placement in a
restricted duty assignment within their Division.
1. For the purpose of this section, the term “reasonable period of time” applies when an
employee is able to return to full duty status within 10 consecutive workdays.
2. If an employee is not able to return to full duty status within the designated timeframe,
the Division Commander shall forward all documentation pertaining to the employee’s
limitations to the Office of the Chief of Police for review. The Office of the Chief of
Police will determine if the employee meets the criteria for transfer to the
Headquarters Division.
3. All personnel who have been transferred to the Extended Leave Unit as a result of
extended leave and who are temporarily assigned to a restricted duty assignment will
report their presence daily to the Extended Leave Unit Lieutenant in a manner
prescribed by that Lieutenant. Personnel who have been transferred to the Extended
Leave Unit and who are working a restricted duty assignment in another Division will
be shown on the Extended Leave Unit worksheets only.
B. Employees satisfying criteria set forth in this Section may be placed in restricted duty
assignments by their Division Commander, as needed.
1. The Division Commander will clearly define the work to be performed and will ensure
that the assignment does not compromise the officer’s anticipated physical recovery.

a) The Division Commander may request specific medical opinions, as to an

officer’s ability to perform in a restricted duty assignment.
b) A Division Commander may, at his/her discretion, initiate or terminate a

restricted duty assignment.
c) The Division Commander will ensure that the circumstances surrounding the
initiation or termination of a restricted duty assignment is properly
documented.
d) Personnel working a restricted duty assignment will dress in business casual.

While the appropriate Bureau Commander may authorize certain
modifications to this order regarding clothing to accommodate casts, braces
or other devices deemed necessary, at no time will blue jeans or t-shirts be
worn. Restricted duty personnel will not wear a uniform or any part of a
uniform at any time.
e) No employee in a restricted duty assignment will operate a departmental

vehicle, work off-duty or perform any enforcement related activities.
f) Any employee in a restricted duty assignment will not be permitted to

perform any volunteer work/activity in which they receive any form of
compensation unless approved by the Office of the Chief of Police.
VI. Extended Leave Transfer
A. Any employee who reports that he or she is physically incapable of reporting to work in a
normal duty assignment for an indefinite period of time will be transferred to the Extended
Leave Unit.
1. This will include all personnel on:
a) Extended sick leave for any reason;
b) Catastrophic leave;
c) Family medical leave;
d) Leave without pay resulting from injury or illness; and,
e) Leave due to injuries received while on duty.
2. For the purpose of this Order, the term “indefinite period of time” applies when an
employee is absent from his or her regular duties for more than 10 consecutive
workdays and a return to full status is unknown and/or questionable.

B. Personnel assigned to the Extended Leave Unit will be offered the option of accepting a
restricted or modified duty assignment. The employee has the right to accept or decline modified
duty after an injury. If the employee declines modified duty, he/she must use their available
leave time to cover days lost.
1. Personnel on the Extended Leave Unit will be utilized to assist with manpower
shortages by performing suitable tasks in areas that have identified needs.
2. In an effort to meet the needs of the Department, increase efficiency, and improve
performance; the assignments, duty hours, and days off will be rotated monthly.
C. Whenever a supervisor is notified by an employee that they are physically or mentally incapable
of reporting to work in a normal duty assignment and meets the requirements for assignment to
the Extended Leave Unit, the supervisor shall submit a written recommendation that shall detail
the reason why the employee is no longer capable of performing their job assignment.
1. Should the employee display or indicate any type of emotional or mental distress or
illness, the supervisor shall immediately take possession of the employee’s city owned
weapon(s) and store the weapon(s) pursuant to policy. The Training Division shall be
notified and retrieve the weapon(s) for storage in the Departmental Armory. The
supervisor shall document taking possession of the weapon(s) in his initial evaluation.
2. Should the employee be deployed on a military assignment or leave of absence in

excess of 30 days, wherein the employee will be out of the City and no longer in
control of the city issued weapon(s), the employee’s immediate supervisor will take
charge of the employee’s city owned weapon(s) and store the weapon(s) pursuant to
policy. The Training Division shall be notified and retrieve the weapon(s) for storage
in the Departmental Armory. The supervisor shall document taking possession of the
weapons in his initial evaluation.
3. The employee’s Division Commander will ensure that all documentation is forwarded
to the Office of the Chief of Police for review and implementation.
4. Upon transfer to the Extended Leave Unit, the employee will report to the Extended
Leave Unit Lieutenant who will be the single point of contact for the employee.
5. The Extended Leave Unit Lieutenant will:
a) Maintain a file relating to the employee’s absence;
b) Regularly evaluate each employee’s progress towards returning to work; and,
c) Work as needed with Human Resources to assist with the employee’s

recovery or ensure that the employee has access to all available alternatives.
6. When it is determined that the employee can return to a “restricted duty” assignment,
the Extended Leave Unit Lieutenant will make the assignment and will monitor each
employee’s performance until release to full duty status.

a) A restricted duty assignment is defined as work of a nature that will

accommodate an officer’s temporary physical disability.
b) Such assignment must be identified by an immediate need and benefit to the

Department, must complement the normal functions of the Department and
must be within the reasonable capabilities of the temporarily disabled officer.
This assignment may be in any Division of the Department.
7. Once the employee is determined able to return to work without limitations, the
Extended Leave Unit Lieutenant will coordinate with the Office of the Chief of Police
to determine the employee’s work assignment and arrange for a transfer to the
appropriate Division.
a) Should an employee, on a restricted duty assignment or extended leave, be

unable to participate in the annual firearms qualifications, minimum fitness
assessment and/or control tactics training during his/her scheduled In-Service
training, the employee must successfully complete the mandatory training
prior to his/her release to his/her next assignment.
b) Employees returning to full duty status following a restricted duty assignment

or extended leave will be placed in an assignment based upon the needs of
the Department at that time.
8. The Chief of Police may, at his discretion, extend a restricted duty assignment to an
officer who has applied to LOPFI for a non-duty disability retirement.
a) The restricted duty assignment will be terminated upon the officer’s

notification of a disability benefit award or denial by LOPFI.
b) The officer upon notification will be placed on accumulated available

personal leave and will be immediately separated from Departmental
employment once the leave is exhausted under such circumstances.
D. Sworn personnel placed on restricted duty or transferred to the Extended Leave Unit because of
extended leave are not permitted to exercise police power, except in extreme emergencies, self-defense
or in the defense of other parties. In addition,
1. Officers placed in restricted duty assignments will not wear a uniform and will report for duty
in appropriate business attire.
2. The Office of the Chief of Police reserves the right to suspend or revoke accouterments
associated with the officer’s original duties, i.e., clothing allowance, city vehicle, etc., while an
officer is in an extended leave or restricted duty status.
3. Any employee assigned to Extended Leave will not be permitted to perform any volunteer
work/activity in which they receive any form of compensation unless approved by the Office of

E. Active Duty
1. When an employee in the armed forces is activated to service either for annual training or any
other official military assignment requiring absence from Departmental duties, the employee
will provide their Chain of Command a copy of the military orders for each assignment. The
military orders will be reviewed at each level of the employee’s chain of command and
forwarded to the Office of the Chief of Police.
2. The Office of the Chief of Police will forward all appropriate military communications, orders,
transfer letters or approved leave requests for such employees to the Administrative Services
Manager who will ensure that proper payroll entries are made.
3. All employees assigned to active military duty in excess of 30 consecutive days, or who
are granted a leave of absence in excess of 30 days for any reason, will be transferred to
the Extended Leave Unit for accountability and tracking. The Extended Leave Unit
Lieutenant will conduct an exit interview with the employee to ensure all appropriate
paperwork has been completed.
a) The Extended Leave Unit Lieutenant, acting as the point of contact for the
agency will ensure the employee is notified of agency news, significant
events and promotions or promotional opportunities.
4. All employees returning from military duty or leaves of absence that are in excess of
30 days will report to the Extended Leave Unit Lieutenant for in processing, including
an interview to ensure all appropriate paperwork has been completed.
a) The returning employee will provide the Extended Leave Unit Lieutenant
with documentation showing their discharge from active military duty.
b) The Extended Leave Unit Lieutenant will ensure that all documentation
pertaining to the employee’s discharge and date of return is forwarded to the
Administrative Services Manager for proper payroll entry.
5. Employees not assigned to the Extended Leave Unit but who have been on military
leave shall provide their Chain of Command with the appropriate discharge
documentation. The Division Commander shall ensure that all documentation along
with the employee’s return date is forwarded to the Administrative Services Manager
for payroll entry.
F. Exception-Personnel of the rank of Captain or Assistant Chief, who meet the guidelines for
transfer to the Extended Leave Unit, will continue to report to their appropriate supervisor in a
manner prescribed by that supervisor, in accordance with the Department’s sick leave policy.
VII. Field Services Bureau Assignment
A. Unless an overriding Departmental need exists, all recruit officers will be assigned to the Field
Services Bureau upon graduation from the Training Academy.

1. Recruits successfully finishing the Field Training Program will be assigned to unfilled
vacancies.
B. The Field Services Bureau Commander will be responsible for personnel assignments within
and between the various Field Services Divisions. Assignment of civilian employees and sworn
personnel above the rank of Sergeant will be made at the discretion of the Chief of Police.
C. For the purpose of this section, assignment is defined as the movement of personnel within a
Field Services Division, particularly assignment to a specific shift, squad or days off. The term
also includes the movement of personnel from one Field Services Division to another, i.e.,
Downtown, Southwest, or Northwest.
D. The Field Services Bureau Commander will consider the distribution of experience when
assigning or re-assigning personnel to a particular shift, squad or days off.
1. Officers desiring assignment to another Field Services Division, shift, squad or days
off may submit a request on an officer’s report through their Chain of Command.
Placing a request does not guarantee re-assignment, but will ensure consideration
when an open position becomes available.
2. The officer’s report will be forwarded to the Field Services Bureau Commander for
placement on a re-assignment list.
a) The re-assignment list will be purged on December 31st of each year.
b) Officers are responsible for updating their re-assignment request upon

expiration of this list.
3. Consideration for re-assignment will be made not only on the basis of seniority but
also on the availability of a vacant position and the needs of the department.
4. Officers transferred to Patrol from a specialized assignment will be placed in a vacant

position within the Division.
E. Patrol workload factors will be monitored and assignments may be adjusted as necessary to
reflect these workload factors.
1. The distribution of personnel among the geographical Field Services Divisions and among the
shifts may be adjusted. Additionally, squad size and days-off configurations may be changed to
improve patrol deployment.
2. Assignments will be reviewed on at least an annual basis and, if adjustments are deemed
appropriate by the Field Services Bureau Commander, a patrol “sign-up” will be conducted.
Generally, there will be an annual sign-up, which will be conducted approximately two months
in advance of the beginning of the first pay period in January (when the sign-up will become
effective).

3. The Field Services Bureau Commander will determine the number of senior officers or officers
with specialized training which will be assigned to each shift and squad. Seniority will then be
given consideration as officers bid for positions.
F. When the Office of the Chief of Police determines that it is necessary to make any changes to
assignment of employees, shift and/or days-off during this process or at any other time, the Office of the
Chief of Police may make such assignments and such decisions will be final.

GENERAL ORDER
G. O. 203 UNIFORM REGULATIONS

I. Purpose
A. This Order establishes the requirements for personal appearance of employees and the proper
wearing of departmentally issued or approved uniforms and accessories.
B. Employees will wear only those articles of uniform clothing and accessories as authorized in this
Order. Uniforms will be issued by the Department.
C. The personal appearance and grooming standards for all employees are specified in this Order.
II. General
A. The Chief of Police will approve all changes in the police uniform.
B. All employees will strictly adhere to uniform standards and grooming.
C. Officers may only wear their uniforms while enroute to or from or during any scheduled on-duty
assignment, specifically authorized off-duty employment, subpoenaed court appearance in which
an officer expects to testify on behalf of the city or prosecution for criminal cases, or where such
uniform is specially authorized by the Office of the Chief of Police.
III. Uniform and Equipment Committee
A. Scope
1. This section establishes the structural and operational guidelines of the Little Rock Police
Department Uniform and Equipment Committee.
2. The Little Rock Police Department Uniform and Equipment Committee serves as an
advisory committee making recommendations to the Assistant Chief of Police in charge
of the Training Division for changes in uniforms and equipment.
B. Uniform and Equipment Committee Members
1. The Assistant Chief of Police, in charge of the Training Division, shall appoint the Little
Rock Police Department Uniform and Equipment Committee, which will serve for a
period of two years. The committee will be comprised of the following:

GENERAL ORDERS G. O. 203 UNIFORM REGULATIONS
a) Chairman, Training Division Lieutenant
b) Member, Training Division Sergeant
c) Member, Training Division Quartermaster
d) Member, Downtown Division representative
e) Member, Southwest Division representative
f) Member, Northwest Division representative
g) Member, Major Crimes Division representative
h) Member, SID representative
i) Member, SWAT representative
j) Member SRU representative
C. Committee members are appointed for a two-year term by the Assistant Chief of Police, in charge
of the Training Division. Should a member wish to be released prior to the end of their term, they
shall submit a letter through their chain of command making such request.
D. Should any member miss two consecutive meetings, the committee chairman shall request his
removal and immediate appointment of replacement.
E. The committee shall meet twice a year to discuss issues related to the uniforms and equipment of
departmental personnel.
1. Any officer that would like to present a recommendation to the committee should do so in
writing and forward it to a committee member or the Training Division Lieutenant.
F. The committee chairman shall prepare a written report after each meeting, which will be forwarded
to the Assistant Chief of Police, in charge of the Training Division and the Chief of Police.
IV. Personal Appearance
A. Males in Uniform
1. The hair must be combed in an orderly manner and maintained under all but the most
adverse conditions.
2. The hairstyle shall present a tapered appearance on the sides and back. No style or
texture of hair shall be permitted to extend outward in excess of one (1) inch. The “Block
Cut” is permitted as long as a tapered appearance is maintained. The length and/or bulk of
the hair shall not present a ragged, unkempt or extreme appearance and shall not interfere
with the wearing of the uniform cap.

G. O. 203 UNIFORM REGULATIONS LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
3. When combed, the hair length shall not touch the top of the shirt collar, the front shall not
protrude from under the front of the uniform cap and the length on the sides shall be no
lower than the middle of the ear.
4. Wigs are acceptable, provided they meet the requirements set out above.
5. Sideburns shall be neatly trimmed, tapered and shall not extend below the bottom of the
earlobe. Sideburns shall not be flared or wider at the bottom than their natural width at the
top. Sideburns shall end in a clean-shaven, horizontal line.
6. Mustaches must be trimmed and shall not be allowed to grow or hang below the corner of
the mouth nor shall they be twisted or curled at the ends.
7. Employees are to maintain a clean-shaven appearance at all times while on duty or

working off duty in a police capacity.
B. Females in Uniform
1. Females in uniform shall wear their hair in styles which permit the proper wearing of the
uniform cap.
2. The hair must be neat and shall not extend below the bottom of the shirt collar. The
grooming style must be maintained under all but the most adverse conditions.
3. Hairstyles such as pigtails, ponytails, braids and large bouffants are not acceptable.
4. Wigs are acceptable as long as they meet the prescribed requirements for hairstyles.
C. Non-sworn uniformed personnel (except Reserve Officers) will wear a light gray or white shirt as a
part of their uniform.
D. Employees in Non-Uniform Apparel While On-Duty
1. Sworn officers who are authorized to wear civilian clothing shall adhere to the hairstyle
regulations prescribed for uniform personnel.
2. Personnel who are assigned to special duties that require them to have hairstyles different
from those required for uniform personnel must receive approval from their Division
Commander to deviate from this General Order.
E. Jewelry for Uniformed Personnel
1. Uniformed employees may wear a wristwatch and/or identification bracelet. Only one
ring per hand is permitted. (A wedding set is considered as one ring.) Necklaces or other
decorative jewelry are prohibited.

2. Earrings, one in each earlobe, may only be worn by females, providing the earrings do not
hang below the earlobe. Earrings must be identical. Personnel who are assigned to
special duties that require them to deviate from this policy must have permission from
their Division Commander. The Department will not be liable for the loss or damage of
earrings.
3. Items used by female officers to hold their hair in place shall be concealed as much as
possible and shall be of a color and style that blends with the hair. Decorative items such
as ribbons are prohibited.
F. Make-up for Female Employees - The use of make-up by sworn female employees, whether in
uniform or plain clothes, shall be conservative. This does not imply a plain look, but is meant to
eliminate gaudiness.
G. Body Piercing - With the exception of pierced ears (see section IV. E. 2), body piercing of the
face, head, tongue, mouth or any other body part that is not concealed by the authorized uniform or
plain clothes is prohibited for wear by any personnel when representing the Little Rock Police
Department.
H. Dental Ornamentation – The use of gold, platinum, silver or other veneer caps for the purpose of
ornamentation is prohibited. Teeth whether natural, capped or veneered will not be ornamented
with designs, jewels, initials, etc.
I. Tattoos/Body Art/Intentional Body Mutilation/Branding
1. Any tattoo, body art, intentional body mutilation, or branding that displays any design,
logo or wording will be regulated in the following manner:
a) Tattoos, body art, intentional body mutilation, or branding must be concealed

by the authorized uniform or authorized plain clothes when on-duty or
otherwise representing the Department (i.e. off-duty employment). This
section does not apply to the Special Investigation Division personnel in their
daily operations.
b) Tattoos, body art, intentional body mutilation, and branding of the head, face,
neck, and hands are prohibited.
c) Some examples include, but are not limited to the following:
(1) A split, forked, tongue;
(2) Foreign objects inserted under the skin to create a design, effect or
pattern;
(3) Enlarged or stretched out holes in the earlobes (other than normal
piercing holes); and,
(4) Intentional branding or scarring.

2. Personnel with an existing tattoo, body art, intentional body mutilation, branding or
scarring which would be visible with the wearing of the uniform, shall have the following
options:
a) If in uniform, the employee will wear an authorized long sleeved shirt in

compliance with approved uniform standards; or,
b) If in business attire, the employee will wear suitable long sleeved clothing; or
c) If the tattoo is on the leg(s), the employee will wear authorized full-length,
uniform or business attire pants; or
d) Cover the surface of the tattoo, etc. with a skin-tone bandage/patch not to exceed
4”x6”. (No more than one bandage/patch may be worn on an individual’s arm or
leg.); or
e) Wear a cover-up sleeve (TatJacket) that will completely conceal and cover the
tattoo, etc. The sleeve should be of a color as close to the employee’s skin
tone as possible; or
f) Makeup products designed to cover tattoos may be worn as an option. The

makeup must blend with the employee’s skin tone and completely conceal the
tattoo; or
g) Have the tattoo or brand removed at the employee’s expense.
V. Non-Uniform Apparel While On-Duty
A. Employees of the Major Crimes Division, the Special Investigations Division, and any other
employees/units designated by the Chief of Police shall receive a quarterly clothing allowance.
B. Certain employees (e.g. property personnel and Training Division personnel) may wear work
clothing appropriate to the nature of their assignment. Work clothing shall not be considered as
uniform and shall not be worn in lieu of the regulation uniform when such is required.
C. Officers attending or instructing any Departmental classroom training or Departmentally sponsored

classroom training will ordinarily be required to wear the proper police uniform or appropriate
business attire (coat and tie for male employees; a dress skirt and blouse or pants suit for female
employees). The Training Division Commander may prescribe other attire as may be appropriate
for other training exercises and venues.
VI. Uniform Regulations
A. Uniformed personnel will adhere to the following regulations:
1. Class “A” Uniform will consist of the long sleeve uniform shirt and tie. This will be the
dress uniform and shall be worn for official ceremonies, funerals or when directed by a
Division Commander and/or the Office of the Chief of Police.

2. Standard Duty Uniform – The Standard Duty Uniform will consist of the short or long
sleeve shirt without a tie. This will be the standard uniform issued to all sworn personnel
and worn when the officer is working in a uniform assignment.
3. A complete uniform shall be worn when required and no item of the uniform shall be
worn except as part of the complete uniform.
4. All uniforms worn by Department personnel shall present a clean and professional
appearance. The Standard Duty Uniform, Class A Uniform, and BDU uniforms will be
pressed or laundered to present a pressed appearance at all times when worn.
B. No substitutions for uniform equipment shall be allowed unless specifically approved by the Chief
of Police.
VII. Uniform Items for Sworn Personnel
A. Accessories for personnel below the rank of Sergeant shall be silver in color and accessories for
supervisory personnel shall be gold in color.
B. All uniforms and equipment referenced in this Order are issued by the Department unless
otherwise specified.
C. Uniform Cap
1. The uniform cap shall be worn level on the head when viewed from the front or the back
and the front tip of the bill shall be level with the top of the eyebrows when viewed from
the side.
2. The uniform cap will be optional except when worn with the Class “A” uniform or
directed by a supervisor.
D. Ties
1. Ties shall be worn as part of the Class “A” dress uniform.
2. Tie clasps shall not be worn on the uniform tie.
E. T-Shirts
1. A white or black T-shirt may be worn with the winter and summer duty uniform.
2. A “midnight blue” mock turtleneck or dickey mock turtleneck may be purchased by

officers at their own expense. These may be worn during cold weather with long sleeve
uniform shirts only. These turtlenecks should be plain, with no embroidery.
3. The Training Division will maintain the specifications for the optional turtleneck.
Officers who purchase the optional turtleneck must ensure that it meets the Department’s
established specifications.
F. Shirts

1. All buttons on the uniform shirt shall be buttoned at all times except the shirt collar button
on the duty uniform.
2. Sleeves shall not be rolled up or turned under on the long sleeve uniform shirt.
3. Uniform shirts with zippers shall be zipped at all times.
4. Field Training Officers (FTO) shall wear FTO insignia on each sleeve.
5. Sergeants shall wear the cloth chevrons on each sleeve.
G. Trousers
1. Trousers shall be no shorter than two (2) inches above the top of the sole of the footwear
at the heel and no longer than the top of the heel when standing erect.
2. Trousers shall not be pegged or flared.
H. Socks
1. Socks worn with low cut shoes shall be black.
2. White socks may be worn for health reasons when supported by a physician’s statement.
I. Shoes
1. Shoes worn with the uniform must be black smooth-grained leather or similar synthetic
material having an acceptable likeness to leather.
2. They may be low-cut, high-cut, or high top and must have black stitching and black
leather or synthetic soles.
3. The heel, measured from the top of the sole to the bottom of the heel, shall not exceed l
1/2 inches in height.
4. Shoes shall be plain-toed. (Loafers, wing tips, tennis shoes or shoes with ornamental
designs, buckles or straps are not acceptable.)
J. Boots
1. Motorcycle officers may wear black boots of a style and design approved by the Chief of
Police.
2. Wellington-type boots that are black and of smooth-grained leather or similar synthetic
material having a likeness to leather may be worn by uniformed personnel.
3. The heels, measured from the top of the sole to the bottom of the heel, shall be a
maximum of 1 5/8 inches.

4. The toe style shall be either the round or medium round style and all stitching shall be
black.
5. Trouser cuffs must be worn outside the boot tops and there shall not be any ornamental
straps, stitching or buckles on the boot.
K. Helmets
1. Officers assigned to ride Departmental motorcycles shall wear protective helmets

approved by the Chief of Police.
2. Officers riding motorcycles off-duty while wearing the police uniform shall be required to
wear a white protective helmet similar to those issued by the Department.
L. Jackets
1. All personnel shall wear the L.R.P.D. shoulder patch on the left shoulder.
2. The rank patch shall be worn on the right shoulder.
3. The badge shall be worn over the left breast.
4. Field Training Officers (FTO) shall wear FTO insignia on each sleeve.
5. Sergeants shall wear the cloth chevrons on each sleeve.
6. Lieutenants and above shall wear their rank insignia on each shoulder.
7. Officers may purchase at their own expense a departmentally approved windbreaker to be

worn in the place of the issued nylon work jacket.
8. The Training Division will maintain the specifications for the optional nylon windbreaker.
Officers who purchase the optional jacket must ensure that it meets the Department’s
established specifications.
M. Rain Gear
1. Uniform personnel shall wear only the rain gear issued by the Department.
2. The cap cover and coat shall be worn at all times when conditions necessitate.
3. The cape and leggings are optional; each officer shall be responsible for all parts of the
rain gear issued to them.
4. Rain gear shall be stored and carried in the issued carrying bag. (Rain gear shall not be
stored until it has dried.)
N. Leather Goods - The following leather goods shall be worn and are the only items authorized to be
worn with the Police Uniform.

1. One Sam Browne style belt, finished in a basket weave pattern, and a rectangular metal
buckle or Velcro fastener.
2. The following holsters are approved for the Glock 22: Don Hume Tiger model H738,
Safariland model 295 and the Safariland model 070, basket weave design.
3. One or two open style handcuff cases or the closed cover case with snap or Velcro
closure, basket weave design. Officers may, at their own expense, carry a second set of
handcuffs and a second handcuff case, but both sets of handcuffs must be stored in a case.
Wearing handcuffs without a case will not be allowed.
4. Two belt keepers, basket weave design.
5. One two (2) clip .40-caliber magazine carrier, basket weave design.
6. One basket weave baton “D” ring.
7. “Mini-mag” flashlight holder. Basket weave design.
8. Key rings, knives, and similar items shall not be worn attached to the Sam Browne belt.
9. The Leatherman all-purpose tools may be worn on the duty belt in a basket weave case
purchased at the officer’s expense.
10. The wearing of leather gloves with the police uniform is acceptable during cold inclement
weather with the long sleeve uniform shirt only. Officers may wear departmentally
approved gloves for officer safety purposes with the short sleeve uniform shirt. These
options consist of the following and may be purchased at officer’s own expense:
a) Street Guard SGK 100: 9oz, 100% Kevlar interlock liner with a neoprene and
nylon spandex top, which provides cut resistance material, and limited liquid
protection.
b) Vinyl or latex protective gloves used for protection against biohazard

materials.
11. Neoprene Ear Warmers/Cold Weather Head Gear
a) Neoprene ear warmers may be worn with or without the uniform cap during
cold and inclement weather.
b) Uniform personnel shall wear only the neoprene ear warmer issued by the
Department.
c) A “midnight blue” knit cap with the “LRPD” logo embroidered on the front
will be issued and may be worn in cold or inclement weather. No other type of
hat, cap, or ear warmer shall be worn.
12. Tactical Radio Lapel Microphone

a) Personnel may purchase a tactical radio lapel microphone and ear piece to
wear with the Departmental issued radio.
O. Wristbands by Plainclothes Officers to reduce blue on blue shooting/incidents
1. The Training Division will issue two (2) reflective neon yellow LRPD wrist
bands to all officers in an effort to assist identification of a sworn law
enforcement officer(s) in plain clothes and to help prevent blue on blue
shootings involving plainclothes officers while on duty or off duty. The
departmentally issued wristbands can be used at the scene of an incident to
assist in the identification of plainclothes officers by other responding officers
or civilians. Plainclothes officers involved in a situation where officer
identification is likely to be difficult and where its use will not compromise a
covert operation can place the wristband on their dominant gun hand as soon as
possible after an incident. When responding to a crime scene or an incident in
which the possibility of danger exists, plainclothes officers, either on duty or off
duty, can affix their reflective LRPD wristband to their shooting wrist prior to
arrival if practical.
2. In circumstances where a uniformed officer confronts a plainclothes/undercover

officer, the challenged plain clothes/undercover officer shall comply with the
commands of the challenging officer and identify themself at the first safe
opportunity. If the plainclothes/undercover officer has a weapon, he/she shall
not make any movements, unless instructed to do so by the uniformed officer. If
requested by the uniformed officer, or plainclothes officer whose identity has
been established or is otherwise known, the challenged plainclothes officer shall
show his/her credentials to the challenging officer, allowing the challenging
officer to make a positive identification of the plainclothes officer.
3. As an officer safety issue, officers will not wear the wristband in a visible
manner on their person unless they are responding or actually involved in an
event while in plainclothes. Officers in an on duty plainclothes assignment are
encouraged to have an ID band on their person or readily available. Officers
off duty shall ensure they make every effort to have access to the wristband
when they are armed in plain clothes. Officers are encouraged to carry one (1)
ID band on their person and one (1) in their private vehicle.
VIII. Uniform Regulations for Civilian Employees
A. Non-Uniformed civilian employees of the City of Little Rock must present a professional
appearance to effectively relate to all segments of the populations they serve. The Chief of Police
will establish appearance regulations which shall apply to all personnel.
1. All male and female employees shall wear conservative, moderate, business-like
attire. The attire shall be clean and well-maintained. For females this includes
dresses, dress skirts, pant suits, or pants and a business top. Male employees shall
wear dress trousers, shirt and tie, except when directed otherwise.
2. In compliance with this directive, the following are examples of unacceptable attire:
torn, patched/faded clothing, halter tops, tube tops, tank tops, low-cut blouses, see
through or mesh clothing, muscle shirts, strapless sun dresses, shorts, jeans or denim
attire, skirts more than five (5) inches above the knee, shirts with slogans or large
letter advertising, shirts that allow midriff to show, sweat suits/warm-up suits, sweat
pants, and flip flops.

3. Any employee who is in doubt about the appropriateness of a particular mode of

dress should consult their immediate supervisor. If an item of clothing is deemed
inappropriate by the employee’s supervisor, the employee may be sent home to
change clothes and will be given a verbal warning for the first offense, and
progressive disciplinary action will be taken for further violations.
B. Uniformed Civilian Employees
1. This Policy establishes the requirements for personal appearance of uniformed civilian
employees and the proper wearing of departmentally issued or approved uniforms and
accessories.
2. Employees will wear only those articles of uniform clothing and accessories as authorized
in this Order. All uniforms will be issued by the Department.
3. The personal appearance and grooming standards for uniformed civilian employees are
specified in this Order.
4. The Chief of Police will approve all changes in the civilian uniform.
5. All employees will strictly adhere to uniform standards and grooming.
6. Employees may only wear their uniforms while en route to, from or during any scheduled
on-duty assignment, subpoenaed court appearance in which an employee expects to testify
on behalf of the city or prosecution for criminal cases, or where such uniform is specially
authorized by the Office of the Chief of Police.
7. Males in Uniform
a) The hair must be combed in an orderly manner and maintained under all but
the most adverse conditions.
b) The hairstyle shall present a tapered appearance on the sides and back. No
style or texture of hair shall be permitted to extend outward in excess of one
(1) inch. The “Block Cut” is permitted as long as a tapered appearance is
maintained. The length and/or bulk of the hair shall not present a ragged,
unkept or extreme appearance.
c) When combed, the hair length shall not touch the top of the shirt collar, and
the length on the sides shall be no lower than the middle of the ear.
d) Wigs are acceptable, provided they meet the requirements set out above.
e) Sideburns shall be neatly trimmed, tapered and shall not extend below the
bottom of the earlobe. Sideburns shall not be flared or wider at the bottom
than their natural width at the top. Sideburns shall end in a clean, horizontal
line.

f) Mustaches must be trimmed and shall not be allowed to grow or hang below
the corner of the mouth nor shall they be twisted or curled at the ends. Beards
will not be permitted.
g) Employees are to maintain a clean appearance at all times while on duty.
8. Females in Uniform
a) Females in uniform shall wear their hair in styles, which project a conservative
professional image.
b) The hair must be neat and shall not extend below the bottom of the shirt collar.
The grooming style must be maintained under all but the most adverse
conditions.
c) Hairstyles such as pigtails, ponytails, braids and large bouffants are not
acceptable.
d) Wigs are acceptable as long as they meet the prescribed requirements for
hairstyles.
9. Jewelry for Uniformed Personnel
a) Uniformed employees may wear a wrist watch and/or identification bracelet.

Only one ring per hand is permitted. (A wedding set is considered as one ring.)
Necklaces or other decorative jewelry are prohibited.
b) Earrings, one in each earlobe, may be worn by females, providing the earrings
do not hang below the earlobe. Earrings must be identical. Personnel who are
assigned to special duties that require them to deviate from this policy must
have permission from their Division Commander. The Department will not
be liable for the loss or damage of earrings.
c) Items used by female employees to hold their hair in place shall be concealed
as much as possible and shall be of a color and style that blends with the hair.
Decorative items such as ribbons are prohibited.
d) Make-up for Female Employees - The use of make-up by female employees,

whether in uniform or plain clothes, shall be conservative. This does not imply
a plain look, but is meant to eliminate gaudiness.
10. Employees attending or instructing any Department training class shall not wear clothing
with written messages or symbols that convey any humorous, political, or social idea.
11. Uniformed personnel will adhere to the following regulations:
a) Class “A” Uniform will consist of the long sleeve uniform shirt and tie. This
will be the dress uniform and shall be worn for official ceremonies, funerals or
when directed by a Division Commander and/or the Office of the Chief of
Police.

b) A complete uniform shall be worn when required and no item of the uniform
shall be worn except as part of the complete uniform.
c) No substitutions for uniform equipment shall be allowed unless specifically

approved by the Chief of Police.
12. Accessories for supervisory personnel shall be gold in color all others shall be silver in
color.
13. All uniforms and equipment referenced in this Order are issued by the Department unless
otherwise specified.
14. Ties shall be worn as part of the Class “A” dress uniform.
a) Tie clasps shall not be worn on the uniform tie.
15. A white or black T-shirt may be worn with the winter and summer duty uniform.
16. Shirts
a) All buttons on the uniform shirt shall be buttoned at all times except the shirt
collar button on the duty uniform.
b) Sleeves shall not be rolled up or turned under on the long sleeve uniform shirt.
c) Uniform shirts with zippers shall be zipped at all times.
17. Trousers
a) Trousers shall be no shorter than two (2) inches above the top of the sole of
the footwear at the heel and no longer than the top of the heel when standing
erect.
b) Trousers shall not be pegged or flared.
18. Socks worn with low cut shoes shall be black.
a) White socks may be worn for health reasons when supported by a physician’s
statement.
19. Shoes
a) Shoes worn with the uniform will be purchased by the employee, and must be
black smooth-grained leather or similar synthetic material having an
acceptable likeness to leather.
b) They may be low-cut, high-cut, or high-top and must have black stitching and
black leather or synthetic soles.

c) The heel, measured from the top of the sole to the bottom of the heel, shall not
exceed l 1/2 inches in height.
d) Shoes shall be plain-toed. (Loafers, wing tips, tennis shoes or shoes with
ornamental designs, buckles or straps are not acceptable.)
20. Jackets
a) All personnel shall wear the L.R.P.D. shoulder unit patch on the left shoulder.
b) A rank patch may be worn on the right shoulder.
c) The badge (where appropriate) shall be worn over the left breast.
21. The wearing of leather gloves with the civilian uniform is acceptable during cold
inclement weather with the long sleeve uniform shirt only. Employees may wear
departmentally approved gloves for safety purposes with the short sleeve uniform shirt.
These options consist of the following and may be purchased at officer’s own expense:
a) Street Guard SGK 100: 9oz, 100% Kevlar interlock liner with a neoprene and
nylon spandex top, which provides cut resistance material, and limited liquid
protection.
b) Vinyl or latex protective gloves used for protection against biohazard

materials.
22. Neoprene Ear Warmers/Cold Weather Head Gear
a) Neoprene ear warmers may be worn with or without the uniform cap during
cold and inclement weather.
b) Uniform personnel shall wear only the neoprene ear warmer issued by the
Department.
c) A “midnight blue” knit cap with the “LRPD” logo embroidered on the front
will be issued and may be worn in cold or inclement weather. No other type of
hat, cap, or ear warmer shall be worn.
23. The following accessory items shall be worn on the uniform:
a) Uniform personnel shall wear only badges issued by the Department.
(1) Collar brass shall consist of the letters L.R.P.D. and shall be worn on
each side of the collar on all shirts by all civilian employees.
b) The collar brass on winter duty, summer duty and Class “A” uniform shirts
shall be positioned one-inch back from the front edge of the collar, centered
and parallel with the top edge of the collar.

c) The Little Rock Police Department unit patch shall be worn below the seam of
the left shoulder of the work jacket and all shirts.
d) All patches proposed for use should be submitted through the Chain of
Command and approved by the Office of the Chief of Police prior to use.
e) A service star for each five years of service and/or a bar for each single year of
service may be worn on the lower left sleeve of the jackets and the long sleeve
uniform shirt.
f) Nameplates shall be worn by all uniformed personnel.
(1) Nameplates shall be worn over the right pocket of all shirts.
g) Personnel who routinely perform uniformed traffic duties shall be issued

reflective vests.
(1) The reflective vest will be worn whenever an employee is assigned a

traffic control function or exposed to a traffic hazard (e.g., traffic
accident scene, low visibility situation, etc.).
(2) The reflective vest shall be worn at all times after dark, when
performing a traffic related task.
h) Any employee in need of a uniform replacement item shall report to the

Training Division Clothing Officer and bring the item to be replaced.
(1) All clothing will be clean prior to being returned to the Training
Division. No replacement will be made prior to the requested item
being returned as described.
(2) The Training Division Quartermaster will order the replacement item
and notify the employee when the item(s) are available for pick up. The
Quartermaster will stock a limited amount of clothing items to be issued
in emergencies on a case by case basis.
C. Civilian employees shall carry their identification card, identifying them as a members of the Little
Rock Police Department at all times while upon police premises, except when required to
surrender such by the Code of Conduct for Civilian Employees.
D. Improper or negligent handling of or negligent damage to city property is a violation of the Code
of Conduct for Civilian Employees.
1. Reckless handling of or reckless damage to City property is a serious violation of the

Code of Conduct for Civilian Employees and shall subject the offender to severe
disciplinary action.
E. Civilian employees who have lost, damaged, or destroyed any equipment issued to them by the
Department shall immediately report such to their immediate supervisor. The employee may be
required to make restitution if the loss or damage is the result of negligence on the part of the
employee.

F. Civilian employees shall promptly report the need for repairs of any city owned property issued,
used or possessed by them to their immediate supervisor.
G. Civilian employees shall not alter, repair, or in any way change, add to, or remove any parts or
accessories of any city owned property without permission from the Chief of Police.
IX. Uniform Accessories
A. Uniform accessories for personnel below the rank of Sergeant shall be silver in color and accessory
items for supervisory personnel shall be gold in color.
B. The following accessory items shall be worn on the uniform:
1. Badges
a) Only badges issued by the Department shall be worn by uniform personnel.
b) Department issued cloth badges will be worn on the nylon work jacket.
2. Rank Insignia
a) Sergeants shall wear the cloth chevrons on each sleeve of all shirts and jackets.
b) Lieutenants and above shall wear their rank insignia on the collar of all shirts.
3. Collar Brass
a) Collar brass shall consist of the letters L.R.P.D. and shall be worn on each side
of the collar on all shirts by patrol officers and sergeants.
b) The collar brass on winter duty, summer duty and Class “A” uniform shirts
shall be positioned one-inch back from the front edge of the collar, centered
and parallel with the top edge of the collar.
4. Sleeve Patches
a) The Little Rock Police Department patch shall be worn below the seam of the
left shoulder of the nylon work jacket and all shirts.
(1) The Department/City patch should continue to be worn on the left

sleeve and should remain the same basic design with one of three
categories of employee type displayed below the seal:
(a) “Police” - For sworn personnel;
(b) “Support” - For civilian personnel.
(2) All patches proposed for use should be submitted through the Chain of
Command and approved by the Office of the Chief of Police prior to
use.

b) A service star for each five years of service and/or a bar for each single year of
service may be worn on the lower left sleeve of the jackets and the long sleeve
uniform shirt.
5. Name Plates
a) Nameplates shall be worn by all uniformed personnel.
b) Nameplates shall be worn over the right pocket of all shirts.
6. Ballistic Vests (Body Armor)
a) Body Armor will be issued by the Department.
b) Officers may purchase their own body armor, but it must meet or exceed the
Department issued vests.
c) The Training Division will maintain the approved specifications for body
armor.
d) All uniformed officers will be required to wear their soft body armor at all
times while assigned to field enforcement duties, except those officers
specifically excluded by the Office of the Chief of Police.
e) All officers assigned to non-uniformed positions will be required to wear their

soft body armor when engaged in pre-planned high-risk situations, during
unusual occurrences, special tactical situations, or at the direction of a
supervisor.
f) Officers are responsible for maintaining their body armor in good condition.
Damage, loss, or theft will be reported to a supervisor.
g) Supervisors will make random inspections to ensure compliance with this

General Order.
7. Reflective Vests
a) Officers who routinely perform uniformed traffic duties shall be issued

reflective vests.
b) The reflective vest and whistle will be worn whenever an officer is assigned a
traffic control function or exposed to a traffic hazard (e.g., traffic accident
scene, low visibility situation, etc.).
c) The reflective vest shall be worn at all times after dark, when performing a
traffic related task on or off duty.
X. Special Use Items

A. Items issued by the Department to officers in specialized police positions (e.g., Tactical Response
Unit, Canine Unit, Training, etc.) are designated as special-use items.
B. Specifications for these items shall be defined by the Division Commander with final approval
from the Office of the Chief of Police.
C. Nylon duty gear issued by the Department may be worn only by officers in specialized police
positions (S.W.A.T., S.I.D., Training, K-9, Bicycle and walk beat officers) and only while wearing
a specialized uniform, (B.D.U., camo clothing, etc.) authorized by the Office of the Chief of
Police.
D. Ultra Sensor facemasks may be worn only by bicycle officers during inclement weather, and only
while riding their bicycle with helmet.
E. Special use items are authorized during times of special circumstances only and are not to be worn
in lieu of the departmental uniform.
1. Training Division personnel may wear special use items on the firing range, driving range
and in field training situations.
2. In tactical or training situations authorized units may wear special use items. As soon as
practical at the conclusion of the tactical or training situation these officers will change to
their normal duty uniform, if returning to regular duty. The use of the tactical holsters
will be restricted to tactical and training situations only. At the conclusion of the tactical
or training situation, the tactical holster will be replaced with approved regular nylon duty
gear or leather gear.
3. When an officer receives a forthwith order from any court he will respond to the order in
the uniform which he is wearing.
XI. Wearing of Departmental Awards
A. Members of the Department who have been awarded the following commendation(s) are
authorized to wear the ribbon bar(s) on the uniform shirt only. The ribbon bar(s) shall be worn
centered on the right pocket, one-half (1/2) inch below the nameplate. The top of the ribbon bar(s)
shall be even with the top pocket seam.
1. Medal of Valor
2. Medal of Merit
3. Police Shield Award
4. Lifesaving Award
5. Police Commendation Award
6. Civic Achievement Award
7. Noel Don McGuire Award

8. Chief Lawrence Johnson Leadership Award
9. Police Youth Live In Award
B. In the event that an employee should receive more than one award, he may wear all the ribbon bars
associated with the awards.
1. The ribbon bars shall be worn in a horizontal row positioned as described in subsection
IX.A. above, with the ribbon bar representing the highest level of award positioned to the
right.
2. No more than three ribbon bars shall be worn on each horizontal row and will be arranged
in the order of precedence listed above. Employees who have been awarded four or more
ribbon bars will fill the lower rows with the three lowest precedence awards progressing
up with awards of higher precedence.
C. Should an employee receive the same award more than once, only one ribbon bar for that level of
award will be worn. The ribbon bar issued for subsequent awards will denote the number of times
the employee has received the award.
D. Employees are permitted to wear the ribbon bar(s) from the date issued until the date of
termination of active police service.
XII. Uniform Issue Procedure
A. Any officer in need of a uniform replacement item shall report to the Training Division Clothing
Officer and bring the item to be replaced.
B. All clothing will be clean prior to being returned to the Training Division. (No replacement will
be made prior to the requested item being returned as described.)
C. The Training Division Quartermaster will order the replacement item and notify the officer when
the item(s) are available for pick up. The Quartermaster will stock a limited amount of clothing
items to be issued in emergencies on a case-by-case basis.
XIII. Storage of Departmental Issued Equipment in Vehicles
A. Personal Vehicle: Assigned departmental equipment (gun, radio, laptop, badge, ID, etc.) shall not
be left in the passenger compartment of an officer’s personally owned vehicle at anytime when the
vehicle is unattended. Storage of police guns, radios, and badges in an officer’s personal vehicle
overnight or for any extended period of time is prohibited.
B. Unmarked Department Vehicle (Including SID Lease and Undercover Vehicles): Officers utilizing
or assigned an unmarked or undercover vehicle will not leave assigned departmental equipment in
the passenger compartment of the vehicle when the vehicle is unattended with the exception of
emergency circumstances. Even in the event of rapid exit from a vehicle under emergency
situations, the vehicle and contents shall be secured as soon as practical. Equipment may be
secured in the vehicle trunk if the remote trunk access in the passenger compartment is disabled.
Storage of police guns, radios, and badges in an unmarked department vehicle overnight or for any
extended period of time is prohibited.

C. Marked Department Vehicle: contain thousands of dollars of police equipment which is mounted
securely to the vehicle. Officers utilizing or assigned a marked department vehicle will not leave
assigned departmental equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle when the vehicle is
unattended with the exception of emergency circumstances unless the officer properly locks the
vehicle or can maintain an unobstructed view of the vehicle. Even in the event of rapid exit from a
vehicle under emergency situations, the vehicle and contents shall be secured as soon as practical.
For officers assigned a take-home marked vehicle equipment not permanently mounted in the
vehicle shall not be left in the passenger compartment, but may be secured in the vehicle trunk if
the remote trunk access in the passenger compartment is disabled. Storage of police guns, radios,
and badges in an unmarked department vehicle overnight or for any extended period of time is
prohibited.
D. Officers should employ common sense regarding the security and protection of their equipment.
Officers found negligent may be required to reimburse the Department for the cost of replacing the
equipment. The officer may also face appropriate disciplinary action.

GENERAL ORDER
G. O. 204 FIREARMS AND AMMUNITION REGULATIONS

I. Purpose
A. The purpose of this Order is to specify firearms and ammunition which are authorized by the
B. This Order also governs the handling and training associated with the use of firearms.
II. Departmental Firearms
A. The only authorized on-duty or off-duty firearms are those issued by the Department or those
authorized weapons inspected and approved by the Training Division, based on established
Departmental criteria approved by the Chief of Police.
B. A record of all weapons approved by the Department for official use will be maintained by a
Training Division Armorer. These records shall include:
1. Description of the weapon;
2. Owner;
3. Person approving the weapon and date of approval; and,
4. Course of fire and score.
C. Authorized weapons and registration requirements
1. Officers shall carry a Department-issued .40 caliber semi-automatic pistol as the on-duty
service weapon.
a) Detectives assigned to the Special Investigations Division (SID) may elect to

carry a Glock Model 43 (9mm) semi-automatic pistol.
2. Service weapons will be carried with a round in the chamber and the magazine fully
loaded.
3. Service weapons will be limited to the following models exclusively:
a) Glock, Model 22;
b) Glock, Model 23;

GENERAL ORDERS G. O. 204 FIREARMS AND AMMUNITION REGULATIONS
c) Glock, Model 27; and,
d) Glock Model 43.
4. Shotguns
a) Officers shall carry only departmentally issued 12-gauge shotguns.
b) Approved shotgun ammunition is 12-gauge, 2 3/4-inch #00 buckshot (9 pellet).
5. Specialized weapons (rifles, carbines, fully-automatic weapons, sawed-off or short-

barreled rifles or shotguns, silencers or suppressers and laser sights) other than service
weapons will be authorized only for those employees who are qualified with and whose
assignments require such weapons. The need for specialized weapons will be determined
by the Chief of Police. It shall be the responsibility of all Unit Commanders to ensure the
Training Division is supplied with a list of all specialized weapons utilized by his/her
Unit (S.W.A.T., S.I.D., S.R.U., etc.).
D. All Department issued sidearms shall be carried in an approved holster (unless otherwise
designated in these orders) or shall be stored in a designated secure area while on duty or
working in approved off-duty employment.
E. Officers on duty in plain clothes shall wear their weapon in a holster and in a manner that will
not attract attention or be open to the view of the public outside Departmental offices. Non-
uniformed officers shall wear holsters approved by the Division Commander or issued by the
Training Division.
F. Undercover officers may wear their weapon concealed, without the use of a holster.
G. Officers will qualify with authorized weapons on at least an annual basis.
H. Only a Departmentally issued or approved magazine shall be carried in any semi-automatic

weapon. The use of extended magazines, although approved by the manufacturer, shall not be
used. All magazines shall be loaded to full capacity, with a round chambered, in any and all
departmentally issued handguns.
I. Handgun Mounted Tactical Flashlights – flashlights attached to the duty pistol will meet the
following requirements and restrictions. The decision to carry a handgun mounted flashlight is
strictly voluntary; officers wishing to attach a tactical flashlight to their duty weapon must
purchase the holster and flashlight at their own expense and attend a mandatory training class on
their own time.
1. Approved holsters are the Safariland 6360 (Basket weave-Duty), Safariland 6378
(Detective–Paddle), Safariland 6377 (Detective–Belt), Safariland (Nylon), Safariland
6305 (Tactical).
2. Approved weapon mounted flashlights are the Streamlight M3, Streamlight TLR-1,
Surefire X200, and the Surefire X300.
3. Officer will not attach a flashlight to their duty weapon for on duty or off duty use unless
they are wearing one of the approved holsters, and have completed the required training.

G. O. 204 FIREARMS AND AMMUNITION REGULATIONS LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
4. Officers must attend a mandatory training class presented by the Little Rock Police
Department Training Division prior to the use or installation of a handgun mounted
tactical flashlight. Officers attending this training must be off duty and will not receive
overtime or compensatory time for attending this training.
5. After each training class, the Training Division will send each Division Commander an
updated master list of personnel who are authorized to carry a handgun mounted tactical
flashlight. The Division Commander will make this list available to all supervisors under
their command.
6. Use of the handgun mounted tactical flashlight.
a) Officers will not consider the flashlight mounted to their duty weapon as a
replacement for their handheld flashlight. Therefore, all typical illumination
needs should be accomplished with the handheld flashlight (examining VINs,
Driver’s license, individuals, etc.).
b) Officers must consider General Order 303 Use of Force with regards to the
drawing and display of their duty weapon. Officers must also be aware of
“lasering” or pointing their weapon at an unintentional person or object for the
purpose of illuminating the area.
c) Officers will unload their duty weapon prior to attaching and detaching the
flashlight to their duty weapon.
7. Officers in specialized assignments may be required to carry a weapon mounted flashlight

or alternative holster as part of their assignment (SWAT, SID, etc.). In these cases the
department will furnish all necessary equipment and training.
III. Ammunition
A. The Department will provide all ammunition for training and on-duty use for all departmentally
owned service weapons and only departmentally issued ammunition will be carried in these
weapons. Ammunition will not be modified.
1. Only factory-loaded ammunition will be permitted. Reloaded or remanufactured

ammunition is prohibited.
2. The following ammunition is prohibited:
a) Explosive, poisonous or toxic bullets;
b) Tracers or incendiary bullets;
c) Armor-piercing or Teflon-coated bullets;
d) Glaser or any prefragmented ammunition;
e) Fully jacketed (ball-type) ammunition; and,

f) Any ammunition that the Training Division Armorer deems to be unsuitable for
duty use.
B. All ammunition used in carbine rifles, secondary, and off-duty weapons must be approved by the
Training Division Armorer and conform to Departmental ammunition guidelines.
IV. Off-duty Weapons Guidelines
A. Officers may carry an approved weapon off duty, but will exercise discretion as to when and
where it is worn. All sworn personnel will qualify at least annually with their approved off-duty
weapon. All approvals shall be conditional upon annual re-qualification.
1. Any display or use of an off-duty weapon will be governed by the same regulations that
apply to on-duty officers.
2. Off-duty weapons carried while not in uniform must be kept concealed.
3. Prior to carrying any non-issue weapon during off-duty hours, officers shall have such
weapons approved through the Chain of Command and the Office of the Chief of Police.
a) Off-duty weapons shall be submitted to the Training Staff Armorer for

inspection prior to qualification.
b) Following inspection of the off-duty weapon, officers shall be required to

maintain an annual range qualification with the weapon until such time as the
officer requests that the weapon be no longer considered authorized for off-duty
use. Qualification may be accomplished on the requesting officer’s off-duty
time. Ammunition will be supplied by the officer at his/her own expense.
c) Officers may carry a semi-automatic pistol or revolver while off-duty.
4. Officers are authorized to carry their on-duty weapon while off-duty, but as an alternative,
they may be authorized three other departmentally approved off-duty weapons, but may
carry only one at any time. An approved off-duty weapon may be carried as a secondary
weapon as long as it meets all other requirements for a secondary firearm. While on-duty,
the issued Glock .40 or 9mm will be carried as the primary weapon.
a) The Training Division shall maintain a current list of all weapons approved for
off-duty use.
b) The Training Division will maintain all other records pertaining to the selection
of, qualification with, and authorization to carry off-duty weapons.
5. Officers shall not make modifications to off-duty weapons after approval. Any repairs
will require that the weapon be re-submitted to the Training Division for inspection.
6. This Order should not be construed to restrict the legitimate possession and use of
sporting or recreational firearms.

V. Secondary Firearms Guidelines
A. Officers may carry one approved secondary firearm in conjunction with and as a back up to the
officer’s primary departmentally issued or approved firearm.
B. The secondary firearm is to be viewed only as a weapon of last resort and the use of a secondary
firearm will be limited to those instances where an officer’s use of deadly force is authorized
under this General Order and the officer’s primary firearm has been:
1. Lost, stolen, or rendered inoperable during the course of the specific incident authorizing
the use of deadly force;
2. Exhausted of ammunition under circumstances which clearly limit the officer’s ability to
immediately reload; or,
3. When an act of an assailant(s) prevents the officer from being able to employ his/her
primary weapon in a situation where deadly force is authorized in General Orders. (For
example, when an officer is being disarmed or is in the process of being disarmed by
assailant[s]).
C. Secondary firearms are not limited by system (i.e., revolver, semi-automatic, or derringer) and
may be of any standard caliber not to exceed .40 calibers for semi-automatics and .38 calibers
for all others. No magnum above .22 cal. will be authorized.
D. Ammunition for secondary firearms will conform to the same guidelines as departmentally
issued ammunition.
E. Secondary firearms will be carried on an officer’s person in a concealed holster, securely

fastened in an accessible manner.
F. Officers electing to carry a secondary firearm shall comply with the following procedures prior
to actually bearing the firearm:
1. The secondary firearm and the ammunition for the firearm will be submitted to the
Training Division for inspection.
a) The Training Staff Armorer shall establish that the firearm is safe, functional and
in good repair, and that the firearm and ammunition is in compliance with this
Order.
b) The Training Staff Armorer will, upon approval of the firearm and ammunition,
complete a Secondary Weapon Authorization Card and will return the firearm,
remaining ammunition, and authorization card to the officer. The authorization
card shall record the firearm description, serial number, ammunition type and
confirmation that an N.C.I.C. check has been made on the firearm.
c) Only weapons equipped with a firing pin block (semi-automatics) or a hammer

block (revolver) will be authorized. Safety will be the primary concern of the
firearm inspection/authorized process.

d) Each officer shall qualify with his/her secondary firearm on the range under the
supervision of a Training Division Firearms Instructor to ensure the weapon is
working properly and that the officer is familiar with how the weapon functions.
Officers are required to furnish their own ammunition. All approvals shall be
conditional upon annual re-qualification.
2. The officer will then submit the secondary firearm, ammunition, and authorization card to
his/her Section/Shift or Watch Commander (Lieutenant). The Section/Shift or Watch
Commander shall satisfy himself/herself that the officer fully understands the limitations
on the use of the secondary firearm, that the officer has prepared a suitable manner for
carrying the secondary firearm, and that the authorization card is in order. The
Section/Shift or Watch Commander will sign the authorization card and forward it to the
Training Division.
3. The Training Division shall maintain the Secondary Firearm Authorization Cards in a
secure file.
a) The Training Division shall maintain a current list of all weapons approved as
secondary weapons.
b) The Training Division will maintain all other records pertaining to the selection
of, qualification with, and authorization to carry secondary weapons.
4. Training Division Armorer and/or the Section/Shift or Watch Commander may disallow
any weapon or ammunition which they determine does not comply with this General
Order.
5. Only one secondary firearm will be authorized for an officer at any given time. In the
event that an officer who is authorized to carry a secondary firearm wishes to carry a
different secondary firearm, the new weapon will be submitted to the inspection process
described in this subsection and, upon approval, the previously authorized weapon will be
removed from service and such shall be noted on the authorization card. An officer will
carry only the one currently authorized secondary weapon.
G. Once an officer has been authorized to carry a particular secondary firearm, he shall carry that
secondary firearm only in the prescribed manner whenever he is on-duty. While secondary
firearms are optional, they will be subject to inspection at anytime by any police supervisor.
H. The authorized secondary firearm may be carried in the prescribed manner whenever the officer
is off-duty or working in an off-duty capacity and is armed with a departmentally approved or
issued firearm.
I. In the event that an officer discharges a secondary firearm, unintentionally or intentionally, all
investigative and reporting procedures established by these General Orders shall apply.
J. Officers who wish to carry a secondary firearm must provide the weapon, carrying mechanism,
and all required departmentally approved ammunition at their own expense.

VI. Carbine Rifle
A. Officers desiring to carry the carbine rifle must submit a request on an officer’s letter (5600-02)
through their chain of command to the Office of the Chief of Police for approval. Once
approved, an officer must complete the basic carbine rifle training course at the Training
Division prior to being permitted to carry the carbine rifle. Officers must have one year of
service with the Little Rock Police Department and the officer must have scored at least 80% on
their previous annual handgun 50 round qualification course.
1. Officers who wish to participate in the Carbine Rifle Program are required to purchase the
rifle, accessories, and all training and duty ammunition at their own expense.
2. Carbine Rifles must be AR-15 style weapons, .223 caliber or 5.56 NATO, 16 inch barrels,
and configured for semi-automatic use only. The rifle and all accessories must be black
in color.
3. Officers desiring to carry a rifle must purchase only departmentally approved weapons. A
list of approved weapons will be maintained by the Little Rock Police Department’s
Quartermaster.
4. Minimum trigger pull weight must be no less than 5.5 pounds. No set triggers or two
stage triggers will be allowed.
5. The maximum magazine capacity is 30 rounds for the carbine rifle. All carbine rifle
magazines will be loaded two rounds short of the maximum capacity of the magazine.
Spare magazines will be carried in a bag or belt when deployed. When the Officer
deploys the bag or belt, it must not cover the uniform or the identifying police apparel so
the Officer is readily identified as such.
6. All carbine rifles will be equipped with front and rear iron sights. A list of the electronic
sighting systems that have been approved will be maintained by the Little Rock Police
Department’s Quartermaster. The electronic sight must be mounted in such a manner that
it allows for a “co-witnessing” sight picture when viewed through the iron sights. The
sight picture shall be considered co-witnessing if the illuminated dot of the electronic
sight is visible and appears positioned on the tip of the front sight when the shooter
acquires a proper sight picture through the iron sight. This is required in case the
electronic sight fails. No sights with magnification will be allowed on the weapon.
7. Carbine Rifles transported in departmental vehicles must be locked in a rifle rack

designed for such purpose or stored in a case in the trunk of the vehicle. The interior
trunk release must be disabled in order to store the carbine rifle in the trunk. In the case
of a specialty vehicle with no trunk, the carbine rifle will be stored in a case in the rear of
the vehicle and out of sight.
8. While being stored in the vehicle, the weapon will be:
a) On “safe”;
b) No round in the chamber;
c) The bolt/dust cover closed; and,

d) Loaded magazine inserted into the weapon.
9. No loaded rifles will be allowed in any police facility. In order to enter a facility, the rifle
will be:
a) On “safe”;
b) No round in the chamber;
c) The bolt/dust cover locked open; and,
d) No magazine will be in the weapon.
10. Below is a list of the only accessories that are approved to mount on the Carbine Rifle (no
lasers will be allowed):
a) Flashlight system;
b) Forward grip;
c) Adjustable stock;
d) Night Sights; and,
e) Sling (Required).
11. Officers will not modify their patrol rifle with any accessories not approved. These
a) Battery Assisted Devices.
B. Duty Ammunition
1. Remington .223 Caliber, 62 grain HP Bonded are the only duty rounds permitted.
2. Tracer, explosive, incendiary, or armor-piercing ammunition are not permitted.
C. Training
1. In order for a sworn member of the Little Rock Police Department to carry a carbine rifle,
they must first attend the Basic Rifle Course conducted at the Training Division. Safety,
proper technique and accuracy are the goals of the firearms training. Courses include
both day and low-light shooting. This course will teach the following skills:
a) Safety;
b) Policy;
c) Nomenclature;

d) Cleaning and Maintenance;
e) Limitation of Weapon System; and,
f) Proficiency in shooting.
2. The carbine rifle course of fire will have a specific time frame sufficient to simulate a
stress situation, which causes the officer to apply fundamental concepts of safety, proper
technique, and accuracy in firing and proficiency in reloading the firearm.
3. The course of fire and the passing score will be determined by the Training Division with
the approval of the Chief of Police. During any qualification, if anyone does not qualify,
they will have the option of individual instruction from a firearms instructor. If after this
instruction, they fail to qualify, they will be suspended from carrying a rifle and will be
required to attend the Basic Rifle Course again should the Officer desire to carry the
carbine rifle.
4. A firearms instructor can recommend to the Chief of Police that an officer not be
permitted to carry the carbine rifle because of lack of proficiency, even though the officer
has qualified with it.
5. All officers who carry the carbine rifle will be required to qualify two (2) times a year at
the Training Division’s Firing Range. The Training Division will set the qualification
dates. Anyone who misses the set qualifications will contact the Range Master and
coordinate a make-up qualification.
6. Practice days for the rifle range will be announced and conducted throughout the year. A
firearms instructor will be present during these practice sessions for instruction and safety.
7. Once an Officer attends the Carbine Rifle School and meets the requirements to carry the
rifle, the Training Division will send a memorandum to their Division Commander
authorizing that officer to carry the rifle. This memorandum will include the authorized
rifle that the officer is allowed to carry. If at anytime, an Officer fails to re-qualify or is
not able to carry the carbine rifle for any other reason, the Training Division will notify
the officer’s Division Commander of the status change.
8. After each Carbine Rifle Training School, the Training Division will send each Division
Commander an updated master list of personnel who are authorized to carry the carbine
rifle. This list will contain the authorized weapon for each officer. The Division
Commander will make this list available to all supervisors under their command.
D. Weapon Repair and Maintenance Guidelines
1. All carbine rifles will be inspected semi-annually by a Training Staff armorer or his/her
designee.
2. Weapons determined unsafe or to have an unauthorized accessory by a departmental

armorer will not be authorized for use in the performance of duty.
3. Weapons determined unsafe may be re-inspected at a later date by the same armorer if
possible, and if found safe may be approved for use in the performance of duty.

VII. Weapon Repairs and Maintenance Guidelines
A. Only certified police armorers authorized by the Training Division Commander will repair,
modify or otherwise work on departmentally owned weapons.
B. Officers will be responsible for maintaining issued and personally owned weapons in a clean and
serviceable condition.
C. All departmentally approved and issued firearms will be inspected annually by a Training staff
armorer.
1. Weapons determined unsafe by a departmental armorer will not be authorized for use in
the performance of duty.
2. Weapons determined unsafe may be re-inspected at a later date by the same armorer, if
possible, and if found safe may be approved for use in the performance of duty.
D. Officers may install, at their own expense, Hogue-Handall and Pachmayr type grips.
VIII. Training
A. Prior to being authorized to carry a weapon, each officer will be instructed by the Training
Division in:
1. Policies and procedures concerning the use of force necessary to effect a lawful arrest;
and,
2. When the use of deadly force may be exercised.
B. All officers authorized to carry weapons will be issued a current copy of the Little Rock Police
Use of Force policy as contained in the Department General Orders. Issuance of the General
Orders will be the responsibility of the Accreditation Unit.
C. Annually, each sworn member of the Little Rock Police Department will be required to receive
in-service training on the Police Department’s use-of-force policy and demonstrate proficiency
with any approved weapon the sworn member is authorized to use.
D. Annually, each sworn member of the Little Rock Police Department will be required to
successfully complete a firearms qualification course that meets the Arkansas Law Enforcement
Standards & Training, Standard Qualification Course of Fire, with fifty (50) rounds for one
target, with a passing score of eighty percent (80%) [OLES Regulation 1026].
E. Officers shall receive annual in-service training regarding defensive tactics, control holds,
authorized neck restraints and other uses of physical force.
F. Only officers demonstrating proficiency with an approved weapon on an annual basis shall be
authorized to use such weapons.

G. Only certified instructors will be utilized to present this training.
H. The Training Division will document the officer’s training and proficiency record to reflect
his/her attendance of in-service training classes and document the officer’s proficiency in the use
of departmentally authorized weapons.
IX. Handling Firearms
A. All firearms shall be carried in a safe and secure manner both on and off-duty.
B. Officers will not clean, repair or load firearms in police buildings, except at the range, unless
ordered to do so by a supervisor.
C. Handguns will not be carried cocked in the holster.
D. Handguns will not be cocked while pursuing, subduing, arresting or searching a suspect.
E. Shotguns will not be carried inside a police building with the breech closed.
F. Shotguns shall be carried in shotgun racks in patrol vehicles with the breech closed, chamber
empty, magazine full and the safety on.
G. Under no circumstances shall a shotgun be placed in the rack with a round in the chamber or
with the safety off.
H. Officers shall at all times adhere to standard firearms safety instructions provided by
Departmental training processes.
I. Firearms will at all times be maintained and used in a manner which precludes unintentional
discharges.
J. Officers shall secure weapon from unauthorized access both on and off-duty.

GENERAL ORDER
G. O. 205 PERFORMANCE EVALUATIONS

I. Purpose and Objectives
A. To establish an evaluation system based on objectivity and overall performance.
B. To effectively serve both management and the individual employee, the objectives of the
evaluation process shall be:
1. To foster fair and impartial personnel decisions;
2. To maintain and improve performance;
3. To provide a medium for personnel counseling;
4. To facilitate proper decisions regarding probationary employees;
5. To provide a fair means for measuring and recognizing individual performances; and,
6. To identify training needs.
II. Definitions
A. Little Rock Police Department Employee Goals and Performance Evaluation - An evaluation
system used for sworn employees below the rank of Lieutenant.
B. Performance Feedback Process - An evaluation system used for civilian and sworn employees of
the rank of Lieutenant and above.
III. General Procedures
A. All sworn employees are assigned to a twenty-four month probationary period commencing at date
of hire. Non-sworn employees have a six-month probationary period. There shall be no
exceptions to the probationary period.
1. All probationary employees will be evaluated each month during the probationary period.
2. A written review shall be completed each month by the immediate supervisor outlining
the probationary employee’s progress and any deficiencies that may exist.

GENERAL ORDERS G. O. 205 PERFORMANCE EVALUATIONS
3. A final evaluation shall be completed no later than two (2) weeks prior to the end of the
employee’s probationary period and shall include a recommendation as to whether or not
the employee should be granted regular permanent status.
4. Evaluation of probationary officers will also be governed by the requirements contained

in the Department’s Field Training and Evaluation Manual.
5. Probationary employees shall have no appeal rights.
B. All permanent employees shall receive an annual performance evaluation.
1. All evaluations shall be completed by the employee’s immediate supervisor and submitted
to the Office of the Chief of Police no later than the 10 th day of January, unless specified
otherwise.
a) If the employee did not work for the supervisor for the entire period under
review, the current supervisor may request additional written documentation
from any other supervisor for whom the employee worked.
b) Supervisors requested to provide additional documentation for an evaluation will

do so in a timely manner so as to allow completion of the review by the due date.
The additional documentation will be attached to the original evaluation.
2. Employees shall be evaluated on the appropriate form in compliance with guidelines and
procedures provided with the form. The evaluation period will be included on each
evaluation.
C. All first line supervisors shall be properly trained in the evaluation system. The evaluator’s
immediate supervisor will be responsible for ensuring that the evaluator performs the proper
techniques of evaluating performance, preparing the evaluation form, and conducting the
evaluation interview and career counseling.
D. All ratings will be based only on performance specific to the employee’s position during the rating
period. The employee’s immediate supervisor will be responsible for conducting the career
counseling interviews. Career Development forms shall be completed on all personnel and
forwarded to the Career Development Coordinator pursuant to the guidelines set forth by General
Order 201 during the performance evaluation process.
E. At the end of each rating period, the evaluator will counsel the employee in the following areas:
1. The results of the completed performance evaluation;
2. Level of performance expected, rating criteria or goals for the new evaluation period; and,
3. Career counseling relative to topics such as advancement, specialization or training

appropriate for the employee’s current position.
F. If an employee is not performing at an acceptable level, he/she shall be notified in writing. This
notification shall be made in a timely manner prior to the end of the evaluation period outlining the
deficiencies. If unsatisfactory performance continues, this information shall be included in the
employee’s performance evaluation.

G. O. 205 PERFORMANCE EVALUATIONS LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
G. Each employee shall be given the opportunity to make comments to supplement the completed
performance evaluation report. Each employee shall sign the completed evaluation indicating he
has read and understands the content. This signature does not indicate agreement or disagreement.
H. Should the employee refuse to sign a performance evaluation, the supervisor shall take note and
record the reasons, if given.
I. Evaluations, which are outstanding or unsatisfactory, should be accompanied by written

documentation with specific reasons for the rating.
J. Raters will be evaluated by their immediate supervisor regarding the quality of rating given to
employees they are rating. As part of the rater evaluation, the rater’s supervisor will review and
sign employee evaluations completed by the rater. The reviewing supervisor’s signature will
signify the following:
1. The rater is fair and impartial;
2. The rater participates in counseling rated employees;
3. The rater applies ratings in a uniform manner; and,
4. The rater is able to carry out the role in the performance evaluation system.
K. Each employee shall be provided a copy of the completed evaluation report.
L. Employee performance evaluations shall be purged and destroyed as follows:
1. Present employees - after three years;
2. Retired employees - date of separation from City employment;
3. Resigned employees - one year from date of resignation;
4. Terminated employees - at the end of all appeals.
M. This Order does not supersede any Civil Service Procedure.
IV. Evaluation Procedures – Personnel Promoted to the Next Rank
A. Sworn personnel promoted to the next rank will be placed on probation for a period of 6 months.
1. Probationary Sergeants and Lieutenants during their first week of their new assignment
will be issued a Supervisor’s Reference Guide and will be assigned to a supervisor
designated by their new Division Commander.
a) The supervisor will review the reference guide with the probationary supervisor
and train/mentor them for a period of five (5) working days.

b) At the end of this period, the designated supervisor will complete the Field
Training Observation form, the LRPD Supervisory Training form, the LRPD
Significant Incident Report and a written review of the initial weeks training
detailing any deficiencies or exceptional situations.
(1) These forms will be forwarded through chain of command to the Office
of the Chief of Police for review.
(2) Once the review process is completed, the original forms will be
forwarded to the Training Division for placement in the individual’s
Training file.
c) During the remainder of their probationary period, the employee will be closely
observed, and their supervisory performance monitored by their immediate
supervisor.
(1) All newly promoted personnel will be evaluated by each supervisory

level on a monthly basis during their probationary period.
(2) The evaluation shall be completed in writing and shall identify the new
supervisor’s strengths and weaknesses, giving the employee the
opportunity for improvement.
2. Probationary Captains will be evaluated by their respective Assistant Chief of Police

unless he/she has been recommended for additional training or has failed to complete the
probationary training. In these cases, the Chief of Police will be responsible for the
final review.
a) All newly promoted Captains will be evaluated by their respective Assistant

Chief of Police on a monthly basis during their probationary period.
b) The evaluation shall be completed in writing and shall identify the new
Captain’s strengths and weaknesses, giving the employee the opportunity for
improvement.
3. Unsatisfactory performance shall be identified, and corrected by counseling, training, or

other suitable measures to safeguard against the promotion of employees beyond their
capabilities. The following criteria shall be considered, but is not limited to:
a) Identify issues that may be affecting the employee’s performance,
b) Generate possible solutions and create a plan of action to improve performance;

and,
c) Build on the employee’s strengths.
4. The final evaluation shall be completed no later than two (2) weeks prior to the end of the
employee’s probationary period and shall include a recommendation concerning their
ability to continue their duties and responsibilities as a supervisor or being returned to
their previous rank.

B. All evaluations will be forwarded through the chain of command to the Office of the Chief of
Police for inclusion in each employee’s performance evaluation file.
V. Evaluation Procedures - Sworn Employees Below the Rank of Lieutenant
A. Employees shall be evaluated on the L.R.P.D. “Employee Goals and Performance Evaluation
Form” by their immediate supervisor.
B. Prior to the evaluation period, the supervisor and employee shall select evaluation dimensions
and/or performance goals on which the employee agrees to be evaluated. The supervisor shall
discuss with the employee how to be successful in each area and what performance standards will
be used in evaluating the employee.
C. Dimensions and/or goals shall be weighted as to their importance in determining job success. The
weight total is 100% for dimensions and/or 100% total for goals. The final score will be an
average of the two figures.
D. During the evaluation period, the supervisor shall:
1. Observe the employee;
2. Document important events and observations, both positive and negative; and,
3. Keep the lines of communications open by coaching the employee, helping to improve
employee performance, and providing continuous feedback on progress toward
accomplishment of performance objectives.
E. After observing the employee during the evaluation period and reviewing any documentation, the
supervisor shall rate the employee on each goal performance dimension agreed upon. The
supervisor shall score the evaluation according to the weight assigned to the chosen dimensions.
F. Supervisors shall review the evaluation with each employee discussing strengths and weaknesses.
Supervisors shall counsel each employee in their chosen career path.
G. The employee and supervisor shall agree on dimensions and/or goals for the next evaluation
period.
VI. Evaluation Procedures – Civilians and Sworn Employees of the Rank of Lieutenant and Above.
A. The Performance Feedback Process shall be used to evaluate all civilians and sworn employees of
the rank of Lieutenant and above.
1. Prior to January 10th of each year, the immediate supervisor will complete a Planning
Session Worksheet for each of his/her employees. The Planning Session Worksheet will
detail the performance factors and illustrate examples of performance expectations, goals
and priority work related to each performance factor specific to each employee.
2. The supervisor will review the Planning Session Worksheet with each employee to ensure
that a mutual understanding of the performance elements is achieved.

3. All performance factors shall be equally weighed.
4. In preparation for the annual evaluation, supervisors shall collect and review notes on
critical incidents, positives and negatives concerning how well an employee is
performing. Input from other supervisors may also be collected.
5. Near the end of the evaluation period, the supervisor shall complete the Performance
Feedback Form utilizing the previously completed Planning Session Worksheet. The
supervisor and employee shall meet to review the evaluation and discuss career
development.
6. Explanatory comments are required for when the summary rating is fully (4) or seldom
(1).
7. Each employee shall be given the opportunity to make comments to supplement the
completed performance evaluation report. Each employee shall sign the completed
evaluation indicating he has read and understands it. This signature does not indicate
agreement or disagreement.
8. After the evaluator signs the form it shall be forwarded to their supervisor for review.
9. A copy of the evaluation shall be provided to the employee.
B. At the end of each rating period, the evaluator will counsel the employee in the following areas:
1. The results of the completed performance evaluation;
2. Level of performance expected, rating criteria or goals for the new evaluation period; and,
3. Career counseling relative to topics such as advancement, specialization or training

appropriate for the employee’s current position.
VII. Appeal Process
A. An employee may appeal an evaluation report when they believe it does not correctly reflect their
performance. Should an evaluation be contested, the appeal process shall be:
1. An appeal request shall be submitted to the employee’s supervisor on an Officer’s Report

Form. The appeal request shall state the reasons why the employee does not believe the
evaluation correctly reflects job performance for the rating period.
2. Discussion of the evaluation between the evaluator, the reviewer and the employee within
five working days of the request.
3. If an agreement is not reached, the Division Commander shall review the evaluation with
the employee, evaluator and reviewer.
4. If the contention is still not satisfied, the Division Commander shall forward the appeal
and all evaluation documentation to the Office of the Chief of Police. A decision shall be
made at this level and the employee advised of the decision in writing.

5. The appeal process for civilians is outlined in the Administrative Personnel Policy and
Procedure Manual for the City of Little Rock.

GENERAL ORDER
G. O. 206 PROMOTIONAL PROCESS

I. Purpose and Policy
A. The purpose of this policy and procedure is to promulgate the City of Little Rock Civil Service
Commission promotion procedure and eligibility requirements for sworn police personnel.
B. It is the policy of the Little Rock Police Department to provide promotional opportunities
whenever possible to qualified employees. Employees are encouraged to take advantage of these
opportunities by qualifying themselves for advancement through further education and study, and
by a high level of job performance, service, and interest.
C. The Civil Service Commission Promotional Procedures Guidelines for Uniformed Personnel are
intended to establish an effective and fair testing and feedback system, provide continuity in the
promotional process and, most important, to determine the most qualified candidates. The City of
Little Rock Human Resources Department shall be responsible for ensuring the security of all
promotional materials.
D. The promotional process, for all positions, will comply with the criteria set forth by the Promotion
Procedure Guidelines of the City of Little Rock Civil Service Commission. This policy shall be
subordinate to the Civil Service Commission Promotion Procedure Guidelines where in conflict.
E. The Chief of Police and the City of Little Human Resources Department shall be responsible for
the administration of the promotional process pursuant to the Civil Service Commission Rules and
Regulations.
F. The Police Department shall provide “Subject Matter Experts” to assist the Human Resources
Department in the development of the written test content, exercise scenarios, rating criteria or
any other assessment instruments that require law enforcement knowledge. Subject Matter
Experts will be selected from L.R.P.D. officers the same or higher rank of the specified
promotional position. Questions may be taken from the Little Rock Police Department General
Orders and Rules and Regulations, Arkansas Criminal Code, Arkansas Rules of Criminal
Procedures or any other announced job related source. Any Subject Matter Expert who violates
the security agreements promulgated by the Human Resources Department will be subject to
disciplinary action up to and including termination.
G. Copies of the actual list will be maintained on file in the Office of the Chief of Police and City
Human Resources Department. Each candidate will be notified in writing of their final score and
ranking on the list.
H. The Civil Service Commission has no provisions for lateral entry.
I. Upon expiration of an eligibility list any future promotional opportunities will require
reapplication, retesting and re-evaluation.

GENERAL ORDERS G. O. 206 PROMOTIONAL PROCESS
II. Certification and Feedback
A. A list of eligible candidates will be submitted in rank order to the Civil Service Commission for
certification.
B. The Human Resources Department will provide a copy of the certified list to the Chief of Police as
soon as reasonably possible following Civil Service Commission certification. The Police Chief is
then responsible for the distribution of the certified list to all work locations as soon as reasonably
possible.
C. Candidates may schedule a personal appointment with the Employment Services Manager, or
his/her designee, to review and discuss his/her Assessment Center results, scores, and
developmental needs. Appointments should be scheduled as soon as possible following the date of
certification of the list.
III. Selection
A. All candidates will be ranked according to their composite score as specified in the Civil Service
Commission Promotion Procedures Guidelines. Education and Seniority credits will be added to
the final composite score before a ranked list is created.
B. The Chief of Police, when filling a promotional position, is authorized to promote one of the top
three candidates until the list is exhausted.
C. Any employee who has received a disciplinary suspension within the previous three (3) years will
not be considered for a promotion during that time period. The three year period will begin from
the date of the incident.

GENERAL ORDER
G. O. 207 TRAINING DIVISION GENERAL PROVISIONS

I. Purpose
A. The purpose of this General Order is to familiarize all members of the Department with the Training,
the services available to them, and the rules and guidelines that apply when they are attending training
classes, ordering equipment, using the range, or conducting any Departmental function which involves
the Training Division.
B. The purpose of the Training Division is twofold. Training shall be provided to accommodate
Department needs and in the interest of self-improvement of employees. The Police Recruiting and
Background Investigation Unit will recruit the most qualified individuals possible for the position of
police officer.
II. Scheduling
A. Any officer who wants to reserve a range or classroom should contact a member of the training staff
(Lieutenant, Sergeant or Officers).
B. On Wednesdays, as needed, the range will be open for individual officers who wish to practice on their
own.
C. Advance notice of all personnel required to attend scheduled training programs shall be distributed to
all Division Commanders who shall see that this information is disseminated to affected personnel.
D. Personnel who are unable to attend a training class must be re-scheduled by their immediate supervisor.
The Training Division Commander or his designate may grant exceptions, for reasonable excuses of
conflicting nature (i.e., court appearances, illness, Departmental business of an emergency or serious
nature, personal emergencies). Excessive absences of required training shall be brought to the attention
of the Office of the Chief of Police by the Training Division Commander.
III. Attendance Requirements
A. Attendance of personnel at Departmentally sponsored training programs shall be documented by the

Training Division Records Specialist and will become a permanent training record.
B. Personnel who attend training classes are expected to be on time. Personnel who are late may be
refused training for that day at the discretion of a Training Supervisor. The tardy officer’s Division
Commander will be notified.
C. Personnel attending or instructing any Departmental classroom training or Departmentally sponsored

classroom training will ordinarily be required to wear the proper police uniform or appropriate business
attire. The Training Division Commander may prescribe other attire as may be appropriate for other
training exercises and venues.

GENERAL ORDERS G. O. 207 TRAINING DIVISION GENERAL PROVISIONS
D. Personnel who miss more than 10% of any training course shall not receive credit for the course.
Failure to complete required training courses will be documented as “incomplete” and no credit will be
given. Information concerning personnel receiving an “incomplete” for required training courses shall
be brought to the attention of the Office of the Chief of Police by the Training Division Commander.
E. It shall be the responsibility of the course coordinator to ensure that personnel required to attend a
designated class are present. The class coordinator shall document any absences.
F. The class coordinator is responsible for ensuring that a class roster is completed for all persons
attending. The roster shall include at least the names of those attending, rank, social security number
and employee number.
G. The course coordinator shall ensure that all documentation of personnel successfully completing a
training course is submitted to the Training Division Records Specialist for updating of individual
training files. The Training Division Records Specialist shall ensure that proper documentation is
forwarded to Arkansas Commission on Law Enforcement Standards and Training (CLEST).
H. Instructors may remove any disruptive or non participating student by notifying any Training Division
Supervisor. The supervisor will notify the Training Division Commander, or designee, who will make
a determination whether the student will be able to continue the training course. If the student is
dismissed from the training course, his/her Division Commander will be notified of the dismissal and
the actions of the student.
IV. Lesson Plans
A. A current and approved lesson plan shall be required for all training classes provided by the Little Rock
Police Department. The purpose of the lesson plan is to ensure the topic of the presentation is
thoroughly and accurately presented. All lesson plans will be submitted in the following format:
1. Agency Title;
2. Course Title;
3. Objectives;
4. Time Length;
5. Training Aids;
6. Handouts or pamphlets;
7. References;
8. Prepared by; and,
9. Date prepared.
B. The body of the lesson plan is made up of three sections:

G. O. 207 TRAINING DIVISION GENERAL PROVISIONS LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
1. Introduction;
2. Presentation of body content; and,
3. Summary or conclusion.
C. Lesson plans shall contain statements of performance related objectives:
1. Focusing on the elements of skills, knowledge, and ability for which formal training is needed;
2. Provide clear statements of what is to be accomplished;
3. Indicating any skills that must be demonstrated; and,
4. Relating training to expected job performance.
D. Lesson plans should provide the following information:
1. Training content - The Training Division supervisor approving the lesson plan will ensure that
instruction is based on course objectives;
2. Instructor techniques that are appropriate and sufficient. The Training Division supervisor
approving the lesson plan will review and discuss appropriate instructional methods (these
include but are not limited to: use of videos; hands-on training; lecture; role-playing etc.);
and,
3. Test utilized–For the purpose of evaluating participants in a training program, a pre-test and/or
a post-test may be required. Instructors should use competency based testing which uses
performance objectives, and measures participant knowledge of related skills. Passing and
failing scores shall be established for all written examinations. A minimum passing
performance standard shall be established for all proficiency examinations.
E. The method of instruction shall be correlated to the subject matter being presented.
F. All lesson plans shall be submitted to the Training Division which shall ensure completeness and
consistency with Departmental policy. Lesson plans shall be submitted to a Training Division
Supervisor no later than seven days prior to scheduled training. A Training Division Supervisor shall
approve lesson plans.
G. Lesson plans shall be retained on file in the Training Unit.
H. Lesson plans shall not be removed from the Training complex. Departmental personnel may request a
copy of any lesson plan maintained by the Training Unit. Training Division personnel shall be
responsible for copying the requested lesson plan and ensuring the original is returned to its proper
storage.

V. Remedial Training
A. Remedial training is personalized training to correct a specific deficiency which is identified either by
testing, inspection, or other evaluations during training, or by a supervisor evaluating routine job
performance.
B. The purpose of remedial training is to ensure that Departmental personnel do not suffer deficiencies in
basic skills, knowledge, and abilities required to perform their assigned tasks or comply with standards
established by the Arkansas Commission on Law Enforcement Standards and Training (CLEST).
C. Remedial training will be provided for, but not limited to, firearms, driving, and impact weapons.
D. Remedial training shall be provided to personnel by members of the Training Unit, when requested or
deemed necessary by Training or supervisory personnel.
E. Whenever a supervisor has reason to believe that an employee under his/her supervision has
demonstrated a deficiency in basic skills required to perform assigned tasks, the supervisor may arrange
for remedial training through the Training Division.
F. Upon completion of a remedial training program, participants shall be evaluated by the Training staff to
determine whether or not existing deficiencies were alleviated. Results of the evaluation shall be
forwarded through the Training Division’s chain of command to the appropriate Division Commander
and/or the Office of the Chief of Police when deemed necessary.
G. Any employee assigned to remedial training that does not satisfactorily complete the course shall not be
released to active duty.
1. Departmental personnel who do not satisfactorily complete the first scheduled remedial
training session will be assigned to the Training Division for continued remedial training for a
maximum of four additional training days.
2. After five days, if Departmental personnel do not show a reasonable improvement in their
skills, documentation shall be forwarded through the chain of command to the Training
Division Commander detailing the deficiencies.
3. The Training Division Commander shall forward the file with a recommendation to the Office
of the Chief of Police for administrative review.
4. The Training Division Commander shall ensure a copy of the file is forwarded to the
appropriate Division Commander.
5. If a person scheduled for remedial training does not report as scheduled, the Training Division
Lieutenant shall be notified and he/she shall contact their immediate supervisor.
VI. In-Service Training
A. In-Service Training is provided to sworn members of the Little Rock Police Department to further the
education and training of current officers. This training is designed to enhance the knowledge and
skills already possessed by officers or to introduce new training that is required or needed.

B. The In-Service Sergeant and Officers are responsible for the development of In-Service Training. This
can be accomplished by utilizing the following guides: Training Committee recommendations;
directives from the Office of the Chief of Police; officer critique evaluations; or changes in Arkansas
State Law or policy.
C. In-service training is training in addition to recruit training which includes but is not limited to:
1. Annual qualification of all weapon systems utilized by the Department; (i.e., Firearms,
Defensive Tactics, Batons, Pepper Spray);
2. Specialized training;
3. Supervisory training; and,
4. Advanced training.
D. All officers are required to complete an annual retraining program which should include, but is not
limited to the following:
1. Departmental policy concerning the use of force, including the use of deadly force;
2. Reviews of statutory or case law affecting law enforcement or process operation with an
emphasis on changes;
3. Weapons and defensive tactics qualification; and,
4. Racial Profiling/Bias Base Policing.
E. When changes occur, all officers are required to receive training (roll-call training, etc.) which may
include, but is not limited to the following:
1. Review of Departmental General Orders, Divisional Operating Procedures, and Rules and
Regulations with emphasis on changes;
2. Reviews of statutory or case law affecting law enforcement or process operation with an emphasis
on changes;
3. Reviews of the functions of agencies in the local criminal justice system;
4. Exercise of discretion in the decision to invoke the criminal justice process;
5. Departmental policy concerning the use of force, including the use of deadly force;
6. Emergency medical services;
7. Active Aggressor/Incident Command;
8. New or innovative investigative or technological techniques or methods;

9. Hazardous materials incidents;
10. Review of contingency plans including those relating to special operation and unusual
occurrences;
11. Collection and preservation of evidence; and,
12. Report writing, records system procedures, and requirements.
F. In-Service Critiques are completed by all those attending in-service at the conclusion of the training. The
In-Service Sergeant or designee will be responsible for collecting, compiling and evaluating those critiques.
VII. Advanced Training
A. Advanced training is training which is designed to impart higher levels of supervisory and management
skills to the participants.
1. Middle and upper management employees may receive advanced training when available to
supplement pre-promotional training or executive development training for higher-ranking
officers (i.e., F.B.I. National Academy, IPTM, etc.).
2. Criteria for selection of personnel for Advanced Training. The employee:
a) Must possess above average leadership skills;
b) Must hold middle or upper management position and/or pre-promotional status in

preparation for middle or upper management;
c) Must be recommended and/or approved by the Office of the Chief of Police.
3. Training requirements to be satisfied by Advanced Training include:
a) Management Theory;
b) Supervisory Techniques;
c) Police Administration; and,
d) Principles related to personnel, budget, planning and research.
B. It shall be the responsibility of the Training Division Lieutenant to ensure that all supervisory personnel
of the rank of Sergeant or Lieutenant attend the University of Arkansas School of Law Enforcement
Management and Supervision or other equivalent course when openings become available.

VIII. Specialized Training
A. Specialized training is specifically designed to enhance skills, knowledge, and abilities taught in either
recruit or in-service programs. Specialized training may address supervisory, management, and/or
executive development training, or may also include technical and job specific subjects. Specialized
training may include the following:
1. Development and/or enhancement of the skills, knowledge, and abilities particular to the
specializations;
2. Management, administration, supervision, personnel policies and support services of the

function or component;
3. Departmental General Orders, Divisional Operating Procedures and Rules and Regulations
which are specifically related to the function or component; and,
4. Supervised on-the-job training.
B. Positions requiring specialized training:
1. Intoxilizer Operator;
2. Drug Recognition Expert;
3. Radar Operator/Instructor;
4. SWAT Team;
5. Hostage Negotiator;
6. Special Response Unit;
7. Canine Handler;
8. Detective;
9. Armorer;
10. Firearms Instructor;
11. Defensive Tactics Instructor;
12. Background Investigator;
13. Crime Prevention;
14. Community Oriented Policing;
15. Field Training Officer;

16. Instructor Training;
17. Drug Interdiction;
18. Motorcycle;
19. Helicopter;
20. Crime Scene Search Technician; and,
21. Communications Operator.
C. Supervisors will ensure that employees under their command receive Specialized Training and are re-
trained or re-certified as mandated. All certificates and proof of re-certification will be forwarded to
the Training Division for inclusion in the employee’s training file.
IX. Requests to Attend Training Outside Department
A. Employees who wish to attend seminars or training courses outside the department at the department’s
expense must submit a written request and a completed travel expense form through the chain of
command to the Office of the Chief of Police for approval and the Administrative Services Manager for
processing.
B. Employees may attend training courses at their own expense. The Department may authorize time off
depending upon manpower needs, type training or other pertinent factors.
C. When an employee is selected to attend an approved course, their immediate supervisor will notify
them. The department shall provide reimbursement for the following expenditures:
1. Tuition/Registration;
2. Transportation;
3. Lodging;
4. Per Diem; and,
5. Other expenditures approved by the city.
D. Upon completion of the approved course, employees shall forward to the Administrative Services
Manager receipts for any expenditure incurred by the city. (i.e., gasoline, lodging, airfare etc). With
the exception of those items not requiring receipts as identified by the Travel Expense Form (Finance
Form T-1).
E. Within five days after completion of their course of study, employees shall complete a school
attendance form and forward it and a copy of the course certificate, if applicable, to the Training
Division.

X. Manuals and Literature Obtained at Seminars and Training Courses
A. Employees who attend training seminars or courses conducted at locations other than Department
facilities may submit any manuals, handouts, or other literature obtained during their instruction to the
Training Division for copying and inclusion in the Department’s research library or Training Division
library subject to copyright restrictions.
B. All original material submitted in compliance with this Section shall be returned as quickly as possible.
XI. Civilian Training
A. Civilian employees performing duties associated with the Communication Center and the Crime Scene
Search Unit shall receive orientation and on-the-job training commensurate with their responsibilities.
B. All civilian employees shall receive in-service training as required. All training will be documented
and forwarded to the Training Division for filing.
C. Civilian employees will be provided with the following information through their immediate
supervisor:
1. The Department’s role, purpose, goals, policies and procedures;
2. Working conditions and regulations; and,
3. Responsibilities and rights of employees.

XII. Firearms Range
A. Firearms and officer survival training are designed to impart skills, knowledge and abilities related to
the mechanical aspect of shooting as well as the situation and tactical use of police weapons.
B. All firearms instructors shall ensure that all officers are instructed in the proper use of firearms as well as
Departmental General Orders and procedures relating to the use thereof.
C. A safety officer will be identified during all Firearms Training. The safety officer’s primary
responsibility shall be to ensure that all safety procedures are followed at all times. The safety officer
shall not participate as a role player, student, or instructor in the training.
D. When on the firing range, all officers will adhere to the rules of basic firearms safety.
1. Horseplay, unnecessary talking, or wandering about the range will not be tolerated.
2. All commands given by the designated range master will be obeyed, immediately.
3. The muzzles of all un-holstered weapons will be pointed down range.
4. The muzzles of all shotguns, when not being used on the firing line, will be pointed down
range.
5. Body Armor, hearing and eye protection will be worn at all times.
6. When the range is in use, a red flag will be flown on the flagpole to indicate that the range is
“hot”. Anytime the firing range is in use, it shall be considered ‘hot’.

E. Type of Weapons, Ammunition, Targets, and Equipment Permitted for Use on the Range
1. Rifle Range:
a) All handguns, rifles and shotguns
b) Any specialized weapon that has been issued to personnel of this department
c) Any specialized weapon that has not been issued but has been approved by the Training
Division Lieutenant, SWAT Lieutenant, SRU Lieutenant or Training Division
Commander.
2. Pistol Range:
a) All handguns or other weapons approved by the Training Division Commander
3. Types of Ammunition:
a) Any ammunition that will operate the above listed approved weapons will be allowed
on the ranges.
4. Types of Targets Allowed on Ranges:
a) Rifle Range
(1) All paper targets
(2) Wooden targets
(3) Only those metal targets owned by the Training Division will be used unless
approved by the Training Division Commander
(4) Any other objects on the range must be approved by the Training Division
Commander prior to use.
b) Pistol Range
(1) All paper targets or other targets approved by the Training Division
Commander.
F. Storage of Ammunition and Weapons
1. Storage of ammunition in the Conex Storage containers next to each Firearms Range is
permissible.
2. Weapons of any kind will not be stored at either Firearms Range when Training personnel are
not present. Weapons will be stored inside the weapons vault inside the Training building
when not in use for a training class.

XIII. Firearms Qualifications
A. All sworn members of the department must meet minimum performance standards on the following
firearms courses.
1. Officers must annually demonstrate a minimum performance ability of 80% using the
Arkansas Law Enforcement Standards & Training, Standard Qualification Course of Fire, with
fifty (50) rounds for one target. [OLES Regulation 1026]
2. Officers must annually demonstrate a minimum performance ability of 80% as measured by a

ratio of accomplished score to the total score possible on all of the following courses:
a) Tactical Survival Course;
(1) Off-Duty Weapon (optional);
b) Shotgun Course (optional);
c) Patrol Rifle Course (optional);
d) Altered light tactical survival course; and,
e) Back-up weapon course (optional).
3. After three attempts, officers who fail to demonstrate minimum performance in either of the
above categories during annual qualification will be relieved of official police duties by a
Training Supervisor.
a) They will relinquish their service weapon to the Training Division Supervisor.
b) They will not carry any weapon under police authority while relieved.
c) The Training Division Supervisor shall immediately notify the relieved officers’
immediate supervisor and schedule the officer for remedial training.
d) The relieved officers’ supervisor shall notify his/her chain of command, in writing, of
the officers’ status. This memorandum shall be forwarded to the Office of the Chief
of Police.
e) The relieved officer shall be temporarily assigned to the Training Division. The
relieved officer will report to the in-service training supervisor for remedial firearms
training and shall not return to full police duties until he/she has successfully
qualified with their issued service weapon.
4. Officers may be required to demonstrate minimum performance ability in the Training

Innovations (T.I.) Machine.
e) The T.I. Machine will be used to measure an officer’s judgment, survival skills, and
accuracy when faced with a decision in the use of deadly force.
f) No weapon will be allowed into the area where the T.I. Machine is being utilized.

XIV. Roll Call Training
A. The Training Unit will be responsible for developing, producing, and distributing at least one Roll Call
Training video and/or memorandum each month.
1. The In-Service Training Sergeant will develop and implement a schedule of topics for Roll
Call Training on an annual basis.
2. The Training Unit should encourage officers assigned to other divisions to submit suggestions
through their Division Commanders for topics or ideas for Roll Call Training.
3. The Training Unit will ensure that Roll Call Training videos/memorandums are distributed to
all divisions of this Department.
4. A variety of instructional techniques will be used in the development of roll call training
which include but are not limited to, written material; Departmentally produced videos, and
professional videos.
B. The Training Unit will maintain a record and a copy of all Roll Call Training materials on file in
accordance with lesson plan procedures.
C. The Training Officer Minimum Standards/Records Keeper will maintain a monthly file of the rosters of
each Division indicating the personnel who have received or reviewed the monthly Roll Call Training.
Appropriate Division Commanders will be notified of all required personnel who have not participated
in roll call training.
D. Officers will be allowed to evaluate the effectiveness of roll call training on forms provided by the
Training Division.
E. The In-Service Training Sergeant shall ensure that personnel who develop roll call training should be
familiar with the current issues and the topics addressed. This may include instructors from outside the
Department.
F. It is the responsibility of all Shift Commanders to ensure their subordinates have received the required
roll-call training and all required documentation is forwarded to the Training Division.
XV. Field Training Program
A. The field training program for recruits shall consist primarily of on-the-job training and shall extend for
a minimum period of twelve weeks after graduation from the Little Rock Training Academy. The
objective of the field training program is to provide a newly sworn officer with “on street” experience
and expertise guidance.
B. The Field Services Division Commander shall have command responsibility for the administration and
supervision of the Field Training Officer (FTO) program for his/her Division.
C. Candidates for F.T.O. will attend and successfully complete thirty-two hours of classroom instruction
conducted by the Training Unit, prior to becoming a certified Field Training Officer.
D. All Field Training Officers will be required to attend an annual eight-hour refresher course as
scheduled by the Training Unit.
E. The Training Unit will be responsible for keeping all records associated with the F.T.O. program to
include:

1. Current F.T.O. list;
2. Training records (F.T.O. and probationary); and,
3. F.T.O. manuals.
F. The Training Division staff is available to all Probationary and Field Training Officers for consultation
during the 12-week field-training program. A Field Training Manual is updated on a weekly basis by
the Field Training Officer and forwarded to the Training Division for review upon program
completion. Periodically a program critique is completed by the probationary officer and forwarded to
the Training Division.
XVI. Training Records
A. Official records of all Department training will be maintained by the Training Unit. Records will
include:
1. The names of personnel attending;
2. The types of training/subject matter, course content (lesson plan), number of hours and test
scores and/or certificate (if applicable); and,
3. Training records of individual Departmental personnel shall be updated by the training staff
within thirty days of participation in a training program, either within the agency or outside.
Departmental employees shall complete a School Attendance Record within five days of
completion of an approved class taken outside the Department and forward the School
Attendance Record to the Training Division.
B. Training records of Departmental personnel shall be released to outside entities only upon approval by
the Chief of Police, the individual or in response to a subpoena.
XVII. Training Instructors
A. Training officers and agency instructors must meet all CLEST requirements for instructors. They shall
be responsible for developing, scheduling, and implementing job related training for all Departmental
members. Training officers will be assigned to the Training Unit at the discretion of the Chief of
Police. Instructors shall receive training in the following areas:
1. Lesson plan development;
2. Performance objective development;
3. Instructional techniques;
4. Learning theory;
5. Testing and evaluation techniques; and,
6. Resources availability and use.

B. Instructors from outside the Department will be selected on the basis of expertise in a particular subject
area and should meet CLEST requirements for instructors or shall be approved by the Training
Sergeant. If outside instructors do not meet CLEST requirements, but have been approved by the
Training Sergeant, a certified instructor of the Little Rock Police Department will be present in the
classroom during instruction. Lesson plans will be submitted by all outside instructors and approved
by the Training Sergeant
C. Instructors are required to keep abreast of the latest developments in their area of expertise. The
instructor must update their training accordingly. Instructors must arrive a minimum of 15 minutes
prior to the beginning of class, to prepare and coordinate with the academy staff.
D. In an effort to provide training that is timely, diverse and providing different perspectives, the Training
Division will rotate instructors. The rotation will be based upon subject matter, expertise, instructor's
experience, and the instructor's effectiveness in teaching.
E. In all training conducted by Training Division Instructors or training attended by Training Students
(In-Service, Recruit, or Advanced), one instructor will be designated as safety officer in all training
classes that are hazardous in nature and documented on the Risk Assessment Form (LRPD Form 5200-
27). Those classes include but are not limited to: Canine and equine operations;
Chemical/ordinance/biological/radiological; Defensive tactics; Physical fitness; Firearms; Motor
vehicle operations; Motorcycle and bicycle operations; Tactical operations; and Practical and
Scenario Based Training.
1. The safety officer’s primary objective is to observe overall conditions of the training exercise to
watch for safety violations and dangerous behavior. The safety officer has the authority to
discontinue any training that he/she considers a danger to any personnel involved.
2. The safety officer’s policies and procedures will be annually reviewed and approved by the
Training Sergeant and/or the Inservice Sergeant.
XVIII. Clothing Issue and Requisition
A. The Quartermaster will be primarily responsible for the control and issuing of Departmental equipment,
which shall include clothing, firearms, ballistic vests, badges, etc. In the absence of the quartermaster,
any divisional supervisor or their designee may issue equipment.
B. Requests for new equipment may be made by utilizing the Collective Data Automated Ordering system.
The completed computerized request shall be forwarded to the quartermaster for filing until the next
order is placed with the appropriate contract vendor.
C. The quartermaster will notify officers by use of the automated notification feature within the Collective
Data System when equipment is received and ready to be picked up. Officers will have ten business
days to pick-up equipment. After ten business days it will be returned to stock.
D. Equipment items will be replaced when they are no longer serviceable. Non-serviceable equipment
items will be turned in for destruction according to department guidelines.

E. Any officer issuing clothing/equipment will ensure that a property receipt is properly completed by the
officer receiving the equipment and initialed by the issuing officer. Items possessing a serial number
will have the number recorded on the property receipt. When issuing O.C. Pepper spray the
expended/expired canister must be turned in for proper destruction by the quartermaster, before
receiving a new canister. The quartermaster will use the property receipt to make the computer entry
into the individual’s file.
F. When issuing clothing/equipment to an officer whose issued property has been lost or stolen, the officer
will present an Incident Report and an Officer’s Report Form detailing the circumstances involved.
The Officer’s Report Form shall include a recommendation by the officer’s supervisor to replace the
item at the Department’s expense or the officer’s expense.
XIX. Inventory and Inspection of Weapons
A. The Departmental armorer (Quartermaster) shall issue all weapons. In the absence of the Departmental
armorer, the Training Sergeant, or his/her designee, shall be responsible for the issuing of weapons.
Only Training Unit personnel and their supervisors are allowed access to the firearms vault.
B. When issuing a firearm, the log will be completed by the issuing personnel and initialed by the
receiving officer. When firearms are returned to the vault, the log shall be completed reflecting the
same information.
C. All weapons will be inspected and test fired upon being issued to any officer. The issuing personnel
will ensure that the receiving officer has qualified with the new weapon prior to leaving the Training
Academy.
D. The Departmental armorer shall have a continuous weapons maintenance program for all in stock
weapons and shall maintain a weapons maintenance history of all weapons of the Little Rock Police
Department.
E. The Departmental armorer will maintain an inventory on all weapons, service pistols, shotguns, rifles,
and miscellaneous weapons owned by the Department. Weapons which are actually in the control of
the Quartermaster will be maintained in an alarmed, secured vault. A monthly inventory of these
weapons will be performed by the Departmental armorer. An up to date record of all Departmental
weapons issued to officers for on duty use will be maintained in the Quartermaster’s computer.
F. Individual units such as S.W.A.T., S.R.U., and S.I.D., who have actual control of specialized weapons,
will present to the Departmental armorer a monthly written account of all their assigned weapons.
G. Cleaning and inspection of weapons
1. Each officer is responsible for cleaning his/her weapon after it is fired before that officer
returns to duty.
2. Department armorers will inspect each weapon after cleaning during annual qualification.
3. Quarterly, each Division Commander shall ensure that supervisors inspect the weapons of
their officers for cleanliness and that all ammunition is Department issued. Documentation
shall be forwarded to the Training Division no later than the 10th of the month following the
end of the quarter.

XX. Student Intern Program
A. The Little Rock Police Department promotes student interest in the law enforcement field by providing
interested college students with first hand experience in law enforcement.
B. Procedures
1. At the request of local colleges, the Department may sponsor an individual student intern
program.
2. The Police Personnel Unit will be responsible for:
a) Coordinating and selection of part time interns through the Co-operative Education
Program with the University of Arkansas at Little Rock;
b) Potential intern applicants will be required to pass a basic background investigation.

This shall include:
(1) A criminal history check with the Little Rock Police Department.
(2) A driver’s license check with the Arkansas Department of Revenue.
(3) A criminal history check through ACIC/NCIC.
c) If the student has a criminal record, the Training Division Commander will follow the
guidelines as set forth by the City of Little Rock’s Civil Service Commission
regarding the Police Officer Selection process and disqualification standards;
d) The investigation will be conducted by the Police Personnel Unit. The results of the
investigation will be maintained in the intern’s file located in the Police Personnel
Office;
e) Locating and placing students in job positions of their interest and assigning them to
a supervisor; and,
f) Serve as the liaison between the Department and the Co-operative Education
Program Director.
3. Each assigned supervisor will:
a) Acquaint the student with the Police Department and present the student to the staff
as a co-worker;
b) Coordinate the student’s work schedule with the student;
c) Coordinate and assist the intern with assigned project by identifying and defining the
specific duties to be performed by the student during the practicum. The duties
assigned should allow the student to secure valuable, firsthand knowledge of an
actual work situation, and contribute his/her abilities to the operation of the
Department;
d) Have conferences with the student to allow for mutual exchange of feedback on the
progress of the work experience;

e) Arrange for interviews with personnel in the Department or other agencies if deemed
necessary;
f) Student intern evaluation forms will be completed by their respective supervisor and
forwarded to the Co-operative Education Program Director, in a timely manner, to
ensure compliance of the student’s progress within their guidelines; and,
g) Consult with the student’s instructors regarding the student’s progress or any
particular concern, whenever necessary.
4. Students participating in the intern programs are responsible for presenting themselves in a
manner to ensure their professional demeanor and must abide by the Rules and Regulations
and other directives of the Department.

GENERAL ORDER
G.O. 208 L.R.P.D. TRAINING COMMITTEE

11/20/2017 DEPARTMENTAL G.O.208 (07/25/2012) G.O. 208
I. Scope
A. This General Order establishes the structural and operational guidelines of the Little Rock Police
Department Training Committee.
B. The Little Rock Police Department Training Committee serves to review the training practices of
the Little Rock Police Department and to make recommendations to the Chief of Police regarding
changes in curriculum, policy, and direction.
II. Procedures
A. The Assistant Chief of Police, in charge of the Training Division shall appoint members to the
Little Rock Police Department Training Committee on a biennial basis. The Committee shall be
comprised of the following:
1. Chairman, Training Division Captain;
2. Member, Training Division Lieutenant;
3. Member, Training Division, Sergeant;
4. Member, Downtown Division representative;
5. Member, Southwest Division representative;
6. Member, Special Investigations Division representative;
7. Member, Major Crimes Division representative;
8. Member, Special Response Unit representative;
9. Member, Special Operations Division representative;
10. Member, S.W.A.T. Unit representative;
11. Member, Headquarters Division representative; and,
12. Member, Northwest Division representative.

GENERAL ORDERS G.O. 208 L.R.P.D. TRAINING COMMITTEE
B. Committee members shall serve for a period of two years. Should a member wish to be released
prior to the end of their term, they shall submit a letter through their chain of command to the
Assistant Chief of Police making such request.
C. Should any member miss two consecutive meetings the committee chairman may request his/her
removal and immediate appointment of a replacement.
D. The Committee shall meet annually and additional meetings may be scheduled at the direction of
the Committee Chairman, if deemed necessary.
E. The Committee will assist the Division Commander in:
1. Ensuring that the needs of the Department are addressed and that there is accountability
for all training provided.
2. Serving as a liaison between Department personnel and the Training Division to ensure
training courses are relevant, up to date and open to new ideas and methods.
a) All training courses do not have to be reviewed on an equal basis. Areas of

instruction that involve potential high liability may be reviewed more frequently
and more thoroughly.
3. Ensuring that all training conforms to the Commission on Accreditation for Law
Enforcement Agencies and the Arkansas Commission on Law Enforcement Standards and
Training.
4. Monitoring the following training programs with emphasis on the improvement of:
a) Academy recruit training;
b) In-service training;
c) Roll-call training;
d) Remedial training;
e) Advanced training; and,
f) Specialized training.
5. Ensuring critical topics are covered in training, which may include, but are not limited to:
a) Agency general orders, rules, policies and procedures;
b) Changes in the law;
c) Functions of agencies in the local criminal justice system;
d) Exercise of discretion in the decision to invoke the criminal justice process;

G.O. 208 L.R.P.D. TRAINING COMMITTEE LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
e) Interrogation and interviewing techniques;
f) Policy on deadly force/use of force;
g) Operation of department vehicles;
h) Emergency Medical Services;
i) Performance evaluation system;
j) New or innovative investigative or technological techniques or methods;
k) Hazardous materials;
l) Special operations and unusual occurrences;
m) Crime Prevention policies and procedures;
n) The COPP concept;
o) Collection and preservation of evidence;
p) Report writing;
q) Records systems procedures and requirements;
r) Victim/witness rights;
s) City of Little Rock Civil Service policies and procedures;
t) Familiarization with the accreditation process; and,
u) Firearms, ground tactics, and pepper spray training.
F. The committee will assist the Training Division Commander to ensure that all responsibilities, as
identified in the Training DOP, are fulfilled:
1. Mission;
2. Goals and objectives;
3. Annual evaluation;
4. Utilization of resources;
5. Attendance requirements;
6. Affiliation with institutions of higher learning;

GENERAL ORDERS G.O. 208 L.R.P.D. TRAINING COMMITTEE
7. Content of training program and curriculum;
8. Types of training;
9. Training records; and,
10. Requirements to be a training officer.
G. The Committee Chairman shall prepare a written report after each meeting that will be forwarded
to the Assistant Chief of Police, in charge of the Training Division and the Chief of Police.
H. Reporting
1. The Training Committee Chairman will annually conduct an assessment of departmental

training needs based on the findings of the Committee. The assessment will address
problem areas and/or areas of concern relative to:
a) Curriculum;
b) Physical facilities;
c) Training materials; and,
d) Course/student scheduling.
2. Results of the assessment will be presented to the members of the Committee, the
Assistant Chief of Police, in charge of the Training Division and the Chief of Police.

GENERAL ORDER
G.O. 209 PHYSICAL FITNESS PROGRAM

10-25-2016 DEPARTMENTAL G.O. 209 (06/28/2010) G.O. 209
I. Purpose
A. To establish a physical fitness program within the Department and familiarize Departmental
personnel with both short and long term benefits.
B. To assist sworn personnel in developing nutritional programs geared toward their lifestyles.
C. To maintain and support a physical training program, in which the principle elements will be
regular physical exercise, a healthy diet, and moderation in the use of alcohol, tobacco, and
caffeine.
II. Administration
A. The physical fitness program will be administered under the direction of the Commander of the
Training Division.
B. The program will be reviewed on a continual basis in relation to the organizational goals and
objectives of the department and revised as necessary.
C. An annual report shall be submitted to the Chief of Police.
III. Goals and Objectives
A. The goal of the physical fitness program is to improve the physical fitness and overall health of all
sworn personnel in the department.
B. Objectives
1. To administer an annual screening to all sworn police personnel.
2. Provide nutritional and fitness counseling.
IV. Physical Examinations
A. The physical examination by a licensed physician is required for employment and is performed at
no cost to the prospective employee.

GENERAL ORDERS G.O. 209 PHYSICAL FITNESS PROGRAM
B. The Chief may, with cause, require an employee to take a physical examination to determine health
status. When a physician approved by the department performs this examination, there will be no
cost to the employee. If the employee elects to have the examination done by their personal
physician, the employee shall pay the fee and the results subject to confirmation by a department
selected physician.
C. The physical examination will be based on the employee’s ability to perform the essential
functions of the employee’s job, as shown on the official position description with or without
reasonable accommodation.
V. Physical Exercise Program
A. Adherence to a physical fitness program is the responsibility of each individual.
B. Although any exercise is beneficial, the following aerobic exercises are highly recommended:
1. Jogging;
2. Walking;
3. Swimming;
4. Treadmill;
5. Stationary bicycle; and,
6. Bicycle.
C. The type of actual exercise program is at the discretion of each officer.
D. All police facilities are equipped with a variety of exercise equipment. Employees are encouraged
to use this equipment as part of their regular exercise program.
E. Officers interested in additional information or help in setting up a fitness program may request
assistance from the Training Division.
F. Officers may be required to attend additional training, as deemed appropriate by the Training
Division Commander or the Office of the Chief of Police (i.e. weight-loss, nutrition, and fitness).
VI. Minimum Skills Assessment
A. The Training Division shall administer the Minimum Skills Assessment for pre-employment
purposes and training academy fitness test(s).
B. The Training Division and/or City of Little Rock physical fitness experts shall develop methods of
testing.
C. Personnel who are interested in additional physical fitness and nutrition information may consult
the Training staff for guidance, goal setting and evaluations. This program may include the
following;

G.O. 209 PHYSICAL FITNESS PROGRAM LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
1. Individual health screening and fitness assessment;
2. Individual education and goal setting; and,
3. Ongoing support and evaluations.

GENERAL ORDER
G. O. 210 OFF-DUTY EMPLOYMENT

I. Purpose and Guidelines
A. This Order establishes the principles of supervision for police related off-duty and non-police
related employment of sworn and non-sworn personnel of this Department.
1. Police related off-duty consists of any employment outside the Department, which
may require the Officer to act in his/her official capacity as a member of the Little
Rock Police Department.
2. Non-police related employment is defined as limited employment, which is not law

enforcement related and is beyond the scope of employment of the Little Rock Police
Department in which no law enforcement action is required or expected for
employment. Non-police related employment (referred to as “Extra-Duty
Employment” hereafter) is not an off-duty detail as described in section A.1 of this
order and applies to both sworn and non-sworn Department employees alike.
3. Departmental overtime is defined as overtime that is incurred by an employee as a

direct result of the employee’s duty to complete a critical work assignment
(mandatory shift extension, court attendance for official duty, call back and other
events determined by a supervisor as emergency related).
4. Supplemental overtime is defined as an assignment for which an employee receives

monetary compensation from the City of Little Rock in order to provide police
services to the Department. This type overtime is voluntary (i.e. special details,
inventories, grant funded overtime).
B. Citizens requesting information regarding police related off-duty employment for officers of
this Department during regular business hours shall be referred to the Headquarters Division
Commander. After receiving notice of a request for off-duty employment, the Headquarters
Division Commander or his/her designee shall:
1. Verify that the request is valid and that the job is potentially subject to approval and
within the guidelines of Departmental requirements.
2. Record the pertinent information regarding the job and forward it via email to all
Division Commanders who will then post the off-duty request in his/her Division in a
central location for equal access by officers.
3. Officers desiring to accept the off-duty job shall:
a) Contact the Headquarters Division Commander or his/her designee to

request the desired job.

G. O. 210 - OFF DUTY EMPLOYMENT LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
b) Submit the appropriate off-duty employment request forms as required for

approval.
4. Off-duty employment posted under these guidelines shall be filled on a first come
first serve basis.
5. An off-duty eligible officer receiving an initial request from a citizen for off-duty
employment may forego these guidelines if the receiving officer has a desire to accept
the job, as long as the request is submitted for approval and consistent with Section III
of this order.
6. The Headquarters Division Commander shall be responsible for maintaining

documentation of citizen requests for police-related off-duty employment.
C. Citizens requesting information regarding the immediate need for police officers for police-
related off-duty employment after regular business hours shall be forwarded to an on-duty
lieutenant who shall ensure the proper handling of the request.
D. The Little Rock Police Department will generally not assign on-duty officers or provide
officers on overtime for security inside a building or within a limited or confined area (public
park, amphitheater, etc.) for a private event. Security of this nature is the responsibility of the
promoter or organizer of such an event. The Department may, with authorization from an on-
duty Shift Commander, supply officers for outside security around such a private event for a
limited time period necessary to protect the safety or welfare of the general public (crowd
control, traffic control).
II. Departmental Limitations
A. An employee is prohibited from engaging in any business, trade, occupation, or profession

which would interfere with the satisfactory performance of his/her job duties, reflect badly on
the Department, discredit the employee, or represent a conflict of interest. Employees shall
recognize the Department as the primary employer and request approval from their supervisor
prior to seeking outside employment. An employee can be directed to terminate outside
employment if it interferes with or is inconsistent with his Departmental duties.
B. Sworn and non-sworn employees will not accept police related off-duty or non-police related
extra-duty employment under the following circumstances:
1. Where the employer is involved in a labor or civil rights dispute;
2. Where the nature of the employment could bring discredit upon the Department.
3. Employment where a liquor permit is held.
a) Employees shall not be permitted to accept employment nor have ownership
interests in any establishment that has been issued a liquor permit without
the prior approval of the Office of the Chief of Police.
b) Employees are prohibited from engaging in employment as a security guard
or in any other capacity that may require him/her to invoke police authority
in an establishment that specialize in nightclub-type entertainment or
businesses that primarily sell liquor by the drink or package. This does not
prohibit off-duty employment in parking lots of the aforementioned
establishment.
c) Officers will not refuse to respond to a call for service inside the
establishment when the need arises.

4. Employees shall not operate a private security company or accept employment as a

private investigator.
5. Employees who report “sick leave” for regular duty will not work any outside
employment for the following twenty-four hour period. The twenty-four hours will
begin from the end of the shift where sick leave was taken.
6. Officers who fail to successfully pass the annual fitness assessment test or control
tactics training will be prohibited from working any departmentally approved, police
related, off-duty. Once an officer successfully passes the annual fitness assessment
and control tactics training, their departmentally approved off-duty employment will
be reinstated.
7. Employees who are not on full-duty status will not be approved for off-duty or extra-
duty employment.
a) “Full-duty status” shall refer to an active employee’s ability to fulfill his/her

on-duty responsibilities for the Police Department (e.g., employees on
Administrative Leave, Workers’ Compensation Leave, extended illness or
sick leave, etc. are not considered full-duty status employees.).
C. In addition to the restrictions listed above, sworn employees will not accept police related off-
duty employment under the following circumstances:
1. Where the employer restricts the officer from performing the duties of a police
officer;
2. Where the employer requires a uniformed officer to perform non-police tasks;
3. Where the employer expects a police officer to enforce any company rules or policies;
4. Officers shall not accept police related off-duty employment that is not located within
the city limits of Little Rock, without the prior approval of the Office of the Chief of
Police.
5. Probationary police officers shall not be permitted police related off-duty employment
during their first year of employment with the Department. This does not include
military service with the National Guard or Reserve Units.
a) C.O.A.T. officers are permitted to work police related off-duty after being
employed for six months following their graduation date from the Training
Academy.
D. Limitation of hours
1. Officers will be limited to a total of 80 work hours during a seven-day week with no
more than 60 work hours during the workweek.
a) “Work hours” is defined as a combination of regular duty hours,

departmental and/or supplemental overtime and off-duty hours.
b) The “workweek” begins at the start of shift of the officer’s first working day
following assigned days off and ends at the regular end of shift on the last
day of the officer’s workweek.
c) “Work day,” means the time an officer works for the City, including late
relief overtime, compensatory time, court and supplemental overtime.

2. Employees will work no more than 16 work hours in any 24-hour period. The 24-hour
period begins whenever an employee starts any form of on-duty, police related off-
duty, or non-police related extra-duty employment.
3. Anytime an employee is recalled from an off-duty job, the employee will be

compensated in accordance with the City of Little Rock guidelines. When an
employee is receiving pay from an employer outside the City of Little Rock, all pay
from the outside employer will cease. It is the employee’s responsibility to notify the
off-duty employer of the adjusted hours to ensure that the appropriate compensation is
received.
4. At no time will an employee be allowed to take leave from their regular work
assignment in order to work an overtime assignment in which the City of Little Rock
is the funding source or conduit for compensation.
5. Compensatory or vacation time may be used to reduce City work hours.
6. Requests to work special events, which cover multiple days or require extraordinary
manpower allocation (State Fair, Riverfest, Greek Festival, etc.) and may cause an
officer to exceed 80 work hours, may be forwarded to the Bureau Chief, through the
chain of command, for approval or disapproval. A consideration for approval is
whether the officer will have a non-working day immediately following the event.
7. The officer’s supervisor is responsible for imposing other reasonable limitations upon
an officer’s off-duty employment to best meet the needs of the Department and the
officer.
8. Nothing in this Order shall prohibit the Department from requiring an officer to work
more than the aforementioned number of hours, if the needs of the Department or
required court appearances dictate.
9. The officer’s immediate supervisor shall ensure that the total number of hours worked
during the week does not exceed that mandated by this policy.
10. Any infractions of this policy shall be reported through the Chain of Command to the
appropriate Division Commander or Bureau Chief.
11. This Subsection applies to both police related off-duty and non-police related extra-
duty employment.
E. Non-supervisory members of the Department shall not commit, schedule, or coordinate the
activity of personnel, for off-duty employment. The supervisor responsible to perform these
functions will be identified by the employee on the L.R.P.D. Off-Duty Employment Form
5500-10.
F. Supervisors may perform scheduling and other management-related tasks for police related
off-duty employers only as a part of their own off-duty employment; however, supervisors
may not be paid solely for performing such services. Supervisors must regularly provide
police-related services to the off-duty employer in addition to management functions. (This
does not preclude the off-duty employer from paying the supervisor at a higher rate in
consideration for these additional services.)
G. Officers or supervisors will not profit by subcontracting police related off-duty work to other
officers at a lower rate of pay.

H. Employees shall not accept or disperse lump sum payment of funds for the off-duty
employment of other officers.
I. Police related off-duty employment requiring three or more officers of the Department
working simultaneously must be referred to the Division Commander who may require the
employer to add an off-duty supervisor as a condition of approval for such employment, if
he/she determines such supervision is in the best interest of the Department or the City.
1. Supervisors working off-duty with subordinates will be responsible for the

supervision of that job and will complete all Departmental files generated as a result
of that job. Off-duty supervisors working an event will not direct an involved
subordinate to contact an on-duty supervisor to complete the file. Upon completion
by the off-duty supervisor, files will be submitted to the involved officer’s chain of
command for final review and evaluations. If the supervisor is involved in the
incident, an on-duty police supervisor will be notified and respond.
III. Off-Duty Uniform Requirements
A. Sworn members working police related off-duty where a uniform is required will wear their
Department issued “Standard Duty Uniform” or the blue BDU uniform that has the officer’s
last name and Department badge sewn on them. All uniforms will be worn in compliance with
General Order 203.
1. The supervisor of officers working off-duty at special events and/or during periods of
extreme heat, may request a modification to the uniform requirement for the event
(i.e. State Fair, Riverfest, Greek Festival, etc.). Any request will be in writing
through the chain of command and approved by the Chief of Police prior to the event.
2. Officers working police related off-duty where a uniform is required must carry their
issued intermediate weapons in addition to their departmentally issued weapon, while
working the off-duty assignment.
B. Sworn members working police related off-duty where the uniform is not required will wear
appropriate civilian attire. Officers working off-duty in plain clothes shall wear their weapon
in a holster and in a manner that will not attract attention or be open to the view of the public
outside Department offices.
1. The LRPD embroidered button down and polo shirts may be worn when working an
off-duty assignment that does not require a uniform. These shirts will not be
represented to any off-duty employer as a department uniform.
C. Non-Sworn members of the Department working non-police related Extra-Duty Employment

will not wear the LRPD embroidered button down and polo shirts, or any other item that would
cause a reasonable person to believe that they are affiliated with the Department.
IV. Procedures for Off-Duty and Extra-Duty Employment Requests
A. An employee, who desires to accept off-duty or extra-duty employment, shall submit an Off-
Duty Employment Form (5500-10) for all outside employment, whether police-related or not,
to his immediate supervisor prior to working the job. Employees shall not work an off-duty or
extra-duty job prior to the submission and approval of the Departmental Off-Duty Employment
Form. This will include the owning or managing of any business.

1. The immediate supervisor receiving the form is responsible for determining if the
employment complies with Departmental policies and that the form is completed
properly.
2. The form will be forwarded to the Shift or Section Commander. Final approval shall
be granted or refused by the Division Commander, based on this policy and the
recommendations of the employee’s Chain of Command.
3. In situations dealing with a one time event, where time does not permit the normal
forwarding/approval process prior to the anticipated initiation of the off-duty or extra-
duty employment, a Lieutenant or equivalent civilian supervisor may approve the
employment request. Nevertheless, all forms will be forwarded to the Division
Commander.
a) Only the appropriate Bureau Chief may authorize employment where

alcohol is to be sold or consumed, and no employee shall work such
employment until authorization has been obtained.
4. The appropriate Bureau Chief will be the approving authority for all requests
submitted by a Division Commander. The Chief of Police will be the approving
authority for all requests submitted by a Bureau Commander.
B. Employees will be required to complete an Off-Duty Employment form (5500-10) for regular
or permanent off-duty or extra duty employment per location, per calendar year.
1. Approval for any off-duty or extra duty employment will expire on the 31 st of
December each year.
2. Employment forms must be re-submitted and approved prior to that date for
continued employment.
C. Off-Duty Employment Forms pertaining to continuing employment, which is non-police

related, will be submitted annually in January.
D. A copy of all approved Off-duty Employment Forms shall be routed to the Professional
Standards Section for filing.
E. A Shift or Section Commander and/or Division Commander will disapprove off-duty or extra
duty employment if, in his/her judgment, the employment is not in the best interest of the
Department or the employment interferes with the employee’s on-duty performance. If the
Shift or Section Commander or Division Commander believes that the number of officer’s for
a particular job is not adequate, he/she shall require the employer to hire more officers prior to
approving the police related off-duty employment.
V. Employee’s Responsibility and Notification Procedures for Police Related Off-Duty or Extra-
Duty Employment
A. Each employee will complete a Little Rock Police Department Overtime/Supplemental

Overtime/Compensatory/Off-Duty Time Form (5600-86), and submit it to their immediate
supervisor, prior to working any police-related off-duty or extra-duty employment.
1. The information on the form will include the officer’s name, employee number, date
of off-duty employment, location of off-duty employment, hours of off-duty
employment, specific duties to be performed and the signature of the requesting

employee. The form will also indicate if a supervisor is required and the name of the
supervisor.
2. The approving supervisor will sign his/her name to the form, as evidence that the
employee has met requirements of this Order and is authorized to work in a police-
related off-duty capacity for that particular date and time. If the employee’s
immediate supervisor is not available to sign the form prior to his/her working off-
duty, another supervisor may approve and sign the form. The approving supervisor
shall scan and forward a copy of the approved form to the employee’s immediate
supervisor.
3. The officer’s supervisor will review all off-duty time forms. He shall see that the
forms are properly filed and maintained. Monthly totals of officer’s working hours
will be compiled on a monthly basis and forwarded to the Division Commander as
part of the unit’s monthly report.
4. When an employee’s work hours differ from the hours indicated on the time form, he
shall notify his supervisor of the changes, as soon as practical, so revisions can be
made to the form to accurately reflect the hours worked.
B. Officers will call the Communications Center and log into the CAD system, prior to working
any police related off-duty employment, and provide the Communications Center with the
location and scheduled working hours of the employment.
C. The Communications Center will log the officer into the CAD system. Officers without
permanently assigned radio call signs will be issued a “Frank” call sign (example “F92”) for
use while working the off-duty assignment. When issuing radio call signs, the
Communications Center operator will ensure that duplicate call signs are not issued. Officers
with permanently assigned radio call signs will use their assigned call sign.
VI. Off-Duty Apartment Security
A. Officers who apply for live-in, off-duty security at apartment complexes will fill out the Off-
Duty Employment Form (5500-10).
B. The Apartment Security Agreement Form will be explained to the apartment management
representative by the requesting officer’s immediate supervisor and shall be signed by the
apartment manager, the officer and the supervisor. The form will be attached to the Off-Duty
Employment Form and submitted for approval through the Chain of Command to the
appropriate Bureau Commander.
1. Approved apartment security forms will expire on the 31st of December each year.
2. Both forms must be re-submitted and approved prior to the expiration date for
continued employment.
C. Officers employed in off-duty apartment security positions shall immediately notify their off-
duty employer any time their ability to perform off-duty work is prohibited by Department
regulations, including use of sick leave and suspension from duty.
VII. Taxes on Salaries
A. Personnel who are involved in off-duty and extra-duty employment shall keep proper records
and include all earnings in their tax returns.

VIII. Volunteer Police-Related Off-Duty Employment
A. Officers may volunteer for non-paid off-duty performance of police related duties.
B. Volunteer non-paid off-duty employment will be treated as regular off-duty employment and
governed by this Order.
C. Supervisory officers may notify subordinates of volunteer events, but officers will not be made
to feel coerced into volunteering for non-paid off-duty employment.
IX. Accountability
A. The Orders, Rules and Regulations, policies and procedures of the Little Rock Police
Department will govern officers working an off-duty job.
B. Officers will respond to all requests for assistance from citizens, and under no circumstances
shall the officer refuse a request due to being “off-duty”.
X. Equipment
A. Equipment and vehicles will be checked out for off-duty use only after receiving authorization
from the on duty Shift Commander.
B. Shift Commanders will only authorize the use of equipment from their respective divisions.
XI. Suspension of Off-Duty Work Privileges
A. A Section or Division Commander may for just cause suspend an employee’s police-related
and non-police related employment.
1. An employee may appeal a suspension of police-related and non-police related

employment to the Office of the Chief of Police within ten (10) days of the
suspension.

GENERAL ORDER
G. O. 211 INTERNAL INVESTIGATIONS, CITIZEN COMPLAINTS, AND DISCIPLINARY ACTIONS

I. Purpose
A. The Chief of Police is responsible for the proper handling of citizen complaints and misconduct
investigations for the Police Department.
B. To ensure the integrity of the Police Department, all alleged or suspected misconduct claims will
be thoroughly investigated in order to obtain the truth and identify any violation which may have
occurred.
C. Alleged or suspected violations of law, City Ordinances, Civil Service regulations or

Departmental regulations, observed or suspected by supervisors, Departmental employees or
citizens, will be investigated. An investigation may result from allegations of misconduct or any
complaint against an employee, regardless of whether they were on-duty or off-duty at the time of
occurrence.
II. Complaints
A. Citizen Complaints:
1. Anytime a citizen contacts a Police Department employee to inquire about or register a

complaint, the citizen will be immediately referred to any on-duty police supervisor.
a) Supervisors working off-duty who are contacted by a citizen wishing to register

a complaint will assist the citizen with the complaint in accordance with this
General Order.
2. The police supervisor receiving a complaint shall immediately, or as soon as practical,

make every reasonable effort to accommodate the citizen. If the complainant has first-
hand knowledge of the incident and expresses a desire to file a complaint, the supervisor
shall complete a citizen’s complaint form. Citizens may be referred to Internal Affairs
Monday through Friday during business hours if the citizen is agreeable. The complaint
process will not be delayed by a referral to Internal Affairs.
3. Citizens shall not be discouraged from filing a complaint. However, appropriate

remedies may be suggested to the citizen to resolve minor incidents. The supervisor
handling the matter shall, with discretion, make the appropriate resolution without a
formal complaint. Complaints resolved at the supervisor level shall be thoroughly
documented to include how the matter was resolved. Completed documentation shall be
forwarded through the Chain of Command to the Office of the Chief of Police.
Resolving complaints in this manner is only permissible if the citizen has no desire to
pursue a formal complaint, there is no indication of police misconduct that would
mandate a formal investigation, and the citizen agrees to it. Regardless of the nature of

G. O. 211 LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
the complaint or allegation, the appropriate action will be documented pursuant to

established Departmental guidelines.
4. It shall be the responsibility of Division Commanders to ensure that all employees in their
respective divisions follow these guidelines.
B. All signed complaints taken by any supervisor will be forwarded to the Office of the Chief of
Police, along with a summary of the complaint, for investigation assignment. The Office of the
Chief of Police will determine whether the subsequent investigation will be conducted by Internal
Affairs, or by the employee’s Chain of Command, unless the complaint falls within the following
criteria:
1. The shift or section Lieutenant may manage a complaint investigation up to and including
recommending corrective or disciplinary measures if determined at the onset of the
complaint that the incident is within the criteria established in Little Rock Police
Department Rules and Regulations 1/2006.00, which states, “Minor violations which do
not involve gross misconduct and which will not reflect discredit upon the Department,
but which indicate a need for some form of discipline and/or training, may be handled by
the offender’s commander or supervisor.”
2. Citizen complaints alleging excessive force or physical abuse will be forwarded to

Internal Affairs for review. Internal Affairs will then review Departmental records to
determine if there is an existing Use of Force file associated with the complaint incident.
If there is an existing Use of Force file on the incident, Internal Affairs will review the
documents to determine if the complaint warrants further investigation based upon the
use of force evaluations and recommendation, disposition of the file and complaint
allegation. Internal Affairs will make a recommendation on the matter and forward the
associated complaint and Use of Force file to the Office of the Chief of Police to
determine complaint disposition or investigation assignment.
C. Anonymous Complaints: Complaints brought by citizens who do not wish to become involved to
the extent of signing a letter or sworn statement will be investigated in the same manner as any
other complaint. Formal investigations of an anonymous complaint are initiated only upon the
specific direction of the Chief of Police. The Department exercises caution associated with
investigations of this type to avoid unnecessary harassment of Departmental employees from
outside sources.
1. In the case of an anonymous complaint, a Citizen Complaint Form will be completed as

much as possible and forwarded to the Chief of Police. The anonymous complaint will be
recorded to include the date received and the nature of the complaint by the Office of the
Chief of Police. If the nature of the complaint is such that further investigation is
warranted, an investigation will be authorized by the Chief of Police.
III. Misconduct Investigations
A. Supervisors will assume the duties and obligations of their rank to discover and investigate
employee inefficiency or misconduct at its earliest stages. Supervisors will not look to higher
authority to initiate investigations, when an employee is within the scope of their own authority
and responsibility.
B. Alleged misconduct, either on-duty or off-duty, or neglect of duty will be immediately

investigated by the supervisor who receives the complaint or observes the violation.

1. If the problem involves another employee of equal or higher rank, a superior officer will
be called to investigate the incident.
2. The incident will be documented by the investigating supervisor, who will forward the
information, along with supporting documentation, through the Chain of Command to the
Office of the Chief of Police.
C. If the violation is of a serious nature, the investigating supervisor shall relieve the employee of
duty and take his/her credentials, issued weapon and badge. These items will be stored in the
Property and Evidence Room pending disposition. Any employee who is relieved of duty shall be
instructed to be immediately available to the Office of the Chief of Police and Internal Affairs and
will not perform any police duties while relieved of duty.
1. Anytime an employee of the Little Rock Police Department is relieved of duty, the
supervisor relieving the employee will, through the Chain of Command, notify their
Division Commander immediately. The supervisor will submit a detailed written report
describing the facts of the incident, the reason for the action and a recommendation
concerning the employee’s return to duty. The documentation shall be forwarded
through the Chain of Command for review and evaluation at each level. The Division
Commander will submit to the Office of the Chief of Police all written documentation
and recommendations no later than the next business day after the employee has been
relieved of duty. The Chief of Police, or his/her designee, will review the documentation
and make a decision concerning the employee’s impending return to duty. If the Chief of
Police, or his/her designee, does not authorize the continued relief of duty, the employee
will be notified by a member of their Chain of Command concerning his/her return to
duty.
D. Any complaint, allegation or investigation, involving any of the following circumstances, shall be
immediately, or as soon as practical, reported to the Chief of Police:
1. Officer involved shootings;
2. In custody deaths;
3. The arrest of any Departmental employee;
4. Any criminal offense; and,
5. Suspected infractions, which could result in termination.
IV. Investigation Responsibilities
A. The Internal Affairs Unit is responsible for the following administrative investigations. They
1. All complaints against Department employees involving serious misconduct;
2. Officer-involved shootings and the use of deadly force;
3. In-custody deaths;
4. Excessive force/brutality/physical abuse;
5. Discrimination against any person or group;

6. Bias based profiling;
7. Corruption, extortion or the violation of any criminal statute (criminal investigations will
be conducted by the appropriate Division if the alleged criminal act occurs in the
jurisdiction of the Little Rock Police Department);
8. Misuse or abuse of police authority; and,
9. Other complaints, as may be directed by the Office of the Chief of Police.
B. Division Commanders are responsible for the investigation of complaints not enumerated above,
including, but not limited to:
1. Inadequate police service;
2. Improper procedure;
3. Unprofessionalism;
4. Rudeness;
5. Discourtesy;
6. Insubordination; and,
7. Other complaints, as may be directed by the Office of the Chief of Police.
C. The Chief of Police or the appropriate Bureau Chief will review all files and make a final
determination based on the recommended discipline and/or corrective action.
D. The investigative file shall be returned to the Internal Affairs Unit upon completion of the
supervisory review process, and the complaint will be classified as either:
1. Sustained - the allegation is supported by sufficient evidence;
2. Not sustained - there is insufficient evidence to prove or disprove the allegation;
3. Exonerated - the employee’s actions were within the scope of his authority, complied
with departmental guidelines and were lawful and proper;
4. Unfounded — the allegation was false or not factual or did not occur; or,
5. Misconduct, not based on complaint, where revealed.
V. Internal Affairs Investigation Procedures
A. The Professional Standards Section Commander will report to the Assistant Chief of Police –
Executive Bureau.
1. Nothing in this Order will preclude the Professional Standards Section Commander or
his/her designee from directly notifying the Chief of Police when complaints or matters
of a sensitive nature are received that require immediate attention.
B. Investigations are conducted whenever a written citizen complaint form has been signed by the
complainant or the Chief of Police orders an investigation.

C. The Internal Affairs Unit shall be responsible for the completion of all internal investigations and
shall be required to provide an appropriate summary of the facts of each case.
D. The following guidelines shall apply to Internal Administrative Interviews:
1. Written reports and/or taped statements may be obtained from the employee(s) under
investigation, depending upon the complexity of the allegation.
a) Whenever possible, employees will be notified during normal work hours at

least 48 hours prior to any Internal Affairs interview. Exceptions may occur
when circumstances surrounding a criminal investigation or an employee’s
actions require an immediate interview by Internal Affairs investigators.
Exceptions shall be documented in writing and included in the file. Internal
Affairs personnel will utilize a standard “Notice of Interview Letter,” which will
contain the following information:
(1) Complaint number;
(2) Date, time and location of interview;
(3) The involved employee(s);
(4) The employee’s rights and responsibilities; and,
(5) Allegations and nature of complaint.
2. The employee may have a sworn member of the Little Rock Police Department present
during the interview process or other official Internal Affairs business. In cases involving
multiple employees, each employee shall have a different sworn member present during
the interview or other official Internal Affairs business.
a) A Police Officer may select a sworn member of equal rank or one rank greater
(Sergeant).
b) Supervisors may select a sworn member of equal or lesser rank.
c) The member selected will not be involved in the case under investigation either
as an accused, as a witness or as a member of the investigating unit.
d) The member selected will not be in the involved employee’s chain of command
or a member of the chain of command responsible for evaluating the employee.
e) Non-sworn employees may have either a sworn member of the rank of Police
Officer or Sergeant or a non-sworn member of first-line supervisory status of the
Little Rock Police Department present during the interview process.
f) The member selected will not interfere with the scheduled time of the interview.
g) The member is only an observer and will not participate in or interfere with the
interview process or other official Internal Affairs business, and will only be
allowed as support for the employee. The employee may confer with the
observer as needed, but all statements will be made by the employee being
interviewed. No supervisor will issue any instruction or order that contradicts
the orders of Internal Affairs personnel.

h) The member selected may not record the interview.
3. Before a taped interview is conducted, or a written report is made, the employee involved
will be advised of the complaint and allowed to read the complaint form, if it is available.
4. The name(s) of the officer(s) conducting the interview, and all others present, will be
stated at the beginning of the interview.
5. The employee is responsible for his/her statements and any statements of the observer
concerning the matter under investigation.
6. The employee being interviewed may not record the interview.
7. Cell phones are not allowed in the interview room while the interview is in progress.
8. When practical, an interview will be conducted while the employee is on-duty.
9. The employee will be advised that the interview is part of an Internal Administrative
Investigation.
10. The employee will be advised of Garrity Warnings if the allegations are criminal in
nature.
11. The employee will obey all lawful orders and truthfully answer questions pertaining to all
Departmental investigations, as required by the Little Rock Police Department Rules and
Regulations.
a) Employees are required to be honest and truthful in all matters related to their
scope of employment and the operations of the Department. Untruthfulness is
defined as intentionally making a false, misleading, or untrue statement. This
requirement applies to all oral statements and written statements. Written
statements include, but are not limited to, reports of any type, and any form of
electronic communications.
b) Untruthfulness is a severe violation which is strictly prohibited and may result in

discipline up to and including termination.
12. The employee shall not be subjected to offensive language during the interview.
13. Interview sessions shall be for reasonable periods and timed to allow for personal
necessities and rest periods.
E. During an Internal Affairs’ investigation, the involved employee(s) may be required to provide
reasonable photographs (not degrading or compromising) of himself/herself. Such photographs
shall be relevant to the investigation and used for Administrative purposes only. These
photographs may be taken of, but are not necessarily limited to, the following:
1. Injuries sustained by the employee in the specific incident;
2. Articles of clothing or equipment;
3. Photographs for use in photo line-ups; or,
4. Any other object or item as it relates to the investigation.

F. At the discretion of the Chief of Police, in order to further aid the investigation (at the
Department’s expense), the employee may be ordered by the Internal Affairs investigator to:
1. Be photographed or fingerprinted;
2. Participate in a physical line-up;
3. Provide access to financial records including, but not limited to, bank and credit union
accounts as determined to be reasonably related to an investigation;
4. Produce specific documents reasonably related to an investigation (i.e. text messages,

phone logs, etc);
a) Such requests shall be documented and approved by the Chief of Police. The
requests will be narrowly limited, and reasonably related, to the scope of the
investigation and a concise explanation of the data requested shall be provided
to the employee.
5. Provide access to social networking sites;
a) Such requests shall be documented and approved by the Chief of Police. The
requests will be narrowly limited, and reasonably related, to the scope of the
investigation and a concise explanation of the data requested shall be provided
to the employee.
6. Submit to a polygraph examination, if the Chief of Police;
a) Believes the integrity of an employee is in question, and/or,
b) Considers the circumstances to be extraordinary.
7. Submit to medical/psychological laboratory evaluations.
G. Upon completion, the assembled file along with all statements, records and evidence gathered
during the investigation will be forwarded to the involved employee’s Chain of Command for
review and evaluation.
1. The Chain of Command will review the investigative file and make recommendations
regarding the disposition of each allegation and list all applicable policy violations.
Policy violations will be cited by source and section numbers.
2. Following evaluation by the Chain of Command, the investigative file will be

immediately forwarded to the appropriate Bureau Chief.
H. During the review process of the investigative file by the employee’s Chain of Command, the
Division Commander shall be responsible for ensuring that all investigative files are maintained in
a secure manner, with access limited to supervisory personnel.
1. Investigative files shall not be left unattended, unsecured, or in public view.
2. When investigative files are not in use, they shall be securely stored.
I. The Internal Affairs Investigator shall be responsible for informing the complainant as to the
status of the Internal Affairs investigation on a periodic basis, at least every sixty days.

VI. Divisional Investigative Procedures
A. The following procedures will apply to all administrative investigations conducted at the
Divisional level.
1. If, in the opinion of the Division Commander, an Administrative Hearing is warranted for
any employee as the result of a Divisional level or other investigation, the Division
Commander will forward the investigative file to the appropriate Bureau Chief for initial
evaluation.
a) Following the authorization of an Administrative Hearing, the Office of the

Chief of Police will verify, through the IA Pro System, the existence of a case
number or will contact a member of the Internal Affairs Unit, who will assign a
case number to the Divisional investigative file.
b) The Office of the Chief of Police will complete a Notice of Intent and once
signed, the original Divisional investigative file containing all appropriate
documents will be forwarded to the Internal Affairs Unit for assembly and
distribution consistent with existing internal administrative investigative
standards.
c) The Internal Affairs Unit will have a supervisor from the respective division
sign a receipt and pick up a copy of the Divisional investigative file.
2. All requests for copies of such Divisional files (as in preparation for an Administrative
Hearing) will be forwarded to the Internal Affairs Unit. The Internal Affairs Unit will
inventory and issue all such copies and will be responsible for the recovery of such files.
3. All Administrative Hearings will be handled in accordance with the Administrative

Hearing Section of this General Order.
4. A Division Commander may request the assistance of the Internal Affairs Unit at any
time during the course of a Divisional investigation.
5. During the course of a Divisional Investigation, the Division Commander shall be

responsible for ensuring that all investigative files are maintained in a secure manner,
with access limited to supervisory personnel.
a) Investigative files shall not be left unattended, unsecured, or in public view.
b) When investigative files are not in use, they shall be securely stored.
6. Upon completion of the administrative investigation, the originating Division

Commander will return the investigative file through the Bureau Chief along with any
additional related documentation to the Internal Affairs Unit for secure retention.
B. The Division Commander shall be responsible for informing the complainant as to the status of
Divisional investigations on a periodic basis, at least every forty-five days.

VII. Administrative Hearings
A. Any officer, who may be disciplined in the form of a suspension, demotion, or dismissal, is
entitled to a prompt administrative hearing by management unless the officer specifically waives
the hearing in writing. Any civilian employee who may be disciplined in the form of suspension
or demotion is entitled to a prompt administrative hearing by management unless the employee
specifically waives the hearing in writing. Administrative Hearing procedures for civilian
employees will be consistent in structure, function and administration to that of sworn employees.
The Office of the Chief of Police will complete all required Human Resources documents for
notice and service for civilian employees. If a civilian employee is subject to dismissal they are
entitled to a “pre-termination hearing” as outlined in the City Personnel Manual. The
Department’s Administrative Hearing will serve as the civilian “pre-termination hearing”. The
civilian employee may be placed on Administrative Leave until the date of the hearing.
1. During an Internal or Divisional Investigation, if a file review results in a determination

that an Administrative Hearing is warranted, supervisory recommendations will include
the violation(s) and that the employee be afforded an Administrative Hearing.
Recommendations for discipline at this juncture in the review process are inappropriate.
2. The Office of the Chief of Police will draft a “Notice of Intent” and will promptly
forward it to the appropriate Division Commander for service as soon as practical. The
Notice of Intent will include a list of all charges and a brief explanation of the basis for
the charge(s).
3. Upon service of the Notice of Intent, the Division Commander or their designee will:
a) Advise the employee of his/her right to request or decline an Administrative

Hearing;
b) Direct the employee to either request or waive the hearing in writing by signing
the Notice of Intent accordingly;
c) If the employee formally requests an Administrative Hearing he/she will, upon

request, be supplied with a copy of the disciplinary file pertaining to the charges
against him/her as soon as practical, but no later than 48 hours prior to the
hearing, to allow ample opportunity for case review and to assist the employee
with preparation for the hearing; and,
(1) The copy of the investigative file will be supplied in an electronic

format when available;
(2) The employee will sign a receipt for the copy of the internal
investigative file, and the file will be returned to the Division
Commander or their designee at the conclusion of the hearing who will
return the file to the Internal Affairs Unit; and,
(3) The file copy will not be duplicated in any manner and will only be
given to the employee.
d) Schedule an Administrative Hearing for personnel within five (5) working days
and notify the employee of the date, time and location of the hearing. The
hearing shall be conducted within one week unless adequate documented
justification is provided.

4. The purpose of the hearing is to ensure that the employee’s side of the incident is fully
presented.
a) The employee shall be furnished a copy of the charges prior to the hearing;
b) The employee may select a person of his/her choosing to serve as an observer

during the Administrative Hearing. The person selected will not interfere or
participate in the hearing and will only be allowed to attend as support for the
employee. The employee may confer with the observer as needed, but all
statements will be made by the employee;
c) The employee may choose to be accompanied by a sworn member subject to the

restrictions outlined in this General Order; and,
5. In cases involving non-supervisory sworn personnel, the Administrative Hearing will be

conducted by the involved employee’s Division Commander, or their designee. The
Division Commander, or their designee, may include the Lieutenant and/or Sergeant in
the Administrative Hearing. In cases involving sworn supervisory personnel, the affected
Bureau Chief or their designee, shall be responsible for conducting the Administrative
Hearing.
6. In cases involving non-supervisory civilian personnel, the Administrative Hearing will be

conducted by the involved employee’s Division Commander, or civilian equivalent, or
their designee. The Division Commander, or their designee, may include the Lieutenant
and/or Sergeant in the Administrative Hearing. The Lieutenant and/or Sergeant may be
replaced by civilian supervisory personnel with commensurate supervisory authority
within the employee’s Chain of Command where appropriate. In cases involving civilian
supervisory personnel, the affected Bureau Chief or their designee, will be responsible for
conducting the Administrative Hearing.
B. Post Administrative Hearing Actions, Reviews and Recommendations.
1. Immediately following the hearing, the Division Commander or their designee will
ensure that the taped proceedings are transcribed and a copy placed in the file for review
by the affected employee’s chain of command.
2. A reasonable length of time will be allowed for the Chain of Command to complete a
thorough review and evaluation.
3. The Division Commander or their designee shall establish a deadline for the completion
of reviews, concurrently documenting and tracking its progress (this should not exceed
one (1) week).
4. In the event that the evaluation process exceeds one (1) week, the Division Commander
or their designee shall submit an explanation in memorandum form through his/her Chain
of Command to the Chief of Police.
C. Final Evaluations and Recommendations
1. Final recommendations as to the specific discipline will be made by the Division

Commander and Bureau Chief only after a review of the Administrative Hearing record
or the waiver of a hearing by the employee.
2. The Division Commander, or their designee, shall ensure that the employee’s copy of the
file is returned to the Internal Affairs Unit.

3. The Division Commander or their designee will review and draft his/her
recommendations on the “Administrative Evaluation Form” (LRPD Form 5030-14).
4. The Division Commander’s or their designee’s copy of the file and recommendations will
be forwarded to the appropriate Bureau Chief.
5. The Bureau Chief will make a final determination on any corrective action or discipline
resulting in an oral or written reprimand.
6. The Chief of Police will make a final determination on any recommended discipline that
may result in a suspension, demotion or termination.
D. A record of disciplinary hearings will be maintained in the original investigative file. The final
action taken will be noted and the Human Resources Department will be notified by the Office of
the Chief of Police, when appropriate.
E. An appeal of a disciplinary decision (of three working days or greater) shall be heard before the
Civil Service Commission, providing the officer wishes to appeal.
VIII. Corrective Action
A. Corrective action may be taken in those cases of minor violations.
B. Supervisors may use the following corrective actions as a precursor to disciplinary action.
1. Counseling - A corrective action designed to allow the supervisor to guide an employee

without the use of punitive sanctions. Criteria used to determine the necessity of
counseling as opposed to other discipline may include:
a) Employee’s past work and disciplinary record, attendance, job performance,

evaluations, etc.;
b) Employee’s attitude towards the work place, supervisors and other employees;
and,
c) The severity of the offense in relation to Departmental guidelines.
2. Training - A supervisor may use training as a corrective action in those areas involving
minor procedural violations in Department policy. Corrective training may include areas
involving radio procedure or report writing. Supervisors may conduct informal training
themselves or schedule the employee for formal documented training through the
Training Division.
IX. Disciplinary Action
A. Employees are subject to disciplinary action for the commission or omission of any act that is
prohibited or required.
B. Non-compliance with any Order, the Rules and Regulations, Departmental procedures, other
Departmental or City directives, Administrative Regulations, the City of Little Rock Personnel
Manual or the Civil Service Rules and Regulations may also result in disciplinary action.

C. It is the Department’s intent to administer discipline in a manner that is both consistent and fair to
the employee, the Department and the citizens we serve.
1. When determining the type of discipline necessary, it should be appropriate to the offense
and intended to correct the problem. Disciplinary actions may take one of the following
forms as outlined in the Civil Service Commission Rules and Regulations (CSCRR) and
the Administrative Personnel Policy and Procedure Manual:
a) Oral reprimand - The appropriate Division Commander or his/her designee may

issue an official oral reprimand. Such reprimands shall be documented in
writing and a copy shall be kept by the Department until the employee has
rendered service free of any disciplinary action for a period of twelve
consecutive months. This type of reprimand shall not be made part of the
employee’s permanent personnel file.
(1) There is no appeal recourse to an oral reprimand.
(2) An employee who receives an oral reprimand has the right to have the
reprimand repeated in front of an employee of their choosing.
b) Written reprimand - The appropriate Division Commander or his/her designee

may issue an official written reprimand. The reprimand must state the reasons
for such action on a standard form. The employee shall be advised of his right
to attach a written rebuttal to the written reprimand to be placed in his personnel
file.
(1) Written reprimands given to any employee shall remain in the

employee’s file for consideration until the employee has rendered
service free of any disciplinary action for a period of twelve
consecutive months.
(2) In discipline cases, the Chain of Command shall not consider a written
reprimand given prior to a twelve consecutive month period free of any
disciplinary action.
c) Suspension - In the interest of good discipline, the Chief of Police may suspend
an employee without pay for any length of time up to thirty (30) calendar days.
An employee who is suspended shall be given written notice of the reasons for
the action and of his/her right to appeal this action if the suspension is for three
(3) working days or more.
(1) During the investigation of alleged charges against an employee, that

employee may be placed in a suspension with pay status during the
investigation.
(2) If the Civil Service Commission reverses or reduces a suspension, the

employee will be reimbursed for net loss of earnings resulting from the
period of suspension.
d) Demotion - The Chief of Police may demote an employee for disciplinary

reasons or for unsatisfactory performance. Such action will result in the
employee being moved to a lower pay grade. Employees who are to be demoted
will receive notice ten days prior to the demotion.

e) Dismissal - The Chief of Police may dismiss an employee for just cause,
pursuant to Section 1 of Chapter 6 (CSCRR), provided any disciplinary action
taken by the Chief of Police, which is reviewable by the Commission, can be
supported by evidence strong enough to bear the burden of proof of just cause
for such disciplinary action. When an employee is dismissed, he will receive the
following:
(1) A statement citing the reason for dismissal;
(2) The effective date of the dismissal;
(3) A statement of the status of fringe and retirement benefits after

dismissal; and,
(4) A statement of the employee’s appeal rights.
D. All discipline related to citizen complaints will be reviewed and coordinated through the Chief of
Police or his/her designee.
1. Division Commanders or their designee have the authority to administer counseling,

remedial training, oral and written reprimands and suspensions to all employees.
2. The Chief of Police or his/her designee will make official notification on all employee
terminations.
X. Civil Service Appeal Procedures
A. Upon receipt of written notification from the Chief of Police, of a dismissal, demotion or
suspension for three (3) calendar days or more, the officer shall have the right to reply in writing
and request a hearing before the Civil Service Commission.
B. Any such written reply shall be a part of the record before the Commission in the event of an
appeal hearing.
C. A request for a hearing shall be directed to the Human Resources Director and must be received in
the Human Resources Department within ten (10) calendar days from the date of notice of the
disciplinary action. The right of appeal will be forfeited if the written appeal is not received by the
Human Resources Director within the ten (10) calendar day period for requesting a hearing.
D. In the event a request for hearing is made, the Commission shall, within fifteen (15) calendar days
of receipt of the request, schedule a date for the hearing. The hearing date will not be within this
fifteen (15) calendar day period.
E. When an officer files a written notice of appeal to the Civil Service Commission, the officer may
make a written request to the Professional Standards Section for a copy of the internal
investigative file.
1. The copy of the investigative file will be supplied in an electronic format when available.
2. The employee will sign a receipt for the file and will return the file to the Internal Affairs
Unit within forty-eight (48) hours after the ruling of the Civil Service Commission.
3. The file copy will not be duplicated in any manner and will not be disseminated to
anyone, except the employee or their attorney.

F. If the officer desires to appeal the Civil Service Commission’s ruling to Circuit Court, he/she may
make a second written request for the investigative file.
1. The copy of the investigative file will be supplied in an electronic format when available.
2. The employee will sign a receipt for the file and will return the file to the Internal Affairs
Unit within forty-eight (48) hours after the ruling of the Circuit Court.
3. The file copy will not be duplicated in any manner and will not be disseminated to
anyone, except the employee or their attorney.
XI. Civilian Employee Appeal Procedures
A. An appeal of the disciplinary decision by the Chief of Police upon the non-sworn employee shall
be conducted in accordance with Section V. 4 (c) of the Administrative Personnel Policy and
Procedure Manual.
1. A non-sworn employee shall have ten (10) working days to exercise his/her right of
appeal to the Director of Human Resources.
XII. Disposition of Internal Affairs and Divisional Investigations
A. The Professional Standards Section shall submit a monthly report to the Office of the Chief of
Police of the disposition of all Departmental investigations, excluding officer-involved accident
investigations. This report will contain the following categories:
1. Complaint number;
2. Date received;
3. Excessive force (Y/N);
4. Officer(s) involved;
5. Nature and description of complaint;
6. Status of investigation;
7. Date investigation sent to Division; and,
8. Supervisor receiving case file.
B. The Professional Standards Section is responsible for compiling an annual statistical report, based
upon Internal Affairs records for the past year, for submission to the Office of the Chief of Police.
1. This report shall be disseminated to all Division Commanders and to the Public Affairs
Office.
2. Departmental employees and the public shall be provided this information, but only upon
request.
XIII. Complaint Records, Review, Response and Purging
A. Records

1. The IA Pro System shall be utilized for the recording of a complaint and the action taken
on the complaint;
2. The original Citizen Complaint form will be placed in the investigative file, if applicable;
and,
3. The complainant will be provided with written verification that the complaint has been
received for processing. The complainant will receive a receipt of their complaint, which
will include an explanation of the investigative process and review.
B. Investigation Period
1. Complaints or allegations of misconduct received by the Department shall be thoroughly

investigated and should be completed within ninety (90) calendar days of the date the
complaint was filed, with the exception of service complaints, which should be
completed within sixty (60) calendar days.
a) Any need to extend the investigation beyond the established time frame will be
documented and permitted only after approval by the Chief of Police.
b) Upon the determination that the complaint cannot be completed within the
established time frame, a written response shall be provided to the complainant
notifying them of the delay.
C. Response
1. When a final decision has been rendered and/or final action taken, the citizen and the
officer will be advised in writing of such decision or action, which will include the
following information:
a) That the investigation is completed;
b) The general findings and conclusion of the investigation;
c) That “appropriate corrective or disciplinary action” is being taken if the

allegation is sustained; and,
d) That the complainant has the right to appeal the results of the investigation to the
Civil Service Commission pursuant to the guidelines outlined in the Civil
Service Commission Rules and Regulations.
2. The notification will be made by the Chief of Police, Professional Standards Section
and/or Division Commander, whichever may apply.
D. The confidentiality of all Internal Affairs records is vital, and proper security precautions should
be taken. Internal Affairs case files and records shall be maintained in a secured office or area
assigned solely to the Internal Affairs Unit. Access to this area shall be limited to the following
personnel:
1. The Chief of Police;
2. The Assistant Chief of Police – Administrative Bureau; and,
3. The Office of Internal Affairs.

E. The information contained in any internal investigative file shall not be used by anyone to the
detriment of any complaining citizen or witness. This shall not be construed as preventing the
Internal Affairs Unit from pursuing criminal charges based upon the information contained in the
file.
F. Employee personnel files shall be maintained securely in the Office of the Chief of Police. Access
shall be limited to the Office of the Chief of Police and administration supervisory personnel.
G. Purging Internal Affairs Investigative Files
1. Personnel investigative files in the Internal Affairs Unit, including all reproduced copies,
shall be purged after fifty-four (54) months, unless ordered prior to the purge period by a
court of competent jurisdiction, to maintain particular file(s) longer.
2. It is the responsibility of the Professional Standards Section Commander to ensure files

are purged in a timely and secure manner, in accordance with Little Rock Police
Department General Orders.
XIV. Criminal Allegations
A. In those instances where the initial investigation establishes that the criminal allegations are
unfounded, the facts will be evaluated by investigating personnel to determine whether sufficient
evidence exists or may be obtained to pursue prosecution of the complainant pursuant to A.C.A.
§5-54-122 (Filing False Report with Law Enforcement Agency), or other appropriate violations.
In the event that such a prosecution is viable, the Major Crimes Division will conduct the
necessary investigation and will be responsible for submitting the case file to the Prosecuting
Attorney for review and determination of charges in accordance with established procedures.
1. The above review will be strictly limited to those cases where an individual’s allegations
of criminal conduct by an employee of this Department have been disproved.
2. This review does not apply to investigations mandated by Departmental policy or

initiated by the Chief of Police in the absence of a specific complainant.
3. All investigations of this type will be reviewed by the Bureau Chief prior to submission
to the Prosecuting Attorney.
XV. Early Intervention System
A. The purpose of the Early Intervention System is to provide the Department with a procedure that:
1. Monitors actions taken by employees requiring administrative reporting and/or internal

investigations or which may otherwise be indicative of work performance deficiencies;
2. Provides for supervisory review at all levels in the Chain of Command; and,
3. If deemed appropriate, provides for remedial action(s) or employee assistance to correct

or eliminate identified job performance based deficiencies.
B. The intent of the Early Intervention System is to ensure that the Little Rock Police Department is
not faced with a serious case of misconduct that reveals an escalating pattern of misconduct that
could have been abated through earlier intervention. No disciplinary action may be imposed as a
result of a review under the Early Intervention System criteria. Any disciplinary action should
have been previously imposed at the time of the original incident.

1. Utilization of the Early Intervention System does not alter the critical role of supervisors
in directly monitoring the performance and behavior of personnel under their command.
2. Supervisory and management personnel shall be familiar with alternatives and authorized
actions they may take in response to personnel exhibiting behavioral and/or performance-
based problems with or without information provided by the Early Intervention Program.
C. The Early Intervention System will apply to all employees of the Police Department.
D. The Early Intervention System will be automatically activated when:
1. An employee is the subject of two (2) or more sustained internal or four (4) or more
sustained divisional investigations or six (6) or more Departmental investigations
involving misconduct, or quality of service within any twelve (12) month period.
2. An employee is involved in four (4) or more police vehicle pursuits within any twelve
(12) month period, in which there are sustained violations.
3. An employee is involved in three (3) or more on-duty motor vehicle accidents during any
twelve (12) month period, where the employee's actions were determined to be a
contributing factor or the fault was undetermined.
4. An employee is involved in two (2) or more bias complaints within a six (6) month
period.
5. An employee is involved in five (5) or more use of force incidents in a six (6) month
period.
E. The Internal Affairs Unit will be responsible for maintaining and monitoring all data pertinent to
automatic activations of the Early Intervention System. Internal Affairs will ensure that automatic
activations are conducted in a timely manner and will monitor the process to ensure that all
provisions of this General Order are followed.
1. Supervisors of the Little Rock Police Department will continuously monitor the
performance and behavior of all personnel under their command. Supervisors have
available to them, as part of their Blue Team access, the Early Intervention Dashboard
that gives them an overview of the employee’s current status concerning the events that
activate an alert in the system.
F. First-line supervisors must be cognizant of potential problems that may impact an employee’s
daily work performance. The Early Intervention System may also be activated at the request of
any supervisor. This request will then be forwarded through the Chain of Command for the
approval of the Chief of Police, whenever any of the following behaviors, incidents or situations
can be documented:
1. A significant reduction in work performance or productivity;
2. Indications of substance abuse;
3. Involvement in incidents of domestic discord or financial difficulties;
4. Any discernible pattern of recurring similar complaints, regardless of disposition or

length of time;

5. The failure of previous attempts to correct substandard performance through the use of
performance review, training or discipline;
6. Any other sudden or unusual change in behavior, which, in the opinion of a supervisor,
adversely affects the employee’s performance or the performance of other members of
the Department; and/or,
7. Any employee who, upon periodic supervisory review of his/her sick leave usage,
exhibits a pattern of usage suggesting a definite and/or possible abuse of the Department's
sick leave policy.
G. Each first-line supervisor will maintain an Early Intervention System file on each employee
assigned to his/her command. This file will be the repository for documented incidents that meet
the criteria for Early Intervention System consideration. This will be the same file used for
employee performance evaluations and will be considered and treated as a confidential employee
record. In the event of an employee transfer, this file will be hand delivered to the Division
Commander in charge of the employee’s new area of assignment by the employee’s former
Division Commander. These files will include the following documentation concerning the
employee:
1. Copies of use of force reports;
2. Copies of vehicle accident reports;
3. Copies of letters of all disciplinary action;
4. Documentation of counseling session (s);
5. Referrals to EAP;
6. Documentation of mandated remedial training; and,
7. Any documentation deemed necessary by the employee’s chain of command.
H. All supervisory requests for activation of the Early Intervention system will be forwarded from the
Chief of Police to the Internal Affairs Unit. The Internal Affairs Unit will ensure the timely
activation of the System and will monitor the process to ensure that all provisions of this General
Order are followed.
I. Upon activation of the Early Intervention System, an Internal Affairs Unit supervisor will review
the alert and determine if an Employee Analysis Report (LRPD Form 5030-21) for the affected
employee should be completed. The Internal Affairs supervisor should consider in his review the
employee’s actual involvement, whether or not discipline was administered and any other factors
that could cause public concern. The Internal Affairs supervisor will complete a memorandum
detailing his review of the alert and forward a copy to the Chief of Police. If it is determined that
an Employee Analysis Report should be compiled, the report will include a summary of, at a
minimum, the following information:
1. General employment history, including all assignments and transfers, leave use of all
types and leave available;
2. All citizen complaints and internal or divisional investigations involving the employee;
3. A synopsis of all use of force incidents involving the employee during the last six (6)
months;

4. All disciplinary actions taken against the employee;
5. All awards and commendations received by the employee;
6. All on-duty motor vehicle accidents involving the employee;
7. All police vehicle pursuits involving the employee; and,
8. Employee’s performance appraisals for the past three (3) years.
J. The Internal Affairs Unit will compile the Employee Analysis Report and deliver a copy of the
report to the Chief of Police. Once reviewed by the Chief of Police or his designee, the report will
be forwarded to the employee’s Division Commander.
1. The Division Commander will ensure that each of the employee’s current supervisors
(first-line supervisor or sergeant upwards) reviews the Employee Analysis Report.
2. The employee’s immediate supervisor will prepare a written evaluation of the Employee
Analysis Report and recommendations for remedial action which may include the
following:
a) Conclusion that the employee’s actions does not warrant immediate need for
corrective action;
b) Referral to the Employee Assistance Program (EAP);
c) Referral to an agency-authorized mental health professional or other mental

health care provider authorized by the Department;
d) Requiring the employee to participate in agency-authorized training, targeting

personal or professional problems that the employee may be facing (e.g.,
Communications, Cultural Awareness, Coping with Stress, Substance Abuse,
Anger Management);
e) Reassignment or transfer.
3. Supervisors may obtain any additional information regarding the employee as may be
necessary to appropriately complete an evaluation.
4. Supervisors may consult with Internal Affairs Unit or Training Division personnel or any
other Departmental personnel as may be appropriate during this review.
5. Once an employee has been identified by the Early Intervention system and has been
notified by their supervisor, the employee will cooperate with the supervisor and/or
Internal Affairs personnel in identifying reasons for and resolutions to Departmental
concerns regarding the employee’s actions and follow the mandated plan of action to
completion.
6. This review and written evaluation will be completed and forwarded with notations by
each supervisor through the Chain of Command to the Chief of Police within fifteen (15)
business days of the initial receipt of the Employee Analysis Report.
7. The Chief of Police will review the evaluation and the Employee Analysis Report and
will make a final determination regarding any recommendations made by supervisors.

8. In the event the review of the Employee Analysis Report results in any employee action,
the employee’s immediate supervisor will ensure that the action is completed, will
monitor the employee’s continued performance, and will provide a monthly written
follow-up evaluation through the Chain of Command to the Chief of Police for a period
of six (6) months from the original date when the Early Intervention System was
activated. Evaluation periods may be extended at the recommendation of the employee’s
Division Commander and/or the Office of the Chief of Police.
9. Participation by Department employees in counseling and/or training may be voluntary or

directed by a supervisor. Any order for mandatory psychological counseling and/or
assessment must be approved by the Chief of Police and provided to the employee in
writing. Any action to include change of work environment, training, or counseling as a
result of the Early Intervention System are not considered punitive or to be a disciplinary
action.
10. If it is determined, after a review of the Employee Analysis Report and other relevant
information by the employee's Chain of Command, that intervention and/or corrective
action is not necessary, then a monthly written evaluation will not be required. The
employee's Division Commander will prepare a memorandum noting his/her final
recommendations, which will then be forwarded to the Chief of Police for final approval.
K. The Professional Standards Section Commander will prepare and deliver to the Chief of Police an
annual evaluation of the Personnel Early Intervention System no later than January 31 st of each
year. This annual evaluation will assess the system’s effectiveness and recommend any changes
that may be needed to improve the system.
L. The Professional Standards Section will maintain all original documentation pertaining to the
Personnel Early Intervention System and Employee Analysis Reports for a period of sixty (60)
months. Information regarding employees will be maintained in a confidential manner.
M. The Personnel Early Intervention system will not be used as a form of harassment or retaliation
against any employee and all employee actions taken as a result of the Early Intervention System
will conform with the Departmental General Orders, Rules and Regulations and with applicable
City of Little Rock policies.
N. Any exceptions to the evaluation timelines established in this General Order will require the prior
written approval of the Chief of Police.

GENERAL ORDER
G. O. 212 HARASSMENT IN THE WORK PLACE

I. Purpose
A. The purpose of this Policy is to provide a healthy work environment, which will provide all
employees the opportunity to perform their duties to their fullest potential, and to establish
procedures for the reporting, investigation and resolution of complaints of racial or sexual
harassment, as defined by this General Order.
B. It is the policy of the City of Little Rock that all employees shall have the right to work in an
environment free of all forms of harassment. The Department views racial and sexual harassment
as serious misconduct, which will not be tolerated. Therefore, the Department shall take the
necessary steps to prevent such behavior, and to remedy all reported instances of racial, sexual or
any other form of harassment.
II. Prohibited Activity
A. No employee shall either explicitly or implicitly ridicule, mock, deride or belittle any person.
B. Employees shall not make offensive or derogatory comments based on race, color, creed, sex,
religion, national origin, age, disability, marital status, sexual orientation, gender identity, genetic
information, political opinions or affiliation, either directly or indirectly, to or about another
person. Such harassment is a prohibited form of discrimination, under state and federal
employment laws, and is also considered gross misconduct subject to disciplinary action by this
Department.
III. Definitions
A. General harassment is defined as any annoying, persistent act or action that singles out an
employee, to that employee’s objection or detriment, because of race, color, creed, sex, religion,
national origin, age, disability, marital status, sexual orientation, gender identity, genetic
information, political opinions or affiliation. Harassment may include, but is not limited to: verbal
abuse, ridicule, interference with an employee’s work, or the making of innuendoes.
B. Sexual harassment is defined as unwelcome and unsolicited sexual advances, requests for sexual
favors, and other verbal or physical conduct of a sexual nature when:
1. Submission to such conduct is made either explicitly or implicitly a term or condition of

employment; or,
2. Submission to or rejection of such conduct by an employee is used as the basis for

employment decisions affecting the employee; or,

GENERAL ORDERS G. O. 212 HARASSMENT IN THE WORK PLACE
3. Such conduct has the purpose, or effect, of unreasonably interfering with an employee’s
work performance or creating an intimidating, hostile, or offensive working environment.
IV. Employee Responsibilities
A. All employees are responsible for avoiding situations which involve actual or apparent racial or
sexual harassment, and shall assist in the prevention of harassment by:
1. Refraining from participation in, or encouraging, actions that could be perceived as

harassment;
2. Reporting acts of harassment to a supervisor; and,
3. Encouraging any employee, who confides that he is being harassed, to report these acts to
a supervisor.
B. Supervisory employees shall ensure that each work place has an atmosphere free from racial or
sexual harassment for all employees. Supervisors shall monitor the unit work environment and
shall stop any acts, whenever they observe or are made aware of any action,that may be considered
harassment by taking appropriate steps to intervene, whether or not the involved employees are
within his line of supervision.
C. Supervisors shall counsel all employees on the types of prohibited behavior and the Department’s
procedures for reporting and resolving complaints of harassment, and shall take immediate action
to limit the contact between two employees, where there has been a complaint of harassment,
pending the outcome of an investigation.
D. Every supervisor has the responsibility to assist any employee of this Department, who comes to
him with a complaint of harassment, in documenting and filing a complaint for investigation.
E. Failure on the part of any employee to take action to stop known harassment and/or to report such
to a supervisor shall be grounds for disciplinary action.
V. Complaint Procedures
A. Employees encountering any form of harassment, as defined by this Order, shall tell the person(s)
engaging in such conduct that their actions are unwelcome and offensive.
B. Any employee, who believes that he is being harassed, shall report the incident(s) without delay to
his supervisor, as soon as possible, so that steps may be taken to protect the employee from further
harassment and appropriate investigative measures can be initiated. Where this is not practical, the
employee may file a written complaint with any supervisor, or with the Office of the Chief of
Police. Should an employee feel that they can not file such a complaint with any departmental
supervisor or the Chief of Police, he/she may go directly to the City of Little Rock Human
Resources Department.
C. Any supervisor who has had a harassment complaint reported to them will document the
complaint and forward the record without recommendation to the Office of the Chief of Police.
1. The original complaint will then be forwarded to the Human Resources Department for
investigation.

G. O. 212 HARASSMENT IN THE WORK PLACE LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
2. A copy of the complaint will be forwarded to the Professional Standards Section for
tracking purposes only.
3. The Human Resources Department will be responsible for the investigation of the
complaint and will notify the office of the Chief of Police of its findings.
4. The Office of the Chief of Police will notify the Professional Standards Section as to the
disposition of the complaint and any disciplinary or corrective measure, which may result.
D. Retaliation against any employee, who has filed a harassment complaint, or those who assisted,
testified, or participated in the investigation of such, is prohibited.
E. This policy does not preclude any employee from filing a complaint or grievance through the City
of Little Rock Human Resources Department, the City Manager’s Office or with an appropriate
outside agency.
VI. Fraudulent Complaints
A. If after an investigation Human Resources or the Professional Standard Section determines that the
complainant is not factual, or that an employee has made false statements regarding the complaint,
disciplinary action may be taken against the individual who filed the complaint or the individual
who has given false information.
B. If Professional Standards determines that the complainant is not factual, or that an employee has
made false statements regarding the complaint, Professional Standards may recommend to the
Office of the Chief of Police that a criminal investigation be initiated against the individual who
filed the complaint or the individual who has given false information.

GENERAL ORDER
G.O. 213 RANDOM DRUG AND ALCOHOL TESTING

I. Purpose
A. This Order shall establish guidelines for a random drug and alcohol testing program for all sworn
and selected civilian members of the Little Rock Police Department.
B. This section of the Little Rock Police Department General Orders is also designed to establish
procedures for the proper handling of a positive test result, failure to report for testing, refusal to
submit to testing, tampering or adulterating a test sample, and subsequent disciplinary action.
II. Department Responsibilities
A. The overall administration of the City of Little Rock’s drug and alcohol testing policy shall fall
under the direct authority of the Human Resources Department, who shall ensure adherence to the
City’s policy by the involved departments.
B. The primary responsibility of the Little Rock Police Department is public safety, to serve and
protect the community and to remain responsive to the needs of all citizens. This responsibility
empowers sworn members of the Department with both the authority to arrest and to use deadly
force.
C. Police agencies, such as the Little Rock Police Department, also hold a public trust to ensure that
individuals sworn to uphold the law must themselves obey those same laws. Employees of the
Little Rock Police Department hold a personal responsibility to perform at the highest levels of
which they are capable. These personal responsibilities are most critical when it becomes
necessary for a citizen or Department member to depend upon another member of the Little Rock
Police Department.
D. For these reasons, it is the policy of the Department that all sworn and selected civilian members
undergo random breath and urinalysis testing for illegal drug/controlled substance, anabolic
steroids and/or alcohol abuse. This testing is to ensure that all employees holding access to or
control over any item of evidence, contraband, currency, or having access to information
concerning ongoing criminal investigations and criminal cases are physically unimpaired, have
unimpaired judgment, and possess the integrity to fulfill their duties and responsibilities.
III. Definitions
A. Calendar Year - Each year beginning on January 1 and ending on December 31.
B. Sworn Member - Any officer, of any rank, who possesses the authority to bear arms and has arrest
powers.

GENERAL ORDERS G.O. 213 RANDOM ALCOHOL AND DRUG TESTING
C. Civilian Employee - A Police Department employee who is not a sworn officer and whose conduct
is governed by the provisions of the Code of Conduct for Civilian Employees, the Civil Service
Commission Rules and Regulations, the Ordinances of the City of Little Rock, and/or the laws of
the State of Arkansas, or the United States, and Departmental policies, procedures and directives,
and the Administrative Personnel Policy and Procedures, whichever shall apply.
D. Split Specimen - A collection method of maintaining two separate containers of urine from the
tested subject. This allows for retesting should the need arise.
E. Illegal Drug/Controlled Substances - Any substance designated by Arkansas Statute to be a

controlled substance, and classified as such in schedules one through six of the Arkansas Criminal
Code, to include but not limited to: amphetamines; barbituates; bezodiazapine; cocaine;
methaqualone; marijuana; methadone; opiates; Phencyclidine; and propoxyphene. Employees
may be screened for additional substances as determined by the Chief of Police or his/her
designee.
F. Negative Test Result - Indicates there is no presence of illegal drugs or controlled substances
within the urine screen, or the amount present does not exceed set detection limits.
G. Positive Test Result - Result of an initial screening method, which detects the presence of an illegal
drug, controlled substance, or anabolic steroids in the urine screen.
H. Invalid/Cancelled Drug Test Result – The result of a drug test for a urine specimen that contains an
unidentified adulterant or an unidentified interfering substance, has abnormal physical
characteristics, or has an endogenous substance at an abnormal concentration that prevents the
laboratory from completing or obtaining a valid test result. It could also be the result of a broken
vial, or a loss of urine (spillage) at the laboratory.
I. Confirmed Positive Test Result - Result of a confirmation test, which detects the presence of an
illegal drug, controlled substance, or anabolic steroids in the urine screen that exceeds set
detection limits.
J. Verified, Confirmed Positive Test - A confirmed positive test which has been verified by a
Medical Review Officer.
K. Medical Review Officer (M.R.O.) - A licensed physician, employed by the laboratory, with
knowledge of substance abuse disorders and the appropriate medical training to interpret and
evaluate all confirmed positive test results.
L. NLCP - National Laboratory Certification Program.
M. Reasonable Suspicion - A suspicion, based on facts or circumstances, which gives rise to more
than a bare suspicion. Facts to consider while determining the reasonableness of this suspicion
include, but are not limited to, the following: absenteeism, abnormal erratic behavior, reliable
information from cooperating individuals, citizens complaints, accidents, physical symptoms, and
discovery of incriminating evidence.
N. Negligent Work Practices – Those acts or practices which constitute an apparent violation of
Department Rules and Regulations or General Orders.

G.O. 213 RANDOM ALCOHOL AND DRUG TESTING LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
O. Refusal to Submit to Testing – Failure to appear for any test after being directed, failure to provide
a urine or breath sample for any test required, refusing to provide a minimum of 40 ml of urine,
failure to take a second test when directed to do so, failure to remain at the testing site until the
testing process is complete, failure to cooperate with any part of the testing process.
IV. Drug and Alcohol Testing
A. Random Testing
1. Selected sworn and civilian employees will provide a breath sample, blood or urine
specimen which will be screened for illegal drugs and alcohol. These members may be
randomly tested monthly through a contract firm/laboratory. This random drug and
alcohol testing program in no way supersedes or eliminates any employee from being
subject to reasonable suspicion testing by a departmental supervisor.
2. On a yearly basis, approximately fifty five percent of all sworn personnel and fifty
percent of all civilian personnel will be selected to participate in the Random Drug and
Alcohol Testing.
B. Reasonable Suspicion Testing
1. The Chief of Police reserves the right to require a police officer or employee to undergo
drug and/or alcohol testing, if there is “reasonable suspicion” to believe that such
employee is under the influence of drugs or alcohol during work hours. The initial
determination of whether or not reasonable suspicion exists may be made by the Division
Commander or in his absence the highest-ranking supervisory officer on duty at the time.
2. A confidential administrative investigation, conducted by the Professional Standards

Section at the direction of the Chief of Police, may be used to determine facts that are
sufficient to constitute reasonable suspicion that an employee is a user of illegal drugs or
legal drugs which have not been legally prescribed. The summary of facts will be
presented to the Chief of Police for consideration of reasonable cause. If reasonable cause
is found, arrangements for the employee to undergo drug and/or alcohol screening shall
be made, as soon as practical. A supervisor shall accompany the employee to the
approved collection site. The employee will be placed on administrative leave with pay
pending the test results. Nothing in this General Order shall restrict a supervisor from
ordering immediate drug and/or alcohol testing when it is deemed reasonable.
3. The Chief of Police or his/her designee is the sole person to require a sworn officer or
civilian to undergo drug testing, if there is “reasonable suspicion” to believe that such
employee is under the influence of Anabolic Steroids.
4. Any supervisor who has reasonable cause to believe an employee may be under the
influence of Anabolic Steroids, will document all facts and circumstances, and forward
this information through the employee’s chain of command to the Chief of Police. The
employee will be immediately placed on Administrative Leave with pay pending a final
decision.
5. If the Chief of Police or his/her designee determines that a test is warranted,

arrangements for the employee to undergo Anabolic Steroid, drug and/or alcohol
screening shall be made, as soon as practical, but no later than 48 hours after the
employee has been placed on Administrative Leave.

6. A supervisor shall accompany the employee to the approved collection site. The
employee will be placed on administrative leave with pay pending the test results.
Nothing in this General Order shall restrict a supervisor from ordering immediate drug
and/or alcohol testing when it is deemed reasonable.
C. Post Injury and Accident/Incident Screening
1. Any employee of the Department who is involved in a work related incident, resulting in
physical injury to any person, through apparently negligent work practices, will be
automatically tested, as soon as practical, following the incident.
a) The On-Duty Shift Commander or, in his absence, the Acting Shift Commander
will be responsible for determining whether an incident meets the criteria for
post injury accident screening.
2. Any employee, who is involved in an on-duty or off-duty traffic accident, while operating
a city owned, rented, leased or seized vehicle, which results in physical injury to any
person or in serious damage to the vehicle and/or the vehicle being immobilized to the
point that it has to be towed from the scene, will be automatically tested, as soon as
practical, following the accident.
D. Drug and Alcohol Testing Procedure
1. The Professional Standards representative will provide the “City of Little Rock Donor
Information For Collection Site” form, and the “Little Rock Police Department
Notification to Report for Random Drug and Alcohol Testing” form, to the appropriate
supervisor, when Departmental personnel are randomly selected for drug and alcohol
testing.
2. When employees are notified of a random drug and alcohol test, or are subject to a post-
accident or reasonable suspicion drug and alcohol test, or an anabolic steroids test, the
notifying supervisor will provide the employee with the “City of Little Rock Donor
Information For Collection Site” form.
3. It will be the responsibility of the involved supervisor to complete and provide the “City
of Little Rock Donor Information For Collection Site” form to the affected employee.
4. The “City of Little Rock Donor Information For Collection Site” form will be submitted
to the collection site by the employee.
V. Testing Notification
A. The contract firm will maintain and execute a random selection process from which employees will
be selected. The contract firm will maintain two separate lists of sworn personnel and civilian
personnel for random drug testing. The Department’s Professional Standard Section
representative will receive notification of personnel who have been randomly selected for testing.
Selected sworn and civilian members will be notified in person by a supervisor or Professional
Standards representative after supervisor notification. Selected employees will be tested during
their normally scheduled duty hours.

B. Notification to Report Form - This form will serve as notice to the employee that he has been
randomly selected to participate in the Random Drug and Alcohol Testing Program. A supervisor
or a Professional Standards representative will present the form to the employee. This notice serves
as a direct order, by authority of the Chief of Police, to provide a breath and urine sample at the
specified collection location. This notice further provides instructions for the employees to report
to the specified collection location within one hour.
1. Employees who are working an approved light duty TDY Departmental assignment
subsequent to their assignment to the Headquarters Division’s Extended Leave Unit are
subject to Random Drug Testing. These employees will be notified by the Headquarters
Division, Operations Support Lieutenant, his designee or a Professional Standards
representative.
2. When a Professional Standards representative presents a Notification to Report Form to a

supervisor and the selected employee is off-duty (i.e., day off or not on shift, etc.) the
receiving supervisor will accept the form and retain it for service or ensure that it is
forwarded to the appropriate Division supervisor for service. If the notice cannot be
served within a reasonable time (not to exceed three (3) working days), a Documented
Absence Form will be completed and returned to Professional Standards Section.
C. Documented Absence Form - Any selected employee on extended pre-approved leave, (i.e. sick
leave, military leave, vacation leave) may be excused if the employee is not physically on duty and
available at work. Any other absence, such as subpoena for court appearance, may be excused with
approval of the Division Commander. A form filled out by the appropriate supervisor will
document the absence. This form will be sent through the chain of command for review by the
Professional Standards Section representative.
D. If a sworn member becomes involved in a police incident (traffic stop, waved down, etc.), while
traveling to the testing facility, the sworn member will immediately call for a unit and supervisor.
The sworn member will then relinquish the incident to the unit and continue to the collection
location. The supervisor will ensure that the sworn member is released from the scene with
instructions to continue to the collection location.
E. Failure to Report - Any selected employee who fails to report for drug and alcohol testing, in
accordance with this Order, will be subject to disciplinary action up to and including dismissal.
F. Refusal to Submit to Testing - Refusal by any selected employee to submit to drug and alcohol
testing, in accordance with this Order, will result in the employee being immediately placed on
administrative leave. The employee will be subject to disciplinary action up to and including
termination.
VI. Collection Procedures
A. Procedures for providing random urine specimens must allow individual privacy, unless there is
reason to believe a particular employee may alter or substitute the specimen to be provided.
Precautions will be taken to ensure that a urine specimen has not been adulterated or diluted during
the collection procedure, and that all information on the urine bottle and in the logbook can be
identified as belonging to a given employee. To ensure that unadulterated specimens are obtained,
the following procedures outline the minimum precautions that shall be taken during the collection
of urine specimens:

1. At the collection site, toilet-bluing agents shall be placed in the toilet tanks, wherever
possible, so the reservoir of water in the toilet bowl always remains blue. There should
not be any other source of water (e.g. shower, sink, etc.) in the enclosure where urination
occurs.
2. When the employee arrives at the collection site, collection site personnel shall request
the employee to present some type of photo identification (employee photo identification
or driver’s license.) This shall be noted on the chain of custody form. If the employee fails
to appear within the required time period, collection site personnel shall contact the
appropriate authority to obtain guidance on action to be taken.
3. The collection site person shall ask the employee to remove garments (e.g., coat, jacket)
that might conceal items or substances that could be used to tamper with or adulterate his
urine specimen. Also, all personal belongings (e.g. purse, briefcase) must remain with the
garments. The collection site person shall note any unusual behavior or appearance.
4. The employee shall be instructed to wash and dry his hands prior to urination.
5. After washing hands, the employee shall remain in the presence of the collection site
person and not have access to water fountains, faucets, soap dispensers, cleaning agents,
chemical agents, or other sources of adulteration.
6. The employee may provide his specimen in the privacy of a stall, or otherwise partitioned
area, that allows for privacy.
7. Upon receiving the specimen from the employee, the collection site person will determine
that it contains at least 40 to 60 milliliters of urine. If there is not sufficient urine in the
container, additional urine should be collected. The employee may be given reasonable
amounts of liquid (e.g., a glass of water), and must remain in the testing area under the
supervision of the collection site personnel. If an employee fails, for any reason, to
provide the necessary specimen, collection site personnel shall contact the appropriate
authority to obtain guidance on action to be taken.
8. After the specimen has been provided and submitted to the collection site person, the
employee should be allowed to wash his hands.
9. Immediately after collection, collection site personnel shall measure the temperature of
the specimen, conduct an inspection to determine the specimen’s color, and inspect it for
signs of contaminants. Any unusual findings, resulting from the inspection, must be
included on the chain of custody form. The time from urination to delivery of the sample
for temperature measurements is critical and in no case should exceed four minutes. If the
temperature of the specimen is outside the range of 32.5 - 37.7 degrees C/ 90.5 - 99.8
degrees F, this gives rise to reasonable suspicion of adulteration/substitution, and another
specimen should be collected under direct observation, and both specimens forwarded to
the laboratory. Any specimen suspected to be adulterated should always be forwarded for
testing. When reasonable suspicion is established, the second specimen must be obtained
under direct observation.

10. Both the individual being tested and the collection site person should keep the specimen
in view at all times prior to it being sealed and labeled. If the specimen is transferred to a
second container, the collection site person shall request the employee to observe the
transfer of the specimen and placement of the tamper-proof seal over the bottle cap and
down the sides of the bottle. The collection site person will place the identification label
securely on the bottle.
11. The identification label should contain the date, employee’s specimen number, and any
other identifying information required. The employee shall initial the label on the
specimen bottle.
12. The collection site person will enter the identifying information in a ledger. Both the
collection site person and the employee shall sign the ledger next to the identifying
information.
13. The individual shall be asked to read and sign a certification statement regarding his urine
specimen.
14. The collection site person shall complete the appropriate chain of custody form.
15. The urine specimen and chain of custody form are now ready for shipment. If the
specimen is not immediately prepared for shipment, it will be appropriately secured
during temporary storage.
16. While performing any part of the chain of custody procedures, it is essential that the urine
specimen and custody documents be under the control of the involved collection site
person. If the involved collection site person must leave his workstation momentarily, the
specimen and custody form must remain with him or must be secured. After the collection
site personnel returns to the workstation, the custody process will continue. If the site
person is leaving for an extended period of time, he should package the specimen for
delivery prior to leaving.
B. Any employee who is unable to provide a urine specimen due to a medical condition, must
immediately upon diagnosis or upon being hired, if the condition is pre-existing, provide the
Professional Standards Section with documentation from his/her physician to keep on file. When
the employee is selected to participate in the Random Drug Testing, the Professional Standards
representative will contact the contract firm/laboratory to arrange for a blood test to be
performed. The employee must notify the Professional Standards representative as soon as
possible, regarding any changes in their medical condition that affects their participation in the
Random Drug Testing.
C. Collection Control - Collection site personnel shall always attempt to have the container or
specimen bottle within sight before and after the employee has urinated. The containers shall be
tightly capped, properly sealed, and labeled. A chain of custody form shall be utilized for
maintaining control and accountability from point of collection to final disposition of specimens.
With each transfer of possession, the chain of custody form shall be dated, signed by the person
releasing the specimen, signed by the individual accepting the specimen, and the purpose for
transferring possession noted. Every effort should be made to minimize the number of persons
handling specimens.
D. Processing Urine Samples

1. The testing or processing phase shall consist of a two-step procedure:
a) Initial screening step; and,
b) Confirmation step.
2. The urine sample is first tested using a screening procedure. A specimen testing positive
will undergo an additional confirmation test. An initial positive report should not be
considered positive; rather, it should be classified as “confirmation pending”.
3. The confirmation procedure should be technologically different from the initial screening
test. In those cases where the second test confirms the presence of a drug or drugs in the
sample, the sample will be retained for further testing in case of dispute.
4. The testing method selected shall be capable of identifying amphetamines, barbiturates,

benzodiazepine, cocaine, heroin, marijuana, methadone, methaqualone, opiates,
Phencyclidine, propoxyphene, anabolic steroids, and every major drug of abuse.
Personnel utilized for testing will be certified as qualified to conduct urinalysis, or trained
to conduct such testing.
5. The laboratory selected to conduct the analysis will be experienced and capable of quality
control, documentation, chain of custody, technical expertise, and demonstrated
proficiency in urinalysis testing.
6. After the contract firm/laboratory has confirmed a positive test result, or an

invalid/cancelled test result, the employee will be scheduled for a consultation with the
Medical Review Officer (M.R.O.).
a) The M.R.O. will examine alternate medical explanations for any confirmed
positive test result, or an invalid/cancelled test result.
(1) This action will include conducting a medical interview, a review of the
individual’s medical history (including a review of the individual’s
legally prescribed medication), and a review of any other relevant
biomedical factors.
(2) The M.R.O. will make the final decision whether to verify the test result
as confirmed positive.
(3) If the M.R.O confirms the test to be invalid, the employee is subject to
be tested again, as soon as possible, to determine whether the sample is
a confirmed positive or negative test result.
b) Verified, confirmed positive test results will be retained by the laboratory for a
time period of 5 years.
c) Verified, confirmed, positive test results are for administrative purposes only and
will not be used against the employee in any criminal proceedings.
7. An employee will be immediately placed on administrative leave if the following occurs:

a) A confirmed positive test for anabolic steroids, illegal drugs; or,
b) A verified, confirmed positive test for controlled substances.
8. An employee, whose test is verified as confirmed positive, may request that the split
specimen be tested by an alternate National Laboratory Certification Program (NLCP)
certified laboratory. In order to effect such a request for testing of the split specimen, the
employee must do the following:
a) Submit a written request to the Chief of Police within ten (10) working days of
notification of such result.
b) The written request must include the NLCP - certified laboratory that has been
chosen by the employee.
(1) The contract laboratory will transport the split specimen to the alternate
NLCP - certified laboratory chosen by the employee for testing.
(2) Appropriate chain of custody procedures will be followed.
(3) Retesting expenses of the split specimen will be paid for by the
Department unless the test shows to be positive. In the case of a
positive test, it will be the responsibility of the employee to incur the
cost of the test.
E. Chain of Evidence - Storage
1. Where a positive report is received, urine specimens shall be maintained under secured
storage for a period of 42 months, or until ordered destroyed by the Office of the Chief of
Police.
2. Each step in the collecting and processing of the urine specimens shall be documented to
establish procedural integrity and the chain of evidence.
VII. Blood Collection and Testing
A. When the employee arrives at the collection site, collection site personnel shall request the
employee to present some type of photo identification (employee photo identification or driver’s
license.) This shall be noted on the chain of custody form. If the employee fails to appear within
the required time period, collection site personnel shall contact the appropriate authority to
obtain guidance on action to be taken.
B. Collection site personnel will only use non-alcohol swabs to prepare the injection site for
specimen collection.
C. Both the individual being tested and the collection site person should keep the specimen in view at
all times prior to it being sealed and labeled. If the specimen is transferred to a second container,
the collection site person shall request the employee to observe the transfer of the specimen and
placement of the tamper-proof seal over the bottle cap and down the sides of the bottle. The
collection site person will place the identification label securely on the bottle.

D. The identification label should contain the date, employee’s specimen number, and any other
identifying information required. The employee shall initial the label on the specimen bottle.
E. The collection site person will enter the identifying information in a ledger. Both the collection
site person and the employee shall sign the ledger next to the identifying information.
F. The individual shall be asked to read and sign a certification statement regarding his blood
specimen.
G. The collection site person shall complete the appropriate chain of custody form.
H. The blood specimen and chain of custody form are now ready for shipment. If the specimen is not
immediately prepared for shipment, it will be appropriately secured during temporary storage.
I. While performing any part of the chain of custody procedures, it is essential that the blood
specimen and custody documents be under the control of the involved collection site person. If the
involved collection site person must leave his workstation momentarily, the specimen and custody
form must remain with him or must be secured. After the collection site personnel returns to the
workstation, the custody process will continue. If the site person is leaving for an extended period
of time, he should package the specimen for delivery prior to leaving.
J. Collection Control - Collection site personnel shall always attempt to have the container or
specimen bottle within sight before and after blood has been drawn. The containers shall be
tightly capped, properly sealed, and labeled. A chain of custody form shall be utilized for
maintaining control and accountability from point of collection to final disposition of specimens.
With each transfer of possession, the chain of custody form shall be dated, signed by the person
releasing the specimen, signed by the individual accepting the specimen, and the purpose for
transferring possession noted. Every effort should be made to minimize the number of persons
handling specimens.
K. Processing Blood Samples
1. The testing or processing phase shall consist of a two-step procedure:
a) Initial screening step; and,
b) Confirmation step.
2. The blood sample is first tested using a screening procedure. A specimen testing positive
will undergo an additional confirmation test. An initial positive report should not be
considered positive; rather, it should be classified as “confirmation pending”.
3. The confirmation procedure should be technologically different from the initial screening
test. In those cases where the second test confirms the presence of a drug or drugs in the
sample, the sample will be retained for further testing in case of dispute.
4. The testing method selected shall be capable of identifying amphetamines, barbiturates,

benzodiazepine, cocaine, methaqualone, marijuana, methadone, opiates, Phencyclidine,
and propoxyphene, heroin, and Anabolic Steroids. Personnel utilized for testing will be
trained to conduct such testing.

5. The laboratory selected to conduct the test will be experienced and capable of quality
control, documentation, chain of custody, technical expertise, and demonstrated
proficiency in blood testing.
6. After the contract firm/laboratory has confirmed a positive test result, or an

invalid/cancelled test result, the employee will be scheduled for a consultation with the
Medical Review Officer (M.R.O.).
a) The M.R.O. will examine alternate medical explanations for any confirmed
positive test result, or an invalid/cancelled test result.
(1) This action will include conducting a medical interview, a review of the
individual’s medical history (including a review of the individual’s
legally prescribed medication), and a review of any other relevant
biomedical factors.
(2) The M.R.O. will make the final decision whether to verify the test result
as confirmed positive.
(3) If the M.R.O confirms the test to be invalid, the employee is subject to
be tested again, as soon as possible, to determine whether the sample is
a confirmed positive or negative test result.
b) Verified, confirmed positive test results will be retained by the laboratory for a
time period of 5 years.
c) Verified, confirmed, positive test results are for administrative purposes only
and will not be used against the employee in any criminal proceedings.
7. An employee will be immediately placed on administrative leave if the following occurs:
a) A confirmed positive test for Anabolic Steroids, illegal drugs; or,
b) A verified, confirmed positive test for controlled substances.
8. An employee, whose test is verified as confirmed positive, may request that the split
specimen be tested by an alternate National Laboratory Certification Program (NLCP)
certified laboratory. In order to effect such a request for testing of the split specimen, the
employee must do the following:
a) Submit a written request to the Chief of Police within ten (10) working days of
notification of such result.
b) The written request must include the NLCP - certified laboratory that has been
chosen by the employee.
(1) The contract laboratory will transport the split specimen to the
alternate NLCP - certified laboratory chosen by the employee for
testing.

(2) Appropriate chain of custody procedures will be followed.
(3) Retesting expenses of the split specimen will be paid for by the
Department unless the test shows to be positive. In the case of a
positive test, it will be the responsibility of the employee to incur the
cost of the test.
L. Chain of Evidence - Storage
1. Where a positive report is received, urine or blood specimens shall be maintained under
secured storage for a period of 42 months, or until ordered destroyed by the Office of the
Chief of Police.
2. Each step in the collecting and processing of the urine or blood specimens shall be
documented to establish procedural integrity and the chain of evidence.
VIII. Alcohol Testing
A. Employees are not allowed to report for duty with the presence of alcohol in their system.
1. Employees are not allowed to consume alcohol while on duty, except:
a) In the performance of a police duty; and,
b) Only with the specific consent of a Division Commander; and,
c) Never in uniform.
2. Employees returning to work, as a result of a call-out from a period of off-duty time, will
not be subject to the provisions of this portion of the Order.
3. Employees will only be tested during normally scheduled work hours.
B. Certified instruments and operators are in place to allow alcohol screening by breath sample to be
conducted at the same collection site where urine screening and blood testing is conducted.
1. When an employee reports for drug and alcohol screening for any of the reasons specified
in this Order, he will be required to give a breath sample in addition to the urine or blood
sample required.
2. Upon completion of the breath sample, the employee will be told whether his test was
negative or positive for the presence of alcohol.
3. If the test for alcohol is negative, the employee will return to his regularly assigned duties.
C. If the test is positive (above .02 blood alcohol content), the employee will be required to remain at
the collection site for a period of fifteen minutes, at which time a second test will be administered.

1. If the results of the second test do not confirm the first (a BAC of .02 or below), the test
process, as a whole, will be deemed negative and the employee will return to his regularly
assigned duties.
2. If the results of the second test are also above .02 BAC, then the test process, as a whole,
will be deemed to reflect a positive indication that the employee has alcohol in his system,
in violation of Departmental standards, and a supervisor will be notified immediately.
IX. Confidentiality and Maintenance of Records of Drug and Alcohol Screening Results
A. All drug screen and breath alcohol test results will be confidential, subject to prevailing law and
necessary departmental use. Drug and alcohol test results will be made available only to those
personnel assigned to inform the employee of the test results or those personnel involved in the
disciplinary process arising from such results.
B. Drug screen and breath alcohol test results shall be admissible in all disciplinary proceedings
arising from a positive drug and/or alcohol test result. Upon completion of the test, officers will
return all forms to Professional Standards through their supervisor.
C. Drug and alcohol test results shall be available to the affected employee, or the employee’s
representative, upon the presentation of properly executed release forms.
D. Drug and alcohol test results may be provided to subsequent and potential employers providing a
waiver signed by the employee is submitted, authorizing the release of these results.
E. Drug and alcohol test results shall not be utilized to support any criminal prosecution.
F. Statistical analysis of the drug and alcohol testing program results shall be available to
Departmental personnel assigned to conduct such analysis.
X. Administration of Program
A. The Department’s Professional Standards Section representative will act as a liaison between the
Police Department and the drug screening contract firm/laboratory, and will be responsible for the
following:
1. Providing a departmental roster of all sworn and selected civilian members. The roster
will identify the sworn members by a number only and will include current assignment,
watch, and days off;
2. Receiving the documented absence forms from Division Commanders in order to

reschedule testing;
3. Receiving and reviewing Notification to Report forms to ensure policy guidelines were
followed;
4. Coordinating the mailing of negative test results to employees;
5. Monitoring adherence to program (appropriate identification, cooperation of employees,

adherence of firm/lab to contract, etc.);

6. Receiving the verified and confirmed positive reports from the contract firm/laboratory
(the Office of the Chief of Police will make notification of positive test results to the
officer);
7. Scheduling consultations between the employee and the M.R.O if necessary; and,
8. Notifying the lab to retain positive test results.
B. The Professional Standards Section will coordinate the employee’s request for the testing of the
split specimen by a NLCP - certified laboratory.
XI. Disciplinary Action
A. Disciplinary action may result with regard to the following areas:
1. Failure to Report - Any sworn member, or civilian employee, who fails to report for drug
and alcohol testing, in accordance with this order, will be subject to disciplinary action up
to and including termination.
2. Refusal to Submit to Testing - Any sworn member, or civilian employee, who refuses to
submit to drug and alcohol testing, in accordance with this order, will be subject to
3. Tampering, or attempted tampering, with any urine sample will result in disciplinary
action up to and including termination.
4. A verified, confirmed positive test result which indicates illegal drug use will result in
5. A verified, confirmed positive test result which indicates controlled substances abuse will
result in disciplinary action up to and including termination of the employee.
6. A verified, confirmed positive test result which indicates Anabolic Steroid use will result
in disciplinary action up to and including termination.
7. The confirmed presence of alcohol after random, post accident or reasonable suspicion
testing will be subject to disciplinary action up to and including termination.
8. Disciplinary action, arising as a result of this order, may be appealed by the employee
under Civil Service in accordance with the City of Little Rock Civil Service Commission
Rules and Regulations, and the employee not under Civil Service with City of Little Rock
Personnel Policy and Procedure guidelines. Verified, confirmed positive test results are
for administrative purposes only and will not be used against the employee in any
criminal proceedings.

XII. Employee Assistance Program
A. The Little Rock Police Department and the City of Little Rock encourages any employee who has
a drug or alcohol problem to obtain assistance. Any employee who has not been required to
submit to a drug or alcohol test or who has tested negative but, in good faith, requests assistance
for his problem, shall be referred immediately to the Employee Assistance Program. This
voluntary admission shall not be used against the employee for disciplinary purposes (see
Employee Assistance Program Guidelines in Little Rock Police Department General Orders).
B. Any employee of this Department, who requests and receives treatment by the Employee
Assistance Program’s recommended physician, must adhere to the following guidelines prior to
returning to full time duty status:
1. The employee must complete a doctor supervised rehabilitation program, and receive a
written release detailing his completion of rehabilitation and his/her ability to return to
work.
2. After completing the rehabilitation program, and receiving the written release from the
rehabilitation program’s physician, the employee must meet with the city psychologist and
receive a written recommendation to be allowed to return to full time duty status.
C. Any employee of this Department, who requests treatment through this Section of the Little Rock
Police Department General Orders, must use accrued sick leave during his participation in a
rehabilitation program.
1. If the employee exhausts his available sick leave, and has not completed the rehabilitation
program, he may use accrued vacation/personal leave or may be granted authorized leave
without pay at the discretion of the Chief of Police.
2. Any employee of this Department, who seeks and receives treatment through this Order,
will be granted a one-time exclusion from disciplinary action. Any subsequent admission,
positive test, or other violation of this Order will result in immediate disciplinary action
up to and including termination of employment with the Little Rock Police Department.

GENERAL ORDER
G. O. 214 GRIEVANCE PROCEDURES

08/14/2014 DEPARTMENTAL G.O. 214 (08-14-00) G. O. 214
I. Grievance Procedures
A. The following Grievance Procedures for all classes of employees shall be followed:
1. Non-uniform, union-eligible, pursuant to A.F.S.M.E. Statement of Agreement;
2. Non-uniform, non-union-eligible, pursuant to the Administrative Personnel Policy and

Procedure Manual;
3. Uniform, non-union-eligible, pursuant to the Administrative Personnel Policy and

Procedure Manual; and
4. Uniform, union eligible, pursuant to the F.O.P. Statement of Agreement.
B. All grievances filed shall be coordinated through the Chief of Police.
C. All grievances filed shall be submitted on a City of Little Rock Grievance Form and shall include:
1. A written statement of the grievance and the facts upon which it is based.
2. The written allegation of the specific violation or harm done.
3. A written statement of the remedy sought.
D. The following procedures shall be followed in responding to grievances, to include:
1. Acknowledging receipt of the grievance by noting the date and person receiving the
grievance.
2. Analyzing the facts or allegation.
3. A written confirmation or denial of the allegations.
4. Identifying the remedy or adjustments to be made.
E. The Chief of Police shall maintain a separate and secure file for all employee grievances. The
Assistant Chief of Police – Executive Bureau will, on an annual basis, formally review and
analyze all grievances, supporting policies and reporting practices, to identify specific problem
areas or patterns.

GENERAL ORDER
G. O. 215 Peer Support Group

I. Purpose and Guidelines
A. The purpose of this General Order is to provide the maximum psychological and physical care for
all sworn employees during and after a critical incident. The Little Rock Police Department
recognizes the high amount of stress evolving from law enforcement duties related to the
fulfillment of the Department’s mission. As a result, the following policies and procedures
regarding the response and psychological support to personnel involved in traumatic events are set
forth in this General Order.
B. This Order governs all personnel who are acting, or who may reasonably be expected to act, in the
capacity of a Peer Support Member during or after a critical incident.
C. Definitions
1. “Critical Incident,” as used in this Policy, is defined as any event that has a stressful
impact sufficient enough to overwhelm the usually effective copings skills of emergency
responders. Critical incidents are abrupt, powerful events that fall outside the range of
ordinary human experiences. These incidents create unusually strong emotional reactions
or distress, which have the potential to interfere with the ability to function during or after
the incident
2. “Critical Incident Stress,” as used in this Policy, is defined as the severe or accumulative
psychological stress or trauma an employee may experience in providing emergency
service in response to the critical incident, including crisis, disaster, or emergency. The
stress or trauma is an abnormally strong emotional, cognitive, or physical reaction that has
the potential to interfere with normal function(s) to include:
a) Physical and emotional illness
b) Failure of usual coping mechanisms
c) Loss of the ability to function
3. “Defusing,” as used in this Policy, is defined as a semi structured group discussion used
for information exchange and cathartic ventilation.
4. “Debriefing,” as used in this Policy, is defined as a structured group crisis intervention

used to facilitate closure and reconstruction after a critical incident has concluded wherein
suggestions for coping and stress management are given.
GENERAL ORDERS 215 -1 LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT

GENERAL ORDERS G. O. 215 Peer Support Group
5. “Peer Support Member,” as used in this Policy, is defined as any employee who has
received training in critical incident stress management by the Arkansas Crisis Response
Team to provide emotional or moral support to a responder who needs emotional or moral
support as a result of job-related stress or an incident in which the responder was involved
while acting in his or her official capacity (A.C.A. § 16-40-106).
6. “Responder,” as used in this Policy, is defined as any employee involved in the response
to a critical incident or traumatic event (i.e. Police Officer, Dispatcher, Call Taker, Crime
Scene Technician, etc.)
7. “Peer Support Event,” as used in this Policy, is defined as any

debriefing, defusing, or counseling session conducted by a certified
peer support member that involves the emotional or moral support of an
emergency responder who needs emotional or moral support as a result
of job-related stress or an incident in which the emergency responder
was involved while acting in his or her official capacity.
II. Response to Critical Incidents / Critical Incident Stress Management (CISM)
A. The Peer Support Supervisor shall be responsible for providing Communications with a CISM
callout roster to facilitate the deployment of the CISM team.
B. Supervisors will request the deployment of the CISM team to the following incidents:
1. Mass Casualty Incidents/ Disaster.
2. Officer Involved Shooting where anyone is injured or killed.
3. Officer Suicide.
4. Serious Line of Duty Injury.
5. Officer Line of Duty Death.
6. Prolonged Incident resulting in a Death.
C. Supervisors may request the deployment of the CISM team to the following incidents:
1. Mass Casualty Incidents/ Disaster.
2. Incidents where the victim is a friend or family member of a responding officer.
3. Significant traffic fatalities
4. Significant events involving children (e.g. death, serious injury, etc.)
5. Any incident as determined by an on scene supervisor.

G. O. 215 Peer Support Group LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
III. Companion Officer Program
A. Statement of Philosophy
1. The Little Rock Police Department in establishing a Companion Officer Program

acknowledges the critical incident stress placed on responders to traumatic events and the
need for the immediate care for those responders, while preserving the integrity of the
investigation, if applicable.
B. Purpose
1. If the officer involved is not injured, he should retire some distance from the scene to
await the arrival of the officer-in-charge of the investigation. This should be done in the
company of a companion officer chosen by the involved officer, such as a supervisor that
is not in the involved officer’s chain of command or an officer of equal rank who was not
a witness to or involved in the incident. It will be the responsibility of the field supervisor
to ensure a companion officer is made available. The purpose of a companion officer is to
serve the involved officer in a supportive role.
2. When the Major Crimes Division supervisor arrives at the scene, he will be briefed by the
field supervisor and, if he deems necessary, the involved officer will report back to the
scene and respond to the needs of the investigation. When the Major Crimes Division
supervisor determines that the involved officer is no longer needed at the scene, the
companion officer will transport him/her to the Major Crimes Division.
3. The companion officer shall:
a) Accompany the involved officer to the Major Crimes Division offices after
release from the scene. The companion officer shall remain with the involved
officer unless the officer desires to be left alone.
b) Be responsible for acting as a calming influence and monitor the involved officer
for signs of critical incident stress or trauma. If signs of trauma or shock are
evident, appropriate medical assistance shall be summoned to the scene and the
on-scene supervisor shall be notified immediately.
4. The companion officer shall take all measures to ensure they do not:
a) Interfere with the preliminary investigation in any manner.
b) Discuss the facts or specifics of the incident with the involved officer or
jeopardize the criminal investigation.
c) Make any statements that infringe on the privacy of the involved officer.
5. The involved officer will refrain from discussing the details of the incident with anyone
except Departmental personnel assigned to the investigation, the Prosecuting Attorney’s
Office, Departmentally-provided and/or personal Psychologist or counselor, the officer’s
private attorney, the officer’s chosen clergy, and the officer’s immediate family.

GENERAL ORDERS G. O. 215 Peer Support Group
6. A designated representative with the F.O.P. may have contact with the involved officer
for the purpose of arranging an attorney retained by them or for assisting the companion
officer with notification and transportation of family members, if necessary.
IV. Peer Support Group (PSG)
A. This Section establishes a Peer Support Group (PSG), which will coordinate the training, response,
and available resources for all personnel.
B. Training
1. The Little Rock Police Department will provide all members of the PSG with training in
Critical Incident Stress Management and Critical Incident Debriefings.
2. The PSG will also meet semi-annually to assess the program and address any changes or
deficiencies in the program.
C. Response
1. In the event of a PSG response, the Peer Support supervisor will be notified.
2. The Peer Support Supervisor will determine the appropriate number of PSG members
and make contact with those members.
a) The Peer Support Supervisor will attempt to utilize PSG members that are on
duty at the time of the incident.
b) If a specific member is requested by the involved responder, the Peer Support

Supervisor will ensure that the responding member is compensated if they are
off-duty at the time of their response.
3. The level of response will be determined by the responding PSG members. Examples of
response types will include:
a) Demobilization
b) Defusing
c) Crisis Management Briefing
d) Critical Incident Stress Debriefing
e) Individual Crisis Intervention
f) Organizational or Family Critical Incident Stress Management or Consultation
g) Follow-up or Referral

G. O. 215 Peer Support Group LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
h) Follow-ups and referrals will be determined by the employee’s supervisor or the

Peer Support Supervisor.
4. The PSG member shall not be compelled to disclose any communication made to the
member by the responder while engaged in a peer support event. However an immediate
supervisor will be notified if: (A.C.A. 16-40-106)
a) The PSG member was an initial responder, witness, or involved in the critical
incident that prompted the PSG activation; or
b) A crime has been committed and the crime is divulged to the certified PSG
member; or
c) A communication reveals the intended commission of a crime or harmful act and

the disclosure is determined to be necessary by the member to protect any person
from a clear, imminent risk of serious mental or physical harm or injury to
prevent a serious threat to the public safety.
5. At the conclusion of any PSG response, the responding members will notify the Peer
Support Supervisor.
V. Employee Resources
A. All personnel shall be provided with the resources necessary to obtain assistance in dealing with
the effects of traumatic events. These resources include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. The responder’s supervisor
2. The Employee Assistance Program (EAP)
3. A departmentally appointed mental health professional/psychologist.
4. The department chaplains.
5. The Peer Support Group
VI. Training
A. The Training Division will ensure all responders receive training in Critical Incident Stress:
1. New employees shall receive training within one year of employment.
2. All other responders shall be conducted on a biannual basis.

GENERAL ORDER
G. O. 300 COMMUNICATIONS CENTER FUNCTIONS

I. Purpose
A. To maintain a working relationship and delineate responsibility between the Little Rock Police
Department Communications Center and the Police Department.
B. To establish procedures for radio communications between field personnel and the
Communications Center, and to identify situations requiring radio contact.
II. Policy
A. The Little Rock Police Department through the Communications Center will provide to the
citizens of Little Rock timely and efficient response to all calls for service, and provide for the
safety of all field personnel.
B. The Communications Center will be manned and operated on a twenty-four hour basis to provide
continuous radio communications and support services to all personnel.
C. A twenty-four hour toll free telephone service to the Communications Center is provided to the
public. The Communications Center is a member of the enhanced 9-1-1 Emergency System.
D. Radio communication is the primary means used by the Communications Center to relay
information to Patrol units, other designated police personnel, fire, State and Federal Emergency
Agencies. Police and Communications Center personnel shall operate City of Little Rock
communications equipment in accordance with procedures and regulations established by the
Federal Communications Commission (FCC).
III. Dispatch Operations
A. The basic function of the Communications Center is to receive, screen and prioritize calls for
service and, subsequently, dispatch the appropriate response in an efficient and coordinated
manner.
B. When receiving information, the Communications Center uses a computer entry process to record
the following minimum information:
1. An incident number;
2. Date and time of request;
3. Name and address of complainant, if possible;
4. Type of incident reported;
5. Location of incident reported;
6. Identification of officers assigned as primary and backup;

GENERAL ORDERS G. O. 300 COMMUNICATIONS CENTER FUNCTIONS
7. Time of dispatch;
8. Time of arrival;
9. Time of return to service; and,
10. Disposition or status of reported incidents.
C. All calls for service received by the Communications Center will be assigned a unique, individual
incident number. These numbers will be consecutive and will begin with the first two
numbers denoting the year and the remaining numbers denoting sequential calls for service.
D. Communications Center personnel shall obtain as much information as possible, on each call for
service. The amount of information necessary will depend on the nature of the call and the status
of the reporting/requesting party, with the purpose of maximizing the responding personnel’s
safety by allowing him/her to anticipate conditions to be encountered at the scene.
E. It is the policy of the Little Rock Police Department that when any call is dispatched to a police
officer, it is intended for the officer to go to the address of the call and talk to the complainant. If
the calling party does not wish to be contacted, the officer assigned the call will be notified of that
fact when dispatched, and will check the area or address for the reported problem.
F. The following types of calls for service require a two-man response (one two-officer unit or two
one-officer units):
1. All felony crimes involving violence against a person or crimes against property which
are in progress;
2. Domestic disturbances (in progress or when all parties are present);
3. Stand-by to prevent a disturbance;
4. Mentally ill persons involved in a disturbance;
5. Suspects armed with any type of weapons;
6. Hold-up or burglar alarms;
7. Residential alarms; and,
8. Prowler calls.
G. A single unit will ordinarily be dispatched to the following calls, unless additional information is
received indicating two officers should be dispatched:
1. Property damage or minor injury accidents;
2. Shoplifter in custody;
3. Injured or ill persons;
4. Fatality or serious injury accidents;
5. Suicides;

G. O. 300 COMMUNICATIONS CENTER FUNCTIONS LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
6. Missing children;
7. Minor fire or ambulance run;
8. Confirmed false alarms;
9. Loud music;
10. Child abuse; and,
11. Intoxicated persons.
H. A back-up unit will not ordinarily be sent on the following calls:
1. Burglary or theft reports;
2. Recovered stolen property;
3. Found property;
4. Assisting a utility or other city service agency;
5. Reports at hospitals;
6. Transporting prisoners;
7. Report of an overdose;
8. Report of a natural death; or,
9. Administrative type calls.
I. The primary assigned officer may cancel the back-up response, should they determine, after
careful appraisal of the situation, that additional assistance is not required.
J. When back-up is requested or required, the officer closest to the location of the call, and able to
respond, shall acknowledge and respond. Another officer may acknowledge a closer location, at
which time the first back-up unit may be canceled by Communications. Any additional units
dispatched on a call are expected to clear the scene as soon as it has been determined that their
presence is no longer needed to deal with the situation.
K. Patrol supervisors may alter these guidelines, as situations dictate, for the safety of the officers.
IV. Supervisory Response
A. In order to assume command, a field supervisor will be notified and will respond to the scene of
any of the following incidents:
1. Bomb threat;
2. Fire involving a street closure or traffic control by multiple officers;
3. Civil disorder (riots, large scale disturbances, etc.);
4. Police personnel involved in a shooting or discharge of a firearm;

5. Officer involved in a traffic accident;
6. Any major investigative scene;
7. Chemical spills;
8. Events involving multiple injuries or deaths or large scale property damage;
9. Tactical situations;
10. Personnel requesting a supervisor; and,
11. Missing children, under the age of twelve, or adults of any age, if the adult is mentally
ill or mentally incompetent and severe weather conditions or other life threatening
circumstances exist, requiring immediate search procedures.
V. Radio Transmissions
A. At least one primary dispatch channel will be responsible for dispatching all calls 24 hours, 7 days
a week. Field personnel will be responsible for monitoring this channel at all times.
B. One secondary channel will be available for transmitting additional information to personnel 24
hours, 7 days a week. Another secondary channel is ordinarily available six days a week from
0630-0200.
1. During “pro-net” incidents, or in cases where the main channel is restricted for
emergency traffic (10-33) or has been restricted by a field supervisor, the secondary
channel will be responsible for dispatching calls. All service requests will be kept to a
minimum.
2. There are three dedicated police dispatch consoles. Any requests to monitor other
channels on special events will require that one of the three consoles be shut down and
used for the additional request.
C. Mobile Data Computers (MDC), when available, should be used for requesting additional
information from ACIC/NCIC, rather than requesting this information from a secondary channel.
D. Members of this department shall utilize the radio system/mobile data computer (MDC) only for
the transmission of police related messages, and will strive to keep all messages as professional,
concise, and complete as possible. At no time will members of the department misuse or disrupt
the radio system by transmitting unauthorized or personal messages.
E. The radio codes that should be utilized by members of the department, when transmitting over the
radio system, are found at the end of this Order.
VI. Responsibilities in Radio Transmissions
A. Operations are more efficient and personnel safety is enhanced when the Communications Center,
supervisors, and other personnel know the status of units, their location, the nature of incident, and
developments in their investigation.

B. Prior to going on-shift, all field personnel shall enter their name, employee number, portable radio
identifier number, district or call sign information and vehicle information, if appropriate, into the
Computer Aided Dispatch System. This may be accomplished by using the Mobile Data
Computer or the desktop Computer Aided Dispatch terminal. There are desktop terminals located
in all field operations areas. Instruction sheets for entering unit and equipment information are
located near the terminal.
1. There are special units who remain in the Computer Aided Dispatch system at all times.
These units need only advise their availability for assignment or that they have been
given a special assignment and are not available for assignment.
2. Field personnel shall not contact the Communications Center, either by telephone or a
secondary channel, to have a dispatcher enter their required information. The only time
Communications Center personnel shall be allowed to receive unit information is when
the Mobile Data Computer or the desktop Computer Aided Dispatch terminal is not
functioning.
3. Information about Mobile Data Computer or Computer Aided Dispatch terminal

malfunctions or outages shall be documented by Communications Center supervisory
personnel and forwarded to the Computer Aided Dispatch Administrator for immediate
resolution.
4. The above information shall also be communicated to the Technology Support Section
the next business day to ensure resolution.
C. When the unit information has been entered, field personnel shall be available for assignment,
unless they advise the Communications Center that they have been given an assignment or they
are out-of-service for a specific reason.
D. Personnel assigned to field operations shall maintain contact with the Communications Center at
all times during their tour of duty, and are required to carry a portable radio with them at all times,
while away from their vehicle, unless unusual circumstances exist or with approval of a
supervisor.
1. Personnel shall advise Communications of their status in the following situations:
a) When going in-service;
b) When going out of service at end of shift;
c) Upon arrival at calls for service;
d) Upon clearing from calls for service;
e) When checking in and out from breaks;
f) When engaged in any activity affecting availability to handle calls for service;
g) When making arrests; and,
h) When transporting prisoners or other persons.
2. Personnel will use status buttons, mobile data computer codes, or voice communications
to advise the communications center of the above statuses.

3. Personnel shall reply promptly with their call sign and location when called via radio by
the Communications Center or field supervisors.
4. When stopping vehicles, officers shall provide Communications with the following
information:
a) Tag number and state;
b) Location of the stop;
c) Description of vehicle, make, color, type; and,
d) Other appropriate information.
5. When contacting suspects and/or suspicious persons (other than dispatched

complainants), officers shall provide Communications with the following information:
a) Location;
b) Description of person(s); and,
c) Reason for contact (if known).
6. Personnel shall provide the Communications Center with specific information

concerning any “hit” received from MDC inquiries.
E. An alert tone is given by the Communications Center, prior to a Code 10-33/10-63 call, to warn all
personnel that an emergency situation is about to be broadcasted. Field personnel will not
broadcast any further radio transmissions (except for other emergency traffic) until the emergency
situation has subsided.
1. Personnel responding to an emergency situation shall use status buttons or MDC

computer codes.
2. Personnel not involved in the emergency situation shall switch to a secondary channel
designated by Communications for dispatch purposes.
VII. Emergency Status Button Activation
A. All portable hand held radios and all vehicle mounted mobile radios are equipped with an
emergency status button. The purposeful activation of an emergency status button signifies that an
emergency situation requiring immediate response exists.
1. The radio operator receiving the emergency status button activation will:
a) Advise all units on that channel of the activation and broadcast the call sign or
radio ID of the unit with the activation, and the location the unit is checked out
at. The channel will be restricted for the emergency activation and response;
b) Attempt to call the unit and ascertain the nature of the emergency or additional
information, and;
c) The remaining active police dispatch and or secondary channel(s) will also
broadcast the emergency status activation and broadcast the call sign or radio
ID of the unit with the activation, and the location the unit is checked out at.

2. A police supervisor will acknowledge the emergency status activation and monitor the
police response.
a) If the unit activating the emergency response was not checked out at a known
location and does not respond to verbal requests for their location, the police
supervisor will be responsible for directing the efforts to identify and locate the
unit with the emergency activation.
VIII. Unit Identifiers
A. Radio identification call numbers shall be made from a combination of designators described
below:
1. Field Services Division - Units shall be identified by shift (1, 2, and 3), and district
assigned. (Example: 2X43 designates the second shift, district 43 unit; 2Y43 designates
second shift, secondary unit assigned to district 43.)
a) COPP/River Market units shall be identified as “Henry” units, with a numerical

identifier assigned to each person. (Example H501.)
b) Mobile units shall be identified as “Zebra” units, with a numerical identifier

assigned to each person. (Example Z40.)
c) Traffic Services units shall be identified as “Mary” units, with a numerical

identifier assigned to each person. (Example M48.)
d) START units shall be identified as “Sam” units, with a numerical identifier

assigned to each person. (Example S84).
e) Canine units shall be identified as “King” units, with a numerical identifier

assigned to each person. (Example K46.)
2. Major Crimes Division - Units shall be identified as “David” units, with a numerical
identifier assigned to each person. (Example D900.)
3. Special Investigations Division
a) All narcotics units shall be identified as “Nora” units, with a numerical

identifier assigned to each person. (Example N62.)
b) Intelligence units shall be identified as “Ocean” units, with a numerical

identifier assigned to each person. (Example O44.)
c) Vice units shall be identified as “Victor” units, with a numerical identifier

assigned to each person. (Example V34.)
d) SWAT units shall be identified as “Tac” units, with a numerical identifier

assigned to each person. (Example Tac 45.)
4. Administration
a) All Administrative units shall be identified as “Adam” units, with a numerical

identifier assigned to each person. (Example A44.)

5. Headquarters Division
a) Airport units shall be identified as “Paul” units, with a numerical identifier

assigned to each person. (Example P55.)
b) Desk Officers, Crime Scene Search Personnel, and Vehicle Control Personnel
shall all be identified as “Robert” units, with numerical identifier assigned each
person. (Example R30.)
c) All Warrant units shall be identified as “William” units, with a numerical

identifier assigned to each person. (Example W30.)
6. Training Division - Training units shall be identified as “Edward” units, with a

numerical identifier assigned to each person. (Example E31.)
7. Patrol supervisors - All patrol supervisors shall be identified as “Lincoln” units, with a
numerical identifier assigned to each supervisor. (Example L35.)
B. All Divisions shall ensure that the Communication Center is supplied with a duty roster of all field
personnel, at the beginning of their tour of duty. This will include a designation of the officer in
charge.
C. The Professional Standards Section will be responsible for the updating and revisions of the
master list of all assigned radio identification call numbers.
IX. Access to Communications Center
A. The capability to maintain communications in all emergency situations dictates that security
measures be implemented to protect communications personnel, facilities, and equipment.
B. The Communications Center shall be secured at all times.
C. Access to the Communications Center shall be limited to:
1. Communication Center personnel;
2. Police and Fire supervisory personnel;
3. Administrative personnel; and,
4. Persons granted access by a Communications Center supervisor to conduct official

business. Those granted access are required to log time in/out and document the nature
of their business.
D. Persons who have entered the Communications Center, shall leave promptly upon completion of
their business. Personnel shall not be permitted access to the Communications Center for anything
other than business.
E. In the event that the Communications Center building is threatened, either through man-made or
natural disasters, the on-duty downtown shift supervisor shall assign personnel, as necessary, to
provide security to the Center.

X. Security of Communication Center Tapes
A. All incoming telephone lines and radio transmissions to the Communications Center shall be
recorded and have the capability for immediate playback. All original tapes shall be retained
securely by the Communications Center.
B. These recordings shall be maintained for a period of not less than thirty (30) days from the date of
the recording.
C. Tape review procedures:
1. Requests to review or obtain a copy of Communication Center/TRU tapes shall be made

in writing to an employee’s immediate supervisor. Requests shall include date and
approximate time of the transmission and the part of the transmission required;
2. Upon approval, the request shall be forwarded to the Communication Center Supervisor;
3. Only designated Communication Center personnel are authorized to playback tapes;
4. Anytime a tape is taken from storage for review or copying it shall be logged in and out,
with the time in/out, reason, and employee responsible for the tape, and;
5. Should copies of a tape be required, they shall be recorded on a cassette from the
original.
D. If an original tape is required for criminal prosecution, the tape will be logged out to the employee
by the Communications Center Supervisor and stored in accordance with General Orders.

GENERAL ORDER
G. O. 301 INCIDENT REPORTS, CODE CALLS AND FIELD INTERVIEW CARDS

I. Purpose
A. The purpose of this General Order is to establish a procedure governing the manner in which this
Department responds to requests for service, which are outside the conventional realm of police
incidents; to reduce the number of Incident Reports which must be processed and entered into the
Records Information Management System; and to reduce the amount of time field units must
commit to the service of non-police type incidents.
B. The Records Section Supervisor will ensure that all incident numbers assigned by Departmental
computer systems have a report in the Records Management System, as authorized by this Order,
within ten days of the number having been generated.
II. Definitions and Terms
A. Incident Report - The initial report used to officially record a police incident. (Refers only to the
report form itself, not to the classification of incident type).
B. Abbreviated Incident Report – A report used to record all coded calls. This is a standard incident
report form with only the incident number, unit assigned, call date, call time, type of call, date of
incident, time of incident, location of incident, district, incident/offense type, and narrative
completed.
C. Supplement Report - The report used to provide additional information concerning any police
incident wherein an Incident Report was previously filed. Supplement Forms (Forms A and B)
may also be used to add additional suspects, victims, person reporting, etc., to the original report
when necessary. Supplement reports never receive a new incident number, but always utilize the
incident number from the original Incident Report.
D. Police Incidents - Incidents wherein there is the allegation of or evidence suggesting, the
commission or attempted commission of a criminal offense by any party, whether the remedy is
further police investigation or civilian warrant action. Police incidents include, but are not limited
to:
1. Violations or attempted violations of the laws of the State of Arkansas, United States, or
ordinances of the City of Little Rock;
2. Suspected or potential criminal activity such as prowlers and suspicious persons;
3. Incidents in which an officer takes a person into limited or temporary custody, or detains
a person for informational or investigative purposes, either upon observation or as a result
of a citizen’s call for service;
GENERAL ORDER 301 -1 LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT

GENERAL ORDERS G. O. 301 INCIDENT REPORTS
4. Incidents where an officer seizes, recovers, impounds, or otherwise assumes control or

custody of a vehicle, currency, or other property;
5. Incidents alleging criminal offenses, domestic violence or disturbances, even when the
victim indicates no desire to prosecute; and,
6. Investigation of motor vehicle traffic accidents pursuant to state statutes and City
ordinances.
E. Non-Police Incidents - Incidents which do not pertain to a distinct criminal offense, or attempt,
and which do not require further police action or follow-up; or incidents which do not lend
themselves to criminal prosecutions or property seizures. Such incidents include, but are not
limited to:
1. Street obstructions or traffic signal obstructions and failures;
2. Parking or traffic violations, blocked alleys and drives, and stalled autos (where no
vehicular impound is likely);
3. Assistance to elderly or handicapped persons;
4. Fireworks, barking dogs, or minor noise complaints;
5. Messages;
6. Wholly civil matters; and,
7. Informational calls which do not include or develop criminal intelligence.
F. Code Calls - Dispatched assignments or incidents discovered in the field will require the
completion of an Abbreviated Incident Report.
III. Procedure
A. General Provisions
1. Officers will respond to all dispatched or otherwise encountered requests for service. All
requests for service will be properly investigated to determine whether the request
constitutes a police incident (Incident Report required) or a code call (Abbreviated
Incident Report required). In cases where there is any doubt as to whether a situation is to
be classified as a police incident or a non-police incident, an Incident Report shall be
written.
2. All requests for police service and employee initiated activity will be documented by the
Communications Center in the CAD system and by the assigned employee in the form of
an Incident Report or Abbreviated Incident Report. Incidents to be documented will
include:
a) Citizen reports of crime;
b) Citizen complaints;

G. O. 301 INCIDENT REPORTS LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
c) Incidents resulting in an employee being dispatched or assigned;
d) Criminal and non-criminal cases initiated by law enforcement employees; and,
e) Incidents involving arrests, citations, or summonses.
3. An Incident Report will be generated whenever a citizen specifically requests a report.
B. Police Incidents
1. Incident Reports must be prepared for all police incidents.
2. The specific criminal offense(s) addressed by the report shall be placed in the
“Incident/Offense Type” space on the Incident Report.
3. Incidents meeting the following listed criteria shall have the appropriate category
indicated by checking the corresponding section on the Incident Report.
a) “Car Jacking” shall be indicated when an incident involves the threat or use of
force against an occupant of a motor vehicle for the purpose of facilitating the
motor vehicle theft.
b) “Drive-By” shall be indicated when an incident involves the illegal discharge of

any firearm from a motor vehicle at any person, group of persons, motor vehicle,
or occupiable structure, whether or not a person was injured or a structure or
vehicle damaged.
c) “Gang Related” shall be indicated when an incident reasonably appears to be the

result of criminal street gang activity.
(1) A “criminal street gang” shall be defined as any ongoing organization,

association, or group of three or more persons, whether formal or
informal, having as one of its primary activities the commission of one
or more criminal acts, involving the sale, manufacture, or delivery of a
controlled substance or the use of force, violence, or intimidation
against any person, and which has a common name or common
identifying sign or symbol, whose members individually or collectively
engage in or have engaged in a pattern of criminal gang activity.
(2) The gang name shall be noted in the narrative of the report when an
incident involves a criminal street gang identified by an officer, victim
or witness.
d) “Hate Crime” shall be indicated when an incident involves a criminal offense

committed against a person or property which is motivated, in whole or in part,
by the offender’s bias against an individual’s race, religion, ethnic/national
origin group, disability, or sexual orientation.
(1) “Bias” shall mean a pre-formed, negative opinion or attitude toward a

group of persons, based on their race, religion, ethnicity/national origin,
disability, or sexual orientation.

(2) Even if the offender was mistaken in his/her perception that the victim
was a member of the group he or she was acting against, the offense is
still a hate crime because the offender was motivated by bias against
the group.
e) “Mentally Afflicted” shall be indicated when an officer encounters or responds

to an incident involving a person reasonably believed to be suffering from a
mental illness or other condition including suicide threats, amnesia, or
dementia.
4. All persons, evidence and/or property involved will be identified on the Incident Report
in the appropriate spaces. The “Details of Information” shall include all statements and/or
a narrative description of the incident.
a) Corresponding incident numbers shall be placed on any arrest report, criminal or

traffic citation, or warrant affidavit when a report is written.
b) Officers will place the Incident Report number in the designated space on each
page of the Incident Report.
5. Supplement Reports will not be used to report original information, statements, or

observations. Both Offense Reports and Supplement Reports are accessible to the public.
Information which satisfies the definition of “Work Product” under the Arkansas Rules of
Criminal Procedure Rule 17.5 (a) shall be recorded on an Officers Report Form and
forwarded to the appropriate investigative supervisor on the same day the Offense Report
is filed.
6. Upon conclusion of a police incident, officers shall return to service in the standard
manner.
7. Traffic accident reports will be prepared, as specified, by Departmental policy and/or

Divisional Operating Procedures.
8. Field Interview Cards will not be used in lieu of Incident Reports in police incidents, such
as suspicious persons’ calls and prowlers.
9. Classification of an incident as “Information” shall be used sparingly and with approval

of a supervisor. Whenever possible, a specific incident type will be used, as determined
by the Little Rock Police Department “Incident Report Classification Manual” (available
to all supervisors).
C. Identity Theft Reports
1. Identity theft is the unauthorized use of an individual’s personal identifying information

to create, obtain, or open a credit account, debit account, or other financial resource.
2. Identifying information includes, but is not limited to:
a) Social security numbers,
b) Driver’s license numbers,

c) Checking account numbers,
d) Savings account numbers,
e) Credit card numbers,
f) Debit card numbers,
g) Personal identification numbers,
h) Electronic identification numbers,
i) Digital signatures; and,
j) Any other numbers or information that can be used to access a person’s financial
resources.
D. Procedures for Taking Identity Theft Reports
1. Reports of identity theft can be taken by a patrol officer or by the telephone reporting
unit, depending on the circumstances surrounding the report.
2. Identity theft reports that do not occur within the jurisdictional boundaries of the City of
Little Rock will be taken. These reports will be titled, “Outside Identity Theft”.
3. Identity theft reports will be documented utilizing the agency standardized incident
report.
4. Victims will be encouraged to complete an Identification (ID) Theft Affidavit which can
be located on the Arkansas Attorney General’s website and the Federal Trade
Commission (FTC) website.
5. The employee taking the report will be responsible for providing the website address to
the Federal Trade Commission, which is: www.ftc.gov. The Federal Trade Commission
provides the most comprehensive information for victims regarding identity theft. The
website refers victims of this crime to the appropriate resources(s), to include:
a) Information for contacting credit reporting agencies;
b) How to place fraud alerts on their credit report; and,
c) Additional actions the victim needs to take in recording important information

related to the crime.
6. The employee taking the report will inform the victim on how to obtain a copy of the
report.
7. The Financial Crimes Unit will be responsible for the following:

a) Coordinating and sharing information with other agencies as needed to further

the successful prosecution of identity theft crimes.
b) Providing identity theft presentations/information when requested.

Presentations given by FCU personnel related to identity theft will be included
in the Unit’s monthly report.
c) Ensure that identity theft resources from the Federal Trade Commission are
available in the lobby of the Financial Crimes Unit.
E. Code Calls
1. A supervisor may direct an officer to prepare an Incident Report pertaining to any

incident in the Code Call categories whenever, in the supervisor’s opinion, such is
warranted or prudent. Nothing in this General Order shall be interpreted as prohibiting
any officer from preparing an Incident Report recording any incident where the officer
deems it appropriate.
2. Upon completion of an assignment, wherein no Incident Report is required, officers will

complete an Abbreviated Incident Report using one of the following applicable codes:
a) Code F - Fire Calls (Assistance to the Fire Department where there is no

indication of arson or any other criminal offense);
b) Code L - Complainant not located;
c) Code N - Non-police incidents (as defined above);
d) Code P - Prisoner transfers or transports;
e) Code S - Supplement report was generated;
f) Code U – False or unfounded call; or,
g) Code Z - False alarms only (this shall include all false alarms, residential or
business, fire, burglary, robbery or other, whether the cause is accidental,
weather-related, unknown, or the result of a malfunction).
F. Incident Reports
1. Generally, criminal offenses involve only one victim (a person or a business). However,
when a continuing incident involving multiple offenses and victims occur, these incidents
will be documented on one Incident Report. Employees should be aware that the concept
of time and place is based on the premise that if one or more crimes was committed by
the same person or group of persons and the time and space intervals separating them
were insignificant, all of the involved crimes shall be considered a single incident. In
these cases, all offenses, victims, and suspects shall be included on a single Incident
Report.

a) Examples of incidents where there may be multiple victims include, but are not
limited to, hotel or motel break ins where several rooms were entered, mini
storage units where numerous units were entered, or vehicle breaking and
entering where several vehicles have been broken into during a continuing
incident.
b) The only exception to this rule is burglary. All burglaries will be on separate
Incident Reports.
2. When an officer responds to any incident during which a vehicle was also stolen, the
officer shall prepare only one report and shall list the vehicle as stolen on this report. A
complete description of the vehicle shall be included in the Incident Report. All Incident
Reports detailing the theft of a motor vehicle shall immediately, upon completion, be
reviewed for approval by a supervisor, taken to Communications for data entry, and
forwarded to the Auto Theft Unit.
3. Employees shall submit all Incident Reports to supervisory personnel at or before the end
of their tour of duty, during which the information contained in the report was received.
4. No employee shall be dismissed from his duty assignment until all reports they have
prepared have been accepted and approved by a supervisor.
5. Supervisors shall indicate their approval of Incident Reports by signing the report in the
appropriate space.
6. Supervisors shall ensure that all Incident Reports, along with a LRPD Report Submission
Form, are forwarded to the Desk Officer within three (3) hours after each shift change.
7. Records Division data entry clerks shall monitor all reports, and those containing errors
or omissions shall be forwarded to the Records Section Supervisor, who shall ensure that
the report is corrected in a timely manner and returned for data entry.
a) When a police report has been identified as needing additional information

and/or correction by Records Division personnel, the entire document will be
attached to a Records Correction Report, scanned and emailed, as an attachment
to the Warrant Sergeant for his/her review. Before the end of his/her tour of duty
the Warrant Sergeant or his designee will review the documents and forward
them via email to the reporting employee’s chain-of-command. The employee’s
chain-of-command shall review the document, acknowledge receipt of the email
and ensure that the employee is notified of the need for correction and/or
additions. The supervisor in charge of the employee shall notify him/her of the
needed change or addition. The time and date of notification will be documented
by the supervisor via email to the Warrant Sergeant or his/her designee.
b) If the employee is not available due to vacation, military leave, or other type of
leave, the supervisor will notify the Warrant Sergeant via email of the
circumstance and their expected date of return. If more than one (1) day has
lapsed prior to the employee being notified, the employee shall be directed to
immediately respond to the Records Section to rectify the report.

c) In the event that the Department’s email is not operational, the Warrant Sergeant
will contact the officer’s chain-of-command via telephone and will fax a copy of
the report to the contacted supervisor. Notifications shall be made by telephone
if the email server is down for an extended period of time.
d) When an officer is notified that a report they created is in need of a correction,

the officer will respond with the necessary information to the Records Section
and correct the report on their next duty day. In some instances the officer will
be directed to immediately respond to correct the report. Original reports will
not be removed from the Police Headquarters Building.
G. TraCS Accident Reports
1. The Little Rock Police Department will utilize TraCS Software for the reporting of all
accidents investigated by members of the Police Department. The employee responsible
for investigating and processing the motor vehicle accident will be responsible for
completing the appropriate report. TraCS Software includes the following forms that
will be utilized for reporting accidents investigated by LRPD:
a) Motor Vehicle Crash Report Form (MVCR). This form will be utilized to report
all accidents involving an injury to any person, DWI, city vehicles, damages
greater than $1000.00, and anytime a citizen requests.
b) TraCS Incident Report Form (IRF). This form will be utilized to report minor
accidents not involving injury or damages greater than $1000.00. This report
may also be used at the direction of a shift commander for reporting weather
related accidents during inclement weather.
c) Arkansas Vehicle/Animal Crash Report Form (ARVACR). This form will be

utilized to report minor accidents involving a single vehicle and animal.
d) In the event an officer is unsure of which form to use, he will contact an on duty
supervisor.
2. When utilizing TraCS Software, officers will transmit reports for review as soon as the
report is completed. Officers will not hold reports until the end of their shift.
3. Patrol supervisors will check for completed accident reports at least twice during their
shift in order to ensure reports are processed in a timely fashion. Reports will be
reviewed and either “accepted” or “rejected”. Supervisors will notify officers of any
rejected reports.
4. Officers not assigned to patrol who complete an accident report will immediately notify
an on duty supervisor in their division in order to have the report approved. If there is not
an on-duty supervisor in their division, they will notify the nearest on duty patrol
supervisor in order to have the report reviewed.
5. In the event of a significant system failure, an on duty shift commander may authorize the
use of paper reports for the reporting of accidents. This should only be done in exigent
circumstances and only for a limited time period. Failure of a single computer will not be
cause for use of paper reports.

6. Officers will utilize TraCS Software in accordance with Department training and will not
attempt to manipulate the software/hardware in any other manner.
7. Shift Commanders will review the TraCS Database daily to ensure reports are being
reviewed and placed in an “Accepted” status in a timely fashion. As a general rule,
reports should be in an “Accepted” status no later than four hours after the time of the
accident.
H. Field Interview Cards
1. Field Interview Cards are designed to provide documentation regarding the activity,
appearance and bearing, or specific location of persons or vehicles, under circumstances
which do not constitute a Police Incident requiring an Incident Report, but which, in an
officer’s professional judgment, are noteworthy. Incident numbers must be obtained for
Field Interview Cards with all persons and information related to a single event included
under an individual incident number.
2. Completed Field Interview Cards shall be reviewed by supervisors in the same manner as
Incident Reports, and shall be forwarded directly to the Crime Analyst assigned to the
appropriate Field Services Division.
3. The Crime Analysis Unit will be responsible for Field Interview data entry into the
Records Information Management System. After entry into the system, Field Interview
Cards will be disposed of in a secure manner.
4. The Crime Analysis Unit shall be responsible for the analysis of Field Interview Card
data, and will provide follow-up information and reports to operational units, as
requested.
I. Violent Gang and Terrorist Organization Files
1. The Violent Gang and Terrorist Organization File (VGTOF) has been designed to
provide identifying information concerning violent gangs, members of these gangs,
terrorist organizations, and members of these organizations to law enforcement
personnel. This is a national database, which is maintained by the Federal Bureau of
Investigations and is accessible by local law enforcement personnel.
2. Entry into the VGTOF system does not in and of itself prove gang membership, but it
does serve to alert the officer to a potential source of problems, and should be used in
concert with other information to justify appropriate courses of action.
3. In order for a person to be entered into the N.C.I.C. VGTOF system, that person must
meet the established criteria for gang membership. A gang must:
a) Be an ongoing organization, association, or group of three (3) or more persons,

and,

b) The group must have a common interest and/or activity characterized by the
commission of or involvement in a pattern of criminal or delinquent conduct.
Criminal or delinquent conduct includes narcotics distribution, firearms or
explosives violations, murder, extortion, obstruction of justice and any violent
offense or conduct of a juvenile, which would be a crime if committed by an
adult.
4. Listed below are the N.C.I.C. criteria for entry into the VGTOF system. Of the below
listed criteria, only category “A” will stand alone and allow for entry into the VGTOF
system. For the remaining categories, two and only two categories must be satisfied.
Officers should detail, in the narrative section, what criteria the person meets in order for
that person to be entered as a gang member. For example, if category “B” is used,
identify, as accurately as possible, the informant. For area, (category “D”), be as specific
as to the area or house location, if appropriate. If accompanied by a known gang member,
identify that member. If self admitted gang membership, what admissions were made?
For category “A”, include the A.D.R. number on the front of the entry card and the
charges in the narrative.
5. The criteria for entry are as follows:
a) Self admitted gang membership at time of arrest or incarceration.
b) Identified as a gang member by a reliable informant.
c) Corroborative identification as a gang member by an informant or individual of

unknown reliability.
d) Frequents a documented gang area, associates with known gang members,

and/or effects gang dress, hand signals, tattoos or symbols.
e) Has been arrested with known gang members for offenses consistent with gang
activity.
f) Self admitted gang membership at any time other than arrest or incarceration.
6. The procedures for entering a person into the VGTOF database are as follows:
a) A 4x6 LRPD VGTOF Entry Card is available to all divisions. As officers come
into contact with persons who fit the N.C.I.C. entry criteria, the officer will fill
out the VGTOF Entry Card and forward it to the Special Investigations Division
(SID).
b) Special Investigations Division Intelligence Detectives will confirm that the

information contained on the card fits the N.C.I.C. criteria for entry into the
VGTOF system. Those cards which meet entry criteria shall be forwarded to the
Technology Support Lieutenant for entry into the VGTOF system.
c) Once the entry is made, the assigned NIC number shall be recorded on the card
and the original card shall be returned to the Special Investigations Division for
secure storage.

d) The Information Systems Coordinator shall retain a copy of each card for annual
N.C.I.C. audit purposes. These copies shall be maintained securely with limited
access.
7. Officers who have a Mobile Data Computer (MDC) will be able to query the VGTOF file
through the Query Warrant (QW) and Query Vehicle (QV) transactions. VGTOF
information is cross referenced to these files through N.C.I.C. transactions. The gang
membership information will be paged, after any warrant information, missing juvenile
and general operator information, as a message from N.C.I.C. Officers are cautioned to
thoroughly read the information received, in order to avoid confusion as to the content of
the response, as the entry is not based on certifiable identification information
(fingerprints). Officers should utilize the data as information only. [CALEA 41.3.7]
8. Officers who do not have a Mobile Data Computer can contact the secondary channel
operator and request a warrant or vehicle check. The VGTOF system includes an
automated cross search function. When a radio operator receives an acknowledgment
from N.C.I.C. that the person in question may have been entered as a gang member, the
radio operator shall advise the officer of “10-35” (Confidential) traffic. The officer
requesting the information should step away from any civilians and then notify
Communications that he is ready to copy “10-35” traffic. The officer will be advised of
all pertinent information concerning the response. Other officers, who may also be on the
secondary channel where the operator has advised that “10-35” traffic is to follow, should
take steps to ensure that the information will not be heard by non-law enforcement
personnel. Officers who come into contact with persons already in the VGTOF system
should fill out another VGTOF Entry Card and list in the narrative that the subject is
already entered into the VGTOF system. This additional card will be submitted as
supplemental information to the original entry. After an officer has completed the
VGTOF card, this report shall be submitted in the same manner as other reports. The
supervisor, receiving the VGTOF card, should ensure the information is as complete as
possible and forward the VGTOF card to the Special Investigations Division, via the SID
mail slot. The Intelligence Sergeant will ensure that these cards are retrieved on a daily
basis.
9. Because VGTOF information is based, in part, on investigative information, not

previously subject to independent judicial review, strict adherence to policy concerning
the security, use and dissemination of VGTOF information, is mandatory. VGTOF
information is exclusively for the use of criminal justice agencies for criminal justice
purposes ONLY. At no time shall VGTOF information be disseminated, directly or
indirectly, to any non-criminal justice agency or to any civilian.
10. Officers receiving a positive response from the VGTOF system should keep in mind that
information contained in the system does not furnish grounds for the search or seizure of
any individual, vehicle, or dwelling. The following warning appears at the beginning of
each response: “Standing alone, NCIC Violent Gang and Terrorist Organization File
information does not furnish grounds for the search or seizure of any individual, vehicle
or dwelling. The information contained in the file is for information and officer safety. At
no time should any officer take any law enforcement action based solely on a positive
response from the VGTOF system.”

11. Officers should include as much identifying information as possible about the person,
especially drivers license numbers, social security numbers, complete name, to include
middle name, scars, marks or tattoos and their description. If a Police Incident or arrest is
part of the contact, enter the Incident or ADR number for additional confirmation of
identity. Officers should include in the narrative of the VGTOF card as much detail as
possible to assist the Intelligence Detectives in positively identifying the gang affiliation
and the reason the individual should be included in the VGTOF system.
J. Incident Report Direct Entry (IRDE) System
1. The Incident Report Direct Entry (IRDE) System is the preferred method of completing
all incident reports and abbreviated incident reports. The IRDE System is a web based
computer application that gives officers the ability to complete their report and
supervisors the ability to approve reports from any secure intranet connection.
2. The IRDE System utilizes information from the Computer Aided Dispatch System to
auto populate basic information in the reports. Reports are available to be completed by
all officers assigned to the incident through the CAD System. Once the officer assigned
to complete the report initiates the entry, the report is removed from the other assigned
officer’s availability list.
3. Once a report has been completed, the officer writing the report will place the report in
“Complete” status, and electronically sign the report.
4. Supervisors will review all reports in “Complete” status at least twice per shift, and
immediately prior to the end of the officer’s tour of duty. Supervisors will either
“Reject” or “Approve” all completed reports. Reports that are approved will be
electronically signed and transferred to the mainframe system within two minutes of
approval. Reports that are “Rejected” will remain in the IRDE System until corrections
are made by the officer assigned to complete the report.
a) If a report is “Rejected” by a supervisor, that supervisor will enter the rejection

reason in the IRDE System. Officers correcting the “Rejected” reports will be
able to see the rejection reason prior to making corrections.
b) Supervisors will notify an officer that a report has been “Rejected” after the
supervisor determines the need to reject the report.

G. O. 302 OPERATION OF DEPARTMENTAL VEHICLES LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
G. O. 302 OPERATION OF DEPARTMENTAL VEHICLES

I. Emergency Driving - General (Non-Pursuit Situations)
A. The Police Department’s primary concern in emergency driving situations is the protection of the
lives and safety of all citizens and officers. During emergency driving situations, officers will
operate their vehicles with extreme caution and in compliance with A.C.A. § 27-51-204, which
requires that the emergency light bar and siren be activated on authorized emergency vehicles.
Driving under emergency conditions does not relieve the officer from the duty to drive with due
regard for the safety of all persons, nor will these provisions protect the driver from the
consequences of his disregard for the safety of others.
1. Definition of emergency driving (non-pursuit situations) – Emergency driving is defined

as the operation of an authorized emergency vehicle (emergency lights and siren in
operation) by a police officer in response to a life threatening situation or a violent crime
in progress, using due regard for the safety of others.
2. Definition of marked police vehicle - A marked police vehicle is defined as a

conspicuously marked patrol car or motorcycle, readily identified as a Little Rock Police
Department vehicle. A marked Little Rock Police Department vehicle will have exterior-
mounted emergency blue lights and siren, reflective striping, lettering, and City or Police
shield. The Little Rock Police Department’s name and emergency number will be on all
marked patrol cars.
3. Definition of an unmarked police vehicle - An unmarked police vehicle is defined as a

vehicle that is not distinctly identified as a Little Rock Police Department vehicle.
4. Definition of special purpose vehicle- a vehicle used because of considerations of

weather, terrain, or the need for inconspicuous appearance, quietness, storage
transportation and/or special operational needs. Special purpose vehicles include, but are
not limited to: conveyances used for the transportation of departmental owned animals
and/or specialized equipment, mobile command posts, all-terrain vehicles (ATV’s),
airport vehicles, Traffic Safety vehicles, motorcycles and bicycles.
B. The decision to drive under emergency conditions will be discretionary with each individual
officer, based on the following considerations:
1. When deciding to initiate or continue driving under emergency conditions, officers will
consider such factors as traffic volume, time of day, potential hazard, and safety to
themselves and the public.
2. Emergency responses shall be made only when the call involves a life threatening
situation or a violent crime in progress.
3. Officers will have sufficient information to justify the decision to drive under emergency
conditions.

GENERAL ORDERS G. O. 302 OPERATION OF DEPARTMENTAL VEHICLES
4. Officers, responding to an “officer needs assistance” type call, must bear in mind that
even though a rapid response is important, they must arrive at the scene safely in order to
be of assistance. (Officers who are operating in emergency status should not operate the
emergency flashers, as operation of emergency flashers will make the turn signals
inoperative.)
C. Officers, upon deciding to make an emergency response to any situation, will immediately notify
Communications of their decision.
1. All officers, when making an emergency response, will notify Communications of such by
using the term “Code Three”. This will indicate that the officer will be employing
emergency equipment (emergency blue lights and siren).
2. All Officers, upon indicating a “Code Three” response, shall immediately provide
communications with sufficient information regarding their need for an emergency
response, thereby allowing the appropriate patrol supervisor to further evaluate the
necessity and safety of such an action.
3. A Supervisor will override the officer’s decision to make an emergency (Code Three)
response if, in their judgment, it is not warranted or cannot be done safely. The Sergeant
of the officer making an emergency response will normally be responsible for making this
determination.
D. No officer will operate a police vehicle in emergency (Code Three) status if it is occupied by any
passengers, other than another police officer or a person who has signed a release or waiver of
liability.
E. Police vehicles without emergency lights and sirens will not make emergency (Code Three)
responses or participate in pursuits.
F. Special purpose vehicles, excluding motorcycles and canine vehicles shall not be used in pursuits
or emergency (Code Three) responses. Motorcycles will follow the guidelines set forth in Section
II of this General Order, canine vehicles may engage as all other marked units do in pursuit
situations.
G. Motorcycles may conduct emergency (Code Three) responses, but are prohibited from becoming
involved in an active pursuit. If a motorcycle initiates a pursuit, it will yield to other authorized
Departmental vehicles as soon as practical. They will serve as a support unit and provide
assistance to the pursuing units if needed, once the pursuit is concluded.
H. Escorts
1. Non-emergency escorts involve an officer assisting a party to a specific location, during

which all motor vehicle laws are obeyed, both by the officer and escorted party. Non-
emergency escorts may be performed by a unit:
a) Upon notification to Communications, if the escort does not leave the officer's
assigned area of responsibility; or,
b) Upon approval from a supervisor, if the escort leaves the officer's assigned area
of responsibility.
GENERAL ORDER 302 - 2 LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT

2. Emergency escorts involve an officer or officers assisting a party or vehicle to a specific

location, during which motor vehicle laws may be disregarded. Emergency escorts will
only be performed with the prior authorization of a supervisor. Emergency escorts
include, but are not limited to:
a) Dignitaries;
b) Public Officials;
c) Funerals; and,
d) Emergency vehicles.
3. Emergency escorts of medical patients shall only be performed in an articulable life-

threatening situation, and then with authorization from a supervisor.
4. Emergency escorts of over-size loads, hazardous cargo, parades and other such
circumstances shall only be performed with the prior authorization of the City of Little
Rock Traffic Engineer and Department Traffic Services Commander.
5. When any escort is performed, the safety of all persons involved shall be of utmost
importance. Department procedures guiding emergency driving shall be adhered to.
6. Officers shall not escort private vehicles in an emergency response mode.
J. While responding to incidents involving a medical emergency, officers may respond in emergency
status if it is known that the emergency medical services are holding short of the scene until police
arrive. In these instances, responding officers will advise a supervisor that they are responding in
emergency status by announcing “Code 3 for Medical” on the radio. Only officers assigned to the
incident may respond in emergency status.
II. Pursuit Driving - General
A. The Police Department’s primary concern in pursuit situations is the protection of the lives and
safety of all citizens and officers. The operation of emergency vehicles is governed by A.C.A. §
27-51-204, which authorizes emergency vehicles (activated blue lights and siren) to exceed the
posted speed limit, but does not relieve the driver of an authorized emergency vehicle from the
duty to drive with due regard for the safety of all persons. It also does not relieve the driver of any
emergency vehicle from the consequence of a reckless disregard for the safety of others.
B. Definition of pursuit driving – A motor vehicle pursuit is an active attempt by a law enforcement
officer, operating an emergency vehicle and utilizing simultaneously all emergency equipment
(blue lights and siren), to apprehend one or more occupants of another moving vehicle, when the
driver of a fleeing vehicle is aware of that attempt and is resisting apprehension by maintaining or
increasing his speed, disobeying traffic laws, ignoring or attempting to elude the officer.
C. An officer may be authorized to engage in a motor vehicle pursuit if the officer reasonably believes
that the suspect has committed or is about to commit a felony or if the actions of the suspect
intentionally puts the public at risk.

1. The act of evading or fleeing in a motor vehicle shall not, standing alone, be deemed to be
a violent act, crime or felony within the meaning of this written directive.
2. Information developed or discovered after the pursuit cannot be used to justify the pursuit
itself.
3. Officers who have attempted a traffic stop on a suspected D.W.I. driver who refuses to
stop, but does not recklessly flee, may continue to follow the suspected D.W.I. driver in a
Code 3 status until the suspect stops or such time that they begin to actively flee at which
time the situation will be revaluated in accordance with this order.
D. An officer engaged in a motor vehicle pursuit should constantly re-evaluate his/her surroundings,
speed, foot and vehicle traffic, suspect driving ability and weather conditions. Any time the officer
finds that any of these parameters has exceeded an acceptable limit, it shall be the responsibility
of the pursuing officer to terminate the vehicle pursuit for the safety of both departmental
personnel and citizens.
E. A supervisor is ultimately responsible for any vehicle pursuit that is initiated by officers under his
command. Supervisors should also evaluate the same parameters as the pursuing officer(s), in
addition to their knowledge of the driving skills, decision making ability, and emotional bearing of
the pursuing officer(s) when determining to terminate the action or allow a vehicle pursuit to
continue.
F. The following policies will govern vehicular pursuits:
1. Unmarked police vehicles may participate in any vehicular pursuit under the following
conditions:
a) Unmarked police vehicles (equipped with lights and siren) may become involved
in a pursuit as a primary vehicle only if a marked vehicle is not available. The
unmarked vehicle will become secondary once a marked unit becomes primary.
b) An unmarked police vehicle acting as a secondary unit will disengage once a

second marked vehicle becomes actively involved in the pursuit.
2. No more than two emergency vehicles will be involved in the immediate pursuit. Other
police vehicles will be support units, and will not become actively involved in the pursuit
or operate in an emergency mode.
a) During pursuit’s involving persons who have been involved in violent felonies, a
supervisor may authorize additional units to respond to the area in a Code 3
status. The purpose of this response should be to cover escape routes, increase
the chance of capture, and aid primary vehicles with traffic. This does not
negate that no more than two units can be in actual pursuit of a suspect at any
given time.
3. The first unit to become involved in a vehicular pursuit will be designated the primary
vehicle and will have the following responsibilities:

a) The officer will activate the police vehicle’s emergency lights and siren and
notify Communications of the following information:
(1) The unit identifier;
(2) The location and direction of the suspect vehicle;
(3) Speed and traffic conditions;
(4) The charges involved;
(5) The license number, vehicle description and number of occupants; and,
(6) If operating an unmarked vehicle.
b) A Little Rock Police Department helicopter, when immediately available, will be

notified of all vehicle pursuits and advised of all information contained in this
order. The department helicopter will be utilized as an additional support unit.
4. In a pursuit, the second police unit will become the backup. Upon joining the pursuit, the
backup officer will activate the vehicle’s emergency lights and siren and advise
Communications. The secondary unit will advise Communications of their unit identifier
and if they are operating an unmarked vehicle.
a) Only one backup unit is to be used, unless authorization for additional backup
units is obtained from a police supervisor.
b) The backup vehicle will follow the primary vehicle at a safe distance.
c) Additional police units will not assume emergency status and follow the primary
and backup units, unless a supervisor deems it necessary.
5. Additional units will be support vehicles and will not become actively involved in the
pursuit, violate traffic laws, or operate in emergency status, unless the fleeing suspect has
been involved in a violent felony and a supervisor has approved the action.
a) Support units will cover escape routes.
b) Support units will be available to assume a backup or primary role, should one of
those units be unable to continue the pursuit.
c) If a support vehicle inadvertently intercepts the suspect vehicle, the support

vehicle will not attempt to intervene. The support vehicle will attempt to obtain
additional vehicle description.
6. Officers will not operate their vehicles as primary or secondary units when their vehicles
are occupied by any passengers, other than another police officer or a person who has
signed a release or waiver of liability.

7. If a motorcycle initiates a vehicular pursuit, it shall yield to other authorized

Departmental vehicles as soon as practical. The motorcycle will then discontinue an
emergency response and serve as a support unit providing assistance to the pursuing
units if needed.
8. Police personnel will not engage in, nor will police vehicles be used, for the following
purposes:
a) Ramming of suspect vehicles;
b) Boxing in or surrounding a suspect vehicle (marked and unmarked units may be

used to box in an unaware suspect in order to avoid a pursuit);
c) Overtaking, driving next to, or forcing suspect vehicles off the roadway; or
d) Creating roadblocks. "Roadblock" is defined as any method, restriction

(including a partial restriction), or obstruction, used or intended for the purpose
of preventing free passage of motor vehicles on a highway or street, in order to
effect the apprehension of an actual or suspected violator in a motor vehicle.
9. Pursuits will be immediately terminated under the following conditions:
a) When any police supervisor orders the pursuit terminated.
b) The distance between the officer and suspect is such that, in order to continue the
pursuit, it would place the officer or the public in unreasonable danger.
c) The primary officer loses visual contact with the suspect for an extended period
of time (approximately 15-20 seconds). This is not to imply that the officers
must cease looking for the suspect, but they must slow the pursuit after loss of
contact.
d) When there is a clear and unreasonable danger to the officer, fleeing suspect
and/or any other persons. This may be due to excessive speed, reckless driving
techniques, or the erratic driving by the suspect, which exceeds the performance
capabilities of the vehicle or the driver.
e) When the danger, created by the pursuit, outweighs the necessity for immediate
apprehension.
10. The following factors shall be considered by officers and supervisors in making the
decision to continue or terminate a police pursuit:
a) Environmental factors, such as rain, fog, ice, snow or darkness that would
substantially increase the danger of the pursuit.
b) The officer’s familiarity with the area and his ability to accurately notify
Communications of his location and the direction in which the pursuit is
proceeding.

c) Road conditions are congested by traffic or pedestrians. This would be

especially important during rush hours or in the area of any school.
d) The pursued vehicle proceeds the wrong way on any freeway, divided highway,
or one-way street. At no time will officers pursue violators the wrong way on a
freeway.
e) The pursuing officer knows, or has reason to believe, that the fleeing vehicle is
being operated by a juvenile who is driving in such an unsafe manner that it is
obvious he/she does not have the maturity to deal with the danger involved.
11. Pursuits - Other Agencies or Jurisdictions
a) When other agencies pursue vehicles into the city limits, the following shall
govern Little Rock Police Department involvement:
(1) Little Rock Police Department officers will not assist in active pursuit,
unless requested by the pursuing agency and such assistance is
approved by a L.R.P.D. police supervisor;
(2) At no time will L.R.P.D. units become actively engaged in a pursuit, if

two police vehicles from another agency are already in active pursuit;
and,
(3) If the pursuing agency is joined by L.R.P.D. units, and the agency’s
backup unit arrives to assist, L.R.P.D. units will terminate active pursuit
and cease emergency operations.
b) When L.R.P.D. pursuits leave the city limits and enter other jurisdictions, the
following will apply:
(1) The primary officer will advise Communications that the pursuit is
leaving the city;
(2) The supervisor handling the pursuit will evaluate the entire incident and
make the decision to let the pursuit continue or terminate; and,
(3) If the agency with jurisdictional authority joins in active pursuit, the
L.R.P.D. backup unit will discontinue pursuit and cease emergency
operations. If two units from the other agency join the pursuit, all
L.R.P.D. units will safely terminate their pursuit and discontinue
emergency operations. (At no time will L.R.P.D. units be involved in
pursuits when two police units from another agency are already
involved.)
c) When other agencies become involved in L.R.P.D. pursuits, within the city limits
of Little Rock, the following shall apply:
(1) If another agency becomes involved in the immediate pursuit, the

L.R.P.D. backup unit will terminate emergency operations;

(2) The primary unit will, if possible, advise Communications of the

identity of the other agencies involved, so that Communications can
make contact and begin communications with the involved agency;
(3) Due to limited radio communications with other agencies, the assigned
supervisor shall re-evaluate the pursuit and terminate, if necessary; and,
(4) At no time will L.R.P.D. units be involved in multi-vehicle pursuits

with other agencies. For the purpose of this Policy, a maximum of two
units are authorized in pursuit situations.
12. Communications Responsibilities
a) Ensure that a supervisor is aware of the pursuit and the nature of the pursuit.
b) Notify the Aviation Unit and Canine Unit, if applicable.
c) During the pursuit, communications personnel will use any available information
to further develop and ascertain the possible identity of the fleeing driver and/or
occupants, plus attempt to discover other possible reasons for which the
individual(s) might be fleeing.
d) Notify outside agencies if the pursuit might involve their jurisdiction, and
whether the call is a request for assistance or merely a courtesy notification with
no participation requested.
e) The dispatcher will advise units participating in a pursuit of any known

hazardous conditions in the area of the pursuit, e.g., accidents, closed streets, etc.
13. Supervisors’ Responsibilities
a) An appropriate Sergeant will immediately, upon hearing of a police pursuit, take

command of the situation, and will be accountable for compliance with this
Policy until the pursuit is terminated. The supervisor taking command of the
pursuit will immediately attempt to determine the reason for the pursuit.
b) The supervisor of the officer, who initiates the pursuit, should normally be the
supervisor assuming command. In the event that the officer’s supervisor is not
available, or does not assume command, the Field Services Sergeant, in the
Division in which the pursuit originates, will take command of the situation, and
will be accountable for compliance with this directive, until the pursuit is
terminated. If a Sergeant does not take command immediately, the Shift
Lieutenant, in the Division in which the pursuit originates, will take command
and/or assign a Sergeant. If this does not occur, any Field Services Shift
Lieutenant on duty will assume command and/or assign a Sergeant.
c) Any police supervisor may order a pursuit terminated if, in their best judgment,
the necessity of apprehension is outweighed by the level of danger.

d) If the pursuit involves an unmarked unit as a primary or secondary unit, the

supervisor in charge of the pursuit will attempt to relieve the unmarked vehicle
with a marked vehicle as soon as practical.
14. Supervisory Reviews
a) A formal review of all pursuits will be conducted by the officer’s Chain of

Command and the Training Division.
b) The purpose of the review is to determine if:
(1) The pursuit was necessary and within Departmental Policy;
(2) There are training needs to be considered; and,
(3) Any policy changes need to be considered.
15. Reports
a) A supervisor will ensure an Information Report and a Blue Team Pursuit Report
is generated and that each officer involved in the pursuit completes an Officer’s
Report Form, detailing the facts of the pursuit. The supervisor shall complete an
initial entry into the Blue Team program prior to the end of their shift.
b) A supervisor will ensure that copies of the MVR video, of all units actively
involved, are contained in the file.
c) Supervisors will obtain a copy of the Communications tape of all radio traffic
pertaining to the pursuit for inclusion in the file.
d) The reports will be reviewed by the officer’s supervisor, who will make a written
evaluation and forward the reports, through the Chain of Command. The reports
will be reviewed at each level and submitted to the Office of the Chief of Police.
e) If necessary, after review by the appropriate Assistant Chief, the Pursuit file will
be forwarded to the Chief of Police for his/her findings and disposition.
f) The following pursuit files will be forwarded to the Office of the Chief of Police
for findings and disposition:
(1) Any file wherein a potential violation of Departmental policy has been
identified,
(2) Any file where counseling or other disciplinary action has been
recommended,
(3) Any file where there is some element of disagreement in the Chain of
Command evaluations,
(4) Any file where an individual has been injured, and,

(5) Any file where there is an indication of a safety or policy issue which
should be addressed.
g) After final review, the pursuit file will be forwarded to Internal Affairs for
computer data entry. The Internal Affairs Division will retain files where any
type of disciplinary action was taken. All other files will be routed to the
appropriate Division Commander for retention.
16. File Format
a) All documentation will be placed in a file folder and secured at the top with an
ACCO two-hole fastener.
b) Any photographs or audio/video tapes will be placed in a manila envelope,

attached to the inside front cover of the file.
c) The initial evaluating supervisor shall be responsible for ensuring that all
necessary documentation is obtained and properly placed in the file, before
routing it through the Chain of Command. The initial evaluating supervisor is
also responsible for producing a copy of the completed file and forwarding the
copy to the Defensive Driving Coordinator.
d) The file will be constructed as follows:
(1) Lieutenant’s evaluation;
(2) Sergeant’s evaluation;
(3) Blue Team Pursuit Report;
(4) Information Report (copy);
(5) Involved Officer’s report;
(6) Copy of MVR video, if available;
(7) Arrest Report (copy, if any);
(8) Medical treatment information (if any);
(9) Computer printout of suspect’s arrest record; and,
(10) Copies of Worker’s Compensation Forms, if an injury has occurred to

an involved employee.
G. The Training Division Commander will be responsible for the completion of an annual analysis of
all police pursuits. The analysis will include statistical data and a summary recommending any
training needs or policy modifications, based on trends or patterns revealed in the report. This
analysis should be completed and forwarded to the Office of the Chief of Police no later than
February 15th of each year.

H. The Training Division Commander will be responsible for the completion of an annual review of
pursuit policies and reporting procedures.
I. The Training Division Commander will be responsible for the completion of a quarterly statistical
report of all police pursuits. The report should be completed and forwarded to the Office of the
Chief of Police no later than the 10th of each quarter (January, April, July, October).
J. Tire Deflation Devices – The purpose of the deployment of the tire deflation device is primarily to
safely end vehicle pursuits, while placing paramount importance on the safety of the officers, the
public and the suspects. When any vehicle crosses a deployed tire deflation device, hollow spikes
are embedded into the tires to deflate the tire at a controlled rate. While the driver may continue to
drive, the ability to operate the vehicle at high speeds is greatly reduced, if not eliminated.
a) Tire deflation devices shall only be deployed with supervisory approval.
b) Only personnel who have completed an authorized training course for the
deployment of tire deflation devices are permitted to deploy the devices.
c) The tire deflation device location should provide deploying personnel with good
visibility of the approaching pursuit and other traffic in the area. The location
should provide as long of a visual path as possible. Deploying personnel should
seek protective cover that provides good visibility of the surrounding area and
the approach of the suspect vehicle. Using any vehicle as cover is discouraged.
d) The deploying unit shall not overtake a fleeing vehicle in an attempt to place a
tire deflation device in the roadway. The deploying unit may use emergency
equipment and “run code” in order to get into position to deploy the tire
deflation device. Only one unit may “run code” in order to establish position for
deployment, unless additional units are authorized by a supervisor.
e) The deploying unit shall advise the pursuing unit(s) and Communications of the
location of the deployment. Communications shall rebroadcast the location of
the deployment to the unit(s) involved in the pursuit.
f) Upon notification that tire deflation devices are being deployed in front of the
fleeing vehicle, pursuing vehicles should increase the gap between them and the
fleeing vehicle to avoid striking the tire deflation device (approximately 3 to 5
seconds).
g) Tire deflation devices shall not be used to stop the following vehicles:
(1) Vehicles with less than four (4) wheels.
(2) Vehicles transporting hazardous materials.
(3) School buses transporting passengers.
(4) Public transportation vehicles transporting passengers.

h) The use of a tire deflation device to stop a vehicle being pursued by an outside
agency will be allowed under the following conditions:
(1) The deployment is approved by a Little Rock Police Department

supervisor;
(2) The use of the device would fall within the guidelines of a pursuit
initiated by the Little Rock Police Department; and,
(3) The pursuing agency has requested and been made aware of the
deployment to prevent damage to their vehicles.
i) Anytime a tire deflation device has been compromised (ran over or damaged by
any means), the entire device will be turned into the division’s vehicle/equipment
coordinator for replacement. A copy of the completed Pursuit Review Report
indicating the unit number the device was taken from will be attached to the
device. In the absence of the Pursuit Review Report, an Officer’s Report
detailing how the device was damaged and authorizing its replacement by a
Division Commander will be attached. The vehicle/equipment coordinator will
be responsible for completing the warranty replacement report or requisitioning
a new device, and the shipping and receiving of the damaged and replacement
device.
j) The use of a tire deflation device shall be indicated on the Pursuit Review Report
(Form 5500-28). The officer(s) deploying a tire deflation device will document
the deployment on an Officer’s Report (Form 5600-2) to be included in the
pursuit file.
III. Non-Emergency Operation of Departmental Vehicles
A. Police employees will comply with all City Ordinances and State Laws when operating vehicles
owned, rented, leased or seized by the City.
B. Employees will use seat belts at all times when operating any city vehicle.
C. Employees will ensure that their assigned vehicles have sufficient gas and oil for their assigned
shift, and that tires are properly inflated.
D. All vehicles shall be pre-tripped, in accordance with driver’s training instruction.
E. All employees will inspect their assigned vehicles, prior to their shift, for damage or missing
equipment, and will inspect the rear seat area for contraband or evidence. (Officers shall inspect
the rear seat area after transporting every prisoner.)
F. All vehicle damage or missing equipment will be reported to a supervisor, prior to the vehicle
being placed in service. The supervisor will initiate an investigation to determine the cause and
document his/her findings. The reports will be forwarded through the Chain of Command to the
Division Commander for resolution.
G. Employees will ensure that their Department vehicle is kept clean and free of trash.

H. Employees will, at all times, ensure that the spare tire is in its proper location and secured to avoid
damage to radio equipment. When a Department vehicle has a flat tire, at any time, the assigned
employee will complete a work order and forward it to the Automotive/Equipment Coordinator to
initiate repairs.
I. Careless, abusive, negligent or reckless handling of any vehicle will result in disciplinary action.
IV. Operation of Unmarked Departmental Vehicles
A. Non-uniformed officers operating unmarked vehicles may conduct traffic stops of motorists if the
situation dictates that waiting on a marked vehicle would not be prudent. The non-uniformed
officer will conduct the traffic stop in accordance with policy regarding safety and identification.
Non-uniformed officers are to be cognizant of the public’s reaction to police impersonators.
B. Non-uniformed officers operating vehicles not equipped with emergency lights or siren shall not
make motor vehicle stops unless there is imminent danger of loss of life should they fail to act. In
other less urgent cases that demand attention, officers shall contact the Communications Center,
request that a marked patrol vehicle perform the stop, and assist in directing the marked unit to the
subject vehicle's location.
V. Take-Home Vehicle Assignments and Guidelines
A. Certain Department personnel in specialized assignments which by the nature of the assignment
mandate their return to duty during off-duty hours for investigation or other critical police
responses may be assigned a take-home Department vehicle. The Chief of Police will designate all
take-home vehicle assignments in writing as needed.
B. Operation of Take-Home Vehicles
1. Take-Home vehicles will only be operated by the following:
a) The assigned employee;
b) Maintenance or repair personnel;
c) Probationary employee riding with the assigned employee;
d) Another employee in emergency circumstances requiring the use of the vehicle;

and,
e) Others as directed by appropriate supervisory authority.
2. Employees assigned a take-home vehicle may utilize them as follows:
a) For travel to and from the employee’s duty assignment and during the
employee’s tour of duty;
b) For transportation to and from any court appearance as long as it is job related;

c) For travel to and from approved off-duty employment with prior approval from
an appropriate supervisory authority; and,
d) The use of any Departmentally issued vehicle is limited to Department business.

While it is permissible for employees to make personal stops to and from work at
locations near the officer’s normal route, it should be clearly understood that the
assigned employee is prohibited from using the vehicle for personal business or
transportation. Employees shall apply common sense and avoid stopping at
liquor stores, night clubs, etc., to protect the police image. Evidence of any
misuse or vehicle abuse will result in an investigation and possible revocation of
the privilege, reassignment as necessary and/or disciplinary action.
C. Responsibilities
1. Employees assigned a take-home vehicle are required to keep the vehicle clean inside and
out and shall ensure that all maintenance and repair is completed on schedule.
2. Supervisors will be responsible for assuring that employees under their command are
maintaining their assigned vehicles pursuant to Departmental guidelines and will conduct
monthly inspections to assure adherence.
3. Officers assigned a take-home vehicle shall render police aid and services as necessary
regardless of duty status. This includes assisting stalled motorists, standing by at accident
scenes until the arrival of the assigned officer, giving directions or responding to nearby
emergencies. Off-duty officers will not ignore these responsibilities.
4. The assigned driver of a take home vehicle will park the vehicle at their respective place
of duty when they are off duty for a period of more than ten consecutive working days.
The period of time off will include sick leave, vacation, personal discretionary days,
military leave, death in family, administrative leave, and in conjunction with their regular
days off. The assigned employee will notify their immediate supervisor as to the delivery
of the vehicle and leave them the keys, to include the fuel tab key, where it may be
available for utilization during their time off.
D. Eligibility
1. The Chief of Police must approve all take-home vehicle assignments.
2. The Chief of Police may at any time modify this Order for the budgetary or operational
needs of the Department. Nothing in this Order should be construed as conferring the
assignment of a take home vehicle as a right or condition of any Departmental position.
VI. Accidents and Damage to City Vehicles
A. Any employee, who damages a city vehicle or becomes involved in a motor vehicle accident with a
city owned, rented, leased or seized vehicle, in the city limits will immediately notify an on-duty
patrol supervisor who will ensure that the appropriate Division Commander is notified.

B. Any employee, who damages or becomes involved in a motor vehicle accident with a city owned,
rented, leased or seized vehicle, outside the city limits will notify their immediate supervisor or
their superior immediately. When practical, the supervisor will respond to the accident scene to
begin the Departmental investigation.
C. When a member of the Command Staff is involved in a motor vehicle accident with a city owned,
rented, leased or seized vehicle inside or outside the city limits, their immediate supervisor will be
notified as soon as possible.
D. A police supervisor will respond to the scene and personally complete an Arkansas Motor Vehicle
Traffic Accident Report for accidents involving a city owned, rented, leased or seized vehicle
inside the city limits. In instances involving a pursuit situation, or where a fatality, serious injury or
extensive property damage occurs, the supervisor will request the assistance of a supervisor, or
officer trained in accident reconstruction, to assist in the investigation.
1. The investigating supervisor is responsible for ensuring that the State SR-1 form is
completed (if damage is believed to be $1000.00 or more), the City’s Supervisors
Investigation Report-Motor Vehicle Accident form, and logging the damage with
Communications.
2. The investigating supervisor is responsible for completing an Accident Report in the Blue
Team electronic file system, with the initial entry being made prior to the end of their
shift.
3. A repair order will be made, detailing the damage, and a copy of the accident report
attached for submission to Fleet Services.
4. The investigating supervisor will immediately forward a copy of the Accident Report,
Repair Order and Supervisor’s Investigation Report to the Department Vehicle
Coordinator. The Vehicle Coordinator will contact Fleet Services to determine the
disposition of the damaged vehicle.
5. The investigating supervisor will complete and fax (918-4229) the following forms to the
Fleet Services Department within three working days of the incident. A notation shall be
written on the inside front cover of the file indicating that the below listed forms have
been faxed and the date which they were faxed to Fleet Services.
a) State SR-1 Form (if damage is believed to be $1000 or more);
b) Supervisor’s Investigation Report – Motor Vehicle Accident;
c) Municipal Vehicle Program – Vehicle Accident Report; and,
d) City of Little Rock – Vehicle Incident Report Form and/or Arkansas Motor
Vehicle Accident Report Form.
E. The file, containing all forms and a written evaluation from each supervisor in the Chain of
Command, will be submitted to the Division Commander.
F. The file will be assembled as follows:

1. All documentation will be placed in a file folder and secured at the top with an ACCO
two-hole fastener.
2. Any photographs or audio/video tapes will be placed in a manila envelope, attached to the
inside front cover of the file.
3. The evaluating supervisor shall be responsible for ensuring that all necessary
documentation has been properly placed in the file, before routing it through the Chain of
Command.
4. The file shall include:
a) Lieutenant’s evaluation;
b) Sergeant’s evaluation;
c) Blue Team Accident Report;
d) Accident Report (copy);
e) Involved Officer’s Report (5600-2);
f) Arrest Report/Traffic Summons (copy, if any);
g) Supervisor’s Investigation Report – Motor Vehicle Accident (copy);
h) SR-1 Form (copy);
i) Municipal Vehicle Program – Vehicle Accident Report (copy);
j) City of Little Rock – Vehicle Incident Report Form (copy);
k) Copy of vehicle damage book notation;
l) Copy of repair slip;
m) Copies of Worker’s Compensation Forms, if an injury has occurred to an

involved employee; and,
n) Copy of the alcohol and drug screen documentation, Custody and Control Form.
5. The original SR-1 Form, Supervisor’s Investigation Report-Motor Vehicle Accident form,
Municipal Vehicle Program – Vehicle Accident Report form, City of Little Rock –
Vehicle Incident Report Form, original blue copy of the Custody and Control Form, and a
copy of the Accident Report shall be attached by paper clip to the inside front cover of the
file.
VII. Defensive Driving Coordinator

A. The Training Division Lieutenant will serve as the Defensive Driving Coordinator. It will be the
responsibility of the Defensive Driving Coordinator to:
1. Provide record keeping for all driving records;
2. Provide record keeping for all current LRPD driving instructors that are certified;
3. Continue to advocate program development; and,
4. Schedule and supervise all defensive driving courses being taught.
B. The Recruit Training Sergeant will serve as the Assistant Defensive Driving Coordinator. It will be
the responsibility of the Assistant Defensive Driving Coordinator to:
1. Chair the Accident Review Committee in the absence of the Defensive Driving
Coordinator;
2. Coordinate recruit school defensive driving instruction;
3. Continue to advocate program development; and,
4. Provide record keeping for all recruit school driving records.
C. The Defensive Driving Coordinator and the Assistant Defensive Driving Coordinator shall be
required to have certification as a Defensive Driving Instructor in order to serve on the Accident
Review Committee. If either supervisor does not meet the criteria to serve as a Coordinator, then
they will assume an advisory role until certification can be obtained. The Assistant Chief of Police
over the Training Division will temporarily appoint a Defensive Driving Instructor of supervisory
rank to the position of Coordinator or Assistant Coordinator until the criteria established in this
Order are fulfilled.
VIII. Accident Review Committee
A. When an employee is involved in a motor vehicle accident, the employee’s supervisor will
evaluate the file, but will not make a final recommendation until the file has been reviewed by the
Accident Review Committee.
B. Upon completion of the accident file, less the recommendation of the involved employee’s
supervisors, the original will be forwarded, through the chain of command, to the Office of the
Chief of Police for disposition of SR-1, the original blue copy of the Custody and Control Form,
and Workmen’s Compensation Forms.
C. The Office of the Chief of Police will forward the original accident file to the Professional
Standards Section for processing. The original accident file will be forwarded to the Defensive
Driving Coordinator for review.
D. The Defensive Driving Coordinator will maintain a log of accident files received, including date of
receipt and date to be reviewed by the Accident Review Committee.

E. The Accident Review Committee will evaluate all accidents based on:
1. Avoidability of the accident;
2. Adequacy of training;
3. Adherence to training;
4. Past driving record; and,
5. Avoidability of future accidents.
F. The Accident Review Committee will be comprised of:
1. The Defensive Driving Coordinator, who will chair the committee;
2. The Assistant Defensive Driving Coordinator;
3. Three Defensive Driving Instructors who do not work with the involved officer; and,
4. If the Coordinator or the Assistant Coordinator is in the involved employee’s chain of

command, a Defensive Driving Instructor of supervisory rank will be appointed to replace
them.
G. After conducting the review, the Accident Review Committee will develop their findings and
recommendations. The Defensive Driving Coordinator will then compile a written report, which
will become part of the accident investigation.
1. The file will be returned to the involved employee’s Division Commander, within ten
days of receipt of the file.
2. The completed file will be reviewed and evaluated by the involved employee’s immediate
supervisors and forwarded, through the chain of command, to the Office of the Chief of
Police with their recommendations.
H. All investigations, committee reviews and chain of command reviews of police involved traffic
accidents shall be completed within 30 days from the date of the accident, unless investigatory
considerations warrant delay and the Office of the Chief of Police approves.
IX. Monthly Vehicle Inspection
A. Division Commanders shall be responsible for ensuring that all vehicles, assigned to their
respective Divisions, are inspected monthly, with all documentation completed by the 1st of the
month.
B. Division Commanders shall review and maintain monthly vehicle inspection forms.
X. Off -Duty Employees - Private Vehicle Accidents

A. When a sworn police officer is involved in a motor vehicle accident, in a private vehicle within the
City of Little Rock, a police supervisor will be responsible for investigating the accident and
completing an accident report.
B. When a civilian employee is involved in a motor vehicle accident, in a private vehicle within the
City of Little Rock, a police officer will be responsible for investigating the accident and
completing an accident report.
XI. Guidelines For Use of Temporary Traffic Control
A. Under certain circumstances, the blocking of a road by using patrol units may be necessary. Only
marked police vehicles, equipped with emergency equipment, and manned by uniformed
personnel, will be utilized to establish and maintain temporary traffic control. The temporary
traffic control must be clearly visible and provide adequate warning to allow vehicles to come to a
safe stop. Blue lights will be activated any time a police unit is utilized in temporary traffic
control. Only fixed temporary traffic control will be employed by personnel of this Department.
B. Temporary traffic control may be used under the following conditions:
1. Where the flow of traffic needs to be temporarily controlled into or around an area for
investigative purposes; to allow for the removal of potential hazards (accident scenes,
structure or vehicle fires, chemical spills, crime scenes, etc.); or at the scene of natural or
manmade disasters. Field supervisors will be responsible for monitoring the need for and
duration of such temporary traffic control.
2. During special events, such as Razorback football games, Riverfest and Pops on the
River. Where possible, temporary traffic control at such events should be planned in
advance and approved by the supervisor in command of the event.

GENERAL ORDER
G. O. 303 USE OF FORCE

I. Purpose and Scope
A. The policies of the Little Rock Police Department regarding the use of physical force, non-lethal
weapons, deadly force and the discharging of weapons, are set forth in this General Order.
B. This Order governs all personnel who are acting or who may reasonably be expected to act in the
capacity of a law enforcement officer, on or off duty. This Order should not be construed as to
supersede an employee’s legal personal prerogatives, when acting as a private citizen, pursuant to
A.C.A. § 5-2-606 “Use of Physical Force in Defense of a Person,” § 5-2-607 “Use of Deadly
Physical Force in Defense of a Person,” § 5-2-608 “Use of Physical Force in Defense of Premises”
and/or § 5-2-609 “Use of Physical Force in Defense of Property.” However, employees must
recognize that actions taken under statutory authority granted private citizens, will be investigated
and evaluated as such.
C. Definitions
1. “Deadly Force,” as used in this Policy, is defined as that force which creates some specified
degree of risk that a reasonable and prudent person would consider likely to cause death or
serious physical injury.
2. “Serious Physical Injury,” as used in this Policy, is defined as physical injury that creates a
substantial risk of death or that causes protracted disfigurement, protracted impairment of
health, or loss or protracted impairment of the function of any bodily member or organ
(A.C.A. § 5-1-102.(19)).
3. “Physical Force,” as used in this Policy, is defined as any bodily impact, restraint, or
confinement, or the threat thereof (A.C.A. § 5-2-601.(3)).
4. “Reasonably believe” or “reasonable belief,” as used in this Policy, is defined as belief that
an ordinary, prudent person would form, under the circumstances in question, and one not
recklessly or negligently formed (A.C.A. § 5-1-102 (18)).
5. De-escalation, as used in this Policy, is defined as taking action or communicating verbally

or non-verbally during a potential force encounter in an attempt to stabilize the situation
and reduce the immediacy of the threat so that more time, options, and resources can be
called upon to resolve the situation without the use of force or with a reduction in the force
necessary. De-escalation may include the use of such techniques as command presence,
advisements, warnings, verbal persuasion, and tactical repositioning.
6. Exigent circumstances, as used in this Policy, is defined as those circumstances that would
cause a reasonable person to believe that a particular action is necessary to prevent
physical harm to an individual, the destruction of relevant evidence, the escape of a suspect,
or some other consequence improperly frustrating legitimate law enforcement efforts.

GENERAL ORDERS G. O. 303 USE OF FORCE
II. Deadly Force
A. Statement of Philosophy
1. The Little Rock Police Department in establishing a philosophy for the use of Deadly Force
places the ultimate value on human life, while considering the legal, moral and ethical
implications of its application.
2. The citizens of Little Rock have vested their police officers with the
responsibility to protect life and property, and to apprehend criminal
offenders. The apprehension of criminal offenders and protection of
property must, at all times, be secondary to the protection of life.
Therefore, the use of Deadly Force is not allowed to protect property
interests.
3. Police Officers are confronted daily with situations where control must be
exercised to effect arrests and to protect the public safety. The officers may
achieve control of situations by the use of verbal warnings or the use of
reasonable physical force. The use of any reasonable physical force must
be based on reasonable alternatives that have been considered and would
be ineffective. The use of Deadly Force shall be the last alternative, and the
officer's responsibility to protect human life must include his own.
B. Purpose
1. This Order states the Department’s policy regarding a police officer’s use
of Deadly Force; and,
2. Establishes policies under which the use of Deadly Force by police officers
is permissible.
C. Avoiding the Use of Deadly Force
1. Regardless of the nature of a crime or the justification for directing Deadly

Force at a suspect, officers must remember that their basic responsibility is
to protect life. Officers shall not fire their weapons under conditions that
would unnecessarily subject bystanders or hostages to death or possible
injury, except to preserve life or to prevent serious physical injury. Deadly
Force is an act of last resort and will be used only when other reasonable
alternatives are impractical or have failed.
2. Officers will plan ahead and consider alternatives which will reduce the
possibility of needing to use Deadly Force.
D. The Authorization To Use Deadly Force - Officers may only use Deadly Force to
protect themselves or others from what they reasonably believe to be an immediate
threat of death or serious physical injury.
E. Discharging Firearms at Moving Vehicles or into Structures

G. O. 303 USE OF FORCE LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
1. Discharging firearms at a moving or fleeing vehicle is prohibited, unless it

is necessary to prevent imminent death or serious physical injury to the
officer or another person.
2. Officers will not voluntarily place themselves in a position in front of an

oncoming vehicle where Deadly Force is the probable outcome. When
confronted by an oncoming vehicle, officers will move out of its path, if
possible, rather than fire at the vehicle.
3. Officers will not fire into a building or through doors, unless the officer or
someone else is drawing fire and the suspect can be identified and is
clearly visible.
F. Drawing, Displaying Weapons and Warning Shots
1. Officers will not fire warning shots.
2. Officers may draw or display firearms when there is a threat or reasonable belief that there is
a threat to life, or when they have a reasonable fear for their own safety and/or the safety of
others.
3. The carbine rifle is authorized as an additional force option for officers when faced with
incidents posing a higher degree of danger where a long-range weapon or tactical weapon to
meet comparable resistance is needed. The carbine rifle is available as a supplement to the
officer’s primary weapon.
a) Officers shall only deploy the carbine rifle in the following circumstances:
(1) At the direction of a supervisor, or
(2) When officers can clearly articulate the need for deploying the rifle.
Examples of such situations may be but are not limited to:
(a) The officer reasonably believes a suspect(s) may be armed with or

have immediate access to a high-powered weapon, or to a weapon
that exceeds the capability/capacity of the officer’s primary
weapon;
(b) The officer reasonably believes a suspect(s) maybe wearing

protective body armor;
(c) An active shooter incident; or,
(d) An armed barricaded suspect. (Once SWAT has arrived and the
officer is relieved on the inner perimeter, the rifle will be
secured).
b) Use or display of the rifle for routine building searches, routine traffic stops or
during any other routine police action is strictly prohibited. Violation of these
guidelines may result in disciplinary action and prohibition from carrying the
carbine rifle.

c) When an officer deploys a carbine rifle, they will make a radio broadcast on the
primary radio channel for that incident to notify responding officers and supervisors
that a carbine rifle has been deployed. Supervisors will monitor the deployment of
the carbine rifle and will take appropriate actions where needed.
d) Non-uniformed officers may deploy the carbine rifle only when they have donned
apparel which causes them to be readily identified as a police officer from the front
and rear.
III. Use of Physical Force and Non-Lethal Weapons
A. This Section establishes the type and degree of force which may be used to overcome a level of
resistance, to control persons who are in custody and/or to prevent escape. Officers will only use the
type and degree of force which is reasonable and necessary based on the circumstances.
B. Levels of Resistance
1. Psychological Intimidation: Non-verbal clues indicating subject’s attitude, appearance, and

physical readiness. (e.g., blank stare, clenching of fist(s), tightening of jaw muscles, etc.)
2. Verbal Non-compliance: Verbal responses indicating subject unwillingness to obey

commands of detainment, arrest, or to stop unlawful or dangerous behavior.
3. Passive Resistance: Any type of resistance where the subject does not attempt to defeat the
officer(s) attempt to touch or control him/her, but refuses to actively comply with the
officer(s). (e.g., dead weight, does not react to verbal commands, etc.)
4. Defensive Resistance: Any action that attempts to prevent an officer from gaining control of
the subject (e.g., pulling/pushing away to defeat the escort position). It is not an attack on the
officer, but a physical act designed to prevent the officer from gaining control.
5. Active Aggression: Includes physical actions/assaults against the officer or another person
with less than deadly force (e.g., advancing, challenging, punching, kicking, grabbing,
wrestling, etc.)
6. Deadly Force Assault: Any force used against an officer and/or another person that may
result in great bodily harm or the loss of human life. It is important to note that a subject’s
use of deadly force does not require the use of a weapon against the officer. Deadly force is
any force that the officer reasonably believes could result in serious injury or death.
C. The type and degree of levels of control that may be used to overcome resistance, to control persons
who are in custody, and to prevent escape, are:
1. Level 1 - Officer Presence - The identification of police officer’s authority, either by the
uniformed police or the verbal indication of being a police officer.
2. Level 2 - Verbal Direction - Verbal commands of direction or arrest.
3. Level 3 - Empty Hand Control

a) Soft Empty Hand Control - Techniques that are designed to control Passive or
Defensive Resistance, used when verbal direction/commands are not effective and
there is non-compliance with lawful orders. They include strength techniques, joint
locks, pressure points, or a Knee-Strike/Distraction Technique to the subject’s thigh
(to prevent resistance from the escort position). These techniques have little or no
potential for injury.
b) Hard Empty Hand Control - Techniques that are designed to control Active
Aggression, but can be used to control Defensive Resistance when lower forms of
control have failed or when the officer believes lower forms of control will fail.
These techniques include Defensive Counterstrikes and the Shoulder Pin Restraint.
These techniques have a probability of injury in the form of bruises, contusions, or
lacerations.
4. Level 4 - Intermediate Weapons – Intermediate Weapon level of control is the

application/use of any weapon/object that is not part of the human body to control resistance
or an assault. Examples include any form of chemical agent, impact weapons (flashlight,
radio, broomsticks, etc.) and conducted electrical weapons (Taser). The use of an
Intermediate Weapon is justified when lower forms of empty hand control have failed, or
when an officer believes that his skill level in empty hand control will be insufficient, and the
use of Deadly Force is not justified. They are used with the intent to temporarily disable the
subject and never with the intent to cause permanent injury.
5. Level 5 - Deadly Force – Any force used by an officer that may result in great bodily harm or
the loss of human life. Officers may only use Deadly Force to protect themselves or others
from what they reasonably believe to be an immediate threat of death or serious physical
injury.
D. There are so many variables pertaining to using force that it is difficult to establish “absolutes,”
especially in the case of non-lethal force. For example: the type of crime committed or attempted;
relative size/stature of the officer and the subject; exigent circumstances; number of officers; number
of subjects involved; availability of backup; reaction time; relative strength; subjects’ access to
weapons; subjects under the influence of alcohol or drugs; exhaustion of the officer; weather or
terrain condition; immediacy of danger; distance from the subject; and special knowledge (e.g.
subjects’ prior history of violence, etc.) are just a few of the variables that will impact an officer’s
selection of a specific force response. Officers should use defensive tactics for which Departmental
training has been given to control or arrest uncooperative suspects. Officers shall use de-escalation
techniques consistent with his/her training whenever possible and appropriate before resorting to
force and to reduce the need for force.
E. Oral Concealment of Evidence by Suspects
1. When an officer witnesses a suspect conceal evidence in his mouth, the officer will not use
force to remove the evidence.
2. The officer will order the suspect to remove the evidence from his mouth so the officer can
take possession of the evidence.
3. If the suspect fails to comply with the officer, the suspect will be taken into custody for
Tampering with Physical Evidence.

a) If the evidence is believed to be an illegal drug, the officer shall transport the
suspect to the University of Arkansas Medical Center for treatment. Any visible
residue on the suspect’s lips which the officer believes to be an illegal drug/narcotic,
may be swabbed by the officer to be forwarded to the State Crime Laboratory. A
Narcotics Detective will be notified to process and charge the subject on the felony
charge.
b) If the suspect is believed to have ingested a large amount of drugs/narcotics, the

officer shall notify his supervisor and a Narcotics Detective. It will be the
responsibility of the Narcotics Detective to process the suspect and consult with a
prosecutor in reference to a search warrant for stomach content.
F. Authorized Weapons
1. Oleoresin Capsicum (O.C.) - O.C., a chemical deterrent, may be used in defense against
combative, resisting, and/or otherwise violent individuals. O.C. is not necessarily a
replacement or substitute for otherwise less-than-lethal devices or tactics and, therefore,
should only be used when it is determined to be the best available enforcement tool or tactic
under the given circumstances. Similarly, O.C. is not intended to be an alternative to the use
of Deadly Force, when such is clearly authorized and is necessary, as described in this
General Order.
a) O.C. may be used when an officer must use physical force, and verbal direction is
ineffective or inappropriate, and where passive restraint techniques have failed, and
an officer must use physical force; or when an officer perceives any reasonable
actions that threaten the officer’s safety.
b) O.C. may also be used to effect the removal of a person from an automobile or from
an enclosed area, when it becomes apparent that physical force will be necessary to
otherwise accomplish this.
c) O.C. will only be used as a control and compliance measure against violent and/or
resisting individuals, and will never be used for retaliation or for any illicit or
unlawful purposes.
d) Officers will use only the amount of O.C. reasonably needed to achieve the desired
enforcement results. Officers will discontinue the use of O.C. when it becomes
apparent that a suspect may otherwise be taken into custody, or whenever the O.C.
appears to disable the suspect.
e) After control has been established and/or resistance has ceased, officers will make
reasonable efforts to allow the O.C. affected individual relief from the discomfort
associated with the application of O.C. Water and sufficient ventilation will reduce
the effects of the O.C.
f) Authorized officers will at all times conform to training provided by the Department
in the use of O.C., and will carry and use only the authorized O.C. issued by the
Department.
g) The use of O.C. against any person will be considered a use of physical force and
each incident will be documented as detailed in this General Order. Following the
use of O.C. spray upon any person, a Use of Force report will be completed in the
Blue Team program.

h) O.C. spray canisters will not be defaced or altered in any way other than by normal
use. Expended canisters of O.C. will be replaced by the Training Division
Quartermaster; the expended canister must be turned in prior to receiving a new
canister.
2. Police Batons - A police baton may be used when considerable force is necessary. The baton
permits an officer to defend himself/herself or others, in situations where the use of firearms
may not be necessary or justified.
a) When the use of the baton is warranted, officers will attempt to strike the suspects’
arms or legs. Officers should not attempt to strike suspects on the head, neck,
sternum, spine, groin or kidneys unless Deadly Force is authorized.
b) Jabs to the body with the baton should be used under circumstances that inhibit the
officer’s ability to strike the suspect in the arms or legs (e.g. crowded areas, other
officers in the area, etc.).
c) Straight Baton - Officers may carry straight batons, at their discretion, after
receiving departmental training. When carried, the only authorized baton will be the
Departmentally-issued straight baton.
d) Expandable Straight Baton – The expandable straight baton is issued to recruits and
officers who have received training in its use. When carried, the only authorized
expandable baton will be the Departmentally-issued ASP or Monadnock expandable
baton.
e) Side Handle Baton - Officers may carry the side handle baton, either collapsible or
non-collapsible, at their discretion, after receiving current departmental training and
certification in its use. When carried, the only authorized side handle baton will be
the Departmentally-issued side handle baton. Officers who have not completed the
training are not authorized to carry a side handle baton.
3. Conducted Electrical Weapons (i.e. Taser) – Conducted Electrical Weapons (CEW) shall be
used as a resource to facilitate the safe arrest of combative, combative resisting, or violent
individuals. The CEW is not a replacement or substitute for other less lethal devices or
tactics and should only be used when it is determined to be the most reasonable tool or tactic
under the given circumstances, in accordance with the law and departmental policy. The
CEW is not intended to be an alternative to the use of deadly force when such is clearly
authorized and necessary, as described in this General Order.
a) Only officers trained and certified by a qualified instructor in the use of a CEW may
carry or use a CEW.
b) Only department issued or approved Conducted Electrical Weapons will be used.
c) All Field Service Division uniformed officers certified to carry and issued a CEW
will ensure that they carry the CEW on their person anytime they are on duty or off
duty in departmentally authorized employment.
d) A CEW may be used to:
(1) Defend against imminent physical attack,

(2) Prevent injury to any person, and
(3) Control vicious animals when necessary.
e) The CEW may be deployed only in response to a situation in which a reasonable

officer would perceive some immediate danger that could be mitigated by using this
defense weapon and when circumstances precluded the use of a baton or O.C. spray.
(1) The use of verbal direction will not be a prerequisite to the use of a CEW if
a subject is demonstrating an assaultive, combative, or threatening
behavior.
f) The CEW may also be used when it becomes necessary to immobilize an individual
who may be a threat to themselves, or others, the use of other methods is not
practical, and deadly force would be inappropriate.
g) The CEW will only be used as a control and compliance measure against a violent
individual or an individual threatening violence, and shall never be used for
retaliation or for any illicit or unlawful purpose.
h) Officers will use only the amount of control reasonably needed to effectively control
the situation. Once control is obtained, the use of a CEW will be discontinued
immediately.
i) Officers shall not deploy the CEW against individuals that are demonstrating
passive resistance. This is a device which is primarily used to defend one’s self, a
third party, or to gain control of a combative, violent or combative resistant
individual.
j) Except in a confrontation where deadly force would be justified, the officer shall not
intentionally fire the CEW at sensitive areas, or the chest area, nor shall he/she
direct the laser into the eyes of anyone.
k) When practical, prior to firing a CEW, the deploying officer will:
(1) Warn the suspect that he/she will be “Tased” if they do not cooperate,
(2) In a safe manner, unholster the CEW pointing it in a safe direction,

disengage the safety device and aim at the target, and
(3) Loudly announce that the CEW is being deployed to avoid confusion by
assisting officers.
l) Center mass of the subject’s back is the primary aiming point, and lower center
mass or legs are the secondary targets.
m) The CEW may be used during exigent circumstances in a drive stun mode if:
(1) Upon deployment, the probes do not strike the intended target, or
(2) In close quarters confrontations.

n) While in drive stun mode, target areas should be the abdominal region, hips, thigh,
and the brachial plexus origin on the side of the neck or the pelvic girdle.
o) Multiple applications of the CEW using the drive stun method are discouraged
unless doing so is deemed reasonable and can be articulated.
p) The CEW will not be used if:
(1) The officer recognizes the threat of sparks discharged by the CEW could
come into contact with flammable liquids or substances: (i.e. meth labs,
gasoline, or any similar accelerants. Officers should use discretion in the
use of a CEW when assisting/dealing with persons who have been sprayed
with a OC spray containing an unknown propellant by law enforcement
personnel from another agency/jurisdiction).
(2) The subject could suffer a fall from a significant height or onto objects
likely to cause serious injury.
(3) The subject is visibly pregnant.
(4) The effect of the CEW would present an increased risk of serious injury
due to the age or physical disability of an individual.
(5) The subject is operating a motor vehicle.
(6) The subject flees from officers, unless the officer reasonably believes the
subject has committed a violent offense or will likely commit a violent
offense if not apprehended in a timely manner.
(7) Against a non-violent, non-cooperative individual.
q) Once deployed, the CEW should be allowed to cycle for a period not to exceed five
(5) seconds. The CEW will not be applied additional times unless doing so is
reasonably necessary to gain control of the subject.
r) After the CEW has been deployed and the desired results have been achieved, the
officer must take measures to secure the individual in restraints as quickly as
possible in order to minimize the need for additional cycles of the CEW.
s) After control has been established, the deploying officer will contact an on duty
supervisor who will immediately respond to the scene.
(1) MEMS shall be requested at the scene in order to provide medical aid to
anyone injured in the incident. MEMS personnel are allowed to remove the
CEW probes, in accordance with MEMS protocol.
(2) Officers may remove CEW probes that are embedded in clothing.
t) The suspect will be transported to an emergency medical facility if deemed

necessary by MEMS personnel or if they meet the following guidelines:
(1) If the subject is pregnant,

(2) If the subject displays an altered mental status,
(3) If the suspect has persistent abnormal vital signs,
(4) If a probe has penetrated into the subject’s eye, or
(5) If a supervisor believes transport is necessary due to extenuating

circumstances.
u) Officers will indicate in the Incident Report, Arrest Disposition Report (ADR), and
the Use of Force Report that a CEW was used. If the subject is arrested, make note
of the time the CEW was used and notify the detention employees of the time, so
they will know to observe the subject and contact the appropriate medical personnel
if the subject should require those services.
v) Officers will carry the CEW and cartridges in the issued case or holster.
(1) The CEW will be worn on the duty belt in a manner which enables the
officer to draw the weapon using a cross draw, strong hand technique.
(2) Officers are to ensure they maintain possession of their assigned cartridges.
Officers will not share cartridges unless exigent circumstances exist and
can be articulated.
w) Officers will conduct a spark test at the beginning of each shift or assignment to
ensure the device is functioning properly.
(1) A spark test for the X26 is conducted by first ensuring the CEW is not
loaded with a live cartridge and, then putting the safety switch in the Up
(ARMED) position and test firing the device to observe an electrical
discharge.
(2) A spark test for the X2 can be done without unloading the X2. The test is
conducted by putting the safety switch in the Up (ARMED) position and,
then depressing the ARC switch to both watch and hear both bays arcing
from arm’s length.
x) Loading Taser Cartridges
(1) When loading the X26 TASER cartridges into the CEW, carefully hold the
TASER cartridge on both sides of the cartridge while keeping your fingers
and all parts of your body away from the front of the TASER cartridge at
all times. Ensure the safety switch is in the Down (SAFE) position and
point the CEW in a safe direction. Carefully insert the TASER cartridge
into the deployment bay of the X26 CEW until it is seated. You may hear
an audible click when this occurs. Gently tug the cartridge to ensure it’s
seated.
(2) When loading the X2, hold the Smart cartridge at both ends of the blast
doors while keeping fingers and all body parts away from the front of the

Smart cartridge at all times. Ensure the safety switch is in the Down
(SAFE) position and point the CEW in a safe direction. Always keep your
finger off the trigger while loading or unloading a CEW. Smart cartridges
are not reversible. The protruding circuit board must be inserted first so
that the circuit board is in the bottom of the cartridge bay. Insert the
protruding end into the deployment bay of the X2 until it is seated. You
may hear an audible click when this occurs. If loading with your left hand,
load from right to left to avoid placing your hands in front of a loaded
cartridge. Do the opposite when unloading or if loading with your right
hand. Do not push the Smart cartridge into the CEW by pushing the center
of the cartridge between the blast doors. This method can result in the
cartridge to malfunction.
y) When an officer is off-duty and not working in an enforcement capacity, the CEW
will be stored in a secure, climate controlled environment.
z) Officers will conform to training provided by the Department in the use of the
CEW.
aa) The use of the CEW against any person will be considered a use of force and each
incident will be documented, as detailed in subsection IV.A. of this General Order.
4. Less Lethal Launchers (i.e. Less Lethal Shotguns) - These weapons are an option in dealing
with situations where an individual may be intent on harming themselves or others.
a) These situations must require that the suspect be incapacitated and taken into
custody under circumstances that would:
(1) Otherwise require a justified use of deadly force as described in this

General Order or;
(2) Require the immediate intervention of an officer under circumstances that

requires the officer to place himself/herself in immediate danger of death
or injury unless a less lethal weapon is deployed.
b) The use of the less lethal launcher is a decision that must be made by the individual
officer considering the specific tactics and resources immediately available to
him/her. Under no circumstances should an officer attempt to use less lethal
weapons on a suspect who is capable of using deadly force on the officer or another
person unless supported by officers armed with deadly force.
c) Only officers that have been trained in the use of less lethal launchers shall check
out a less lethal weapon at the start of their shift. These weapons are maintained by
each of the Field Services Divisions for issue to trained personnel. The procedure
for maintaining these weapons shall be as follows:
(1) Less lethal launchers shall be carried unloaded in the patrol vehicle trunk,
and in the provided carrying case at all times when not in use;
(2) While outside, prior to securing the weapon in the trunk, the issued officer
shall be responsible for inspecting the weapon. Special attention should be
made to assure that the breech and barrel are clear and that the weapon is
unloaded;

(3) The issued officer shall assure that serviceable less lethal ammunition is in
the case and that no other ammunition is carried with this weapon;
(4) If the weapon is deployed during the course of an officer’s shift, he/she is
responsible for assuring that it is unloaded and secured in the case prior to
leaving the scene. If the weapon has been fired during the course of an
officer’s shift, it should be returned to the Training Division with a copy of
the Use of Force Report so that the weapon can be cleaned and ammunition
replenished;
(5) Each issued officer shall be responsible for assuring that the less lethal
launcher is returned at the end of his/her shift in the above-described
condition. Any defects in the weapon or ammunition should be
documented and directed to the Training Division. Any defective weapon
or ammunition should immediately be taken out of service;
(6) All officers trained in the use of less lethal launchers will qualify annually
with such weapons, which will be documented and instructed by the
Training Division.
d) The use of the Less Lethal Launchers against any person will be considered a use of
force and each incident will be documented, as detailed in subsection IV.A. of this
General Order.
5. Canines - The use of a police canine to search for or apprehend suspects will be considered a
use of force under this Order, when the canine inflicts injury to any person.
G. Flashlights - In the event it becomes necessary to use a flashlight as a defensive weapon, officers will
use it in the same manner as the baton.
a) Only departmental issued flashlights or those meeting the below specifications will
be carried by employees.
b) Officers may purchase and use, at their own expense, a flashlight which meets the
following requirements:
(1) A.B.S. plastic construction;
(2) Overall length shall not exceed 13 inches;
(3) Light head not to exceed 2 5/8 inches in diameter;
(4) Total weight, with batteries inserted, not to exceed 24 ounces;
(5) Flashlights will be of the 3-cell type or less.
H. Firearms - Striking a person with any firearm is prohibited, unless the firearm has already been drawn
or displayed in accordance with this Order, and the immediate use of physical force is necessary for
the defense of an officer or another person, under circumstances where the use of Deadly Force is not
justified and the opportunity to secure the firearm is not present.

I. Only employees demonstrating proficiency in the use of department authorized weapons will be
approved to carry such weapons.
J. Police Vehicles - Officers will not attempt to deliberately collide with other vehicles or to use police
vehicles to force any vehicle off the roadway.
K. Medical Treatment Required:
1. When any force is used, the officer shall attempt to determine if any injuries have occurred as
soon as practical.
2. If a suspect is obviously injured, alleges injury or requests medical assistance when an officer
has used lethal or less-than-lethal force, the officer will immediately notify a supervisor.
3. In these instances, officers will provide medical treatment for the offender by:
a) Transporting the offender to the U.A.M.S. hospital, or,
b) Requesting an ambulance for transport to U.A.M.S., if appropriate.
IV. Reports and Documentation
A. Officers employing force to control, arrest or prevent the escape of any person, will, prior to the end
of the officer’s tour of duty, submit a detailed report outlining the circumstances and exact type and
amount of force used in the following instances:
1. Whenever the use of force results in, may reasonably result in, or is alleged to have resulted
in a physical injury to the person. Such force includes, but is not limited to, those instances
when:
a) Physical force is employed to restrain or control an individual, if the restraining or

controlling act results in the person falling or being thrown to the ground;
b) An officer strikes, or attempts to strike, another person with his hands, feet, baton,
or other instrumentality, device, or method of force, whether or not injury results to
the person; or
c) A person is injured by a police canine utilized to search for or apprehend suspects.
2. Whenever a person is charged with resisting arrest or battery on an officer of this

Department;
3. Whenever a person complains of incurring a physical injury, as the result of physical force
employed by an officer of this Department;
4. Whenever an officer or supervisor believes documentation pertaining to any force employed,

or not employed, by an officer, is necessary for the protection of the officer, the Department,
or the City; and,

5. Prior to the end of the supervisor’s tour of duty, they will enter the basic components of the
use of force into the Blue Team program, which will include the involved officer(s), involved
citizen(s), location of the incident, and the incident number.
B. The following procedures will be followed for review and documentation of an officer’s use of force,
as outlined in this Order:
1. As soon as the suspect is restrained and the scene is stabilized, the involved officer will
immediately contact a supervisor.
2. The supervisor will immediately evaluate the circumstances, amount and necessity of the
force used.
3. An Incident Report will be completed.
4. An Officer’s Report (Form 5600-02) will be made with a complete and detailed account of
the exact force used.
5. A Use of Force Report will be entered into the Blue Team program.
6. The reports will be reviewed by the officer’s supervisor, who will make a written evaluation
and forward the reports through the Chain of Command to be reviewed at each level and
submitted to the Office of the Chief of Police.
7. If necessary, after review by the appropriate Bureau Commander, the Use of Force file will
be forwarded to the Chief of Police for his findings and disposition.
8. The following Use of Force files will be forwarded to the Chief of Police for his findings and
disposition:
a) Any file wherein a potential violation of Departmental policy has been identified;
b) Any file where counseling or other disciplinary action has been recommended;
c) Any file where there is some element of disagreement in the Chain of Command
evaluations;
d) Any file where an officer has been injured; and,
e) Any file where there is an indication of a safety or policy issue which should be
addressed.
9. After final review, the Use of Force file will be forwarded to Professional Standards for
computer data entry. The Professional Standards Section will retain files where any type of
disciplinary action was taken. All other files will be routed to the appropriate Division
Commander for retention.
10. The Division Commander will ensure that all provisions of this Order are observed, reports
are submitted in a timely basis, and each Use of Force file is maintained in his Division.

C. Files regarding the use of force, including resisting arrest, battery on officers and canine bites, will be
prepared as follows:
1. All documentation shall be placed in a file folder and secured at the top with an ACCO two
hole fastener.
2. Any photographs or audio/video recordings will be placed in a manila envelope and attached
to the inside front file cover.
3. The initial evaluating supervisor shall be responsible for ensuring that necessary
documentation is obtained and properly placed in the file, before routing it through the Chain
of Command.
4. The order of included documentation shall be:
a) Lieutenant’s evaluation;
b) Sergeant’s evaluation;
c) Incident Report(s) (copies);
d) Involved Officer’s Report (Form 5600-02);
e) Printed copy of the Use of Force Report from the Blue Team program;
f) Copy of the Arrest Report (if any);
g) Medical treatment information (if any);
h) Computer printout of suspect’s arrest record (if any); and
i) Copies of the Workers Compensation Forms, if an injury has occurred to an

involved employee.
D. A copy of all Use of Force files involving canines will be forwarded to the Headquarters Division
Commander after the file has been reviewed and evaluated.
E. When an officer employs the use of O.C. spray, or uses physical force to restrain, move and/or place
a suspect in a vehicle, where no blows are exchanged by either the officer(s) or the suspect, the
following procedures will be followed:
1. The involved officer will:
a) Contact his supervisor for evaluation of the incident;
b) Specify the exact amount of force employed and list the involvement of any other
officer(s) in his original Incident Report concerning the incident; and,
c) When completing the Incident Report in the IRDE System, select “Use of Force” as
an incident type.

2. The supervisor will:
a) Immediately evaluate the circumstances, amount, and necessity of the force;
b) Sign the original report, as indication of his approval of the officer’s actions;
c) Ensure that a Blue Team program Use of Force Report is completed and a printed
copy of the Use of Force Report is forwarded along with a copy of the Incident
Report through the Chain of Command to the office of the Chief of Police, where it
will be signed at each level.
3. If the supervisor does not approve of the officer’s actions, following his evaluation, he will
follow the guidelines set forth in Section IV. C of this Order.
4. Each division will be responsible for maintaining documentation on each Use of Force
incident.
F. The use of force report will be utilized by the Chain of Command to evaluate the actions of all
officers involved, in order to determine if the policies and procedures of the Department were
adhered to.
G. Annual analysis
1. The Training Division Commander will be responsible for compilation of a quarterly

statistical report of all Use of Force incidents. This report should be completed and
forwarded to the Office of the Chief of Police no later than the 10 th of each quarter (April,
July, October, January).
2. The Training Division Commander will be responsible for compilation of an annual analysis
of all Use of Force incidents, policies, and reporting procedures. This analysis will review
patterns or trends that may indicate training needs, equipment upgrades, and/or policy
modification. The annual analysis shall be forwarded to the Office of the Chief of Police no
later than February 15th of each year.
V. Deadly Force Investigation and Review
A. Investigation Requirements
1. Whenever a Little Rock Police Officer becomes involved in an incident in which either the
officer or another person is injured or killed as a result of police action and/or the use of
Deadly Force, or whenever an officer intentionally employs Deadly Force, but no injury or
death results, two separate investigations shall be initiated - a criminal investigation and an
administrative investigation. (This shall not be applicable to those instances where the death
or injury is the result of a motor vehicle accident.)
a) When the use of deadly force by an officer results in someone being injured or
killed, or in other high profile cases (at the discretion of the Chief) a briefing may be
held the following day in the Chief’s conference room. The meeting will be for the
purpose of developing a Press release and statement to the Department. Any
confidential information or facts will remain confidential. The meeting will consist
of:

(1) Chief of Police;
(2) Assistant Chiefs;
(3) Major Crimes Division Supervisor(s);
(4) Professional Standards Section Supervisor(s);
(5) Crime Scene Supervisor;
(6) Public Affairs Officer;
(7) Division Commander of the Officer involved; and,
(8) Other individuals as deemed necessary.
2. The Major Crimes Division will conduct the criminal investigation to facilitate successful
prosecution, if deemed appropriate, by the Prosecuting Attorney’s Office.
3. The Crime Scene Search Unit will be summoned to the scene of all officer-involved
shootings, and will process the scene for evidence in compliance with standard investigative
procedures.
4. The Professional Standards Section will conduct a separate administrative investigation to

ensure compliance with Little Rock Police Department Rules and Regulations and these
General Orders. Professional Standards will be immediately notified of all intentional uses
of Deadly Force, and will respond to the scene to conduct the administrative investigation.
5. Unintentional weapons’ discharges not resulting in physical injury will be investigated by the
involved officer’s Chain of Command.
B. On Scene Investigation and Responsibilities
1. The first supervisor on the scene of an officer-involved shooting or other incidents

established above shall take charge and limit unnecessary access to the scene.
a) The field supervisor in charge at the scene will be responsible for the integrity of the
crime scene until it is released to the Major Crimes Division supervisor.
b) The ranking supervisor from the Major Crimes Division will be in command of the
overall initial investigation, and will notify the Pulaski County Prosecuting
Attorney’s Office and the City Attorney’s Office.
2. Once the situation has been stabilized, the officer involved will relate a brief account of the
incident to the field supervisor prior to the arrival of Detective personnel, so the supervisor
may brief ranking officers requiring administrative information.
3. When the scene is stabilized, the field supervisor in charge shall take possession of all
weapon(s) in possession of the officer(s) at the time of the incident (including back-up
weapons). The supervisor shall render the weapon(s) safe in the presence of the Crime Scene
Technician prior to relinquishing the weapon(s) for processing. Both the supervisor and the

Crime Scene Technician shall document the transfer of the weapon(s) on the Evidence
Transmittal Form LRPD 5480-11 identifying the weapon, location, date, time and persons
involved. Crime Scene shall then maintain custody of the weapon for purposes of storage and
testing. Weapon(s) seized from the involved officer(s), determined by the Major Crimes
Division investigators not to have been used in the incident, shall be returned to the officer(s)
upon the issuing of a replacement weapon.
4. The Shift or Section Commander and/or Division Commander may relate basic facts to the
news media, or have the Public Affairs Officer make the initial release.
5. If the officer involved is not injured, he should retire some distance from the scene to await
the arrival of the officer-in-charge of the investigation. This should be done in the company
of a companion officer chosen by the involved officer, such as another supervisor or an
officer of equal rank who was not a witness to or involved in the incident. It will be the
responsibility of the field supervisor to ensure a companion officer is made available. The
purpose of a companion officer is to serve the involved officer in a supportive role.
6. The first supervisor on the scene shall assess the involved officer(s) for physical injury. If
physical injury is noted, medical personnel shall be summoned immediately. Should the
injury be suspected of having been caused by a gunshot, the injured officer shall be
immediately transported to a medical facility for examination and treatment by a licensed
physician.
7. When the Major Crimes Division supervisor arrives at the scene, he will be briefed by the
field supervisor and, if he deems necessary, the involved officer will report back to the scene
and respond to the needs of the investigation. When the Major Crimes Division supervisor
determines that the involved officer is no longer needed at the scene, the companion officer
will transport him/her to the Major Crimes Division.
8. The companion officer shall:
a) Accompany the involved officer to the Major Crimes Division offices after release
from the scene. The companion officer shall remain with the involved officer unless
the officer desires to be left alone.
b) Be responsible for acting as a calming influence and monitor the involved officer
for signs of critical incident stress or trauma. If signs of trauma or shock are
evident, appropriate medical assistance shall be summoned to the scene and the on-
scene supervisor shall be notified immediately.
9. The companion officer shall take all measures to ensure they do not:
a) Interfere with the preliminary investigation in any manner.
b) Discuss the facts or specifics of the incident with the involved officer or jeopardize
the criminal investigation.
c) Make any statements that infringe on the privacy of the involved officer.
10. The involved officer will refrain from discussing the details of the incident with anyone
except Departmental personnel assigned to the investigation, the Prosecuting Attorney’s
Office, Departmentally-provided and/or personal Psychologist or counselor, the officer’s
private attorney, the officer’s chosen clergy, and the officer’s immediate family.

11. A designated representative with the F.O.P. may have contact with the involved officer for
the purpose of arranging an attorney retained by them or for assisting the companion officer
with notification and transportation of family members.
12. Any employee not directly involved in the investigation shall refrain from lingering in or near
the crime scene or investigative offices of the Department.
13. Any employee not participating in the authorized Departmental investigation who has contact
with the involved officer(s) before conclusion of the initial investigation shall document that
contact in writing for inclusion in the investigative files.
14. The field supervisor at the scene shall have someone not involved in the incident prepare the
initial Incident Report and other necessary reports and have copies delivered to the Major
Crimes Division after supervisory review.
15. Prior to the end of the field supervisor’s tour of duty, they will enter the basic components of
the use of force into the Blue Team program, which will include the involved officer(s),
involved citizen(s), location of the incident, and the incident number.
16. The involved officer shall be afforded an early opportunity to communicate with family
members. The person designated as a companion may assist in making this notification. The
Major Crimes Division supervisor shall ensure that this is accomplished.
17. In order to ensure the integrity of an investigation and protect the best interest of the involved
officer(s), the Training Division will ensure that all personnel receive adequate instruction
detailing the responsibilities of a companion officer.
C. Major Crimes Division Investigation
1. Officers who actually employ Deadly Force shall be requested to make a written and/or oral
statement.
2. Statements from officers involved in the incident shall be taken by Major Crimes Division
supervisors.
3. The Major Crimes Division will prepare a briefing sheet for Shift and Section Commanders,
who will brief their personnel as soon as practical.
4. Upon completion of the Major Crimes Division’s investigation, a copy of the investigative
file will be forwarded to the Office of the Chief of Police for review before forwarding to the
Prosecuting Attorney’s Office.
5. Upon conclusion of the investigation by the Prosecuting Attorney, the Major Crimes Division
Commander will notify the officer(s) in writing of their findings.
6. It shall be the responsibility of the Major Crimes Division supervisor to update the officer,
his supervisors, the Office of the Chief of Police, and the Pulaski County Prosecuting
Attorney’s Office, as to the status of the investigation.
D. Issuance of Replacement Weapon

1. The field supervisor in charge of the scene will notify the officer(s) involved Division
Commander and advise him/her that a replacement weapon is needed for an officer involved
in a shooting if he feels it necessary to replace the weapon immediately.
2. The Departmental Armorer shall issue the replacement weapon(s) during regular business
hours. In the absence of the Departmental Armorer, the Training Sergeant or his designate
shall be responsible for the issuing of weapons.
3. After business hours, the Division Commander shall advise a Major Crimes Division
Supervisor to remove a replacement weapon from the Major Crimes Division’s safe for the
officer(s) involved in the shooting.
a) When issuing a firearm, the log will be completed by the issuing personnel and
initialed by the receiving officer on a LRPD Quartermaster Issue/Return Inventory
Tracking Log 5210-02 and forwarded to the Training Division Commander.
4. If more replacement weapon(s) are needed, then the supervisor will advise Communications
of the location where the weapon needs to be brought in order for it to be issued to the
involved police officer. The In-Service Training Sergeant shall contact the Training Division
Armorer or respond himself/herself and issue the weapon. It shall be the responsibility of the
In-Service Training Sergeant to notify Communications of an alternate call-out person
whenever he is unavailable.
a) Prior to returning to full duty, the officer involved will need to respond to the
Training Division and qualify with a passing score using the newly issued weapon.
5. The Departmental Armorer shall inspect those weapons kept in the Major Crimes Division
semi-annually.
E. Employee Assistance Referral
1. Officers who have employed Deadly Force which has resulted in injury or death to any
person, will be referred to the Employee Assistance Program as soon as practical after the
incident.
a) Officers will attend the confidential counseling session, which will be provided by
the Employee Assistance Program.
b) The involved officer’s Division Commander will be responsible for ensuring that
such counseling is scheduled and completed, and that appropriate supporting
documentation is forwarded to the Professional Standards Section.
2. Officers who have employed Deadly Force, which has resulted in injury or death to any
person, will be placed on Administrative Leave until after the officer(s) has attended
mandatory EAP sessions, a thorough administrative review has been completed or a decision
by the Chief of Police or his designee has been made to return to work. During this time the
officer(s) will make themself available to assist with the Professional Standards investigation.
a) Officers who have been placed on such leave will not engage in off-duty
employment during this time, nor are they expected to perform police-related
functions, except under extreme circumstances. Officers on Administrative Leave
will be available at the direction of the Professional Standards Section to assist in
the investigation of the Deadly Force incident.

b) Officers who have been placed on such leave will not be returned to normal duties
until completion of E.A.P. counseling.
c) The involved officer’s Division Commander or the Professional Standards Section

Commander will be responsible for ensuring that the officer is placed on leave and
that such action is documented on an Administrative Notification Form for the
Professional Standards file.
d) The involved officer’s Division Commander will authorize his return to normal
duties.
e) Administrative Leave may be extended at the discretion of the appropriate Division

Commander as he deems necessary.
F. Professional Standards Investigation
1. The Professional Standards investigation will be conducted in conjunction with but separate
from the Major Crimes Division’s investigation.
2. The Professional Standards Investigator shall advise the involved officer(s) of his rights, as
to the administrative investigation process. Those rights are:
a) The right of the Department to conduct an administrative investigation into the

specific Deadly Force incident;
b) The right to know if he is suspected of misconduct which, if sustained, could be

grounds for administrative disciplinary action up to and including dismissal;
c) The right to refuse to answer any questions, but such refusal shall be grounds for
disciplinary action, including dismissal;
d) That the results of the Professional Standards investigative interview will not be
used against the officer(s) in any subsequent criminal proceeding (Garrity v. New
Jersey, 385 U.S. 493 (1967)); and,
e) The interviewed officer will be provided a copy of the statements he made during
the course of the administrative investigation, upon his request.
3. The Professional Standards investigator shall prepare a report on adherence to policy, and
submit the Professional Standards file to the involved officer’s Chain of Command for
review and recommendations to be forwarded to the Chief of Police.
G. Deadly Force Review
1. The Deadly Force Review Board is established for the purpose of reviewing and evaluating
incidents of firearms discharge, both intentional and unintentional, resulting in injury or
death by sworn members while in the performance of their duties as police officers, and those
incidents where an officer or another person is killed by any other means, except motor
vehicle accidents.
2. All incidents, as noted above, will be reviewed within ten (10) days after the Professional
Standards Section has completed its investigation.

3. The Chief of Police, at his discretion, may have the Deadly Force Review Board review any
other firearms discharge or intentional use of Deadly Force not resulting in injury or death.
4. The objective of the Deadly Force Review Board is to make recommendations to the Chief of
Police concerning firearms discharges and other incidents described herein, based on:
a) Avoidability of similar incidents in the future;
b) Adequacy of training;
c) Adherence to training;
d) Adequacy of supervision; and,
e) Adequacy of investigation.
5. The Assistant Chief of Police - Field Services Bureau shall appoint the Deadly Force Review
Board for each incident, comprised of the following:
a) Chairman, Captain, not in the officer’s Chain of Command.
b) Member, Lieutenant, not in the officer’s Chain of Command.
c) Member, Lieutenant, not in the officer’s Chain of Command.
d) Member, Sergeant, not in the officer’s Chain of Command.
e) Member, Training Division representative (Sergeant or above).
f) The City Attorney or his representative (may be asked to be present as an adviser).
6. The Chairman will convene the Deadly Force Review Board for the purpose of reviewing the
Major Crimes Division investigation and the Professional Standards investigation of each
incident.
7. The Chairman of the Deadly Force Review Board is authorized to discuss/clarify any matters the
board identifies/requests pertaining to the incident with appropriate Major Crimes, Professional
Standards or other divisional personnel prior to the conclusion of the board and submission of the
final report.
8. After conducting the review, the Review Board shall develop its findings and
recommendations. The Chairman will submit a written report specifically covering the issues
identified in subsection G.4.a. through e. and any recommendations to the Office of the Chief
of Police within five days.
H. All investigations shall be completed within ninety days from the date of the incident, unless
evidentiary or investigatory considerations warrant delay and the Chief of Police approves.
I. The Chain of Command review and evaluation should not exceed the deadline established by
Professional Standards Section upon submission.

J. The Shooting Review Board shall complete its review as prescribed by Subsection G of this Order.
VI. Other and Accidental Discharges of Firearms (may not constitute the use of force)
A. Accidental Discharge of Firearm By an Employee (No injuries involved)
1. This procedure will be followed any time a member of the Department, on duty or off duty,
accidentally discharges a firearm and no injury or death occurs.
2. Procedure
a) Any employee who accidentally discharges a firearm will contact an on-duty police
supervisor who will initiate an investigation.
b) The supervisor will complete an Incident Report and ensure that the employee(s)
involved submit a detailed Officer’s Report on the incident.
c) The supervisor will complete a Divisional Investigation report in the Blue Team
program, and will include a printed copy of this report in the file.
d) The supervisor will evaluate the employee’s performance and submit his findings, in
writing, to be reviewed at each level in the Chain of Command.
e) The involved employee’s Division Commander will review and maintain the files on
all accidental weapons discharges.
B. Accidental Discharge of Firearm By an Employee (With Injury)
1. This procedure will be followed any time a member of the Department, on duty or off duty,
accidentally discharges a firearm resulting in injury or death.
2. Investigation requirements
a) Any accidental discharge of a firearm by an employee resulting in death or serious

physical injury will be fully investigated, pursuant to Section V of this Order.
b) The supervisor will complete a Divisional Investigation report or a Use of Force

report, whichever is appropriate, in the Blue Team program, and will include a
printed copy of this report in the file.
c) Any employee who accidentally discharges a firearm resulting in injury where there
is no threat of death or permanent disability will immediately contact an on-duty
police supervisor, who will respond to the scene and initiate an investigation.
d) The supervisor will complete an Incident Report and ensure that the involved
employee(s) submit a detailed Officer’s Report, as soon as practical after the
incident. The supervisor in charge may also request assistance from the Major
Crimes Division, as needed, toward the successful completion of the investigation
and for any appropriate criminal investigation necessary.

e) CSSU will be summoned to the scene and will photograph and process the scene as
needed.
f) The Professional Standards Section will be notified and briefed as to the specific
circumstances of the incident.
C. Discharge of Firearm Upon Animals
1. This procedure will be followed any time a member of the Department discharges a weapon
at an animal while in an on-duty capacity.
2. Any officer who discharges a firearm upon an animal will contact an on-duty police
supervisor who will initiate an investigation.
3. The supervisor will complete an Incident Report and a Use of Deadly Force Report, and will
ensure that the involved officer(s) submit a detailed Officer’s Report of the incident.
4. The supervisor will complete a Divisional Investigation report in the Blue Team program,
and will include a printed copy of this report in the file.
5. The supervisor will evaluate the officer’s performance and submit his findings, in writing, to
be reviewed at each level in the chain of command.
6. The involved officer’s Division Commander will review and maintain the files on all
weapons discharges upon animals.
D. Investigative review
1. The supervisor will evaluate the officer’s performance and submit his findings, in writing, to
be reviewed at each level in the chain of command to the office of the Chief of Police.
2. The completed investigative file will be forwarded to the Professional Standards Office, who
will record the file according to Professional Standards procedures.
E. Professional Standards shall maintain the files on all accidental weapons discharges with injury.

GENERAL ORDER
G. O. 304 STORAGE OF PROPERTY

A. The purpose of this Order is to establish procedures and guidelines to provide for the security and
control of seized, recovered, and evidentiary property, as well as abandoned, lost, or found
property, in the custody of the Department.
B. Any property, brought into department control by employees must be logged into department
records and secured in the provided storage areas, as soon as possible, before the employee’s shift
ends.
C. Before any property is stored, the employee, who obtained the property, must make an effort to
identify and notify the owner or custodian of the property, and document such actions in his
report.
D. Personal use of any property is strictly prohibited.
II. Property Classification
A. Items stored in the Property Room will be classified utilizing the following three categories:
1. Evidence;
2. Stored; and/or,
3. Found.
B. All property submitted for storage, shall have an Incident Report written and an incident number
identified on the property tag and in the computer records. Detectives assigned to the Special
Investigations Division, will follow procedures outlined in their Divisional Operating Procedures.
C. Evidence
1. All items stored under this classification must be linked directly to an identifiable crime
and have a direct bearing upon the prosecution of the offense.
2. All items stored as “Evidence” requires written authority from the officer, case
detective, Prosecuting Attorney, or Judge (Court Order) before a final disposition can be
made.
D. Stored Property

GENERAL ORDERS G. O. 304 STORAGE OF PROPERTY
1. All items stored with this classification may be released or disposed of, at any time, by
property personnel, without prior notice to the recovering officer and/or case detective.
2. If the owner of the property is known, it shall be the responsibility of the employee
storing the property, to notify the owner and explain procedures for claiming the
property. Any notification must be documented in the Accident Report, Incident
Report, or Supplemental Report; whichever is appropriate.
3. Notification shall be made by telephone or on a form provided by the Detective Division

for notification by mail, when telephone contact cannot be made.
4. The recovering employee will be responsible for notifying the owner and Property
personnel when such information is obtained at a later date.
E. Found Property
1. This classification shall be used on all property where the owner is not known or cannot
be identified (no identification or serial number, bicycles, lawnmowers, hand tools, etc.).
2. All items stored with this classification may be released or disposed of by property
personnel, without prior notice to the officer and/or case detective.
III. Storing Property - General Procedures
A. No personnel will accept for storage any item which is being stored with the intent to punish or
inconvenience any individual, or when the storage of such item is clearly unnecessary.
B. All items presented for storage must be properly packaged and sealed with officer’s initials and
date inscribed across the package and tape, whenever possible. Multiple items stored under one
(1) Tag Number shall be secured together to prevent separation in transport.
C. All items must have a computer entry and a bar code label affixed, prior to being stored.
Instructions for computer entry are available at each terminal where property may be stored. If the
computer is down for any reason, an appropriate red or blue property tag will be completed and
attached to the property.
D. Any property stored during periods when the Property Room is closed must be secured in the
provided lockers. The computer entry record must reflect which locker contains the property.
E. Any item that has an identification or serial number will be stored separately from other pieces of
property. The recovering employee will run an NCIC/ACIC check on the property to determine if
the item is stolen or wanted. Should the NCIC/ACIC computer system be down, the inability to
check the item shall be noted in the Officer’s Incident Report. A copy of the Incident Report
should be attached to the property.

G. O. 304 STORAGE OF PROPERTY LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
F. No personnel will accept for storage any of the following items:
1. Perishable food;
2. Explosives;
3. Detonators;
4. Fireworks;
5. Corrosives;
6. Bottled gases;
7. Gasoline or any other flammable material; or,
8. Any material or substance which poses a health risk to personnel storing or handling
such items. (Should the question of health risk arise, the Administration Division
Commander or his designee will be contacted to make the determination).
G. The dangerous items listed above will be stored at the Central Fire Station or by another agency,
which is responsible for handling such items. The employee should request a receipt to maintain
the chain of custody on items that are evidence. This receipt should be included in the case file.
H. Stored vehicles will not be entered into the property inventory computer system, except as
authorized by the Headquarters Division Commander or his designee.
I. A computer entry, or a bar code label, will not be made for any item not in custody of the
Department.
J. Any item presented for storage in the property room, should be packaged using the guidelines
listed below. Employees should use the smallest package possible to help utilize space in the
property room.
1. Small items will be placed in clasped envelopes no smaller than 6”x9”.
2. Other items can be placed in various sized paper bags or cardboard boxes, when
possible.
3. Any items that cannot be secured together must have separate computer entries and
property labels.
4. Any item soiled with blood or other body fluids will be dried in Crime Scene lockers
before being sealed in paper or cardboard and marked “CAUTION BIOHAZARD”.
K. If special conditions exist, concerning the stored item (such as, “To be printed”, “Caution” -
“Sharp Edges”, etc.), the officer shall ensure the packages are labeled appropriately. If necessary,
an Officer’s Report will be attached to the item stored.

L. Containers filled with non-flammable liquids shall be properly sealed or the container emptied
before storage.
M. Power equipment containing gasoline will not be accepted for storage within the Property Room
until the gasoline is removed.
N. Hypodermic syringes, knives, or any other sharp objects must be made safe before storage. The
State Crime Lab has requested that all syringes be packaged in puncture proof containers and
labeled “CAUTION BIOHAZARD”, prior to requesting analysis.
O. All blood and urine shall be stored in the refrigerator in a package to prevent leakage. An
Arkansas State Crime Laboratory submission form shall be completed by the storing employee.
The sample will be submitted by Property Room personnel.
P. Items, such as old or damaged televisions, refrigerators, bicycle frames, old automobile parts,
tires, etc., that have obviously been abandoned and are not of an evidentiary nature, will not be
stored in the Property Room. The sanitation department or other city agency will be notified to
pick up these items.
Q. Items determined to be inoperable or have no value by the Administration Division Commander or

his designee may be destroyed.
R. Large items or large quantities of property that will not fit in the provided lockers, will be securely
stored in cages located within the foyer of the main Property Room, 600 West Markham. The
keys to the overhead door, the outside double doors, and the security code may be obtained from
the Desk Officer. The Desk Officer will complete a log indicating the time in/out and the
employee requiring access.
1. The storing officer will transport or make arrangements to transport large items, such as
bicycles to the main Property Room. Those items will be secured by chain and lock
within the foyer of the Main Property Room.
2. No items will be left unsecured at anytime in any property facility. If property cannot
be secured, Communications will be notified to contact the on-call property personnel
for assistance.
S. Evidence received from the State Crime Lab shall be stored by Property Room personnel, so they
may account for all items.
T. Items presented by other agencies for storage will not be accepted by this Department, except
those items which are part of a Departmental investigation.
U. Property personnel shall ensure that procedures and packaging guidelines are followed. If
packaging or procedures have not been followed, the Property Supervisor will contact the
Officer’s Supervisor and have the Officer report to the Property Room no later than close of the
next business day.
IV. Storage of Money or Jewelry
A. All money and jewelry must be counted and itemized by two (2) people prior to storage.

1. Two (2) officers will conduct a count of the currency and separate by denomination.
Each officer will conduct an independent count and sign the “Little Rock Police
Currency Recording Form” (5600-92) verifying the total amount stored.
2. All currency will be recorded on LRPD Form 5600-92 which will then be attached to
the outside of the envelope prior to storage.
3. All jewelry will be itemized prior to being sealed.
B. All money or jewelry must be sealed with scotch or evidence tape, with the employee’s signature
across the seal. Money and jewelry may also be heat sealed, with the storing employee’s signature
across the seal. The employee witnessing the counting and itemizing of money or jewelry, should
also sign across the seal.
C. All money or jewelry shall be stored separately from other items of property.
D. Property personnel will ensure that procedures are followed, before accepting the property for
storage.
E. Amounts over $5,000.00 shall be stored with a Property Supervisor at the main Property Room
during normal office hours. Amounts over $5000.00 that are stored after hours, requires the call-
out of a Property supervisor to secure the money or valuables in the safe. Amounts over
$5,000.00 will not be secured in the lockers provided for storage of property after hours.
F. If any member of the police department, sworn or civilian, during the course of his/her duties,
comes in contact with U.S. Currency in the amount of $2,000.00 or more that must be stored for
any reason, he/she will immediately notify his/her immediate supervisor. The notified supervisor
shall:
1. The supervisor shall be involved in the separation of the currency by denominations and
will ensure that, once separated; each member of the counting team counts and verifies
the total amount of money in each denomination. Should the individual totals be
different, a recount will be conducted to correct any discrepancies.
2. The supervisor shall ensure the amounts of each denomination and the total is correctly
recorded on a “Little Rock Police Currency Recording Form” (5600-92).
3. The supervisor and the two (2) employees used to assist in counting the currency will
sign the “Little Rock Police Currency Recording Form” (5600-92) verifying the total
amount stored.
V. Storage of Weapons
A. All firearms must be unloaded prior to storage.
B. The employee recovering a firearm, shall run an NCIC/ACIC check on the firearm, before it is
stored. If stolen or wanted, a copy of this computer printout shall be attached to the property prior
to storage.
1. If the computer systems are down and the employee is unable to run a check on the
weapon, this shall be noted in the employee’s report. A copy of this report should be
attached to the property, prior to storage.

2. The recovering employee shall be responsible for notifying the appropriate Detective
Unit.
3. The officer or the case detective shall be responsible for notifying the owner of the
firearm and documenting such notification.
C. Weapons which fall into the classification as Unusual/Exotic, must be made safe by a department
armor, prior to storing. In accordance with Training Division call out procedures, the department
armor will inspect and ensure that the weapon is unloaded and safe. The armor will document that
the weapon is safe for storage and attach this documentation to the weapon or package so it can be
inspected.
D. Only one firearm will be stored under a single property tag number.
E. Other weapons, such as knives, razors, ice picks, etc., which do not have an identifying number,
may be stored under a single tag number. However, these items must be covered and made safe,
prior to storage.
F. Ammunition will be stored separately from the firearm.
G. No other property may be stored with any firearm.
VI. Storage of Narcotics
A. Narcotics evidence will be heat-sealed in plastic bags, with the employee’s signature across the
seal. Narcotic evidence such as plant material that is considered green or may contain moisture or
have the potential to become toxic, shall be packaged in paper products.
B. The material will be clearly identified and no other property may be stored with narcotics.
C. All narcotics will be stored separately from other items of property.
D. All narcotics will have a quantity or a weight identified both in the computer record and on the bar
code label, prior to being stored. Narcotics will be weighed with scales, provided at each storage
facility, after heat-sealing in plastic.
E. A standard State Crime Lab submission sheet shall be completed by the Officer/Detective on all
evidence to be sent to the lab for analysis.
VII. Storage of Rape Kits
A. Officers, who receive notification of a rape incident and confirm a rape report is to be written, will
accompany the victim to the appropriate medical facility.
B. Officers will remain at the medical facility until completion of the victim's rape examination.
C. Officers will take charge of clothing, rape kit, or any other evidence related to the incident. The
clothing and rape kit will be stored separately under individual barcode numbers; however, all
items may be placed into the same locker. Rape kits shall not be refrigerated.

D. The storage information will be made part of the Offense Report, and a copy of the report will be
forwarded to the Detective Division.
VIII. Storage of Arrested Persons Property
A. These guidelines apply only to property of an arrested person which must be stored for safe
keeping when the person is incarcerated by a Little Rock Police Officer. Any evidence or
contraband seized from or as a result of the arrest must be processed in compliance with other
sections of this Order. Property stored in accordance with this section is intended to be released
back to the owner as soon as they are released from custody and must meet the classification
requirements of “stored property”.
B. The following procedures and guidelines will be followed when storing property under this
provision:
1. All property taken from a person arrested and stored for safekeeping will be recorded on
a “Little Rock Police Department Stored Property Receipt” Form 5500-95 and on the
associated incident report.
2. The incident report will indicate that a Little Rock Police Department Stored Property
Receipt form was completed and a copy was given to the arrestee or placed with his
immediate possessions.
3. The Little Rock Police Department Stored Property Receipt Form (5500-95) is for use
only when storing a person’s property that has been incarcerated under provision of this
section. The form is printed with two copies: the White copy to be sent to the Property
Room and the Yellow copy for the person whose property was stored. This form is not
interchangeable with and does not replace any other form used to store property under
other conditions.
4. The owner of the stored property will be required to sign the receipt acknowledging the
accuracy of the items listed on the receipt if they are able. If the owner refuses to sign
the receipt or is unable to, the officer will indicate this by writing “Refused” or
“Unable” in the space provided for the owner’s signature.
5. The completed Little Rock Police Department Stored Property Receipt Form will be
attached to the property tag on the outside of the item. In the case of multiple items
being stored from the same person, it only needs to be attached to one of the items.
6. When storing currency under this section, officers will not use the Little Rock Police
Currency Recording Form 5600-92, but are required to list the currency on the Little
Rock Police Department Stored Property Receipt Form 5500-95 and abide by all
requirements for the counting, verification, and storage of currency as defined in Section
IV of this Order.
7. Currency, jewelry, and general property must be stored under separate property tag
numbers even though only one Little Rock Police Department Stored Property Receipt
Form 5500-95 is required.
8. The property tag number(s) of each item will be recorded on the Little Rock Police
Department Stored Property Receipt Form in the space provided when the items are
entered into the system. It is not necessary for these numbers to be recorded on the Pink
copy of the form.

IX. Chain of Custody
A. All Police Department employees shall follow the below guidelines when checking property out of
the Property Room. Any employee, requesting several items, should notify Property Room
employees’ one day in advance, so they may be pulled and ready in time.
1. After the item requested is presented by property personnel, the employee will verify all
information and sign the computer printout indicating that he took custody of the
property.
2. The property technician, who issues the item(s), will sign the same printout. Property
Room personnel will retain the receipts and place them in their permanent file.
B. All Police Department employees shall follow the below guidelines, when returning property to
the Property Room.
1. During normal working hours, the employee returning the property to the Property
Room will verify all information and sign the computer printout indicating the property
was returned.
2. The property technician receiving the item(s), will sign the same printout indicating that
he took custody of the property. In addition, all narcotics will be weighed and this
weight documented.
C. Property returned after the Property Room has closed will be secured in the lockers provided for
storage after hours. The employee returning the property, shall make note of the date and time the
item was returned and attach this to the property. Property Room personnel will attach this sheet
to the original checkout sheet and place them in their permanent file.
D. Should property be retained by a court, the employee, who checked out the property, must obtain a
court order or receipt detailing the item(s) being retained by the court for “Evidence”. The
employee, who checked out the property, will return this court order or receipt to Property Room
personnel, who will make the proper notations in the computer system and file the court’s
documentation.
E. Any item checked out from the Property Room and not returned by the employee, will cause a
notice to be sent to the employee’s Division Commander. Employees signing out property are
responsible for ensuring the proper receipts are provided to Property Room personnel. Property
computer records will be checked monthly to ensure that all items were returned, according to
policy.
F. Property Room employees cannot pick-up property from temporary storage areas without the
presence of another employee. Each division is responsible for ensuring an employee is available
each day to witness the property being secured for transport. When necessary, an officer will
escort Property Room employees to ensure needed security.
G. All items submitted to the Arkansas State Crime Laboratory will be transported to the Arkansas
State Crime Laboratory by Property Room personnel upon receiving the submission request from
the investigator assigned to the case. The requesting investigator is responsible for the proper
completion of all necessary Arkansas Crime Laboratory submission forms. The Property Room
will maintain documentation for all property checked out, and checked in from the Arkansas State
Crime Laboratory.

H. In extenuating circumstances when an investigator transports items directly to the Arkansas State
Crime Laboratory or picks items up from the Arkansas State Crime Laboratory, they will notify
the Property Room personnel prior to submission or retrieval and provide all documentation
pertaining to the items(s) submitted or retrieved on the same date.
I. Copies of the Arkansas State Crime Laboratory submission reports will be forwarded through
inter-office mail to the requesting investigator once the date and time are stamped by the Arkansas
State Crime Lab on items submitted by Major Crimes Division detectives, Special Investigations
Division detectives, and DWI/DUI investigators. All other personnel requiring a date and time
stamped submission report can obtain a copy upon request from the Property Room personnel.
X. Disposition of Property
A. It shall be the responsibility of the recovering officer and/or the case detective to notify owners to
pick up their property.
1. The officer notifying the owner of items marked as “Evidence” will be required to notify
property personnel in writing that the item is cleared for release, prior to notifying the
owner.
2. If the owner of property is determined at a later time, the officer shall make the
notification and inform the Property Section in writing. Property Room personnel will
assist the case detective and/or recovering officer in returning the property to its rightful
owner.
B. Officers, who receive notifications advising that they have stored property as “Evidence”, shall
return the notification to the property section with the disposition of the item. If the officer has not
returned the notice within fifteen working days, the notice will be sent to the officer’s immediate
supervisor for resolution.
1. If the property is no longer required as evidence, the officer will notify the owner to
retrieve the property within ten working days.
2. If the property is still required as evidence, the officer and/or case detective must return
the notice with approval from a supervisor.
C. Release of Property
1. Property stored as “Evidence” may be released on the written authorization of the Chief
of Police, any sworn supervisor, the case detective assigned, the Prosecuting Attorney of
the Sixth Judicial District, or a Judge, who has jurisdiction over the property.
2. A patrol officer may release evidence, as long as it is documented and there is not a
detective assigned to the case.
3. Evidence in a case that has a detective assigned, cannot be released by a patrol officer,
without written approval from the detective.
4. Every effort will be made to notify the owners of all “Stored” and “Found” property.
a) There is no required authorization for releasing these classifications of property.

5. Property of any classification will only be released to individuals who can produce some
form of government-issued photo identification. Individuals unable to produce the
specified identification shall be referred to the Administration Division Commander or
his designee.
6. Prior to any serial numbered item being released, Property Room personnel will ensure
the item is run through NCIC/ACIC. If any items being released receives a “Hit”
through NCIC/ACIC, the Detective Division shall be notified prior to the release of the
item.

GENERAL ORDER
G. O. 305 IMPOUNDMENT OF VEHICLES

I. Impounding and Storing Vehicles
A. General
1. This Order establishes procedures for the impounding and storing of vehicles, which are
encountered by the Department and for the custodial care of such vehicles.
2. All vehicles, towed by members of this Department, other than at the request of the owner
or other responsible party, are deemed impounded, unless stated otherwise in this Order.
a) These vehicles will be taken to the Fleet Vehicle Storage Facility or the Vehicle
Processing Facility only.
b) All photographing and processing of vehicles will be conducted at the Fleet

Vehicle Storage Facility or the Vehicle Processing Facility.
c) A Vehicle Storage Report along with an Incident Report will be completed on

any vehicle impounded by an officer.
d) All officers will ensure that an attempt is made to contact the registered owner of
all impounded and stored vehicles. This attempt will be documented in the
narrative of the Incident Report, supplement to an existing Incident Report, or
Accident Report and should include the name, phone number and time of contact
or attempt to contact was made.
e) All officers will document the location of the impounded or stored vehicle’s keys
in the narrative of the appropriate report.
B. Impound Authority
1. Arkansas State Law (A.C.A. § 27-50-1201 and following), and Little Rock City
Ordinance 32-43, authorize the removal and/or impound of vehicles under the following
circumstances:
a) When any vehicle is left unattended upon any bridge, viaduct, or where such
vehicle constitutes an obstruction or hazard to traffic;
b) When a vehicle is so disabled as to constitute an obstruction to traffic upon a city

street, and the person or persons in charge of the vehicle are physically
incapacitated to such an extent as to be unable to provide for its custody or
removal;

GENERAL ORDERS G. O. 305 IMPOUNDMENT OF VEHICLES
c) When any vehicle is left unattended, abandoned, disabled or inoperative upon a

city street, and is so parked illegally as to constitute a definite hazard or
obstruction to the normal movement of traffic within three feet of the traveled
surface of the public way;
d) When a vehicle is left unattended upon a city street continuously for more than
48 hours and the owner cannot be located and is presumed to be abandoned; or
which vehicle is located at a distance of three or more feet of the traveled surface
of the public way for a period of 72 hours or more (Note: vehicles removed
under this subsection must be properly marked.);
e) When the driver of such vehicle is taken into police custody and is unable to
make a legitimate disposition of the vehicle (e.g., D.W.I., disturbed person,
minor, etc.); or,
f) When the vehicle is needed as evidence and/or is used in the commission of a

felony.
C. City of Little Rock Impoundment Policy
1. When an officer stops a person operating a motor vehicle or when investigating an

accident on the streets or highways within the corporation limits of the City of Little
Rock, and the officer has reasonable cause to believe that a driver or owner of a vehicle is
in violation of one or more of the following statutes or ordinances, subject only to the
discretionary exceptions listed below, the motor vehicle so involved shall be impounded
and towed to the Fleet Vehicle Storage Facility.
a) Driver’s license suspended for D.W.I. (A.C.A. § 5-65-104);
b) Theft by Receiving involving license tags or tabs (A.C.A. § 5-36-106);
c) Fictitious tags (A.C.A. § 27-14-305);
d) Improper use of tags or registration (A.C.A. § 27-14-306);
e) Giving false evidence of title or registration (A.C.A. § 27-14-307);
f) Arkansas driver’s license or privileges suspended for any purpose (A.C.A. § 27-
16-303);
g) Operating without license plates (A.C.A. § 27-14-304);
h) Vehicle not maintained in proper mechanical condition or unsafe condition

(A.C.A. § 27-32-101);
(1) Vehicles impounded pursuant to this provision may not be released

from the impound facility unless the vehicle is towed or transported
from the facility.
i) Failure to obtain registration (A.C.A. § 27-14-701);

G. O. 305 IMPOUNDMENT OF VEHICLES LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
j) Failure to carry registration certificate (A.C.A. § 27-14-714); or,
k) Failure to have a current Arkansas driver’s license in good standing (A.C.A. §

27-16-602).
2. Impound pursuant to A.C.A. § 27-22-109 Impounding a motor vehicle for a violation.
a) If an operator of a motor vehicle is unable to present proof of insurance as

required by (A.C.A. § 27-22-104 Insurance required), the motor vehicle may be
impounded at the officer’s discretion if:
(1) The officer issues a citation for a state traffic violation that is classified
as an offense under (A.C.A. § 27-50-302) as listed below:
(a) Racing on a public highway;
(b) Reckless driving;
(c) Driving with lights off to avoid detection, identification, or

apprehension;
(d) Hazardous driving;
(e) Leaving the scene of an accident involving property damage

only;
(f) Driving the wrong way on a one-way street;
(g) Speeding in excess of fifteen miles per hour over the posted
speed limit;
(h) Using nitrous oxide in a motor or motorcycle on a street or

highway as prohibited under (A.C.A. § 27-37-803);
(i) Observing a drag race as a spectator on a public highway.
(2) And the operator has:
(a) Received three or more warnings for a violation of (A.C.A. §

27-22-104 Insurance Required);
(b) Plead guilty or nolo contendere to or been found guilty of

three or more violations of (A.C.A. § 27-22-104 Insurance
Required); or
(c) Received a total of three or more warnings or convictions for a

violation of (A.C.A. § 27-22-104 Insurance required).

b) If the operator is unable to present proof of insurance as required by (A.C.A. §

27-22-104 Insurance required), the motor vehicle may be impounded at the
officer’s discretion if one or more of the following occur:
(1) The driver is operating the motor vehicle on a cancelled, suspended, or

revoked driver’s license;
(2) The driver is operating the motor vehicle without a driver’s license; or
(3) The driver is operating the motor vehicle:
(a) Without a license plate in violation of (A.C.A. § 27-14-304

Operation of vehicles without license plates);
(b) With an unofficial license plate in violation of (A.C.A. § 27-

14-305 Using unofficial license plates);
(c) With improper use of evidence of registration in violation of

(A.C.A. § 27-14-306 Improper use of evidence of
registration); or
(d) With false evidences of title or registration in violation of

(A.C.A. § 27-14-307 False evidences of title or registration).
3. The following discretionary exceptions are specifically recognized and in these limited
circumstances, an officer's discretion shall determine whether or not impoundment occurs:
a) In the event that registration, or license tag of the vehicle has been expired for
less than sixty days, or the driver has a driver’s license that is expired and has
been expired less than 60 days, the officer may in the sound exercise of his
discretion, from the circumstances stated by the violator concerning the
expiration, other factors relevant to the situation at hand, and the officer's
knowledge of the history of the defendant's violation record, if any, forego the
impoundment of the vehicle in connection with the issuance of a citation to the
violator.
4. Officer's duties when impounding pursuant to the City of Little Rock impoundment
policy:
a) Issue a citation to the operator of the vehicle for the traffic offense resulting in
the impoundment of the vehicle, except in cases where a warrant will be
obtained after further investigation (D.W.I. with serious injury to suspect, fatality
accident, etc.).
b) Give the address and phone number of the Fleet Vehicle Storage Facility to the
operator and/or to the owner (7801 Jamison Rd, L.R., AR 72209 / 918-4260).

c) Inform the operator or owner of the impounded vehicle that they may gain
immediate release of the vehicle by displaying current registration, current proof
of insurance, and a valid driver’s license to the appropriate personnel at the Fleet
Vehicle Storage Facility. A person other than the registered owner, if the owner
isn’t present, must also provide notarized written permission from the owner to
retrieve the vehicle. No vehicle will be released to any person that has a
suspended driver’s license unless the vehicle is towed from the impound facility
or driven by a person with a valid driver’s license. A police supervisor, the rank
of Lieutenant or higher, may authorize the release of a vehicle impounded
pursuant to this Order if extenuating circumstances exist and after reasonable
attempts to resolve the issue have been exhausted.
d) Inform the operator or owner of the conditions of return of the vehicle to either
the registered owner or a third party, non-owner, as provided in this policy
e) Assist operators or passengers in gaining access to a working telephone to make

arrangements for transportation.
f) Transport juvenile driver and or passengers to their residence or to the police

department, where the officer will contact a responsible party to provide
transportation for the juvenile.
D. Impound Appeal Process
1. Any time an officer impounds a vehicle as a result of a traffic citation, he/she shall inform
the driver or owner of the following.
a) Any person seeking to redeem a vehicle impounded as a result of a traffic

citation has a right to an informal administrative hearing before the Records and
Support Division Captain or his/her designee of the Little Rock Police
Department to contest the validity of an impoundment. The request for a hearing
must be in writing, signed by the owner of the vehicle, and received by the Little
Rock Police Department within thirty (30) days (including Saturdays, Sundays,
and holidays) of the date the vehicle was impounded and towed or within ten
(10) days after receipt of notification from the impound facility, whichever is
later. The Little Rock Police Department has five (5) business days (not
including Saturdays, Sundays and holidays) to issue a written determination as to
whether the impoundment met the requirements mandated by this General Order.
b) Any person seeking a hearing who has failed to request such hearing within the
time specified may, in writing, petition the Little Rock Police Department for an
extension to file the request. Such extension shall only be granted upon the
demonstration of good cause as to the reason(s) the request for hearing was not
timely filed. For the purposes of this section, "good cause" shall be defined as
circumstances beyond the control of the person seeking the hearing that
prevented such person from filing a timely request for hearing. The Little Rock
Police Department will send written notification to the petitioner within five (5)
working days. Notification will include whether or not the petition has been
granted. In the event such extension is granted, the person receiving such
extension shall be granted a hearing in accordance with this General Order.

c) Upon the filing of a petition, the owner or lienholder may have the impounded
vehicle and its contents released by posting with the City Treasury Management
Division, a cash or surety bond equal to the amount of the charges for the towing
and storage. Upon posting of the required bond, the Little Rock Police
Department will issue an order notifying the impound facility that the vehicle
and its contents are to be released to the petitioner.
d) If a person fails to file a timely request for hearing and an extension has not been
granted, the right to a hearing is waived, the impoundment and the associated
costs of impoundment and administrative fees are deemed to be proper, and the
City shall not be liable for removal, towing, and storage charges arising from the
impoundment.
e) A decision made by the Little Rock Police Department may be appealed to the
City Manager or his designee for final judgment. Any person appealing such a
decision must file a written request for an appeal with the City Manager’s Office
within two (2) business days after the decision of the Police Department. The
City Manager’s Office will be responsible for notifying the petitioner in writing,
of their decision, within five (5) working days. If a person fails to file a request
for an appeal within the time specified by this section, the right to an appeal is
waived and the Police Department’s decision is final.
f) Upon determining the respective rights of the parties, the administrative decision
maker shall provide for payment of towing and storage fees. If the owner or
lienholder has posted a cash or surety bond to obtain immediate release of the
vehicle and the owner or lienholder is found to be responsible for the towing and
storage fees, the administrative decision maker shall declare the bond to be
forfeited, with the amount paid to the impound facility to cover the towing and
storage fees.
2. The City of Little Rock impoundment policy will be reviewed annually for legal and
operational concerns.
E. Impound Guidelines
1. It is the policy of this Department, unless mandated by Arkansas state law, Little Rock
city ordinance or City of Little Rock Impound Policy, that a vehicle shall be impounded or
stored only as a last resort. Vehicles shall not be impounded if:
a) The owner or driver can make a legitimate decision regarding the disposition of
the vehicle;
b) The owner or driver, although arrested, can make a legitimate disposition of the
vehicle in a reasonable length of time;
c) The vehicle is not wanted as evidence and/or has not been used in the
commission of a crime;
d) Insufficient investigation has been made into the circumstances of an abandoned

vehicle (e.g., illness, hospitalization, vacation, etc.); or,

e) The impoundment of the vehicle can be reasonably construed as an act of

harassment.
2. When a vehicle is towed, pursuant to this Order, officers shall advise the person
responsible for the vehicle of “owner preference”, as defined in A.C.A. § 27-50-1202.
(“Owner Preference” means the right of the owner or person of any disabled or
inoperative vehicle to request some reasonable person, gratuitous bailee or bailee for hire,
of his or her choosing, to take charge of the vehicle).
3. When a vehicle is towed, pursuant to this Order, officers shall not suggest or recommend
any particular towing/storage firm to the owner or person in charge of any disabled or
inoperative vehicle, except when advising of the towing firm having a contract with the
City of Little Rock.
F. Impound Procedures – Investigative Holds
1. An L.R.P.D. Storage Report will be completed on any vehicle impounded for

investigative purposes.
a) The officer or unit for whom the vehicle has been impounded and the reason for
storing will be listed in the “Reason for Storing” space on the report.
b) The officer responsible for towing the vehicle shall ensure that the Storage
Report contains documentation concerning the notification or attempted
notification of the registered owner.
c) The hard copy of the Storage Report will be given to the wrecker driver and the
white copy will be forwarded to the officer or unit ordering the hold.
(1) The officer storing the vehicle may call the storage report information
in the Desk Officer, or may fax the Storage Report to the Records
Division at 371-4708.
(2) The Storage Report will be filed by either manner no later than the end
of the storing officer’s shift.
(3) The Desk Officer will forward a copy of all Storage Reports to the
appropriate officer or unit and retain the original.
2. The basic storage information, the vehicle description, and the name of the officer, or
unit, authorizing the impound will be recorded on an original Offense Report, a
Supplement Report to the original Offense Report, or an Accident Report, whichever is
appropriate to the circumstances surrounding the impound.
3. When a vehicle is to be released from an investigative hold, the officer authorizing the
release will sign the bottom of the Storage Report, note the date and time of the release on
the Report, and give the Storage Report to the vehicle owner. The signed Storage Report
will serve as the owner’s release to be presented to the wrecker company.
G. Impound Procedures – Routine Storage

1. While investigating an accident or incident in which the operator of a motor vehicle is

taken to the hospital and the vehicle is towed, the investigating officer will furnish the
operator, or another responsible party (family member, etc.), with written information
concerning the location of his vehicle; this will not be considered impounding. If,
however, the officer cannot advise the operator, or other responsible party by written
communication of the vehicle’s location, the vehicle will be towed and considered
impounded.
2. Whenever a vehicle is towed at the direction of an officer for any reason other than those
authorizing an investigative hold, the following will apply:
a) The towing information will be included on an original Offense Report, a

Supplement to an existing Offense Report, or an Accident Report, whichever is
appropriate to the circumstances. A Storage Report is also required.
b) The towing information will also be noted on Information Exchange Forms,

prepared for injured drivers.
c) The officer directing that the vehicle be towed will write the VIN, license
number, vehicle description, owner’s name(s), owner’s address, and all lien-
holders, and their addresses, on the L.R.P.D. Storage Report.
d) Any remarks concerning property stored separately from the vehicle (at the
Department) or special equipment will be noted on the Offense Report, a
supplement to an existing Offense Report, or an Accident Report, whichever is
appropriate.
H. Abandoned Vehicles
1. Vehicles parked unattended upon a city street for more than 48 hours, and which are
presumed to be abandoned, will be marked by affixing an orange warning tag to the front
windshield.
2. Officers shall attempt to contact the owner and have him/her remove the vehicle.
3. The officer marking the vehicle will complete an Offense Report describing the condition
of the vehicle and documenting his efforts to contact the owner.
4. Abandoned vehicles will be removed only with a prior report on file and no contact with
the registered owner.
5. Towing information for abandoned vehicles will be recorded on a Supplement Report to

the original Offense Report, and an L.R.P.D. Storage Report will be filled out in its
entirety (with lien-holder information included).
I. Inventory of Stored Vehicles
1. Inventory searches are conducted in order to locate and identify items in a vehicle. The
search is completed in order to:
a) Protect the owner’s property;

b) Protect the police officer, the department, and the wrecker service from
subsequent claims of loss or of stolen property;
c) Inventories of vehicles will not be conducted for the purpose of discovering

evidence.
2. All vehicles impounded will have their contents inventoried. Inventories will also be
completed on vehicles involved in accidents where the driver or person responsible for
the vehicle is incapacitated and the vehicle is towed at the officer’s request.
a) A detailed list of all contents will be recorded on an Offense Report, a

Supplement to an existing Offense Report, or an Accident Report, whichever is
appropriate.
b) Inventory search of the intended impounded vehicle should be made at a safe

location. If the present site creates a hazard, the vehicle may be towed to a safe
location before conducting the inventory.
c) Except in those cases where a search is conducted incidental to a lawful arrest,

the examination of a vehicle for the purpose of an inventory of personal property
should be limited to places where a person would ordinarily store or leave items
of personal property.
d) Locked vehicle trunks, locked dash or console boxes, and locked containers will
not be opened by force except in exigent or emergency circumstances, or with a
warrant. The existence of a locked container that is not inventoried will be noted
on the report.
e) Unlocked but closed containers will be opened and their contents inventoried if
the officer cannot see the contents without opening the container and:
(1) The container by its size, markings, location, or other reasons

reasonably indicate that it might contain items of value, or
(2) The container by its size, markings, location, or other reasons

reasonably indicate that it might contain items that may spoil or be
damaged without further action.
J. Property Removed from Impounded Vehicles.
1. Sometimes it may be necessary to move closed containers to the department for

safekeeping. For safety and security reasons, closed containers may not be placed in the
property room without knowledge of the contents.
2. Articles removed for safe keeping:
a) Articles of value, such as gems, jewels, large sums of money, etc. discovered
during the inventory of an impounded vehicle should be removed from that
vehicle and placed in the department’s Property Room.

b) Articles from a crime discovered during an inventory of an impounded vehicle

shall be removed from the vehicle and placed in the department’s Property
Room.
c) When items are removed from a vehicle during an inventory search, the officer
conducting the inventory will list all items removed on the report.
3. Vehicles impounded for evidence and towed to the Crime Scene Processing Facility will
be inventoried by the Crime Scene Specialist in accordance with these guidelines when
the vehicle is processed.
K. Storage Report Procedures
1. A Little Rock Police Department Storage Report will be completed on all vehicles as
directed in this Order.
2. The Storage Report shall be completed in its entirety including documentation of

notification or attempted notification of the registered owner.
3. The investigating officer will notify the Desk Officer of the information on the Storage
Report for entry into the computer system as soon as possible. The Storage Report may be
faxed or hand delivered to the proper unit for data entry, but if it is faxed, it is the
investigating officer’s responsibility to ensure the fax was received. In any event, the
original Storage Report will be forwarded to the Desk Officer no later than the end of the
investigating officer’s shift.
4. The Vehicle Storage Report is a three-part form. The original (white copy) of the Vehicle
Storage Report shall be retained by the investigating officer until submitted to the Desk
Officer for data entry purposes and departmental record keeping. The hard copy (yellow
copy) of the Storage Report shall be given to the wrecker operator for their company
records. The pink copy of the report shall be retained by the owner of the vehicle.
L. Vehicle Release Procedure
1. Only the Little Rock Police Department can authorize the release of a vehicle impounded
pursuant to this Order. Authorized personnel (the Desk Officer or his designate) shall
release the vehicle only after proper documentation is presented, including:
a) Proof of ownership, and,
b) Valid identification (a valid driver’s license, a valid state-issued identification

card, a valid passport, or a valid United States military identification).
II. Impounding of Vehicles for Evidence
A. General
1. This Order establishes procedures for the impounding and storing of vehicles for the
purpose of examination or processing for evidence.

2. Vehicles to be processed will be towed to the Crime Scene Processing Facility at 3313
J.E.Davis Dr. by the contract wrecker service.
B. Impound authority
1. Vehicles will be impounded only under guidelines set out by the U.S. Constitution, Laws
of the State of Arkansas, General Orders of the Little Rock Police Department and
Divisional Operating Procedures of the same.
2. Any vehicle impounded must be with authority of a Little Rock Police Department
supervisor or case officer of a criminal investigation.
C. It will be the responsibility of the officer/detective having the vehicle impounded, to:
1. Ensure that all necessary paperwork is complete and forwarded to the Crime Scene
Search Unit as soon as possible; and,
2. Follow vehicle to the Crime Scene Processing Facility and ensure that the vehicle is
secure in one of the holding bays.
a) In the event that the holding bays are full, the officer will contact
Communications. The officer/detective will stay with the vehicle until other
instructions are given.
b) Communications will contact the Crime Scene Supervisor and arrangements will
be made to clear space for another vehicle.
D. The following procedures will be followed at the Crime Scene Processing Facility:
1. Vehicles to be processed will be towed to the Crime Scene Processing Facility.
a) The Vehicle Processing Facility is a three bay facility.
b) Each bay is separate and secured from the rest.
c) Each bay can be entered by use of the officer's Sonitrol card.
d) Each bay is designed to work in the following manner:
(1) If red Sonitrol Reader light is on, this indicates the bay is empty. If
light is off this means the bay door is disabled, indicating there is
already a vehicle in that bay.
(2) Select a bay with a red light on the Sonitrol Reader.
(3) Run Sonitrol card through reader and door will open.
(4) Place vehicle to be processed as near to center of bay, as possible.

(5) As officer leaves the bay, press the "close" button. (Button is on right
side of door [facing from outside], just inside door.) This button will
close and disable this door securing vehicle inside.
(6) Crime Scene Search Unit personnel will process, remove and reset bay
doors as vehicles are processed and removed.
E. The Crime Scene Specialist will conduct an inventory search of all vehicles processed in
accordance with the guidelines in section I. I. of this Order; the inventory will be documented on a
Crime Scene Specialist Report. Any items of evidence seized from the vehicles will be
documented on the Crime Scene Report.
F. Crime Scene Specialists should be readily available during the 0700-1500 shift and 1500-2300
shift; the 2300-0700 shift will require a supervisor to contact Communications to implement the
call-out procedure.
G. Vehicle Release
1. Authority for the release of any vehicle being held for CSSU will come from a Little Rock
Police Department supervisor or the case officer.
2. CSSU personnel will notify the Contract Wrecker Service, Desk Officer, and case officer
once the processing is complete.

GENERAL ORDER
G. O. 306 HANDLING OF PRISONERS

I. Handling of Prisoners
A. General
1. Officers taking any person into police custody will use only the amount of force
reasonably necessary to affect custody and protect themselves or others.
2. The officer assumes primary responsibility for the health, safety and welfare of any
person in his custody.
3. The officer assumes primary responsibility for properly handling a prisoner’s property.
B. Handcuffing of Persons in Police Custody
1. Persons will be handcuffed, at the time of custody, when they are:
a) Felons;
b) Belligerent or combative;
c) Verbally abusive and are likely to become combative;
d) Persons who may cause injury to themselves or others; and,
e) Persons the officer believes necessary to restrain.
2. Persons shall remain handcuffed from the time of custody until they are processed at a
Detention Facility, or released to the custody of another officer (i.e., Detectives, other
agency, etc.).
a) Handcuffs may be removed in order to provide medical treatment for the

prisoner.
b) Handcuffs, and other restraining devices, shall be removed immediately,

subsequent to releasing the prisoner to the custody of the Pulaski County
Regional Jail Intake Officer. Officers will not place prisoners in a cell, unless
extenuating circumstances dictate (i.e., combative prisoner, etc.). All restraints
will be removed, prior to a Little Rock Officer placing a prisoner in a cell.

GENERAL ORDERS G. O. 306 HANDLING OF PRISONERS
3. Officers will refrain from using handcuffs on misdemeanors, physically handicapped

persons, and sick or injured prisoners, if they do not meet the criteria set forth in this
order.
4. Handcuffs will be used only for restraint and not for punishment or retaliation.
5. Two or more prisoners will not be handcuffed together with one handcuff, except in
extreme circumstances.
C. Handcuffing Procedures
1. Handcuffs shall be applied, as follows:
a) Whenever possible, the handcuffs will be applied just above the hand, adjusted
tightly enough to avoid slipping or cutting into the wrist and double locked.
Handcuffs shall be applied with the prisoner’s hands behind his/her back.
b) Leg restraints should be applied with the same degree of care as handcuffs, and
used when transporting a prisoner who is a potential escape risk. With the use of
all forms of restraint, officers must remain aware that Positional Asphyxia can
occur if a person is restrained in such a position, as to constrain breathing. The
practice of “hog tying” a person is specifically prohibited. Officers will
constantly monitor the physical condition of any restrained person and will
render aid, as appropriate.
2. Officers shall use approved handcuffs for restraining persons and may use disposable
handcuffs, if circumstances dictate, with the approval of a supervisor.
D. Searching of Persons in Police Custody
1. Persons in custody will be searched prior to being placed in a police unit.
2. When removing a person held in police custody from a police unit, officers shall search
under the rear seat and surrounding area.
3. Whenever a person, held in police custody is moved from one room of any police facility
to another (i.e., from an interview room to a restroom), the suspect and the vacated room
will be searched.
E. Prisoners Communicating with Others
1. Once a suspect is in custody, for safety considerations and in an effort to reduce the
possibility of escape, a prisoner will not be allowed to communicate with anyone, except
a police officer, and then only with the consent of the arresting officer or the officer in
charge of an investigation.
2. In incidents involving more than one suspect, officers shall transport suspects in separate
vehicles in order to restrict their conversation.

G. O. 306 HANDLING OF PRISONERS LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
3. Attorneys, friends, family members or others shall not be allowed to communicate with
the prisoner, until after he/she has been transported to the Major Crimes Division or
Detective Unit and/or the arrest procedures are completed.
F. Fingerprint Criteria
1. All prisoners charged with a felony or class A misdemeanor (except misdemeanor traffic
offenses) will be fingerprinted before release.
2. All such persons charged on citations will be transported to the Pulaski County Regional
Jail, where they will be presented, along with the completed citation form, to jail
personnel. The prisoner will be processed, as soon as possible, by personnel and released.
G. When issuing a Criminal Citation, officers will obtain a thumbprint from the person cited as a
means of identifying that person for court purposes. Thumbprints will be placed on Traffic
Citations only when the person being cited lacks valid photographic identification. The cited
person's thumbprint will be printed on the citation in an appropriate place. Refusal to submit a
thumbprint in and of itself will not be grounds for the incarceration of a violator. Refusal will be
noted on the citation and the violator will be processed in the manner appropriate to the charges.
II. Transportation of Prisoners -Procedure
A. Vehicle Inspection
1. At the beginning and end of each tour of duty, all vehicles regularly used for prisoner
transport, shall be inspected for readiness as follows:
a) The safety screen shall be securely in place and undamaged;
b) All windows shall be intact and outer door latches in proper working order;
c) Rear seat door handles and window controls should be deactivated; and,
d) The interior shall be thoroughly searched to ensure that no weapons or

contraband have been left or hidden within the vehicle.
2. Prior to placing a prisoner in the vehicle for transport, the transporting officer shall again
inspect the interior for weapons or contraband. The vehicle shall be searched again after
the prisoner has been delivered to a detention facility or other destination.
B. Transport
1. Prior to transport, all prisoners shall be thoroughly searched for any weapons or tools of
escape.
a) When practical, the protective search shall be conducted by an officer of the

same sex as the prisoner; and,
b) The transporting officer shall search the prisoner, unless a search was conducted
in his presence.

2. The officer should use care when assisting a prisoner into the vehicle for transport.
3. When transporting prisoners, the officer shall provide the Communications Center with
the following information:
a) A description (including, but not limited to, the race and sex) of the prisoner;
b) Arrest location and destination of transport; and
c) Mileage readings on departure and arrival.
4. Upon proper notification from the transporting officer, the Communications Center will
document the time of departure and arrival.
5. Prisoners shall be transported in the following manner:
a) Prisoners shall be primarily transported in vehicles equipped with security

screens. When a vehicle is occupied by only one transporting officer, the
prisoner shall be placed in the back seat on the right hand side of the vehicle.
b) If it becomes necessary to transport a prisoner in a vehicle without a screen, the

following guidelines will be followed:
(1) A vehicle not equipped with a security screen and having only one
transporting officer, will not be used.
(2) When a prisoner is being transported in a two officer vehicle without a

security screen, the prisoner shall be handcuffed behind his back,
placed in the right rear seat and secured with a seat belt. The second
officer shall sit in the left rear seat, behind the driver.
c) Leg restraints shall be used when an officer believes the prisoner has a potential
for violent behavior.
d) All prisoners shall be secured in the vehicle by proper use of a safety belt.
e) No prisoner will be handcuffed to any part of the vehicle during transportation.
6. Any purses, bags, luggage or other personal property, including wheelchairs, crutches,
prosthetic devices, and medication should be transported with, but not in the possession
of the prisoner.
a) When prisoners require special care or attention to accommodate their mental or

physical disabilities during the transport process, the arresting officer or a
supervisor shall make arrangements to have special equipment or a special
vehicle (such as an ambulance), transport the prisoner in a secure manner.
b) In instances where a disabled prisoner’s property cannot be transported in a

regular police unit, the officer or supervisor will make arrangements to transport
those items (department pickup truck or other vehicle).

7. Prisoners shall not be left unattended during transport. Should a transporting officer come
upon a situation requiring police assistance, he/she shall notify Communications of the
situation, giving the location and nature of the incident. The transporting officer will not
stop during transport, unless the incident poses eminent danger of grave injury or death to
another, and the possibility of injury to, or escape of, the prisoner is minimal.
8. The transportation of prisoners to court is the responsibility of the Pulaski County

Sheriff’s Office. In the rare instance this Department transports a prisoner to court and the
prisoner poses a security hazard to himself/herself or others, the transporting officer will
have Communications contact the appropriate court and advise them of the hazard prior
to arrival in the court.
9. Before taking prisoners into a secured area of the Pulaski County Regional Jail, the Major
Crimes Division or the Detective Unit, officers shall store their firearms in a secure area
for safekeeping.
10. Officers shall release to the jail personnel, the prisoner, all pertinent documentation and
the prisoner’s property. Officers shall ensure that all necessary forms and prisoner
property receipts are properly signed, prior to leaving the facility.
C. Arkansas Disposition Reports and Citations to Appear
1. On all ADR’s and/or Citations to Appear you must indicate whether the offense is a
Felony or Misdemeanor on each charge.
2. In the facts of arrest block, officers must include the following (if applicable):
a) what type of weapon was involved;
b) what type of drugs and the amount of drugs;
c) what type of injuries were inflicted and to whom; and,
d) what type of property was involved, the amount of damage, and the owner of the
involved property.
3. In cases that are Domestic or Violating a Protection Order, note the name, date of birth,
address, and phone number of the victims in the Complainants and Witnesses block, so a
no-contact order can be issued if requested.
a) On all charges of Violating a Protection Order, the officer should put the
Protection Order number on the ADR.
4. When serving a warrant, list the warrant number and the details of arrest. If the warrant is
a Failure to Appear or a Contempt of Court, reference the case number on the ADR or
Citation.
5. In the arresting officers block of the ADR, list all officers involved and the correct
employee numbers.

6. When an officer receives information concerning the prisoner’s potential for suicide or
escape, other personal traits or infectious diseases, he/she shall note this information on
the ADR.
D. If you have relinquished your prisoner to the Pulaski County Regional Jail, do not issue a Citation
to Appear. Pulaski County Regional Jail personnel are responsible for the citation.
III. Interview Room Procedures
A. Interview rooms in the Major Crimes Division and in the Field Services Division’s Detective Units
are provided for use when the need arises to question a subject. The Major Crimes Division and
the Detective Unit is responsible for authorizing and overseeing the use of interview rooms
whenever Detectives are on duty. During non-duty hours, the on duty supervisor of the arresting
officer(s) is responsible for authorizing and overseeing the use of the interview rooms.
1. Any time a detainee is to be placed in these rooms, an on duty Detective supervisor shall
be notified. If the individual is to be interviewed by someone other than a Detective, a
supervisor from the interviewer’s division will respond to the interviewing area. The
supervisor will ensure compliance with these procedures.
2. Access to the interview room area is limited to officers, detectives, supervisors, attorneys,
and personnel of the Crime Scene Search Unit and persons authorized by a supervisor.
3. No more than two departmental personnel will be allowed in an interview room unless
authorized by a Division Commander.
4. Officers shall be held accountable for the supervision of detainees brought in for
questioning until a detective or another officer takes responsibility for them.
a) Detainees brought into the Major Crimes Division or a Field Services Division
Detective Unit for questioning shall be searched, prior to being placed in an
interview room. Detainees shall be searched and their personal property
removed including shoes with any type of laces, keys, belts, and any other items
with which they could injure themselves. Detainees shall place their personal
property into a large envelope and the envelope will be sealed. The property
envelope shall then be placed into the designated interview room property
storage unit. If the detainee is taken to the Pulaski County Regional Jail, the
transporting officer shall transport the sealed property envelope with the
detainee. If the detainee is released from the Major Crimes Division or
Detective Unit, their property shall be returned to them in the sealed property
envelope.
b) Weapons are not allowed in interview rooms. Officers and detectives

interviewing detainees shall secure weapons prior to entering interview rooms.
c) The detainee shall be searched again prior to transport to the regional detention
facility.
5. Once a detective or other officer takes responsibility for a detainee, he/she shall be held
accountable for the supervision of that detainee.

a) It shall be that officer’s responsibility to make sure the detainee is searched

satisfactorily.
6. Individuals being interviewed/interrogated should be escorted when taken anywhere in

the department. In certain situations, interviews/interrogations may require an extended
amount of time. During lengthy interviews/interrogations restroom breaks and water
should be offered to the suspect and periodic breaks should be taken.
7. Anyone placing a detainee in an interview room shall record certain information on the
interview room status board. This board shall be for recording a detainee’s name, the time
he/she was placed in an interview room, the name of the officer/detective who placed
him/her in the room, and whether the detainee is an adult or a juvenile. This information
should be erased within twenty-four (24) hours of the detainee departing from the
interview room. This procedure is intended as an effective and economical way to assist
supervisors in monitoring those persons taken into custody.
8. Anyone responsible for detainees shall ensure quick access to a restroom and the privacy
necessary for that function. Detainees will be provided with access to water, medical
needs, and other immediate needs in a timely manner. A Witness/Suspect Information
sheet (Form 5400-39) will be used to record the access to these functions. The original
completed Witness/Suspect information sheet will be retained in the case file.
9. Individuals who are requested to appear at the Major Crimes Division or Field Services
Division Detective Unit for an interview and are not subject to arrest at the time of the
interview, may be placed in the interview rooms. Persons in interview status will not be
secured to any fixed object while they are in the interview rooms.
a) Officer shall consider such factors, but not limited to, the suspect's level of
combativeness, seriousness of the offense, the possibility of an escape attempt or
likelihood of injury to the detainee or others when placing a detainee in the
interview room. If the factors support the need, arrestees may be secured at the
investigating officer’s discretion utilizing the handcuffs installed in the interview
room.
b) Combative individuals who cannot be controlled by handcuffing will be

immediately removed from the interview room area and transported to the
Pulaski County Regional Jail.
c) Restraints will not be used at any time for the purposes of punishing or harassing
the individual.
10. Separation of males, females and juveniles.

a) Female detainees will be separated from male detainees by sight and sound
regardless of the age of the detainee. A juvenile detainee will not be placed
within sight or sound of adult prisoners. Juveniles may be placed in the
interview rooms when no adult prisoners are present. Juveniles must be moved
from the interview rooms to designated areas prior to the arrival of adult
prisoners. An Officer/Detective will be assigned to physically remain with the
juvenile until processing is complete and the juvenile departs. In those instances
where there are more juvenile prisoners than adults, the adult may be held in
designated areas and will be attended by an Officer/Detective until the juveniles
depart and an interview room becomes available or until the adult departs.
(1) The Major Crimes Division - Has designated the detective east wing,
west wing and annex interview rooms to separate male, female, and
juvenile detainees.
(2) The Northwest Division - Has designated the Detective Office waiting
room for use to separate male, female, and juvenile detainees.
(3) The Southwest Division – Has designated the precinct line-up room for
use to separate male, female, and juvenile detainees.
(4) The processing of juvenile offenders may take place in any interview
room, the Major Crimes Division Duty Room, or Northwest/Southwest
Detective Unit Office areas.
11. To prevent escape or to ensure building security, subjects being interrogated,

interviewed, or processed in the designated interview rooms or the processing areas shall
be monitored continuously and not left unattended.
12. Sworn police personnel shall be present at all times in the interview room area when a
detainee is in the interview room area or in an interview room. Officers/Detectives
interviewing detainees will wear the panic alarms provided for each interview room.
Officers/Detectives monitoring the interview rooms will remain in the immediate area in
order to respond rapidly to an alarm.
13. All interview rooms shall be kept empty. Personnel conducting interviews shall be
responsible for all necessary equipment and materials needed for that interview. At no
time will any equipment or material be left in the interview room.
14. The detainee shall be searched again prior to transport to the Pulaski County Regional
Jail.
15. Interview rooms shall be inspected for contraband prior to use by a detainee and
immediately after removing a detainee. These inspections will be documented on Form
5400-39.
IV. Felony Arrest After Normal Major Crimes Division Duty Hours
A. Supervisors will continue to notify on-call Detectives from the Homicide, Juvenile, Robbery, and
Violent Crimes Unit as necessary, after the normal duty hours of the Major Crimes Division.

B. Any other felony arrest to be investigated by a Detective of the Major Crimes Division or arrests of
subjects on warrants issued by a Detective of the Major Crimes Division, made after the normal
duty hours of the Major Crimes Division will be handled in the following manner:
1. All documentation pertaining to the arrest, including a copy of the Officer’s Letter, Arrest
Report, Incident Report, Warrant (if applicable), and any other documents deemed
necessary, will be fastened in a file folder using a two hole fastener and presented to the
officer’s supervisor for approval.
2. The arresting officer’s supervisor will be responsible for ensuring that all documentation
related to the arrest are included in the folder. They will review the contents of the file
then sign and date the inside cover of the file.
3. The completed file will be delivered to the Desk Officer prior to the arresting officer’s
end of shift, the Desk Officer will place the file folder in the Major Crimes Division’s
mail box.
C. It shall be the responsibility of the Major Crimes Division supervisors working the following 0700
hours to 1500 hours shift, to check the mailbox and distribute all files to the appropriate
investigative unit at the beginning of their work day.
V. Medical Treatment for Prisoners
A. Any person in police custody, who has a minor injury (e.g., a scratch, cut, abrasion, minor swelling
or a sprain) which can be controlled with normal first aid procedures, will not require treatment at
a public hospital, prior to incarceration. Those persons arrested, whose injuries cannot be
controlled with normal first aid procedures, shall be taken to the nearest participating hospital for
treatment, prior to being transported to a Detention Facility.
B. When a prisoner is transported to a medical facility for treatment, the officer will:
1. Use discretion when deciding to take off handcuffs or leg restraints. Charges, demeanor,
mental capacity and verbal communication by the prisoner may be used, but are not
limited to an officer’s decision to remove restraints;
2. Stay in the treatment room with the prisoner. If directed to remove the restraints by the
attending physician, officers may use discretion as described in III B. 1. above;
3. If requested to remain outside the treatment room, station themselves outside the room
and allow access to authorized medical personnel. The ability to restrain the prisoner
should be considered;
4. Remain alert for escape attempts by the prisoner, or others acting in collusion with
him/her;
5. Upon release, search and if circumstances meet the criteria set forth in this General Order,
restrain the prisoner;

6. Upon release, record the prisoner’s condition and obtain, in writing, from medical
hospital personnel all information, relative to medical instructions, future treatment and
medications; and,
7. Upon arrival at a detention facility, ensure that the intake officer is aware that the prisoner
has received medical care and forward any documentation relative to medical instructions,
future treatment and medications, to the intake officer.
C. If the prisoner refuses treatment by ambulance or hospital personnel, copies of supporting

documentation shall be obtained by the arresting officer. The prisoner’s refusal shall be noted in
the text of the Offense Report. This documentation will be required, before the prisoner can be
booked into the Pulaski County Regional Jail.
D. Should the prisoner be admitted to the hospital, the officer will notify his immediate supervisor,
who will arrange for relief at the end of his shift. The prisoner will remain in the custody of Little
Rock Police Department personnel, until the charges are certified to circuit court, or other
circumstances exist that would allow release from custody (i.e., release to the custody of Pulaski
County, bond, recognized by the court, etc.). All paper work shall be completed and delivered to
the Pulaski County Regional Detention Facility for processing. A notation shall be made on the
ADR concerning the location of the hospital.
1 While in the hospital, the prisoner will be prohibited from having visitors. This will
include telephone contacts.
2 Use of restraints will be determined by, but not limited to:
a) Charges;
b) The type and period of treatment;
c) Degree of risk; and,
d) Isolation.
e) Officers, assigned to guard a prisoner, will not become lax while performing
their duty.
f) Officers will not fraternize with the prisoner at any time.
g) Any unusual occurrence will be documented and a supervisor notified.
h) The officer, guarding a prisoner, will be rotated each shift and closely supervised
by the officer’s immediate supervisor.
VI. Transport of Prisoner from a Detention Facility or Other Police Facilities

A. Pulaski County Sheriff’s Office is primarily responsible for the transportation of all prisoners from
the Pulaski County Regional Detention Facility. If a Little Rock police officer is called upon to
transport a prisoner(s) from another detention facility or police agency, the following guidelines
will be adhered to:
1. Each prisoner will be positively identified as the person to be transported, prior to

transportation. This may include:
a. Name;
b. Physical description and photo compared to detention facility records;
c. Photograph I.D;
d. Comparison of entry and exit fingerprints;
e. Comparison of signatures to property storage slips; or,
f. Any other means, which will assure the officer of the prisoner’s correct identity.
2. Documentation that should accompany the prisoner may include a copy of the warrant,
prisoner’s property, medical records or any other pertinent documents.
3. When an officer receives information concerning the prisoner’s potential for suicide or
escape, other personal traits or infectious diseases, he/she shall note this information on
the ADR.
4. There will always be two officers assigned to transport prisoners outside of Pulaski
County.
5. The transporting officers should inquire of, and be alert to, any medical, mental or
security risks the prisoner may present during transport.
B. During transport for long distances, requiring stopping for meals or the use of restroom facilities,
officers shall select locations randomly and at no time allow the prisoner out of direct sight.
C. Prisoners, who are transported from agencies outside Pulaski County, will be:
1. Handcuffed in front utilizing a waist belt;
2. Restrained with leg restraints (waist belt and leg restraints will be maintained by the Desk
Officer); and,
3. Secured with occupant restraint devices, available in the vehicle.
D. The Pulaski County Sheriff’s Office is responsible for the incarceration of Little Rock Police
Department prisoners. When special circumstances arise (i.e., attending funerals, visiting hospitals
of critically ill relatives, etc.), the transportation of prisoners will be the responsibility of the
Pulaski County Sheriff’s Office.
VII. Prisoner Escape Procedure
A. Officer’s responsibility

1. Any escape shall be immediately reported to the Communications Center.
2. In the event of a prisoner escape during transport, the transporting officer shall:
a) Notify the Communications Center for notification of area law enforcement

agencies and immediate broadcast of information related to:
(1) Prisoner description;
(2) Any force used by the prisoner to effect the escape;
(3) Any accomplices and description; and
(4) Other pertinent information.
b) Notify his immediate supervisor;
c) Request necessary personnel and begin a search;
d) Generate an “Escape from Custody” Offense Report and any necessary Officer
Reports.
e) Notify the appropriate law enforcement agency, in which the escape took place,
if transporting a prisoner outside Little Rock, and assist the apprehension under
their direction.
B. If the prisoner is apprehended soon after his escape, the transporting officer will transport the
suspect to the appropriate location for follow-up, completion of pertinent documents and the filing
of any additional charges. Should the prisoner not be apprehended, the transporting officer will
contact the Prosecuting Attorney’s office, within 48 hours, to obtain a warrant.
VIII. Releasing Persons from Custody
A. In some instances, officers may encounter a circumstance where probable cause develops to arrest
an individual for an offense only to discover, shortly thereafter, that the person arrested did not
commit a crime, or that the event did not constitute a crime. When such an arrest occurs, officers
must terminate custody to prevent violation of the citizen’s Constitutional rights.
B. Procedure
1. Officers needing to terminate custody of any citizen placed under arrest in the field shall:
a) Immediately advise a field supervisor of the need for release of the citizen;
b) Inform the citizen of the reasons for the release and the original arrest, if such
facts have not been explained;
c) Release the citizen in a safe location (officers may return the person to the
original contact point or another safe and reasonable destination, if requested);
and,

d) Complete an Offense Report, including detailed information concerning the

reasons for the arrest, release, witness information, and location of citizen
release.
2. Officers needing to terminate custody of any citizen placed under arrest and taken to a
Detective Office for investigation shall:
a) Inform the citizen of the reasons for the release and the original arrest, if such
facts have not been explained;
b) Complete an arrest report on the citizen, indicating released without charge in

the narrative portion of the report; and,
c) Release the citizen from custody.
3. At any time during an arrest, investigation or detention process, an officer receives

reliable information that the person detained or incarcerated is not the person who is
wanted for a particular crime, incident or warrant, the officer will immediately notify a
supervisor, release that person from custody, and complete an Officer's Report detailing
the events surrounding the incident. It will be the officer's responsibility to contact the
proper unit (detective, warrant, etc.) and request the documentation or records related to
the affected person (warrant, case file, etc.) be corrected.
IX. Off-Duty Arrests
A. Arkansas law grants police officers the authority to make arrests, within their jurisdiction, for
violations of law wherever and whenever the need for police intervention occurs, both on and off-
duty. While off-duty law enforcement is required under certain circumstances, officers who
perform such duties, without the ability to quickly summon assistance or access the numerous
tactical advantages available to on-duty personnel, create an increased opportunity for injury to
officers attempting the off-duty apprehension of offenders. To minimize this potential for injury,
the following policy shall be adhered to by all personnel.
B. For purposes of this Section, officers are considered to be off-duty when not working in
furtherance of Departmental objectives during their regularly scheduled hours or other hours, as
required by a police supervisor or court order.
C. Procedure
1. Off-duty officers, who have knowledge of or observe any incident that does not require
immediate police intervention to prevent bodily injury or property loss/damage, shall
summon on-duty police personnel and await their arrival, if circumstances permit.
2. Off-duty officers shall not enforce traffic offenses or utilize personal vehicles to pursue or
to attempt the apprehension of persons. Off-duty officers may cautiously follow suspects
to obtain vehicle and suspect descriptions or destination, but officers must realize there is
no authorization, under state law or Department policy, to violate traffic law while
operating a private vehicle.

3. Off-duty officers, who make an arrest, shall notify an on-duty police supervisor of the
circumstances of the arrest and complete any documentation of the incident and arrest,
required by the supervisor or Departmental Orders and procedures.
4. This subsection does not apply to officers performing duties in a departmentally

approved, off-duty employment capacity.
X. Detainee Processing and Testing
A. The process of fingerprinting and photographing of detainees shall be performed in the following
locations:
1. Major Crimes Division duty room.
2. Major Crimes Division annex in the common area outside the interview rooms.
3. Major Crimes Division juvenile detectives squad room.
4. Major Crimes Division processing room of the Crime Scene Search Unit.
5. Northwest Division common area outside the interview rooms.
6. Southwest Division common area outside the interview rooms.
B. The following security measures shall be taken when a detainee is being processed in one of these
areas:
1. The detainee will be under the constant supervision of the investigator until he/she is
formally transferred to another officer for transport or released from custody.
2. Personnel responsible for the processing of the detainee shall ensure that their weapon is
secured in the weapons locker while the detainee is present in the processing area.
3. Personnel responsible for the processing of the detainee shall be equipped with a panic
alarm or a portable radio should an emergency occur in which additional assistance is
needed.
4. Personnel will be cognizant at all times of the potential for escape. While the area in
which detainees are processed is inside a secure area, personnel should always consider
such factors as the level of combativeness, seriousness of the offense and the possibility
of attempted escape.
a) Personnel shall evaluate the demeanor of the detainee to determine if additional

personnel are needed to assist with the processing.
b) Combative prisoners who cannot be controlled with additional personnel will be

transported to the appropriate detention facility for processing.

C. All breathalyzer testing of detainees will be conducted at the Pulaski County Detention Facility.
All blood or urine testing of detainees will be conducted at a medical facility by medical personnel
determined at the time of arrest.

GENERAL ORDER
G.O. 307 - JUVENILE PROCEDURES

I. General
A. The purpose of this Order is to establish the procedures by which members of this Department
process complaints and/or arrests, involving youthful offenders, and to establish youth services
within the Department.
B. The Department is committed to developing and implementing programs which are concerned with
the control and prevention of juvenile delinquency. An effective plan to address juvenile
delinquency enhances the Department and its public image. The Department is committed to
ensuring the fair and equitable treatment of youthful offenders.
C. All members of the Department are committed to participation and support of the juvenile
operations of the Department.
1. The Juvenile Crimes Unit is responsible for the investigation of offenses committed
against juveniles (including felony family offenses), offenses committed in public schools
or child care facilities, in which a juvenile is a suspect or a victim, juvenile runaways,
missing persons and all status offenses. The Juvenile Crimes Unit is also responsible for
the Department’s sex offender notification program.
2. The Special Units Section is primarily responsible for implementation of juvenile

programs.
D. The Juvenile Crimes Unit Sergeant will be responsible for soliciting comments from other
elements, in the juvenile justice system, regarding development and implementation of new
programs, or policy and procedures.
E. An annual evaluation will be completed for the Juvenile Crimes Unit and all juvenile programs for
the purpose of evaluating progress towards meeting their goals and objectives for the year, and to
determine each program’s effectiveness, efficiency, and retention advantages.
1. Each separate evaluation shall be completed by component supervisors having direct

supervision over their program or unit, whichever may apply.
2. Annual evaluations shall be completed in December of each year and forwarded through
the chain of command to the Office of the Chief of Police by January 10th of each year.
3. Division Commanders shall be responsible for ensuring compliance with this order.
F. Juvenile programs include, but are not limited to:

GENERAL ORDERS G.O. 307 - JUVENILE PROCEDURES
1. School Resource Officer Program (SRO);
2. Teen Citizen’s Police Academy;
3. Community Recreation Youth Program (Crime Prevention);
4. Our Kids Program; and
5. Girls Empowered by Mentoring Sisterhood Program (G.E.M.S.).
II. Definitions
A. Abandonment - (A.C.A. § 9-27-303[2]) The failure of the parent to provide reasonable support and
to maintain regular contact with the juvenile, through statement or contact, when the failure is
accompanied by an intention on the part of the parent to permit the condition to continue for an
indefinite period in the future, and failure to support or maintain regular contact with the juvenile,
without just cause or an articulated intent to forego parental responsibility.
B. Abuse - (A.C.A. § 9-27-303[3A]) Any of the following acts or omissions by a parent, guardian,
custodian, foster parent, person eighteen (18) years of age or older living in the home with a child
whether related or unrelated to the child, or any person who is entrusted with the juvenile’s care by
a parent, guardian, custodian, or foster parent, including but not limited to, an agent or employee
of a public or private residential home, child care facility, public or private school, or any person
legally responsible for the juvenile’s welfare, shall be considered abuse.
1. Extreme and repeated cruelty to a juvenile;
2. Engaging in conduct creating a realistic and serious threat of death, permanent or

temporary disfigurement or impairment of any bodily organ;
3. Injury to a juvenile’s intellectual, emotional or psychological development as evidenced

by observable and substantial impairment of the juvenile’s normal range of performance
and behavior;
4. Any injury which is at variance with the history given;
5. Any non-accidental, physical injury;
6. Any of the following intentional or knowing acts, with physical injury:
a) Throwing, kicking, burning, biting, or cutting a child;
b) Striking a child with a closed fist;
c) Shaking a child; or
d) Striking a child on the face.
7. Any of the following intentional or knowing acts, with or without physical injury:

G.O. 307 - JUVENILE PROCEDURES LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
a) Striking a child age six (6) or younger on the face or head;
b) Shaking a child age three (3) or younger;
c) Interfering with a child’s breathing;
d) Urinating or defecating on a child; or,
e) Pinching or striking a child in the genital area.
8. Abuse shall not include:
a) Physical discipline of a child when it is reasonable and moderate and is inflicted

by a parent or guardian for purposes of restraining or correcting the child.
b) When a child suffers transient pain or minor temporary marks as the result of a
reasonable restraint if:
(1) The person exercising the restraint is an employee of an agency

licensed or exempted from licensure under the Child Welfare Agency
Licensing;
(2) The agency has policy and procedures regarding restraints;
(3) No other alternative exists to control the child except for a restraint;
(4) The child is in danger of hurting himself/herself or others;
(5) The person exercising the restraint has been trained in properly
restraining children, de-escalation and conflict resolution techniques;
and,
(6) The restraint is for a reasonable period of time.
9. Reasonable and moderate physical discipline inflicted by a parent or guardian shall not
include any act that is likely to cause and which does cause injury more serious than
transient pain or minor temporary marks.
10. The age, size, and condition of the child and the location of the injury and the frequency
or recurrence of injuries shall be considered when determining whether the physical
discipline is reasonable or moderate.

C. Centers For Youth and Families - An emergency shelter, designed and authorized for the
temporary care of juveniles (ages six through seventeen only) who are runaways, the victims of
physical or sexual abuse, drug and/or alcohol abusers (where no withdrawal reaction may
reasonably be anticipated), or are abandoned. The Centers For Youth and Families will not accept
violent, aggressive, or suicidal persons, nor persons who are visibly intoxicated. The Centers for
Youth and Families will accept juveniles who have criminal charges pending, provided those
charges are non-violent in nature. The Centers For Youth and Families is not, however, a secure
facility, and should not be viewed as a point of incarceration. The Centers for Youth and Families
is an alternative residence for those juveniles who cannot or should not in an officer’s opinion, be
immediately released to the custody of a parent or guardian or otherwise returned to the home. The
twenty-four hour telephone number for The Center For Youth and Families is 666-8686 or
1-888-868-0023.
D. Child Maltreatment - Abuse, sexual abuse, neglect, sexual exploitation, or abandonment.
E. Computer Crimes Against Minors Include:
1. Distributing, possessing, or viewing matter depicting sexually explicit conduct involving

a child;
2. Computer child pornography; or,
3. Computer exploitation of a child.
F. Custodian- A person, other than a parent or legal guardian who stands in loco parentis to the
juvenile or a person, agency, or institution to whom a court of competent jurisdiction has given
custody of a juvenile by court order.
G. Department of Human Services (DHS) – State of Arkansas agency responsible for the protection of
individuals.
H. Division of Children and Family Services (DCFS) – A division of DHS responsible for assessing
child maltreatment cases.
I. Family in Need of Services (F.I.N.S.) – Any family whose juvenile evidences behavior which
includes, but is not limited to, the following:
1. Being habitually and without justification absent from school while subject to compulsory
school attendance;
2. Being habitually disobedient to the reasonable and lawful commands of his or her parent,
guardian or custodian; or,
3. Having absented himself or herself from the home without sufficient cause, permission, or
justification.
4. F.I.N.S. may be obtained by parent or guardian at the Juvenile Justice Center at 340-6700.
J. Family Offenses (felony) Include:

1. Domestic Battery 1st ;
2. Domestic Battery 2nd ;
3. Aggravated Assault on Family or Household Member;
4. Concealing birth; or,
5. Endangering Welfare of Minor 1st.
K. Delinquent Juvenile - Means any juvenile that is ten (10) years old or older who has committed
an act other than a traffic offense or game and fish violation which, if the act had been
committed by an adult, would subject the adult to prosecution for a felony or misdemeanor.
This includes the violation of furnishing a deadly weapon to a minor (5-73-119) and any juvenile
charged with capital murder (5-10-101) or murder in the first degree (5-10-102) in juvenile
court.
L. Dependent-Neglected Juvenile - Means any juvenile who is at substantial risk of serious harm as
a result of:
1. Abandonment,
2. Abuse,
3. Sexual abuse,
4. Sexual exploitation,
5. Neglect,
6. Parental unfitness to the juvenile, a sibling, or another juvenile, or is,
7. A Dependent Juvenile.
M. Dependent Juvenile - Means a child of a parent who is under the age of eighteen years and is in
the custody of the Department of Human Services (DHS); a child whose parents or guardian has
no appropriate relative or friend willing or able to provide care for the child; a child whose
parents or guardian is incapacitated, whether temporarily or permanently, so that the parent or
guardian cannot provide care for the juvenile and the parent or guardian has no appropriate
relative or friend willing or able to provide care for the child; a child whose custodial parent dies
and no stand-by guardian exists; a child who is an infant relinquished to the custody of DHS for
the sole purpose of adoption; or a safe-haven baby.
N. Guardian - A parent, stepparent, legal guardian, legal custodian, foster parent, or anyone who, by
virtue of a living arrangement, is placed in an apparent position of power or authority over a
minor.
O. Juvenile - Any individual who is under the age of eighteen, whether married or single (A.C.A. §
9-27-303(32)).

P. Juvenile Charged as an Adult - Any criminal offense, as defined by Arkansas State Statute, City
of Little Rock Ordinance, Federal law, or any other accepted and enforced code, where the
offender may be subjected to incarceration and/or fined as an adult.
Q. Juvenile Charged as a Juvenile - Any criminal offense, as defined by Arkansas State Statute, City
of Little Rock Ordinance, Federal law, or any other accepted and enforced code, but where the
offender is charged through the Juvenile Court system, and is subject only to the provisions
therein. This is also referred to as delinquency or a delinquent act (A.C.A. § 9-27-303[15]).
R. Juvenile Justice Center - Located at 3201 W. Roosevelt, this facility is where all Pulaski County
juvenile cases are processed and tried. A detention facility located at the center is used to house
juvenile offenders, who are charged on the juvenile docket.
S. Neglect - (A.C.A. § 9-27-303[23]) Acts or omissions of a parent, guardian, custodian, foster

parent, or any person, who is entrusted with the juvenile’s care by a parent, custodian, guardian,
or foster parent, including, but not limited to, an agent or employee of a public or private
residential home, child care facility, public or private school, or any person legally responsible,
under state law, for the juvenile’s welfare, which constitute:
1. Failure/refusal to prevent the abuse of the juvenile, when such person knows, or has
reasonable cause to know, the juvenile is or has been abused;
2. Failure or refusal to provide the necessary food, clothing, shelter, and education, required
by law, or medical treatment necessary for the juveniles well-being, except when the
failure or refusal is caused primarily by the financial inability of the person, legally
responsible, and no services for relief have been offered or rejected, or when the juvenile
is being furnished with treatment by spiritual means alone, through prayer, in accordance
with the tenets and practices of a recognized religious denomination by a duly accredited
practitioner thereof in lieu of medical treatment;
3. Failure to take reasonable action to protect the juvenile from abandonment, abuse, sexual
abuse, sexual exploitation, neglect, or parental unfitness, where existence of such
condition was known or should have been known;
4. Failure or irremediably inability to provide for the essential and necessary physical,
mental, or emotional needs of the juvenile;
5. Failure to provide for the juvenile’s care and maintenance, proper or necessary support, or
medical, surgical, or other necessary care;
6. Failure, although able, to assume responsibility for the care and custody of the juvenile, or
participate in a plan to assume such responsibility; or
7. Failure to appropriately supervise the juvenile, which results in the juvenile being left
alone at an inappropriate age or under inappropriate circumstances placing the juvenile in
danger.
T. Parent - Means a biological mother, an adoptive parent, or a man to whom the biological mother
was married at the time of conception or birth or who has been found by a court of competent
jurisdiction to be the biological father of the juvenile.

U. Pornography
1. Obscene or licentious material including pictures, movies and videos lacking serious
literary, artistic, political or scientific value, which when taken as a whole and applying
contemporary community standards would appear to the average person to appeal to the
prurient interest; or,
2. Material that depicts sexual conduct in a patently offensive manner lacking serious
literary, artistic, political or scientific value.
V. Serious Bodily Injury – Bodily injury that involves substantial risk of death, extreme physical
pain, protracted and obvious disfigurement or protracted loss or impairment of the function of a
bodily member, organ or mental faculty.
W. Severe Maltreatment – Sexual abuse, sexual exploitation, acts or omissions which may or do
result in death, abuse involving the use of deadly weapon as defined by the Arkansas Criminal
Code § 5-1-102(4), bone fracture, internal injuries, burns, immersions, suffocation,
abandonment, medical diagnosis of failure to thrive, or causing a substantial and observable
change in the behavior or demeanor of the child.
X. Sexual Contact – Any act of sexual gratification involving the touching, directly or through
clothing, of the sex organs, buttocks or anus of a person or the breast of a female.
Y. Sexual Exploitation – Allowing, permitting or encouraging participation or depiction of the

juvenile in prostitution, obscene photographing, filming, or obscenely depicting a juvenile for
any use or purpose.
Z. Sexual Abuse Offenses Include:
1. Rape;
2. Sexual Assault 1st ;
3. Sexual Assault 2nd ;
4. Sexual Assault 3rd ;
5. Sexual Assault 4th ;
6. Exposing another person to H.I.V.;
7. Incest; or,
8. Sexual indecency with a child.
AA. Sexual Performances Include:
1. Engaging children in sexually explicit conduct for use in visual or print medium;

2. Pandering or possessing visual or print medium depicting sexually explicit conduct

involving a child;
3. Transportation of minors for prohibited sexual conduct;
4. Employing or consenting to use a child in sexual performances; or,
5. Producing, directing or promoting sexual performances.
BB. Status Offense - Acts which are offenses only because of the age of victim (sexual offenses,
sexual performances, computer crimes against minors, exposing children to chemical substance
or methamphetamine, or endangering the welfare of a minor 1 st).
CC. Traffic Offense - Any act which is considered an offense resulting from the operation of a motor
vehicle. These offenses may include moving, parking and license violations, as well as D.W.I.
offenses.
DD. Victim’s Assistance Unit - A unit of the Prosecuting Attorney’s Office, which assists police
agencies and prosecutors in interviewing victims and witnesses, and in preparing child
abuse/neglect and sexual offense cases for trial.
EE. Victim Services Program – trained, civilian employees of the Little Rock Police Department,
who provide valuable information such as counseling and therapy referrals and assistance in
obtaining Orders of Protection. In addition, upon request, Victim Services personnel are
available to assist officers in the furtherance of their investigation. Victim Services personnel
are on-call 24 hours a day and may be contacted at 690-7474 or through the Communications
Section.
III. Procedures
A. Juveniles may be taken into custody for the following reasons:
1. Court order or warrants;
2. Delinquent act or violation of law;
3. Reasonable grounds to believe that the youth has been abandoned, abused or neglected;
4. The juvenile is in immediate danger from his/her surroundings; and/or,
5. Reasonable grounds to believe the youth is a runaway.
B. When a juvenile is taken into custody, the laws of arrest, which apply to adults, are applicable.
Constitutional rights shall be protected for all subjects taken into custody. The juvenile shall be
transported to the appropriate facility, without delay (unless the juvenile is in need of emergency
medical treatment), and processed in a timely manner. Parents or guardians of juveniles shall be
notified as soon as practicable.
C. Custodial Interrogation of Juveniles [(A.C.A. § 9-27-317 [(h)(2)(A)]

1. Law Enforcement Officers who take juveniles into custody for a delinquent or criminal
offense will inform the juvenile of their rights under A.C.A. §9-27-317 before
questioning. Officers who take a juvenile into custody for a delinquent or criminal offense
shall clearly advise the juvenile of his or her Miranda Rights in the juvenile’s own
language.
2. Officers shall immediately make every effort possible to notify parents or guardian of the
juvenile’s location after the juvenile is taken into custody.
3. No law enforcement officer shall question a juvenile, who has been taken into custody for
a delinquent act or criminal offense if the juvenile’s parents, guardian or counsel is not
present and has not given written consent or permission.
4. When a parent or guardian cannot be located or refuses to go where the juvenile is held,
counsel shall be appointed for the juvenile. Procedures are then the same as if the
juvenile had invoked counsel.
5. No waiver of the right to counsel shall be accepted in any case in which the parent,
guardian, or custodian has filed a petition against the juvenile, initiated the filing of a
petition against the juvenile, or requested the removal of the juvenile from the home.
6. No waiver of the right to counsel can be accepted when a juvenile is in the custody of the
Department of Human Services, including the Division of Youth Services.
D. Whenever possible, the arresting officer/detective shall take the least severe action, which is
consistent with the nature of the offense.
1. When an officer/detective makes contact with a juvenile, involved in criminal or

delinquent behavior, but no charges are to be pursued, the officer shall contact the parents
or guardian. Upon the parents’/guardians’ availability, the juvenile shall be released,
either at the scene or at a police facility.
a) When it is determined that referral to a Social Services Agency may be of more

benefit in correcting the situation, than formal handling through the court system,
the officer may recommend services through agencies included in the Social
Services Referral Guide.
b) Officers may obtain information from the Social Services Referral Guide
through their supervisor or the Communications Center.
c) Unless detained by the Pulaski County Juvenile Justice Center, all juveniles
arrested shall be issued a Juvenile Citation to Appear. Only the intake officer
can make the decision to detain a juvenile, and only the intake officer can give a
court date, if the juvenile is given a Citation to Appear. Juvenile Intake Officers
are on-call 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. They may be reached by calling 1-
501-940-9701. The Citation to Appear will be executed by the investigating
officer. Prior to release, both the parent and juvenile shall be required to sign
the Juvenile Citation, and a copy given to the parent.
2. For violations of a serious nature, juveniles with prior offenses, as mandated by the
Pulaski County Juvenile Justice Center, shall be transported to the Juvenile Justice
Detention Center.

E. Any officer who arrests a juvenile under the following conditions shall complete LRPD Form
5400-72 and forward the form and a copy of the incident report to the Juvenile Squad.
1. Criminal charges of unlawful possession of a firearm under A.C.A. § 5-73-119.
2. An offense involving a deadly weapon under A.C.A. § 5-1-102.
3. Criminal charges of Battery in the first degree under A.C.A. § 5-13-201.
F. As soon as practical, the Juvenile Unit will send written notification of the arrest to the school
superintendent of the school in which the juvenile is currently enrolled. A.C.A. §9-27-309(2).
IV. Jurisdiction of Juvenile Court
A. The Pulaski County Juvenile Justice Center will have exclusive original jurisdiction of
proceedings in which a juvenile is alleged to have committed a delinquent act or violation of
law.
B. Juveniles, who commit serious acts of delinquency, will be referred to the Pulaski County
Juvenile Justice Center. These acts include:
1. Delinquent acts that would be felonies, if committed by an adult;
2. Delinquent acts involving the use of a weapon;
3. Serious gang-related delinquent acts;
4. Delinquent acts involving aggravated assault and battery;
5. Delinquent acts committed by juveniles on probation or parole, or with a case pending;

and/or,
6. Repeated delinquent acts, within a twelve-month period.
V. Juveniles Charged With Criminal Offenses
A. Juveniles charged with criminal offenses shall be afforded all rights and guarantees prescribed
by law.
1. Juveniles, 14 or 15 years of age, may be charged as adults for the following offenses only
(A.C.A. § 9-27-318[b]):
a) Capital Murder;
b) Murder First Degree;
c) Murder Second Degree;
d) Rape;

e) Kidnapping;
f) Aggravated Robbery;
g) Battery in the First Degree;
h) Battery in the Second Degree;
i) Aggravated Assault;
j) Terroristic Act;
k) Unlawful Discharge of a Firearm From a Vehicle;
l) Any Felony While Armed With A Handgun;
m) Soliciting a Minor to Join a Criminal Street Gang;
n) Criminal Use of a Prohibited Weapon;
o) Felony Attempt, Conspiracy, or Solicitation to Commit Any of the Following:
(1) Capital Murder;
(2) Murder in the First Degree;
(3) Murder in the Second Degree;
(4) Kidnapping;
(5) Aggravated Robbery;
(6) Rape;
(7) Battery in the First Degree;
(8) Escape in the First Degree and/or,
(9) Escape in the Second Degree.
p) Escape in the First Degree;
q) Escape in the Second Degree; and/or,
r) Possession of Handgun on School Property.
2. Juveniles, 16 and 17 years of age, may be charged as an adult for any felony offense
(A.C.A. § 9-27-318[c]).

3. Juveniles cannot be charged as adults for misdemeanor offenses (A.C.A. § 9-27-318[a

(2)]).
VI. Fingerprinting and Photographing Juveniles
A. Juveniles who are arrested for any offenses that if committed by an adult would constitute a
felony or a Class A misdemeanor in which violence or the use of a weapon was involved shall be
fingerprinted and photographed by the arresting officer.
1. The arresting officer will send the original fingerprint card and photograph to the Juvenile
Sergeant.
2. Copies of a juvenile’s fingerprints and photographs shall be made available only to other
law enforcement agencies, the Arkansas Crime Information Center, Prosecuting
Attorney’s and the Juvenile Division of Circuit Court.
3. Photographs and fingerprints of juveniles adjudicated delinquent for offenses for which
they could have been tried as adults shall be made available to Prosecuting Attorney’s and
Circuit Courts for use at sentencing in subsequent adult criminal proceedings against
those same individuals.
4. Juvenile photographs and fingerprints shall be securely filed in the Juvenile Crimes
Sergeant’s office.
VII. Juvenile Charged as an Adult
A. Whenever a juvenile is arrested for the commission of an offense for which he/she may be
charged as an adult, the investigation will be conducted and the prisoner will be processed just
as if the offender were an adult.
1. The authority to charge a juvenile as an adult rests with the Prosecuting Attorney’s Office
(A.C.A. § 9-27-318[c]).
a) The arresting officer, or the detective processing the juvenile, will contact the
Prosecuting Attorney’s Office (a Deputy Prosecuting Attorney or higher) for a
determination, as to whether the juvenile will be charged through Little Rock
Municipal Court (as an adult) or through Juvenile Court (as a juvenile).
b) The name of the prosecutor, his/her decision, as to which court will be utilized,
and the date and time the prosecutor rendered his/her decision shall be noted on
the Arrest/Disposition Report and in the Major Crimes Division’s case file.
2. If the juvenile is to be charged as an adult in Municipal Court, the arresting officer, or the
detective processing the juvenile, shall contact the Pulaski County Juvenile Court and
notify an Intake Officer and shall provide such information, as may be directed by
Juvenile Court authorities. The juvenile may then be placed in a Detention Facility.

VIII. Juvenile Charged as a Juvenile
A. Whenever a juvenile has been arrested for any offense for which he/she is to be charged through
the Juvenile Court, the arresting officer, or the detective processing the juvenile, shall contact
the Juvenile Court and notify an Intake Officer of the arrest. The officer shall provide such
information, as may be requested.
1. A Juvenile Citation will be prepared by the arresting officer or detective in lieu of an

A.D.R., with the Intake Officer providing the intake time and date (A.C.A. § 9-27-
313(d)).
a) In the event the Intake Officer determines that detention in a juvenile facility is
inappropriate, the juvenile shall be released to a parent or guardian, as
prescribed by law.
b) If the Intake Officer determines that detention in a juvenile facility is

appropriate, the arresting officer or the detective will, without delay, transport
the juvenile to the Juvenile Facility (A.C.A. § 9-27-322).
2. A copy of the Offense Report, notarized copy of the Juvenile Affidavit and the Juvenile
Citation will be forwarded through the Desk Officer to Juvenile Court, such forms being
completed and submitted to the Desk Officer, prior to the end of the arresting officer’s
shift. All documentation will be complete, including a physical description of the juvenile.
B. Juvenile in Possession of a Weapon – Officers, who determine a person under eighteen years of
age is in possession of any weapon, shall disarm the juvenile and seize the weapon, under the
authority conferred by A.C.A. § 5-73-110.
1. Weapons seized from juveniles may be returned to the parent or guardian of the juvenile
or be stored in the usual manner for delivery to the court having jurisdiction to try
criminal offenses, if an offense involving the weapon has occurred.
2. Juveniles found in possession of a handgun shall be charged with such violation under the
authority of A.C.A. § 5-73-119, and the handgun stored as evidence.
IX. Juveniles Charged With Traffic Offenses
A. Traffic Offenses - When a member of this Department charges a person, who is under the age of
eighteen with a traffic offense, he/she shall comply with the following procedure:
1. The person shall be charged on a Uniform Traffic Ticket and Complaint.
2. The court date indicated on the citation shall be for a Wednesday at 1600 hours, and shall
be at least 30 days from the date of issue.
3. Before allowing the juvenile to sign the citation, it should be explained to him/her that the
court appearance is mandatory and that he/she must be accompanied to court by a parent
or guardian.
B. D.W.I. Offenses - When a member of this Department charges a person, who is under the age of
eighteen with the offense of D.W.I., he/she shall comply with the following procedure:

1. The person shall be charged on a Uniform Traffic Ticket and Complaint.
2. The court date indicated on the citation shall be for a Tuesday at 0800 hours, and shall be
at least a week from the date of issue.
3. Before allowing the juvenile to sign the citation, it should be explained to him/her that the
court appearance is mandatory and that he/she must be accompanied to court by a parent
or guardian.
4. The investigation and processing of juvenile D.W.I. suspects shall follow the same
procedures as any other D.W.I. case. Juvenile arrest procedures, as outlined in this Order,
shall be followed. A parent or guardian must be notified and the juvenile released to
them.
C. Alcohol Possession - Arkansas law prohibits the purchase or possession of intoxicating liquor,
wine or beer by any person under the age of twenty-one (21) (A.C.A. § 3-3-203). When a
member of this Department observes an individual in violation of this statute, he/she shall
comply with the following procedure:
1. Persons in violation, who are age eighteen through twenty, shall be charged with the
aforementioned statute in Little Rock Municipal Court. The officer may place this charge
on a citation to appear, if the circumstances indicate that this would be appropriate.
2. Persons in violation, who are under the age of eighteen, shall be charged with the
aforementioned statute in Pulaski County Juvenile Court. The officer shall follow
established procedure set out for charging a juvenile in a misdemeanor arrest. The
juvenile will then be released to his/her parent, guardian, or other appropriate person.
3. Any intoxicating liquor, wine or beer, which is found in the possession of a juvenile, shall
be stored as evidence in the Property Section of the Police Department. Sealed containers
or containers that can be closed with a cap may be stored with the contents. Those
containers, which are open and cannot be closed, shall have the contents disposed of prior
to storage.
X. Emergency Protective Custody of Juveniles
A. A law enforcement officer may take a juvenile into protective custody, without the consent of the
parent or guardian, whether or not medical treatment is required, if the circumstances or
conditions of the juvenile are such, that continuing in his/her place of residence or in the care
and custody of the parent, guardian, custodian, or other person, responsible for the juvenile’s
care, presents an imminent and severe danger to that juveniles life, health, or welfare (A.C.A. §
12-12-1001.
1. A juvenile may be taken into custody without a warrant by a law enforcement officer
before service upon him/her of a petition, notice of hearing or order to appear is set if the
following apply: (A.C.A. § 9-27-313)

a) Clear and reasonable grounds to conclude that the juvenile is in immediate

danger and that removal is necessary to prevent serious harm from his/her
surroundings or from illness or injury; and,
b) if parents, guardians or others with authority to act are unavailable or have not
taken action necessary to protect the juvenile from the dangers; and,
c) there is not time to petition for or obtain an order from the court before taking
the juvenile into custody.
B. If an officer encounters a juvenile, who appears to meet the criteria for Emergency Protective
Custody, and no other means exist for the protection of the juvenile, he/she shall:
1. Contact a Field Services Division supervisor for authorization to place the juvenile in
emergency protective custody.
2. Immediately notify the D.C.F.S. of said custody and the circumstances and conditions
which required it. The twenty-four hour emergency telephone number for the D.C.F.S. is
1-501-837-8069.
3. Provide the D.C.F.S. investigator with any information required and appear at the probate
court hearing, if requested by the investigator.
4. Transport the juvenile to the facility or location designated by the D.C.F.S.
5. Make every effort to notify the custodial parent, guardian or custodian of the juvenile’s
location. (The D.C.F.S. Investigator may make this notification; however, the officer
shall check with the D.C.F.S. to make certain notification was made.)
6. Generate a detailed Offense Report, containing all facts and circumstances surrounding
the Emergency Custody of the juvenile.
C. During an investigation involving disputed custody of a juvenile, where neither of the parties
involved are the biological mother (A.C.A. § 9-27-342[a]), and it can not be readily established
who has legal custody between the involved parties, the investigating officer shall contact a
Supervisor for authorization to place the juvenile in emergency protective custody and contact
D.C.F.S. for guidance.
D. An individual taking a juvenile into protective custody may give effective consent for medical,
dental, health, and hospital services during protective custody (A.C.A. § 12-12-516[c]).
E. Emergency protective custody shall only be invoked as a method of last resort; however, officers
should not hesitate to use such custody, if necessary, for the protection of a juvenile.
XI. Investigating and Reporting Child Abuse - Abandonment - Neglect
A. Officers who respond to calls of physical or sexual abuse of a juvenile, or to neglect or

abandonment of a juvenile shall:
1. Obtain the pertinent information from the person reporting;

a) In cases of sexual abuse, this will generally be a social worker, if called to a

hospital.
b) The officer shall interview family members or witnesses, if additional

information about the incident may be obtained from these persons.
c) If it is necessary to the proper investigation of the case, the officer may interview
the victim of sexual or physical abuse at the hospital; however, in most incidents
of juvenile sexual abuse, it will not be appropriate for the officer to interview the
victim. Factors such as the victim’s age and emotional condition should be taken
into account, before such an interview takes place.
d) When any officer has reasonable cause to believe that any juvenile has been
subjected to maltreatment or has died as a result of child maltreatment or
observes a child being subject to conditions or circumstances that would
reasonably result in child maltreatment he/she shall immediately notify the
Child Abuse Hotline at 1-844-SAVE-A-CHILD. Officers can also make this
notification by faxing the incident report detailing the circumstances to 501-618-
8952. When using this option, the officer must include a telephone number
where he/she can be contacted.
2. View and document injuries and determine the victim’s need for medical attention.
a) Photographs of physical abuse will be taken by a detective or hospital personnel.
b) Medical-Legal examination of sexual abuse victims shall be requested at the

Arkansas Children’s Hospital. Officers will make every effort to assist the
person in obtaining this examination.
3. Notify the Major Crimes Division.
4. Issue a Criminal Citation for any appropriate misdemeanor charges.
5. Assess the juvenile’s condition to determine a need for Emergency Protective Custody, as
outlined in this Order.
B. Generate a detailed Offense Report containing all pertinent information and fax a copy of the
report to the Juvenile Unit (918-3580).
XII. Juvenile Incidents Occurring in Schools or on School Buses
A. Any time an officer takes a report of an incident, involving criminal activity or a disturbance on
any school property, school bus or school bus stop, he/she will:
1. Notify a Field Supervisor;
2. Immediately provide a copy of the completed Offense Report to the Office of the Public
Information Officer; and,
3. Notify the Major Crimes Division Supervisor.

B. Whenever a member of this Department removes a juvenile student from the grounds of a
school, he/she will:
1. Contact the school principal or any member of the school administration, and advise them
that the student is being removed from the school;
2. Advise the principal or administrator of the general reason for the juvenile custody; and,
3. Sign any forms or release, which may be required for the removal of the student from the
school grounds.
XIII. Truancy Program
A. Officers, either through personal observation or responding to a citizen’s call, shall determine if
the youth fits the below-listed criteria:
1. Age 5 through the 18th birthday.
2. Enrolled or eligible for enrollment in the Little Rock School District (students enrolled in
private schools are not covered by this program).
3. The student must not be violent, intoxicated or have criminal charges pending (these
situations will be handled per existing policy).
4. Runaway or homeless youth will be taken to the Stepping Stone Shelter for assistance.
5. Students who are expelled or suspended will be provided written documentation by the
Little Rock School District.
6. Students, who are with their parents, or who have parental or school authorization to be
away from school, will not meet the criteria (i.e. doctor’s appointment, work permits,
etc.).
B. Officers will transport truants to the nearest secondary school or the student’s school, whichever is
closest.
C. The school district will provide Truancy Reports, which have been printed in triplicate. The
officer will transport the student to the principal’s office of the respective school, complete the
form, and leave two copies with school personnel. Officers will complete a Truancy Contact Form
in place of a police Offense report, and will insert the incident number in the top left corner. The
form will be sent to the Records Division for processing.
D. The school district will accept responsibility for returning the student to his/her school, if
necessary, and for providing follow-up between the school administration and parents.
E. If the student is not eligible to return to school, (i.e. currently expelled), then he/she may be
charged with violation of the daytime curfew ordinance, if applicable.

XIV. Juvenile Curfew Procedures
A. Pursuant to Little Rock City Ordinance 16,564, Section (17.5-24.), it shall be unlawful for any
minor to be upon the streets, sidewalks, parks, playgrounds, public places and vacant lots, or to
ride in or upon, drive or otherwise operate or be a passenger of any automobile, bicycle, or other
vehicle in, upon, or over or through the streets, or other public places between the hours of 10:00
p.m. and 5:00 a.m., Sunday through Thursday, or 12:00 midnight and 5:00 a.m., Friday and
Saturday. An amendment to this ordinance also provides for a daytime curfew to apply to these
same circumstances, during the hours of 9:00 a.m. and 3:45 p.m. Monday through Friday.
Additionally, it shall be unlawful for any parent to permit a minor to be in those places during the
specified hours. (The daytime curfew only applies when school is in session.)
1. The provisions do not apply:
a) At any time a minor is accompanied by a parent, or a responsible adult,

authorized by a parent to take the parent’s place, to accompany the minor for a
designated period of time and purpose, within a specified area.
b) To an emancipated minor, which is defined as a person who no longer has a

parent-child relationship, as a result of marriage, or as a result of being
recognized as an adult by order of a court of competent jurisdiction.
c) If the minor is employed, for the period of time 45 minutes after work, provided
that circumstances suggest the minor is returning from work to a place of
residence.
d) When the minor is returning home, from an activity that is supervised by adults
or sponsored by the City of Little Rock, a civic organization, a public or private
school, or any entity that takes responsibility for the minor, provided that the
activity has not concluded for more than 45 minutes.
e) At any time the minor is on a legitimate parentally approved errand.
f) At any time the minor is on a trip in interstate commerce.
g) At any time the minor is required to leave the residence because of an

emergency.
h) At any time the minor is engaged in an activity that is protected by the First
Amendment to the United States Constitution, or the freedom of speech, religion
or expression provisions in Article II of the Arkansas Constitution.
2. If the juvenile falls within any classification, as listed in subsection 1 above, and the
officer has no other charges to consider against the juvenile, the juvenile shall be released
and no further action shall be taken.
B. Procedures

1. The Field Services Divisions shall be responsible for enforcing the curfew, during the
designated times. Officers coming into contact with a juvenile 17 years of age or younger,
shall (within the bounds of good judgment and common sense) detain that juvenile and
follow the listed procedures. Officers are cautioned to use judicious discretion in their
actions.
2. The following general procedures shall apply to all citations issued to juveniles, who are
determined to be in violation of the curfew Ordinance.
a) All descriptive information on the juvenile, any driver’s license or school

identification numbers, any motor vehicle information and the exact place of
occurrence must be included in the top portion of the citation.
b) The words, “date and time released” or “date and time notified,” and appropriate
information must appear above the box titled “WARNING”. The signature of
the parent, if obtained, must appear at the bottom of the citation and the court
appearance date and time information must be left blank. Court appearance date
and time will only appear on those citations issued, as a result of a warrant
obtained for the parent.
3. The following shall apply to juveniles determined only to be in violation of the curfew
Ordinance (no additional charges):
a) If the juvenile has been properly identified, lives within the City of Little Rock
and a parent has been notified, the officer shall:
(1) Issue the juvenile a criminal citation for 3rd Division District Court;
(2) Transport the juvenile to the parent;
(3) Obtain all information on the parent to include full name, home address
(if different from the juvenile), date of birth, driver’s license or social
security number, place and phone number of employment;
(4) Require the juvenile and parent to sign the citation;
(5) Give the parent the green copy of the citation;
(6) Release the juvenile to the parent or return the juvenile to his/her
school; and,
(7) Turn in copies of the citation (except the blue [Officer’s] copy), per
departmental procedures.
b) If the juvenile has been properly identified, lives within the City of Little Rock,
but no parental notification can be made, the officer shall:
(1) Issue the juvenile a citation, as described in subsection a.1. above;

(2) Obtain as much information on the parent, as possible, to include full

name, home address (if different from the juvenile), date of birth or age,
place and phone number of employment;
(3) Release the juvenile or if citation is for a daytime curfew, return the
juvenile to his/her school and,
(4) Turn in all copies of the citation (except the blue [Officer’s] copy),
including the green copy.
c) If the juvenile cannot be properly identified and no parental notification can be

made, the officer shall:
(1) Transport the juvenile to the officer’s assigned Field Services Division,
or the Major Crimes Division, for further investigation;
(2) After further investigation, obtain all information on the parent to

include full name, home address (if different from the juvenile), date of
birth, driver’s license or social security number, place and phone
number of employment; and/or,
(3) Follow impound procedures, specified in General Order 304,VI.B.2, if

the juvenile is operating a vehicle.
d) If the juvenile has been properly identified, lives outside the City of Little Rock
and the parent has been notified, the officer shall:
(1) Issue the juvenile a citation, as described in subsection a.1, above;
(2) Obtain all information on the parent, to include full name, home address
(3) Require the juvenile to sign the citation and note on the citation that
parental notification has been made;
(4) Release the juvenile; and,
e) If a juvenile has no identification, lives outside the City of Little Rock, but
parental notification can be made, the officer shall:
(1) Issue the juvenile a citation, as described in subsection a.1, above;
(2) Obtain all information on the parent, to include full name, home address

(3) Require the juvenile to sign the citation and note on the citation that
parental notification has been made;
(4) Release the juvenile or if the citation is for a daytime curfew, return the
juvenile to his/her school; and,
f) If the juvenile has no identification, lives outside the City of Little Rock and
parental notification cannot be made, the officer shall contact his/her supervisor,
who will determine what further actions will be taken.
4. If a juvenile is arrested for any other charge during the curfew hours, he will be charged
with the curfew violation on one citation and any additional charge(s) shall be placed on a
separate citation. The citation numbers shall be referenced in the Offense Report and on
each citation, (i.e. also citation # XXXXXX).
5. It will be the responsibility of the on-duty Shift Commander to ensure that the above
procedures are properly implemented, ensuring that good judgment and common sense
are being used regarding juveniles.
XV. Compliance
A. All officers are responsible for the proper processing of incidents involving juveniles.
B. Supervisors will monitor all incidents involving juveniles, and will ensure compliance with this
Order.
C. The Financial Services Manager shall maintain juvenile service billing records and make such
payments to independent organizations, as may be required by City of Little Rock Ordinance
and/or Departmental operating procedures.

GENERAL ORDER
G.O. 308 SPECIAL THREAT SITUATIONS

I. Purpose
A. The purpose of this General Order is to establish guidelines by which the Little Rock Police
Department shall respond to hostage situations, incidents involving barricaded persons, or other
high-risk situations, that pose imminent danger to human life.
B. The primary concern of responding units, in any high-risk situation, is the protection of life. The
preservation of the life of innocent persons, and self-preservation shall be foremost in the mind of
every officer.
C. The primary responsibility of any officer, responding to a high-risk situation, is to identify the
situation and participants, secure the incident scene, notify and deploy necessary support
personnel, and initiate efforts to resolve or defuse the situation. Personnel involved also have the
responsibility of maintaining accurate records throughout the incident.
II. Discussion
A. High-risk situations require well-disciplined, specially trained, and properly equipped personnel,
functioning as a team, to resolve a situation safely and effectively.
1. When situations occur, which warrant special tactical procedures for successful
resolution, personnel trained and equipped for such are necessary; the Special Weapons
and Tactics (SWAT) Unit is responsible for this mission.
2. When negotiations are desired to defuse a situation, personnel trained and equipped for
such are necessary; the Crisis Negotiations Team (CNT) is responsible for this mission.
3. In many instances, both the SWAT Unit and the CNT are necessary for the resolution of
an incident.
B. The use of deadly force, in a high-risk situation, will be governed by applicable laws and
Departmental General Orders and directives. Although deadly force is authorized by law and
Policy, under certain conditions, it shall be used only as a last resort.
C. No order, or set of orders, can be written to cover all possible situations. High-risk situations
involve high levels of stress. Common sense and calm, life protecting police procedures must
prevail. SWAT Unit members are specially trained and equipped for this mission. They, like all
officers, are permitted to use deadly force, as authorized in these General Orders.
III. Definitions

GENERAL ORDERS G.O. 308 SPECIAL THREAT SITUATIONS
A. High-risk situations – Incidents, involving an act of violence, or potential acts of violence, in

which innocent persons and/or law enforcement officers are at a disadvantage and subject to
extreme danger. The following are examples of high risk situations:
1. Hostage Situation - One or more persons being held against their will, with the actual or
implied use of force. This could be the result of a crime, domestic problem, or other
incident.
2. Barricaded Subject - A person who takes a position of concealment to avoid

apprehension. The use of force to resist apprehension shall have been displayed through
action or words, and the officer shall have reason to believe that the suspect will use
deadly force to avoid apprehension.
3. Other - Any situation (such as the serving of a search or arrest warrant, under hazardous
circumstances; information or evidence there will be armed resistance; etc.), not
described above, that an officer determines falls within the definition of a high-risk
situation, and that a response by the SWAT Unit is warranted.
B. Operational Definitions
1. Incident Commander – The Special Investigations Division Commander shall serve as

the Incident Commander for all Special Threat Situations. The Incident Commander
shall have overall control and responsibility for the SWAT Unit and the CNT and, upon
his arrival at high-risk situations, will direct the overall operation. The Incident
Commander shall report to the Assistant Chief of Police / Investigative & Support
Bureau.
2. Special Weapons and Tactics (SWAT) Unit - A unit comprised of specially trained and
equipped officers who respond to high-risk situations.
3. SWAT Unit Commander - A Lieutenant responsible for coordinating training,

operational use, and administrative affairs of the Unit, as well as the day-to-day
supervision of the SWAT Unit. The SWAT Unit Commander shall report directly to the
Incident Commander.
4. SWAT Unit Team Leader – Sergeant, who supervises the operations of a specific SWAT
team and reports to the SWAT Unit Commander.
5. Assistant Team Leader - Sworn member of the SWAT Unit, who assists the Team Leader
in the supervision of a specific SWAT team and reports directly to the SWAT Team
Leader.
6. SWAT Unit Call Out - Members of the unit advised to meet in a designated location,
with all necessary supplies and equipment.
7. Command Post (CP) - Field headquarters located in a safe and secure area, not subject to
gunfire from the scene, from which the Incident Commander will control the operation.
The CP shall be comprised of the Tactical Operations Center (TOC) and the Crisis
Negotiators Operations Center (CNOC).

G.O. 308 SPECIAL THREAT SITUATIONS LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
8. Tactical Operations Center (TOC) - The SWAT Van or other designated vehicle or area,
where all tactically significant information to support the SWAT mission is gathered for
use by the SWAT Unit Commander.
9. Tactical Operations Center Coordinator - A sworn member, designated by the SWAT

Unit Commander, to oversee the functioning of the Tactical Operations Center.
10. Immediate Action / Deliberate Action Team - An element of the SWAT Unit charged with
providing cover and control of the inner perimeter and conducting entry operations.
11. Inner Perimeter - The immediate area of containment. This area is initially manned by
patrol personnel, until relieved by members of the SWAT Unit.
12. Outer Perimeter - Controlled area, manned by patrol officers, which is set up outside the
inner perimeter to keep vehicular and pedestrian traffic out of the incident area.
13. Operation Order - Overall plan, prepared by the Incident Commander, which outlines the
course of action which will be utilized to resolve the situation. The SWAT Unit
Commander will prepare the Operation Order for routine Warrant Service.
14. Tactical Assault - A maneuver by an element of the SWAT Unit to resolve a situation.
15. After Action Memorandum - A memorandum, outlining comments and actions taken
regarding the conduct of the operation, with regard to issues relating to training,
operational and administrative procedures, and equipment needs.
16. Crisis Negotiations Team (CNT) - A unit comprised of personnel specially trained and
equipped for negotiations.
17. CNT Commander - A Lieutenant responsible for the training, operational use, and
administrative affairs of the Unit. The CNT Commander reports directly to the Incident
Commander.
18. CNT Supervisor – A Sergeant responsible for overseeing different functions within the
CNT (Negotiations, Operations, and Logistics/Support).
19. Negotiator - A law enforcement officer or civilian member who is specially trained to
perform negotiation functions. Negotiators report directly to the CNT Commander.
20. Crisis Negotiations Operations Center (CNOC) - The City of Little Rock Emergency
Command Vehicle or other designated vehicle or area, where all significant information
and intelligence are gathered and the Crisis Negotiations Unit conducts negotiations.
21. Logistical Commander – A Lieutenant who will direct the activity of all mission essential
functions that fall outside of the scope of the SWAT Unit Commander and the CNT
Commanders.
22. Logistics Support - Law enforcement, fire department, ambulance company, and
governmental and private industry components, with resources that may provide support
in high-risk situations.

23. Tactical Emergency Medical Support (TEMS) - Physicians and emergency medical
technicians specially trained and equipped to provide medical support in high-risk
situations.
IV. Procedures
A. General Instructions
1. Any officer shall have the authority to call up the SWAT Unit, within the confines of this
General Order. If the officer is unsure whether the situation falls within the definition of
“high risk”, the SWAT Unit will be called for the safety of the citizens and officers
involved.
2. Assigned units will maintain radio discipline and refrain from radio transmission, except
when absolutely necessary. Unassigned units shall remain clear of the high-risk situation
area and shall not enter the area, unless directed.
3. Assigned personnel shall change radio frequency to the designated operational channel,
when directed to do so by Communications.
4. SWAT Unit personnel will use a frequency, other than that designated for operational use
by Communications. The SWAT Unit Commander will monitor the designated
operational frequency. Non-SWAT personnel will make no transmissions on the
designated SWAT frequency, and will communicate with the SWAT Unit Commander
on the designated operational frequency.
5. Whenever possible, communications relating to the high-risk situation will be made by

secure channel or telephone.
6. Units directed to the high-risk situation shall report to the Command Post/Assembly Area
for specific assignment.
B. First Officer at the Scene
1. Move to a position that affords cover and concealment, and avoid a confrontation with
the suspect(s).
2. Advise the Communications Section to restrict a channel for the use of involved units.
3. Direct arriving units to form an inner perimeter, thereby confining the suspect(s) to the
immediate area.
4. Evaluate any injured persons and request medical assistance, if necessary.
5. Call out the SWAT Unit and CNT, and contact a Field Supervisor.
6. Maintain firearms discipline. (The discharging of firearms by officers will be governed

by established Departmental General Orders.)
7. Notify the Communications Section by the safest means available of the following:

a) Location of the incident and nature of the offense.
b) Number and description of hostages. (The names of suspects or hostages should

be transmitted to the Communications Section by secured phone lines, rather
than by radio, if possible.)
c) Description of suspect(s) and weapons.
d) The location to which additional units should respond, as well as any areas or
streets which may be unsafe for responding units to enter.
8. Detain and separate all witnesses to the incident for later debriefing.
9. Brief the first-arriving supervisor of the situation and location of all officers at the scene,
and stand by for debriefing by SWAT and CNT members.
10. At the conclusion of the high-risk incident, submit a detailed Offense Report, outlining
the circumstances of the incident.
C. First Supervisor at the Scene
1. Evaluate the situation.
a) Confirm the nature of the high-risk situation (barricade/hostage/other) and call

out the SWAT Unit and CNT, if not already in route.
b) Establish an assembly area for responding units, request a Shift Commander,

and have Communications Section contact the Public Affairs Officer.
2. Confirm and completely secure an inner perimeter around the high-risk location to
control access in and out of the location.
3. Evaluate the necessity and desirability of evacuating civilians and/or injured persons
from danger areas at this time. If safe, assign patrol personnel to effect their removal to a
location outside the outer perimeter. Debrief those evacuated for information about the
incident and/or suspect(s).
4. Establish an outer perimeter, beyond the view of the high-risk location, block off all
vehicular entrances, and restrict citizens and unauthorized vehicles from entering the
danger area.
5. Establish a Command Post at a safe location, beyond the view of the high-risk location,
to which responding personnel can report. Ensure the Communications Section is made
aware of this location.
6. Ensure that all personnel maintain firearms discipline.
7. Continually update the Communications Section of any new information, and secure any
witnesses at a safe location near the Command Post for debriefing by SWAT officers and
negotiators.

8. As time permits, collect the following information for the SWAT Section Commander:
a) Situation Report - The who, what, when, where, why, and how of the incident.
b) Floor plan of the incident location, construction of the incident location, to

include the type of doors and windows, and access points to shut off power,
water, and gas.
c) Civilians that still need to be evacuated or those who refused to evacuate.
d) Subject and hostage information, to include physical and clothing description;

weapons; demands made and nature of contact with arriving officers; medical
information, to include mental condition; criminal history; incident history of
the location; outstanding warrants; and any other applicable information.
e) Location of officers on the inner perimeter.
9. Coordinate the relief of inner perimeter officers with the SWAT Unit Commander who,
upon his arrival, will then assume command of the scene.
10. Debrief and reassign inner perimeter officers, as they are relieved by SWAT Unit
members.
11. At the conclusion of the incident, assign a patrol unit to transport the suspect(s).
D. The Shift Commander, at the Scene, shall establish liaison with the first supervisor on the scene
and confirm or establish:
1. Inner and outer perimeters, and evacuate any civilians and/or injured, that can be safely
moved.
2. Designate an assembly area and a Command Post location.
3. Establish a news media information area and assign an officer to serve as a media liaison,
until the arrival of the Public Affairs Officer.
4. Control the location of witnesses, coordinate requests for specialized equipment and
vehicles (i.e., rescue, ambulance, fire, etc.), and coordinate any logistical support with
other law enforcement, governmental, and private organizations.
5. Coordinate patrol operations with the on-duty Shift Commander of the unaffected Field
Services Divisions.
6. Coordinate with Special Investigations Division personnel to provide electronics or

surveillance support for both SWAT and Negotiation Units, if necessary.
7. At the conclusion of the high-risk situation, conduct a critique session, with involved
patrol personnel, at the Police Administrative Building or appropriate substation.
E. The Incident Commander shall:

1. Formulate an Operational Plan for resolving the high-risk situation by correlating the
situational reports and the recommendations from the SWAT Unit Commander with those
from the CNT Commander.
2. Coordinate with the Major Crimes Division supervisor for the procurement of such
search/arrest warrants, as may be appropriate. Except under emergency conditions, in
which the lives of civilians/hostages and/or law enforcement officers are in immediate
danger, warrants will be obtained, prior to a tactical assault.
3. Authorize the use of chemical agents when appropriate. Unless otherwise restricted by
the SWAT Unit Commander, SWAT personnel engaged in a tactical assault may use
distraction devices at their discretion, when tactical advantage may be gained by its use.
4. Provide situational and status reports to the Assistant Chief of Police – Investigative
Bureau and/or the Chief of Police. The Incident Commander will appoint another
Captain to assume his responsibilities in his absence in accordance with policy
F. The SWAT Unit Commander shall:
1. Formulate an Operational Plan for the tactical resolution of the high-risk situation and
the service of search and arrest warrants.
2. Brief arriving SWAT personnel, and direct the Immediate Action Team in the relief of
patrol personnel on the Inner Perimeter.
3. Designate a radio channel, which will be used only by SWAT personnel. All other
communications will occur on the channel restricted by the Communications Section, at
the onset of the incident, or on such channel, as may be designated for such use by
supervisory personnel in command at the scene.
4. Direct the Immediate Action Team to prepare for an emergency tactical assault and to
begin planning for a deliberate tactical assault. Tactical assault is used as a last resort,
only when all reasonable options have been exhausted, or are no longer practical, and at
the direction of the Incident Commander.
5. Request the presence, if not already summoned, of Tactical Emergency Medical Support
(TEMS) personnel, and direct their activities at the scene.
6. Request the call out of a Canine Team, and direct its placement, so as to prevent the
escape of the suspect from the Inner Perimeter.
7. Request the presence of the Fire Department Bomb Disposal Squad, when explosives are
found or are believed to be present.
13. Submit an after action memorandum to the, Incident Commander at the earliest
opportunity, after the high-risk situation is completed.
G. The SWAT Unit Team Leader shall perform the SWAT Unit Commander’s duties, in his absence;
perform any other duties, as specified by the SWAT Unit Commander; and direct all tactical
operations involving the team he is assigned to command.

H. The SWAT Unit Assistant Team Leader shall assist the SWAT Unit Team Leader in directing his
team during tactical operations, and perform other duties as directed by the SWAT Unit
Commander or Team Leader.
I. SWAT Unit Members shall follow all orders issued by SWAT supervisors, keep the Team Leader
advised of all information that may affect the operation, and arrive at the assembly area in SWAT
uniform, with all assigned equipment.
J. The CNT Commander shall:
1. Report to the Incident Commander. Shall be responsible for formulating an Operational

Plan for resolving the crisis through negotiations.
2. Brief arriving Crisis Negotiation personnel and make assignments as needed. Be

responsible for the overall coordination and direction of the negotiation team.
K. CNT Co-Commander shall:
1. Report to the Incident Commander
2. Serve as the direct link to the Incident Commander and the Tactical Unit Commander on
overall negotiation progress.
L. CNT Negotiations Supervisor shall:
1. Report to the CNT Commander,
2. Supervise all communications with suspects,
3. Assign the Primary, Secondary and Coach Negotiators to particular duties after
consulting with the CNT Unit Commander,
4. Assure proper flow of information from Negotiations to and from Sergeant (Operations),
SWAT Liaison, and Command level Officers, and
5. Actively monitor the negotiation process and advises personnel on tactics and updated
information as the event continues.
M. CNT Operations Supervisor shall:
1. Report to the CNT Commander,
2. Supervise the collection and dissemination of all Intelligence information,
3. Assign Investigators to interview hostages, family members, neighbors, etc…,
4. Assign Investigators to act as Liaisons to Family Members On-Scene, and
5. Compiles Intelligences into clear concise format to pass along to Sergeant

(Negotiations), SWAT Liaison, and Command level Officers.

N. CNT Logistics/Support Supervisor shall:
1. Report to the CNT Commander:
2. Supervise the use of all equipment and other support needs:
3. Assign Technicians / Officers to duties in support of the operation.
4. Assure needed equipment and supplies are readily available for deployment in support
of the operation. (I.e. Throw Phone, food, water, bull horn…etc…)
5. Ensures the immediate and proper flow of all information at all times.
O. CNT Primary Negotiator shall:
1. Report to the Negotiations Supervisor
2. Communicate directly with the suspect. Attempts to gain the suspect(s)’ trust, gathers
intelligence, and ultimately assists the suspect with surrender.
3. Develops verbal tactics, monitors and assesses the subject’s level of emotional arousal,
strives to “slow everything down” and defuse the situation.
4. Introduce the Secondary Negotiator to the subject if necessary
P. CNT Secondary Negotiator shall:
2. Aid the primary negotiator in establishing an effective communication strategy when

talking to the subject in crisis.
3. Monitor the conversation between primary negotiator and suspect. He/She helps with the
conversation (ideas, strategy).
4. Make sure that all information flows from intelligence sources to negotiator.
5. Act as a support and relief buffer for the primary negotiator.
6. Be the first line of relief for the primary negotiator
Q. CNT Coach shall:
1. Report to the Negotiations Supervisor,
2. Aid the primary negotiator in establishing an effective communication strategy when

talking to the subject in crisis,

3. Monitor the conversation between primary negotiator and suspect. He/She helps with the
conversation (ideas, strategy), and
4. Regulate and provide information to the primary and secondary negotiator acts as an
information bridge, keeps negotiations on a predetermined path.
R. CNT Scribe shall:
2. Maintain written documentation of all communication and actions taken during the
incident.
3. Be responsible for forwarding a report of all information, time lines, and any audio or
video recordings to the CNT Negotiations Supervisor at the conclusion of the incident.
4. Be responsible for adequately updating the status board or master log.
S. CNT Investigator shall:
1. Report to the CNT Operations Supervisor
2. Gather information on the suspect, hostages, situation, and background.
3. Act as a liaison to family members
4. Provide the following types of intelligence:
a) Incident Intelligence- Information about the incident necessary to establish

probable cause (who what, when, where and why/how). Also a chronological
summary of the incident
b) Tactical Intelligence- Information needed for planning a tactical response

(known weapons, diagrams, location of subjects, key holders, etc…).
c) Subject Intelligence- Information about the Hostage taker/Suspect’s personality

or behavior that is necessary to understand Incident Intelligence- Information
about the incident necessary to establish probable the motivation or degree of
risk to self or others. Also any physical and clothing descriptions.
T. CNT Equipment Technician shall:
1. Report to the Logistics/Support Supervisor
2. Ensure needed equipment and supplies are readily available and on hand for the
operation (i.e. throw phone, cameras, computers, food, water, bull horn, etc…)
3. Ensure the immediate and proper flow of all information.
U. The Logistical Commander shall:

1. Report directly to the Incident Commander. Upon arrival at the scene shall assume
command for all street closures, location of the Command Post and the media staging
area.
2. Direct the evacuation of injured persons or civilians from the area within the Outer
Perimeter, if such evacuation has not been completed upon arrival. Shall be responsible
for securing locations and transportation for the temporary displacement of civilians.
3. Request the response of the LRPD Aviation Unit and/or the Arkansas State Police
Aviation Unit when needed, notify them of the situation, and determine response time.
Shall also be responsible for locating an adequate landing zone.
4. Request the presence of the Fire Department Bomb Disposal Squad, when explosives are
found or are believed to be present.
5. Ensure that MEMS is notified and has a route cleared for immediate ingress and egress
from the area. Also designate an area for landing MED Flight, if needed to respond to
the scene.
V. The Special Investigations Division will provide surveillance and/or technical/electronic

assistance to the overall operation, as directed by the Incident Commander, and perform any other
duties, specified by the Incident Commander.
W. The Major Crimes Division shall:
1. Provide assistance to the overall operation, as directed by the Incident Commander;
2. Interview witnesses;
3. Obtain warrants; and,
4. Provide contact with the Crime Scene Search Unit.
X. The Crime Scene Search Unit will provide for the processing of the incident scene, as directed by
the Incident Commander and Major Crimes Division personnel.
Y. The Public Affairs Officer shall:
1. Designate a news media information area, if not already in place.
2. Monitor the operation and inform the media of the status of the incident.
3. Coordinate the release of any appropriate information.
V. Mobilization of Special Threat Situations - It is the policy of the Little Rock Police Department to not
allow a hostage taker to leave the scene of an incident with the hostage. In the event a suspect escapes with
a hostage, or where allowing the suspect and hostage to change locations is believed to be a tactical
advantage, the SWAT Unit Commander will:
A. Notify Communications Section, by secure means, that the situation is going mobile and the
proposed route and destination, if known.

B. Maintain operational coordination, until the incident shifts to another jurisdiction or until relieved
by superior authority, and brief the commander of the new jurisdiction and offer assistance, as
necessary.
C. Coordinate the composition of the hostage/suspect convoy. Consideration should be given to the
number of suspects, their armament, emotional/mental temperament, number of hostages and the
destination. In addition, ensure that:
(1) Parallel motorcades are utilized to provide security for the

suspect/hostage convoy and to prevent escape.
(2) Negotiators are included in, and are an integral part of, the convoy.
(3) Designated marked units accompany the convoy to provide security

and traffic control responsibilities.
(4) Designated surveillance vehicles accompany the convoy, to provide

security and intelligence.
(5) SWAT units are positioned to provide any necessary response.
(6) SWAT personnel are pre-positioned, at the new location, to contain the
suspect and hostage.
(7) Coordinate mobile operations with the Communications Shift

Supervisor and the Surveillance (SID) Supervisor.
b) Ensure that the Communications Section is continually advised of the progress

and location of the convoy.
c) Upon arrival of the hostage/suspect convoy at its destination, ensure that:
(1) An Inner Perimeter is established by the SWAT Unit.
(2) The Communications Section is notified of status and location.
(3) Coordination is accomplished with the Hostage Negotiation Unit

Commander on hostage/suspect communications.
d) If the new location is outside the city, the SWAT Section Commander will brief
the senior officers, of the agency with jurisdiction, with all pertinent information
and stand by with them to provide such assistance, as may be requested.
VI. Airport Special Threat Incidents
A. Airport incidents will be governed by the Airport Emergency Plan and this General Order.
VII. Conclusion

A. All personnel, involved in any type of high-risk situation, must remember that there are two
objectives in all high-risk situations.
1. The primary objective is to preserve the life of hostages, citizens, law enforcement
personnel and suspect(s).
2. Secondary objectives are suspect apprehension, the recovery and preservation of

evidence, and the recovery and preservation of property.
B. A team effort, geared toward these objectives, will enable a peaceful resolution to be achieved.

GENERAL ORDERS G.O. 309 HANDLING MENTALLY ILL PERSONS

GENERAL ORDER
G.O. 309 HANDLING MENTALLY ILL PERSONS

I. Purpose
A. The purpose of this General Order is to provide officers with the resources necessary to
effectively assist persons who appear to need some type of mental health service. This
Order provides officers information on legal and procedural requirements, as well as
information on community resources, which may assist them in providing a higher degree
of service to our citizens.
B. This Order does not prevent or inhibit the placing of criminal charges against any person,
due to mental illness. The determination of mental capacity, in regard to criminal
proceedings, is a matter for consideration by a criminal court, and is not relevant to the
civil commitment provisions contained in this Order.
II. Procedures
A. All entry-level personnel will be trained in understanding mental illness.
1. The Training Division will be responsible for in-service training in Mental

Illness at least every three years.
2. The In-Service Training Sergeant will assess ongoing needs for training,
equipment, and policy regarding the understanding of mental illness and
working with those subjects that have a mental illness.
B. In all cases involving the mentally ill, the primary obligation of the responding Officer is
the safety of the public. This General Order should not be construed to restrict officers
from making legal arrests of persons who are believed to suffer from mental illness when
such arrests are advisable. However, if such arrest is not warranted, it is the function of
the officer to conduct a brief assessment of the mental health needs of the person in
question and exercise one of the following options:
1. Contact the nearest Emergency Room. Should it be necessary to seek an

involuntary commitment of the patient under Arkansas Law (A.C.A. § 20-47-
207) a State Mental Health member will be able to initiate the process. The
responding Officer will assist in this process to whatever extent possible. This is
the appropriate course of action under the following circumstances:
a) When the person is acutely violent.
b) When the person is in need of medical treatment.
c) When the person is unwilling to seek voluntary medical treatment.

2. In instances where an evaluation of the person reveals behavior that would

appear to meet the criteria for involuntary admission, the evaluator may seek a
petition for commitment.
3. If such behavior is apparent to the Officer, however the subject does not present
it during an evaluation, it will be necessary for the officer to seek a commitment
petition. State Mental Health personnel shall assist Officers in obtaining the
petition.
4. When an officer receives information from a citizen indicating that an

individual’s behavior appears to meet criteria for involuntary admission, but the
officer did not witness the behavior, they shall evaluate the situation and
determine if it is advisable to request that the citizen obtain a petition for
involuntary commitment of the individual in question. The officer may also
request the citizen meet or accompany him to an Emergency Room or any such
location for the purpose of assisting in the commitment process. Such
cooperation from a citizen shall always be voluntary in nature; officers shall not
indicate that this cooperation is required under law.
5. Method of Transport – In order to provide for the safety of both officers and
citizens, officers will utilize patrol units equipped with safety screens to
transport persons to an Emergency Room. Those persons, who cannot be
transported in a police vehicle, due to physical limitations, may be transported
by ambulance.
6. Juveniles – When attempting to locate mental health services for persons under
the age of eighteen officers should attempt to contact the juvenile’s parent or
guardian.
a) If contact with a parent or guardian is not possible the Department of

Human Services may be contacted at their twenty-four hour emergency
telephone number 1-800-482-5964.
b) Officers who need to place a juvenile in emergency protective custody due

to mental illness should follow procedures outlined in G.O.307.
III. General
A. At no time should this General Order be construed as limiting the authority, or relieving
the responsibility, of all officers to provide necessary police services to all persons
without regard to mental illness. With the prevalence of mental illness in society officers
must be prepared to deal with persons suffering from these conditions on a frequent basis
during the course of their duties. Officers should remember that the majority of persons
in need of mental health care represent no danger to others; however, there are exceptions
that can become extremely violent and combative with little or no apparent warning. For
this reason, officers should exercise extreme caution in their approach to such
individuals.
1. Avoid excitement, confusion, or upsetting circumstances. These may frighten

the person, inhibit communications, and increase the risk of physical injury to
the subject, the officer or other persons.
2. Do not abuse, belittle, or threaten the person. Such actions may cause the
person to become alarmed and distrustful.

3. Do not deceive the person. This may limit chances for successful treatment and
make future management of the person by other officers more difficult.
4. Do not take the person’s anger personally. Ignore any attacks on your character,
physical appearance or profession, and encourage ventilation to safely release
the frustration.
5. Remain professional in your contacts with the person. With an image of quiet
self-assurance and an insistence on your orders being followed, gently indicate
that your only intention is to help the person.
IV. Mental Health Law
A. Act 861 of 1989 (A.C.A. § 20-47-201 et seq.) sets forth the requirements and
responsibilities for the care, custody and treatment of persons, believed to be in need of
mental health services, due to mental illness.
B. Mental Illness (A.C.A. § 20-47-202) refers to a substantial impairment of emotional

processes, or of the ability to exercise conscious control of ones actions, or the ability to
perceive reality or to reason, when the impairment is manifested by instances of
extremely abnormal behavior or extremely faulty perceptions. It does not include
impairment solely caused by epilepsy, mental retardation, continuous or non-continuous
periods of intoxication, caused by substances such as alcohol or drugs, or dependence
upon or addiction to any substance, such as alcohol or drugs.
C. Voluntary Admission (A.C.A. § 20-47-204) - Any person, who believes himself to have a
mental disease or disorder, may apply to a mental health receiving facility for admission.
If the screener at a receiving facility shall be satisfied, after examination of the applicant,
that he is in need of mental health treatment and will be benefited thereby, he may
receive and care for the person in the receiving facility, for such time as he shall deem
necessary for the recovery and improvement of said person, provided that said person
agrees at all times to remain in the facility.
D. Involuntary Admission (A.C.A. § 20-47-207) - A person shall be eligible for involuntary

admission if he is in such mental condition, as a result of mental illness disease or
disorder, that he poses a clear and present danger to himself or others.
1. A clear and present danger to himself is established by demonstrating that:
a) The person has inflicted serious bodily injury on himself, or has attempted
suicide or serious self-injury, and there is a reasonable probability that such
conduct will be repeated, if admission is not ordered; or,
b) The person has threatened to inflict serious bodily injury on himself and
there is a reasonable probability that such conduct will occur, if admission
is not ordered; or,
c) The person’s behavior demonstrates that he so lacks the capacity to care for
his own welfare, that there is a reasonable probability of death, serious
bodily injury, or serious physical or mental debilitation, if admission is not
ordered.
2. A clear and present danger to others is established by demonstrating that the

person has inflicted, attempted to inflict, or threatened to inflict serious bodily
harm on another, and there is reasonable probability that such conduct will
occur, if admission is not ordered.

V. Mental Health Probate Court Orders
A. The Warrants Unit Sergeant shall receive any Mental Health Probate Court Order, during
normal working hours. If the Warrants Unit Sergeant is not working, the Desk Officer
shall receive the order. Upon receipt the Order shall be forwarded to the appropriate
Field Services Shift Commander for service.
1. All Probate Court Orders shall be served, as soon as possible.
2. Probate Court Orders are valid for one year.
B. Immediate Detention Orders
1. When a Probate Court Order is received by the Warrants Unit Sergeant, or the
Desk Officer, for the transport of a person “For Immediate Detention”, at least
four copies of the Order shall be made.
a) One copy shall be used as a “Court Copy” to be returned to the issuing

court, one for the receiving agency, one for Records Division files and one
for the person named in the Order.
b) Each copy shall also contain the person’s Commitment Rights Form and
any other papers attached by the Probate Court.
2. When the person named in the Order is located, taken into custody, and is being
transported to the facility, designated in the order, the facility shall be contacted
and advised that the officers are en route with a person “For Immediate
Detention”.
3. After arriving at the facility, the facility’s security staff shall accept control of
the person. There is no statute requiring officers to provide security, when a
probate court has ordered detention.
a) Should the facility fail to notify their security staff, officers shall advise
them the Order only requires an Officer to deliver the person named.
b) Officers should document all cases where they were required by Hospital
staff to remain over twenty minutes with a person, who is delivered under
an Immediate Detention Order.
4. When the Order is served, or service was attempted but not successful, the Court
Copy shall be returned to the Warrants Unit Sergeant’s Office, with notation that
the Order was, served or service was attempted, the date and time served or
attempted, and the officer’s name(s) and employee number(s). [CALEA
74.1.2.a, b]
5. After the Order is served, Warrants Unit personnel shall stamp the “Court
Copy” with the service stamp provided for this purpose and return the Order to
the issuing court, within five working days.
6. The Probate Court is located on Unit 4 (upper level) of the Arkansas State
Hospital and the phone number for the Prosecutor Coordinator, assigned to the
Court, is 686-9193.

C. Order of Admission or Evaluation
1. A person involuntarily admitted to a mental health facility, who absents himself

without leave or fails to comply with the court-approved treatment plan, shall be
returned to the facility, upon the request of the person’s treatment staff (A.C.A.
20-47-219).
2. The prosecutor coordinator, or the ASH Admissions Office, will verify the
current status of the Commitment Order and provide the case number, date of
Commitment Order, a copy of the Respondent’s Rights Form, and specific
admission procedures for the person to the Warrants Unit Sergeant, or Field
Services Shift Commander, by hand or facsimile (FAX) transmission to the
Records Division.
3. Orders of Admission or Evaluation may be served with consideration given to

the time of day and manpower requirements. The information contained in
these Orders shall be given to Communications for broadcast to all field units.
4. After the prosecutor coordinator has supplied the required information, officers
shall:
a) Obtain the documents from the Desk Officer or the ASH Admissions
Office;
b) Attempt to locate the person;
c) Transport the person to the designated mental health facility, if the person
can be located; and
d) Return the Order to the Desk Officer, with notation of the date and time of
service or attempted service, and the name and employee number of the
officer(s) serving or attempting service of the Order.
D. Use of Force - Officers may use reasonable and appropriate physical force, necessary to
control and transport persons, for the purpose of involuntary admission or for the
enforcement of a probate court order, in compliance with Arkansas law (A.C.A. § 5-2-
605) and Departmental policies.
1. Appropriate reports shall be completed, in accordance with departmental

guidelines, for Use of Force in every instance where force is used for such
control or transport.
a) Copies of these reports shall be maintained in the Warrant Squad office, if

the use of force occurred during the enforcement of a Probate Court Order.
b) Copies of these reports shall be forwarded to the Training Division for

inclusion in the annual Use of Force Analysis.

GENERAL ORDER
G.O. 310 DOMESTIC ABUSE

A. The nature and seriousness of crimes committed between family or household members are not
mitigated because of the relationships or living arrangements of those involved. It is the intent of this
policy to prescribe courses of action, which police officers should take in response to domestic
violence that will enforce the law, while also serving to intervene and prevent future incidents of
violence.
B. It is the Policy of this Department to:
1. Reduce the incidence and severity of domestic abuse;
2. Protect victims of domestic abuse and provide them with support through a combination of
law enforcement and community services;
3. Promote officer safety by ensuring that officers are fully prepared to respond to and
effectively deal with domestic abuse calls; and,
4. Adhere to the provisions herein with respect to domestic violence.
C. The Little Rock Police Department recognizes that domestic violence may be preventable. By
thoroughly investigating incidents of domestic violence and appropriately enforcing applicable laws,
short and long term positive effects are realized.
D. In both arrest and non-arrest situations, officers of this Department will take all reasonable measures
necessary to assist and/or assure the immediate safety of the victim(s), the children, the offender, or any
other person who may be affected; and to determine what action will be most effective in preventing
future domestic violence. The Legislature has adopted a preferred action standard indicating that when
evidence of domestic abuse exists, an arrest within twelve (12) hours of the occurrence is the preferred
action by law enforcement.
II. Definitions
A. “Domestic Abuse” means:
1. Physical harm, bodily injury, assault, or the infliction of fear of imminent physical harm,
bodily injury or assault, between family or household members, or,
2. Any sexual conduct between family or household members whether minors or adults, which
constitutes a crime under the laws of this state (A.C.A. § 16-81-113(b)(1)).

GENERAL ORDERS G.O. 310 DOMESTIC ABUSE
B. “Family or household member” means spouses, former spouses, parents and children, persons related
by blood, within the fourth degree of consanguinity, persons related by marriage within the second
degree of consanguinity, any child residing in the household, persons who presently or in the past have
resided or cohabitated together, persons who have or have had a child in common and persons who are
presently or in the past have been in a dating relationship together. (A.C.A. § 16-81-113(b)(2)).
C. “Dating relationship” means a romantic or intimate social relationship between two (2) individuals
which shall be determined by examining the following factors;
1. The length of the relationship,
2. The type of relationship, and,
3. The frequency of interaction between the two (2) individuals involved in the relationship.
“Dating relationship” shall not include a casual relationship or ordinary fraternization between two (2)
individuals in a business or social context.
D. “Consanguinity” means lineage or origin by blood relationship. This relationship in domestic abuse
violations extends to the fourth degree and includes Great, Great Grandparents and children, Great-
Grand Uncles and Aunts, and Great-Grand Nephews and Nieces. (See Chart at end of this Order).
E. “Order of Protection” means an order, issued by a Circuit Court, which prohibits a person from
engaging in certain conduct or contact with another person.
F. “No Contact Order” means an order issued to a person arrested for a domestic abuse violation, upon
their first appearance in District Court. This order limits or prohibits contact with the victim, by the
suspect, until the case is disposed of.
G. “Probable Cause” means the combination of facts which gives the officer reasonable grounds to believe
that a crime has been committed, and that the person to be arrested committed the crime.
H. “Ex-Parte Orders” means temporary orders issued by a Circuit Court, which prohibit a person from
engaging in certain conduct or contact with another person.
I. “Petitioner” means the person alleging abuse in a petition for an Order of Protection.
J. “Respondent” means the person alleged to have abused another in a petition or Order of Protection.
K. “Predominant Aggressor” means the person involved in a domestic abuse incident who, when all
pertinent factors are considered, is determined to be the party perpetrating the preponderance of the
aggression.
L. “Preferred Response,” means law enforcement officers shall arrest a person committing domestic abuse
unless there is a clear and compelling reason not to arrest.
M. “Weapon” means any firearm, explosive, metal knuckles, knife, or other device employed as an
instrument of crime subjecting another to physical harm or fear of physical harm.
III. Communications Center Personnel Procedures

G.O. 310 DOMESTIC ABUSE LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
A. Communication Center personnel who receives a domestic abuse call can provide the responding
officers with vital information that could save the victim’s and the officer’s life. Communications
Center personnel will give a domestic abuse call the same priority as any other life-threatening call and
will, whenever possible, dispatch at least two (2) officers to every incident; including those that involve
or appear to involve a police officer of any department.
B. In addition to information normally gathered, an effort should be made to determine and relay the
following to responding officers:
1. Whether the suspect is present and, if not, the suspect’s description and possible whereabouts;
2. Whether weapons are involved and whether the offender is under the influence of drugs or
alcohol;
3. Whether there are children present and whether the victim has a current protective or
restraining order; and,
4. Complaint history at that location.
C. No Communications Center employee, in speaking with a victim of domestic violence, will discuss, or
make any comments concerning the victim’s desire to “press charges,” “drop charges,” or “prosecute.”
D. Communications Center personnel shall not cancel the police response to a domestic abuse complaint
based solely on a follow-up call from the residence requesting such cancellation. However,
Communications Center personnel shall advise responding officers of the complainant’s request.
E. Communications Center personnel shall maintain a current list and contact information of all local
domestic violence victim advocacy organizations for on-scene officers and supervisors to provide to
victims.
IV. Responding Officer Procedures
A. On-Scene Investigation- When responding to a domestic abuse call, officers shall:
1. Restore order by gaining control of the situation and taking possession of all weapons used or
threatened to be used in the crime;
2. Assess the need for medical attention and call for medical assistance, if requested;
a) The Crime Scene Search Unit (CSSU) may also be requested for photographs or
other crime scene processing services.
3. Interview all parties.
4. Take possession of and record evidence found at the scene;
5. After each party has been interviewed, responding officers shall determine if an arrest should
be made or whether other actions should be taken. Where physical evidence exists that
domestic abuse has occurred within the last twelve (12) hours, the officer will arrest the
suspect.

6. Per state law, the first officer who interviews the victim of domestic violence shall assess the
potential for danger by asking a series of questions provided on the LRPD Domestic Violence
Lethality Assessment Form. Officers will use this form when investigating any case of domestic
violence. The completed LRPD Domestic Violence Lethality Assessment Form shall be submitted
with the report. A copy of this form will be attached to the ADR and provided to the Pulaski
County Regional Detention Facility. This copy does not need a supervisor’s signature however
the original will need to be signed prior to attaching it in the RMS system and forwarding to
Victim Services.
7. Per state law, provide the victim, and if applicable, the victim’s family, a Domestic Abuse
Victim’s Rights card (Laura’s Card) and be sure they understand their rights.
8. If the offender has left the scene and a crime has been committed, the officer(s) will:
a) Conduct a search of the immediate area, obtain information from victims and
witnesses as to where the offender might be, and make a reasonable effort to
apprehend the offender.
b) Refer the victim immediately to the Major Crimes Division for assistance in
obtaining a warrant, in those instances where such is appropriate.
B. When responding to a domestic violence call, officers may enter a premises or vehicle without consent
or warrant, when there is probable cause to believe that individuals therein are in imminent danger of
death or serious bodily harm (ARCrP 14.3 (a)).
V. Arrest Authority
A. In addition to other arrest authority, officers are authorized to make a warrantless, probable cause arrest
of a person for a misdemeanor offense, even if the act occurred outside the officer’s presence when:
1. Within the preceding twelve (12) hours the person:
a) Committed a crime in Arkansas; and,
b) The crime committed constitutes an act of domestic abuse against a family or

household member. (A.C.A. § 16-81-113(a)).
2. The person has committed the offense of battery upon another person; and,
a) The officer finds evidence of bodily harm; and,
b) The officer reasonably believes there is danger of continued violence, unless the
person is arrested without delay (A.C.A. § 16-81-106). (This authority is not limited
to domestic abuse situations and has no time limitation.)
3. The person:
a) Is subject to an Order of Protection; and,

b) Has knowledge of the order; and,
c) Knowingly violated the order (A.C.A. § 5-53-134).
4. The person violates an Order of No Contact (A.C.A. 16-10-108).
B. Probable cause shall be based on the following criteria:
1. Evidence is visible and apparent; and/or,
2. The victim’s report is supported by statements of participants or witnesses; and/or,
3. The evidence and information indicate a particular party was capable of, and had the
opportunity to commit the offense.
C. Primary Aggressor
1. To determine the primary aggressor in domestic abuse related incidents, or when an officer
has probable cause to believe that two (2) or more persons committed a domestic related
offense, or where there are allegations that each party assaulted the other, officers shall
consider the following:
a) The severity and extent of the injuries inflicted on each person;
b) Whether one of the persons acted in self-defense; and
c) Damage to personal property; and,
d) Evidence from witnesses of the domestic abuse.
2 The Little Rock Police Department discourages dual arrests; however, if sufficient evidence
exists justifying a dual arrest, and the officer determines that this course of action would be the
most appropriate under the given circumstances, a dual arrest is authorized.
3. Arrests should be made without consideration of:
a) Marital status, sexual orientation, race, or cultural, economic, social, political, or

professional position;
b) Ownership, tenancy rights of either party, or the fact the incident occurred in a private
place;
c) Belief that the victim will not cooperate with criminal prosecution or that the arrest may
not lead to a conviction;
d) Verbal assurances that the abuse will stop;
e) Denial by either party that the abuse occurred when there is evidence of domestic abuse;

f) Lack of a court order restraining or restricting the suspect
g) Concern about reprisals against the victim;
h) Adverse financial consequences that might result from the arrest; or,
i) Chemical dependency or intoxication of the involved parties.
D. Officers shall not:
1. Make any statements which would discourage a victim from reporting an act of domestic
violence; or,
2. Threaten, suggest, or otherwise indicate the possible arrest of all parties to discourage future
requests for intervention by law enforcement personnel.
3. Release or issue a citation to any person arrested for a domestic abuse related offense (Per
District Court order: Persons charged with any degree of domestic battery shall be detained
without bond privileges).
E. Field supervisory personnel will monitor any domestic violence incident dispatched to any officer
under their chain of command or within their area of responsibility.
F. Requests for Violent Crimes Unit personnel to respond to the scene of a domestic related incident
should generally be limited to the following incidents:
1. Police personnel (sworn and civilian) involved in domestic related incidents;
2. Victim(s) and/or suspect(s) in domestic violence incident require treatment at a hospital;
3. Spousal rapes;
4. Domestic related aggravated assaults where weapons are used and suspect is not in custody;
5. Domestic related kidnapping or hostage situations;
6. Domestic related stalking cases where victim is in imminent danger;
7. Domestic related homicides (joint investigation with Homicide Unit); and,
8. Juvenile sex crimes involving domestic abuse (joint investigations with the Juvenile Unit).
G. In addition, the Violent Crimes Unit will conduct investigations when:
1. Cases are directed from the Prosecuting Attorney’s Office;
2. Victims (walk-ins) come directly to the Violent Crimes Unit office for assistance;
3. Cases are referred by other agencies or mandated reporters;

4. The Violent Crimes Unit supervisor assigns special investigations.
VI. Documentation of Domestic Violence Incidents
A. A Little Rock Police Department “Information Report” (Form 5500-01) will be completed whenever an
officer investigates an allegation that domestic abuse has occurred or has responded to a domestic
related disturbance.
B. A Little Rock Police Department Domestic Lethality Assessment Form will be completed whenever an
officer responds to a report of domestic violence or investigates an allegation that domestic abuse has
occurred.
C. Officers investigating domestic related incidents shall give the victim and, if applicable, the victim’s family,
a preprinted document to be known as “Laura’s Card”, LRPD Form No.5410-03.
D. Officers investigating domestic related incidents shall be cognizant of the applicable “enhancement” laws
associated with the charging of persons with a domestic abuse related offense.
1. A domestic offense may be enhanced if the suspect has a conviction for a similar offense,
which occurred within the five (5) years preceding the commission of the current offense.
2. A domestic offense may be enhanced if the suspect has convictions for two similar offenses,
which occurred within the ten (10) years preceding the commission of the current offense.
3. A domestic offense may be enhanced if the suspect knew or should have known the woman
abused was pregnant.
E. Investigating officers, upon deciding to make an arrest or determining that a dual arrest would be
appropriate under the circumstances, must be able to articulate their reasoning and justification for
taking such action and include this information in their report.
F. All domestic violence incidents resulting in probable cause arrests will require a Field Services supervisor
to create two (2) copies of any MVR video files from any MVR equipped vehicles involved in the incident.
One copy of any MVR video files will be included in the case file and the other copy will be stored as
evidence.
G. In all felony domestic abuse cases, or misdemeanor cases as described in Section V.F & V.G of this
order, the assigned detective shall prepare the investigative file (burgundy folder) and ensure that the
following documentation is included:
1. Information report(s);
2. L.R.P.D. Domestic Violence Lethality Assessment Form;
3. L.R.P.D. “Domestic Violence Field Report(s)”;
4. Affidavit(s) of Arrest;
5. Copies of warrants served within the course of the investigation;
6. Arrest(s) report or juvenile affidavit(s);

7. Original officer reports;
8. Victim and witness statement(s);
9. Miranda rights form;
10. Statements of suspect(s);
11. All other notes and documentation obtained during investigation;
12. All Digital photographs taken. (Copies of the photographs and the compact disc shall be
placed in the original case file.); and,
13. Copies of any MVR video files
H. In all misdemeanor domestic abuse cases, resulting in arrest, the arresting officer shall prepare a field
investigation file. The following documentation should be secured in a lavender file folder and
forwarded to the Major Crimes Division:
1. Copies of Information report(s);
2. L.R.P.D. Domestic Violence Lethality Assessment Form
3. LRPD “Domestic Violence Field Report(s)”;
4. Affidavit(s) of Arrest
5. Copies of warrants served within the course of the investigation;
6. Arrest report(s) or juvenile affidavit(s);
7. Original officer reports;
8. Victim and witness statement(s);
9. Miranda rights form;
10. Statements of suspect(s);
11. All other notes and documentation obtained during investigation;
12. All Digital photographs taken. (Copies of the photographs and the compact disc shall be
placed in the original case file.); and,
13. Copies of any MVR video files
I. Prior to the end of the officer’s shift the domestic file will be completed and forwarded to a Patrol
Supervisor for approval. The Patrol Supervisor will sign the inside front cover of the file to indicate
that the file is complete and in compliance with this policy. This file will be forwarded to the Violent

Crimes Unit Supervisor to determine if follow-up investigation is necessary and for statistical
accountability.
J. If the domestic violence allegation does not result in an arrest and a domestic file is not generated, the
officer shall scan the Domestic Violence Lethality Assessment form into the Report Management System
(RMS), attach it to the Incident Report and forward the original Domestic Violence Lethality Assessment
form to the Victim Services Unit for storage.
VII. Transporting of Prisoners
A. Officers who have taken into custody persons arrested for any felony domestic abuse related offense
shall transport that person to the Major Crimes Division for processing of the prisoner.
B. Officers who have taken into custody persons arrested for any misdemeanor domestic abuse related
offense will be responsible for conducting an investigation.
C. Officers may conduct these investigations in the field, or transport persons arrested for misdemeanor
domestic abuse charges to the Major Crimes Division, or any other Police facility (except Special
Operations) in order to assure an environment conducive to their investigation.
1. Officers may request witnesses, victims, or other persons needed for the investigation to meet
them at the Police facility to obtain statement, photograph injuries, or any other actions
necessary for the completion of the investigation.
2. Patrol Supervisors should have access to digital camera equipment for use in the investigation
when such equipment in the Detective Offices is not accessible.
3. Officers should include a criminal history printout of the suspect(s) to verify the possible
enhancement of the charge to felony level has been checked. If any doubt exists as to the
felony or misdemeanor status of a case a Patrol Supervisor or a Major Crimes Division
Supervisor should be consulted.
4. In order to investigate misdemeanor domestic abuse cases in the field, patrol officers should
assure they report for duty with an adequate supply of :
a) L.R.P.D. Miranda Rights Forms (5400-3);
b) L.R.P.D. Witness Statement Forms (5400-11);
c) L.R.P.D. Domestic Violence Field Reports (5410-02);
d) L.R.P.D. Domestic Violence Lethality Assessment Forms; and
e) L.R.P.D. Laura’s Card (5410-03)
VIII. Domestic Abuse Related Incidents Involving Sworn Officers
A. Federal Law

1. Title 18 USC, 922 (g) bans individuals convicted on most criminal acts involving domestic
violence, including child abuse, from owning, shipping, receiving, transporting or possessing a
firearm or ammunition. Law enforcement officers are not exempt. The prohibition includes
any offense that is:
a) A misdemeanor under federal or state law;
b) Has, as an element of the offense, the use or attempted use of physical force, or the
threatened use of deadly force; and
c) Is committed by a current or former spouse, parent or guardian or by a person

cohabitating with or who has cohabitated with the victim or persons who are
presently or in the past have been in a dating relationship together.
2. This includes assault or battery even when the state statute or ordinance does not specifically
define the offense as a domestic violence offense.
B. The Little Rock Police Department recognizes that domestic abuse is a crime and that some police
officers commit domestic violence against their intimate partners, family members, and household
members. This policy is written to insure that the victims are protected and that Department procedures
are followed in accordance with state and federal law.
C. This policy also provides guidance for investigating incidents of domestic violence where one or more
of the involved parties are sworn members of the Little Rock Police Department; or, if one or more of
the involved parties are sworn members of another agency and the incident occurred within the
jurisdiction of the City of Little Rock.
D. Communications Center Personnel Responsibilities
1. When Communications Center personnel receives a call or report of domestic violence

involving a police officer he/she shall immediately contact his/her supervisor.
2. The Communications Center supervisor will then immediately contact the Shift Commander
responsible for the Division from which the call originated as well as a Major Crimes Division
supervisor.
3. Communications Center personnel will dispatch at least two (2) officers to all officer involved
domestic violence related incidents.
E. Responding Officer Responsibilities
1. Any officer arriving at the scene of a domestic violence incident involving a police officer
shall immediately contact his/her immediate supervisor, regardless of the involved officer(s)
jurisdiction.
2. The responding officer(s) will adhere to the following procedures:
a) Take immediate action to ensure the safety of the victim(s);
b) Take control of all weapons used or threatened to be used in the incident; and,

c) Assess the need for medical attention and call for medical attention if required or
requested.
F. Responsibilities of the Supervisor
1. A supervisor will respond to all officer involved domestic related incidents and, upon his/her
arrival, assume all on-scene decision making.
2. If the supervisor has probable cause to believe that there is evidence of physical abuse and that
the abuser is a sworn member of this Department, the supervisor will arrest the offender and
will seize and take into custody all Department issued firearms in possession of the sworn
officer. In addition, the supervisor will request that the sworn member surrender all
personally owned firearms.
3. If the incident involves a sworn member of another agency, the supervisor will arrest the
offender and will seize and take into custody any and all firearms in possession of the person
at the time of arrest. Also, the supervisor will notify, as soon as possible, an on-duty
commander from the accused officer’s department and forward all pertinent information for
that person’s review and possible instructions in reference to the accused officer. This
notification shall be made within twenty-four (24) hours of the incident and shall be
documented in the supervisor’s letter.
4. If, after a thorough investigation, the supervisor determines that an arrest is not the appropriate
action at the time, or that a domestic abuse offense did not occur, the supervisor shall submit a
detailed report articulating his/her reasoning for arriving at that conclusion and forward this
documentation through his/her chain of command for review.
5. If the offending officer is of a higher rank than the responding supervisory officer, the
supervisor shall contact his/her Shift Commander who will then respond to the scene and will
also notify his/her Division Commander. The Division Commander will be briefed on the
incident and will provide direction as needed.
6. If a sworn member of this Department does not have their Department issued firearm on their
person or under their control at the time of the incident, the supervisor shall accompany the
sworn member to the location of the firearm and take custody of the firearm.
7. If the offender has left the scene and a crime of domestic abuse has been committed, the
supervisor will conduct a search of the immediate area and obtain information from the victim
and/or witness as to where the offender might be. If unable to locate the offender, the
supervisor will forward all information to the Major Crimes Division supervisor for
appropriate action.
8. The supervisor shall be responsible for notifying the Division Commander within the involved
officer’s chain of command, the Major Crimes Division supervisor, and the Professional
Standards Section.
9. The supervisor will ensure that the victim receives written documentation providing
information on available community resources and local domestic violence organizations.
The victim will also be made aware of applicable laws as well as department protocols and
policies as they relate to domestic violence incidents. Every effort shall be made to ensure
that the victim takes advantage of all opportunities for safety and successful prosecution.

10. The Violent Crimes Unit supervisor shall serve as the victim’s principal contact agent
throughout the duration of the investigation and shall make themselves available for any
assistance needed or requested by the victim.
G. Responsibilities of Major Crimes Division Personnel
1. Respond to the scene of any officer involved domestic related incident.
a) The Violent Crimes Unit Supervisor will be notified if an officer is charged with a
domestic related incident.
2. Ensure that a supervisor has responded to the scene and, under the direction of that supervisor
shall:
a) Search the crime scene and ensure that all crime scene evidence is preserved,
marked, collected and turned into the LRPD property room;
b) Attempt to obtain consent from the parties involved to search the incident scene for
the purpose of seizing and taking into temporary custody all privately owned firearms
present;
c) Locate and interview all suspects, victims and witnesses to the incident;
d) Forward a copy of all reports to the Violent Crimes Unit as well as to the
Professional Standards Section; and,
e) Determine if an order of protection, restraining order, or any other court order has
been issued or is currently in effect against the offender.
3. The Violent Crimes Unit, under the supervision of the Violent Crimes Unit supervisor, shall
be responsible for preparing the case file for criminal prosecution.
H. Responsibilities of the Professional Standards Section
1. The Professional Standards Section shall conduct an internal investigation upon receipt of
information that a sworn member of this Department has been involved in a domestic related
incident.
2. In cases where an arrest was not made, but sufficient concern exists, the Department may
conduct an independent administrative investigation. Administrative actions should be made
in a timely manner and should not be contingent on the anticipated outcome of the criminal
proceeding.
3. In cases where the sworn member is the victim, the Professional Standards Section is not
required to conduct an investigation unless ordered to do so by the Office of the Chief of
Police.
4. In instances where a sworn officer of the Little Rock Police Department is involved in a
domestic related incident in another jurisdiction, it shall be the responsibility of the
Professional Standards Section to contact the involved agency and report their findings to the
Office of the Chief of Police for determination of administrative action.

I. Responsibilities of Sworn Officer(s)
1. Any sworn member of this Department who has been served with any restraining order, no
contact order or order of protection (including a temporary order) or any order from a District,
Circuit, or Juvenile court, or any other court or learns that they are a defendant named in any
such order will immediately notify their supervisor.
2. Any sworn member who receives notice of any changes in status of any existing restraining
order or order of protection, including, but not limited to the modification or addition of
restrictions or an extension of the expiration date, will notify their immediate supervisor and
the Professional Standards Section, in writing, prior to their first scheduled tour of duty after
the incident.
3. Any sworn member of this Department who is involved in a domestic abuse related incident
which occurs inside or outside the jurisdiction of the Little Rock Police Department will
immediately report the incident to an on-duty supervisor. The supervisor will be responsible
for notifying the sworn member’s Division Commander and the Professional Standards
Section.
J. Reporting Incidents of Domestic Abuse
1. Any sworn member of this Department who witnesses or has firsthand knowledge of a
domestic violence related incident involving a sworn member of this Department as the
alleged suspect and who fails to officially report this information, will be subject to
2. Officers of this Department will be investigated and charged criminally if they engage in
activities such as stalking, surveillance, intimidation, or harassment of the victims or witnesses
in an attempt to interfere with investigations of other officers accused of domestic violence.
IX. Victim Services
A. Many victims of domestic abuse feel trapped in violent relationships because they are unaware of the
resources available to help them or that domestic abuse is a crime. Also, the offenders may have
threatened further violence if the victim attempts to leave or seek assistance. Therefore, officers shall
provide the following assistance to victims, batterers, and, where appropriate, their children:
1. Explain options available to the victim including the prosecution process, ex-parte order of
protection, and in case of arrest, the follow-up procedures and ensuing criminal proceedings;
2. Advise the victim of available community resources;
3. Inform all parties involved that the State will be pursuing charges and not the victim;
4. Secure medical treatment for victims, as needed, and insure the safety of any children;
a) Officers of this Department shall place a high priority on the appropriate placement
and overall safety of children involved in domestic related incidents.

b) Under no circumstances shall the investigating officer(s) conclude their investigation

without verifying that all involved juveniles are adequately placed and are being
properly cared for.
5. Advise victims of the criminal nature of domestic violence, it’s potential for escalation, and
that help is available. Suggest what to do if the suspect or others threatens or otherwise
intimidates the victim.
6. Remain on the scene to preserve the peace as one person removes personal property as may be
necessary for departure only.
7. Provide the victim(s) with a Laura’s Card (LRPD Form #5410-03) which shall include the
following information;
a) Case number and subsequent steps in processing the case.
b) L.R.P.D. Major Crimes Division phone number (501-371-4660), where additional

case information can be directed to or can be obtained from.
c) Women and Children First (501-376-3219) for shelter, support, and consultation.
d) The Prosecuting Attorney Complaints Office (501-340-8000) for appropriate arrest

warrants, if an offense occurred, but was not a battery and did not occur within the
past twelve (12) hours, or the perpetrator was not apprehended.
e) The Prosecuting Attorney’s Victim/Witness Unit (501-340-8000) for assistance with

their case in the criminal justice system, or for additional referral information.
f) Contact information for other community and state programs for crime victims and
their families.
X. Orders of Protection/No Contact Orders.
A. General.
1. Orders of protection are issued by the Circuit Court. Temporary orders may provide relief for
up to thirty days, and final orders may provide relief for a period ranging from ninety days up
to ten (10) years. In order to get a final (sometimes called “permanent”) order of protection, a
petition must be completed and an ex-parte hearing first held to determine if there is good
cause to issue a temporary order of protection prior to the hearing date (which must be
scheduled within 30 days). Once a temporary order is granted, a copy of the temporary order
must be personally serviced on the respondent advising of the hearing date for the final order
of protection.
2. An order of protection can restrain the abuser from contacting and harassing the victim in
person, by telephone, or even indirectly through someone else. It can order the respondent to
keep away from the victim’s resident, workplace and children’s school, and restrict him/her
from possessing firearms for the duration of the order. Child custody and support issues may

be addressed in orders of protection if the parties have children together. Orders of Protection
issued in any county in Arkansas are enforceable in every county of the state.
3. In addition to protective orders issued in Arkansas, protective orders issued out-of-state will
be enforced in Arkansas, provided the form of the order meets the “full faith and credit
requirements” (valid jurisdiction, reasonable notice and opportunity for a hearing on the face
of the order). Any protective order that meets these requirements is to be enforced as if it had
been issued in this state.
4. Act 995 of 1995, codified in Ark. Code. Ann. 12-12-215, requires the Arkansas Crime
Information Center (ACIC) to maintain a registry of all orders of protection and temporary
orders of protection issued by a state court or registered in the state. The court clerk provides
a copy of the orders to the sheriff or other law enforcement agency for immediate entry into
ACIC.
5. Restraining Orders: Orders issued by the Circuit Court, but only in the context of a divorce
proceeding. It is common for a restraining order to prohibit the parties from harassing each
other and also require both parties to protect the marital property interests during the time
preceding divorce.
6. No Contact Orders (as Conditions of Pretrial Release or Probation/S.I.S.): When criminal

charges are involved, and no support or child custody issues exist between the parties, a no
contact order can be requested by the victim (or by the prosecutor on behalf of the victim).
No contact orders are issued by Circuit and District courts in association with violent criminal
charges, as either a condition of pretrial release/bond or as a condition of probation/sentence
suspension (post-trial).
7. To Arrest for a violation of an Order of Protection, officers shall:
a) Have the Communications Center employee contact the Sheriff’s office and confirm
that the court’s order has been properly served, is on file, and the conduct or contact
is prohibited;
b) Charge the person with “Violation of an Order or Protection (A.C.A. 5-53-134)”;

there is no twelve (12) hour limitation imposed upon an Order of Protection.
c) In the event that an officer is presented with an uncompleted Service Statement, he

will complete the form and serve the Order of Protection. The officer will then
follow the NOTICE TO LAW ENFORCEMENT OFFICER instructions and fax or
mail the Service Statement and copy #2 of the order to the Sheriff’s Department.
8. Any officer receiving information that an order of protection has been issued, and that the
respondent may be in violation, will make an appropriate investigation and take such action as
may be necessary in its enforcement.
a) Upon notice that an order of protection is in effect, the officer will verify its existence
by contacting the Communications Center.
b) In the case of an ex-parte order of protection the officer will ensure that it has been
“served” on the respondent or that the respondent has otherwise acquired actual
knowledge of its existence before taking further action (i.e., notified by officers on a
prior occasion);

c) If the respondent does not have actual knowledge of the ex-parte order of protection
the officer will inform him/her of its existence, the substance of its contents, and the
consequences of violating the ex-parte order;
d) In making a determination of whether the respondent does in fact have actual

knowledge of an ex-parte order of protection the officer may rely on the notation on
the order itself showing that another officer has made notification, an admission by
the respondent that he/she is aware of the order, or any information supplied by the
petitioner or other party which may be reasonably believed;
e) If there is probable cause to believe that the respondent has violated the terms of the
order, the officer will arrest the respondent and file an Incident Report;
f) Full Faith & Credit considerations will be extended to all orders issued outside the
jurisdiction of Pulaski County courts
XI. Training
A. The Major Crimes Division Commander shall be responsible for implementing a comprehensive
training program for employees of the Department on domestic violence. New officers must complete
twenty (20) hours of training in handling domestic violence and child abuse cases. In addition, training
will be made available to satisfy requests from the community. This shall include other law
enforcement agencies, schools, hospitals, courts, prosecutors, etc.
B. Departmental personnel shall receive instruction on the following issues/topics:
1. The Department’s domestic violence procedures;
2 Cultural, racial, gender, and same sex issues;
3. Domestic violence dynamics and potential barriers to assistance/intervention;
4. Stalking tactics and behavior recognition;
5. Warning signs of domestic violence by officers;
6. Domestic violence response protocol;
7. Command notification and reporting procedures;
8. General domestic violence investigation and evidence collection;
9. Primary/dominant aggressor determination;
10. Officer safety;
11. Victim rights and safety;
12. Confidentiality issues;

13. Ethical considerations;
14. Criminal and civil liability;
15. Lethality assessment and safety planning;
16. Cross-jurisdictional policies and protocol;
17. Intra/interstate enforcement of protective orders; and
18. Federal stalking, domestic violence, immigration and gun control laws.
C. Additional Administrative Command/Supervisor training related to domestic violence will address the
following:
1. Department legal considerations and liability;
2. Media and public relations;
3. Criminal versus administrative regulations; and
4. Conducting lethality assessments.
D. Employees will receive training on the topic of domestic violence on at least an annual basis. This
training may be scheduled during the employee’s forty (40) hour in-service training.
E. Departmental personnel may receive additional instruction on domestic abuse and stalking during roll
call training.
F. The Violent Crimes Unit shall collaborate with local domestic violence victim advocacy organizations,
coordinating councils, and state domestic violence coalitions in the development of domestic violence
training curriculum and may use local advocates in the training of officers.
G. This policy does not preclude the Violent Crimes Unit from providing additional training upon request
or when additional training would be in the best interest of the Department and its employees.

GENERAL ORDER
G. O. 311 COMMUNITY RELATIONS

CALEA STANDARDS
45.2.1, 45.2.2, 45.2.3, 45.2.3
A. The purpose of this Order is to establish guidelines for community relations activities, assigned to
the Crime Prevention Unit and Community Oriented Police Unit.
B. This Department is committed to establishing close ties with and responding to the needs of the
community. The responsibility for achieving the Department's community relation’s objectives
shall be shared by all Department personnel. [CALEA 45.2.1b]
II. Community Relations Responsibility
A. Formal community relations activities are hereby established, under the direction of the Crime
Prevention and the Community Oriented Police Units. Informal activities in community relations
shall be executed by all officers of the Department. [CALEA 45.2.1b]
B. The Crime Prevention Unit and COPP Unit shall be primarily responsible for executing functions
associated with establishing liaison with community organizations, schools, neighborhood groups,
communities and associations, including implementation of the School Resource Officer Program.
However, all units within the Department shall bear responsibility for achieving close ties and
community relations with these groups, as well. [CALEA 45.2.1a]
III. Provisions of Community Relations
A. All police officers and members shall adhere to the intent of this Order and the Department's
commitment in maintaining and improving its police-community relations, through the use of:
1. Community relations;
2. Crime prevention;
3. Traffic safety programs;
4. Home security programs;
5. Presentations to all sectors of the community;
6. Meetings with concerned citizens;
7. Giving speeches and seminars;

GENERAL ORDERS G. O. 311 COMMUNITY RELATIONS
8. Serving as liaison between the Police Department and community groups, neighborhoods
and schools, etc.; and [CALEA 45.2.1b]
9. All officers of this Department will engage in any activity that will enhance the
Department’s goal of employing the Community Oriented Policing Philosophy
throughout all Units/Divisions of the Department.
10. Any member of this Department receiving information from a citizen relevant to the use,
content, or need for crime prevention information will forward this information to the
Crime Prevention or COPP Units as appropriate. [CALEA 45.2.3]
B. Whenever community leaders, groups or organizations wish to provide input regarding

Departmental policies/programs, which may affect the needs of their community, a letter to the
Crime Prevention Unit will be accepted and reviewed/evaluated, to determine proper response in
regard to Departmental policy. Those providing a letter of correspondence will receive a response
from the Division or Section, affected by the concerns, in a timely manner, unless otherwise
directed by the Chief of Police. [CALEA 45.2.1c]
C. All community relations programs and activities, conducted by the Crime Prevention and COPP
Units, will be documented and a report provided to the Chief of Police. Evaluating these programs
and activities will allow for monitoring of community-related needs, concerns or problems, to
ensure that this unit is effectively meeting Department and community concerns.
D. A quarterly report shall be prepared and submitted by the Crime Prevention and COPP Units, to
the Chief of Police. It will include, at a minimum, the following: [CALEA 45.2.2a-d]
1. A description of current concerns voiced by the community, or section, thereof;
2. A description of potential problems, that have a bearing on law enforcement activities

within the community; and,
3. A statement of recommended actions that address the identified concerns and problems.
4. A statement of progress made toward addressing previously identified concerns and

problems.
E. The intent and commitment of this Department, through the activities of all members and
employees, will be that of corrective actions, and practices, to include change, in attitudes, which
may contribute towards reduction in community tensions and complaints.
IV. Community Relations Responsibilities
A. Officers, assigned to perform community relations activities, shall serve as the liaison between the
Police Department and community organizations, groups and citizens. [CALEA 45.2.1a]
B. The establishment of community groups, where such groups do not exist, will be coordinated by
the Crime Prevention Unit or the Office of the Chief of Police. [CALEA 45.2.1h]

G. O. 311 COMMUNITY RELATIONS LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
V. Community Relations Plan
A. In order for the Little Rock Police Department to more effectively carry out its responsibilities to
the community, foster a closer working relationship with the citizens of Little Rock, and improve
agency practices, bearing on police-community relations, a comprehensive community relations
program/plan is established. This program shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. The School Resource Officer Program was implemented to assist the Little Rock School
District in providing a safe learning environment and to improve relationships between
law enforcement officers and today’s youth. The program also attempts to promote a
better understanding of the law enforcement officer’s role in society, while educating
students, parents, and school personnel, which will build a better community, while also
providing a role model in the educational system. All of these objectives should also help
lower the crime rate in the future. [CALEA 44.2.4a-d, 45.2.1a]
2. Meet with community organizations and community leaders, regarding community

concerns and needs, or other programs, within the Department's enforcement jurisdiction.
[CALEA 45.2.1a, e]
3. Coordinate/develop programs regarding police-community relations/crime prevention.
4. Make recommendations for improvements regarding community needs and police

services.
5. Participate in activities such as law enforcement week, school programs, conferences, or

fair displays, to promote police-community relations and community oriented policing.
6. Organize tours of the Department for those community organizations or schools

interested in police career opportunities and police awareness.
7. Provide feedback and identify training needs through input from citizens, from
consultations with those personnel, involved in internal investigations, as well as
conferences with supervisors. [CALEA 45.2.1g]
8. Identify potential problem locations, situations or individuals, within the scope of youth
activities, and recommend police patrol strategies.
9. Perform other duties, as assigned by the Chief of Police or designee.
10. Assist in publicizing the Department’s objectives, problems, and successes. [CALEA
45.2.1d]
11. Establish community crime prevention groups where needed. [CALEA 45.2.1h]
12. Develop community relations policies. [CALEA 45.2.1c]
13. Convey information, transmitted from citizen groups, to the Department. [CALEA
45.2.1e, 45.2.3]

GENERAL ORDERS G. O. 311 COMMUNITY RELATIONS
VI. Community Relations Function
A. Community relations functions, performed by members of this Department, the Crime Prevention,
and COPP Units will include, but not be limited to:
1. Establishing liaison with formal community organizations and other community groups;
[CALEA 45.2.1a]
2. Informing all personnel that they are responsible for achieving the Department’s
community relations objectives; [CALEA 45.2.1b]
3. Developing community relations policies for the Department; [CALEA 45.2.1c]
4. Publicizing Department objectives, problems, and successes; [CALEA 45.2.1d]
5. Conveying information transmitted from citizens' organizations to the Department;

[CALEA 45.2.1e, 45.2.3]
6. Improving Department practices bearing on police-community relations; [CALEA

45.2.1f]
7. Identifying training needs through interviews with citizen representatives, consultations

with those involved in internal investigations, and conferences with supervisors; and,
[CALEA 45.2.1g]
8. Establishing community groups where they are needed. [CALEA 45.2.1h]

GENERAL ORDER
G. O. 312 EMERGENCY OPERATIONS/INCIDENT COMMAND

I. Purpose
A. The purpose of this General Order is to establish guidelines for the Little Rock Police Department, while
responding to major emergencies, disasters, large preplanned events or spontaneous lawful
protests/demonstrations. The Little Rock Police Department’s organizational philosophy is based on
effective coordination and containment, transparent and timely communication, and if required, the
appropriate levels of control being utilized. The Little Rock Police Department Emergency Operations Plan
will focus on three (3) distinct facets of approach/operation required during any response: Genesis and
initial response, an investigation of the event, and responding to calls for service and investigations within
the entire city.
B. This General Order is designed to establish procedures for the handling of unusually serious incidents,
which will require multiple police unit responses and/or coordination of responses with other city
departments, cities, state, or federal units or agencies. It is intended to facilitate the accomplishment of the
mission assigned to the Department by the City of Little Rock Emergency Operations Plan.
C. The General Order will establish guidelines for the implementation and utilization of the Incident Command
System (ICS) in response to large-scale unusual occurrences. The Incident Command System will aid in the
coordination of other agencies in response to an actual incident and is modeled in accordance with the
FEMA incident management approach.
II. Responsibilities
A. All members of the Little Rock Police Department will respond to incidents in a manner consistent with the
guidelines of this General Order. All members should be aware that inaction may result in an escalation of
the incident.
B. The City of Little Rock Emergency Operations Plan will be distributed to all sworn personnel with the rank
of Captain and above. These personnel will familiarize themselves with the plan and have it available for
reference in the event of a major emergency.
C. The Emergency Operations Plan will be reviewed and updated as needed.
D. The Chief of Police will designate a Homeland Security Advisor who will serve as the Department’s
Emergency Operations Planning Officer. He will be responsible for coordinating the planning function for
response to critical incidents and unusual occurrences. He will report to the Chief of Police or his/her
designee.
E. The Homeland Security Advisor will coordinate an annual rehearsal of the Department’s mobilization
procedure.

GENERAL ORDERS G. O. 312 EMERGENCY OPERATIONS PLAN
III. Alert Stages
A. The following guidelines will be utilized in determining the degree of Department mobilization required to
handle an emergency situation.
1. Stage I Alert: - An unusual incident which could be controlled by on-duty Field Services Division
personnel and leave sufficient manpower to provide police services.
2. Stage II Alert: - An incident of such proportion that all available on-duty personnel not required to
provide other emergency services will be mobilized to establish immediate control of a situation,
and which may require temporary modification of the Department’s organizational structure.
3. Stage III Alert: - An incident which threatens the safety of the City to such an extent that, in the
opinion of the Chief of Police or his/her representative, it is necessary to mobilize the resources of
the Department and/or request the assistance of other city departments and/or outside agencies (i.e.
other law enforcement agencies, National Guard, etc.). Requests for the Arkansas National Guard
and the Arkansas State Police should be made through the City Emergency Operations Center to
the appropriate state agency. In any incident approaching such magnitude that the need for
extensive police response is obvious (i.e. riots, major disasters, etc.) and telephone contact is not
possible, it shall be the duty of all officers, including off-duty, to report, without notification, to
his/her Division of assignment.
IV. Command Centers
A. The Department may have three separate Command Centers in operation during an alert. The Emergency
Operations Center and the Department Command Center may be activated for a Stage II or III alert, or at
the direction of the Chief of Police:
1. The Incident Command Post, staffed by the Assistant Chief of Police – Field Services Bureau, the
affected Field Services Division Commander, the Special Operations Division Commander,
Headquarters Division designee, and support personnel, normally located at or very near the
actual incident;
2. The City Emergency Operations Center (EOC), staffed by the Chief of Police, the Assistant Chief
of Police – Executive Bureau, the Homeland Security Advisor and support personnel, normally
located in the Emergency Operations Center, 7000 Murray Street, Little Rock, Arkansas. In an
effort to ensure the effectiveness and increase the synergy necessary to monitor, direct resources
and handle the event, it is recommended that the Mayor, City Manager, Fire Chief (or designee),
MEMS Director, Director of Housing and Neighborhood Programs, Neighborhood Programs,
Director of Public Works and Fleet Service Manager, and ADEM and National Guard Command
personnel (if applicable) also report to the City EOC;
3. The Department Command Center, staffed by the, Assistant Chief of Police, Investigative Bureau,
Major Crimes Division Commander, Special Investigations Division Commander, Records and
Support Division Commander and other additional support personnel normally located at 700 W.
Markham, Little Rock, Arkansas.
V. Implementation
A. This Incident Command System and/or Emergency Operation Plan may be implemented during the
following types of civil disturbances or disasters:

G. O. 312 EMERGENCY OPERATIONS PLAN LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
1. Riots;
2. Large scale demonstrations;
3. Strikes;
4. Natural disaster (i.e. tornado, earthquake); and/or,
5. Any other type of civil disorder or disaster that threatens human life or property.
VI. Mobilization Procedure
A. Divisional Rosters
1. Each Division will prepare and maintain an up-to-date Special Call-Out Procedure - Emergency
(S.C.O.P.E.) Plan, which lists the name, address, and telephone numbers of each of its members.
All supervisory personnel shall retain a copy of their Division’s S.C.O.P.E. Plan at their homes and
offices for ready use.
2. Division S.C.O.P.E. Plans shall be updated and a copy forwarded to the Homeland Security
Advisor and the Communications Center by the 10th of each month. A copy of these updates shall
be maintained with the Desk Officer.
3. Each Field Services Division shall assign at least two (2) officers as drivers for the Mobile
Command Vehicle. These officers will be trained by the Little Rock Police Department Training
Division on proper driving and setup procedures of the Mobile Command Vehicle. A list of all
drivers and their contact numbers will be forwarded to the Homeland Security Advisor on a
quarterly basis. The Homeland Security Advisor will maintain an up to date Mobile Command
Vehicle Call-Out List, which will be provided to the Communications Section on a quarterly basis.
B. When an incident necessitating a Stage I Alert occurs, the affected on-duty Shift Commander will assume
command and evaluate the incident to determine if ICS is needed to initiate the level of mobilization
necessary to control the incident. The Shift Commander will be responsible for making staff notifications at
his/her discretion.
C. Whenever an incident appears to necessitate a Stage II or III Alert, the on-duty Shift Commander shall
immediately notify the Chief of Police, the Assistant Chief of Police – Investigative Bureau, Homeland
Security Advisor, Assistant Chief of Police - Field Services Bureau, Assistant Chief of Police - Executive
Bureau and the appropriate Field Services Division Commander and advise them of the situation. The
ranking commander available shall determine what level of mobilization may be appropriate and direct that
the mobilization procedure be implemented.
1. The Homeland Security Advisor shall notify all Division Commanders.
2. Division Commanders will ensure that all the necessary personnel under their command are
alerted, and will direct them to report for duty to a specified location.

3. In the event of a Stage II or III alert, the on-duty Shift Commander shall contact the Communications
Section and have the Mobile Command Vehicle mobilized. The Communications Section shall utilize the
Mobile Command Vehicle Call-Out List to dispatch a qualified vehicle operator, the Information
Technology Lieutenant and the On-Call Information Technology Technician. The Operator will retrieve the
Mobile Command Vehicle and transport it to the location designated by the Incident Commander.
4. Each member notified shall immediately report to the designated location, properly equipped and prepared
to perform police duties.
5. Members unable to respond to the designated location due to road or bridge damage or other obstruction,
shall respond to the nearest available Field Services Division and perform such duties, as assigned by the
on-scene commander. When this occurs, the member shall contact the supervisor who requested his/her
mobilization, and shall advise him/her of the alternative action.
6. Supervisors shall maintain a record of members contacted with mobilization instructions. A copy of this
record will be forwarded to their Division Commander.
7. Supervisors shall maintain a roster of all officers who report to them for assignment in order to coordinate
personnel deployment and to subsequently account for the manpower utilized. A copy of this roster will be
forwarded to their Division Commander.
D. Report Without Notification
1. In any incident approaching such magnitude that the need for extensive police response is obvious (i.e.
riots, major disasters, etc.) and telephone contact is not possible, it shall be the duty of each officer to
report, without notification, to his/her Division of assignment.
2. If any member, reporting for duty without notification, cannot reach the Division of his/her assignment,
he/she shall respond to the nearest available Field Services Division and perform such duties as may be
assigned by the on-scene commander.
E. Demobilization - At the completion of any incident requiring mobilization, the Chief of Police or his/her designee
will determine the manpower requirements for post-incident duty and direct that surplus personnel be released.
1. Officers released from duty shall complete any required reports and check out with their incident supervisor
before going off-duty.
2. Officers who remain on extended duty shall be released by their incident supervisors at the completion of
their assignments.
3. Division Commanders shall submit a record, using National Incident Management System (NIMS) Incident
Command System (ICS) forms, of the names of officers assigned to them during the incident, including the
times they reported to and were released from duty. These records shall be delivered to the Incident
Commander after the incident is ended. The Financial Services Manager will adequately assess the
manpower expenditure.
VII. Field Command - Emergency Operations
A. Incident Command should be established whenever an incident requires the response of multiple police units to a
Stage I, II, or III Alert. Incident Command will be established in accordance with the Department’s chain-of-
command structure.

B. Command Structure
1. The operational structure of the Police Department may be modified during Emergency Operations.
Whenever a police incident requires the establishment of Incident Command, the Departmental order of
succession for line control of the incident will be as follows:
a) Chief of Police;
b) Assistant Chief of Police – Executive Bureau and the Homeland Security Advisor;
c) Assistant Chief of Police -Field Services Bureau;
d) Assistant Chief of Police – Investigative Bureau;
e) Field Services Division Commander in the Division of Occurrence;
f) Shift Commander in the Division of Occurrence;
g) Sergeant assigned to the scene of the incident; and,
h) Officers assigned to the scene of the incident.
C. Assuming Command
1. In the initial stages of an emergency incident investigation, the first officer on the scene (senior officer if
more than one officer arrives simultaneously) shall assume and retain Incident Command, until relieved by
a supervisor (Sergeant) or command-level officer (Lieutenant or above).
2. The modification of the Department’s organizational structure for line control during an emergency
situation does not negate the Department’s established chain-of-command. This means that any command
level officer in the Department’s normal chain-of-command may assume command and responsibility for
police response at any time during the police emergency.
3. The appearance or mere presence of a command-level officer at the scene of a police incident shall not
indicate his/her assumption of command. However, should this command-level officer issue orders or direct
the activities of personnel, he/she has indicated the assumption of Incident Command and must follow the
procedures outlined in this General Order.
a) If this command-level officer wishes to remain at the scene in an advisory capacity to the Incident
Commander, he/she must not issue orders or direct the activities of police personnel.
b) If the Incident Commander is unsure of the status of a command-level officer on the scene, he/she
should ask the command-level officer directly if he/she has assumed command, so that no
confusion exists.
D. Incident Commander Authority
1. When a member of the Command Staff personally appoints an Incident Commander, this officer will
normally be relieved of command by the Chief of Police or the Command Staff member who appointed the
Incident Commander.

2. The Incident Commander, regardless of rank, shall have complete authority and responsibility for
conducting the field operations of the Police Department for the duration of the emergency, until properly
relieved.
3. All personnel assisting in or assigned to the involved area shall be subjected to the direct command and
supervision of the Incident Commander.
E. Change of Overall Command - Major Crime Scenes
1. After an emergency operation involving a major crime scene has been resolved and the Incident
Commander decides that the emergency has passed, the on-scene command of the incident may be passed to
the Major Crimes Division for further investigation, if necessary.
2. A supervisory officer of the Major Crimes Division shall then assume Incident Command and direct the
follow-up investigation.
3. All personnel from other Divisions will continue to assist as needed, obeying orders and directives given by
the Major Crimes Division supervisor (Incident Commander), and will remain on their assignments until
properly relieved by that Incident Commander.
VIII. Command Responsibilities - Stage I Alert
A. When a Stage I Alert has been declared, officers shall assume the following basic responsibilities:
1. First Officer at the Scene - The first officer at the scene of a major incident that requires a large and rapid
response of police units shall:
a) Assume and retain Incident Command until properly relieved by a superior officer;
b) Observe and record the activities taking place; and,
c) Request a supervisor and any other assistance he deems necessary (i.e. additional units, fire
department personnel, medical personnel, tow truck).
2. First Supervisor at the Scene - The first supervisor at the scene of a major incident that requires a large and
rapid response, shall:
a) Assume Incident Command;
b) Assess the incident and initiate a plan of action;
c) Notify a Shift Commander who will respond to the scene; and,
d) Request the necessary resources to carry out his/her plan of action (i.e. additional manpower,
special equipment).
3. The Shift Commander at the scene of the incident shall assess the incident to determine if it is of a
magnitude that warrants escalation to a Stage II or III Alert.

a) If a Stage I Alert, he/she will assume Incident Command and ensure the Departmental manpower
and resources necessary to control the situation have been requested. At the conclusion of the
incident, he/she will submit a detailed After Action Report through the chain of command to the
Chief of Police and forward a copy to the Homeland Security Advisor.
IX. Escalation from Stage I to Stage II Alert
A. Whenever the decision is made to move from a Stage I to a Stage II Alert, the Incident Commander shall:
1. Ensure that the Chief of Police, Assistant Chief of Police – Investigative Bureau, Assistant Chief of
Police - Field Services Bureau, Assistant Chief of Police - Executive Bureau and the Homeland
Security Advisor are notified;
2. Direct all field units in the involved area to switch to a common frequency. (This frequency will
usually be designated by the highest ranking supervisor in Communications;
3. Direct the Communications Center telephone clerks to screen all calls so that units are only
dispatched to emergency incidents;
4. If not on the scene, ensure that a Field Services Division Commander, preferably from the Division
of occurrence, responds to the scene; and,
5. Coordinate the mobilization of all on-duty personnel by notifying the Homeland Security Advisor
or his/her designee.
B. On-duty, non-uniformed members shall report in person to their supervisors. These supervisory officers
shall prepare a roster of available personnel. A copy of this record will be forwarded to their Division
Commander and the Homeland Security Advisor.
X. Escalation from Stage I or II to Stage III Alert
A. Whenever the Chief of Police or his/her representative declares a Stage III Alert:
1. The Homeland Security Advisor shall notify the Assistant Chief of Police – Investigative Bureau,
Assistant Chief of Police - Field Services Bureau, Assistant Chief of Police - Executive Bureau and
all Division Commanders, or their designees, to activate their S.C.O.P.E. Plans.
2. The Public Affairs Office will be utilized to ensure radio and television stations are requested to
periodically broadcast that off-duty officers are to report for assignment and that calls for service
will be prioritized and that response times may be affected.
a) The Public Affairs Lieutenant will respond to the City Emergency Operations Center
(EOC) and develop specific times for the media to be briefed.
b) The Crime Stopper Officer will respond to the Incident Command Post and develop
specific times for the media to brief.

c) The Crime Prevention Coordinator will respond to the Department Command Center and
develop specific times for the media brief. F.O.I. Sergeants will also respond to the
Department Command Center and support the Assistant Chief of Police Investigative
Bureau and the Major Crimes Division Commander.
3. All off-duty members who have not been contacted through the S.C.O.P.E. Plan have the
responsibility to report, without notification, when they become aware of such an emergency
situation.
4. Officers on an approved extended leave have the responsibility to contact the Department as soon as
possible. Officers on Extended Leave and working in a restricted duty assignment will be assigned to the
Communications Center for the duration of the event.
XI. Command Responsibilities - Stage II or III Alert
A. In a law enforcement event, the Chief of Police or his/her representative shall serve as the Law Enforcement
Coordinator and will be responsible for:
1. The issuance of appropriate instructions for the purpose of ensuring coordinated, effective deployment of
personnel and equipment for control of the incident, and for providing effective police services to the
remainder of the City;
2. The monitoring of police activities, as well as the coordination of the entire organization with outside
agencies;
3. Informing other authorities (i.e. City Emergency Control Group, other agency heads, etc.) of police
activities upon request or when appropriate;
4. The constant evaluation of incoming information in order to keep apprised of the scope and direction of the
incident;
5. Requesting any necessary assistance from City Departments, other police agencies, and State and/or Federal
Agencies;
6. The review of requests and authorization for use of special equipment;
7. Maintain ongoing media relations, through the Public Affairs Office; and,
8. Approving a plan for demobilization.
B. Assistant Chief of Police – Executive Bureau and the Homeland Security Advisor shall be responsible to:
1. Respond to the City Emergency Operations Center, and assist in coordinating the analysis of incoming
intelligence;
2. Keep a current account of personnel assigned to the incident area and assist the Department Command
Center in planning for and meeting the personnel and logistical needs of the Incident Commander;

3. Serve as the Incident Recorder, and be responsible for compiling an overall chronological history of the
incident, in writing, by monitoring all related telephone and police radio communications;
4. Act as the Damage Assessment Officer by keeping an account of reported damage;
5. Provide auxiliary services, personnel, equipment, and supplies, as required to support field operations; and,
6. Act as liaisons for outside agencies, including courts and the Prosecuting Attorney’s Office.
C. Assistant Chief of Police – Field Services Bureau, affected Field Services Division Commander, Special Operations
Division Commander and Headquarters Division designee shall be responsible to:
1. Establish an Incident Command Post if one has not been established;
2. Order the use of special equipment (if time does not permit authorization through the Chief of Police);
3. Estimate the immediate and future equipment and manpower needs, so that off-duty personnel and other
agencies can be mobilized, if necessary (personnel assigned to the Headquarters Division shall be utilized to
work from the Command Post and may be supplemented from any other division, with approval from the
Chief of Police or his/her designee, except those personnel assigned to the Department Emergency
Operations Center);
4. Maintain situation maps and activity logs encompassing the emergency area, and prepare oral and/or written
status reports for the Chief of Police or his/her representative;
5. Establish a Department Staging Area to coordinate personnel and equipment for effective control of the
incident;
6. Establish a traffic control plan, to include detour routes, removal of vehicles, ingress and egress routes,
emergency vehicle routes, etc.; Establish crowd control and area isolation, if necessary;
7. Institute the evacuation of buildings and danger areas, if necessary;
8. Establish interior patrol to provide general law enforcement and the prevention of looting;
9. Collect and disseminate information regarding dangerous and/or damaged areas and the traffic capabilities
of the streets;
10. Compile information regarding casualties or missing persons;
11. Establish a first-aid station for police and support personnel; and,
12. Participate in a review and critique at the completion of the Incident.
D. Assistant Chief of Police – Investigative Bureau, Major Crimes Division Commander, Special Investigations
Division Commander, and Records and Support Division Commander shall be responsible to:

1. Respond to the Department Command Center, and assist in coordinating the analysis of incoming
intelligence;
2. Coordinate the collection and analysis of intelligence information;
3 Coordinate communication with assisting outside agencies;
4 Maintain constant communications with the Field Command Post and the City Emergency Operations
Center;
5. Review traffic control plans in affected areas based upon recommendations of Field Services Division
Commanders.
6. Assist with logistical needs.
E. Major Crimes Division Commander shall be responsible to:
1. Respond to the Department Command Center, and assist in monitoring police activities and the evaluation of
incoming information, unless directed otherwise by the Chief of Police;
2. Coordinate communications with assisting outside agencies;
3. Maintain constant communications with the Field Command Post and the City Emergency Operations Center;
4. Review traffic control plans in the stricken areas, based on the recommendations of the Field Services Division
Commanders;
5. Assist with logistical needs; and,
6. Ensure that staffing of Major Crimes personnel is sufficient for investigation of the duration of the event and for
investigation requests/requirements in the other divisions.
F. Field Services Division Commanders, not involved in the incident Division of occurrence, will have command over the
regular police activities within their areas of responsibility to ensure that normal patrol functions are accomplished.
G. Headquarters Division Commander or designee will be responsible to:
1. Respond to the Incident Command Post and ensure that all Memorandums of Agreement (MOA) or Memorandums
of Understanding (MOU) that have been developed between other city departments and or civic organizations are
activated involving:
a) Relocation/temporary housing for displaced civilians
b) Requesting mass transit for civilians
c) Food and essential supplies for displaced affected civilians
d) Providing protection/security for displaced civilians

e) Medical care (i.e. MEMS, UAMS)
f) Any other required assistance
g) Ensure that the Departmental S.C.O.P.E. plan call-out is exercised at minimum annually
h) Prepare a memorandum to the Office of the Chief of Police identifying any discrepancies in the annual
S.C.O.P.E. plan and suggestion(s) for improvement within 30 days
XII. Pre-assigned Duties and Responsibilities – Stage II or III Alert
A. The Training Division shall:
1. Have primary responsibility for the implementation of the Department’s mass arrest and prisoner first aid
operations in accordance with established procedures;
2. Provide Training building security and video/photograph recording teams during mass arrests;
3. Arrange for the emergency vehicle repair and transportation needs of the Department, or other duties at the
direction of the Training Division Commander or the Assistant Chief of Police - Executive Bureau;
a) Have the responsibility to equip and train all sworn personnel in line operations, riot control
tactics.
b) NIMS ICS 100, 200, 700, 701, 702, 703, 800 and ICS 300 & 400 training will be administered to
all Basic Recruits and the appropriate NIMS training for supervisors selected for specific staff
positions in the Incident Command Post will be tailored for supervisory In-Service.
c) Responsible for providing a checklist of responsibilities for divisions/sections with reassigned

responsibilities. Specifically, training will be developed for: Safety Officer, Liaison Officer,
Information Officer, and Operations officer, Planning/Intelligence Officer, Logistics Officer and
Finance Officer.
B. The Professional Standards Section will provide adequate citizen complaint accessibility as necessary. Professional
Standards personnel may be assigned by the Chief of Police any other duties necessary for the successful completion
of the overall mission.
C. The Public Affairs Office will provide press liaison in cooperation with the Chief of Police from the various
command center locations. The PAO should respond quickly to rumors and misinformation by disseminating
accurate and timely information to media outlets.
D. The Major Crimes Division will be assigned to process prisoners arrested for serious crimes, to assist authorities in
identification of the dead and damage assessment, and other duties as directed.
1. Ensure that staffing of Major Crimes personnel is sufficient for investigation of the duration of the event
and for investigation requests/requirements in the other divisions.

E. Headquarters Division shall:
1. Provide for the physical security of the main police headquarters complex, Communications Center, and
essential city offices.
F. Special Investigations Division personnel will be assigned to intelligence-gathering tasks or other duties at the
direction of the Special Investigations Division Commander or the Assistant Chief of Police – Investigative Bureau.
1. Respond to the Department Command Center, and assist in monitoring police activities and the evaluation
of incoming information, unless directed otherwise by the Chief of Police;
2. Coordinate the collection and analysis of intelligence information;
3. Coordinate the viewing, deployment, and retention of data for the City Wide Camera system in affected
areas.
4. Assist any officer(s) and family, involved in high profile incidents, with temporary housing, protection, and
due process of law.
G. Special Operations Division
1. The Special Events Lieutenant, Sergeant, and two officers will be assigned to the Department Command
Center.
2. Special Operations Units (K-9, SRO, Motorcycles) will be utilized at the incident scene in either a riot
control capacity, or as identified by the Incident Commander.
3. The Special Response Unit may be utilized in either a riot-control capacity, or as an element of the City’s
Disaster Urban Search and Rescue Team.
4. The Special Weapons and Tactics (SWAT) Unit may be deployed to provide cover for field units. The
manner of their deployment should not be such that the Unit is unable to be quickly redeployed to meet
special threats as they arise.
H. Field Services Division personnel shall monitor and enforce all regular police activities within their areas of
responsibility to ensure that normal patrol functions are accomplished.
I. Sergeants assigned to field duty shall normally command a squad of no more than seven officers and shall report
directly to the Incident Command Post for duty assignment.
XIII. The Incident Command Post
A. Personnel assigned to the Incident Command Post shall provide the following:
1. Operational facilities for utilization by the Incident Commander; and,
2. Establishment of a communications link with the Emergency Operations Center and the Department
Command Center.

B. Incident Command Post Personnel
1. Incident Command Post personnel shall be commanded by the Incident Commander.
2. The Incident Commander may appoint such staff as he may need.
a) Safety Officer – will be responsible for the overall safety of emergency responders assigned to the
incident and often acts as an advisor to the IC. See addendum for duties
b) Liaison Officer - provides in-depth contact with staff from outside agencies and may step in for the
IC during busy moments at and around the command post but often operates very near, but not
within, the command post. See addendum for duties
c) Information Officer – The Crime Stopper Officer or designee will respond to the Incident
Command Post and develop specific times to brief the media with current, accurate, and authorized
information about the emergency. See addendum for duties
d) Operations Officer – is responsible for managing and performing all actions on scene. Operations
personnel may perform a wide variety of on-scene tasks including fighting fire, rescuing and
treating victims, managing hazardous materials, and anything else necessary and practical to
resolve the emergency. See addendum for duties
e) Planning/Intelligence Officer - continuously monitors, evaluates, updates, and recommends

modifications to the Incident Action Plan. See addendum for duties
f) Logistics Officer - manages procurement and distribution of assets related to the incident. See
addendum for duties
g) Finance Officer - deployed at large incidents where financial support, reimbursement, and/or
administrative services are needed. See addendum
C. Incident Command Post Operations
1. Incident Command Post operations shall include facilitating the Incident Commander’s duties and
responsibilities, as follows:
a) Manpower and equipment needs and estimates;
b) Crowd control and area isolation;
c) Building or area evacuation;
d) Interior patrol and general law enforcement;
e) Bomb threat or bomb emergency response, in accordance with policy;
f) First-aid station and/or morgue; and,
g) Incident staging-area operations.

XIV. Field Communications Post
A. The Incident Commander, at the scene of a major police incident, shall establish a Field Communications Post
whenever one of the following conditions exists:
1. When the number of personnel or units assigned to the incident is large enough that coordination through a
Field Communications Post is necessary.
2. When the incident is of such severity that constant communication with the Department Command Center is
desirable.
B. The Field Communications Post should be established either at or near the Incident Command Post, to enable secure
telephone contact between the Incident Command Post and the Department Command Center.
C. Whenever a Field Communications Post is established, the Chief Dispatcher will be notified immediately. The
Communications Center on-duty Supervisor shall allocate the frequency (or frequencies) necessary for handling the
incident, and make the necessary adjustments in assigning frequencies for policing the remainder of the City.
D. A Field Communications Officer shall be assigned by the Incident Commander to remain at the Field
Communications Post, and shall be constantly available for communications.
XV. Staging Areas
A. Staging Areas
1. The Incident Commander may elect to establish a Staging Area. The location of such staging area
will normally be near or adjacent to the Incident Command Post, but may be located elsewhere, as
site availability, security, accessibility, or other factors may dictate.
2. The mission of the Staging Area may include:
a) Providing a check-in area for arriving personnel and equipment;
b) Providing a maintenance area for damaged vehicles and equipment;
c) Providing a temporary storage area for impounded vehicles; and,
d) Providing a secure area for parking of law enforcement personnel’s private vehicles.
B. Department Staging Area
1. The Department Staging Area will normally be activated only during a Stage II or III Alert, or at
the discretion of the Chief of Police or his/her representative. The Department Staging Area will be
located at the designated Departmental facility or at any other site, selected by the Chief of Police
or his/her representative.
2. The mission of the Department Staging Area is to provide a central location for:
a) The personnel function of accounting and processing incoming and relieved members;

b) The expedient dispatching of personnel and equipment to involved areas; and,
c) The disbursement and control of vehicles, emergency equipment, food, etc.
XVI. Reports and Communications
A. Effective command and control are dependent upon prompt, accurate, and complete information. During
Emergency Operations or large-scale occurrences, all personnel shall have a primary responsibility to
communicate all pertinent information upward to the next higher level of authority.
B. Situation Reports - A periodic Situation Report shall include the following information:
1. Current developments of the incident;
2. Control measures implemented;
3. Analysis of the overall situation; and,
4. Manpower and equipment needs, etc.
C. Situation Reports may be included on a Little Rock Police Department Officer’s Report Form (5600-02)
and shall be forwarded and/or communicated to the Department Command Center, at appropriate intervals,
by the Incident Commander. Situation Reports may be communicated by computer link-up, when available,
and a copy of that communication retained by the Incident Commander.
D. After Action Report - At the conclusion of every incident in which ICS is implemented, Homeland Security
Advisor shall ensure that a comprehensive after action report is completed and forwarded to the Office of
the Chief of Police within ten (10) business days. The After Action Report shall detail the ICS protocol and
address any deficiencies. The Homeland Security Advisor shall be responsible for the completion of a
documented analysis of ICS incidents as well as all interagency training and rehearsals triennially.
E. Units having equipment designated for use in emergency operations will inspect that equipment for
operational readiness, and retain documentation of that readiness inspection.
XVII. Disaster Urban Search and Rescue
A. In accordance with the City Emergency Operations Plan, the City Manager may declare a state of disaster
and activate the Little Rock Disaster Urban Search and Rescue Team.
B. The Special Response Unit (SRU), acting under the command of the SRU Lieutenant and the oversight of
the affected assigned Field Services Division Commander, will provide the police response portion of the
Little Rock Disaster Urban Search and Rescue Team.
C. The City of Little Rock Emergency Control Group, operating from the Emergency Operations Center, will
coordinate the activities of the various City Departments (i.e. fire, engineering, police, etc.) providing
search and rescue personnel and equipment.
D. The Special Response Unit will provide that portion of the search and rescue function which best suits its
training and equipment (i.e. crowd control, protective services, etc.).

E. The Law Enforcement Coordinator (i.e. Chief of Police) will coordinate the activities of the Special
Response Unit with the needs identified by the Emergency Control Group.
XVIII. Outside Agencies
A. The use of outside agencies will be consistent with state and federal laws, the City of Little Rock
Emergency Operations Plan, and any mutual aid agreement that may be in force.
B. Arkansas State Police
1. Requests for Arkansas State Police support should be made through the City Emergency
Operations Center to the State Office of Emergency Services.
2. Upon initiation of a Stage II or III Alert, the Chief of Police or his/her representative may confer
with the ranking on-duty officer of the Arkansas State Police to coordinate the assistance to be
provided by Arkansas State Police personnel.
C. Arkansas National Guard
1. In the event the Arkansas National Guard is requested, the official request will be made by the
chief executive officer of the City of Little Rock (i.e. the Mayor).
2. The request will be made through the State Office of Emergency Services, who will provide liaison
between the City of Little Rock and the Governor’s Office.
3. Upon making his/her decision, the Governor may have the State Office of Emergency Services
contact the Mayor or the Governor may contact the Mayor himself/herself.
4. When National Guard troops are assigned to an area within the City for the purpose of assisting in
the preservation of law and order and/or the protection of life and property, they will be under the
command of, and directly responsible to, their military commanders. The authority of the Chief of
Police or any other Department Commanders will not extend to such troops. However, the Chief of
Police or his/her representative will advise the military commanders as to the specific needs of the
City, and recommend areas in which the military can most appropriately be used in support of the
civil authorities to restore order. National Guard personnel will be utilized for support roles and
not actively engaged in riot control measure at the scene. Support roles include but are not limited
to: establishing an emergency operations center for intelligence, social media and technical
support; providing security for identified critical buildings and or/infrastructure; processing and
security of prisoners and other duties as approved by the Military Commanders.
D. Intervention by Federal Troops
1. In case of intervention by Federal troops, the military commander will cooperate to the fullest
possible extent with the Governor, or other civil authorities and forces, unless such cooperation
interferes with the accomplishment of his/her Federal mission.
2. Military personnel assigned to a problem area may recognize the authority of the Chief of Police,
and assist in mutually restoring the area to normalcy; or, if circumstances warrant, sole command
of the area may be assumed by the military commander.
E. Request for Mutual Aid

1. Mutual Aid will be requested in accordance with Arkansas Statute, 12-75-119 Statewide Mutual
Aid System.
2. Requests for aid from the Little Rock Police Department shall be made by the Chief of Police or
his/her designee.
3. Should another agency request aid outside business hours, the Shift Commander will be
responsible for LRPD response. Notification will be made up the chain as soon as possible. The
Office of the Chief of Police will make notification to the City Manager.
XIX Incident Command Training
A. The Homeland Security Advisor will coordinate an annual training exercise involving departmental
personnel and will assist the Training Division to ensure that agency personnel are trained and updated as
needed in the Incident Command System.
B. Department personnel will participate annually in a training exercise which may include a tabletop, actual
exercise, or exercises involving multiple agencies.
1. A documented evaluation of the training will be completed by the ranking supervisor attending the
exercise.
2. A copy of the evaluation shall be forwarded to the Homeland Security Advisor for inclusion in
his/her triennial analysis.
2. Each Division Commander will assign officers to be trained as drivers for the Mobile Command
Vehicle. The Little Rock Police Department Training Division will be responsible for driver
training and will ensure that each assigned officer has an understanding of the operation and set-up
of the Mobile Command Vehicle.
C. All Sworn Officers of the Little Rock Police Department will receive NIMS Certification for first
responders, which will be facilitated by the Training Division.
XX. Information Exchange
A. All information related to suspicious incidents and criminal intelligence relating to criminal and homeland
security will be documented and immediately forwarded to the Special Investigations Division Intelligence
Unit, who will investigate and forward the information to the FBI Joint Terrorism Task Force (JTTF).
B. The Special Investigations Division Intelligence Unit will maintain relationships with outside agencies for
the purpose of exchanging information relating to suspected acts of terrorism.
C. The Special Investigations Division Intelligence Unit will provide awareness information and contact
information for reporting suspected terroristic acts by the public.

GENERAL ORDER
G. O. 313 MOTOR VEHICLE THEFT PROCEDURES

I. General
A. The purpose of this Order is to establish procedures for handling stolen and recovered motor
vehicles and other vehicle related offenses.
B. “Vehicle” means any craft or device self propelled, designed for transportation of people or
property across land, water, or through the air (A.C.A. § 5-36-101).
C. All stolen vehicle reports will be completed by the Communications Division after the information
is verified by a police officer.
II. Procedure
A. Vehicle theft reports:
1. An officer will be dispatched to all calls of stolen vehicles.
2. The officer will verify all pertinent information pertaining to the person and vehicle.
3. Broadcast information to all officers.
4. The officer will then call the Communications Center and supply them with the
information needed to generate a police report.
B. Stolen reports received by Communications
1. Whenever Communications receives information, from an individual, of a stolen vehicle

(or driving without owner’s consent, DWOC), Communications will, as soon as possible,
issue it as an unconfirmed stolen (or DWOC) broadcast. If the vehicle is believed to be
stolen, communications will dispatch a unit to confirm. The officer will collect sufficient
information for Communications personnel to complete a stolen vehicle report. Upon
verification, by the officer, the vehicle’s status will be rebroadcast as confirmed.
a) During times of high call loads, Communications will advise the

complainant they can remain at the scene or respond to the nearest open
Police Facility. Communications will confirm (by phone) that an officer is
present at the appropriate facility. A field unit will not be dispatched to the
police facility. An officer at the facility will be required to take the
information needed for the report.

GENERAL ORDERS G. O. 313 MOTOR VEHICLE THEFT PROCEDURES
2. After information is received from the officer, Communications operators will conduct a
preliminary investigation to determine the status of the reported vehicle. The investigation
will include:
a) Verification of vehicle identifying numbers (license or VIN).
b) Verification of ownership. If the caller is not the vehicle owner, the

information will be taken and an explanation of the discrepancy listed in the
report. Both the actual owner and the caller names will be included on the
report. A Communications supervisor will be contacted to determine the
report type that needs to be made.
c) The Communications operator will call the contract wrecker companies and
city impound lot to determine if the vehicle has been impounded. The
Communications operator will determine the location of impoundment
(contract wrecker lot or City impound lot) where the vehicle can be located
and the location from where it was towed. When describing the vehicle, the
Vehicle Identification Number will be used, if known.
d) Check the repossession log to determine if the vehicle had been repossessed.
e) Check private property tow log to determine if vehicle has been towed.
f) After all information is received from the officer, the Communications

Center personnel will then generate the report, enter the vehicle into the
local, State, and NCIC systems and give a broadcast to all officers.
3. Inform the complainant that an Attempt to Locate (ATL) report will be filed if:
a) The vehicle license or VIN are not available. Instruct the complainant to call
Communications and provide those numbers as soon as possible.
b) The vehicle is not stolen but is only being driven without the consent of the
owner. The complainant will be instructed to obtain a warrant for the
driver’s arrest and contact the appropriate Special Assignment Detective
Unit.
c) The preliminary investigation does not clearly indicate the vehicle is stolen
or being driven without owner’s consent. The report will be forwarded to
the Special Assignment Detective Unit for additional investigation and
determination of the vehicle status.
4. Advise the complainant to immediately contact Communications if the vehicle is located

or returned to the owner by anyone other than a law enforcement agency.
5. Generate the appropriate report and broadcast the vehicle description.
6. Enter the vehicle into the local and NCIC systems and forward to the Records Technician
for additional processing.
C. Information received by field officers or detectives:

G. O. 313 MOTOR VEHICLE THEFT PROCEDURES LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
1. A field officer or detective who becomes aware that a motor vehicle has been stolen shall:
a) Conduct a preliminary investigation in accordance with Divisional

procedure.
b) Verify the vehicle identification numbers and complainant’s identification

through the Communications Section. If vehicle numbers are not available,
advise the complainant an ATL report will be filed as shown in the
appropriate subsections of this order.
c) Call the Communications Center immediately and advise communications

personnel that they want to generate a stolen vehicle report.
d) Advise Communications Center personnel of all the verified pertinent

information on the person reporting and vehicle information.
e) Give Communications Center personnel a brief statement concerning the

theft of the vehicle.
f) If the vehicle is stolen during the commission of another offense the incident
type shall reflect the original incident type and theft of property (i.e.
burglary/theft of property, aggravated robbery/theft of property.
2. A field officer or detective who becomes aware of circumstances that would indicate that
a motor vehicle reported as Driving Without Owner’s Consent will not be returned to its
owner shall:
a) Document in a supplement report the circumstances that justify the need to

change the status of the vehicle to stolen.
b) Deliver the supplement report to Communications. Facsimile (FAX)

transmissions will not be acceptable.
3. Communications Center personnel that receive a supplement report changing the status of
a vehicle from Driving Without Owner’s Consent to stolen shall:
a) Check the impound lot to determine if the vehicle has been impounded.
b) Check the Repossession and Private Tow logs to determine if the vehicle
has been repossessed or has been towed from private property.
c) After all checks have been made, the Communications Center personnel will
verify that the vehicle is in the local system, enter the vehicle into the State,
N.C.I.C. system and give a broadcast to all officers.
D. Reports taken by Communications Center Personnel

1. Communications Center Personnel are generally responsible for taking Driving Without
Owner’s Consent (DWOC) reports. “Driving Without Owner’s Consent” as defined by
this Order shall mean any person who drives a vehicle, not his/her own, without consent
of the owner, with intent to temporarily deprive the owner of his/her possession of the
vehicle, without intent to steal the vehicle. Comparable State Statute A.C.A.5-36-108.
a) If a victim comes to any police facility, the Desk Officer, or other available
officer, will make a DWOC report as appropriate.
2. Procedure
a) Ask the caller if they are the owner of the vehicle. If the caller is not the
owner, take the report, find out who the owner is, and list both persons on
the report. Indicate on the report why a person other than the owner is
making the report.
b) Ask the caller if the person who has the vehicle had permission to drive it.
If the totality of the circumstances indicate the vehicle will not be returned,
it then becomes a stolen vehicle.
c) Ask the caller if there is a possibility that the person will return the vehicle
within 72 hours.
d) Advise the owner/complainant to contact the appropriate Special

Assignments Detective Unit, if the vehicle is not returned within 72 hours,
to upgrade the vehicle as stolen.
e) If a Driving Without Owner’s Consent report is made, the report should be

broadcast as a DWOC, and treated as a DWOC, and treated as a DWOC
until circumstances dictate a stolen vehicle status.
f) Communications will dispatch an officer to gather the information needed

for communications personnel to make the report.
g) Enter the report into the LRPD Report Management System.
III. Vehicle Recovery
A. Reported and recovered in City - Officers or detectives in the field who recover a motor vehicle
which was reported stolen in our jurisdiction shall:
1. Request Communications notify the owner of the vehicle’s recovery to determine if the
owner wishes to pick up the vehicle at the scene or have the officer store it. The officer
should advise Communications of the vehicle’s condition and suitability for operation.
2. Contact the Field Services Division detective to determine their desire to meet the owner
at the scene or at a later time. A Field Supervisor will make a determination if Detectives
and/or Crime Scene personnel should be requested to respond for processing or whether
the vehicle should be held for processing at a later time.

3. Obtain proper identification from the person who picks up the vehicle, if storage is not
required. Store the vehicle according to guidelines provided in Departmental General
Orders.
4. Obtain information from the secondary radio operator concerning the original stolen
report to generate a supplemental report for the vehicle’s recovery.
a) Document in the supplement narrative who the vehicle was released to,
location where the vehicle was recovered, condition when recovered, and
list any obvious missing parts.
b) If the vehicle was taken in a robbery or burglary, the type incident on the
Supplement Report should reflect this, not auto theft or stolen auto.
5. The recovering officer or detective shall call communications with the necessary
information to complete a supplement report for deletion. Facsimile (FAX) transmissions
will not be accepted.
6. If the recovering officer or detective personally completes the supplement for deletion, he
or she shall deliver the supplement to Communications prior to the end of his/her shift.
B. Other agency stolen vehicles recovered in City - When an officer or detective in the field recovers
a motor vehicle stolen from another jurisdiction, he/she shall:
1. Inform the secondary radio operator of the vehicle’s condition and request appropriate
computer generated numbers identifying the stolen vehicle recovery.
2. Request the secondary radio operator to contact the reporting agency by computer
terminal to confirm stolen status, storage instructions, date of theft, and agency case
number.
3. Complete an Offense Report titled “Other Agency Stolen” including the information
received from the reporting agency.
4. Submit the report to a supervisor for approval. The report is not taken to
Communications.
IV. Notification of Owners
A. It is the policy of this Department that owners of recovered stolen vehicles will be notified as soon
as possible.
B. Procedure - In order to reduce errors, potential cost and embarrassment to the Department, officers
that recover stolen vehicles shall:
1. Instruct the secondary radio operator to attempt to contact the owner/complainant or

reporting agency by telephone or computer terminal, day or night, using all available
telephone numbers.

2. Document contact or the inability to contact the owner or the reporting agency in the
supplemental report narrative, noting both the date/time and number of attempts made.
3. Annotate any storage report or towing company paperwork to show whether the owner or
reporting agency was or was not notified.
4. A copy of the supplement report will be delivered or faxed to the appropriate Special
Assignments Detective Unit. Available detective personnel will continue to attempt to
notify the owner.
5. The City Impound Lot has agreed to supply the Department with a daily storage log,
reflecting all vehicles towed at police request during the last 24 hours. All investigators
having cases involving stolen vehicles will check the vehicle impound log in the Field
Services Divisions detective offices to see if the vehicle has been impounded.
6. Daily storage reports will be delivered to the desk officer who will forward the reports to
the appropriate Special Assignments Detective Unit. The desk officer will also run the
registration checks on the stolen vehicles and provide a printout to the towing company
(as required by ACA 27-50-1206).
7. The Records Technician will pick up stolen reports daily (except weekends) from
Communications. Two copies of the stolen reports and stolen supplements will be made.
One set of reports will be delivered to the Special Assignments Detective Unit. The other
set, without supplements, will be delivered to the Crime Analysis Unit.
8. The Records Section will make copies of Driving Without Owner’s Consent, Abandoned
Vehicles, and vehicles impounded during arrest reports. Those copies will be forwarded
to the Impound Lot.
9. The Special Assignments Unit Detective assigned to the investigation will have the final
responsibility to notify vehicle owners. In order to ensure a minimum number of errors,
the detective shall check on a daily basis:
a) The towing company’s impound log;
b) Newly assigned reports;
c) Case assignment log for any other owners not yet notified; and,
d) Field reports of abandoned vehicles and vehicles towed during arrests.
10. Every reasonable effort shall be made to notify owners of recovered vehicles and
reporting agencies to include telephone calls, NLETS messages, letters or hand delivered
messages.
V. Responsibility for Towing Fees
A. The Department shall be responsible for:

1. Towing and storage fees of vehicles towed or held for C.S.S.U;
2. Towing and storage fees of vehicles which were towed in error by the authority of a Little
Rock Police Officer;
3. The vehicle owner shall be responsible for towing and storage fees in all other cases;
4. Disputes over towing or storage fees will be directed to the Division Commander, of the
involved division for a recommendation. The Bureau Commander will make a final
decision as to the disposition of the disputed fees.

GENERAL ORDER
G. O. 314 VICTIM SERVICES PROGRAM

I. General
A. The City of Little Rock is committed to the development, implementation, and continuation of
appropriate victim/witness services. It is the desire of our agency to develop a better rapport
between law enforcement professionals and those persons within our society, who have been
directly affected by crime. By so doing, we help to ensure that a witness or victim’s interests are
protected and that they are treated with fairness, compassion, and dignity.
B. Victim Services Program – A program of the Little Rock Police Department designed to establish
and maintain a positive working relationship between the Police Department and other assistance
sources with regard to victim/witness assistance programs.
C. Victim - A person who suffers physical, financial, or emotional harm as the direct result of a
felony or misdemeanor crime against persons. Also regarded as victims are the spouse, child,
parent, or legal guardian of a homicide victim. This definition excludes any person involved in a
crime as a perpetrator or accomplice.
D. Victim Services Program Supervision
1. The Victim Services Coordinator will report to the Major Crimes Division Violent
Crimes Unit Sergeant.
2. The Victim Services Coordinator will supervise the Victim Services Specialists, which
will collectively comprise the Victim Services Program Staff.
E. The Victim Services Program Staff will:
1. Ensure that the Little Rock Police Department complies with laws pertaining to crime
victims and witnesses; and,
2. Ensure that there is a response to all inquires from interested persons concerning victim
assistance.
II. Objectives
A. The objectives of the Victim Services Program are to provide services to those crime victims
whose cases are never referred for prosecution and to provide services to crime victims during the
preliminary investigation stage.
B. Subject to the appropriate application of the provisions of the State of Arkansas Victim’s Bill of
Rights, all victims have rights that include:

GENERAL ORDERS G. O. 314 VICTIM SERVICES PROGRAM
1. To be treated with dignity and respect;
2. Notification of victims of court proceedings and critical events in the criminal justice
process;
3. Assistance in obtaining protection from harm;
4. Assistance in applying for financial assistance and other social services;
5. Assistance in applying for witness fees;
6. Assistance with the return of property, other than contraband, when it is no longer needed
as evidence;
7. Intervention with victim’s employer in order to minimize loss of wages and other benefits
resulting from court appearances;
8. Nondisclosure of information about victims;
9. Information from law enforcement;
10. Presence at court proceedings;
11. Victim impact statement at sentencing and at parole hearing; and,
12. Rights of members of victim’s family.
III. Victim Services Program
A. Services provided to victims/witnesses of crime include:
1. 24-hour crisis intervention for homicides, rapes, and severe domestic violence cases;
2. Contact with victims within 24 to 72 hours after the crime has been reported, each victim
will be assigned a staff member to act as an advocate;
3. Hotline referral service, #501-918-4357 (HELP);
4. Encouragement of victims to cooperate with police;
5. Provide officers with informational cards for distribution to victims during initial contact.
This card provides the victim of necessary information regarding the status of their case
and referral numbers for service providers;
6. Network and collaborate with service providers throughout Little Rock area to provide
such services as rental assistance, food, clothing, and other short-term needs;
7. Network with providers that specialize in hearing impaired, visually impaired and
language barriers;

G. O. 314 VICTIM SERVICES PROGRAM LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
8. Follow-up contact with victim within 10 days and depending on the severity of the
incident, once a week. Volunteers will make telephone reassurance calls to check with
the victim;
9. Collaborate with Community Service Providers to provide emergency shelter in hotels

and provide temporary transportation;
10. Assist in scheduling line-ups, interviews and other required appearances at the
convenience of the victim/witness and at the option of the agency, providing
transportation, if feasible;
11. Assist in explaining procedures involved in the prosecution of cases;
12. Assist in the prompt return of personal property;
13. Provision of information from the Attorney General’s office regarding the Crime
Reparations Fund and assist with application if needed;
14. Assistance with Orders of Protection;
15. Provision of victim notification upon arrest and during post-arrest processing of the
suspect;
16. Provision of services to families and personnel of the LRPD who have suffered line of
duty injuries or death; and,
17. Assist the Training Division with academy and in-service training regarding the Victim
Services Program.
B. The Communications Center shall be the link between law enforcement and the Victim Services
Staff regarding victim/witness assistance offered by police, fire and ambulance personnel. The
Victim Services Staff will be available for 24-hour on-call assistance. Communications Center
personnel shall alert the on-call Victim Services Staff member for homicides, rapes, and severe
domestic violence cases. Officers shall remain at the scene of an incident until Victim Services
staff has completed their interviews.
C. The Communications Center shall provide referral information, available 24 hours a day,
regarding area services offered by other governmental or private sector organizations for
victims/witnesses in need of medical attention, counseling, and emergency financial assistance.
IV. Responsibilities
A. The Victim Services Coordinator shall administer and coordinate the Victim Services Program.
Responsibilities include:
1. Ensure that the Little Rock Police Department is aware of the Victim Rights Laws;
2. Ensure that there is a response to all inquiries from interested persons concerning victim
assistance; and,

3. Biennially (once every two years) complete an analysis of victim/witness assistance

needs within our service area.
B. Victim Services Staff will be responsible for the following:
1. Cause each crime report to be screened to ensure that each victim of a criminal attack is
aware of victim assistance and related community services available within the service
area;
2. Documentation – A copy of the referral form will be placed in case files;
3. Ensure the confidentiality of all cases; and,
4. In those instances where a victim or witness has specific credible reasons to fear
intimidation or further victimization determine appropriate assistance using the following
factors:
a) The nature of the case;
b) The nature of the threat; or,
c) The resources available to our agency at the time.
C. Major Crimes Division will be responsible for:
1. Notifying victims of the circumstances of a suspect’s arrest.
a) Detectives shall provide written documentation of this notification for inclusion

in the case file.
b) A copy of the victim notification shall be forwarded to Victim Services for

follow-up assistance to include:
(1) Notification of victim services and victim compensation;
(2) Notification of critical events in the criminal justice system;
(3) Notification of any pre-trial or post-trial release of the defendant; and,
(4) Notification of a defendant’s appeals or post conviction remedies.
2. Referring victims/witnesses to Victim Services for follow-up assistance.
D. Sworn personnel will be responsible for the following:
1. Provide appropriate information to victims/witnesses, and/or their families when

responding to the following:
a) Crimes against persons offenses;

b) Family violence calls; and,
c) Motor vehicle accidents involving death or serious injury or those involving

DWI.
2. Appropriate information will include, but is not limited to the following:
a) Applicable services available (i.e. counseling, medical attention, compensation

programs and victim advocacy);
b) Suggestions of what to do if the suspect or suspect's companions or family

threatens or intimidates the victim/witness;
c) The Offense report number;
d) A telephone number where additional case information can be directed to or can

be obtained from; or,
e) Subsequent steps in the processing of the case.
3. The above information is included on informational cards to be provided to victims.

Officers will be responsible for keeping a sufficient supply of these cards.
E. Training Division will be responsible for:
1. Ensuring all new employees (both sworn and non-sworn) are informed of existing
community victim/witness assistance programs through basic and field training;
2. Updating training programs as laws and available services change; and,
3. Ensuring sworn personnel and non-sworn personnel receive training in Victim Services
Program and the role of law enforcement in providing assistance.
F. All personnel (sworn and nonsworn) shall ensure the confidentiality of records and files of
victims/witnesses to the extent consistent with applicable law.
G. Public Affairs Officer will work closely with the Victim Services Coordinator to govern the
agency's efforts to periodically inform the public and the media of existing and new victim/witness
programs.
V. Notification - Next of Kin of Deceased, Seriously Injured, or Seriously Ill Persons
A. In the case of a homicide or suicide/attempted suicide, or cases of serious injury resulting from a
crime against persons, a member of the Major Crimes Division shall be responsible for notifying
the next of kin. The detective may request a Victim Services staff member accompany him for the
notification.
B. In the case of a fatality or serious injury accident, the Police Chaplain or personnel designated by a
Field Services Division supervisor shall be responsible for the notification.

C. Request for notification of next of kin in the case of a serious illness shall be at the discretion of
the Shift Supervisor.
D. When the next of kin resides outside Little Rock, the law enforcement agency in the area of
residence shall be contacted by terminal message. The agency shall be requested to make the
notification and a contact name and number with this department will be provided for the next of
kin.
E. Notification requests initiated by other agencies should include a terminal confirmation and all
required information for the next of kin, including a contact person within that agency. The
Communications Center shall contact a Field Services Division Shift Commander, who shall
designate an officer to give notification.
F. The Police Chaplain should be available to accompany officers when contacting the next of kin for
notifications.
G. All notifications shall be carried out in a prompt, courteous, and considerate manner.
VI. Departmental Deaths and Serious Injuries
A. This Order deals with the death or serious injury of personnel in the following categories:
1. In the line of duty:
a) By felonious criminal action;
b) Accidental; or,
c) Other causes.
2. Natural causes;
3. Active duty, non-uniform personnel; and,
4. Retired employees (uniformed and non-uniformed).
B. Officers killed or seriously injured in the line of duty:
1. The purpose of this Order is to implement procedures when a member of this Department
is killed or seriously injured in the line of duty. It is preferred that other members of the
Department notify Departmental personnel, if at all possible, instead of by the media.
2. Notification;
a) Family
(1) When an officer is killed or seriously injured, the officers unit

commander will immediately dispatch a supervisory officer to notify
the victims;

(a) Spouse, if applicable;
(b) Children, if applicable;
(c) Parents;
(d) Other relatives, as requested by spouse or next of kin; and,
(e) Close friends and/or clergy, as requested by the spouse or next

of kin.
(2) The supervisor making the notification shall stay with the next of kin,
acting as department liaison, until such time as he is relieved of such
responsibility by the family, department or by his own determination.
He shall have additional officers at his disposal as circumstances
dictate. The supervisor may utilize the Police Chaplain, but the
Chaplain will have additional duties and responsibilities.
b) Upon determination of an officer’s death or serious injury, the first officer on the
scene shall immediately notify;
(1) Communications;
(2) His immediate supervisor; and,
(3) Other on duty units as immediately as necessary for securing the scene.
c) The first supervisor on the scene shall be responsible for the integrity of the
scene as enumerated in General Order 302.V.B.
d) The Field Services Division Shift Commander shall be responsible for notifying
all Division Commanders, Chaplains, Assistant Chiefs and the Chief of Police.
Division Commanders shall be responsible for notifying personnel under their
command through their chain of command.
e) Initial notification should include:
(1) The officer’s name;
(2) Seriousness and type of injuries;
(3) Time of occurrence;
(4) Location of occurrence;
(5) Type of call or circumstance;
(6) Suspect information; and,
(7) Location of the victim (name and location of hospital or morgue).

f) As soon as possible after accurate information is compiled, the Public Affairs

Officer shall disseminate information to all members of the Department.
3. Hospital Procedures
a) The following department personnel are authorized to respond to the hospital

when necessary:
(1) Department Staff officers;
(2) Officers assigned to the investigation;
(3) Crime Scene Search Unit technicians;
(4) Police Chaplain;
(5) Family liaison and officers acting in a support role to the family; and,
(6) Other officers as authorized by Department Staff.
b) At least one officer shall be assigned security of the area. He shall allow access
to:
(1) Those authorized above;
(2) Medical personnel; and,
(3) Family and persons they authorize.
c) The employee's immediate supervisor will take control of the employee's

personal property and City property in the employee's possession, and will store
the property in the Department’s property section or turn it over to the Crime
Scene Search Unit as circumstances dictate. Additional City property assigned
to the employee shall be obtained from his locker, desk or residence at a later
date unless it is necessary for the investigation of the offense in which the
employee is directly involved. If the employee’s supervisor is not available to
take possession of the property, a supervisor appointed by the Division
Commander will be responsible for the property.
d) A supervisory officer assigned by the Chief of Police shall coordinate efforts

with the hospital’s security/administrative staff in securing appropriate areas for
family, friends, department personnel and media access and security for those
areas.
e) The Public Affairs Officer shall coordinate media releases at the hospital, the
incident scene and Department headquarters.
4. Assistance
a) The Victim Services representative shall assist the family with referrals for:

(1) Transportation;
(2) Child care;
(3) Monetary assistance for food, lodging or other necessities; and,
(4) Other items as circumstances dictate.
b) The Victim Services Coordinator is authorized to request department resources

as deemed necessary within legal guidelines.
c) The Victim Services representative shall be responsible for obtaining

information, applications, forms, and other items related to death benefits and/or
worker's compensation claims as may be required by the family. These may
include, but are not limited to:
(1) City of Little Rock life insurance policies and benefits;
(2) State of Arkansas survivor benefits;
(a) Killed in the line of duty; (21-5-704);
(b) Permanently disabled in the line of duty; (21-5-705);
(c) Killed in the line of duty as a result of a felonious criminal

action; (21-5-705);
(d) College scholarships for spouse or children (6-8/2-503);
(3) Police pension death or disability benefits; and,
(4) Federal government death benefits.
d) The Victim Services representative is not required to, but may assist the family
in obtaining additional benefit information (life insurance, will and probate court
requirements, etc.).
5. Funeral
a) Upon notification of the death of an officer as enumerated in subsection A., the

Office of the Chief of Police shall appoint a supervisory officer as Honor Guard
Commander.
(1) The Commander shall assemble officers as necessary to act as Honor

Guard members and pallbearers (if so desired by the family).
(2) The Honor Guard shall report to the Commander for their duty hours
and assignments and shall be detached from their normal duties until
their assignment is completed.

b) The Honor Guard Commander shall assign four members of the Honor Guard to
be on-duty at all times the body is available for public view or visitation.
(1) One team of two members shall be stationed with the deceased officer,
one team of two members shall be in relief, and the two teams shall
rotate assignments every quarter-hour during their shift.
(2) The relief team shall be responsible for incidental duties at the place of
visitation as they arise.
(3) The Honor Guard shall be utilized during the funeral and graveside
services to honor the deceased.
c) The Chief of Police shall appoint a supervisory officer as Color Guard

Commander.
(1) The Color Guard Commander shall assemble officers as necessary to

train and fulfill duties involving the Flag of the United States of
America during the funeral and graveside services.
(2) Members of the Color Guard shall report to the Color Guard
Commander for their duties and duty hours and shall be detached from
their normal duties until the conclusion of the memorial services.
d) Other members of the department, although not specifically enumerated on this

Order, may be utilized for special assignment with authorization by the Chief of
Police.
e) The liaison officer shall assist the family in making specific funeral
arrangements, if they so desire. Considerations should include:
(1) The funeral home (some funeral homes supply funeral services, caskets
and grave sites for officers killed in the line of duty which the family
may or may not choose to use);
(2) Clergy;
(3) Time and date of the service;
(4) Location (church, synagogue, religious edifice, funeral home or

graveside); and,
(5) Other information associated with the funeral.
f) The Public Affairs Officer shall be responsible for disseminating information to

the Department concerning funeral arrangements.
C. Funeral Categories
1. With the consent of the employee’s family, the following classifications of funerals are
authorized by this Order:

a) Departmental with Full Honors:
(1) This classification is reserved for employees whose death occurred in

the line of duty by:
(a) Felonious criminal action;
(b) Accident; or,
(c) Other causes.
(2) This funeral service shall include:
(a) Vehicular escort provided by members of the Department.

(The Traffic Services Commander shall be responsible for
assigning the appropriate number of units for escort and
coordinating the funeral procession with other agencies, which
may be involved in the procession.)
(b) Honor guard;
(c) Color guard and presentation of the Flag of the United States
of America to the next of kin;
(d) Rifle salute;
(e) Bugle and/or bagpipes; and,
(f) Approval for on-duty attendance by Departmental personnel,

as staffing allows.
b) Departmental with Honors:
(1) This classification is reserved for:
(a) Active duty employees whose deaths occur from natural

causes or whose death is not duty related;
(b) Retired sworn employees; or,
(c) Any active or former employee as approved by the Office of

(2) This funeral shall include:
(a) Vehicular escort provided by the Department;
(b) Honor guard;

(c) Color guard and presentation of the Flag of the United States
of America to the next of kin;
(d) Bugle and/or bagpipes, as appropriate; and,
(e) Approval for on-duty attendance by Departmental personnel,

as staffing allows.
c) Departmental
(1) This classification shall be reserved for:
(a) Employees not enumerated in the above categories; or,
(b) Members of the immediate family of active or retired

uniformed employees.
(2) This funeral shall include:
(a) Vehicular escort provided by the Department; and,
(b) Representation by the Chief of Police or his designate.
2. Nothing in this Order shall limit the family from including fraternal and/or military
observances to which an employee is entitled.
3. Assistance to other agencies. - When other agencies request funeral escort assistance
from this Department, the Traffic Services Commander shall coordinate those efforts.
When additional resources are required, the Office of the Chief of Police shall coordinate
those efforts.
4. Order of Service and Protocol - The funeral classifications listed above shall adhere to the
following funeral service guidelines, taking into consideration the classification
limitations and the family’s wishes:
a) The Honor Guard Commander shall be Commander of the Service. He shall

issue all commands for members of the Department (the Assembly or Detail) in
attendance and all personnel shall follow his orders relating to the rendering of
hand salutes, calls to attention, and rest.
b) All uniformed officers will attend in Class A uniforms, which includes head
coverings.
c) Inside the Chapel or Sanctuary, officers will pay their respects with covered
head and thereafter, upon being seated or standing in a standing-room-only
situation, shall remove their head covering until conclusion of the indoor
service. Honor Guard members shall wear head covering throughout the service.
d) Officers shall exit the service in a military manner, with little conversation while
inside the building in which the service is held.

e) Officers will not smoke or use tobacco products indoors, nor in sight of the
general public outdoors, throughout the time of the services.
f) Pallbearers will follow the instructions of the Funeral Director.
g) The Assembly shall be called to attention and shall render a salute when ordered
by the Commander of the Service upon removal of the casket from the building
in which the service was held.
h) The funeral procession shall proceed from the funeral service to the place of
internment with marked police units in the lead. All units acting as escort shall
utilize full emergency equipment and units in the procession not acting as escort
shall use emergency lights in addition to headlights as required by city ordinance
and state law governing funeral processions. Units working traffic assignments
along the route of the procession shall render a salute to the hearse and the
family as they pass.
i) The procession protocol shall be:
(1) Escort units,
(2) Honor Guard,
(3) Clergy,
(4) Hearse,
(5) Pallbearers,
(6) Family,
(7) Chief of Police,
(8) Dignitaries,
(9) Staff Officers,
(10) Little Rock Police officers,
(11) City Employees,
(12) Other agency officers, and,
(13) Escort units.
j) Officers at the place of internment prior to the arrival of the procession will
render a salute to the hearse and the family as they pass.

k) Prior to removing the casket from the hearse, officers will assemble and the
Commander of the Service will bring the Assembly to attention; they will render
salutes as the Commander orders during the graveside ceremonies. (Uniformed
officers will have heads covered throughout the graveside services.)
l) At the conclusion of remarks by the clergy, the Color Guard will proceed with
the flag ceremony. At its conclusion, the flag will be presented to the Chief of
Police (or his designate) who will present it to the next-of-kin.
m) While the assembly is at attention and saluting, music will be performed by

bugle and/or bagpipes and a rifle salute will be volleyed.
n) In instances where fraternal or other ceremonies are observed, they shall follow
the rifle salute unless protocol demands they be observed elsewhere. In those
instances, the Commander of the Service shall coordinate with their dignitaries
prior to the service.
o) At the conclusion of the ceremonies, the Commander of the Service shall

dismiss the assembly.
5. City and Departmental Support
a) The City of Little Rock and the Little Rock Police Department consider their
employees and families as their greatest assets. To assist employees and families
during times of grief, the City offers the Employee Assistance Program as an
employee benefit. Employees and employee families are qualified to use this
service at no charge.
b) The Little Rock Police Department also has a Chaplaincy program available to
employees and their families. Employees are urged to utilize the Employee
Assistance Program and/or the services of the Police Chaplain.

GENERAL ORDER
G. O. 315 RUNAWAYS, LOST CHILDREN AND MISSING PERSONS

I. Juvenile Status Offenders
A. A juvenile runaway is defined as any person under the age of eighteen who, “has absented himself
from his home without sufficient cause, permission, or justification.”
B. Runaway Reports - This Department will receive reports of juvenile runaways from any parent,
guardian or school official who has charge of the juvenile and has reason to believe the juvenile
has run away. The runaway may be reported as soon as he is found to be missing; it will not be
necessary to wait for a set period of time before filing a runaway report.
II. Report Procedures
A. An Offense Report will be completed on all juveniles who are reported missing, lost or runaway.
B. An Offense Report will be completed on all adults who are reported as missing.
C. The employee initiating the report shall:
1. Ensure that the last known location from which the party is missing or has run away is
within the city limits of Little Rock; and,
2. Ensure that a report of the incident has not been taken by another jurisdiction.
a) If another agency has already taken the initial report and the information has
been entered into A.C.I.C./N.C.I.C., the officer will generate a Little Rock
Police Department Offense Report with “Attempt to Locate” as the incident
type, and will indicate the circumstances and the reporting agency’s incident
number.
b) If another agency has taken the initial report and the information has not been
entered into A.C.I.C./N.C.I.C., the officer will contact that agency’s detective
unit responsible for their investigation and advise that this Department will
initiate the report and enter the information into A.C.I.C./N.C.I.C.
3. Complete an Offense Report containing all information necessary for the submission of
the report and all information on the NCIC Person Supplement Form (LRPD-5600-05) as
can be obtained from the person reporting, friends and/or relatives.
D. At the conclusion of the field officer’s investigation, the officer will immediately obtain
supervisory approval of the Offense Report and the NCIC Person Supplement Form (LRPD-5600-
05) and will personally deliver these documents to the A.C.I.C./N.C.I.C. Records Technician.
(The A.C.I.C./N.C.I.C. Records Technician is located in the Technology Support Section of the
Headquarters Division. His/her work schedule is Monday through Friday, 0700-1530.) It is the
officer’s responsibility to personally deliver the original two documents.

G. O. 315 RUNAWAYS, LOST CHILDREN AND MISSING PERS. LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
1. If the A.C.I.C./N.C.I.C. Records Technician is not on duty, the officer will take the
original report and the NCIC Person Supplement Form (LRPD-5600-05) to the
Communications Center. Officers will not fax the reports in lieu of personally delivering
them to the proper personnel. Upon receipt of the original report and the NCIC Person
Supplement Form (LRPD-5600-05) the A.C.I.C./N.C.I.C. Records Technician or
Communications Center personnel will date/time stamp receipt of both documents, check
all computer systems for any additional information and enter that information on the
NCIC Person Supplement Form (LRPD-5600-05). Once all information available on the
person is documented, then enter the information into N.C.I.C. and the local Records
Management system. The original report and the NCIC Person Supplement Form (LRPD-
5600-05) will be forwarded to the Records & Support Division. A copy of the Offense
Report and the NCIC Person Supplement Form (LRPD-5600-05) shall be forwarded to
the appropriate Detective Unit for assignment. Major Crimes Division personnel will be
responsible for the proper follow-up investigation.
E. All Missing Persons and/or Runaway reports and any supplemental information must be entered
into the appropriate computer system(s) immediately after the conclusion of any initial
investigation and supervisory approval [State Statute §12-12-205].
III. Runaway and Missing Persons Reports Taken Outside Little Rock City Limits
A. When a person is reported as a runaway or missing from a location within the city limits of Little
Rock and reported by a party located inside Pulaski County (i.e., missing from a relative’s house,
school function, etc.), the following procedures will be followed:
1. A patrol unit will be dispatched to take the initial report of a missing person or runaway.
Field officers will be responsible for obtaining all necessary information including the
information necessary to complete NCIC Person Supplement Form (LRPD-5600-05) for
entry into the Records Management system and A.C.I.C./N.C.I.C.
2. The officer will immediately determine the location from where the individual is missing
or has run away and will be responsible for checking the immediate area. Depending on
the circumstances, the officer may request the Communications Center to dispatch a unit
to the last known area within the city limits, in an attempt to locate the person.
3. The “Incident Address” will be the location in Little Rock where the person was last
seen. An address outside the city limits will not be used, (example, an address within
Pulaski County, but outside the city limits, where the officer responded to take the
report).
B. When a person is reported as a runaway or missing from a location within the city limits of Little
Rock and reported by a party located outside Pulaski County (i.e., missing from a relative’s house,
school function, etc.), the following procedures will be followed:
1. The call taker will transfer the reporting party to the Major Crimes Division for initial
reporting purposes. The detective shall obtain all necessary information including the
information necessary to complete NCIC Person Supplement Form (LRPD-5600-05) for
entry into the Records Management system and A.C.I.C./N.C.I.C. and notify a Major
Crimes Division supervisor. If circumstances warrant, the supervisor should request a
patrol unit be sent to the last known location in an attempt to locate the individual.
2. If a detective is not available, the initial report will be taken by the Communications
Center.

G.O. 315 RUNAWAYS, LOST CHILDREN AND MISSING PERS. LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
a) Communications Center personnel will obtain all necessary information to

complete the Offense Report and the information necessary to complete the
NCIC Person Supplement Form (LRPD-5600-05) and then shall enter the
“Missing Person” information into the Records Management system and
A.C.I.C./N.C.I.C Missing Persons file.
b) Communications will notify the Shift Commander of the incident.
c) The Shift Commander will determine if a patrol unit should be sent to the last
known location in an attempt to locate the individual.
d) The original Offense Report and the NCIC Person Supplement shall be checked
by the Communications Supervisor for accuracy and completeness and matched
against the N.C.I.C. entry and any discrepancies shall be corrected before the
documents are forwarded to the Records & Support Division for copying and
distribution.
IV. Runaway Children
A. When responding to a runaway call, the officer shall:
1. Determine the facts of the incident and notify the Major Crimes Division and advise them
of the circumstances;
2. Make a broadcast of pertinent information to all units; and,
3. Explain to the parents of the runaway that they may contact Pulaski County Juvenile
Justice Center if they wish to obtain a Juvenile in Need of Supervision Order but that this
decision is optional and not mandatory for a runaway investigation to be initiated.
B. A Runaway report will be treated as follows:
1. A criminal investigation until a determination can be made as to the location and physical
well being of the runaway.
2. Police Officers and Investigators will use all available resources in an effort to document
and locate all reports of runaways.
C. When a member of the Major Crimes Division is assigned a runaway case, the detective shall:
1. Confirm the runaway information in both the Records Management system and
A.C.I.C./N.C.I.C. systems is current, if he is still missing. It is not necessary for a
Juvenile in Need of Supervision Order to be obtained for the runaway to be entered into
these systems.
2. Contact the complainant to determine if the juvenile has returned home.
3. Obtain and follow up on information provided by the complainant.

D. Located Runaways
1. If an officer contacts a juvenile who he believes to be a runaway, he should verify the

status of the juvenile through a check of the Records Management system and/or the
A.C.I.C./N.C.I.C. systems or contact the parent(s) of the juvenile.
2. If it is determined that the juvenile is not a runaway, the officer shall:
a) Assess the juvenile’s condition for purposes of Emergency Custody and proceed
if the juvenile meets the criteria for emergency custody in accordance with these
General Orders; or,
b) Release the juvenile if the officer has no other legitimate reason to detain or
arrest the juvenile.
3. If it is determined that the juvenile is a runaway and our Department is the authority, the
officer shall:
a) Attempt to contact the juvenile’s parents;
b) Transport the juvenile to the Major Crimes Division if the officer is not able to
make contact with a parent or guardian, or release the juvenile to his parents or
guardian if he has no other legitimate reason to detain or arrest the juvenile;
(1) If a parent or guardian cannot be located, Major Crimes Division

personnel will contact the Division of Children and Family Services.
c) Generate a Supplemental Report using the original incident number from the
runaway report indicating that the juvenile was located and to whom he was
returned;
d) Immediately deliver the Supplemental Report to the A.C.I.C/N.C.I.C. Records

Technician, or Communications Center, as outlined above. The
A.C.I.C/N.C.I.C. Records Technician or Communications shall delete the
information from all computer systems as soon as possible; and,
e) Deliver a copy of this Supplement Report to the Major Crimes Division. The
detective assigned to the case will be responsible for ensuring the information is
deleted from all systems.
4. When an officer contacts a juvenile who is reported as a runaway by another agency, he

shall:
a) Direct the Communications Operator to notify the agency that this Department
has contact with the juvenile.
b) Release the juvenile to the parent or guardian if the reporting agency can contact
them and they can respond to pick up the runaway in a reasonable amount of
time, or transport the juvenile to the Major Crimes Division if it is a lengthy
period of time before a parent or guardian can be contacted or can respond.
c) Generate an Information Report containing all of the pertinent information

listing the type of incident as Runaway (Other Agency).

d) If it becomes necessary to place the runaway from another agency in an

emergency shelter, the detective handling the case will contact the Center for
Youth and Families (666-7233) and arrange placement. If the juvenile has
pending warrants or charges, it may not be possible to place him in the
emergency shelter and he may be placed in the Juvenile Justice Detention Center
or other appropriate facility.
5. A juvenile who is being held only as a runaway cannot be held in a Detention Facility.
V. Lost Children and Missing Persons
A. Foul Play Suspected
1. Where evidence or circumstances indicate the possibility of foul play being involved in a
missing person or lost child incident, officers will comply with the following procedures:
a) Contact the person reporting and any possible witnesses and obtain as much
information as possible (physical and clothing description, last known location
and time last seen, any persons the victim was seen with, etc.);
b) Broadcast this information to all units;
c) Notify a Field Supervisor;
d) Notify the on duty Major Crimes Division Supervisor;
e) Notify the Public Affairs Officer. The Public Affairs Officer in conjunction with
the Major Crimes Division Supervisor will evaluate the urgency of releasing the
information to the news media and/or activate the Morgan Nick Alert Plan; and,
f) Take steps to notify a parent, relative or guardian of the missing person or lost
child if it is apparent that they are not already aware of the situation.
(1) Additional units may be sent to the area to assist in the search at the
discretion of a supervisor. The number of units involved and the scope
of the search should be determined in consideration of such factors as
the missing person’s or lost child’s age, time of day, weather
conditions, known medical history, and any other factors, which may
be determined.
B. No Foul Play Suspected
1. Where evidence and circumstances indicate that no foul play has taken place in a missing
person or lost child incident, officers shall comply with the following procedures:
a) Respond to the scene and obtain the pertinent information from the complainant;
b) Notify the on duty Major Crimes Division Supervisor. The detective supervisor
will monitor the incident to determine the need for initiating a criminal
investigation;
c) Broadcast the information obtained to all units;

d) Conduct a search of areas where the missing person or lost child may be located,
including but not limited to, the missing person’s or lost child’s residence, the
immediate area of the residence, school or bus stop and the location of friends or
businesses in the area; and,
e) If the incident involves a juvenile who is not a runaway, an elderly person, or a

handicapped person, notify the Public Affairs Officer. The Public Affairs
Officer, in conjunction with the Major Crimes Division Supervisor and/or the
Field Services Division Supervisor, will evaluate the urgency of releasing the
information to the media.
2. Additional units may be sent to the area to assist in the search at the discretion of a
supervisor. The number of units involved and the scope of the search should be
determined in consideration of such factors as the missing person’s or lost child’s age,
time of day, weather conditions, known medical history, and any other factors which may
be determined.
VI. Adult Missing Person with Mentally Disabling Conditions
A. A media alert bulletin will be issued by the Little Rock Police Department when an adult person
with alzheimer’s, dementia or other mentally disabling conditions is reported missing and the
missing person meets the criteria established for such cases.
B. Criteria for a Media Alert Bulletin
1. The incident must involve a confirmed adult missing person, 18 years of age or older.
2. The missing person must have Alzheimer’s, dementia, or other mentally disabling
conditions that would impair the person from returning to their place of safety without
assistance.
3. There must be enough descriptive information to justify the immediate release of

broadcast information for assistance in recovering the missing adult.
4. Request for activation must be made as soon as possible after the missing adult is
reported.
C. Procedures to Implement a Media Alert
1. The responding officer will determine if the criteria exist to warrant a media alert.
2. If the criteria for a media alert bulletin are evident, the responding officer will notify a
Field Services Division supervisor and a Major Crimes Division supervisor who will
respond to the scene. The Major Crimes Division supervisor will verify that a media
alert incident does, in fact, exist.
3. The Major Crimes Division supervisor will contact Communications and have them
notify the Public Affairs Officer who will activate the media alert bulletin.
4. These procedures will be followed, in addition to procedures previously set forth in

sections of this policy, whenever dealing with a missing adult person suffering from
Alzheimer’s, dementia or other mentally disabling conditions.

VII. Recovery of Lost Children and Missing Persons
1. When a person who is listed as a “Missing Person” or “Runaway” in the L.R.P.D.

Records Management System and/or the N.C.I.C. files is recovered, that person where
applicable, shall be returned to the parent(s), legal guardian, or other appropriate
custodial care. The investigating officer shall generate a Supplemental Report using the
original Incident Number assigned to the “Missing Person” or “Runaway” report and
shall personally deliver the Supplemental Report to the A.C.I.C./N.C.I.C. Records
Technician or the Communications Center, whichever is appropriate, for immediate
removal from all systems. If the information is telephoned into the Communications
Center by a citizen, the person who takes the call shall generate a Supplemental Report
detailing who notified the Department of the returned individual, the date and time of
return and the physical condition of the person listed as “Missing” or “Runaway” and
shall clear the entry immediately from all systems.
a) Appropriate cancellation and clearance information shall be entered on the

Detective Remarks Screen (screen 24) of the original incident report with the
date, time and employee number of the detective who updated the information.
A copy of this Screen 24 shall be printed and the information shall be forwarded
to the assigned case detective who shall, as soon as the Supplemental Report is
received, review the information on the Detective Remarks Screen (screen 24)
and add any additional notes as may be required with the date, time and
employee number of the detective who updated the information.”
2. If the person listed as “Missing” or “Runaway” is the victim of a criminal offense where
the person is recovered, the detective who was assigned to the “Missing
Persons”/”Runaway” case shall generate the appropriate cancellation and clearance
request on the Detective Remarks Screen (screen 24) with the date, time and employee
number of the detective who gathered the information and shall forward a copy of screen
24 to the A.C.I.C./N.C.I.C. Records Technician or the Communications Center for
immediate removal from all systems. In no event shall the “Missing Person”/”Runaway”
case file be transferred to another detective without the person being cleared as a
“Missing Person”/”Runaway” from all appropriate files.
B. If any unidentified child is located, every attempt will be made to locate a parent or guardian to ID
the child. If a parent or guardian cannot be located, the child will be transported to the Major
Crimes Division. Major Crimes Division personnel will contact the Division of Children and
Family Services.
VIII. Validation Procedures:
A. Procedures for validating Missing Person and Runaway entries in N.C.I.C.

1. The Department receives ACIC/NCIC validation documents each month on Missing

Person and Runaway entries that were made by the Department. The Department also
receives ACIC/NCIC validation documents bi-annually on all Missing Person and
Runaway entries that have been made by the Department. When validations are supplied
to appropriate Detective personnel, they shall contact the person reporting, complainant,
and/or next of kin of the Missing Person and/or Runaway to ascertain the current status of
the missing individual. If any additional information is gathered, this updated
information shall be documented on the Detective Remarks Screen (screen 24), with the
date, time and employee number of the detective who gathered the information. A copy
of screen 24 shall be forwarded to the ACIC/NCIC Records Technician for modification
of information in the N.C.I.C. record. In the event the inquiring detective is unsuccessful
in an attempt to contact the victim, person reporting, complainant, etc., the case detective
must make a determination based upon best information and knowledge available
whether or not to retain the entry in the N.C.I.C. file. The case detective who checks the
validation sheets shall place his/her initials, employee number, date and time of contact
on the validation document and shall return the validations within 10 working days from
date of receipt to the ACIC/NCIC Records Technician.
2. Pursuant to the National Child Search Assistance Act of 1990, the Department is required
to verify and update all records, including medical and dental records of Missing and or
Runaway juveniles within 60 days from the original date of entry into NCIC. If any
additional information is gathered, this updated information shall be documented on the
Detective Remarks Screen (screen 24), with the date, time and employee number of the
detective who gathered the information. A copy of screen 24 shall be forwarded to the
ACIC/NCIC Records Technician for modification of information in the NCIC record. In
the event the inquiring detective is unsuccessful in an attempt to contact the victim,
person reporting, complainant, etc., the case detective must make a determination based
upon best information and knowledge available whether or not to retain the entry in the
N.C.I.C. file. The case detective who checks the validation sheets shall place his/her
initials, employee number, date and time of contact on the validation document and shall
return the validations within 10 working days from date of receipt to the ACIC/NCIC
Records Technician.” (Title 42 USC, Chapter 72, Section 5780)

GENERAL ORDER
G. O. 316 MOBILE VIDEO RECORDING EQUIPMENT

I. Purpose and Definitions
A. The Little Rock Police Department has adopted the use of mobile video/audio recording
systems in order to accomplish several objectives. These objectives include, but are not limited
to:
1. The enhancement of officer reporting, evidence collection, and court testimony

through audio/video documentation of events, actions, conditions and statements
made during arrests and critical incidents;
2. The enhanced ability to review probable cause for arrest, arrest procedures, officer
and suspect interaction, and evidence for investigative purposes; and,
3. This General Order provides guidelines for the use of mobile video/audio recording
equipment.
B. In this Order, “MVR” shall mean all elements of the mobile video/audio recording equipment.
Wherever the operation of the MVR is referenced, such operation includes both the audio and
video capabilities of this equipment (wireless body microphone and vehicular equipment).
C. MVR equipment will be assigned and deployed at the direction of the Chief of Police.
Generally, installation will include, but not be limited to, patrol district, pool, and supervisory
vehicles, and vehicles from specialized units such as START, the Tactical Section and the
Warrants Unit.
1. For the purposes of this Order, “Sergeant” shall mean the Sergeant supervising any
police officer using MVR equipment. In the absence of a Sergeant, this shall mean the
individual assigned this supervisory responsibility.
D. For the purposes of this Order, “Lieutenant” shall mean the Lieutenant commanding any unit,
watch, or section in which MVR equipment is used. In the absence of a Lieutenant, this shall
mean the individual assigned this command responsibility.
II. Responsibilities and Limitations
A. The Technology Support Lieutenant will be responsible for ensuring that all MVR equipment
is properly installed and maintained and that appropriate personnel are trained in the operation
of the MVR equipment. The Division Commander will be responsible for ensuring that all
MVR equipment is properly maintained on vehicles within their area of responsibility.
1. MVR equipment malfunctions will be recorded in a manner consistent with other

mechanical problems and vehicles experiencing MVR equipment malfunctions will be
removed from service immediately.

GENERAL ORDERS G. O. 316 MOBILE VIDEO RECORDING EQUIPMENT
2. A Sergeant may authorize the use of a vehicle in which the MVR equipment is
inoperable; however, this authorization will be noted in writing in advance of using
the vehicle and will be submitted along with all documentation requesting repairs to
the vehicle coordinator in that Division.
a) If the district car’s MVR equipment is inoperable and a pool car is available
with operating MVR equipment, the pool car will be utilized. The only time
a vehicle should be used without MVR equipment is when no other vehicle is
available in their Division.
3. MVR equipment will be included in all regular vehicle inspections.
B. The Technology Support Lieutenant will be responsible for responding to all requests for
access to MVR storage as provided by this Order.
C. Supervisors on a monthly basis will randomly review digital video files to assist in periodic
assessment of officer performance, determine whether MVR equipment is being fully and
properly utilized and identify material that may be appropriate for training.
D. Officers and/or Sergeants will be responsible for the operation of MVR equipment as
prescribed by this Order.
E. Tampering with or disabling MVR equipment, shielding, or taking any other action, which
interferes with the proper operation of MVR equipment is cause for disciplinary action.
F. Unusual or exceptional incidents related to law enforcement activities generate the interest of
many. However, officers and/or Sergeants shall not afford individuals outside the parameters
of law enforcement the opportunity to review a segment of any tape without prior authorization
of the Office of the Chief of Police or their designee.
III. Operation of MVR Equipment
A. Specific information concerning the actual physical operation of MVR equipment will be
provided to appropriate personnel through training conducted by the Training Division with
input from the Technology Support Lieutenant and is not included as a part of this Order.
B. MVR equipment will be activated in accordance with the following criteria:
1. MVR equipment will be installed so that the DVR equipment will automatically begin
recording when the wireless microphone is activated, the vehicle's blue lights are
activated, or the vehicle's siren is activated.
2. MVRs are equipped with a G-Force indicator that will automatically begin recording
whenever preset levels of G-Forces are encountered.
3. The MVR equipment will be manually activated to start recording prior to exiting the
patrol vehicle to record all traffic stops, pursuits, enforcement actions, calls for
service, prisoner transports, field contacts, and interviews.
4. Personnel will not be required to activate the MVR equipment to capture non-law
enforcement actions such as, but not limited to meal breaks, stops at convenience
stores, or fueling operations.
GENERAL ORDERS 316-2 LITTLE ROCK POLCIE DEPARTMENT

G. O. 316 MOBILE VIDEO RECORDING EQUIPMENT LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
5. Should a non-law enforcement action become enforcement related, personnel will

activate the MVR equipment manually by use of the microphone activation point.
6. Personnel will confirm automatic and manual MVR activation and verify that the
wireless microphone is working at the beginning of the tour of duty.
C. Officers and/or Sergeants will ensure the proper alignment, focusing and positioning of MVR
equipment to provide quality documentation.
D. MVR equipment, including the wireless microphone, will be activated during all traffic stops,
pursuits, and enforcement actions, including calls for service, prisoner transports, field contacts
and interviews. The officer and/or Sergeant will ensure that the wireless microphone remains
activated at all times during citizen contact to provide narration with the video.
1. In addition to the requirements listed above, MVR equipment may also be utilized to
document crime and accident scenes or other events such as where evidence or
contraband is collected or where the documentation of a suspect’s actions may prove
useful to further prosecution.
2. MVR equipment will not be used to intentionally record statements made by persons
who are in a police vehicle and who are not in custody and who are not in the
presence of a police officer and/or Sergeant, unless those persons are aware that their
statements and conversations are being recorded.
3. Officers and/or Sergeants will activate MVR equipment whenever instructed to do so

by any Supervisor.
4. Officers and/or Sergeants must be aware that even though the video record may be
unrevealing, an audio record is transmitted from the wireless body microphone
whenever the MVR equipment is activated.
5. Officers and/or Sergeants will not deactivate the MVR equipment until the recorded
contact is complete.
6. On all reports, tickets and citations initiated while the MVR equipment was activated,
officers and/or Sergeants will write “MVR” in the narrative to denote that the
equipment was in use. If the MVR equipment malfunctioned, during the recorded
incident, the malfunction will be noted in the narrative of the report.
7. A Field Supervisor will evaluate incidents involving MVR equipment malfunctions

and/or failure to activate the MVR equipment during required incidents.
E. Officers may deactivate MVR video and wireless microphone equipment during non-
enforcement activities such as during meals and other breaks for private conversations not
related to police incidents. Officers may not deactivate the MVR video and wireless
microphone equipment at anytime during an active police incident
1. Intentional deactivation during incidents where the use of the MVR equipment is
required by this Order may be cause for disciplinary action. Obstructing, shielding,
or any act of interference with the MVR equipment is not permitted.
GENREAL ORDERS 316-3 LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT

2. Officers and/or Sergeants will not cease recording an event, situation, or other
circumstance solely at the demand of anyone. Officers and/or Sergeants will inform
those who ask that video/audio recording equipment is in use.
F. Proper care of MVR equipment installed in vehicles is the responsibility of the officer and/or
Sergeant assigned to the vehicle. Officers and/or Sergeants will inspect the MVR equipment
at the beginning of the tour of duty; any problems with the MVR equipment will be referred to
a Supervisor immediately.
G. MVR microphones with cords: The remote microphone, cord, pouch and battery pack are
assigned to the MVR equipped vehicle. This equipment will be turned in at the end of the tour
of duty with the vehicle keys. Supervisors will ensure that remote microphones are utilized with
the appropriate vehicle. The remote microphone cord also functions as the antenna for the
wireless microphone. Officers will ensure that at least 10 inches of remote microphone cord
remains exposed in order to ensure proper remote microphone range. The remote microphone
cord will not be wrapped around the microphone at any time.
H. MVR microphones without cords: The remote microphone and pouch are assigned to the MVR
equipped vehicle. This equipment will not be taken from the vehicle. The microphone will be
placed in the charging cradle in the vehicle at the end of the tour of duty. It is the responsibility
of the officer or supervisor assigned to the vehicle to sync up the microphone with the
appropriate vehicle at the beginning of the tour of duty.
I. In the event of a critical incident, i.e. when an officer and/or Sergeant is disabled, the first
officer and/or Sergeant on the scene, may play the video digital file on the monitor in the
vehicle to obtain any necessary information.
J. The digital MVR (FS-CAM) was designed with two safety features that prevent the system
from running the vehicle battery so low that it would not be able to start the vehicle. If the
ignition switch is in the off position, the digital MVR will shut itself off after 45 minutes of
operation or if it senses low voltage in the vehicle battery. This should be considered normal
operation for the digital MVR system.
IV. Management of Video Data Files
A. Video data files will be managed in a manner that complies with these General Orders and IT
protocol. Secure video data file storage facilities and duplication equipment will be established
and maintained in each Division in which MVR equipment is utilized.
1. Video data files will be maintained on a server location in each of the Field Services
Divisions for a period of 120 days.
2. The server will be set to purge files from the server once the file has been held for 120
days. Video data files will be purged automatically to ensure space is available on
the server for new video data files.
3. Access to the video server will be limited to Field Services Supervisors, Internal
Affairs Investigators, and those individuals designated by the Chief of Police.
B. The following naming convention will be utilized whenever a video data file is copied or
transferred:

G. O. 316 MOBILE VIDEO RECORDING EQUIPMENT LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
1. The video data file will be identified by the Division, type incident, the incident
number or file number associate with the video data file and the radio call ID of the
unit recording the incident. File names will be in all capitals and spaces will be
replaced with underscores. Strict adherence to this naming convention will allow files
to be easily located.
a) Division will be abbreviated as follows:
(1) Downtown Division– DT
(2) Northwest Division – NW
(3) Southwest Division – SW
(4) Special Investigations – SI
(5) Major Crimes – MC
(6) Training – TR
(7) Headquarters HQ
b) Type Incidents will be abbreviated as follows:
(1) Vehicle Pursuits – PURSUIT
(2) Use of Force – FORCE
(3) Evidentiary Value – EVID
(4) Complaints – COMP
(5) Use in Training – TRAIN
c) Examples of file names are listed below
(1) DT_PURSUIT_07-12345_2X52
(2) SW_FORCE_07-12346_1X80
(3) SW_COMP_07-12347_3Y90
C. Officers and/or Sergeants will notify a Supervisor in the event that a video data file may
contain material the officer and /or Sergeant believes might be helpful in Department Training.
The Supervisor will evaluate the video and, if appropriate, forward through the Chain of
Command to the Training Division Commander with a copy of the video with a written account
of the incident. The Training Division Commander will determine whether video records are
incorporated into training as appropriate.
GENREAL ORDERS 316-5 LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT

D. Sergeants will ensure that CD/DVD copies of the video data file are included in supervisory
review files required by the General Orders.
1. In the event that an officer and/or Sergeant determines that a video data file is needed
as evidence in support of an arrest or for other investigative purposes, the officer
and/or Sergeant will notify a Supervisor no later than the end of the tour of duty when
the video data file is downloaded to the video server.
2. The Supervisor will review the video data file and will make a final determination as
to whether the video data file will be utilized as evidence.
E. All DWI arrests will require the arresting officer's supervisor or, in his absence, the supervisor
on duty to create two copies of the MVR video file(s) of the police vehicle that initiated the
stop and all other police vehicles involved in the apprehension of the suspect. The video
copies will be forwarded, along with the original B.A.C. package to Front Desk Officer before
the officers’ end of shift. In the event that the video system of the primary vehicle malfunctions
or the vehicle is not equipped with a video recording system, the officer will document this
information on an Officer’s Report (Form 5600-2). The original Officer’s Report will be
included with the BAC package.
V. Requests for Access to or Copies of Video Data Files
A. Video data files are to be considered Departmental documents intended only to further the law
enforcement and management functions of the Department.
B. All requests for access to or for copies of video data files will be forwarded through the Chain
of Command to the Office of the Chief of Police.
1. The Office of the Chief of Police will establish whether a particular video data file or
a portion of a video data file is subject to disclosure and will ensure that the
Department responds to all requests in a lawful manner.
2. Departmental response to informational requests may include access to (viewing of) or

duplication of video data files. The Records Section Supervisor will collect a
duplication fee as appropriate.
C. Requests for copies of video data files from other law enforcement agencies, or governmental
entities, will also be forwarded to the Office of the Chief of Police for review and response.
D. Civilians requesting copies of video data files will be directed to the Office of the Chief of
Police.
E. No video data file will be copied or otherwise distributed, disseminated or released for use
outside the Department, unless authorized by the Office of the Chief of Police.
F. The procedures specified in this Section are not required for video data file copies which may
be included in case files submitted to the Prosecuting Attorney’s Office or copies taken to court
as evidence by officers and/or Sergeants.
G. The Division Commander will be responsible for the retrieval of video data files to be copied
from the video data server.

GENERAL ORDER
G. O. 317 ACTIVE AGGRESSOR INCIDENTS

I. General
A. The purpose of this Order is to provide immediate response procedures for Little Rock Police
Officers to stop suspect(s) who pose a threat to human life.
B. To provide guidance to supervisors and personnel in order to maintain order and restore a safe
environment. First responders should make every effort to;
1. Isolate, distract and neutralize the threat,
2. Rescue and evacuate innocent persons, and,
3. Apprehend the suspect(s).
II. Definitions
A. An Active Aggressor is defined as one or more subjects who participate in a random or systematic
homicidal spree by demonstrating their intent to continuously harm others. The subject’s
overriding objective appears to be mass murder rather than other criminal conduct such as
robbery, kidnapping, etc. This definition includes any assault with a deadly weapon capable of
causing mass homicide such as explosive devices, a knife, etc.
B. Contact Team is a team of officers whose primary objective is to locate the active aggressor and
isolate, distract and neutralize him/her.
C. Rescue Team is a team of secondary responders whose purpose is to locate and assist the
casualties of the assault and establish a Casualty Collection Point for responding medical
personnel.
D. Casualty Collection Point (CCP) is a room capable of holding all victims with injuries that
require medical attention. A series of rooms next to each other may be used if the casualties
exceed available space. The CCP is established to assist responding medical personnel with
triaging, treating, and transporting injured victims.
III. Procedures
A. Responsibilities of Responding Units

1. First Responders (Contact Teams) on the scene will;
a) Verbally check in with the Communication Center and establish a primary radio
channel for entry personnel.
b) Determine if an incident is in progress.
c) Assess the situation, and determine the most appropriate course of police action
geared toward the location of the threat.
d) Notify additional units and the SWAT Unit if necessary.
e) Immediately contact his/her supervisor.
f) Select appropriate entry points for the primary entry officer(s) and advise
responding units of safe approach routes.
g) Establish a Contact Team and enter the involved structure with the overall
objective to isolate, distract, and neutralize the aggressor. Preventing the
suspect(s) from committing further acts of harm to human life is the primary
concern of the contact team. Any SWAT Unit officers who respond will assume
roles on contact teams and/or rescue teams that are best suited for their
specialized training and equipment.
h) While moving through the structure, officers should identify and communicate
locations of victims needing medical attention and locations of any suspected
explosive devices to secondary responding officers and Communications. They
should also continually update their location and location of the threat, if
known.
i) If practical and absent continued shooting, officers should treat any massive
hemorrhaging that may result in the immediate loss of life.
j) If not in uniform, officers will wear an outer garment that identifies them as a
police officer.
k) Multiple contact teams may be deployed, depending on the scope of the incident.
Their deployment will be communicated and coordinated with the other teams,
to prevent incidents of friendly fire.
2. Secondary Responders (Rescue Teams) on the scene will:
a) Enter the structure utilizing Contact Team tactics.
b) Be directed to victims’ locations by the Contact Team(s) or by the Incident

Command, if established.

c) Direct victims to safety by utilizing either shelter-in-place or evacuation; if
evacuating, direct the victims to an established exit point.
d) Assistance to victims may not be immediately possible, if the suspect(s) has not
been contained.
e) Establish a Casualty Collection Point (CCP) for injured victims. Little Rock
Fire Department and MEMS personnel may be utilized in rescue efforts and
treating of injured victims.
f) Maintain security for the CCP and other cleared areas of the structure.
g) Leave fatalities in place for crime scene preservation.
B. Transition to a Hostage or Barricaded Suspect Incident
1. If the incident turns into a hostage or barricaded suspect situation, the SWAT Unit and
Crisis Negotiations Team will be notified and respond.
2. Until the SWAT Unit assumes control of the incident, the responding officers should:
a) Contain the incident by preventing movement of the suspect(s).
b) Evacuate innocents from the immediate area.
c) Communicate an update of the situation to the Command Post.
d) Create an Immediate Action Plan in the event the suspect begins killing victims,
surrenders, releases the hostages, or creates any other situation that requires
immediate response by officers.
C. Incident Command.
1. The first officer on scene, who is not part of a contact team, shall be the Incident
Commander, until relieved by higher authority. Nothing precludes the initial responding
supervisor from deploying as part of a contact team. An Incident Command Post will be
established (per G.O. 308 & 312), and may be expanded to create a Unified Incident
Command, that will incorporate other responding entities. Multiple personnel may be
needed in the Command Post to monitor secondary radio channels, coordinate with the
Communications Center and other responding entities, request additional resources, etc.
2. Continually monitor the incident and evaluate the need to deploy additional contact
teams or rescue teams. Rescue teams will be deployed as soon as possible (“area that is
cleared, but not secure”) to facilitate treatment of injured and minimize the loss of life.
These efforts will be coordinated with Little Rock Fire Department and MEMS personnel.
Additional personnel will be deployed to establish a secure inner perimeter around the
target structure.
3. Ensure notifications have been made to the on-duty Shift Commander, appropriate
Division Commander, Major Crimes Division personnel, CSSU and Public Affairs.

4. Establish an evacuation area for non-injured victims, with the assistance of the location
officials. Depending on the scope of the incident, off-site locations may need to be
considered, and transportation resources may need to be coordinated with outside
entities (i.e. Central Arkansas Transit). Any persons who can supply pertinent
information concerning the incident will also be identified and secured. A media
location will also be coordinated with Public Affairs. It will be the duty of the Public
Affairs Office to communicate to local media outlets for public awareness and safety.
5. Upon conclusion of the incident, if deployed, the SWAT Unit will perform a final
clearing of the building to account for all persons and locate and mark any weapons,
explosives or dangers. These efforts will be coordinated with the Little Rock Fire
Department Bomb Squad, if needed. In the absence of the SWAT Unit, the Incident
Commander will direct a thorough search and the entire structure to ensure that all
persons are accounted for and that all weapons and/or booby traps are located, disabled
and removed from the premises.
D. Active Aggressor Incidents at Schools
1. The School Resource Officer assigned to a particular school will obtain and/or update
annually, a Critical Incident Packet for that school. Communications will maintain the
master copy of each school Critical Incident Packet. School Resource Officers assigned
to a particular school will maintain a paper and digital copy of the Critical Incident
Packet, and make it available to the Command Post. The packet will contain, at
minimum, the following items:
a) Layout/floor plan of school,
b) List of all school employees, school room numbers and building assignments,
c) Evacuation points/sites,
d) School emergency management plans,
e) School media contact person/site,
f) School bell schedule,
g) Water, gas and electric cut-off locations,
h) Aerial photos of the school campus,
i) Location of the master attendance list of enrolled students,
j) Names of individuals with master keys and location of any emergency keys,
k) Location of the registration list of any student/staff parking permits,
l) List designated evacuation site, a.k.a. “Sister School” and/or “Community

Partner”.
2. Fusion Camera System – the Little Rock School District has a closed circuit camera
system, also known as the Fusion Camera System, which is installed in most of the
schools in the District. The Little Rock Police Department has been allowed to view

images from the system for the purpose of aiding officers responding to critical incidents
and alarms at schools. Communications personnel, the SRO Sergeant and SWAT Unit
supervisors will have access to the camera system for use as a tool to assist officers
responding to critical incidents involving the Little Rock School District.
E. Communications Center Procedures
1. The radio channel held by the first officer(s) on scene will be restricted for
communication between deployed officers and the Command Post. All other incident
related radio traffic will be on a secondary radio channel.
2. Communications will advise all responding personnel to report to the Command Post for
assignments. This includes any personnel responding from other entities. A designated
person in the Command Post will establish a secondary line of communication with the
Communications Center to facilitate passing of information to deployed officers from
callers who may still be inside the target structure.
3. Communications will pass on any information available from the Fusion Camera System
(Little Rock School District) and other intelligence sources to the Command Post.
IV. Annual Review
A. The Division Commander, or his/her designee, in charge of SWAT will document an annual
review of policy and training needs.

GENERAL ORDER
G.O. 319 HANDLING OF PERSONS WITH SPECIAL NEEDS

CALEA STANDARDS
I. Policy
A. It is the policy of the Little Rock Police Department to ensure that a consistently high level of
service is provided to all community members, including those who are deaf or hard-of-hearing.
B. The Department has specific legal obligations under the Americans with Disabilities Act and the
Rehabilitation Act. All employees, both civilian and sworn, will comply with these policies and
will fulfill their legal obligations as follows:
1. People who are deaf or hard-of-hearing are entitled to an equivalent level of service as
others.
2. The Department will make every effort to ensure that its officers and employees
communicate effectively with people who are deaf or hard-of-hearing.
C. Effective communication with a person who is deaf or hard-of-hearing involved in an incident,

whether as a victim, witness, suspect or arrestee, is essential in ascertaining what actually
occurred, the urgency of the matter, and type of situation.
D. This General Order is consistent with and is intended to comply with the U.S. Department of
Justice policies promulgated on October 11, 2002.
II. Procedures for Handling of Persons with Physical Disabilities
A. In-compliance with the Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA), employees of this Department will
provide to individuals with disabilities appropriate auxiliary aid and services necessary to ensure
effective communication.
1. “Disabilities” are defined by the ADA as physical or mental impairments whether

permanent or temporary, that substantially limits one or more major life activities of an
individual.
2. “Auxiliary aid and services” include but are not limited to:
a) Use of gestures or visual aids to supplement oral communication;
b) An exchange of written notes;
c) Use of assistant listening devices (to amplify sound for persons who are hard of
hearing); or

G.O. 319 HANDLING OF PERSONS WITH SPECIAL NEEDS GENERAL ORDERS
d) Use of qualified oral or sign language interpreters.
B. Employees shall keep in mind that an individual’s failure to comply with or respond to verbal
orders may be the result of their inability to hear or understand clearly the orders, rather than an
act of defiance.
C. Upon determining that an individual being detained has a hearing impairment, employees shall
first attempt to communicate with the individual through use of written communication, lip
reading, sign language or a combination thereof.
1. All written communications should be kept simple and to the point using basic
vocabulary.
2. All written communications shall be retained as evidence.
D. Interpreters will be used in criminal and non-criminal situations when written communication is
ineffective and it is essential to establish effective communication to ensure a thorough
investigation.
1. After consulting with an individual with a hearing impairment and determining that an
interpreter is needed, the officer will immediately notify a supervisor and advise him/her
of the circumstances.
2. The supervisor will evaluate the situation and the need for an interpreter.
3. Once the decision is made to obtain the services of a qualified interpreter, the supervisor
will notify the Communications Center.
a) The Communications Center will notify the appropriate contract agency.
b) The Communications Center will maintain an up-to-date list of agencies that

provide special services.
4. The requesting officer will document the incident on an officer’s letter form and forward
it through their chain of command to the Administrative Services Manager to ensure
proper processing of all charges incurred. An invoice, if available, will be attached. A
copy of the letter and any invoice will be retained in the case file.
E. Officers must use good judgment and determine, on an individual basis, how to handle each
situation to protect the rights of disabled persons.
1. If an individual without a hearing impairment would have been arrested based on

probable cause, then a suspect with a hearing impairment in the same situation does not
need to be provided with a qualified interpreter, prior to arrest, to explain the charges.
2. If it is essential to interview a suspect with a hearing impairment to determine if probable

cause exists to make an arrest, a qualified interpreter must be provided if written
communication is ineffective.

F. Officers will employ the same procedures as described above when confronted with situations that
involve a language barrier which might endanger any evidence produced or violate a detainee’s
rights during questioning.
G. The type of aid that will be required for effective communication will depend on the individual’s
preferred method of communication, and the nature, importance, and duration of the
communication at issue.
1. In many circumstances, oral communication supplemented by gestures and visual aids,

an exchange of written notes, use of a computer or typewriter, or use of an assisted
listening device may be effective.
2. In other circumstances, qualified sign language or oral interpreters are needed to

communicate effectively with persons who are deaf or hard-of-hearing.
3. The more lengthy, complex, and important the communication, the more likely it is that a
qualified interpreter will be required for effective communication with a person whose
primary means of communication is sign language or speech reading. For example:
a) If there has been an incident and the officer is conducting witness interviews, a
qualified sign language interpreter may be required to communicate effectively
with someone whose primary means of communication is sign language.
b) If a person is asking an officer for directions to a location, gestures and an

exchange of written notes will likely be sufficient to communicate effectively.
H. To serve each individual effectively, primary consideration should be given to the communication
aid or service that works best for that person.
1. Officers must ask persons who are deaf or hard-of-hearing what type of auxiliary aid or
service they need.
2. Officers must defer to those expressed choices, unless there is another equally effective
way of communicating, given the circumstances, length, complexity, and importance of
the communication, as well as the communication skills of the person who is deaf or
hard-of-hearing.
III. Financial Obligations of the Department
A. The Little Rock Police Department is not required to provide a particular auxiliary aid or service
if doing so would fundamentally alter the nature of the law enforcement activity in question, or if
it would cause an undue administrative or financial burden.
1. If the Department has limited financial resources and providing a particular auxiliary
aid would cost a large sum of money, the Department head may determine that it would
be unduly costly and constitute an undue financial burden (note: the Department’s
budget as a whole must be considered). In this situation, the most effective means of
communication not involving an undue burden must be used.
2. Individuals who are deaf or hard-of-hearing will not be charged for the cost of an
auxiliary aid or service needed for effective communication.

B. The input of an individual who is deaf or hard-of-hearing and is involved in an incident is just as
important to the law enforcement process as the input of others. Officers must not draw
conclusions concerning an incident unless they fully understand and are understood by all those
involved, including persons who are deaf or hard of hearing.
IV. Interpretive Services
A. The Little Rock Police Department Communications Center will maintain a list of at least two (2)
sign language and oral interpreting services who are available on-call 24 hours per day and
willing to provide qualified interpreters as needed.
1. A qualified interpreter is one who is able to interpret effectively, accurately, and

impartially, both receptively and expressively, using any necessary specialized
vocabulary.
2. Accordingly, an interpreter must be able to sign to the deaf individual (or interpret
orally to the person who does not use sign language) what is being said by the hearing
person and to voice to the hearing person what is being signed or said by the deaf
individual.
3. The interpreter must be able to interpret in the language the deaf person uses and must
be familiar with law enforcement terms and phrases.
4. Because a qualified interpreter must be able to interpret impartially, a family member,

child, or friend of the individual who is deaf may not be qualified to render the necessary
interpretation because of factors such as professional, emotional or personal
involvement, or considerations of confidentiality.
5. Additionally, although a “qualified” interpreter may be certified, a certified interpreter

is not necessarily “qualified,” if he or she is not a good communications match for the
deaf person or the situation. Certification is not required in order for an interpreter to
be “qualified.”
B. These services will be chosen after thorough screening of the quality and skill of its interpreters,
its reliability, and in accordance with the City of Little Rock’s Contract Services Guidelines.
C. The Administrative Services Manager will ensure that a list of these contract agencies is updated
and provided to the Communication Center annually.
V. TTY and Relay Services
A. In situations when a non-disabled person would have access to a telephone, officers will provide
persons who are deaf or hard-of-hearing the opportunity to place calls using a teletypewriter
(TTY, also known as a telecommunications device for deaf people, or TDD).
B. Employees will also accept telephone calls placed by persons who are deaf or hard-of-hearing
through the Telecommunications Relay Service.
VI. Officers Responsibilities

A. Officers must review and have a working knowledge of “Techniques for Handling Situations
Involving People Who are Deaf or Hard-of-Hearing.” This document reviews how officers should
communicate effectively in the types of situations officers will encounter. These situations include
but are not limited too:
1. Issuing a non-criminal or motor vehicle citation.
2. Communicating with a person who initiates contact with an officer.
3. Interviewing a victim or critical witness to an incident.
4. Questioning a person who is a suspect in a crime.
5. Making an arrest or taking a person into custody.
6. Issuing Miranda Warnings to a person under arrest or in custody.
7. Interrogating a person under arrest or in custody.
B. The Training Division will be responsible for the training of “Techniques for Handling Situations
Involving People Who are Deaf or Hard-of Hearing” and will maintain appropriate
documentation to ensure that all Departmental employees are familiarized with this General
Order and supporting material.

GENERAL ORDER
G.O. 320 LINE OF DUTY DEATH POLICY

I. Policy Statement
A. It shall be the responsibility of the City of Little Rock Police Department to provide liaison
assistance to the immediate survivors of an officer who dies in the line-of-duty, whether
feloniously or accidentally, while an active member of the department, to include the clarification
and comprehensive study of survivor benefits, and to provide tangible and intangible emotional
support during this traumatic period of readjustment for the surviving family.
B. The purpose of this policy is to provide direction for the City of Little Rock Police Department to
provide appropriate emotional care for the seriously injured, ill or deceased employee’s family. If
the incident is the line-of-duty death of a police officer, funeral arrangements are to be decided by
the family of the officer with their wishes taking precedence over those of the agency.
1. Although this policy is intended to address the line-of-duty death or injury of police
officers, many provisions, including death notification and family assistance, may be
applicable to any agency employee or retired employee (uniformed and non-uniformed)
regardless of whether or not the death is duty related.
C. Coordination of events following the line-of-duty death of a police officer is an extremely

important and complex responsibility. Professionalism and compassion must be exhibited at all
times as an obligation to the officer’s survivors and to the law enforcement community. In order
to provide the best possible services and support for the officer’s family, specific tasks will be
assigned to the Department’s “Family Support Team”.
1. This team will be appointed by the Chief of Police and will consist of a Department
Liaison Officer, a Notification Officer, a Hospital Liaison, a Family Liaison Officer, a
Public Affairs Officer, a Benefits Coordinator, a Police Department Chaplain, an Honor
Guard member, a Traffic Services supervisor, and a Victim Services Program
representative.
2. The Public Affairs Office will provide Communications an up-to-date Family Support
Team call out list.
D. In this General Order, “Line-of-Duty Death” shall mean any action, felonious or accidental, which
claims the life of a City of Little Rock Police Officer who is performing work-related functions
while on or off duty.
E. In this General Order, “Survivors” shall mean immediate family members of the deceased officer;
spouse, children, parents, siblings, fiancé, and/or significant others.
F. In this General Order, “Beneficiary” shall mean those designated by the officer as recipients of
specific death benefits.
G. In this General Order, “Benefits” shall mean financial payments made to the family to insure
financial stability following the loss of a loved one.

H. In this General Order, “Funeral Payments” shall mean financial payments made to the surviving
families of an officer killed in the line-of-duty which are specifically earmarked for funeral
expenses.
I. In this General Order, “Community Service Network” shall mean area businesses, churches and
organizations providing services and assistance to family members or survivors of officers killed
or injured in the line of duty.
II. Death Notification
A. Upon determination of an officer’s death or serious injury, the first officer on the scene shall
immediately notify Communications, his immediate supervisor, and other on-duty units as soon as
is necessary to secure the scene.
B. The first supervisor on the scene shall be responsible for the integrity of the scene as enumerated
in General Order 302.V.B.
C. The Field Services Division Shift Commander shall be responsible for notifying the Chief of
Police, the Assistant Chiefs, the Family Support Team and all Division Commanders, as well as,
his other notification responsibilities. Division Commanders shall be responsible for notifying
personnel under their command.
D. Initial notification should include the officer’s name, seriousness and type of injuries, the time of
occurrence, the location of occurrence, the type of call or circumstance, suspect information, and
the location of the victim (name and location of hospital or morgue).
E. As soon as possible after all accurate information is compiled; the Public Affairs Officer shall
disseminate information to all members of the Department.
III. Survivor Notification
A. The notification plan will be formulated using the most recent confidential Survivor Notification
Sheet provided previously by the officer. This Notification Sheet will be kept in Communications
and in the Office of the Chief of Police.
B. The name of the deceased officer will never be released to the media before immediate survivors
living in the area are notified.
C. If there is knowledge of a medical problem with an immediate survivor, medical personnel will be
dispatched to the residence to coincide with the death notification.
D. Notification will always be made in person and never alone. The Chief of Police (or his
representative), or a member of the Family Support Team will act as the informing officer. If the
above-suggested persons are not readily accessible, the officer’s shift commander will
immediately dispatch a supervisory officer to notify the officer’s family. If possible, surviving
parents will be afforded this same courtesy of personal notification. If the opportunity to get the
family to the hospital prior to the demise of the officer presents itself, do not wait for the
appropriate delegation to gather.
E. If the family wants to go to the hospital, they should be transported via departmental vehicle
unless they desire other transportation.

F. If immediate survivors are from out of town, the on-duty shift commander or his designee will
request personal death notification from the public safety agency in that area. Logistical
arrangements should enable simultaneous telephone contact with the Little Rock Police
Department and the notifying agency.
IV. Hospital Procedures
A. The following department personnel are authorized to respond to the hospital when
necessary:
1. Department Staff officers;
2. Officers assigned to the investigation;
3. Crime Scene Search Unit technicians;
4. Family Support Team;
5. Other officers as authorized by Department Staff.
B. At least one supervisor shall be assigned security of the area. He shall allow access to those
authorized above, to medical personnel, and to family and persons authorized by the family.
C. A Family Support Team member shall coordinate efforts with the hospital security/administrative
staff in securing appropriate areas for family, friends, department personnel and media access and
security for those areas.
D. The employee’s immediate supervisor will take control of the employee’s personal property and
City property in the employee’s possession. If the employee’s personal property is not needed for
evidential purposes, it may be released to the family. The remainder of the property will be stored
in the Department’s property section or it will be turned over to the Crime Scene Search Unit as
circumstances dictate. Additional city property assigned to the employee shall be obtained from
his locker, desk or residence at a later date unless it is necessary for the investigation of the
offense in which the employee is directly involved. If the employee’s supervisor is not available to
take possession of the property, a supervisor appointed by the Division Commander will be
responsible for the property.
F. The Public Affairs Officer shall coordinate media releases at the hospital, the incident scene and
Department headquarters.
V. Assisting The Family At The Hospital
A. A Hospital Liaison will be appointed to act as information liaison for medical personnel to the
family of the officer and fellow police officers. The Hospital Liaison will ensure that pertinent
information on the officer’s condition is relayed on a timely basis. They shall also make the family
and fellow police officers aware of hospital policy about visitation with the injured officer and/or
visitation with the body following the demise, and explain why an autopsy is needed.

1. If it is possible for the family to visit their officer prior to death, they most certainly
should be afforded that opportunity. It is the family's right to visit their loved one. The
Hospital Liaison should prepare the family for what they might see in the emergency
room and accompany the family into the room for the visit if the family requests it, but
should not be overly protective of the family.
B. The Hospital Liaison will see that the family is updated on the incident as soon as the family
arrives at the hospital.
C. Family Support Team members will be present the entire time the family is at the hospital and
should arrange whatever assistance the family may need at that time.
D. The people who made the initial notification should be among those at the hospital.
E. Idle promises should not be made to the family at this time, i.e., “We’ll promote him/her
posthumously.” “We’ll retire his/her badge.”
F. Arrangements will be made by the Family Support Team members for transportation of the family
back to their residence.
G. The Hospital Liaison will be responsible for arrangements of the medical bills, relating to the
services rendered to the deceased officer, to be sent to the appropriate governmental agency for
payment. The family should not receive any of these bills at their residence address.
VI. Support for the Family During the Wake or Funeral
A. The Department Liaison Officer position is normally assigned to a Division Commander because
of the need to effectively coordinate resources throughout the Department. Responsibilities
include the following:
1. Coordinate all departmental functions regarding the incident.
2. Make assignments of tasks and responsibilities to department personnel, including the

Family Support Team members and Honor Guard Members. Those persons shall report
the status of their tasks to the Department Liaison Officer. Working closely with the
Family Liaison Officer to ensure that the needs of the family are fulfilled.
B. Although the Family Liaison Officer should know the deceased officer and be aware of the family
relationships, the officer should not be so emotionally involved with the loss that he/she would
become ineffective. The liaison officer must know that this is not a decision-making position. This
is a role of facilitator between the family and the Little Rock Police Department. The Liaison
Officer is responsible for the following:
1. Ensure that the needs of the family come before the wishes of the Department.
2. Meet with the family and tell them what his/her responsibilities will be during this time.
3. Meet with the family regarding funeral arrangements. Since most officers have not
prearranged their wishes for the handling of their own funeral, the family will most likely
need to decide all aspects of the funeral. The Department should only make the family
aware of what they can offer in the way of assistance if the family decides to have a
"line-of-duty funeral".
4. Know all information concerning the death and the continuing investigation to answer
family questions.

5. Be constantly available to the family throughout this traumatic process.
6. See that the survivors are afforded recognition and will have proper placement arranged
for them during the funeral and funeral procession.
7. See that the survivors are briefed on the funeral procedure (i.e., 21-gun salute, presenting
of flag, playing of taps, etc.).
C. The Public Affairs Officer will be designated to handle the media throughout this traumatic ordeal.
In the unlikely event that the family should decide to accept an interview, this officer will attend
and screen all questions presented to the family so as to not jeopardize upcoming legal
proceedings.
D. Family Support Team members will be responsible for seeing that the home is prepared for the
influx of visitors following the funeral. Food and household needs will be provided for through the
Community Support Network. Family Support Team members will be available to screen phone
calls and remain at the residence during this time.
E. The Community Support Network will provide a list of alternate churches with seating capacities
large enough to accommodate attendance at the funeral. Remember, the Department should only
make the family aware of the alternative. It is the family's choice.
F. Departmental vehicles and drivers will be made available to the family if they desire transportation
to and from the funeral home. Any departmental vehicles used in the transportation of family
members will bear the "Honor Guard" magnetic signs.
G. Family Support Team members will be responsible for providing the family access to other public
safety survivors or other support groups (Concerns of Police Survivors, Survivors of Homicide
Victims, Compassionate Friends, Parents of Murdered Children, etc.).
H. The Little Rock Police Department will send Family Support Team members on routine residence
checks by the survivor's home for 6-8 weeks following the tragedy. These same members will
ascertain from the survivor if any harassing phone calls are being received.
VII.Providing Information and Assistance on Benefits to the Surviving Family
A. The Benefits Coordinator will gather information on all benefits/funeral payments available to the
family. The Department Liaison will ensure that this officer has the Department's full support to
fulfill the responsibility to the survivor to coordinate all death benefits/payments (i.e., insurance
policies, outstanding debts, etc.). This officer should be completely responsible for filing
appropriate paperwork and following through with the family to insure that these benefits are
being received.
B. A Family Support Team member should visit with the surviving family to discuss the benefits they
will receive within a few days following the funeral. A prepared printout of the benefits/funeral
payments due the family, listing named beneficiaries, contacts at various benefits offices, and
when they can expect to receive the benefit should be given to the family. This same explanation
procedure should be repeated within a month following the death since the initial contact is
clouded by the emotional numbness of the family during the first benefits meeting. Check once
again in about six months to be sure the family is receiving/has received every possible payment.
C. If there are surviving children from a former marriage, the guardian of those children should also
receive a printout of what benefits the child/children will be receiving.

D. The Family Support Team member should pay special attention to the problems with possible
revocation of health benefits to the surviving family. The City of Little Rock requires survivors to
contact Human Resources within 30 days if they wish to continue coverage.
E. If criminal violations surround the death, the family will be informed of all new developments
prior to any press release.
F. If there will not be any court proceedings surrounding the circumstances of the officer's death, at
the earliest opportunity, the Department will relay all details of the incident to the family.
G. The Community Support Network should make an attorney/financial counselor available

to the surviving family for whatever legal/financial counseling is necessary (i.e., establish trust
funds, educational funding, etc.). The attorney should not be affiliated with the jurisdictional
government and should work as an ardent advocate for the family's interests.
H. Plaques/memorabilia given to the spouse will also be given to the parents.
VIII. Funeral Categories
A. With the consent of the employee’s family, the following classifications of funerals are authorized
by this Order:
1. Departmental with Full Honors;
a. This classification is reserved for employees whose death occurred in the line of
duty by felonious criminal action, accident, or other causes as approved by the
Chief of Police.
b. This funeral service shall include the following:
i. Vehicular escort provided by members of the Department. (The

Traffic Services Commander shall be responsible for assigning the
appropriate number of units for escort and coordinating the funeral
procession with other agencies, which may be involved in the
procession.);
ii. Honor guard;
iii. Color guard and presentation of the Flag of the United States of
America to the next of kin;
iv. Rifle salute;
v. Bugle and/or bagpipes; and,
vi. Approval for on-duty attendance by Departmental personnel, as

staffing allows.
2. Departmental with Honors:

a) This classification is reserved for active duty employees whose death occurs
from natural causes or whose death is not duty related, for retired sworn
employees, and for any active or former employee as approved by the Office of
b) This funeral service shall include the following:
i. Vehicular escort provided by the Department;
ii. Honor Guard;
iii. Color Guard and presentation of the Flag of the United States of
America to the next of kin;
iv. Bugle and/or bagpipes, as appropriate; and,
v. Approval for on-duty attendance by Departmental personnel, as staffing

allows.
3. Departmental
a. This classification shall be reserved for employees not enumerated in the above
categories and members of the immediate family of active or retired uniformed
employees.
b. This funeral service shall include the following:
i. Vehicular escort provided by the Department; and,
ii. Representation by the Chief of Police or his designate.
B. When other agencies request funeral escort assistance from this Department, the Traffic Services
Commander shall coordinate those efforts. When additional resources are required, the Office of
the Chief of Police shall coordinate those efforts.
C. The funeral classifications listed above shall adhere to the following funeral service guidelines,
taking into consideration the classification limitations and the family’s wishes.
D. Nothing in this Order shall limit the family from including fraternal and/or military observances to
which an employee is entitled.
IX. General Funeral Procedures
A. All members will maintain an excellent personal appearance. Uniforms and equipment must be in
good condition.
B. Uniforms

1. All uniformed officers will attend in Class A uniforms, including head coverings.
2. Members of the Honor Guard and pallbearers will wear white gloves.
3. A black band will be worn across the badge.
C. Funeral Services
1. The Honor Guard Commander shall be Commander of the Service. He shall issue all
commands for members of the Department (the Assembly or Detail) in attendance and all
personnel shall follow his orders relating to the rendering of hand salutes, calls to
attention, and rest.
1. Inside the Chapel or Sanctuary, officers will pay their respects with covered head
and thereafter, upon being seated or standing in a standing-room-only situation, shall
remove their head covering until conclusion of the indoor service. Honor Guard members
shall wear head covering throughout the service.
2. Officers shall exit the service in a military manner, with little conversation while
inside the building in which the service is held.
3. Officers will not smoke or use tobacco products indoors, nor in sight of the general public
outdoors, throughout the time of the services.
4. The Assembly shall be called to attention and shall render a salute when ordered by
the Commander of the Service upon removal of the casket from the building in which the
service was held.
5. The funeral procession shall proceed from the funeral service to the place of interment
with marked police units in the lead. All units acting as escort shall utilize full emergency
equipment and units in the procession not acting as escort shall use emergency lights in
addition to headlights as required by City Ordinance and state law governing funeral
processions. Units working traffic assignments along the route of the procession shall
render a salute to the hearse and the family as they pass.
6. The procession order shall be:
a. Escort units;
b. Honor Guard;
c. Clergy;
d. Hearse;
e. Pallbearers;
f. Family;
g. Chief of Police;

h. Dignitaries;
i. Staff Officers;
j. Little Rock Police officers;
k. City Employees;
l. Other agency officers; and,
m. Escort units.
7. Officers at the place of interment prior to the arrival of the procession will render a salute
to the hearse and the family as they pass.
8. Prior to removing the casket from the hearse, officers will assemble and the
Commander of the Service will bring the Assembly to attention; they will render salutes
as the Commander orders during the graveside ceremonies. (Uniformed officers will have
heads covered throughout the graveside services).
9. At the conclusion of remarks by the clergy, the Color Guard will proceed with the
flag ceremony. At its conclusion, the flag will be presented to the Chief of Police (or his
designate) who will present it to the next-of-kin.
10. While the assembly is at attention and saluting, music will be performed by bugle
and/or bagpipes and a rifle salute will be volleyed.
11. In instances where fraternal or other ceremonies are observed, they shall follow the
rifle salute unless protocol demands they be observed elsewhere. In those instances, the
Commander of the Service shall coordinate with their dignitaries prior to the service.
12. At the conclusion of the ceremonies, the Commander of the Service shall dismiss the
assembly.
D. Honor Guard
1. Prior to the services, members of the Honor Guard will assemble at a location near the
service (church, funeral home, or cemetery) for inspection by the Honor Guard
commander.
2. Commands will be executed by the Honor Guard commander.
E. Pallbearers
1. If pallbearers are requested by the family, they will be selected by the Honor Guard
Commander with the family’s approval.
2. Pallbearers will be under the direction of the Honor Guard commander. They will report
to the funeral home as directed for instructions and seating arrangements.

X. Procedural Variation
A. The procedures outlined shall be followed in most cases. Any changes made necessary by a
shortage of manpower, the unusual size of the funeral, the type of service, the physical
arrangement of the place of service or for any other reason shall be made by the Department
Liaison Officer. Any additional honors to be accorded to deceased members or employees of the
Department or to deceased members of other law enforcement agencies shall be at the discretion
of the Chief of Police.

G.O. 321 Abatement Procedure General Orders

GENERAL ORDER
G.O. 321 ABATEMENT PROCEDURE

10/17/2003 DEPARTMENTAL New 321
A. Abatement Procedures
1. Definition: In an effort to foster greater community relations within the City of Little Rock,
officers of this Department shall initiate the necessary procedures to abate known nuisance
locations. Common nuisance, specified in § 5-74-109 et seq., are defined as any premises,
building or place used to facilitate the commission of a continuing series of three (3) or more
criminal violations of Arkansas law. All such places, including any shop, warehouse,
dwelling house, building, boat, airplane, or any place whatever, used for the purpose of
unlawfully selling, storing, keeping, manufacturing, using, or giving away any controlled
substance, precursor, or analog specified in § 5-64-101 et seq., shall be a common nuisance.
This section shall apply as well to a public nuisance, specified in § 16-105-303 et seq., which
is defined as a dance hall or other local business in which, or around which there are public
disturbances, the unlawful drinking of intoxicating liquors, quarrels, affrays, or general
breaches of the peace are frequent. All such common or public nuisance places are subject to
abatement procedures. (Note: This section does not apply to City Code violations (i.e., weed
lots, abandoned vehicles, etc.). Abatements under these circumstances shall be referred to
Code Enforcement for proper handling.)
2. Authority: The Special Investigations Division shall be responsible for the follow-up
investigation of all reported nuisance places.
3. Guidelines: When any officer encounters what he believes to be a nuisance premises or

place, as defined above, as a result of police action or arrest, observation or public
notification, he shall:
a) Document all known or readily accessible information about the location

including the address, occupants, vehicles and premises description on a
standard police incident report form.
b) Draft an Officer’s Report (Form 5600-2) detailing the circumstances of the

report outlining the reasoning behind the belief that the location is a nuisance;
c) Submit the officer’s report along with a copy of the incident report to an
immediate supervisor for approval by the Chain of Command up to the Division
Commander;
d) Once approved, the Division Commander will forward the reports to the Special
Investigations Division Commander who will review and assign the reports to
the appropriate unit for investigation.
4. The SID investigating unit shall be responsible for conducting a thorough investigation
concerning the report and pursue abatement pursuant to and consistent with the SID
Divisional Operating Procedures outlined in Section 5100-3.

GENERAL ORDER
G. O. 322 ARREST IMMUNITIES AND THE HANDLING OF FOREIGN NATIONALS

04/30/2012 DEPARTMENTAL G.O.322 (05/19/2008) G. O.322
I. Purpose
A. To establish Departmental procedures for response to calls for service at the Mexican Consulate,
3500 South University Avenue.
B. To establish guidelines coinciding with federal and state mandates concerning immunity from
arrest.
C. To establish procedures for the notification of the proper authorities upon the detention of foreign
nationals.
II. General
A. Definitions:
1. Diplomatic immunity is a principle of international law by which certain foreign

government officials are not subject to the jurisdiction of local courts and other
authorities for both their official and, to a large extent, their personal activities. Diplomats
are those officials dealing directly with a host government. Diplomatic officials enjoy full
diplomatic immunity.
2. Consular immunity is a lesser degree of immunity and privileges. Consular officers are
those members of consular posts who are recognized by both the sending and the host
country as fully authorized to perform the broad array of formal consular functions. They
have only official acts or functional immunity and their personal inviolability is quite
limited. Official acts immunity pertains in numerous circumstances. No law enforcement
officer, State Department officer, or diplomatic mission or consulate is authorized to
determine whether a given set of circumstances constitutes an official act. This is an issue
which may only be resolved by the court with subject matter jurisdiction over the alleged
crime.
a) Consular officers may be arrested and incarcerated pending trial only if the
offense is a felony and that the arrest is made pursuant to a decision by a
competent judicial authority and a warrant issued by an appropriate court;
b) Consular officers can be prosecuted for misdemeanors, but must remain at

liberty pending trial or other disposition of charges;
c) Property of consular officers is not immune from search or seizure;
d) Consular officers are not obliged to provide evidence as witnesses in connection

with matters involving their official duties, to produce official documents, or to
provide expert witness testimony on the laws of the sending country;

G. O. 322 ARREST IMMUNITIES AND THE LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
HANDLING OF FOREIGN NATIONALS
e) Family members of consular officials enjoy no personal inviolability and no

jurisdictional immunity of any kind.
3. Special privileges and immunities accorded foreign diplomatic and consular

representatives assigned to the United States reflect rules developed among nations of the
world regarding the manner in which international relations must be conducted. The
underlying concept is that these foreign representatives can carry out their duties
effectively only if they are accorded a certain degree of insulation from the application of
standard law enforcement practices of the host country.
a) On a practical level, failure of the authorities of the United States to respect fully
the immunities of foreign diplomats and consular personnel may complicate
diplomatic relations between the United States and the sending country. It may
also lead to harsher treatment of U.S. personnel abroad, since the principle of
reciprocity has been integral to diplomatic and consular relations.
4. Sovereign Soil: By treaty, the Mexican Consulate building located at 3500 S. University
Avenue, is considered sovereign Mexican soil. Entrance to the building by members of
the Little Rock Police Department shall be by “invitation” only. The building is divided
into two separate sections. The entry area is the public waiting area. Adjacent to the
waiting area is a secured customer service window and Consular offices, which contain
official documents belonging to the government of Mexico. Entry into the secured area
by a member of the Little Rock Police Department shall be by invitation only and will
require a Consulate staff member escort.
B. A publication titled Diplomatic and Consular Immunity – Guidance for Law Enforcement and
Judicial Authorities has been obtained from the Diplomatic Security Service at the U.S.
Department of State. Much of the information contained of this General Order comes from that
publication.
C. A detailed publication on Consular Notification and Access has been obtained from the
Department of State for future reference. The Special Investigations Division, Intelligence Unit
will retain copies of this publication. This publication can also be located on the Internet at:
http://travel.state.gov/consul_notify.html.
III. Identification of Consular Officers
A. Consular employees will have in their possession an identification card bearing a photo, personal
information and consular mission. The ID card is issued by the United States Department of State
and will also bear the official seal of the State Department. Printed on the back of the card is a
brief statement of the bearer’s criminal immunity. Career consular officers, such as those assigned
to the Consulate in Little Rock, are entitled to immunity for official acts and shall not be liable to
arrest or detention pending trial except on a warrant for a felony offense.
1. A supervisor will be contacted should an officer need to verify the identification of a

consular officer. Immunity status will also be determined at that time.
2. Supervisors will have access to copies of Consular identifications and may also use the
information contained in Diplomatic and Consular Immunity – Guidance for Law
Enforcement and Judicial Authorities.

G.O. 322 ARREST IMMUNITIES AND THE LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
IV. Calls for Service
A. Per the Department of State and by International treaty, the Consulate building should be
considered sovereign Mexican Soil. When responding to calls at this location, police may freely
exercise arrest powers in the parking lot only.
B. A field supervisor will respond to any calls for service at the consular building or in the event
arrests are made on the consulate parking lot.
1. Per Consulate protocol, a security guard will be stationed at the front door during
business hours.
a) All officers are to receive “permission” from the Consul General or Consulate
Security Director to enter the facility.
b) As a general procedure, prior to dispatching a call for service to the Consulate,

LRPD Communications will immediately call back to confirm the request for
service and obtain permission for officers to enter the facility.
c) The building is divided into two distinct areas, a public area and an adjacent area
housing a secured customer service booth and Consular offices. Officer entry
into the secured area requires an escort by a member of the Consulate staff.
d) In the case of “hot pursuit” and the subject(s) enter the Consulate building,
officers will not enter the building, but officers will immediately establish a
perimeter and contact a supervisor.
(1) Communications will contact the Consulate to determine whether this

subject is eligible to request safe haven with the Mexican government
or if Consulate officials request police intervention.
2. After business hours, officers responding to calls or observing criminal activity requiring
entry into the building must await the arrival of a member of the Consular staff prior to
making entry into the building.
a) In the case of an active intruder, officers will establish a perimeter and await
arrival of a consulate representative before entry may be made.
3. All contacts, calls for service or incidents at the Consulate will be documented and copies
forwarded to the Office of the Chief of Police, Special Investigations Division,
Intelligence Unit by the end of shift.
V. Traffic Violations
A. When a person believed to have diplomatic immunity is stopped for a moving violation and
properly identifies themselves, officers may issue that person the appropriate traffic citation.
Issuance of a traffic citation does not constitute an arrest or detention.
1. Consular officers will be issued a driver’s license through the State Department.
2. Any citations issued to Consulate officers will be documented on an incident report and
copies of all paperwork will be forwarded to the Special Investigations Division,
Intelligence Unit by the end of shift.

3. The Intelligence Unit will be responsible for notifying the State Department of traffic
violations by Consular officers.
B. Driving While Intoxicated: Of primary consideration in a DWI incident is assurance that the driver
does not endanger himself or the public.
1. A Supervisor will be contacted as soon as the officer realizes the subject is a consular
member.
a) The Supervisor will be responsible for contacting the appropriate on-call

Mexican Consul with details of the arrest and the location of the individual.
2. The Supervisor will be responsible for arranging transportation for the individual or
release him to a sober responsible party who agrees to take responsibility for the subject.
Members of the Intelligence Unit will be contacted and will respond to the Major Crimes
Division to facilitate communication between LRPD, the Mexican Consulate and the U.S.
State Department.
a) An Intelligence Detective will be responsible for notifying the local State

Department representative of the incident.
3. A Consular Officer can not be compelled to take a Breathalyzer test.
4. If the Consular Officer agrees to testing, officers will follow our standard procedure with
respect to the administration of a field sobriety test and /or the Breathalyzer.
a) If the Consular Officer submits to testing, he will be transported to the Pulaski

County Regional Detention Center for completion of the Breathalyzer and
processing of paperwork.
b) Upon completion of the paperwork the subject will be transported to the Major
Crimes Division for immunity status verification and release.
5. Should the Consular Officer decline to take the Breathalyzer, he will be transported to the
Major Crimes Division for verification of immunity status, completion of paperwork and
release.
6. The Supervisor will be responsible for contacting the appropriate on-call Mexican Consul
with details of the arrest and the location of the individual.
7. The Supervisor will be responsible for arranging transportation for the individual or his
release to a sober responsible party who agrees to take responsibility for the subject.
8. Copies of all completed paperwork will be forwarded to the Office of the Chief of Police
and Special Investigations Division, Intelligence Unit by the end of shift.
VI. Foreign Nationals and Illegal Aliens
A. Foreign Nationals
1. Whenever an officer arrests, or otherwise detains, any individual who is not a citizen of
the United States, the officer shall immediately inform the individual of his right to have
his government notified concerning the arrest or detention.

G.O. 322 ARREST IMMUNITIES AND THE LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
a) The Consular Notification – Foreign National’s Option (Spanish) – LRPD form

#5100-35 shall be used when informing Mexican foreign nationals of their
notification option. (Attachment #1)
2. The arresting officer will contact the Special Investigations Division, Intelligence Unit
and provide all pertinent information. The Intelligence Unit shall maintain a copy of the
State Department publication, Consular Notification and Access which lists all consulates
and/or embassies, and will be responsible for the proper notifications.
a) All contacts and notifications will be documented on the arrest report or citation.
b) The foreign national will be advised that his consul has been notified.
3. In the case of certain countries, notification must be made without delay, regardless of
whether the arrestee/detainee so wishes. In these cases, the arrestee/detainee has no
choice regarding notification. The Intelligence Unit will maintain a liaison with the State
Department and shall keep such lists, as are necessary, to make the appropriate
determination, as to whether notification is mandatory.
4. Foreign consular officials have the right to visit their arrested or detained nationals,
unless the arrestee/detainee objects to such visits. In the event that foreign consular
officials indicate a desire to make such a visit, the Intelligence Unit will be notified. The
Intelligence Unit will advise the State Department and will assist both the foreign
consular officials and the State Department in arranging the visits.
5. In the event that a foreign national is arrested or detained at a time when no Intelligence
Unit personnel are on-duty, Communications personnel will be directed to contact the on-
call Intelligence Unit detective by cell phone and/or home phone, and the detective will
contact the arresting officer without delay.
VII. Illegal Aliens / Federal Immigration Violations
A. Officers will not arrest suspected illegal aliens for unauthorized or illegal entry into this country.
Remaining illegally in this country is a civil violation for which officers have no arrest authority.
B. Officers will not hold suspected illegal aliens for the Border Patrol. Information concerning a
suspected illegal alien can be forwarded to the Border Patrol.
C. Officers may arrest any person for violations concerning the transporting and harboring of illegal
aliens. Arrests must be based on probable cause and occur in the officer’s presence.
D. Officers, who have arrested an illegal alien for other criminal offenses, may contact the Border
Patrol for follow-up on the suspect’s entry status.

ATTACHMENT #1
NOTIFICACION CONSULAR
CONSULAR NOTIFICATION
FOREIGN NATIONAL’S OPTION - SPANISH
Como no ciudadano de los Estados Unidos, que está siendo arrestado o detenido, tiene usted el derecho
de pedirnos que notifiquemos acerca de su situación a los funcionarios consulares de su país aquí en los
Estados Unidos. También tiene derecho de comunicarse con los funcionarios consulares de su país.
Entre otras cosas, un funcionario consular de su país puede ayudarle a obtener asesoramiento legal,
ponerse en contacto con su familia y visitarle en el lugar de detención. Si desea que notifiquemos a su
oficina consular, usted puede pedir esta notificación mientras esté en nuestra custodia. ¿Desea que
notifiquemos ahora a los funcionarios consulares de su país?
Sí No
(Yes) (No)
(Haga un círculo alrededor de Sí o No.)

(Circle Yes or No)
Signature/Firma: __________________________________________________
Date/Fecha: ______________________________________________________
Translation: As a non-U.S. citizen who is being arrested or detained, you are entitled to
have us notify your country's consular officers here in the United States of your situation.
You are also entitled to communicate with your consular officers. A consular officer may be
able to help you obtain legal representation, and may contact your family and visit you in
detention, among other things. If you want us to notify your consular office, you can
request this notification while in our custody. Do you want us to notify your consular officers
at this time?
Officer: __________________________________________________
SID Contact: ______________________________________________
*Copies of all arrest paperwork must be faxed to The Special Investigations Division – Intelligence Unit by the end of shift.
LRPD Form 5100-35

New 06/20/2007

GENERAL ORDER
G.O. 323 EMERGENCY SITUATIONS INVOLVING THE LITTLE ROCK ZOO

11-9-2015 DEPARTMENTAL 10-13-2010 323
I. Purpose
A. To provide procedures to be followed by this Department in the event of the escape of an animal
from the Little Rock Zoo or intrusions by humans into dangerous animal enclosures.
II. Dangerous Animal Escapes – On Zoo Grounds
A. It is the responsibility of the Zoo’s Emergency Response Team to handle animal emergencies on
Zoo grounds. The Emergency Response Team will recapture, immobilize or terminate an animal
utilizing the specialized equipment, munitions and training at their disposal whenever an animal is
on Zoo grounds and within the Zoo’s perimeter.
B. If a dangerous animal escapes onto Zoo grounds causing a threat to the public, the Zoo’s
Emergency Response Team will immediately respond and the Zoo will commence the appropriate
plan to close, partially close, lock down and/or evacuate the Zoo grounds. A call will be placed to
9-1-1 and Communications will immediately dispatch a patrol unit and a patrol supervisor, who
will respond to a location outside the Zoo’s perimeter as designated by a member of the Zoo’s
Emergency Response Team.
1. The responding units will arrive at the Zoo without lights, sirens, or loudspeakers.
2. The responding units will stand by at the designated location outside the Zoo’s perimeter
until contacted by Zoo personnel. The supervisor will serve as a liaison for the
Department until the incident is concluded.
a) The supervisor will contact the Zoo’s Manager on duty between the hours of
0800-1700.
(1) Zoo’s main phone number – 501-666-2406
(2) Zoo’s emergency cell phone number – 501-975-9111
(3) Emergency alternate cell phone number – 501-366-0441
b) After 1700 hours, the supervisor will contact after-hours Zoo personnel.
(1) Zoo’s main phone number – 501-339-3430
(2) A radio can be used on the Zoo’s channel (A1) until cell phone
communication has been established.

G.O. DANGEROUS ANIMAL SITUATIONS AT THE LITTLE ROCK ZOO GENERAL ORDERS
c) Communications and the supervisor responding will monitor the City Common
channel, for information purposes only, until the incident is concluded.
3. If the Zoo staff determines it is necessary to evacuate humans from all or part of the Zoo,
the supervisor assigned may request additional officers to respond to the scene.
4. Officers will only enter Zoo grounds when requested by Zoo personnel.
III. Human Intrusion into Dangerous Animal Enclosures
A. The Zoo’s Emergency Response Team is responsible for handling emergencies involving
unauthorized human intrusion into animal environments. In many situations, Zoo staff may be able
to rescue a human without having to use immobilization drugs or firearms and this Department
may or may not be notified.
B. In the event that the Department is requested to respond, a call will be placed to 9-1-1 and
Communications will immediately dispatch a patrol unit and a supervisor to a location specified by
Zoo personnel. The supervisor will make contact with the appropriate personnel and assess the
situation. Officers will only enter Zoo grounds when requested by Zoo personnel.
1. When the Zoo’s Emergency Response Team is engaged, officers will not enter into
animal enclosures to assist with control or termination of animals, or the rescue of
unauthorized persons inside the habitat.
2. If the Zoo’s Emergency Response Team is unavailable to respond, officers may enter the
grounds and animal enclosures to rescue the unauthorized person(s).
a) Though every effort should be made to corral and separate the animal(s) from
the intruder and other human beings prior to extraction, officers may take any
action necessary, including the use of deadly force against the animal, to protect
human life.
IV. Dangerous Animal Escapes – Off Zoo Grounds
A. Should a dangerous animal escape Zoo grounds into the community, a 9-1-1 call will be placed by
Zoo personnel as soon as the escape is discovered. Communications will dispatch a patrol unit and
a supervisor to the scene. Responding officers will be responsible for the following:
1. Protecting the public; and,
2. Assisting with the search, recapture, immobilization and/or termination of the animal.
B. As the Zoo’s Emergency Response Team has specialized training in specific animal behavior and
methods of animal control and capture, the officers and the Zoo’s personnel will form teams for a
search of the area when possible and meet at a location in the area where the animal was last seen.
C. Responding officers should be aware that the Zoo’s Emergency Response Team will be dressed in
civilian clothes and will be armed with weapons loaded with both tranquilizers and live
ammunition. Personnel with tranquilizer guns will wear a yellow vest, and firearms team
personnel will wear an orange vest.

1. Officers will also be utilized for traffic control and to keep citizens out of the area where
the animal was last seen.
D. Officers are authorized to destroy any animal presenting a clear and immediate danger to any
person outside of the Zoo grounds.

GENERAL ORDER
G. O. 324 CITY WIDE CRIME CAMERA SYSTEM

I. Purpose and Definitions
A. The purpose of this policy is to set guidelines and regulate the use of the video surveillance system also
known as the City Wide Crime Camera System by personnel of the Little Rock Police Department. The
policy is only intended to regulate the use of overt video surveillance systems utilized in public areas.
The objectives of this program include, but are not limited to:
1. Enhancing public safety;
2. Preventing/deterring crime and public disorder;
3. Reducing the fear of crime;
4. Identifying criminal activity and suspects;
5. Identifying and gathering evidence; and,
6. Improving the allocation and deployment of police resources.
B. In this Order, “Crime Camera System” shall mean all elements of the City Wide Crime Camera System
equipment.
C. City Wide Crime Camera System viewing equipment will be assigned to each Division as designated by
the Chief of Police. Installation and deployment of all equipment will fall under the responsibilities of
the Special Investigations Division Intelligence Section-Technical Intelligence Unit. All cameras and
viewing centers will be deployed at the direction of the Office of the Chief of Police.
D. For the purpose of this Order, “Supervisor” shall mean personnel of the rank of Sergeant or above
supervising any police officer using the Crime Camera System. In the absence of a supervisor, this shall
mean the individual assigned to the operation and supervision of the equipment during a given time.
II. Responsibilities
A. The Little Rock Police Department will be responsible for the overall control and security of video
surveillance systems designated as the sole property of the Department. The Special Investigations
Division Commander will be responsible for the overall control and security of the City Wide Crime
Camera System. This policy does not apply to other camera systems the Department may have access
to but does not control. These would include systems such as school district cameras, traffic control
cameras, cameras owned by private entities or cameras controlled by other law enforcement agencies
or city departments. The Department will not be responsible for the shared monitoring of any private
camera systems nor allow private citizens shared monitoring of Police Department systems. This rule
will not apply to sharing images with other law enforcement agencies. Any law enforcement agency
wishing to engage in sharing images must adhere to this policy.

GENERAL ORDER G. O. 324 CITY WIDE CRIME CAMERA SYSTEM
B. Numerous court cases have been decided regarding the police use of video surveillance. The most
significant of these was Katz v. United States, 389 U.S. 347 (1967), which held that people have a
Fourth Amendment right to privacy in those areas where there is a reasonable expectation of privacy.
This case set the standard that allows recording of events that occur in public spaces where there is not
a reasonable expectation of privacy. The Little Rock Police Department believes the use of video
surveillance cameras can withstand legal scrutiny provided the cameras are focused on public areas
and the images, both real and stored, are not disseminated improperly. Title 1 of the Electronic
Communications Privacy Act of 1966 (16 U.S.C. Section 2510) restricts the ability of police
departments to capture audio signals without a warrant. The Crime Camera System used will not have
the ability to capture or record audio. The Little Rock Police Department will comply with all
applicable local, state and federal laws regarding the use of surveillance cameras.
III. Principles of Operation
A. The following principles will govern the procedures that will be utilized with the City Wide Crime
Camera System.
1. Personnel monitoring the Crime Camera System will be appropriately supervised and trained
in the responsible use of the system. Any deviation from this policy may result in disciplinary
action and/or criminal or civil liability.
2. Supervisors in charge of personnel assigned to monitor the cameras will be thoroughly trained
in all applicable laws and best practices regarding the appropriate use of the Crime Camera
System. Supervisors will perform random audits of the monitoring personnel to ensure
procedures are being followed. These audits will consist of both real time monitoring and
retrieving stored data for review.
3. Data obtained and stored will be used exclusively for legitimate law enforcement purposes.
4. Monitoring will be in compliance with all existing racial profiling prohibitions and sexual
harassment policies. Unless observing specific suspects with known descriptions, personnel
will not monitor or record based on specifics of race or gender classifications.
5. Monitoring is prohibited in areas or spaces not open to the public and where persons have a
reasonable expectation of privacy.
6. The cameras will be mounted in an overt posture and clearly marked with the word “Police”
and a visible blue light.
7. The storage of images will be on a secure server in a secured area with restricted access. Only
authorized personnel will have access and be permitted to retrieve images from the Crime
Camera System. The storage system server will retain images for a period of ten (10) days.
Images will be purged on a daily basis to ensure space is available to capture new data.
8. The retention of and storage of this data as evidence will be in accordance with Departmental
policy. Any images retrieved and stored for investigative purposes will follow standard
evidentiary procedures and retention requirements in place per the Rules of Criminal
Procedures and Departmental policy. If the images are transferred to other electronic media
devices (thumb drives, DVD’s, external hard drives) they will be stored as evidence and placed
in the Property Room per Departmental policy.
9. All external requests for access to or for copies of video data will be forwarded through the
Chain of Command to the Office of the Chief of Police. The release of images will be governed
by all applicable Freedom of Information laws. Some images may be exempt from release
under the open records laws if they deal with detection, investigation or prosecution of a
crime.

GENERAL ORDERS G. O. 324 CITY WIDE CRIME CAMERA SYSTEM
IV. Procedures
A. The following procedures will be utilized with the City Wide Crime Camera System.
1. At the beginning of each shift, the supervisors will check to ensure the system is working and
recording properly.
2. Review of camera images at remote locations, such as desktop computers, will be restricted
and require password access.
3. Crime Camera System cameras will not be used to target any specific group of persons or
person because of race, gender, religion, disability, sexual orientation, national origin or
other classifications protected by law. The only exceptions are to observe suspected criminal
activity or when a specific suspect description is known.
4. A log will be maintained by monitoring personnel to record events where the cameras were
used in the initiation or furtherance of an investigation, to observe suspicious activity, direct
officers to a location, or any other use determined significant by the supervisor in charge. This
log will specifically note any arrests resulting from camera activity.
5. Personnel assigned to monitor the cameras are expected to use the equipment in a proactive
fashion and actively attempt to detect suspicious or criminal activity.
B. Personnel will utilize this equipment for Departmental use only.

GENERAL ORDER
G. O. 325 LICENSE PLATE READER (LPR)

09-01-2015 DEPARTMENTAL NEW G. O. 325
I. Purpose
The purpose of this policy is to provide employees of the Little Rock Police Department with
guidelines for application and use of license plate readers (LPR), management of LPR data, and
maintenance of LPR equipment.
II. Policy Statement
It is the policy of the Little Rock Police Department to use license plate readers to enhance law
enforcement’s ability to detect violations of law, recover stolen property, locate missing persons,
apprehend fugitives, assist in investigations, and other tasks in accordance with procedures and
guidelines set forth in this policy. Additionally, data captured from LPRs will be used properly as
defined herein.
III. Definitions
LPR: Automated license plate reader with mobile or fixed cameras.
LPR System: The LPR and all associated equipment and databases.
Hot List: Any database that contains lists of license plate numbers that are of interest to police
personnel, such as those associated with vehicles and/or license plates that have been stolen,
wanted for specific crimes, or those that are associated with, or may assist with the identification
of, suspects involved in criminal activity. This will also include data held by the Office of Motor
Vehicles, the Arkansas Crime Information Center including without limitation the Arkansas Crime
Information Center’s Missing Persons database, the National Crime Information Center, and the
Federal Bureau of Investigation Kidnapping and Missing Persons database.
LPR Data: Data obtained by an LPR from license plates that were read by the device, including
potential images of the plate and the vehicle on which it is displayed, the date and time, and
information regarding the location of the police vehicle in which the LPR is installed, and any
other data captured by or derived from any automatic license plate reader system, and, which may
be stored on the department’s computer servers.
Hit: LPR read matched to a license plate that has previously been uploaded on a departmental
“Hot List”.
IV. Procedures
A. General
1. Only authorized LPR systems owned or provided by the department shall be used.

GENERAL ORDER G. O. 325 LICENSE PLATE READER (LPR)
2. LPR will be used only by employees who have been trained in the operation and use of the
LPR System.
3. Mobile LPRs will be assigned to the Field Services Divisions, but will be available upon
request to provide assistance to other divisions.
B. Equipment
1. All LPR equipment will be installed and removed, by a manufacturer-approved

service center.
2. Any malfunctions or operational issues with the LPR system will be reported to
a supervisor. The supervisor will contact the Technology and Equipment
Section and a Help Desk ticket will be submitted to the Little Rock Information
Technology (LRIT) Department if needed.
3. Daily equipment operations
a. Visual inspection of mobile exterior cameras for cleanliness, damage,

or unauthorized alterations.
b. Download the most current data file of stolen and “of interest”
vehicles containing all the current ACIC information if not downloaded
automatically by the LPR system.
c. Manually add any license plate numbers that are “of interest” but not
included in the file downloads.
C. LPR Operation
1. LPRs may be used during regular patrol duties, special operations or details
such as high crime area patrols, STEP activities, directed patrols, assisting in
criminal investigations, and other activities as approved by the Chief of Police,
or his designee.
2. Upon receiving a “hit”, the mobile LPR operator will visually verify the
displayed information matches the subject license plate (i.e. correct letters,
numbers, state of issue, and any other verifiable information).Upon verifying the
alert is valid, the mobile LPR operator shall take appropriate action based upon
the type of hit in accordance with training, policy, and law.
D. LPR Data
1. All LPR data will be uploaded to the LPR servers periodically based upon the
system parameters but at least once per month.
a. LPR data will be maintained no longer than seven (7) days on the
mobile LPRs, fixed LPRs, or 150 days on the LPR server, and then
automatically purged by the system.

GENERAL ORDERS G. O. 325 LICENSE PLATE READER (LPR)
(1) Any LPR data that involves a hit, from which an enforcement action, an
investigation, or a prosecution resulted, will be added to the case file
and maintained therein until no longer needed.
(2) LPR data kept for the reasons stated above will be destroyed at the
conclusion of an investigation that does not result in criminal charges
being filed or upon completion of any criminal action undertaken in the
matter involving the captured plate data.
2. The Crime Analyst of the division of which the LPR is assigned shall compile monthly
statistical data to be included on the monthly Divisional Report. The Crime Analyst shall
forward a complete report every six (6) months to the Crime Analyst Supervisor. The
Crime Analyst Supervisor shall combine the reports for all the Divisions into a report for
the general public to review. The Crime Analyst Supervisor shall forward this report to
the Public Information Officer.
a. The statistical report shall be kept in the Public Information Office for eighteen
(18) months and be accessible to the public upon request.
b. The report shall include:
(1) The number of license plates scanned;
(2) The names of all lists against which captured plate data were checked;
(3) For each check of captured plate data against a list:
i. The number of confirmed matches;
ii. The number of matches that upon further investigation did not
correlate to an alert;
iii. The number of matches that resulted in arrest and

prosecution.
(4) LPR operators will be required to submit an Officer’s Report at the end
of each shift that will include this information required for this report
that occurred on the officer’s shift. This officer’s report will be turned
in to their supervisor for review. The supervisor will forward the
report to the Crime Analyst in their division.
3. LPR data maintained on the LPR servers will be accessed for criminal justice reasons
only, by those employees authorized by the Chief of Police, or his/her designee, and who
have been issued a username and password for access.
4. LPR Data captured by the department’s LPRs may be shared with other law enforcement
agencies if evidence of an offense is indicated.

GENERAL ORDER
G. O. 326 CERTIFICATION OF U VISA-

NON-IMMIGRANT STATUS (FORM I-918, SUPPLEMENT B)

A. The purpose of this General Order is to establish guidelines and procedures for officers who
receive requests for a U Visa Certification (Form I-918, Supplement B). This General Order also
specifies the certifying officials designated by the Chief of Police who will sign Form I-918,
Supplement B.
B. It is the policy of this police department that the Assistant Chief of the Executive Bureau, the
Assistant Chief of the Investigative Bureau and the Captain of the Major Crimes Division are
designated to issue U Visa Certification on behalf of the Chief of Police by completing Form I-
918, Supplement B.
C. It is also the policy of the Little Rock Police Department to assist immigrant crime victims with
their U Visa applications if they cooperate with agency officials.
II. Definitions
A. “Qualifying criminal activity” is defined by statute to be “activity involving one or more of the
following or any similar activity in violation of Federal, State, or local criminal law.” The statute
also includes the attempt, conspiracy, or solicitation to commit any of the crimes listed below:
Abduction Abusive Sexual Contact Rape

Blackmail Domestic Violence Extortion
False Imprisonment Felonious Assault Unlawful Criminal Restraint
Incest Involuntary Servitude Kidnapping
Manslaughter Murder Obstruction of Justice
Peonage Female Genital Mutilation Witness Tampering
Prostitution Sexual Assault Sexual Exploitation
Slave Trade Torture Trafficking
Perjury Being Held Hostage Other Related Crimes
B. “Any Similar Activity” refers to other criminal activity when the similarities are substantial and
the nature and elements of the criminal activity are comparable.
C. U non immigrant status Certification (Form I-918, Supplement B) is commonly referred to as U

Visa.
III. Procedures
Upon request for a U Visa certification and before completing a Form I-918, Supplement B (a request for a
U Visa certification), the certifying official shall have verified the following:
GENERAL ORDERS 326-1 LITTLE ROCK POLICE

DEPARTMENT
GENERAL ORDER G. O. 326 CERTIFICATION OF U VISA-
NON-IMMIGRANT STATUS (FORM I-918, SUPPLEMENT B)
A. The noncitizen was or is:
1. A victim of a criminal activity (listed in Part II-A above) that took place in the United States
or its territories or occurred outside the United States but violates U.S. extraterritorial law;
or
2. The spouse or under-21-year-old child of a victim who is deceased because of murder or

manslaughter, or who is incompetent or incapacitated; or
3. The parents and unmarried under-18-year-old siblings of an under-21-year-old victim who is

deceased because of murder or manslaughter, or who is incompetent or incapacitated.
B. The noncitizen has been, is being, or is likely to be helpful to the investigation. This department’s
policy describes the victim as being helpful when he/she:
1. Possesses information about a qualifying criminal activity; and
2. Demonstrates cooperation during the detection or investigation of that criminal activity, even
if the investigation is not completed.
C. When a certification is based on a prior investigation or a criminal case that has been closed or
suspended, or when a statute of limitations has passed, the certification shall be completed after the
above verification has been conducted.
D. No request for certification will be accepted unless it is made on the proper U.S. Citizenship and
Immigration Services form (Form I-918, Supplement B) and has been completed by the referring legal
entity (such as a private attorney, nonprofit organization, or victim).
E. The request for certification shall be completed within 30 days from the time it was presented to this
department.
F. All requests for Form I918, Supplement B certifications presented to this Department shall be
forwarded to the designated certifying officials.
G. The certifying official may contact the VAWA Unit of the U.S. Citizenship and Immigration Services to
report the U Visa applicant’s failure to continue cooperating with the Department only when the
failure to cooperate is considered unreasonable. To determine whether failure to cooperate is
unreasonable, officials should review and consider the victim’s history of abuse and victimization, and
any threats the victim has experienced or is experiencing.
IV. Additional Considerations
Department policy authorizes its members to distribute to any crime victim who may be a noncitizen an
informational flyer describing immigration relief and services available to immigrant crime victims.

GENERAL ORDER
G. O. 327 INTERACTIONS WITH TRANSGENDER, INTERSEX AND GENDER NON-CONFORMING

INDIVIDUALS

I. General
A. This Order establishes Departmental guidelines for the appropriate treatment of transgender,
intersex and gender non-conforming (TIGN) individuals who come into contact with members of
the Little Rock Police Department.
B. The Little Rock Police Department is committed to working with all diverse communities which it
serves, including the transgender community, with fairness and dignity. Employees of the Little
Rock Police Department shall interact with all citizens, including the transgender community in a
manner that is professional, respectful, and courteous. Employees shall not exhibit any bias,
prejudice or discrimination against a TIGN individual or group.
II. Definitions
Adopted Name: Non-birth name that a transgender individual uses in self-reference (this may or may not be
the individual’s legal name).
Cross-Dresser: A term that refers to people whose dress is typically associated with the opposite sex.
Gender Identity or Expression: The actual or perceived identity or behavior of a person as being male or
female.
Gender: An individual’s biological or anatomical identity as male or female.
Intersex: A group of conditions where there is a discrepancy between the external genitalia and the internal
genitalia (testes and ovaries).
Sexual Orientation: An individual’s enduring romantic, emotional and/or sexual attraction to individuals of
a particular gender.
Transgender Individual: A person whose gender identity differs from his/her assigned gender.
Transsexual: A person whose personal sense of his/her gender conflicts with his/her anatomical sex at birth.
Female-to-Male (“FTM”): A person who transitions from “female to male,” meaning a person who was
assigned female at birth, but identifies and lives as a male. An FTM individual should be addressed using
the masculine pronouns (e.g. he, him, his), regardless of surgical status.
Male-to-Female (“MTF”): A person who transitions from “male to female,” meaning a person who was
assigned male at birth, but identifies and lives as a female. An MTF individual should be addressed using
the feminine pronouns (e.g. she, her, hers), regardless of surgical status.

GENERAL ORDERS G. O. 327 Interactions with TIGN
III. Forms of Address
A. Employees shall address transgender individuals by the individual’s adopted name, even if the
individual has not received legal recognition of the adopted name. In addressing or discussing a
transgender individual, employees shall use the pronouns appropriate for that person’s gender
identity (e.g. she, her or hers for MTF; he, him or his for FTM). If employees are uncertain about
which pronouns are appropriate, then the employee should respectfully ask the individual.
B. Employees shall not use language that a reasonable person would consider demeaning or
derogatory, in particular, language aimed at a person’s actual or perceived gender identity, gender
expression or sexual orientation.
C. When a person self-identifies as being a transgender person, employees shall not question this
identity except for articulable reasons, i.e., the person’s gender being related to a crime.
D. Employees shall not disclose an individual’s TIGN identity to other arrestees, the public or non-
departmental employees, absent a proper law enforcement purpose.
IV. Calls for Service
A. Calls for service or complaints generated by transgender individuals shall be addressed and
investigated in a manner that is consistent with all departmental policies. No employee shall fail to
respond to a call for service based on the gender identity or gender expression of the caller.
B. Employees shall not consider a person’s gender identification as reasonable suspicion or prima
facie evidence that the individual is or has engaged in a crime.
V. Field Interviews, Pat Downs, and Investigative Contacts
A. Employees shall continue to use standard practices and procedures when conducting field
interviews, pat downs or investigative contacts in a manner that does not unreasonably endanger
themselves or another person.
B. Employees shall not stop, detain, frisk or search any person in whole or in part for the purpose of
determining that person’s gender or in order to call attention to the person’s gender expression.
This limitation does not prevent an officer from following established department procedures
relative to ensuring the proper processing of suspects.
C. Employees will document a transgender individual’s legal name and legal gender on all legal
documents, including but not limited to: citations, information reports, affidavits, or arrest reports.
If the individual utilizes a name other than their legal name, it should be documented as an AKA or
in the alias section.
VI. Prisoner Transportation
A. Whenever possible, a transgender prisoner shall be transported alone. Employees shall ensure that
additional units are called in order to assist with transporting additional transgender individuals.

G. O. 327 Interactions with TGIN LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT
VII. Searches
A. Transgender persons shall not be subject to more invasive search or frisk procedures than non-
transgender persons.
B. All searches of the transgender suspect’s person shall be conducted by two (2) employees of the
gender requested by the transgender suspect, whenever possible. If two (2) employees of the
preferred gender are not available, the search shall nonetheless be conducted by two (2) available
employees. If the suspect does not specify a preference, then the search shall be conducted by
employees of the same gender as the transgender suspect’s gender expression (e.g. FTM prisoner,
expressing no preference, should be searched by a male employee).
C. Requests to remove identity-related items such as prosthetics, clothing, wigs and cosmetic items
shall be consistent with requirements for the removal of similar items for non-TIGN suspects.
VIII. Gender Classification of TIGN Arrestees for Department Purposes
A. A suspect’s gender will be classified as it appears on the individual’s government-issued

identification card. The exception to the government-issued identification card is those suspects
who are post-operative gender reassigned form.
1. Male-to-female shall be processed as female.
2. Female-to-male shall be processed as male.
B. In the event that a government-issued identification card is unavailable, the following criteria will
be used to determine the gender:
1. Has male genitalia, he/she shall be classified as male.
2. Has no male genitalia, he/she shall be classified as female.
C. In the event that there is uncertainty regarding the appropriate classification of a suspect’s gender,
a supervisor shall be consulted for further guidance on the appropriate classification.

GENERAL ORDER
CRIMINAL INTELLIGENCE

08/18/2017 DEPARTMENTAL NEW G.O. 328
I. Purpose
A. It is the purpose of this policy to establish procedures regulating the collection, storage and
distribution of criminal intelligence information relating to criminal and homeland security
activities by members of the Little Rock Police Department. This policy shall apply to all
members of the Little Rock Police Department.
II. Policy
A. The Little Rock Police Department recognizes that intelligence gathering is an essential
element in the duties of any law enforcement agency. When intelligence is gathered, the
information is used to prevent crime, pursue and apprehend offenders, and obtain evidence
necessary for conviction. It is the policy of the Little Rock Police Department to gather
information directed toward specific individuals or organizations where there is reasonable
suspicion (as defined in 28 C.F.R. part 23, section 23.3 c) that the individuals or
organizations may be planning or engaging in criminal activity, and to gather the
information with respect for the rights of those involved, and to disseminate it only to
authorized individuals as defined. While criminal intelligence may be assigned to the
Special Investigations Division, all members of the Little Rock Police Department are
responsible for reporting information that may help identify criminal conspirators and
perpetrators.
B. All information determined to be criminal intelligence shall be maintained in the Little

Rock Police Department’s CrimeNtel Intelligence database.
III. Procedures
A. The criminal intelligence function is a component of the Special Investigations Division,

and shall be under the direct command of the Special Investigations Division Commander.
B. Members of the Little Rock Police Department and departmental equipment may be used
as necessary for the collection of raw data, strategic intelligence, tactical intelligence and
support for overt and covert law enforcement operations. Criminal Intelligence shall in no
way be used to collect information for any reasons not specifically related to crime or
suspected criminal activity.
C. To ensure the legality and integrity of its operations, information is only to be gathered
relative to legitimate investigative objectives relating to the control and prevention of
criminal conduct, and activities that present a threat to the community.
D. The collection of intelligence information shall be strictly limited to information

concerning individuals or groups known to, or suspected of, threatening, planning,
organizing, financing or committing criminal activities that constitute a threat to the City
of Little Rock. Examples of such criminal activity include but are not limited to:

1. Organized crime activity
2. Illegal drug activity
3. Vice related activity
4. Terrorism
5. Gang related activity
6. Activities promoting civil unrest
7. Any other activity that poses a potential threat to the community
E. Evaluation of Information
1. Upon receipt of information in any form, the Special Investigations Intelligence

Unit shall ensure that the following steps are taken:
a) Where possible, information shall be evaluated with respect to reliability

of source and validity of content. While evaluations may not be precise,
this assessment must be made to the degree possible in order to guide
others in using the information. A record shall be kept of the source of
all information where known.
b) Reports and other investigative material and information received by the

Little Rock Police Department, shall remain the property of the
originating agency, but may be retained by this agency. Such reports and
other investigative material and information shall be maintained in
confidence, and no access shall be given to another agency except with
the consent of the originating agency.
c) Analytic material shall be compiled and provided to authorized

personnel as soon as possible where meaningful trends, patterns,
methods, characteristics, or intentions of criminal enterprises or figures
emerge.
F. File Status
1. Intelligence file status will be classified as either “Open” or “Closed,” in

accordance with the following:
a) Open
(1) Intelligence files that are actively being worked will be

designated “Open.” In order to remain open, officers/detectives
working such cases must file intelligence status reports
covering case developments at least every 180 days.

b) Closed
(1) “Closed” intelligence files are those in which investigations

have been completed, where all logical leads have been
exhausted, or where no legitimate law enforcement interest is
served. All closed files must include a final case summary
report prepared by or with the authorization of the lead
investigator.
G. Classification of Intelligence
1. Intelligence files will be classified in order to protect sources, investigations, and

individual’s rights to privacy, as well as to provide a structure that will enable the
Little Rock Police Department control of access to intelligence information.
These classifications shall be reevaluated whenever new information is added to
an existing intelligence file.
a) Restricted
(1) “Restricted” intelligence files include those that contain

information that could adversely affect an ongoing
investigation, create safety hazards for officers, informants, or
others and/or compromise their identities. Restricted
intelligence may only be released by approval of the
Investigations Bureau Chief or his/her designate.
b) Confidential
(1) “Confidential” intelligence is less sensitive than restricted

intelligence. It may be released to departmental personnel
when a need and a right to know has been established by the
Special Investigations Division Commander or his/her
designate.
c) Classified
(1) “Classified” intelligence is less sensitive than confidential

intelligence. It may be accessible by all sworn Little Rock
Police Department personnel who have been granted access to
the Intelligence CrimeNtel database.
d) Unclassified
(1) “Unclassified” intelligence contains information from the news

media, public records, and other sources of a topical nature.
Access is limited to officers/detectives conducting authorized
investigations that necessitate this information.
G. Criminal Intelligence File Security
1. Access to the inquiry function of the CrimeNtel database shall be limited to those
persons authorized by the Special Investigations Division Commander.

2. Access to the entry and modification functions shall be restricted to the Special
Investigations Division Commander or designated Special Investigations
personnel. All submissions made directly into the CrimeNtel database by
personnel other than those authorized by the Special Investigations Division
Commander shall be automatically placed into an electronic “holding bin” where
it shall remain until reviewed by authorized personnel. Only upon review and
release from the electronic holding bin by authorized Special Investigations
personnel will the information become part of the CrimeNtel database.
H. Review and Purge
1. The purpose of the review and purge or review and validate or purge, is to keep
the criminal intelligence information being stored as current and valid. Inaccurate
information or information determined to no longer comply with 28 CFR part 23
must be deleted from the CrimeNtel database.
2. Review and Validation process. 28 CFR part 23 allows a five (5) year retention
of criminal intelligence. The Special Investigations Division will conduct a
review and validation annually. During the review and validation, criminal
intelligence records will be reviewed to determine whether the information can be
updated and the submission re-substantiated.
3. New information can be added to a file that would re-substantiate the reasonable
suspicion at any time and the file could be validated and the retention period
extended.
4. If the record cannot be validated, it must be purged.

GENERAL ORDERS G. O. 329 NARCAN

GENERAL ORDER
NARCAN

11/20/2017 DEPARTMENTAL NEW G.O. 329
I. Purpose
A. It is the purpose of this policy to establish procedures for the carry and use of Narcan
(Naloxone) in an effort to treat opioid overdoses.
II. Policy
A. It is the policy of the Little Rock Police Department to provide its officers access to Narcan,
in the form of a nasal spray, for the purpose of treating another officer who may
inadvertently be exposed to opioids or to any person they may encounter suffering from a
possible opioid drug overdose or exposure.
III. Definitions
A. Narcan: A brand name of Naloxone, a medication used to block the effects of opioids,
especially in overdose.
B. Opioids: Opium like compounds that bind to opioid receptors of the body. Examples of
opioids include but are not limited to: hydrocodone, oxycodone, morphine, codeine, heroin,
and fentanyl.
IV. Procedures
A. Safety
1. Officer and scene safety should be the first priority when responding to a potential
overdose or exposure call. When interacting with any overdose victim, officers
shall exercise universal precautions, ensure the victim is in a safe location, and
remove any potential weapons or dangerous items from the victim’s reach.
Officers should remain alert to the effects of Narcan in the event the victim
becomes hostile or violent.
2. Used Narcan vials shall be turned over to the responding MEMS unit for proper
disposal or packaged in a plastic needle tube, marked with a biohazard label, and
submitted to the Property Room for disposal.
3. Proper care should be taken when storing Narcan kits in vehicles. Narcan kits are
never to be stored in direct sunlight, exposed to extreme heat or allowed to freeze.
Officers shall not leave the kits in their vehicles while they are on vacation or any
extended leave.
B. Use of Narcan

1. When responding to or discovering a possible overdose, officers shall contact the

Communications Center and request or ensure that emergency medical personnel
have been notified and are responding.
2. Officers arriving on scene of a suspected overdose prior to medical personnel shall

first ensure their safety and the safety of the scene, and:
3. Determine if the victim is exhibiting signs of an opioid overdose or evidence

suggests a possible overdose. Symptoms of an opioid overdose include, but are
not limited to:
a) Pale or blue face,
b) Breathing slowed or stopped
c) Heartbeat slowed or stopped
d) Gurgling noises
e) Vomiting
f) Unable to wake or speak
g) Pinpoint pupils
h) Other signs of a possible overdose include the presence of drugs and/or

paraphernalia and witness statements about drug use.
4. Narcan nasal spray may be administered if the officer believes the victim has
overdosed on opioids, or has overdosed on opioids in combination with other
drugs, is unresponsive from apparent drug use but uncertain if opioids were
involved, or appears to have symptoms consistent with opioid exposure.
5. Narcan will be administered into the nostrils of the victim via an atomizer attached
to the Narcan vial. Narcan dosages should be administered in 4.0 mg increments.
6. An initial dose of 4.0 mg will be given to the victim in one nostril. If the victim
does not show a positive response within 3 to 5 minutes, an additional dose of 4.0
mg should be given.
7. If there is still no response from the victim, the same dosage method may be
administered into the other nostril.
8. The maximum dose for each nostril is 4.0 mg.
9. If the victim is not breathing and has no pulse, start CPR.
10. If the victim is breathing, or starts to breathe, place them in a recovery position.
11. Remain with and monitor the victim until medical personnel arrive and assume
responsibility.
12. Notify medical personnel of any observations and actions taken prior to their
arrival, including the number of Narcan doses administered and the approximate
time each dose was given.

V. Reporting
A. When an officer administers a dose of Narcan to any person, the officer shall notify a
supervisor and complete a Narcan Use Form.
1. This form will be completed in addition to any necessary Incident Report. In the
event an Incident Report is not necessary, the Narcan Use Form will suffice to
document the incident.
B. Officers will document in the Narcan Use Form:
1. Observed signs or evidence of opioid overdose;
2. The amount and frequency of Narcan the victim was administered;
3. Whether the victim responded to Narcan, including response symptoms; and
4. Any other relevant information.
C. The completed Narcan Use Form will be forwarded to the Training Division for the
monitoring, evaluation and analysis of Narcan usage.
VI. Replacement
A. The Training Division will be responsible for issuing and storing Narcan dosage units.
B. In the event an officer discovers a Narcan kit is expired or damaged, the officer shall
immediately notify his supervisor who will take the kit out of service. The officer shall
return the expired or damaged kit to the Training Division Quartermaster as soon as
practical for replacement.
VII. Training
A. Training for officers for the usage of Narcan will be administered through the Training
Division prior to being issued Narcan.
B. Annual refresher training will conducted by the Training Division in the usage of Narcan.

Little Rock Police Department General Orders

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Little Rock Police Department General Orders

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Little Rock Police Department

G.O. 100 DEPARTMENTAL PHILOSOPHY

DATE: DISTRIBUTION: REPLACES: NUMBER:

I. Departmental Mission Statement

4. Developing leadership throughout the Department in order to effectively utilize allocated

5. Aggressively responding to criminal activity throughout the City of Little Rock in a

II. Value Statement

GENERAL ORDERS 100-1 LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT

C – Committed to our community

N – Nurture our personnel

E – Ethical treatment for all people

A. Arkansas Statute § 21-2-205.

1. I do solemnly swear (or affirm) that I will support the Constitution of

IV. Code of Ethics

GENERAL ORDERS 100-2 LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT

b) Untruthfulness is a severe violation which is strictly prohibited and may result

B. Code of Ethics for sworn personnel is as follows;

1. As a law enforcement officer, my fundamental duty is to serve mankind, to safeguard

3. I will never act officiously or permit personal feelings, prejudices, animosities or

C. Code of Ethics for civilian personnel is as follows;

2. Realize that wrongdoing betrays the public’s confidence in public services.

3. Even the appearance of wrongdoing should be avoided.

4. Avoid conflicts of interest by refraining from participating in decisions or transactions in

GENERAL ORDERS 100-3 LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT

6. Understand that public service is a responsibility as well as an occupation. We should,

Revisions will be underlined and italicized.

GENERAL ORDERS 100-4 LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT

G.O. 101 GOALS AND OBJECTIVES

DATE: DISTRIBUTION: REPLACES: NUMBER:

C. Organizational Component - A subdivision of the Department, such as a bureau, division, section,

II. Formulation of Goals and Objectives

III. Quarterly Review of Goals and Objectives

GENERAL ORDERS 101- 1 LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT

IV. Departmental Multi-Year Plan.

B. The multi-year plan shall include:

1. Long-term goals and operational objectives;

2. Anticipated workload and population trends;

3. Anticipated personnel levels; and,

4. Anticipated capital improvements and equipment needs.

Additions and revisions are italicized and underlined.

LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT 101- 2 GENERAL ORDERS

G.O. 102 DEPARTMENT JURISDICTION

DATE: DISTRIBUTION: REPLACES: NUMBER:

GENERAL ORDERS 102-1 LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT

a) In the event of an immediate emergency, officers may exercise this authority

b) When Department assistance is otherwise requested, it may be authorized by a

II. Other Jurisdictional Agencies

GENERAL ORDERS 102-2 LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT

Additions and revisions are italicized and underlined

G.O. 103 DEFINITION OF TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS

DATE: DISTRIBUTION: REPLACES: NUMBER:

B. The following definitions shall be applied in all Departmental Orders:

1. Bureau – An element of the Department which is under the command of a designated

2. City – The area within the corporate limits of Little Rock.

3. Civilian employee or civilian personnel - Any non-sworn employee.

4. Commander – A sworn officer of the rank of Lieutenant or higher.

5. Demotion – The reduction of an employee from a position in a higher classification, or

7. Division – An element of the Department which is under the command of a Captain or

8. Dismissal – The involuntary separation of an employee from City employment.

9. District – A geographical area with established boundaries assigned to a police officer.

14. Non-uniformed employee - A civilian employee.

15. Non-uniformed officer - A Departmental Officer in an assignment in which a Police

16. Off-Duty – Anytime an employee is not on-duty as defined in this Order.

GENERAL ORDERS 103- 1 LITTLE ROCK POLICE DEPARTMENT